JP2024045665A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game. [Solution] The game machine is provided with a central passage E160 that is formed so that a predetermined value can be given to a entered ball, and a second distribution passage E16150 that is formed so that a ball that has passed through the distribution passage E150 can move, so that the time required for the ball to enter the central passage E160 can be increased by the ball that has passed through the distribution passage E150 moving through the second distribution passage E16150. In other words, the period during which the ball can be expected to enter the central passage E160 can be extended, and the player's sense of expectation can be heightened. In particular, since a ball that has passed through the second distribution passage E16150 is more likely to enter the central passage E160 than a ball that has passed through the distribution passage E150, the player can feel the excitement of the ball entering the central passage E160 and can follow the ball's whereabouts. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. [Selected Figure] Figure 160

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A gaming machine equipped with a passageway member along which a ball can move is known (Patent Document 1). This prior document discloses a technique for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passageway member).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198607

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the balls that flow down from a designated position on the stage go directly into the winning hole (ball entry hole), which creates a problem in that the game is not very entertaining.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is provided with a passage member formed so that the ball can move, a ball entry means formed so that a predetermined value can be assigned to the entered ball, and a second passage member formed so that the ball that has passed through the passage member can move, and the passage member and the second passage member are formed so that the ball can fall midway along the ball's movement path, and the ball that has passed through the second passage member is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a ball that has passed through the passage member.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, in which the second passage member includes a rolling part in which a ball can roll, and a plurality of projections protruding from the rolling part. or a plurality of recesses recessed in the rolling part.

The gaming machine described in claim 3 is the gaming machine described in claim 1 or 2, and is provided with a displacement means that is configured to displace the passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention, further comprising a second displacement means configured to be able to displace the second passage member and impart a change to the moving direction of the ball.

The gaming machine described in claim 5 is the gaming machine described in claim 4, in which the displacement mode of the passage member by the displacement means is different from the displacement mode of the second passage member by the second displacement means.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine described in claim 2 can increase the interest of the game in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in claim 1.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine described in claim 4 can increase the interest of the game in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in claim 3.

The gaming machine described in claim 5 can increase the interest of the game in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in claim 4.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. A front oblique view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the variable prize winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. An exploded front oblique view of the variable winning device. An exploded rear oblique view of the variable winning device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device. FIG. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in Figure 16. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. This is a diagram showing the changes over time in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member of the distribution device in the first round for each jackpot type. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; A front view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. A rear view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40. FIG. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate performance state. A rear view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an extended state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operating unit in the extended state. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the amount and angle of displacement of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotating member; 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams showing changes in angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. 28. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. be. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an up-and-down reversal member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically inverting member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. (a) to (c) are front views of the production device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in a time series. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board in a second embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 78A is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXa in FIG. 78, and FIG. 78B is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXb in FIG. A cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77. 78 is a sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in Figure 78. 77(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame at part LXXXIVa in FIG. 81, and FIG. 77(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame at line LXXXIVb-LXXXIVb in FIG. 78 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. FIG. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of a lower frame according to a third embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the lower frame. FIG. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 93, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. 93. 93 is a sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 92. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCVIII-XCVIII in Figure 94. 95 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. 94. FIG. 93 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 92. FIG. 93 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 92. FIG. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. 102(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CIII-CIII in FIG. 102(b). FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a top view of the dish member in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member taken along the line CVIIIb-CVIIIb in FIG. 108(a), and (c) is a top view of the dish member in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the dish member taken along the CVIIIc-CVIIIc line in a). (a) is a sectional view of the lower frame in the sixth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along the XCIX-XCIX line in FIG. 94, and (b) is a sectional view of the lower frame in the seventh embodiment. , corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. A front view of the game board in the eighth embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIIIa in FIG. 116, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow CXVIIIb in FIG. 116. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. 4A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. 119(a) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXIIa-CXXIIa in Figure 115, (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXIIb-CXXIIb in Figure 115, and (c) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in Figure 119. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of a lower frame in a ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame in the tenth embodiment. 23A and 23B are enlarged partial rear views of a lower frame in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 12 is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame in the twelfth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame in a 13th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. 13A and 13B are enlarged cross-sectional views of a portion of the lower frame. 23A to 23C are partial enlarged rear views of a lower frame in a fourteenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame in the fifteenth embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CXXXIIIa-CXXXIIIa in FIG. 132(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 132(b). It is a diagram. 120 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119. It is a front view of the game board in a 16th embodiment. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow CXLIIIa in FIG. 141, (b) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow CXLIIIb in FIG. 141 is a sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc of FIG. (a) is a front view of the lower frame with the front member omitted, (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame with the rear cover member omitted, and (c) is a top view of the lower frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CXLVa-CXLVa in FIG. 144(c), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CXLVb-CXLVb in FIG. 145(a). is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame. (a) is a front view of the lower frame in a state where illustration of the front member is omitted, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame in a state where illustration of the back side cover member is omitted. (c) is a top view of the lower frame. 146(c), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa in FIG. 146(c), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXLVIIb-CXLVIIb in FIG. 147(a), and (c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame. 145 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame in the seventeenth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CXLVa-CXLVa in FIG. 144. FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the distribution passage, (b) is a front view of the distribution passage as seen in the direction of arrow CXLIXb in Fig. 149 (a), and (c) is a front perspective view of the distribution passage in Fig. 149 (b) FIG. 149(d) is a bottom view of the distribution passage when viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIXc in FIG. 149(b), and FIG. 145 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the eighteenth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line CXLVa-CXLVa in FIG. 144. 23A is a front view of the lower frame in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a rear view of the lower frame. 23A is a front view of the lower frame in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a rear view of the lower frame. 20(a) is a front view of the lower frame in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 20(a) is a front view of the lower frame in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 21(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 21st embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 22nd embodiment, and (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the 23rd embodiment. (a) is a partial top view of a lower frame in a 24th embodiment, and (b) is a partial top view of a lower frame in a 25th embodiment. (a) is a front oblique view of the sorting passage, (b) is a view of the sorting passage in the 27th embodiment, viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage, (c) is a view of the sorting passage in the 28th embodiment, viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage, (d) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the sorting passage in the 29th embodiment, and (e) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the sorting passage in the 30th embodiment. 3A is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the thirty-first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the thirty-second embodiment. FIG.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 71, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that a reach is being reached just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). (not shown) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80 etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and allows the player to see various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are accessed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws, etc. Fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, it becomes possible to shield various structures disposed from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60 from being visible to the player.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while also displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a seven-segment display device. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, a "15R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "4R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of In the high probability state (during certain variation) in this embodiment, the jackpot probability increases for a predetermined number of variations (in this embodiment, 100 variations), and the probability of winning a second symbol (described later) increases, resulting in a second This includes a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100. During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in the time saving state for a period of 100 fluctuations.

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning hole 140 is released is changed, compared to the normal period. It will be set for a long time. When the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the ball enters the second prize opening 140 more easily than when the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 140a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. It may be possible to change only the probability to increase it compared to normal.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a variable display, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the back case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window 60a of the base plate 60. It is arranged. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and back. has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower portions are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning lotteries can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning lottery, giving the player more opportunities to have the electric device 140a of the second winning slot 140 open. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 140.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 140a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 140a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the probability is low or high. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot occurring when a jackpot occurs is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning hole 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning hole 140.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured symmetrically, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" and for the second winning slot 140 with a "left hit". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is shot.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including the time when a power outage occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). A solenoid 209 is connected to the solenoid 209, which consists of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 connects to these via the input/output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to the device.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631, 731, 782, 861.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be explained. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. In FIG. 6(a), the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b is illustrated in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the ball from flowing down to the specific winning opening 65a, and in FIG. The opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state in which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened to allow the ball to flow down. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The variable winning device 65 is formed so that when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 65b is inclined downward toward the rear side so that it can receive a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b and guide it to the specific winning opening 65a.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left and right center of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b are limited to those that deviate from the electric accessory 140a and drift down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the left and right center portions, but mainly occurs in the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

However, this does not apply to the placement of the ball after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b. In other words, depending on how the ball flows after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, it may end up being placed closer to the center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric prop 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening and closing plate 65b side (it is curved so that it juts out downward from the lower front end that faces the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the rear side), so that the degree to which a ball that bounces near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b collides with the front design member 141 and loses momentum can be reduced. This increases the likelihood that the ball will be positioned near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

Note that the center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either in the front or the rear. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in side view is arranged at the lower front side, thereby making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening/closing plate 65b side. Further, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the left and right widths become smaller toward the bottom at the left and right ends, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the balls that have landed on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without leakage. On the near side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled left and right outward by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b on the right and left sides of the inclined flow downward surface 163a1, guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined downward flow surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion that extends forward and inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is shifted rearward as it moves inward to the left and right.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided downward along the slope of the slope, so that the ball can be guided down the slope. 163a1 with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts its closing operation with a ball riding on the opening/closing plate 65b, even if the ball is located on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will not continue. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, if the flow of the ball deteriorates and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball that is swept backward due to the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b bounces off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction of opening the opening/closing plate 65b (in the front side), it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b will open unintentionally or otherwise malfunction.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b closes by a rising motion. That is, the ball that landed on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning hole 65a by the operation of the opening/closing plate 65b, so it does not come close to the left or right position of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, but instead lands on the opening/closing plate 65b. The balls being ridden are almost always guided to the specific winning hole 65a.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged closer to the left and right outer sides or there are a large number of balls, there is a possibility that the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will be delayed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface part 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate part 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, so that the flow of balls guided to the specific prize opening 65a can be retained. Therefore, the speed of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be maintained.

Moreover, instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed into a flat shape (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b flows backward, and then flows in the left and right direction due to the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, collision of balls on the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily avoided.

In other words, even if multiple balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will first move backward in parallel, preventing the balls from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to when the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped with a left-right inclined surface like the lower surface 163a, which creates a left-right flow in the rolling balls, the possibility of the balls moving irregularly on the opening/closing plate 65b can be reduced, making it possible to prevent unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with contact surface portions 163a3 that come into contact with the rotating tips at both left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby increasing the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening and closing plate 65b. There is. The contact surface portions 163a3 are formed as a pair of left and right sides, and are designed to have a shape that matches the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact, so that the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily stabilized. In addition, by receiving the load at the time of contact on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, so durability can be improved.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 and has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening/closing plate 65b disposed opposite to the opening/closing plate 65b with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed in front of the contact surface 163a3, and is configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface 163a3 is chipped, it may become impossible to maintain the repeatability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front and rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 This is intended to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. Thereby, it is possible to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 contacts the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal, there may be a disadvantage that loads are easily accumulated. However, since the area over which the load is distributed can be increased, the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to contact with the opening and closing plate 65b can be reduced.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the game ball that is in the process of being received by the opening and closing plate 65b can be configured to be received in a manner that pushes it into the opening and closing plate 65b due to the shape of the front design member 141 described above.

That is, in the state in which the ball is being accepted (for example, in a state in which it is sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific prize opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball does not match the lower shape of the front design member 141. When it touches, it can be made to flow down inside the specific winning a prize opening 65a by being guided by its curved shape. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where a ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming section 336, making it easier to ensure visibility to the third flow path forming section 336. can do.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b, so when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b is arranged on the right and left sides of the electric accessory 140a. limited to.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided by the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to the left and right outer positions than the electric accessory 140a. Thereby, on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a, it is possible to secure visibility at the left and right inner positions than the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration downstream of the specific winning port 65a (the side where the balls flow after passing through the specific winning port 65a) will be described. Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that Figures 7 and 8 show the configuration arranged on the base plate 60 with all components removed except for the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, there are balls that have entered the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the general winning hole 63 (see FIG. 2). A collection gutter 150 is provided in which a path for flowing the ball to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

The collecting gutter 150 has a grooved portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the grooved portion that faces the base plate 60 is open. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge passage is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path section 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning opening 64, a second flow path section 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning opening 140, and a plurality of third flow path sections 153 that form flow paths on the left and right for balls that enter the general winning openings 63 located on both the left and right sides.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left direction, and the second flow path section 152 slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right direction. It is configured as a flow path. The third flow path portion 153 is configured as a flow path extending below the general winning a prize opening 63.

Therefore, when viewed from the front, although the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 are arranged at the left and right center positions of the gaming area, the flow of the balls that enter the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is , are moved from the center position to the left and right sides by the collecting gutter 150. Thereby, a space can be provided below the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and this space can be used to arrange the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later.

Figure 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300, and Figure 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. Note that in Figures 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, and other parts are omitted, and other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, so that the base of the base plate 60 can be seen. Also, for ease of explanation, Figure 9 shows the center frame 86 assembled to the base plate 60.

The following describes the fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. The variable winning device 65 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

In the distribution device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable prize winning device 65 at the upper part, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right parts. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the collection gutter 150, the presence or absence of the distribution device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as they are, whether the distribution device 300 is provided or the distribution device 300 is not provided. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 can be used in common.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path along which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profits obtained by the player are controlled to change based on the detection results of the balls flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, and details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, a front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161, a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a, an intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and intervening as a connecting part with the sorting device 300, and a state switching device 165 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether or not electricity is applied.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, the rear side of the fixed member 161 is three-dimensional, projecting toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that abuts the base plate 60 on the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to accommodate this boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. In other words, the boundary portion 161a is the portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary part 161a, there is a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate-like shape that is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. and a pair of left and right extended support plates 161b having a substantially T-shape, including a longitudinally elongated plate-like part extending downward at a midway position of the laterally elongated plate-like part.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of the sorting device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support portion 161c protruding from the horizontally elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support portion 161d protruding from the vertically elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, and the protruding support portion 161e protruding from the upper surface of the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a function as parts that support the sorting device 300, and will be described in detail later.

Inside the boundary part 161a, a symmetrical protruding part 161f protruding in a symmetrical shape below the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a contacts the balls flowing down the distribution device 300 and guides the balls flowing down. Has a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened parts 161h having internal threads for screwing fastening screws inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary part 161a.

The fastened portion 161i, which has a female thread portion for screwing the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is arranged outside the border portion 161a at the cut (left and right center position) of the border portion 161a. That is, among the through holes formed in the base plate 60, there is a connecting portion between the through hole for passing through the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for passing through the second prize opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), the fastened portion 161i is disposed.

The front design component 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape to ensure a uniform distance from the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1). The balls are allowed to flow down within the area between the rear side of the front design component 162 and the front side of the fixed component 161.

The rear side of the front design member 162 is provided with a number of fastening portions 162a that are arranged in positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and have female threads that allow the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g to be screwed in, and a number of extension portions 162b, 162c that extend to the rear side in a shape that covers the fastening portions 162a from above.

The extending parts 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened part 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened part 162a. can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the downward flow path of the ball. That is, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b (two locations on the left and right center sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outer sides. It is possible to suppress the ball riding on the portion 162b from flowing to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side. That is, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162c (two locations on both the left and right ends) extending to the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right inwards, so that the ball flowing on the extending portions 162c is The downstream path can be summarized as the downstream path of the ball riding on the extension portion 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the range in which the falling balls are placed (increasing the density of ball placement) compared to the number of falling balls, and to reduce the area where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (where the falling path is (a space that is not constructed) can be secured.

The front design component 162 shown in FIG. 11 is blank and has good visibility on the back side, but the front design component 162 does not have to be blank. For example, the front side of the front design component 162 may be decorated by attaching a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or grooves may be dug in the front design component 162 with a geometric pattern, and the geometric pattern may be made visible by shining light into the grooves. The front design component 162 may also be blank or have the above-mentioned decorations added, and then be configured to be opaque.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material in a horizontally elongated frame (or box) shape with the front side open, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, the lower surface portion 163a forming a flow-down surface inside the frame, the ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, a plurality of insertion holes 163c arranged at a position matching the fastening portion 161h of the fixed member 161 and through which fastening screws fastened to the fastening portion 161h are inserted from the back side, a pair of fastening portions 163d arranged on the left and right central sides as female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and a plurality of fastening portions 163e having female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outward from the left and right central portions as apexes, and is provided with an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward to the rear at a position one step lower than the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces, so that a ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that is engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

The intermediate member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear, a pair of insertion holes 164b formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 163d of the receiving member 163, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is disposed, a pair of fastening portions 164d formed at both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a with female threaded portions capable of receiving fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300, and an insertion hole 164e formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 161i of the fixed member 161.

The light emitting board 164c is disposed with the surface on which the LED is arranged facing obliquely forward and upward, and when viewed from the front, the light emitting board 164c is positioned directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 6), and the second winning prize It is placed directly below the mouth 140. Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of view of a player who desires to enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and gazes at the spot diagonally backward and downward.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light emitting board 164c to light up when the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a The player can easily understand whether or not a problem has occurred.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. This allows the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to be more firmly fixed than when the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened to each other. In addition, the arrangement of the sorting device 300, which is connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164, can be stabilized, so that the relative positional deviation between the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws are inserted into the fastening part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, a lower case part 165b formed in a deep box shape with a plurality of openings for wiring and heat dissipation and an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, a sliding part 165d that engages with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c and slides together with the plunger, a rotating part 165e that is rotatably supported by the lower case part 165b in such an arrangement that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case part 165b and rotates with the sliding displacement of the sliding part 165d, and an upper cover part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted into a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating part 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped part can engage with it, and the transmission protrusion 65c that protrudes rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b fits into this recess and engages with it. The transmission protrusion 65c is positioned eccentrically from the metal shaft rod part 65d that forms the rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. By configuring it in this way, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused to occur in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating part 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted. , a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted; A substrate 350 is housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED on the front side, and a substrate 350 is housed at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and changes its state depending on whether or not it is energized. a state switching device 360 that is configured to be able to switch; a slide displacement member 370 that is disposed below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched; An insertion hole is disposed below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and is formed through the hole so that a fastening screw screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough. and a lower member 380 having 381.

Before describing the details of the configuration of each part, we will provide an overview of the function of the sorting device 300. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow.

The balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b flow down in the following order: inside the upper member 310, flow path forming parts 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. However, the balls flowing down from the lower member 380 are discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the distribution device 300 are configured to be visible to the player, and depending on the way they flow down, it is not just a dramatic effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also has an effect related to the gaming profits, such as bringing about changes in the profits that the player can obtain.

Differences in the flow patterns of balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

As a result, the player's gaze will naturally tend to be focused on the location where the ball flows from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (where the slide displacement member 370 is located, as described below), so this embodiment is designed to accommodate this focus.

Next, the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a thin-walled member that is U-shaped when viewed from above and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed therethrough to be able to receive balls, a pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent seal members 313 that are attached as markers, a pair of upper surface parts 314 that extend from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side, a plurality of insertion tube parts 315 in which through holes are formed through which fastening screws that are screwed into the middle member 330 can be inserted, a fastening part 316 having a female thread through which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed, and the upper member 310. 10 from the underside, a pair of long front-rear projections 317 arranged side by side, a pair of inner left-right projections 318 arranged between the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, and a storage recess 320 formed as a recess large enough to accommodate the upper part of the substrate 350.

The opening 312 is a passage-like part (tunnel-like part) that receives the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b of the variable prize winning device 65 and flows it downward, and the upper front edge is connected to the tilted attitude detection sensor SE1 ( (see FIG. 12) is cut with an inclined surface so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate. Thereby, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

In addition, the opening 312 is formed with an opening size that does not allow the ball to enter the inside of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. This reduces the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b to the opening 312.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by receiving light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and becoming brightly visible, but details will be given later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the downward flow path of the ball below the upper member 310. A first upper surface part 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and a second upper surface part connected to the front end of the first upper surface part 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. By configuring the left and right intervals between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b to be longer toward the near side, it is possible to secure the field of view of the player who views the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface to receive the head of the fastening screw. Therefore, even though the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is easy to prevent the player from seeing the head of the fastening screw.

The insertion tube portion 315 is positioned to match the fastening portion 332d having a female thread formed in the inner member 330. In particular, the fastening portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, as will be described in detail later.

The fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is positioned with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, while the fastening portion 316 is positioned at the front, the screw head is not easily noticeable to a player viewing from diagonally above. This makes it possible to securely fasten the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 together while avoiding the fastening screw spoiling the appearance of the sorting device 300.

The reason why the fastened part 316 is only formed on the right side is because the insertion tube part 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, so one fastening position is sufficient on the front side, and the screw head is facing downward. The reason for this is that the appearance of the sorting device 300 will be better if the arrangement is omitted if it is unnecessary, even if it is less noticeable. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portions 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged as a pair on the left and right sides.

The fastening portion 316 is positioned to avoid the path of the balls flowing down and to minimize any loss in appearance of the sorting device 300, as will be described in more detail below.

The undersides of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319, which form each pair, are formed as curved surfaces that use the same point as a reference point and become lower the further away from that point. The curved surfaces of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319 have different shapes, and the difference in shape is intended to control the way the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the rear side, a pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the front side, a pair of first flow path components 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls, a pair of second flow path components 335 connected to the front end of the first flow path components 334 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed in front of the front frame portion 333, and a pair of third flow path components 336 connected to the left and right inner ends of the second flow path components 335 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

In addition, the middle member 330 includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and is formed penetrating the lower bottom of the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and functions as a discharge path for the ball. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path forming portion 336 left and right, and a left and right long rectangle formed from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336. A pair of alignment protrusions 339 are provided as protrusions.

Unlike the front part which forms a path for the balls to flow down, the rear frame part 332 does not form a path for the balls to flow down, but is mainly configured as a part supporting the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame part 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a formed in the front end of the left-right center part in the vertical direction and configured to be able to arrange the slide displacement member 370, a guide hole 332b formed in the lower bottom part as a long through hole in the left-right direction and guiding the slide displacement of the guided part 362c of the state switching device 360, a plurality of fastened parts 332c having a female threaded part formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed in, and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female threaded part at the upper tip into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed in.

Since the front frame portion 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inner side of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 is reduced. The front frame portion 333 is formed into a frame shape that is approximately square in top view, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole into which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Equipped with

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are each parts that form the flow path of the balls, and are designed to have different flow directions and inclination angles of the balls, etc., but details will be given later.

In addition, the open part 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position of the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 allows the symmetrical protruding part 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable prize winning device 65 to enter. This is a void for the purpose of That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter into the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge hole 337 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and is configured in a pair on the left and right, and is formed in a size that allows the ball to be discharged through at least two paths. That is, it is configured to have a horizontal length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the ball through hole of the detection sensor SE1. All you have to do is design the shape.

The partition plate portion 338 not only separates the third flow path component 336 as described above, but also functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, as will be described in detail later. The alignment protrusion portion 339 is fitted into the protrusion portion 383a of the lower member 380 to prevent misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, as will be described in detail later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape with the lower portion 353 being longer in the left-right direction than the upper portion 352, and has a recessed portion 354 for positioning at the lower end on the left side of the lower portion 353.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 for positioning in the left and right direction, and the left and right elongated lower portion 353 is attached to the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 back and forth. The upper part 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling off upward, thereby fixing the arrangement. However, the details will be described later together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. a sliding portion 362 that is engaged with and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and rotates as the slide portion 362 slides. , is provided.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to be able to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes from the right side to the right, and a lower side. A guided portion 362c is provided that protrudes downward from the front and rear central portions of and is formed with an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above in the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the inner member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the sliding portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, it is formed long in the left-right direction, so that the position of the sliding portion 362 can be maintained by engaging the guided portion 362c with the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, circular or rectangular.

The rotating part 363 is formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from above, and includes a support tube part 363a formed in a vertically long cylindrical shape at the connection part of the L-shape and having a through hole large enough to insert the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330, an upper cylindrical part 363b protruding upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b, and a lower cylindrical part 363c protruding downward from the long end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the recessed part 378 of the sliding displacement member 370.

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable about the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. This displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized to cause the plunger to slide and the slide portion 362 to be displaced in the left-right direction, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted into the through hole of the overhang portion 362b is displaced, and accordingly. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slid in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower sides of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction, and the slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower sides of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and is a member that A thin plate part 371 that is sandwiched and supported from above and below by the thin plate part 380, an upper protruding part 376 that protrudes upward from the thin plate part 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a left and right center on the rear side of the upper protruding part 376. The recessed portion 378 is recessed at the projecting end of the projecting portion and is formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of supported holes 371a penetrating the left and right portions in the rear half portion, and a longitudinally elongated shape with a left and right width shorter than the arrangement interval of the upper protruding portion 376 from the front end in the left and right center portions. A recessed part 372, a pair of lower protrusions 373 that protrude downward in the shape of protrusions along the edges of the recessed part 372, and protrusions along the left and right edges in the rear half. A plurality of vertical protrusions 374 are provided in a strip shape and protrude in both up and down directions, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 is provided in a cylindrical shape and protrudes downward from the rear end portion and is inserted into the guide elongated hole 386 of the lower member 380. Be prepared.

The lower protruding portion 373 and the upper and lower protruding portions 374 are portions that are intended to face and slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 disposed on the upper and lower sides, and compared to contact on a plane, the middle member 373 and the upper and lower protrusive stripes 374 are This is a protrusion for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

The upper protruding portion 376 is a columnar portion having a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed so as to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332. The width of the gap between the left and right inner sides of the upper protruding portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376.

In other words, the upper protrusion 376 is arranged in the gap on the left and right inside to sandwich the partition plate 338, and is configured so that misalignment in the left and right direction is suppressed by abutting against the partition plate 338. This allows the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 to be well guided, and the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction so that it can accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to displace in the front-rear direction.

The protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is configured to pass through the arrangement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom part of the rear frame part 332, so that the lower cylindrical part of the rotating part 363 The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is such that the entire area where the upper protruding part 376 through which the insertion is planned and the protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is located inside. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a long, thin plate shape on the left and right, and a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape below the plate-like portion 382 that allows multiple detection sensors SE1 (four in this embodiment) to be arranged side by side on the left and right.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the ball passes through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 are open, and the other portions are closed. is formed.

The plate-shaped part 382 has a through-hole formed at a position that matches the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, similar to the vertical through-hole formed in the sensor holding frame part 389, and the two detection sensors on the left and right inner sides. A protrusion 383 that is elongated and protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position of SE1, and a pair of protrusions that protrude left and right away from the front end of the protrusion 383. a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude at a position that can be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370 at a position on the rear side of the protrusion 383; A pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as elongated protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right outer positions than , a curved surface portion 387 formed in a curved surface shape protruding rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 formed so as to allow insertion of a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330. .

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left and right thickness slightly shorter than the left and right gap width of the recessed part 372 of the slide displacement member 370, and the slide displacement member 370 is configured such that the protrusion 383 is sandwiched between the recessed part 372. Placed. That is, the protruding portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed so that their left and right inner ends are in the same position as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted into the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a in abutting engagement, so that the left and right position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380. At the same time, the back side of the front frame part of the lower member 380 (the part connecting the protrusions 383 and the protrusions 383a at the front end side) is abutted against the front side of the alignment protrusions 339, so that the front and rear position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380.

This makes it easier to avoid misalignment between the third flow path configuration portion 336, which is a component of the middle member 330, and the detection sensor SE1, which is a component of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long from side to side, and is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the sliding displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

With this, it is possible to prevent a collision between the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383, so that, for example, the end of the forward displacement is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 collide. The durability of the protruding portion 383 can be improved compared to the structure. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be continued for a long time.

The guide protrusion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is broken, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, while the guide protrusion 384 is usually designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period (e.g., three years) without being broken, the strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed in anticipation of the use in a state in which the protrusion 383 and the slide displacement member 370 collide after the guide protrusion 384 is broken. In other words, the life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than the set period (e.g., two years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in the shape can be improved.

The guide protrusion 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the left and right inner sides of the guide protrusion 385. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused by a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide elongated hole 386 is an elongated hole formed with a left-right width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted therethrough. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the middle member 330. In this embodiment, the ball that has entered the out port 71 is guided to flow down, and the details will be described later.

The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. This makes it possible to prevent the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. The insertion hole 388 is also positioned on the left and right outer side and on the rear side of the area in which the multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of parts, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate part 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the recessed part 372, and the lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the protrusion 383, the guide hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and is displaced in the front-back direction. As a result, the load during guidance can be shared among multiple positions, so it is possible to avoid applying the load locally, and avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion that guides the slide displacement member 370. Can be done.

As can be seen from this, the sliding displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, the sliding displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper protrusions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 guided by the protrusion portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are improperly assembled and the positional deviation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 will be inhibited. Here, it is preferable that the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 keep the displacement to a small value as they are parts that continuously constitute the flow path of the ball, and since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is said to be good, It is possible to guarantee that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the positional deviation of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes too large, the slide displacement member 370 will not be displaced properly. , control can be performed to issue an error notification based on the possibility that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is incorrect.

This prevents the player from continuing to play with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 in a poor relative positioning, reducing the possibility of the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be explained. Note that, here, a configuration related to the falling of the ball inside the sorting device 300 and a configuration that enters the downstream path of the ball will be mainly described.

Figure 15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, Figure 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15, Figure 17 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15.

In the figures from Fig. 15 to Fig. 18, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state in which it is disposed in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b rolls on the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b. The ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path component 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path component 334, the subsequent second flow path component 335, and the subsequent third flow path component 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths are formed into a spiral shape that forms an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-to-rear direction, the second flow path component 335 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in a left-to-right direction rotated 90 degrees based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path component 334, and the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the back side in the front-to-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the same direction as the previous rotation direction based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this way, by forming the flow path into a spiral shape with a right-angled bend, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the ball increases as it moves downstream. In more detail, the ball flows down the first flow path component 334 accelerating toward the front side, but the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 does not have a front-to-rear component, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the first flow path component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path component 336 following the second flow path component 335, the ball flows backward, which is the opposite of the acceleration direction in the first flow path component 334, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the front-to-rear direction is suppressed.

Therefore, unlike a flow pattern in which the ball flows consistently in the same direction (e.g., to the left), it is easier to prevent the ball's flow speed from becoming excessively fast downstream. In other words, it is easier to make the ball's flow speed uniform throughout the entire flow path, which has the effect of keeping the player's attention on the ball high and making it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball.

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path forming portion 335, but if the second flow path forming portion 335 is formed, clogging of the bulb and backflow can be more easily prevented. When the second flow path configuration section 335 is not formed (when the left-right length of the second flow path configuration section 335 is 0), that is, the first flow path configuration section 334 and the third flow path configuration section 336 are When connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the sphere by 180 degrees from the flow on the near side to the flow on the rear side at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the direction of the ball's flow is large, and in particular, the speed direction must be reversed back and forth, so it is difficult to flow the ball smoothly, and balls are likely to accumulate, become clogged, or backflow, causing problems. may occur.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, if the switching angle of the flowing direction is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), no reversal of the velocity direction of the ball occurs, so that the ball can flow down smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid ball stagnation, clogging, and backflow.

The shape of the flow path at the connection end of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 will be explained. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protruding part 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball. be done.

The symmetrical protrusions 161f are formed so that the portion located downstream of the ball is further back from the path of the ball than the portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the width of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f is longer than the width of the adjacent partition plate portions 338. In addition, the rear ends of the left and right ends of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f are positioned closer to the front than the flow path side of the second flow path configuration portion 335 near the open portion 335a (see FIG. 17).

Thereby, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from causing a backflow of the ball.

Further, at the connecting end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, the side wall part 334a formed in a curve at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flow direction of the ball. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved protrusion 334b is formed that protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334 with a curved surface shape (see Figure 16) that descends toward the front side, and serves as a part that guides the downstream flow of the ball by bending the downstream direction of the ball.

That is, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first channel forming section 334, and contacts the side wall section 334a while flowing down, thereby switching the direction of flow, and passing through the second channel forming section 334. The liquid flows down the flow path forming part 335, contacts the symmetrical protrusion 161f while flowing down, switches the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed into a shape that can be engaged with and aligned with the protruding support portion 161d of the member to be fixed 161. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and displacement in the left and right direction is regulated, thereby aligning the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 in the left and right direction. It can be performed.

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described below. With regard to the longitudinal inclination angle, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of approximately 7 degrees relative to the horizontal, the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal, and the third flow path component 336 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path component 334, and a slightly gentler common inclination angle is set in the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

Regarding length, each flow path component 334-336 is formed so that the front frame portion 333, which is formed with a square outer shape when viewed from above, forms the inner side, and a large square having the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame portion 333 forms the outer side. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is 45 mm, forming a flow path with a width of 12 mm around the perimeter.

Therefore, for a normally used 11 mm diameter sphere, the clearance with the flow path is set to 1 mm total on both sides of the sphere, so the sphere flows down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) is set at approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance, and misalignment of the sphere as it flows down can be suppressed.

Of the parts constituting the ends of each flow path component 334-336 arranged on a square surrounding the periphery of the square-shaped front frame portion 333, only the curved protrusion 334b constituting the upstream end of the first flow path component 334 is arranged inside (on the front side) the apex of the square, so the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the channels formed by the second channel forming section 335 and the third channel forming section 336 have approximately the same length (33 mm between sphere centers), and the length is as follows. The length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm between sphere centers).

From the ratio of the longitudinal inclination angle and length of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 described above, it can be explained that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is not constant. In other words, the time taken to pass through the first flow path forming section 334, which has the largest inclination angle and the shortest path length, is longer than the time required to pass through the second flow path forming section 335, where the inclination angle is gentler and the path length is 1.5 times longer. And it is shorter than the time to pass through the third flow path forming part 336.

In this embodiment, with this configuration, when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the arrangement is moved to the back side, and a portion is hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1. The ball can be quickly displaced to the front side from a state where the visibility of the ball is poor, and the state can be switched to a state where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the speed of the ball, the player does not need to quickly move his/her line of sight towards the ball, reducing the burden on the player who focuses on the ball (eyeball movement). eye strain) can be reduced.

When focusing on a ball flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have thus increased visibility, the amount of displacement of the ball in a front-to-back direction when viewed from the front is smaller when the ball flows down the third flow path component 336 compared to when the ball flows down the second flow path component 335 in the left-to-right direction. Therefore, the playing burden on the player focusing on the ball can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are the same, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming part 336 are the same. are considered to be equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball in front view is different, as a result, the apparent velocity of the ball (displacement velocity of the ball in front view) is lower than that of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. The ball flowing down is slower than the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335.

The flow path of the ball only changes at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 where the game load is minimized and the ball is easy to draw attention to, and in other parts, the flow path of the ball changes from each flow path forming part 334 to 336. It is considered common in Therefore, since the player's line of sight naturally tends to concentrate on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, it is possible to effectively reduce the gaming burden on the player who concentrates his/her line of sight in this manner.

In addition, in order to ensure the player's field of vision when focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, in this embodiment, an opening 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17), which makes it possible to prevent the flesh of the second flow path component 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336.

Further, in the symmetrical protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a, only the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the falling ball is formed, and the formation of the shaped portion on the upper and lower sides thereof is omitted. be done. In other words, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the upper and lower sides, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to the case where the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed to have a thickness vertically, the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is less likely to be obstructed by the symmetrical protruding portion 161f. It can be lowered and visibility can be improved.

The third flow path component 336 is also configured so that balls that deviate from the opening/closing plate 65b and head toward the outlet 71 gather toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, balls that enter the outlet 71 flow downward below the third flow path component 336, come into contact with the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and are discharged downward.

Assuming that the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 are viewed from the diagonally upward front, the balls entering the outlet 71 will flow down the back side of the third flow path component 336. As a result, the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the balls entering the outlet 71 will be viewed overlapping from the front to the back, and the total number of balls entering the field of view focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 will be increased.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or whether the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a and enters the out port 71, the ball will enter a field of view that draws attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the balls are directed toward the specific winning port 65a, i.e., the configuration of the nails set into the base plate 60 (the so-called quality of the gauge), the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is positioned at a position that overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with the position where most of the shot balls (excluding balls that enter the other winning ports 63, 64, 140) gather. This allows the balls flowing down to efficiently guide the player's gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in addition, in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is improved except for the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. It is configured to reduce the

For example, a light diffusion surface 333b is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330 in a shape similar to a prism to cause light diffusion. In FIG. 17, the area that appears sawtooth-like is the light diffusion surface 333b, which is formed on almost the entire inner circumference of the inner surface, from top to bottom.

When the effect of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, so while it is possible to make the surface shine brilliantly, it also prevents the line of sight from being blocked by the light. visibility of the rear side becomes poor. According to the present embodiment, visibility is poor in a state where light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when no light is irradiated, visibility is at least as low as in a state where light is irradiated. visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a blocking object between the light and the light, the shadow of the blocking object will be visually recognized as a black spot, making it easier to determine its position.

Surfaces similar to the light diffusion surface 333b are also formed in other areas. For example, light diffusion surface 319a is formed on the rear side of the left and right external protrusions 319, and light diffusion surface 332e is formed on the rear side of the front part of the rear frame portion 332 (see FIG. 17).

Further, a processed surface formed in a similar shape is a plate-shaped part extending to the back side of the second upper surface part 314b of the upper member 310, and which is attached to the front frame-shaped part 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include a light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered, and a light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. be done.

With these configurations, in this embodiment, light is diffused on the back side, the lower surface side, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336. A processed surface is formed to create the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

In a state where the light diffusion processed surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed to the left and right from the third flow path forming part 336 with the player's eyes looking at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 from the front side. The ball can be hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 to instantly make it difficult to see.

Furthermore, even if a player tries to see the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held in the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen from the player's line of sight when viewed from diagonally above, the line of sight passes through the light diffusion surface 340, and light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, it becomes necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which can further improve attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to create a state in which the shadow of the ball is easily visible as a black spot. In this way, by switching between the presence and absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the ball. Also, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the black spot, it is possible to create a situation in which the black spot is hidden by the ball, and a situation in which the black spot is visible and not hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are consistently formed in the vicinity of each of the flow path components 334 to 336. It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the channel.

This prevents the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped off by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time, and the light diffusion effect can be maintained.

Further, it is possible to prevent the balls from coming into contact with the light-diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, thereby preventing the balls from flowing down or being subjected to deceleration effects. In addition, by ensuring visibility inside the channel, the visibility of the ball is reduced even while the ball is flowing down the channel formed by the channel components 334 to 336. This can be avoided.

The light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to create both the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330, the formation of the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and there is a possibility that visibility will remain high without measures. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fastening screw is used to reduce visibility.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, it can be used to hide a portion where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in the portion where the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screws reflect the light and shine, so that the light is diffused. The visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side can be reduced, including the portion where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusing surface 332e of the inner member 330 is formed on the back side of each flow path component 334-336, and in addition to providing a brilliant glow, the purpose of this is to provide a function of concealing the board 350 and the state switching device 360 that are disposed on the back side. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is disposed on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a screen, making it easier to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The board 350 is accommodated in a supported manner in the rear frame-shaped part 332 of the middle member 330, and is arranged with a gap between the bottom and the bottom of the rear frame-shaped part 332 at the left and right center parts, and can slide into the gap. A displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 .

In more detail, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 has a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, a gap is created due to the absence of this thick portion, and the sliding displacement member 370 can be placed in this gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper part 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, and is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front and rear directions.

Therefore, by being irradiated with light from the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper part 352, the light diffusion processed surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a glittering effect, and further, the back side of the intervening member 164 Visibility in the range can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion surface 164f, and since the light diffusion surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape imitating a prism formed along the entire surface in the vertical direction, the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as a light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it can be made to appear as if light is being emitted from above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the light diffusion surface 164f is positioned at the center of the left and right of the receiving member 163. However, even if it is positioned behind the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the view and will not be clearly visible. Therefore, if it is formed within the gap between at least one pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be achieved.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is positioned so that light is directed toward the sealing member 313 and the portion below it through which the balls flow, as will be described in more detail below.

Next, referring to Figures 19 and 20, we will explain the switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 and its significance. In the explanation of Figures 19 and 20, Figures 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. In Figures 19 and 20, when shown, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state disposed in a rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the functions of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

The four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically in two sets, and include a special chance detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12, which share the same function. The special chance detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outside in the left-right direction.

The function of these four detection sensors SE1 is different from that of the detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. In other words, when a ball that has entered a specific winning opening 65a is detected as having entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 for each detection) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see Figure 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the payout of prize balls, but is used as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the end of the jackpot game by detecting the ball entering. Function.

Note that, as described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to the variable probability state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not a jackpot will be won next time.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position (see Figures 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is positioned so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11, preventing the ball from passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 is guided by the upper protrusion portion 376 of the slide displacement member to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can flow smoothly toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see Figures 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retreats rearward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, allowing the ball to pass through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability variation state. In other words, if the ball is not detected to have passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, but has passed only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or time saving state). ).

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the types of jackpots are variable jackpot and normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 are prepared for each type of jackpot.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in the case of a probability variable jackpot, and in the case of a normal jackpot. Although it is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the through hole of the definite change detection sensor SE11 and easy to pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, details of the control will be described later.

In this way, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the attention of the player. On the other hand, many fraudulent acts in which the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is illegally changed have been discovered, and countermeasures against such acts are important.

As a premise, the position of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360. In other words, when no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are positioned on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side, so that the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the recess of the slide displacement member 370 The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear position by displacing the portion inserted into the mounting portion 378 to the rear side. This is a normal operating mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person committing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the distribution device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see Figure 1), and press the thin metal wire against the sliding displacement member 370, pushing the sliding displacement member 370 toward the back, thereby fraudulently creating a state in which a ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18), so when a thin metal wire is passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 and pressed against the sliding displacement member 370, it is difficult to press the thin plate portion 371 against the front end portion, and the thin plate portion 371 is pressed against the upper protrusion portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion portion 376 is curved to release the load to the left and right sides as described above, so that even if the thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be released to the left and right sides, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the sliding displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition, the path taken to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is not a straight line but a spiral, and the sliding displacement member 370 itself is located far away (approximately 10 cm) from the front side to the rear side of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), making it difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the sliding displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in many cases, the configuration was such that the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 was maintained by mechanical devising (displacement regulation) of the mechanism for transmitting the driving force in response to the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. However, the configuration of the state switching device 360 is limited. In contrast, in the present embodiment, by configuring the slide displacement member 370 to be difficult to apply a load in the first place, the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the state switching device 360 can be designed freely. You can increase the degree.

In addition, when a pressure load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 by using a thin metal wire threaded through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself will obstruct the flow of the ball down the third flow path component 336, making it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit that the player obtains varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so avoid balls that enter the ball incorrectly as much as possible. It is advisable to avoid it.

In conventional models, it was common to configure the system to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11. However, in this embodiment, no movable parts are provided to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11 (see Figures 19 and 20), and the system is configured to allow balls to enter the normal detection sensor SE12 as well.

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls that flow down passes through the through hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11, the special probability state after the big win is ensured. Based on this concept, this embodiment omits the placement of the movable parts that open and close the normal detection sensor SE12, thereby reducing material costs and reducing product costs. Furthermore, not placing a movable part has the positive effect of eliminating the need for maintenance associated with breakdowns or malfunctions of the movable parts, and of extending the lifespan of the pachinko machine beyond the lifespan of the movable parts.

On the other hand, as a measure separate from the movable member, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 have been devised to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1. In other words, the shape of the parts fixedly positioned inside the flow path (i.e., the protrusions 317, 318, 319) is used to realize a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position. This will be explained below.

First, the design of the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees from the horizontal toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate portion 338) in the short direction (see FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set to be similar in angle and direction to the longitudinal direction inclination of the second flow path forming part 335, so that the inclination from the second flow path forming part 335 to the third flow path forming part 336 is The bouncing of the ball when the ball flows in (the bouncing in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338) can be reduced.

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate part 338 side. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 can be placed on the side close to the partition plate part 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the rear position. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate part 338) in the arranged state.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the left-right direction path of the flow path constituted by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 is formed only by the second flow path forming part 335. Since the inclination direction is on the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the speed in the left-right direction is generated inward in the left-right direction. This can also reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 located apart from the partition plate section 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be explained. The ball that has flowed down the third flow path forming part 336 is first placed close to the left and right inner protrusions 318 . The left and right inner protruding portion 318 is the smallest of the protruding portions 317, 318, and 319, and is located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and above the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is disposed on the front side, it comes into contact with the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336 while sliding on the partition plate section 338 without leaking.

The protruding tip surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as downwardly concave curved surfaces when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is more horizontal than the front end side of the protrusion. It is formed to expand outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and has come into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed, and flows downward. .

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are formed in a small size, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not alone determine whether the downward direction of the ball is downward or outward to the left and right; Functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are arranged upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the above-mentioned momentum is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after contacting the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained separately. When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper protrusion 376 and the longitudinally elongated protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18). and flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

The protruding end portion of the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protruding portion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the direction of flow of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guide, the upper protruding portion 376 forms a curved surface that starts from the left and right inner sides and ends at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the definite change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17). The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface whose starting point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose ending point is a position close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed in the left-right direction. (See Figure 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward outward to the left and right, and the ball is forced outward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318, and uses that momentum to flow down in the outward left and right direction, allowing the ball to flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, left and right external protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing outward to the left and right, and ball bouncing is suppressed, allowing the ball to flow smoothly down the ball. Since the purpose of left and right external protrusions 319 is not to change the direction the ball flows down, but to suppress ball bouncing, its shape is significantly different from front and rear long protrusions 317, and its protruding end is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above the special rate detection sensor SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front side than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right external protrusions 319 When the provided portion 319 and the ball abut in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be located on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right externally protruded portions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, it is possible to easily apply a load having a backward component to the ball, so that the ball does not flow back to the front side. can be prevented.

These configurations make it easier to prevent balls from clogging or flowing backwards when multiple balls are flowing down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion 376 are retracted to the rear of the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317, so that the ball is moved closer to the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317. flows in contact with.

The front-rear long protruding portion 317 has a protruding end (curved surface) whose surface shape is such that the normal line passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is located directly behind the position, it is easy to apply a load to the abutting ball with the left and right components suppressed. This load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow obliquely downward to the front because the protruding tip of the longitudinally long protruding portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, if the ball does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318, it will be subjected to a load from the front and rear long protrusions 317 diagonally downward and flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Depending on the location of impact with the front-rear long protrusions 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (causing a backflow). However, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball is given momentum diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. Therefore, even if the ball bounces back to the front side, it will only collide with the rear end of the lower base of the third flow path component 336 (see Figure 20) or the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 19), making it easier to avoid the ball flowing back through the third flow path component 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the rear position and the ball flows toward the definite variation detection sensor SE11, the slide displacement member 370 is placed at the front position and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. As in the case, the ball is displaced from the left and right inner protrusions 318 toward the left and right outer sides due to the load. This use will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable between a front position and a rear position, and while the ball is flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, the slide displacement member 370 When 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position), there is a possibility that a forward load will be applied to the ball, and a load will be applied to the ball in a direction (forward) that will cause the flow to flow backward through the third flow path forming part 336. may be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 that is in operation can be eliminated, so there is a possibility that the ball will flow backwards. can be made less sensitive.

In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without exception. The effect of guiding the ball that has reached the rear end of the flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right sides can be produced. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow backwards.

In addition, the opening movement of the sliding displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not a movement in a direction opposite to the ball, but rather a movement away from the ball, so even if the movement is performed when the ball is resting on the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, a load that pushes the ball back toward the front is unlikely to be generated. Therefore, even if the opening movement is controlled to be performed at any timing without taking into account the position of the ball, it is not thought to make it easier for the ball to flow back.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (still in the preliminary stage of flowing outward to the left and right), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the ball. Since a load is applied in the direction (direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped and it is easy to shift it to free fall.

As a result, when the sliding displacement member 370 opens while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is easier to prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of its previous rolling, and it is easier to guide the ball to the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the present embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the above-mentioned sorting device 300, we will explain how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's point of view. Below, as an example, we will explain cases where the angle of the line of sight relative to the horizontal direction is different.

Figure 21 is a front view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, Figure 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in Figure 16, and Figure 23 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, play the game by keeping your head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a horizontal line of sight or in a direction that is inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22). Alternatively, the player may play the game by bringing his or her head close to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is tilted downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details.

Figure 21 is shown as a reference, and the following explanation will be mainly made by comparing Figures 22 and 23. For convenience, Figures 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated in imaginary lines. Although the light emitting means 351 is arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for ease of understanding. Since the functions of the light emitting means 351 disposed at the top are as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half disposed on the lower part 353 will be described here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates light towards the seal member 313. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed in a red transparent color, so when light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This can increase the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. As the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path forming portion 336 (see Figure 18), it can draw attention to the third flow path forming portion 336.

The light diffusion surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). This prevents the light from the light emitting means 351 from being visually stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion surface 332e, and allows the light to be concentrated around the sealing member 313.

Although there are no limitations to the light emission control, for example, during a jackpot game, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, it is possible to control the light to be irradiated onto the sealing member 313, thereby drawing attention to the sealing member 313 and naturally guiding the gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 located below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the light emitting means 351 is controlled so that when the ball enters the special chance detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 emits light, whereas when the ball enters the normal detection sensor SE12, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 emits light, thereby notifying the player of the location where the ball has passed.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right center sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 319a (see FIG. 17). The light diffusion surfaces 319a and 332e are formed across the top and bottom of each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a vertically spread range (as a band-shaped light extending vertically). visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved.

The angle of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 (5 degrees) is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path forming portion 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be seen. However, because the slide displacement member 370 displaces in the front-to-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the changes caused by the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed in a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 is narrower, compared to the direction seen in FIG. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to confirm the change in the downward flow mode of the ball at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 332a for placement of the inner member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 through, so that the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) placed inside the rear frame portion 332 can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During an actual jackpot game, multiple balls are guided to the specific winning port 65a during a round of play, and flow down each of the flow path components 334-336 in order. When multiple balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight to the ball at the back will be obstructed by the ball at the front.

For example, when a plurality of balls are arranged in the third flow path forming part 336, those balls are arranged at the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the ball on the far side is hidden by the ball on the near side.

In addition, when a ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12, it flows outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the third flow path component 336. After it leaves the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion surface 333b of the front frame portion 333, so it is preferable to grasp the movement of the ball in the process of leaving the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction. However, if there is a ball (a ball that is slightly shifted left-right from the third flow path component 336) that flows from the downstream end position of the second flow path component 335 (position of ball P1) to the upstream end position of the third flow path component 336 (position of ball P2), the ball will hide the ball in the process of leaving the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be grasped by visually checking whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336. In contrast, in this embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the line of sight, it is configured so that the ball can flow down a path that includes the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336 (movement from the position of ball P1 to the position of ball P2). Therefore, depending on the position of the ball flowing down the upstream side, it may be difficult to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated in terms of their vertical arrangement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the upstream spheres are obscured. On the other hand, because the vertical width of the flow path visible at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrow, the area of the spheres visible in the direction is smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 flows diagonally downward to the right, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, and then heads toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. The downstream route and the downstream route toward the normal detection sensor SE12 are switched. Therefore, the area of the ball that is visually recognized at the switching position is smaller than when the ball's falling path is switched by either the ball flowing straight down or the ball's flowing direction being switched to the right.

Another possible mode of switching is a case where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path is switched either directly down or to the right. For example, if the left and right inward protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows directly downward from the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. This is the position behind the center line of the component 336.

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path forming part 336 as in the present embodiment, the ball is displaced below the bottom of the third flow path forming part 336. By falling (falling by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom part of the third flow path forming part 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate part 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the ball is attached to the third flow path forming part 336 itself. In addition to the effect of partially hiding the ball, the ball is also partially hidden by the front frame portion 333 by displacing the ball to the left and right outside of the range visible through the third flow path forming portion 336.

As a result, the area visible from the player's point of view of the ball that has passed the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which path the ball has flowed down. This further increases the attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as the directional view for identifying the downstream direction of the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming part 336, , each has its advantages and disadvantages. This allows the player to adjust and select his or her preferred viewing method, rather than requiring the player to play the game in a single-minded way, even when it comes to the visual recognition method of the sorting device 300. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's field of view can be achieved by various methods, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, the third flow path forming portion Since the roof portion 336 can be in a state as if removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily recognized.

The following describes the visibility in the direction of view in Figures 22 and 23 on the front side of the sorting device 300. Although not shown in Figures 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see Figure 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, and the light transmitted through them is reduced due to the thickness of the members, so the view is obstructed.

Because the area obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 when viewed in the direction of Figure 23 than when viewed in the direction of Figure 22.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 basically have a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light is difficult to occur (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it is possible to avoid deterioration in the visibility of the sorting device 300.

Even the parts that cannot be made flat due to functionality are formed so as to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support parts 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are arranged so that the player looking at the channel forming parts 334 to 336 does not obstruct the line of sight of the player facing diagonally downward. It is located outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower).

For example, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed at the center height of the ball and is thin-walled to the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). This prevents the entire ball from being hidden even if the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned between the ball and the player's eyes, ensuring visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path configurations 334-336.

Between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, the ball that has deviated from the specific winning opening 65a flows down and flows down towards the out opening 71. The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of vision will be explained.

22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening/closing plate 65b is open. While the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the ball that flows down from above the opening/closing plate 65b rides on the opening/closing plate 65b and is guided toward the specific winning opening 65a. The ball deviates to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extended portion 162b and the extended portion 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 and flow down toward the out port 71.

As shown in Figures 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the position of the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 is lower than each of the flow path components 334-336, making it easier to avoid a reduction in visibility of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336 due to the balls flowing on the inner rail 61.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 flows at a gentle angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the gaming area, similar to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. , similar to the ball flowing down the second channel forming part 335, has the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left and right center position of the gaming area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path forming section 336. That is, since the left and right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming part 336 are the same (left and right center position), by moving the player's line of sight up and down, the out port 71 and the third flow path The line of sight is guided to a state where both of the constituent parts 336 are visible.

Therefore, regardless of whether the balls shot toward the play area tend to enter the specific winning port 65a efficiently (meaning fewer wasted balls during a jackpot game) or whether balls frequently stray and flow down between the extensions 162b and 162c (meaning frequent wasted balls during a jackpot game), the flowing balls can have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the third flow path configuration portion 336.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335, and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. In the case where the player's line of sight deviates from the inner rail 61, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

Normally, a ball heading toward the out port 71 is considered a waste ball and does not have any effect in the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, the player's line of sight is directed toward the ball heading toward the out port 71. It can have a role of guiding the flow path to the third flow path forming part 336.

Note that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flows on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming part 335, thereby reducing the visibility of the second flow path forming part 335. There is sex.

On the other hand, according to the configuration of this embodiment in which the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a are arranged above the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is arranged below the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a can prevent the balls from flowing down, so it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down the front side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path component 336 and the area around its rear end is reduced due to balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the length of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 ensures the time it takes for a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370, but this avoids the problem of increasing the amount of space required for placement. That is, as shown in Figures 22 and 23, the placement distance between the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370, which serves as a guide for the placement of the third flow path configuration part 336, is made short from the player's line of sight.

Moreover, since the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the lower rear of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), the player's line of sight frequently occurs diagonally downward to the rear as shown in FIG. 23. , it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so closely that the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 bites into the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a, which is configured to be long from left to right, and passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 located at both left and right ends is collected below the center of the specific winning opening 65a via each of the symmetrical flow path components 334-336. This makes it possible to shorten the time it takes for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 compared to when the ball flows left and right down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the structure required for the ball's flow path can be made to have a shorter left and right length the further down it is, making it easier to place it near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design idea is to arrange the specific winning a prize opening 65a close to the out opening 71, but instead of having a structure in which the ball flows directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335, the second flow path forming part 335 By adopting a structure in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path structure section 335 by the third flow path structure section 336, the out port 71 (disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface section 387) An opening) can be formed at a position directly below the second flow path forming portion 335. Thereby, the vertical distance between the specific winning a prize opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by shortening the vertical and horizontal widths of the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 at the player's line of sight, the vertical width of the area occupied by the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 can be shortened in the design of a play area where the size when viewed from the front is limited to a certain standard, thereby improving the design freedom of the play area.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be positioned near the bottom end of the play area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a left-right symmetrical play area.

Next, we will explain the flow of the balls after they enter the distribution device 300, and an example of the operation pattern of the movable parts (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into account.

First, as a premise, a ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 in that order (see Figures 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is designed so that the ball passes through each of the flow path components 334-336 in approximately 0.3 seconds.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first flow path forming part 334 after entering the specific winning hole 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds for it to pass through the second flow path forming part 335, and it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration section 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning port 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball is configured not to reach the detection sensor SE1 located at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 for 0.9 seconds. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, so the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the ball entering the prize by mistake.

For this reason, it is possible to eliminate the need for control (which involves unnatural operation of the opening and closing plate) that briefly opens the opening and closing plate at the start of a round R in order to prevent erroneous winning into the V winning sensor, as is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V-type probability attacker. This makes the operation of the opening and closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning port a natural operation, providing an environment in which players can enjoy playing with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-probability variable attacker in the above example, a ball that enters immediately after the V-probability variable attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, the ball that enters the ball immediately after the release of the V-probability variable attacker On the contrary, the entering ball produces a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 by the ball), so it is not necessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering immediately after release. .

The time required for the ball to pass through can be set arbitrarily depending on the length and inclination of each flow path component 334-336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (whether it is smooth or uneven, etc.), etc.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM 202 in main control device 110, FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in the special pattern, and FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal pattern.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first win type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment values of the first win type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the selection of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first win type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 falls within the range of "0 to 9". is defined in association with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot A1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "10 to 19", and the jackpot A2 is associated with and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A2, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 39" is associated with the big winning B1 (see 202b3 in Figure 24 (b)).

In the case of jackpot B1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

A jackpot B2 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "40 to 49" (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot B2 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

A jackpot C1 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 79" (see 202b5 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C1, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with a big winning type C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot C2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering first winning slot 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in either case. Therefore, a large number of prize balls cannot be expected compared to when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, a four-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than a fifteen-round jackpot game, so balls can be shot earlier in an attempt to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 140) results in a jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", the jackpot a is defined in correspondence (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot a is reached, 15 rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140), a 15-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery, you can get a larger amount of payout prize balls than if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. It is possible to increase the motivation for playing the game for drawing No. 2 (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning hole 140).

Further, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured, there is little possibility that the disadvantage to the player will become large. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern, which has the disadvantage that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has the advantage that the ball easily enters the specific winning hole 65a, the special symbol 2 lottery By setting the operation pattern of the variable prize winning device 65 for the jackpot in the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of the disadvantages and highlight only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game. .

That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the special symbol 2 lottery will be delayed, so it is possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (time efficient for paying out prize balls).

Note that the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled according to the operation pattern Y may be provided. Further, this jackpot type may be provided at a small percentage (for example, about 20%).

This can increase the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, preventing the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. In other words, the player can visually confirm the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370, and the timing of the displacement movement can make the player happy or sad, increasing the player's interest.

As mentioned above, while the special symbol is changing, the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the regular symbol becomes a hit decreases. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once you can transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the variable probability state of the special symbol that is likely to result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and that is likely to result in a jackpot a (jackpot with good profit balance) when it becomes a jackpot, will be repeated. This makes it easier for the player to win a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is stipulated for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing time-based changes in the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot in the special pattern winning determination, after the special pattern variation display (symbol variation performance) ends, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type). The operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below. In addition, in the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is the same from the second round onwards. Therefore, the driving mode in the first round for each type of jackpot will be explained below.

In the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game balls are continued to be fired, and the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) is released. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls that enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting to prevent multiple balls from entering the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "balls entering consecutively"). It is not our intention to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible for one ball to arrive at each of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a and enter the specific winning hole 65a at once.

In the case of a big win A1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the drive control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific prize opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced to the rear position, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

At this time, since the number of balls disposed in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility of the other balls will not be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370, 0.8 seconds, is set based on the idea that this is a time shorter than the time it takes for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and a time longer than the time it takes for the ball to reach the third flow path component 336.

In other words, according to this embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 in approximately 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning opening 65a, so even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the 0.2 second opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the sliding displacement member 370 can be displaced after the ball reaches the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning port 65a, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball placed in the third flow path configuration part 336 regardless of the timing of the ball's entry (see FIG. 22). This makes it possible to prevent the displacement movement of the sliding displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and increases the attention to the ball flowing down each flow path configuration part 334-336 as a ball entering the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path forming part 336, so there is a low possibility that the line of sight will be obstructed by the ball, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused. can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming part 335 is arranged close to the front plate part of the fixed member 161 and closer to the front side than the slide displacement member 370, the player's line of sight is tends to collect in the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. That is, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying a message such as "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is This makes it easier to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 is configured to be separated in the center from the left to the right, so if the ball enters the specific winning port 65a on one side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be seen without being blocked by the balls flowing down by focusing on the rear of the third flow path component 336 on the side where no balls are entering (see Figure 22).

In this way, in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, thereby improving the attention to the ball. In addition, it is possible for the player to easily visually confirm whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of a jackpot B1 or B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

In addition, the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game balls are continued to be fired, and the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) is released. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning a prize opening 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time to allow a plurality of balls to enter in a row on the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "entering with consecutive balls").

In this control example, the interval between ball launches is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the interval between balls flowing down does not change from the time of launch, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b opens once in 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, because the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, it is possible to restrict the next ball from entering each of the flow path components 334-336 before the two balls have passed each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In the case of a jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot B1, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot B2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 differs depending on whether there is one ball or two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side. When there is only one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, so the game A person can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, if there are two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. This may reduce the visibility of the ball downstream. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the case of a jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the first The opening/closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long time within the operating time T1.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this control example, the opening and closing plate 65b remains open during the first round of play R, so a situation may arise where multiple balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession on either the left or right side. On the other hand, the opening interval of the opening and closing plate 65b is not limited, so unlike the second operating pattern, it is possible that the next ball will enter each of the flow path components 334-336 before two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336. Therefore, compared to the second operating pattern, the third operating pattern is more likely to cause a situation in which the visibility of a ball placed downstream of each of the flow path components 334-336 is reduced by a ball placed upstream.

In the case of jackpot C1 or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Furthermore, in the case of jackpot C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of jackpot C1 or jackpot a, the ball that passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 normally It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode is set to keep the opening and closing plate 65b in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but because the time it takes for the ball to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is managed structurally, the possibility of the sliding displacement member 370 malfunctioning due to the ball getting caught can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or whether there are two balls. When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls, so the player can easily see the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when there are two balls placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. Visibility of the ball on the side may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the third operating pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of play R, so compared to the second operating pattern, the arrangement of the balls in each flow path component 334-336 is more likely to become disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is more likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the round game R to proceed quickly. In other words, the round end condition (elapse of the round playing time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls) of a specified number of pachinko balls. It is easy to meet the winning requirement early, and it is possible to avoid prolonging the jackpot game.

In particular, for the special symbol 2 jackpot, there is a 100% probability that the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled by the operation pattern X, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, but priority is given to avoiding the jackpot game from being prolonged, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short period of time and increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the first round round game R ends, the timer means uses an electromagnetic solenoid to keep the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed. 165c, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the specific winning hole. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open the opening/closing plate 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time. After the second round, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is ejected (see FIG. 17).

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

After that, just like the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with a first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening and closing plate 65b moves between the closed state and the open state to open and close the specific winning hole 65a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game is controlled and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In this control example, the short-opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be performed in all rounds, or in rounds other than the first round (e.g., the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

In this way, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening and closing plate 65b can be changed by changing the opening pattern (first to third operating patterns) of the opening and closing plate 65b, and the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of each of the flow path configurations 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration 336 can be changed. This can motivate a player who pays attention to the ball passing through the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of the third flow path configuration 336 to devise a way to launch the ball.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur due to a plurality of balls being placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 at the same time. By intentionally widening the firing interval of the balls (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the 1st operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning a prize opening 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is widened, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after the start of the round game R, there is a slight interval (for example, 1.0 seconds), and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. Also good. In this case, a situation is avoided in which the ball is placed in the third flow path forming part 336 at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (timing when 0.8 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if there is a delay before the balls are released, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning port 65a will be extended, which may result in the round game R being prolonged. In other words, the player can select how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolongation of the round game R.

For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can be entered from either the left or right side through the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned firing mode that widens the pitch interval between balls and the firing mode that increases the period until the ball is launched is maintained when the ball enters on the left side, and the ball is maintained in any firing mode when the ball enters on the right side. Even if you play the game by firing, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Specifically, the balls aimed at the specific winning port 65a can be shot to the left and right in a shooting pattern in which at least the first ball is shot to the right, some balls (for example, the second ball) are shot to the left, and the remaining balls are shot to the right.

In this case, the focus is not on the balls flowing down the right flow path as each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but on the balls flowing down the left flow path, thereby avoiding the line of sight being obstructed by other balls. At the same time, it is possible to visually check whether the ball flowing down the left channel passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are constantly being fired toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid prolonging the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, It is possible to avoid prolongation of the round game R.

The purpose of shooting the balls left and right is not to limit the number of balls that enter the left flow path to one. In particular, it is sufficient to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left flow path components 334-336 to one during the approximately 0.9 seconds it takes for a certain ball to pass through the left flow path, and during the rest of the time, it is sufficient to shoot the balls so that they enter the left and right flow paths at will.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning hole 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, due to the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of nails (see FIG. 2), the ball enters the path through a small number of paths. Even in the case where the balls heading towards the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of them spills to the right and left outside of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation. In FIG. 2, the nails are arranged asymmetrically, but the nails may be arranged symmetrically.

Next, the structure of the operating unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be explained. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in FIG. 27, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that has a shape that can be fitted into a fitting recess (not shown) formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and protrudes toward the front side, and a positioning convex portion 513a that projects toward the front side. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60, thereby fixing the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a protrusion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the mating recess of the base plate 60 (circular or oval in this embodiment), or it may be a protrusion with a shape (even smaller outer shape) that increases the mating gap in consideration of workability during assembly. Furthermore, if the inner shape of the mating recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 comprises a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the inside right part of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 disposed on the inside lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inside upper part of the rear case 510. In addition, on the inside left part of the rear case 510, a substrate having light emitting means such as LEDs, and a diffusion decorative plate LB1 disposed to cover the substrate from the front side, formed of a light-transmitting material, and having a light diffusion processing formed over the entire surface are disposed.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is located to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is located below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is located above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall part 511 of the case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of this operation unit 500 will be explained.

28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. In FIG. 28, each of the operating units 600 to 800 is shown in a production standby state, and in FIG. 29, a state in which the first operating unit 600 of each of the operating units 600 to 800 has changed from a production standby state to an extended state, FIG. 30 shows a state in which the second operating unit 700 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

In addition, in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the front facing surface of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated with imaginary lines. On the inside, the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be clearly seen, but on the outside of the center frame 86, although the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member, , the view is easily obstructed by the nails provided on the base plate 60, the various prize openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Therefore, for example, when the operating units 600 to 800 are disposed outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG. 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front tends to decrease.

The frame shape of the center frame 86 differs from that shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, but its role is the same. In addition, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is curved downward on the front side of the third operating unit 800, but it is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, but a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed on the inner frame side of the center frame 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front. Therefore, the role of rolling a ball placed on the upper side of the center frame 86 to both the left and right is the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper frame part (upper outer frame part) of the actual center frame 86 is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the third operating unit 800 from left to right.

Figures 31 and 32 show the state in which the third operating unit 800 has changed from the standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state. In Figure 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward, showing the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800, while in Figure 32, the second decorative member 880 faces forward, showing the combined state of the third operating unit 800.

The displacement that switches between the state in FIG. 31 and the state in FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed while the third operation unit 800 is in the production standby state, it will cause damage to the surrounding decorative members. Since the decoration members 870 and 880 may collide with each other and cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which it has been displaced downward from the performance standby state to an extent sufficient to avoid a collision between the decorative members 870, 880) and is in a state in which the displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is permitted in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), and is then controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation), as will be described in more detail below.

In FIG. 33, the third operating unit 800 in the extended state and the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, which is slightly displaced downward from the extended state, are illustrated, and in FIG. 34, the first operating unit 35 shows a state in which the third operating unit 800 has been shifted to the production standby state and the first operating unit 600 has been displaced to the extended state from the state shown in FIG. 33. Illustrated.

As illustrated in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third movement unit 800 and the displacement trajectory of the first movement unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second movement unit 700 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state while the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the state change from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the performance standby state, and the third operation By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the performance standby state to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can It is possible to avoid overlapping when viewed from the front. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be allowed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the position of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state is set to an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), thereby preventing the second operating unit 700 from overlapping with the other operating units 600, 800 in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the positioning of each operating unit 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be tolerated).

In particular, the function of the second operating unit 700 as a performance device is improved by configuring multiple viewing states of the second operating unit 700, including a state in which it is viewed in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a state in which it is viewed in a state in which it is slightly receding from the opening 511a but positioned close to the third operating unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 performs a displacement operation on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-like member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It includes a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state for presentation, the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, in a location where visibility from the front side is likely to be reduced due to the positioning of the center frame 86. However, the first presentation surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the surface on the near side is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with arrow F-B as the reference), so that visibility of the first presentation surface 661a at the player's line of sight when viewing the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the frame of the opening between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, in a diagonal direction through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81, can be improved.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends in front of the third pattern display device 81, facing directly toward the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the second presentation surface 661b faces directly ahead, improving the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b at the player's line of sight viewing the second decorative rotating member 660.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player according to the arrangement, and also to change the visibility of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player. For the purpose of improving the posture, the posture can be changed depending on the arrangement.

In other words, it is not limited to a planar change in posture parallel to the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), but is designed to have an angle change that is intentional in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be in the front-to-back direction and to be directly facing the display surface, so visibility can be improved by having the display surface facing forward (in the direction of arrow F), but on the other hand, the closer to the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be at an angle, so visibility can be improved by making the display surface at an angle to be directly facing the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front of the board, and is positioned in the upper right corner of the rear case 510 and hidden from view by the player when the first operating unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see Figure 28) and intermediate performance state (see Figure 34).

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see Figure 28), the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned inside the center frame 86 so that it overlaps with the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 from the front when viewed from the front, making it visible to the player.

In this state, the outer right end of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by using the decoration on the front side of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that gives the player an illusion as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 has been expanded.

In more detail, the right edge of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state, the left edge of the first performance surface 661a of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the right end RE1 of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible roughly coincide with each other.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the extended decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to exceed the right end RE1 of the region to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration on the front side of the plate of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it appears as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the area right end RE1. The player can visually recognize the image as if it had been enlarged beyond that point. This makes it possible to realize a surprising performance.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying polka dots on the third pattern display device 81 and decorating the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b with a similar polka dot pattern, or writing a certain number on the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b in the same font as the number displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the number to notify the winner of a lottery).

Examples of associating the above-mentioned display with decoration include, for example, a case in which six of the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is colored with the remaining color, or a case in which a wooden stick is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with its right end aligned with the right edge of the area RE1 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with a flame-like decoration, thereby evoking the image of a fire when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state.

The presentation mode of the overhang decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b. The light-emitting means for changing the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by arranging a small liquid crystal device with a display surface on the front side instead of the protruding decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, thereby avoiding restrictions on the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the display area is expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area.

Moreover, the object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member (for example, covering member 787) of the second operation unit 700. , the decoration of the overhanging decorative part 652b and the decoration formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decorative member 870, the second decorative member 880) (the decoration of the first covering part 875, the second covering part 875). (decoration of the installation part 885).

36 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured with a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is connected to the second decorative rotating member 660. By performing a relative displacement based on the reference value, the configuration is such that the player can see different appearances before and after the displacement.

Figure 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the back case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620; and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620. , a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, and a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650. A decorative fixing member 670 is fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixing means 610.

The fixing means 610 includes a base member 611 arranged facing the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 from the front to the rear, and a front cover member 612 arranged on the front side of the base member 611 and fastened to the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

The front cover member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, a support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 on the inside of the fixing portion 614, and a guide long hole 616 formed as a long hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that includes a mixture of straight parts and curved parts, and its details and operation will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, and is disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and is externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. A transmission elongated hole 623 formed in the middle part of the main body part 621 as a long hole extending in the linear direction; A circular through hole 624 that is bored as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to Be prepared.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is brought into contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is brought into contact with the protruding piece of the front cover member 612. The structure is such that a biasing force is generated in a clockwise direction (as viewed).

In addition, in the shaft support of the cylindrical part 622, with the support fastening part 615 inserted into the cylindrical part 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female threaded part formed at the tip of the support fastening part 615. Ru. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed, as will be described in detail later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 that is fixed to a drive shaft that protrudes to the back side through the through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and A transmission gear 633 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613b of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613c of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634.

In addition, with the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c inserted into the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, a fastening screw is screwed into the female threaded part formed at the tip of the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c. Thereby, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front cover member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d that penetrates along an arc centered on the tubular portion 613c, and a cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes cylindrically from the front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and has the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and an extension portion 634b that extends in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position that includes the cylindrical portion 634a.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arcuate hole 613d, and the front side of the cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620. Here, the widths of the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extension portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1, which is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to grasp the position of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a tubular portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 with a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643, a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tube with a perforated bottom on the rear side of the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 extended toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is located.

The above-mentioned configuration allows for the transmission of driving force through meshing between the gear teeth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 in response to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

When the cylindrical parts 642, 643 are inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical parts 642, 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported on the main body part 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

In the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the back side of the bottom portion is arranged close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the front side of the bottom portion. It has an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so as to have the following shape, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape centered on the center of the cylinder and through which the cylindrical support part 651a can be inserted. Note that the details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and the details will be described later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms an orthogonal rotation axis, a front rotating member 652 that is supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, an electric decoration board 653 that is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b of the front rotating member 652 and has a light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened to the rear side, a wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened to the main body member 651 from the front side and forms a cylindrical space for wiring, a front decorative portion 656 that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and fastened by screwing in a fastening screw that is inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is supported on the outside of the cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 includes a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a cylindrical shape on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at a diametrical position at the tip thereof. A cutout portion 651c is provided on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b to reduce the wall portion.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening to secure an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a includes, in order from the base end, a center hole of the front rotation member 652, a center hole of the rear rotation member 654, an insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, a stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and a front lid. It is inserted into the guide hole 616 of the member 612, and is fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped lid part C2 into the female threaded part 651b at the tip thereof.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are guided. It is configured to be movable along the elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in part of its circumference, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is positioned opposite the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651, forming a path for electrical wiring.

A part of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, and the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. Other wiring is formed in the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (on the upper side, that is, on the side facing the main body member 651 on the vertically opposite side of the half-cylindrical portion 655a). through the gap) and guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the terminal is connected to the connector of the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end thereof, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed to mesh with each other. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears, and a projecting decorative portion 652b projecting radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the decorative overhang 652b, and the light from the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 653 lights up or blinks the decorative overhang 652b. It is considered possible.

The front rotating member 652 is fastened to the rear rotating member 654, so that the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate together.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical part 651d of the main body member 651 and the half-cylindrical part 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and is rotatably supported by the gear of the front rotating member 652. Gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with teeth 652a are provided.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, but the details of their operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, in an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 comprises a box-shaped member 661 fastened to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fastened to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring retaining plate 663 disposed between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and fastened to the tip of the semi-cylindrical portion 651d, 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661 (described later) rotates, the illumination board 662 is also rotated. Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing through the space may be twisted or disorganized, the function of the wiring retaining board 663, which has through holes for temporarily fixing the wiring, prevents the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized. The aim is to avoid being placed in

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is unavoidable that the electrical wiring will become twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not generated by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it is possible to avoid excessive strain on the electrical wiring or the electrical wiring becoming twisted and broken.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (the rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a) that is parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. The second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from coming off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illuminated board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board coincides with the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661. On the thickness-wise side of the illuminated board 662, the first performance surface 661a is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the front side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, and the third performance surface 661c is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction.

In this way, the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is located on the back side (the second performance surface 661b). By being arranged on the illuminating side), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated when the second effect surface 661b is placed on the front side (the extended state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED emits light, the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

In other words, unlike when LEDs are placed behind the illumination board 662, the light can be prevented from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so the light illuminating the third performance surface 661c can also illuminate the second performance surface 661b. This makes it possible to increase the variety of performance patterns that illuminate the second performance surface 661b, and improve the brightness of the second performance surface 661b during a light-emitting performance.

The decorative fixing member 670 includes an illuminated board 671 on which decorative characters and figures are formed from a light-transmissive resin material so that they can be seen by the player, and which irradiates light diagonally forward to the left from the back side. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the player's line of sight with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always diagonally to the right. That is, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the player's eyes are likely to be placed.

The lower edge and the right edge of the decorative fixing member 670 are raised toward the back side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge, the left edge, and the front lid member 612. This front-back gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

Figure 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, Figure 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, and Figure 42 is a side view of the first operating unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in Figure 40. Note that the base member 611 (see Figure 38) and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make it easier to understand the shape.

In the production standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding into the transmission elongated hole 623. That is, at the start of displacement, inertial assistance is not obtained compared to mid-displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large. However, as in this embodiment, the displacement resistance is reduced. By configuring this, it is possible to reduce the load placed on the drive motor 631 at the time of starting displacement.

The same is also true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in this embodiment, the displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (i.e., the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so that the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a arranged in the transmission long hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position for the performance waiting state and the position for the extended state) is along (e.g., parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the rotating member 620 starts to displace from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rearward angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are The rotation angle of the side rotating member 654 is the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are in mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted perpendicularly to the axis of rotation. The signal is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652. In other words, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the standby state will be explained in chronological order. Figure 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate state, and Figure 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate state. Figure 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and Figure 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. Note that the base member 611 and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make the shape easier to understand.

Between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees, and between the intermediate performance state and the extended state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees.

In the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the narrow third performance surface 661c faces the front. In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 has a straight portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved portion 616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape).

In the intermediate presentation state of the first operating unit 600, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of axis O1 between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state is a linear displacement along the straight line portion 616a, and the displacement of axis O1 between the intermediate performance state and the extended state is a curved displacement along the curved line portion 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change its state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is disposed at the proximal end of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement resistance generated between the rotating member 620 and the guide slot 616 may increase due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616. However, in this embodiment, the rotation member 620 This is suppressed by configuring the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 to be along the displacement direction.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the production standby state (FIG. 41) is a downward tilting displacement, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right. has been done.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616, displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that is displaced inside the guide elongated hole 616 can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effects of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620, and FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b) are FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the support member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values of the numerical values are illustrated as a downward displacement amount and a negative value as an upward displacement amount, and in FIG. 48(b), the numerical values in FIG. 48(a) are illustrated as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operating unit 600 is The rotating member 620 in the extended position is illustrated by a solid line.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as the angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640, which is connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620. Therefore, hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 is explained below. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 occurs as a result of the sum of the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) caused by the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 caused by the posture change of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in a vertical position, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left and right direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is arranged at 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). range). That is, there are two conditions for reducing the displacement in the vertical direction.

Both of these conditions are reversed in the extended state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is such that a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement tends to occur.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state (a midway position of the tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

In this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is shaped so that a curved section 616b is combined below a straight section 616a. This increases the displacement resistance on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced down the straight section 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved section 616b. This makes it easier to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling too fast beyond the position in the intermediate performance state.

The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the active side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the left side of the linear portion 616a. (See FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 is reciprocated in the vertical direction.

As a result, the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept small compared to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept in a linear portion. 616a, the supported member 640 can be shown to the player in a displacement manner as if it were being rotated around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, a sliding displacement in the left-right direction can be generated by utilizing the run-up caused by the rotational displacement centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to when the entire supported member 640 is caused to slide in the left-right direction from the start of the displacement. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts to operate can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is suppressed to a small value, the displacement of the main moving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. The rotating direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the main moving part is maintained in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). Thereby, as described above, the direction of attitude change of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (without being reversed).

This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are moving back and forth (returning), and allows the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 to be a forceful displacement.

Further, even under a situation where the displacement of the main moving part of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the main moving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component. In addition, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. can do. Thereby, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

The effect caused by the curved portion 616b will be explained. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to adopt a curved portion for the guide slot 616. That is, as described above, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed of only a straight portion, regardless of whether or not a bent portion is employed to increase displacement resistance in the intermediate presentation state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616b is deliberately used to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This is explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is The same is true for downward displacement.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, the curved portion 616b is formed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (rightward) opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640, and the curved portion 616b is formed in the lower half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (leftward) that follows the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement on the driving side of the supported member 640 becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, so that the supported member A large displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be ensured.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the displacement end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced up and down along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to a terminal position, if the time required for displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the up and down direction will be the same, so if the displacement starts slowly, the displacement speed will increase at the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction, which is shown for comparison in FIG. 47, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilting displacement start side of the rotating member 620. and reaches its maximum at the end of displacement (lower end of displacement) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the lower end of displacement, the vertical displacement amount of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is The quantity UE1 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will bounce back, and when performing an effect to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of displacement, the first movement unit 600 This will have a negative impact on the performance.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by employing the curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is set to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

In this case, uniformity does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes limiting the range of speed. In particular, in this embodiment, during tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start of entry into the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases after entry into the lower half of the curved portion 616b begins.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous. can be avoided.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved section 616b, i.e., the amount of displacement required per unit time, the amount of displacement required to lift the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time at the start of driving when the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up), can be reduced, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 631.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a change in angle θ [degrees] as the rotating member 620 rotates.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is determined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear teeth 652a and the gear of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is both set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, a change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44); The angle from this state to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

In the production standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the first production surface 661a tilted to the left by 45 degrees (the third production surface 661c to the right by 45 degrees), so that the change in angle θ Accordingly, each time the state is switched from the intermediate presentation state to the overhanging state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third presentation surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second The presentation surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is realized by designing the guide elongated hole 616 for regulating the attitude of the supported member 640. That is, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660 depending on the angle θ.

As a result, even if only a sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the detection of the second decorative rotating member 660 is performed based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The placement and orientation may be determined by the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

In other words, if the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state (see Figure 41), and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 from that state.

Here, the amount of change in the angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to calculate numerical values from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 by proportional calculation. Moreover, thereby, even if the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from becoming constant. This will be explained below.

The change in angle θ is roughly the same as the change in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state is roughly larger (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned in the upper half of the curved section 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved section 616b, and eventually becomes lower than the level of the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (reduced to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by being configured so that the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotation member 620 changes in size, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 similarly changes in size. It can be configured as follows. That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easy to maintain that posture, while in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotating member 660 The rotation angle of the member 660 can be easily increased, and the surface facing the player (performance surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be controlled to be slow or slow. As described above, in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, the arrangement and posture are changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the position is changed at the center of the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a. Rotational displacement about the rotation axis is performed simultaneously.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement about the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight part 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved part 616b. It becomes noticeably larger when it enters.

In other words, during tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate performance state is reached, and even if the second decorative rotating member 660 moves up and down (bounces back) slightly from the position on the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate performance state, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state in which the third performance surface 661c faces the front side (see Figure 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate performance state, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the change in posture in the rotational direction is clearly visible. In other words, the player can visually see that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantly rotating and displaced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and is placed close to the decorative fixing member 670. In view of integral visual recognition (see FIG. 28), it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from springing back upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform, so that it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the center portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615 serving as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unstable due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620. Rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is configured to suitably impede displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower displacement end of the rotating member 620 in a direction that bounces back (upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. That is, the lower half of the curved portion 616b has a short side direction that slopes upward and left, and since it is possible to suppress displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction, it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In other words, in this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in response to the displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 is different from the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driving side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of its displacement.

If there was no guide, the former would be expected to displace downward and left along the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 (the rotation direction of the rotating member 620); however, in this embodiment, by being guided by the long guide hole 616, it is slightly deflected left and right in the direction along the long guide hole 616 and displaces downward.

On the other hand, since the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driving side of the supported member 640, the displacement direction is not along the guide slot 616 but along the short direction of the guide slot 616. Thereby, displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The characteristics of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. When the state of the first operating unit 600 changes from the extended state to the performance standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly applied to the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration disposed on the supported member 640. It is used to upwardly displace the rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

That is, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the more the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced can be reduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, when the rotational member 620 starts rotational displacement from the extended state of the first operation unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotational member 660. The design is such that the value of the angle θ is the lowest. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660, which is centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640, is positioned in a position that is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 (facing in the vertical direction).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as an inertia force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is reduced. The load can be generated in such a manner that the moving member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can withstand the load with a small local elastic displacement by dispersing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to when the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 breaks. In addition, excessive elastic deformation of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the front cover member 612 can be configured to withstand loads that the rotating member 620 cannot withstand by elastically deforming, thereby preventing damage to the rotating member 620.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative part 652b is a member that rotates and displaces around the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even if the change in position of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from a performance standby state to an overhanging state, the overhanging decorative part 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the overhanging state is approximately 135 degrees, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates at approximately 45 degrees. Here, if the overhanging decorative part 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the production standby state, it will feel like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In this embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which is the reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, changes its posture in a manner of rotating clockwise, the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) Collisions can be avoided.

In other words, by configuring the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be movable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative part 652b is a part that is fixedly positioned based on the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the overhanging state, when the supported member 640 changes from its overhanging state position to its performance standby state position, the overhanging decorative part 652b may overhang to the upper left of the supported member 640, potentially causing a negative effect on the performance, such as colliding with another operating unit 800 or partially obscuring the overhang display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding decorative part 652b rotates and displaces in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the driving side of the supported member 640, based on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that when the supported member 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81, it protrudes in tandem, and when the supported member 640 displaces to the side retreating from the third pattern display device 81, it retracts in tandem. Therefore, the position of the protruding decorative part 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third pattern display device 81.

The rotation angle of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 from the player's point of view can be calculated from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640. In other words, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between the change in angle θ of approximately 135 degrees and the change in posture angle of the supported member 640 of approximately 90 degrees.

Here, in this embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be the same regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the angle θ and the attitude of the supported member 640 are The difference between the change and the rotation angle is determined as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, the Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

This allows the player to visually perceive the protruding decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 as if it were being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means other than the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620.

By configuring it in this way, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 can be made to appear, from the player's point of view, as if there were sections of sliding movement and sections of rotational movement, and the displacement mode of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode, as if it were not mechanical.

This effect is achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by dividing it into a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction and a section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's perspective, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b corresponds to the displacement of the supported member 640. It is influenced by the side that is dominant.

Therefore, in sections where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a rotational displacement, and in sections where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a sliding displacement.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated to form a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and although a case has been described in which it is displaced from one displacement end point to the other displacement end point, the drive direction may be switched so that it is displaced in the opposite direction at a midpoint in the displacement range.

For example, after rotationally displacing the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, control may be performed to return to the performance standby state by reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 631. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 on the way down, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to make the stopping position accurate.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, near the intermediate effect state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, more of the driving force is distributed to the second decorative rotating member 660, so that the amount of rotation of the rotating member 620 increases. The amount allocated to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, so the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 is set to be low in advance. Even if this is not done, it is possible to easily stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be explained. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the back case 510, and is a player's field of view when viewing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). The standby state (see FIG. 28) in which the display is evacuated below the opening 511a to ensure that The state is mainly switched between the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 35).

Figure 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and Figure 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In Figures 50 and 51, the peripheral components of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is shown in a non-exploded state.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, a pivoting arm member 720 disposed between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 and pivotable about the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the pivoting arm member 720, and a lifting plate member 740 to which the tip of the pivoting arm member 720 is guidably connected and which is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered. The lifting/lowering plate member 740 is provided with a left rear plate member 750 fastened to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the rear side thereof, a set of front support members 760 that are configured as a left-right pair and fastened to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, a blind decorative member 768 that is fastened to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal bar 702, and a lifting/lowering reversal performance device 770 that is configured to be displaceable in a manner that combines lifting/lowering displacement and forward/rearward displacement on the lifting/lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, and a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the back side at the left edge and forms a gap between the back case 510 and the back case 510. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection sensors 713 are arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) are arranged in a manner that the sensor 713 moves toward the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the left side. A front upper inclined part 714 is formed to be inclined and is formed to be able to guide the rotary cylinder part 774e of the lifting/lowering reversal production device 770, and a female screw part into which a fastening screw inserted from the back side of the back case 510 is screwed is formed. A plurality of fastened parts 718 are provided.

The detection sensors 713 are multiple photocoupler type sensors that are spaced apart so that the detection grooves are positioned at positions where the detectable parts 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 is arranged to match the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for performance, the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state, and the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and from the output result, the output is changed to the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700.

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical protruding portion 511b that protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and is formed into a long plate shape having a dogleg shape when viewed from the front. a support cylinder part 722 which is provided in a cylindrical shape to protrude rearward at the bent part of the main body part 721, and whose inner peripheral side shape is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion part 511b to be inserted therethrough. , a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721, and a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721; A cylindrical fastened part 724 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the direction of A cylindrical fastened part 725 that projects in a cylindrical shape and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side and a rear case 510 that is wrapped around the supporting cylinder part 722 in the upward direction (left side) a torsion spring SP2 that provides a biasing force in the direction of lifting the .

A step is formed on the left side of the main body 721 so that it is shifted toward the front side compared to the base end side of the support tube 722, and the support plate 701 is disposed in the gap formed on the rear side by the step.

The support plate 701 is a plate-shaped part that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall part 511 of the back case 510, and includes an arc-shaped long hole part 701a formed so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened part 725. A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the support plate via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. 701 so that it cannot fall off.

The support plate 701 is fastened to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that the left side of the pivot arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. This prevents the pivot arm member 720 from being displaced toward the front side due to a load applied to the left side of the pivot arm member 720, so that the displacement of the pivot arm member 720 can be stably supported.

The right side of the main body part 721 is arranged in the gap between the back case 510 and the gap forming part 712. That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line passing through the width center and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the elongated hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the rotational direction component of the rotating arm member 720 of the load is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731. , a transmission gear 733 that meshes with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 that meshes with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are respectively pivotally supported at corresponding positions by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the right front plate member 710. A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed into the thread. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical protrusion 711a and an arcuate hole 711b formed in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 includes a detectable portion 735 that protrudes toward the front side in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion and is formed so as to be insertable into the arc hole 711b, an extension portion 736 that extends to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the tip of the extension portion 736 toward the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the attitude of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) based on the output from the detection sensor 713. is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed to be able to be inserted into the long hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole 723. be done.

A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed into the thread. By screwing and fixing this fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is irremovably connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down as the rotating arm member 720 rotates. It includes horizontally elongated members 742 that are long on the left and right sides and are fastened and fixed.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702, which is fixed to the rear case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned vertically, can be inserted therethrough, allowing for vertical displacement along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both the left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741 and stabilizing the position of the guided member 741.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the oblong member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

The horizontal member 742 includes a long hole 743 that is drilled in the shape of a long oval with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 to be inserted, a cylindrical portion 744 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side above the long hole 743, and a pair of guide portions 745 that are disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant to the left and right of the cylindrical portion 744.

The fastening screw, which is inserted through the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, is screwed into the cylindrical fastening portion 724, so that the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 via the cylindrical fastening portion 724 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion into which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up/down reversal performance device 770 is inserted, and supports the up/down reversal performance device 770 in a state that it can be moved back and forth. That is, the elevating and reversing effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with reference to the elevating plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction to separate the elevating plate member 740 and the elevating/descending reversing effect device 770.

The guide section 745 is composed of a left and right pair, and includes a front and rear elongated plate section 745a, and a rotary cylinder rotatably supported by a front and rear pair of shaft sections protruding from the front and rear elongated plate section 745a to the left and right outer sides. 745b.

The rotating cylinder section 745b rotates when the above-mentioned lifting/reversing performance device 770 moves forward and backward, and functions as a part that guides the forward and backward movement, but details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, has a front upper inclined portion 751 formed on the front side of the right side in a manner that the further upward it approaches the front side, and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a number of fastening portions 752 formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The concealing decorative member 768 comprises a three-dimensional decorative portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate is disposed on the rear side of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a to which an LED is fixed on the front side, so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

Each of the front support members 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a fixing plate portion 761 that is arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761, with the back surface of the plate facing upward. A receiving inclined portion 762 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side.

The fixing plate part 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw part. This is the board part.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714, 751, and by guiding the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the vertically reversing effect device 770 to this guide path, the vertically reversing device 770 moves in the front and rear direction. It is configured to move up and down while being displaced. This vertical displacement will be explained below.

52(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 52(a) and 52(b), the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

53(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 53(a) and 53(b), an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

54(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 54(a) and 54(b), the extended state of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated.

The lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in Figures 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described. In this description, Figures 28, 30, and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

At the start of driving force transmission from the production standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. The same thing also holds true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, so that the displacement resistance that the gear cam member 734 receives in the rotational direction from the pivot arm member 720 is maximized, making it easier to stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in Figures 52 to 54, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is arranged on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-to-rear direction as it is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is due to the configuration in which the rotary cylinder part 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751, and the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the up/down reversal effect device 770. This is reduced by the configuration in which the two horizontal plates 774c are guided by the rotary cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740.

That is, the pair of rotating cylinder parts 774e include a receiving slope part 762 and a front upper slope part 714, 751 arranged in symmetrical positions (the front upper slope part 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, (see), and by rolling the rotating cylinder part 774e around the cylindrical part 774d, displacement is performed along the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751. Displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotating cylinder parts 745b aligned in the front-rear direction, the front rotating cylinder part 745b is designed to be positioned slightly upward, which helps to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771, thereby preventing the rotating cylinder part 774e from applying excessive load to the receiving inclined part 762 and the front upper inclined parts 714, 751.

That is, in this embodiment, the center of gravity position (rotation axis position) of the presentation device 780 is designed to be located slightly forward of the longitudinal center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always tilted forward due to gravity. biased in the direction. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c tend to be displaced such that the front side goes down and the rear side goes up.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the first horizontal plate 774b when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b descends is disposed slightly upward, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the second horizontal plate 774c when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c ascends is disposed slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b because there is a gap between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b because there is a gap between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. This allows the rotating cylinder portion 745b to roll normally, and reduces the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The displacement of the lift-up/down reversing device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the geometrical guidance described above. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the forward/backward displacement can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the lift-up/down reversing device 770 is displaced toward the front side compared to the downward displacement.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement becomes relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but the longitudinal displacement in this case can be assisted by the biasing force of coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required for upwardly displacing the vertically reversing effect device 770.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it is its natural length in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 53) of the second operating unit 700. In other words, when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned lower than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that assists the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 731, whereas when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned higher than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770.

Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to drive from the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, the stop timing may be slightly less than ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate presentation state by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Furthermore, for example, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal when stop control is performed in the same way, the second operation unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and the downward movement due to its own weight will be due to the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, it is possible to move the second operation unit 700 toward the intermediate presentation state and maintain the arrangement.

Further, for example, when controlling the drive motor 731 from the extended state of the second operating unit 700 and controlling the drive motor 731 to stop so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the vertical reversal effect device 770 When it passes below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, so that it can be easily prevented from being displaced downward to a greater extent than in the intermediate effect state. Even after the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop, the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state by applying the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Here, the effect of the vertically reversing effect device 770 by displacing it in the front and back direction along with the vertical movement will be explained. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it moves in and out of a frame bordered by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of view.

Most of these movable gadgets are designed with an emphasis on how they look when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, appearance is often not taken into consideration, under the assumption that they will not attract the player's attention.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the edge of the field of view when viewing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the inside of the center frame 86, , the line of sight reaches to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the gaming area), so if the movable accessory retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 looks bad, the player's It may reduce interest.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, decorative surfaces are formed not only on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also on the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and top and bottom sides (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and second secondary decorative surface 787b2 in FIG. 52), and the displacement direction of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is set to a line that starts from the player side (front side) as it approaches the back side (sloping downward as it approaches the rear), that is, along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, so that each decorative surface can easily fit within the player's field of vision.

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be comfortably within the player's field of vision. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the decorations (figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 54) that is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54) and the upper side (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, first sub-decorative surface 787a2 in FIG. 52) that is visible to the player in the performance standby state (see FIG. 52) are formed as decorations that are related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other. The first decoration and the second decoration are formed as mutually different decorations.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is positioned in the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 26) located behind it when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for a performance, so it is easily visible when the player moves their gaze to switch between paying attention to the ball flowing down the play area formed outside the center frame 86 (see Figure 2) and paying attention to the display performance unfolding on the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "Chance" or "Big Win") that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state can be visible to the player through the upper surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state.

This allows the third pattern display device 81 to be displaced to a standby state for easier viewing, while the covering member 787, which is positioned so as not to be conspicuous, can continue to attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, as will be described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatably displaceable to switch the decorative surface facing the player, the content of the decorative surface that is visible to the player in the extended state differs. cases can arise.

For example, if the up/down reversal performance device 770 is placed in the performance standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (if missed or the operating speed is excessively fast), If the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the side, most of the front side of the decorative surface will be hidden by the game board 13 in the performance standby state, so the player cannot see the contents of the decorative surface displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The user is forced to pay attention to the liquid crystal display, and the attention paid to the covering member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, when adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped from the upper side as in the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the up/down reversal performance device 770 in the performance standby state, and the Through the installation member 787, the player can grasp the contents of the decorations (notification contents, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that were visible to the player.

As a result, for players who miss the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 can be continuously notified by the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. This makes it possible to maintain high attention to the covering member 787 regardless of the state, such as the performance standby state or the extended state.

In this embodiment, the forward/rearward displacement of the lifting/reversing effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is configured as a displacement from a state in which it is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface of the play area to a position forward of the rear end surface of the play area.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the front of the covering member 787 faces the back of the plate of the center frame 86, and the center frame 86 has a flow path forming portion 86a formed to protrude toward the covering member 787.

The flow path forming portion 86a is a portion that forms the rear portion of the guide flow path for guiding the ball that has flown down the lower rolling surface of the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 after reaching the lower edge of the center frame 86, to the first winning opening 64 disposed in the play area by swinging the ball backward once and then forward again (see FIG. 9). In other words, the flow path forming portion 86a positions the rear end surface BE1 of the play area rearward of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Because a ball that flows down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning port 64, the flow path forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, and especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86, the flow path forming portion 86a is likely to attract the player's attention. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, making it easy to configure a state in which the performance device 780 in the performance standby state comes into the player's field of vision.

When the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

In other words, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time is displaced toward the front so as to enter a front-to-rear position that is the same as the front-to-rear position of the play area. Therefore, it can be made to appear to the player that the covering member 787 has climbed onto the center frame 86 and is moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is raised and lowered, the performance device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear position of its front end face is configured to match (coincide) with the front-to-rear position of the second performance surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

As a result, the front-to-back positions of the second performance surface 661b (see Figure 29) of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 (Figure 30) of the second operating unit 700, which are positioned close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state, are aligned, making it easier to visually recognize them as a single unit.

On the other hand, since the arrangement of the production device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate production state or production standby state than the arrangement in the extended state, the box-shaped member of the first operating unit 600 is lower than the arrangement in the extended state. 661 and the production device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

The elevating and reversing effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 includes a lower long portion 772 formed long in the left-right direction, a cylindrical insertion tube portion 773 that protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 toward the back side, a pair of guide extension portions 774 that extend from both left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 to the back side, an upper long portion 775 that is formed integrally with the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 and formed long in the left-right direction by a connecting portion that extends up and down, a plurality of guide portions 776 that are arranged on both left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 to the back side and are configured to be able to guide the linear plate member 784 of the performance device 780 in the left-right direction, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the left-right center of the upper long portion 775 and can support the drive transmission device, and a light-emitting performance means 778 that is fastened and fixed to the front sides of the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775.

The insertion cylindrical part 773 is a part that is inserted into the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a size relationship that allows it to slide on the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-back direction. That is, by inserting the insertion cylindrical portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the elevating plate member 740.

The guide extension part 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width is oriented in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction is oriented in the horizontal direction, and a width larger than the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction is oriented in the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side, and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a. A pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d are provided, and a rotary cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so as to extend inwardly from the width direction end portions of the first horizontal plate 774b. In the assembled state, the widthwise expanding portion is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction, and by abutting against each other, tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward is suppressed. That is, by securing the width and length to such an extent that the second horizontal plate 774c is disposed vertically opposite to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740, the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward with respect to the elevating plate member 740 can be achieved. can be suppressed.

The cylindrical portions 774d are not arranged in pairs in the vertical direction, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is disposed shifted toward the front compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclinations of the front upper inclined parts 714 and 751 are parallel to the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical parts 774d (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclinations of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be brought into contact with the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762 at the same time. can be brought into contact. Thereby, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and local loads can be easily avoided.

The guide portion 776 includes a plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in a vertically aligned pair and having female threads formed on the inner circumference, and a plurality of anti-disengagement plate portions 776b fastened to connect the pair of left and right cylindrical portions 776a.

The fall-off prevention plate portion 776b includes insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes from the back side are screwed into the cylindrical portions 776a. This is a part that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical part 776a, and functions as a part to prevent the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, but the details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position through which the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical protruding portion 777c is provided on the lower side of the insertion hole 777b to protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a pair of insertion holes 777d are formed at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough, and fastened to the back side. A wiring fastening member 777e to be fixed.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and when the fastening screw is screwed into it while it is inserted into the transmission gear 781b, it supports the up-down inversion member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The through hole 777d is designed to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is fastened and fixed to the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw.

The wiring retaining member 777e is a part that holds and secures the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between it and the transmission device retaining plate 777, but by forming it into a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device retaining plate 777, it is also possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device retaining plate 777.

The light emitting device 778 includes two left and right elongated plate-shaped illumination boards 778a, upper and lower, on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-transmitting board 778a arranged on the front side of the illumination boards 778a. A light diffusion member 778b, which is a plate member formed from a plastic resin material and has a light diffusion process formed thereon.

The upper illumination board 778a includes a pair of detection sensors 778d disposed on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the attitude of the vertically inverting member 781 of the production device 780 by disposing an arcuate protrusion 781d in the detection groove. will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened parts formed on the back side, and the fastened parts are inserted from the back side into insertion holes formed in the lower elongated part 772 at corresponding positions. The fastening screws are screwed in and fastened and fixed, making the fastening screws inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has through holes 778c on both the left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws are inserted into the through holes 778c from the front side and screwed into the female threaded portion 775b of the upper long portion 775, thereby fastening and fixing the upper light diffusion member 778b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and there is a possibility that it will be noticeable without countermeasures, but in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always facing the front side of the insertion hole 778c. Since the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, it is possible to increase the design freedom of the insertion direction of the fastening screw.

The production device 780 is a device that has an outer shape disposed around the upper elongated portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-and-down reversing member 781 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. , a drive motor 782 to which a drive gear 782a that transmits a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the up-and-down reversing member 781 is fixed to a drive shaft, and one end at each of both longitudinal ends of the up-down reversing member 781 a pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported; a pair of translational plate members 784 that have the other end of the intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported and whose displacement is guided in the left-right direction by a guide portion 776; A pair of shaft rotating members 785 are arranged between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) about a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotation member 785 is a linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 jointly supported with the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed in a fixed phase to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 in a manner that cannot be removed; Covering members 787 are disposed before and after the end plate member 785d and have a left-right length that covers the left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775.

The vertical reversing member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding from the back side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and a long length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protrude in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the ulnar direction toward the back side, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protrude from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. An arcuate protrusion 781d is provided.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole in the center that extends in the front-rear direction, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side, so that the up-down inversion member 781 is axially supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down reversing member 781. That is, the up-and-down reversing member 781 can be driven to rotate by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end portion of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one side support hole 783a is formed is displaced following the cylindrical protrusion portion 781c that is displaced as the up-and-down reversing member 781 is rotated.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission producing means 778. That is, the arcuate protrusion 781d can be placed on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the up-down reversing member 781 can be changed into two postures: one in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and one in between (the pair of detection sensors 778d (a posture in which the arcuate protrusions 781d are not arranged on both detection grooves).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in the shape of a long rod (narrow plate shape), and has one side support hole 783a bored at one end and pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 781c, A cylindrical other cylindrical portion 783b whose inner circumferential side is formed penetratingly at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b. ).

A female screw is formed on the inner circumference of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw is inserted into the female screw and passed through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side. This allows the intermediate arm member 783 to be pivotally supported by the upside-down member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed into a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protruding portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783; An arcuate plate portion 784b is provided in an arc shape protruding from the center axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, and an elliptical plate portion 784b is provided in an oval shape extending parallel to the left and right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a. a pair of elongated holes 784c, a pair of support plate portions 784d arranged vertically and in parallel at positions between the elongate holes 784c and protruding toward the back side, and an intermediate portion of the support plate portions 784d. A pair of protrusions 784e are formed as protrusions that protrude from opposing sides and extend in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape that opens toward the back side is provided at the end of the support plate portion 784d on the inner peripheral side. A ring-shaped joint is formed between a pair of fastened parts 784f in which female threads are formed, an arrangement hole 784g formed through the cylindrical protruding part 784a and the support plate part 784d, and the shaft supporting member 786. A ring holding half part 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half part 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786. , is provided.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner circumferential diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b. A female thread is formed on the inner circumferential side. That is, the fastening screw inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot be detached from the cylindrical protrusion 784a. It is pivoted on.

The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b so as to face each other radially in the assembled state, limiting the tilt displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b relative to the rotation axis. This makes it possible to stabilize the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a fastening screw is inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b and screwed into the female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a, so that the linear plate member 784 is supported on the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In its supported state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 can be slid along the direction in which the elongated hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e functions as a protrusion for determining the left-right arrangement of the metal rod 785a, but details will be described later.

The placement hole 784g is an opening to avoid interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785, but details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member that is arranged as a left and right pair and is pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784, and includes a metal rod 785a formed from a metal material into a substantially cylindrical shape, and a length of the metal rod 785a. A concave groove 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position of the direction, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783, which is a member disposed at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a. A bevel tooth member 785c in which meshing bevel teeth (bevel gears) are formed, an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and the end plate member 785d. A ring-shaped metal member 785e is arranged around the metal rod 785a in such a manner as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female thread is formed inside the ring-shaped metal member 785e, which is a portion that protrudes from the left and right inner sides of the end plate member 785d. A rotational position stabilizing portion 785f into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear plate member 784, and the protrusion portion 784e is disposed to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured with a dimensional relationship that restricts left-right displacement with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, the diameter of the deep part of the groove of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e, and the diameter of the part where the recessed groove portion 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e.

Thereby, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that allows the metal rod to rotate about its axis and to suppress displacement in the left and right direction.

The bevel member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the bevel tooth member 785c has partially entered the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 causes the bevel tooth portion 783c to mesh with the bevel tooth member 785c. can be assembled into.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear plate member 784, it cannot fall off toward the front side, and its displacement toward the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral shape corresponding to the non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral shape and the metal rod 785a The distal end portions are formed in an interference fit dimensional relationship, so that they are fitted and fixed.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be a method of fastening using an adhesive or the like, or a method of fastening the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a by forming a female thread at the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female thread, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784. By holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e and configuring the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a to be in sliding contact with the inner periphery of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, it is possible to make the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and to reduce the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a.

The rotational position stabilization portion 785f functions as a part that attracts the metal screw to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and includes an insertion hole 786a drilled to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 784f to be inserted therethrough, a ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784, and a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape capable of holding a magnet Mg between the magnet holding half 784i of the linear plate member 784.

When the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole 786a is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear plate member 784 and the pivot member 786, the metal rod 785a is prevented from falling off the plate portion of the pivot member 786 to the back side, the ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with openings on the left and right inner sides, and are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotation member 785, and have different sides on the opposite side. A decoration consisting of figures, patterns, letters, or pictures that can be interpreted with meaning is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), and a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface of the first main decorative surface 787a1. When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is formed on the side that is visible to the player, and the back surface thereof is A second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed. Note that the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed on a side that is visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members that are formed from two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d, and are formed in a substantially box shape with left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It includes a plurality of extending portions 787c that extend toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d that is recessed in a portion between the extending portions 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides. .

The extensions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are disposed close to each other when the covering members 787 are disposed close to each other (see FIG. 26). This allows the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be visually recognized as a single unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion for visibly opening up the circular portion located at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light-emitting performance means 778 and the arc plate portion at the upper center of the left and right of the upper long portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in a close arrangement state (see Figure 26), and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

With the operation of the presentation device 780, the covering member 787 has two states: a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and a state in which the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52); The state can be switched between the decorative surface 787b1 facing the front side and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing upward (see FIG. 30). First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that changes the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-and-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785. FIG. 57(a) shows a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an erect vertical arrangement state) of the up-and-down reversible member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. 57(b) ) shows a state in which the up-down reversing member 781 has been rotated approximately 24 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In the inverted vertical arrangement state where the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the up-down reversing member 781 is in an upright vertical arrangement state or an inverted vertical arrangement state, and the audio lamp control is performed from the output of the detection sensor 778d. Device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of presentation device 780.

As shown in Figures 57(a) and 57(b), when the upside-down member 781 is rotated, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the axial rotation member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the amount of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 and the axial rotation member 785.

Here, we will explain the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur. These displacements do not occur simultaneously and to the same extent, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, an overview will be given. The configuration of the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 is a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down reversing member 781 rotates around the cylindrical projection 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical projection 781c of the up-down reversing member 781, rotates from the front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so that it moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed. The pair of left and right translational plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in left and right opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b has been displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction by the time it is rotated approximately 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (see FIG. 55) (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends) Illustrated as

Further, due to the state change from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the attitude change around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in front view. The angle is suppressed to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, load transmission (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is performed at opposing positions in the front-rear direction, that is, , occurs on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

Figure 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and Figure 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 (displaced upward in FIG. 58(b)). Note that in FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown as overlapping, and this overlap width is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the up-and-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. rotate in the direction of rotation.

Note that while the up-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly, the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is twice the angle of rotation around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to the pressure caused by the displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear tooth, and the bevel tooth member This is not enough to reliably rotate the 785c gear teeth. In other words, the amount of displacement required for the abutting representative tooth to rotate to the arrangement of the adjacent tooth (according to the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c being arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation by an angle of 30 degrees) quantity).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the displacement accompanied by the pressure is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, and the orientation of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotational direction is maintained from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. 57(b).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c causes the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f ( (See FIG. 54) is caused by opposing adsorption forces.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to restrict the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction. The right shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785.

For the left-side axial rotation member 785, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is disposed in front of the end plate member 785d, as on the right side, while the magnet Mg is disposed on the upper side, the opposite of the right side (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilization portion 785f, and the left-side axial rotation member 785 receives a backward biasing force from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left-side axial rotation member 785.

In this embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg is designed to generate a load that exceeds the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a).

This causes elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). Then, when the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attraction force of the magnet Mg, and the relationship between the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f increases. As the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, which are released from the attraction force of the magnet Mg, are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

As a result, when rotation starts, the elastic recovery increases the momentum of the axial rotation member 785 in the rotational direction, and the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This increase in rotation speed occurs not only in the axial rotation member 785, but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the axial rotation member 785.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the speed of the operation of the cover member 787 without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, so while reducing the burden of control design for the drive motor 782, the effect of the cover member 787 can be adjusted. The effect can be improved.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs can be delayed by the attraction force of the magnet Mg from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. .

The rotational position stabilization parts 785f that receive the attractive force of the magnet Mg are configured as a pair, one above the other; when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, one of the rotational position stabilization parts 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the orientation is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, the other (see FIG. 52(b), the upper) rotational position stabilization part 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is applied to the shaft rotating member at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30). This effectively acts to limit the rotational displacement of 785. Therefore, upon displacement from the closely disposed state, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 can be delayed by the magnetic force regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58(a) to the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the vertical reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in the front view beyond the position shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment, the slider crank mechanism is used as described above, and so the same action occurs. That is, near the vertical position, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 is large and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down inversion member 781 is tilted closer to the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 becomes smaller and the amount of rotation becomes larger. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 becomes smaller and the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the rotational movement of the upside-down member 781, which starts from a vertically disposed state and ends in a vertically disposed state, first the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases, then the degree of rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 increases, and again the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases.

Due to the linear displacement and rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 (see FIG. 55). Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be explained.

Figures 59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the performance device 780. Figures 59(a) to 59(c) show the inversion operation of the lift-and-lower inversion performance device 770 in chronological order. Figure 59(a) shows the performance device 780 in an upright vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an upright position, Figure 59(b) shows the performance device 780 when the upside-down member 781 has been rotated 90 degrees from the vertical position, and Figure 59(c) shows the performance device 780 in an inverted vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an inverted position.

The vertical inversion member 781 changes its state from an erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)) to an inverted vertical arrangement state by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is reversed by 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59(c)).

The vertical inversion member 781 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front from the inverted vertical arrangement state to return to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)). Therefore, the reversing operation changes between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. ) The state can be repeatedly switched between the states shown in ).

As described above, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the axial rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 783c. Here, based on the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward direction. In other words, the pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the right covering member 787 has the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing the front side, and the left covering member 787 has the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 facing the front side (see FIG. 59(b)). ).

This makes it possible to prevent the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 from being viewed in unison during rotational displacement of the covering member 787.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have misaligned content on the left and right, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize, so the amount of information provided to the player by the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced.

This can reduce the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. Furthermore, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, the game can be played until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. This also has the effect of making it easier to maintain the person's line of sight on the covering member 787.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 change to the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the first main decorative surface 787a1). When the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the production device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is unlikely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the visibility to the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is It will be blocked by unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for presentation (see FIG. 52) and the presentation device 780 is positioned below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes more easily visible to the player.

In this manner, in the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen all together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and By preventing the side from facing the side, it does not attract attention, and is formed as a side that can attract the attention of players in the performance standby state.

As a result, the appearance of the second action unit 700 can be changed depending on the arrangement, so the production performance is excessively low relative to the cost of arranging the second action unit 700 (occupying space, burden of hiding well). This makes it easier to avoid the situation from occurring.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f attracts the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787. It is possible to aim for

In this embodiment, the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, which reduces material costs and improves maintainability compared to designing a dedicated metal member.

As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 involves linear displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the presentation device 780 that can perform rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, by performing rotational displacement, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member disposed on the left and right 750, the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixedly disposed on the front side thereof collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (see FIG. 30), space is secured in the left-right direction, making it possible to perform rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is controlled so as to be executable on the premise that it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state. This allows the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 to occur normally.

The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other when the up-down reversing member 781 is vertically arranged, and in this state, are arranged opposite to the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 in front and rear. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement around the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension portion 787c will collide with the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772, A problem occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close together produces the effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be seen as one, and is a necessary configuration for production. It is preferable that it can be maintained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 in advance before rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). The linear displacement of length L1 allows the extension 787c to be retracted from the front-rear position of the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, and the problem of collision between the extension 787c and the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 can be avoided.

In addition, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, no rotational displacement occurs (or is limited) in the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2, so that the amount of left-right displacement of the covering member 787 during rotation can be kept small.

As a result, compared to the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention of the covering member 787 can be kept low, and rotational displacement can be made less noticeable, so each decoration Since the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2 can be designed without considering their appearance during rotational displacement, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts to rotate can be set arbitrarily by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, even if a design change occurs to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the performance device 780 can be kept the same, but by changing the magnet Mg to a magnet with a stronger attractive force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extension portion 787c, as in this embodiment.

As shown in phantom lines in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from lowering the performance effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787, so the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical to match the left and right decorations.

In other words, since the fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 778c, it becomes impossible to place an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see Figure 55). Also, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is easy to see it as being dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to position the insertion holes 778c in the decorations on the left and right, avoiding areas that need to be brightly lit and highlighted, and as a result, the placement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

It is of course permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, if the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identical, there is no disadvantage to arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the design of the illumination board 778a can be made easier.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the center of the light diffusing member 778b is replaced by the extending portion 787c. Even in a state where it is not surrounded by the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and other mechanical parts are hidden from view.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is The shape is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right long parts of the upper long part 775 disposed in the upper long part 775. Further, the vertical reversing member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disc portion of the upper elongated portion 775 disposed on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement locus fits within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

This allows the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the performance device 780 to be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, thereby preventing a reduction in the performance effect due to the appearance of the performance device 780 during the reversal operation.

Returning to FIG. 26 for further explanation, the third operating unit 800 is a unit that is positioned above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the performance standby state, is supported at the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510, and is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered as the lifting arm members 801 are driven in the vertical direction.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 60 and 61, the portions that make up the displacement of the third operation unit 800 are illustrated, and the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed on the outside are not illustrated.

60 and 61, the third operating unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by a lifting arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened to the center of the held member 810, an inner rotating member 830 journaled on the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted into the inner periphery, an outer rotating member 840 journaled on the main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members housed in the held member 810 and for transmitting a drive force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 comprises a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing part 812 which is recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical part 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw for fixing is inserted and a through hole through which an electric wiring is inserted. , a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove facing the side that can receive the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840; and a motor holding portion 814 that holds the drive motor 861. A plurality of cylindrical protrusions 815 protrude from the front side as cylindrical parts that pivotally support the transmission gear 863 in a non-removable manner, and a double cylindrical part that pivotally supports the load response gear 865 in a non-removable manner on the front side. A plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 are provided.

The perforated lid member 817 includes a circular hole 818 bored in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from the inner peripheral edge thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting device such as an LED that is fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822 and has a light emitting device such as an LED on the front side. A disk-shaped illumination board 823 and an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting plate made of a light-transmitting resin material that can cover the illumination board 823 from the front side. It includes a decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and configured to be slidable on the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical part 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fixing the fixed cylinder. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 in a non-rotatable manner.

The cylindrical part 821 is formed to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and through this penetrating part, the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 is routed to the front side and arranged behind the illumination board 823. Connected to the connector.

The illumination board 823 has an inner light emitting part 823a arranged as an LED at the vertices of a pentagon and a central position equidistant from these vertices, and an outer light emitting part 823b arranged at 15 places at equal intervals on the circumference. and. The inner light emitting section 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting section 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diametrically).

The outer light emitting section 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting part 823b is irradiated onto the plating parts 871a of the first decorative members 870 that are arranged closely to each other at equal intervals on the circumference. The member 870 will be irradiated with light from the three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle as an axis, but since the outer light-emitting unit 823b and the first decorative member 870 are arranged at equal intervals on the same axis of the circle, light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) can always be irradiated onto each first decorative member 870, regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the amount of light LD1 irradiated to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 has an inner diameter side configured to be slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, and an outer diameter side portion configured to be slidable on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. is formed.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical portion that projects rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion. Since the diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, it is slidably fitted into the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 between them, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 that is configured to be rotatable around it is prevented. In addition, by disposing the sliding member 825 on the side that has the advantage in terms of strength, that is, the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load generated during sliding or poor sliding (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 includes a cylindrical main body part 831 having a circular flange-like part 831a at the front end, and a longitudinal direction in the radial direction at a position where the circumference of the main body part 831 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 are fastened and fixed to the circular flange-like portion 831a in a parallel position, and a plurality of metal rods 832 are formed so that they can be inserted therethrough and are configured to be guided by the metal rods 832 so that they can be linearly displaced. A linear motion member 833 and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer side of the translation member 833.

The main body portion 831 includes the above-mentioned circular flange-like portion 831a and a plurality of sliding protrusions that extend rearward in a protrusion shape with the circular flange-like portion 831a as a base end at angular positions (5 locations) between adjacent metal rods 832. A plurality of recessed portions 831c are provided at the opposite end of the circular flange portion 831a at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The sliding protrusion 831b is a portion configured to be able to slide on the inner curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and is designed to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction. The protruding tip is formed to have a semicircular cross section.

The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above, but in other words, the sliding protrusion 831b is placed at the angular position on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840. position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation described below and the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is journaled is subjected to a load that displaces it radially outward, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion portion 831b, so the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830 can be maintained low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted, and by disposing the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, mutual relative rotation is disabled. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b that are spaced apart from each other in the linear motion direction and that protrude cylindrically toward the rear, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c that is formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 based on the cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b and is inserted into the rotating member 834, and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed in the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c.

The recessed groove 833d is located on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction by slidingly fitting the protruding portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 onto the outside, as will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in the shape of a bevel gear, and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude in a cylindrical shape parallel to the translational direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over ¾ of the circumference (approximately 270 degrees) necessary for operation.

The cylindrical protruding portion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumferential side, and the decorative members 870, 880 can be inserted by screwing the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880. It functions to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body 841 and a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) extending outward in the radial direction at positions where the circumference of the main body 841 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. The extended arm portion 842 of the main body portion 841, the gear teeth 843 formed on the outer circumferential side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body portion 841, and the diameter of the main body portion 841 are arranged such that they can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. A detected portion 844 extending outward is provided.

The extended arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By inserting the cylindrical portion 842a into the side rod portion 851 and inserting a fastening screw into the female thread, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and function as a part that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, as will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member and includes a base end rod portion 851 whose one end is supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, a thickened portion 852 which is thickened toward the front side at the other end of the base end rod portion 851, a tip end rod portion 853 which extends parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base end rod portion 851 from the front end of the thickened portion 852, and a rotation transmission portion 854 which is formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip end rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that links with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a that is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows the cylindrical protrusion 833a to rotate with respect to each other when inserted therethrough, a guide hole 854b that is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and that guides the cylindrical protrusion 833b when inserted therethrough, and a bevel gear part 854c that is formed in a bevel gear shape with the supported hole 854a as the central axis and that forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel gear part 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, a plurality of transmission gears 863 supported on the cylindrical protrusion portion 815 so as not to fall off and meshed to be able to transmit a driving force via the drive gear 862, a central ring gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, a pair of load response gears 865 positioned forward of the central ring gear 864 and supported on the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 so as not to fall off, and a torque limiter 866 supported on the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865 and whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

The central annular gear 864 is formed into an annular shape, and is designed to allow the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 to be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and has a recess so that it can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a protrudes from the bottom plate toward the front side with an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation part 831c, and a coaxial double ring-shaped bottom plate disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a. and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the front side.

In the assembled state, when the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed part 831c, the rear end of the main body part 831 of the inner rotary member 830 is placed in the gap between the support annular parts 864b in a dimensional relationship such that it is an intermediate fit. Or they are fitted with an interference fit dimension. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

The arrangement of the recessed portions 831c and the transmission protrusions 864a is not limited in any way. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or they may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are equally spaced, the assembly can be done quickly by matching the positions of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed part 831c without considering the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864. It becomes possible to do so. As in this embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (same at 72 degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are Since it is thought that the influence of displacement during assembly is small, it is effective to set them at equal intervals.

If the intervals are unequal, the assembly process requires an additional step of aligning the central annular gear 864 with the inner rotating member 830 before assembly; however, the positioning of the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864.

The load response gear 865 is arranged so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. A torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, so that the load response gear 865 can be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is restricted (limited) depending on the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, and the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) that transmits driving force in one direction is configured as a set with the transmission direction being reversed, and the switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

Figure 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800, and Figure 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800. Note that Figures 62 and 63 show decorative parts of the third action unit 800, and omit the illustration of parts that configure the displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is fastened and fixed to the above-described inner rotating member 830 and the cylindrical protruding portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830, and is fixed to one of the cylindrical protruding portions 834b. It includes a first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the side opposite to the first decorative member 870. .

The first decorative member 870 comprises a first skeletal portion 871 that is formed so as to be fastened to the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 that is formed so as to cover one side of the first skeletal portion 871.

The first skeletal portion 871 is entirely plated and is configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered portion 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and its surface is decorated with figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc."), and when the surface is facing forward, the designs, etc. are visible to the player.

In this embodiment, a plurality of (five) first covered portions 875 each have an independent pattern or the like drawn thereon. Therefore, by changing the first covered part 875 that emits strong light through light emission control by the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered part 875, the patterns that attract the attention of players can be made different. can be set.

For example, at the same time when the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect that draws attention to which first covered portion 875 is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 side from the player's perspective, the inner rotating member 830 If it is controlled to rotate, the first covering part 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed as the rotation stops, so that the player can The line of sight can be focused on the first covered portion 875.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton part 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a second covering part 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton part 881. , is provided.

The second skeleton portion 881 has a retaining piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so that it cannot fall off.

A metal screw is screwed into the second covering part 885 at a position (close position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering part 885 acts, and the magnet Mg2 is attracted to this metal screw, thereby ensuring the integrity of the second covering part 885 in the combined state (particularly the combined state, see Figure 32).

The second covered part 885 has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the designs, etc. make it visible to the person.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the plurality (in this embodiment, five) of the second covering parts 885 are grouped by the plurality of (at least two, maximum of five) second covering parts 885. The pattern etc. is configured so that when the five second covering parts 885 form a combined state, each second covering part 885 is shaped like a circle so that it is visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front. It is decorated so that it forms part of the body.

Although the pattern etc. drawn on the second covering part 885 is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the content grasped from the second covering part 885 in the serially combined state is the direction of rotation of the second decorative member 880. The design is such that there is no big difference even if the arrangement of the two is different. That is, the design does not have clear vertical and horizontal directions as a pattern, but has a design in which the outer shape does not change noticeably even when rotated (in this embodiment, it is circular).

Therefore, if the second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, the presentation performance can be improved when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covering portions 885 are firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side can be improved.

In addition, in each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is disposed on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the orientation of the second covering portion 885 is reversed front to back by the switching rotation operation described below, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screws that each magnet Mg2 attracts are simply replaced with metal screws that are screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacently provided on the opposite side, and the five second covering portions 885 are Since the portion 885 is arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when integrated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first covered portion 875 does not accommodate a magnet. As a result, the strength of the integration on the side of the first covered portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this is intended to avoid deterioration in presentation performance.

In other words, since each of the first covered parts 875 has an independent picture drawn on it, even if the degree of integration in the combined state is weak and the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly shifted, the game There is no possibility that the person will not be able to recognize the pattern etc. that is visible to the user. Therefore, it is possible to avoid deterioration in performance of the performance using the picture drawn on the first covering part 875.

Furthermore, since the strength of the integration on the first covered part 875 side is weak, vibrations that occur due to vertical displacement (stopping from) and rotational displacement (stopping from) as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation. ), the arrangement of the combined first covered portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering part 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be achieved with a conventional machine in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but a single circular member. It is possible to improve the effect of the production by the covering part 875.

In view of the above, in the combined state in which multiple decorative members 870, 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces forward is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the state in which the second decorative member 880 faces forward is also referred to as the united state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual combined state and the united state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a), 66(b), 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

Figures 64 to 67 show in chronological order the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see Figure 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the diagrams are illustrated in chronological order from rear and front views, showing how the inner rotating member 830 rotates 45 degrees at a time from the individual combined state (Figures 64(a) and 66(a)).

In addition, in Figures 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is depicted as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. In addition, the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (Figures 64 (a) and 66 (a)) is illustrated as angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotational operation is also referred to as a "switching rotational operation" hereinafter), the intermediate Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotation member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotation member 840. In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the above-mentioned configuration between the members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the translational member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, The change in the arrangement of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmission section 854 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830, and is also displaced in the circumferential direction, so that the rotation supported by the rotation transmission section 854 Similarly, the member 834 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and at the same time, it is displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened thereto are not fixed even at the radial end position, and the circumferential displacement can be maintained. Therefore, compared to a case where the displacement is completed only by radial linear displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700), the presentation effect during the switching rotation operation can be maintained at a high level.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, a rotational movement with high acceleration is generated using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58). , the arrangement of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the translational direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is intended to weaken the impression that it is fixed.

In other words, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased, and even in a situation where a period in which the change in left-right position is small continues at the end of the left-right outward displacement (a period near the dead point of the slider crank), the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high dramatic effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is likely that a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and the rotational axis of the outer rotating member 840 may become misaligned. In the embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) about the axis of rotation, so that each load cancels out the other. This makes it possible to suppress misalignment of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840, thereby making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (expansion/contraction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by a circumferential rotation. Therefore, in order to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 is controlled so that it can be executed when the output of the detection sensor that determines the posture of the lifting arm member 801 indicates that the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In addition, with the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmission part 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened to the rotating member 834 are also displaced radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displaced circumferentially.

When the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel teeth portion 854c (see Figures 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel teeth portion 834a (see Figure 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 rotate around the metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32, which is the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 based on the imaginary position line 832F. In addition, the direction of rotation is set to the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F, since the angle θ32 increases as it moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the rotating member 834 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60).

Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integral rotation state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (in this embodiment, 180 When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the maximum angle θ32E (in this embodiment, 90 degrees) due to the rotation of ).

In other words, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. It does not cause any effect that slows down the rotation.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832. As a result, a gap may be created between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the suction force may be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 begins, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and there is no effect of slowing down the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the drive motor 861 can be made smaller.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and finished early, the degree of attention of the player to the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The promptness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 to be non-constant with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, if the rotation angle of the imaginary position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is in a contracted position and can rotate together is 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and if the imaginary position line 832F rotates a further 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from a state in which integral rotation is possible than during rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, turn the intermediate arm member 850, and rotate the decorative members 870, 880. However, due to the above-described configuration, the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which they can rotate together, so that it is possible to avoid placing an excessively large burden on the drive motor 861 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting the position in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during rotational displacement. can. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connection surfaces between the first covered portion 875 and the second covered portion 885) are visible, and the decorative members 870, 880 It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the side part of the

When performing the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. It also overlaps with the extension arm portion 842 adjacent to the extension arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which it is supported is disposed. Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by arranging the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal end rod portion 851 and the distal end side rod portion 851 are arranged on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 can be made to overlap in the front and rear, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

Furthermore, by arranging the proximal rod portion 851 on the front side of the extended arm portion 842 and the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the extended arm portion 842, the switching rotation operation can be controlled. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged before and after the extended arm portion 842, and a collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is the direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction in front view in the individually combined state, see FIG. 66). ). In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, thereby receiving resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the reverse direction described above (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state), or if the rotation in the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state) continues even after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted (for example, it reaches a combined state from an individual combined state), a load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that restricts the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, the position maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously.

In other words, regardless of the direction of rotation, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, if the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction that continues to restrict the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "integral rotational movement").

The integral rotational movement occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, the integral rotational movement occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are disposed close to each other in a combined state.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation action in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the integral rotation action can be performed in the performance standby state of the third operation unit 800. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation action is controlled so that it can be performed regardless of the position of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) allows the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to perform the switching rotation operation accompanied by the displacement in the radial direction, and the expanding operation. The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without radial displacement, and any operation can be performed in both driving directions, but there is a priority order of operation. However, it is not possible to immediately perform any operation in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), a switching rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and an integral rotation operation can be performed by continuing the rotation in this state. Also, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, but an integral rotation operation cannot be performed immediately by rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In addition, for example, if the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Figures 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted, and then the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (reverse) as viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is performed again, and it is not possible to immediately perform the integral rotation operation in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

In this way, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated or allowed with respect to the rotational direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacement of inner rotating member 830 and outer rotating member 840 changes.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated or allowed for each rotational direction of the drive motor 861. Based on the determination result, it is possible to drive the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal performance and the reverse performance as the performance control of the third operation unit 800.

During a reversal presentation, an operation including a switching rotational operation is executed, and during a normal presentation, an operation not including a switching rotational operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the third operating unit 800 is extended and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed, and after the state of the moving parts is determined from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control for normal performance is executed. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870, 880 collide with surrounding decorative members, even if the state of the moving parts cannot be determined from the output of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on.

The drive directions of the drive motor 861 are shown as forward rotation and reverse rotation. Forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a united rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))), and reverse rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, drive control during normal performance before reaching the reversal performance will be explained. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally.

Since no switching rotational movement occurs, no collisions with surrounding decorative members occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or an extended state at any time. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being raised and lowered by the up and down movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be controlled to rotate together at the same time as the lifting and lowering movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together when the position of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the lifting arm member 801 may be raised and lowered when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 stop rotating together.

Since the drive motor 861 has a forward rotation direction only, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detectable portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. By determining this output switch, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of drive time from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be controlled to stop in any position.

Next, the drive control during the reversal performance will be described. First, during the reversal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating forward until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. Due to the reverse rotation drive, the third operation unit 800 performs a switching rotation operation, but during this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

If the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotation direction, a united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 begin to rotate together. After the start of the united rotation, the outer rotating member 840 also begins to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have begun to rotate together due to the switch in the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only reverse rotation drive control is performed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the reverse performance to the normal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is moved downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is placed in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in reverse until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched to determine that the detected part 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the forward direction. When the drive is in the forward direction, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are rotated together. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 starts rotating, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation starts, the performance transitions back to normal. The restrictions on drive control during this normal performance are the same as those described for the normal performance that preceded the above-mentioned reverse performance.

In this way, according to this embodiment, a single detection sensor 813 can be used to determine the switching of the rotation mode of the third operating unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the reference rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. Therefore, the number of detection sensors 813 required can be reduced compared to when individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from a state in which the integral rotation operation continues or a state in which the rotation is stopped. In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the united combined state.

Therefore, in the case of controlling to switch to the series combination state at the timing of the jackpot announcement in the motion performance, it is possible to avoid the player guessing whether or not there will be a jackpot announcement based on the attitude of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration in the united state is designed so that what is perceived by the player does not vary significantly depending on the arrangement of the rotational direction of the second decorative member 880. In other words, even if the arrangement of the rotational direction of the decorative members 870, 880 is different at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content that is perceived by the player as the united state at the end of the switching rotation operation can be the same.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the series combination state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, it is possible to omit the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the series combination state, so the first decorative member in the individual combination state Regardless of the attitude of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

In this manner, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both forward rotation and reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

FIG. 69 is a sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 extends from the rear end where the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end where the illumination board 823 is arranged. Electric wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and terminals are connected to connectors provided on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, so that the LEDs arranged on the illumination board 823 can be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side at the center side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a part that is visible to the player at the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated to the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged in the front, and acts to illuminate the decorative members 870, 880 from the inside.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) where the decorative member 870 is placed on the front side and a series combined state (see FIG. 32) where the decorative member 880 is placed on the front side. Therefore, the light LD1 can be used to switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side by being reflected to the front side by the plated part 871a of the first skeleton part 871. Thereby, most of the light LD1 can be irradiated toward the first covering part 875, and the brightness of the first covering part 875 when the light LD1 is irradiated can be favorably increased.

Here, in this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around it, so that the illumination direction of the light LD1 and the decorative members 870 and 880 are different. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by rotating the decorative members 870, 880. For example, during rotation, the light LD1 may be irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a, or the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first covering part 875 caused by the light LD1 will easily change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and the decorative members 870, 880 will be rotated integrally while emitting light at a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to carry out the effect that the user wants.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the shape of the plated portion 871a, which is configured to be able to reflect the light LD1, is concave, the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination substrate 823, and the center of the concave shape is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

The light LD1 is positioned so that its optical axis faces the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is positioned. As a result, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a and travels toward the center of the radius of curvature, illuminating the vicinity of the center of each of the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a based on the outer light emitting portion 823b, the multiple lights LD1 can be reflected to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875. This allows light to be irradiated stably near the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 can be viewed with uniform brightness even during integral rotation.

Furthermore, the first skeleton part 871 is a part to which a plating process is performed in the same way as the plating process to the plating part 871a, and has an outer plating part 871b disposed outside the first covered part 875 when viewed from the front. Be prepared. The light LD1 is also reflected by the outer plating part 871b as well as the plating part 871a, but since the outer plating part 871b is arranged at the rear compared to the arrangement of the plating part 871a, the light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b. The degree of illumination can be weakened.

This avoids a situation where the intensity of the light visible outside the first covering part 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing the visibility inside the frame of the first covering part 875. be able to.

The illumination board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely closed, so all of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b is directed inside. It is not intended to be irradiated.

First, in FIG. 69, the internal structure is visible between the member edge 875a of the first covering part 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering part 885, which is arranged opposite to the member edge 875a. A gap VA1 of a certain size is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b protrudes outward from the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

Moreover, there is a gap between the member outer end 875b of the first covering part 875 and the member outer end 885b of the second covering part 885, which are arranged to face the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 is formed which exceeds the area required to avoid this.

The gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of, first, avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring that the length of the metal rod 832 is sufficient, and ensuring that the metal rod 832 can guide the linear displacement of the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834.

Secondly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembly path for the fastening screw that is inserted into the skeletal parts 871, 881 and screwed into the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the rotating member 834 to fasten and fix the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834.

Furthermore, thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to proceed. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through equally spaced positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is visible as a light.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can also be rotated in the same way. This makes it unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b (for example, keeping all lights on), and the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emission mode.

In the integrated state (see FIG. 32), the second skeleton part 881 is entirely formed of a translucent resin material, thereby suppressing the reflection effect of the second skeleton part 881 on the light LD1.

As a result, only the light (weak light) of the light LD1 that is far from the optical axis is irradiated within the frame of the second covering portion 885, so the intensity of the light emitted by the second covering portion 885 can be weakened. On the other hand, the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, so the intensity of the light radiating out radially from the center of rotation of the third operating unit 800 can be improved.

A light diffusion decorative portion 885c is formed from a colored (in this embodiment, the color of the circular body is set to an arbitrary color) light-transmitting resin material and is arranged around the circumference of the frame of the second covering portion 885, with light diffusion processing formed on the inside. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light that is incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusion decorative portion 885c to emit surface light.

This surface emitting makes it possible to make the light visible through the light-diffusing decorative portions 885c disposed in the circumferential direction uniform, and each of the light-diffusing decorative portions of the five second decorative members 880 885c can be visually recognized as an integral part by the player.

As mentioned above, the more firmly the second covering portions 885 can be integrated together, the better the presentation performance when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. This integration can be achieved by making the light-diffusing decorative portion 885c visually appear as if it is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. This therefore improves the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side.

The outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end face 885b1 that is adjacent to (contacts) the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 based on the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the united state (see FIG. 32), the degree to which the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 located on the rear side comes into the player's field of vision can be reduced, thereby reducing the impact on the presentation.

This makes it easier to prevent the color of the first covering part 875 from coming into view when the frame of the first covering part 875 and the frame of the second covering part 885 are colored in different colors and the second covering part 885 is positioned in front.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is placed in the extended state by itself in the combined state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where the other operating units 600 and 700 are both extended (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operating unit 800, and it is easy for the line of sight to view the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction to pass through. Therefore, without countermeasures, the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is easily recognized, which tends to reduce the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the serially combined state, the end surface 885b1 of the second covered portion 885 is disposed closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation can be performed when viewed from an oblique direction. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visible, most of the side surface can be seen as a part of the second covering part 885, and the extent to which the first covering part 875 is visible can be reduced. Thereby, in the serially combined state, the second covered part 885 can be made more visible than the first covered part 875, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the series combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotary member 830, so that the inner rotary member 830 rotates, while the outer rotary member 840 acts as a torque limiter. The rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

Although the sliding protrusion 831b is intended to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will increase, and the torque limiter 866 Therefore, the allowable value for load transmission must be increased, which tends to hinder downsizing of the torque limiter 866.

For this reason, it is preferable to suppress the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830. To this end, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the only support points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central ring gear 864, and a gap is provided in other areas. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830, making it easier to reduce the displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened to the central ring gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress forward displacement based on the central ring gear 864, and the sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. In other words, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction pushing it forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 abuts against the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and rear.

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as a circular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and the protrusion portion 822b is formed in a circular shape at its outermost diameter portion, protruding from the back side with a semicircular cross section.

This protrusion 822b abuts against the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, so the contact area can be reduced compared to when the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. This reduces the displacement resistance in the rotational direction of the inner rotating member 830.

Note that since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected to occur when the weight of the fastening screws increases is reduced accordingly. Can be done.

Fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be explained. In explaining this fixing, reference will be made to FIGS. 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton part 871 into a female screw of the fastened part 876 formed at the rear part of the frame of the first covering part 875. After the first covering part 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton part 871 by screwing into the frame part 871, the overhanging part 873 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed part of the first skeleton part 871 is screwed into the first covering part 875. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitting outward) and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protrusion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeletal member 881 into the female thread of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear of the frame of the second covering portion 885 to fasten the second covering portion 885 to the second skeletal member 881, and then inserting the protruding portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeletal member 881 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and as the rotating member 834 is linearly displaced or rotated, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member Member 880 can be configured for linear or rotational displacement.

During the fixing process, the projections 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby defining the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832), and preventing the skeletal parts 871, 881 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

The skeletal parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, so that the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 (the position of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction) is similarly defined, and it is possible to prevent the rotating member 834 from falling off the linear moving member 833.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear moving member 833, the portion that determines the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the skeletal portions 871, 881 that are fixed to the rotating member 834, and therefore, unlike when the portion that determines the position on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the labor hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

In other words, for example, when disassembling, by removing the fastening screws fastening the skeletal parts 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, not only can the restrictions on the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871 and 881 on the linear moving member 833 be released, but also the restrictions on the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 can be released. This can improve work efficiency.

The combined operation of each of the operation units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d) and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(d) show an operation unit 500 schematically chronologically explaining examples of combined operations of each operation unit 600 to 800. FIG. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

70 and 71, each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and each covering part 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800 The decorations are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified by letters or the like.

That is, the first effect surface 661a has the word "Normal" written vertically, the second effect surface 661b has the word "activation" written horizontally, and the third effect surface 661c has the word "activation" written horizontally. A "!" symbol is shown along each line.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the words "Start of War," the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 has the words "A pinch is an opportunity," and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has the words "Attack." The characters "Patience!?" are shown on the second sub-decorative surface 787b2, respectively.

Furthermore, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering part 875, and five "○" numbers are shown in the second covering part 885. ” symbol is shown.

In Figure 70(a), each of the operating units 600 to 800 is placed in a standby state for performance (see Figure 28). Note that above the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In addition, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By performing the integral rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, the first covered portions 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate effect state during the continuation of the integral rotation operation or after stopping, the third effect surface 661c is extended inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 are It can make your movements lively.

For example, when the third performance surface 661c is visible, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600 by controlling the performance so that the expectation level of jackpot in the lottery increases. can.

When the integral rotational movement is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700 can be viewed as an integrated unit.

Thereby, it is possible to improve attention to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700, and display effects related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 can be displayed on the third symbol display device. By returning the third operating unit 800 to the production standby state while starting at 81, the player's line of sight can be smoothly guided to the third symbol display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 that draws attention is not limited to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting section 823b (see FIG. 60) that is arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, an LED that irradiates light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 side that attracts attention can be used. By lighting up the LED and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870.

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit are sequentially switched in the rotational direction so that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotated along the coaxial circle. The player may be able to visually confirm that the player is playing the game. Further, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration member 870 sequentially reaches the position to be irradiated with light from the LED through an integral rotation operation. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 are both provided with vertically elongated decorations and can be visually recognized as one unit. In particular, the front side surface of the decoration fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, thereby enhancing the ability to be seen as an integral part.

On the other hand, when the state shown in Figure 71 (a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the intermediate process shown in Figure 70 (b), the second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, so that the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and now it can be visually recognized as being integrated with the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700, which also has a horizontally elongated decoration.

Figure 35 shows the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700, but if the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state as shown in Figure 71 (a), the vertical distance between the covering member 787 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be further reduced, enhancing the effect of them being visually perceived as a single unit.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making it appear as if the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is expanding to the right from the right edge RE1 of the area Even if the second performance surface 661b is arranged closer to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped.

In addition, this allows the player to visually recognize the second performance surface 661b as if it were arranged at the center of the third symbol display device 81 in the same manner as the second main decorative surface 787b1. The effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are visually recognized as one can be enhanced.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second performance surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second performance surface 661b and the protruding decorative portion 652b being visually perceived as a single unit can be enhanced.

In FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in an effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in FIG. 70(d). In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotation member 660 Therefore, even if the first operating unit 600 is kept in the extended state, the reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed.

As mentioned above, when the covering member 787 is flipped over, the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 on the left and right are faced forward, making them non-distinguishable. However, as shown in Figure 70(d), the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may be combined to make the content discernible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 70(d), the player can discern the meaning of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the driving of the second action unit 700 in this state, the player can focus his/her attention on the subsequent movement of the second action unit 700, thereby focusing the player's gaze on the second action unit 700.

For example, when notifying that the lottery is a loss, the state shown in FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to the state shown in FIG. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operating unit 700 by continuing the reversal from the state shown in FIG. 70(d) to the state shown in FIG. 71(a).

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance. Note that above the second operating unit 700, the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are written horizontally, so that the player can see them as one unit. Easy to do. In addition, since the content is a series of meanings with "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first performance surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written vertically, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content of the characters is related to "normal time," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

In this way, in this embodiment, each presentation surface 661a, 661b of the first operating unit 600 is configured to be viewed as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). This can improve the presentation effect.

In Figures 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in a standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in Figure 71(b) and the state shown in Figure 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 due to the third operating unit 800 performing a unitary rotation action. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation action is performed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same united state (see Figure 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set so that the switching rotation operation is executed at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during symbol fluctuation to notify whether the jackpot has been won or not. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether or not a jackpot will be announced based on the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the final stage of the display performance (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or in the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the game is a jackpot hit or not. It is possible to maintain the same level of expectations among people. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600-800 can be formed so that the decoration is either visible alone or in combination with other units. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600-800 is not complete for each operation unit 600-800 alone, but is designed as a decoration that is related to each of the operation units 600-800.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 can be executed is affected by their arrangement. That is, if each of the operating units 600 to 800 is driven at an inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that component operations will collide and malfunction. Therefore, drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the components of other units. controlled as follows.

For example, the first operating unit 600 is controlled to change to the extended state when the second operating unit 700 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change to the intermediate production state of the first operating unit 600 may be performed as long as the state of the second operating unit 700 is arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotational operation is not switched. It is controlled to be executed when it has been determined.

The change to the extended state of the second operating unit 700 may be performed in any state of the first operating unit 600, and the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the production standby state.

The change to the intermediate production state of the second operating unit 700 can be performed as long as the state of the first operating unit 600 is arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotational operation is not switched. It is controlled to be executed when it has been determined.

In the control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and no rotation is performed or only an integral rotation operation occurs, the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined that the process is in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and causes the switching rotation operation is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the production standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in the production standby state. be done.

As mentioned above, the drive control of each operating unit 600 to 800 is not possible at any time, but is controlled so that it is executed after determining the arrangement of the components of the other units.

Next, the center frame C86 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 87.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the center frame 86 is composed of one part, but in the second embodiment, the center frame C86 is composed of two members: an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 72 is a front view of the game board C13 in the second embodiment. As shown in Figure 72, the center frame C86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 7) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b.

The upper frame C86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 72) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 72) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame C86b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 72) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame C86a and the lower frame C86b.

The upper frame C86a is a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (a part disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 72) of the window 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 7)). , that is, the part where the lower frame C86b is disposed) is omitted, and the other parts except for the omitted part have the same structure as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

Next, the lower frame C86b will be described. Figure 73 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 74 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. Note that in Figures 73 and 74, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame C86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in Figures 73 and 74, the lower frame C86b is provided with an inlet COPin formed as an opening capable of receiving balls, a first passage CRt1 connected to the inlet COPin, a second passage CRt2 through which balls guided along the first passage CRt1 flow, a third passage CRt3 through which balls guided along the second passage CRt2 (balls that have reciprocated along the second passage CRt2 in its longitudinal direction) flow, a fourth passage CRt4 and a fifth passage CRt5 through which balls guided along the third passage CRt3 are sorted by the sorting member C170 and flow down, a sixth passage CRt6 through which balls guided along the fourth passage CRt4 flow down, and an outlet COPout formed as an opening through which balls guided along the fifth passage CRt5 flow out to the play area (see Figures 81 and 82).

The upper frame C86a has an upper frame passage CRt0 (see FIG. 72) formed therein. The upper frame passage CRt0 is a passage that guides balls that flow in (enter) from the area on the left side of the play area when viewed from the front (left side of FIG. 72) (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61), and the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 is connected to the receiving port COPin of the lower frame C86b.

That is, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage CRt0 from the play area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage CRt0 through the receiving port COPin into the first passage CRt1 of the lower frame C86b.

A distribution member C170 that operates according to the weight of the balls is disposed on the lower frame C86b (see FIGS. 81 and 82), and when a series of balls is guided through the third passage CRt3, , the leading ball is distributed to the fourth path CRt4, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fifth path CRt5. Note that if the interval between consecutive balls is larger than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the fourth path CRt4.

Here, the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt5 (the opening through which the balls flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 72). Therefore, balls distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 are likely to win at the first winning hole 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning hole 64).

On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt6, not only is a central outflow surface C181 formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow balls guided along the sixth passage CRt6 to flow out into the play area, but side outflow surfaces C182 are also formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in Figure 72) from vertically above the first winning opening 64. In addition, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt6, with side outflow surfaces C182 formed at the bottom of the undulations and a central outflow surface C181 formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, a ball allocated to the fourth passage CRt4 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outlet surface C182 into the play area in the sixth passage CRt6 than from the central outlet surface C181 into the play area, and as a result, it is less likely to win the first winning hole 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64 than a ball allocated to the fifth passage CRt5 described above).

In this way, in the lower frame C86b of this embodiment, when a series of balls flows into the third passage CRt3, the preceding balls are distributed to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4), while the following balls are distributed to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4). The ball is sorted to a path where it is easy to win the first prize opening 64 (in the present embodiment, a passage (fifth passage CRt5) that almost certainly allows the ball to win the first prize opening 64). Therefore, in order to increase the probability that a ball will win in the first prize opening 64 (reliably win a prize), the player can expect that a state in which the balls will be connected will be formed, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C86b will be described with reference to Figures 73 to 74 as well as Figures 75 to 87.

FIG. 75 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 76 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. FIG. 77 is a top view of the lower frame C86b, FIG. 78 is a front view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 79 is a rear view of the lower frame C86b. 80(a) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXa in FIG. 78, and FIG. 80(b) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXb in FIG. 78.

81 and 82 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77, and FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 78. 84(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame C86b at the LXXXIVa section in FIG. 81, and FIG. 84(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame C86b along the line LXXXIVb-LXXXIVb in FIG. 77. be. Note that FIG. 81 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 82 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in FIGS. 73 to 84, the lower frame C86b includes a front member C110, a dish member C120 disposed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member C110, and A back surface member C130 that is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval on the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B), and a first intermediate member C140 that is disposed on the front surface of the back surface member C130 (the surface in the direction of arrow F); A second intermediate member C150 is arranged facing the front surface of the back member C130 (on the side in the direction of arrow F) at a predetermined interval, and a first intermediate member is interposed between the facing back member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. The second intervening member C180 is interposed between the facing member C160 and the distribution member C170, the front member C110 and the first and second intermediate members C140 and C150, and the second intervening member C180 is disposed on the back surface of the back member C130. It includes a decorative member C190 and a detour member C200.

In addition, the lower frame C86b has each member fastened and fixed to each other by tapping screws, and the distribution member C170 and the decoration member C190 are rotatably supported by the back member C130, so that one (single body) ) (see Figure 73).

In addition, the lower frame C86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and balls can be seen through) except for the distribution member C170 and decorative member C190, and the distribution member C170 and decorative member C190 are made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to visually see the balls passing through the first passage CRt1 to the sixth passage CRt6, as well as the distribution action of the distribution member C170 and the associated displacement of the decorative member C190, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient for the lower frame C86b that at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 are made of a light-transmitting resin material. The player can check at least one or both of the continuous state of the balls in the third passage CRt3 (whether the interval between the leading ball and the following ball is smaller than a predetermined distance) and the sorting operation by the sorting member C170. While being visually recognized, if it is possible to visually recognize that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170, the ball will be sent from the outlet COPout to the first prize opening 64 with a high probability (in this embodiment, This is because since almost all the balls enter the player, it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the balls guided through the fifth passage CRt5.

The dividing member C170 and the decorative member C190 are made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

Also, on the other hand, at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 may be made of a colored resin material, or at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 may be painted or have a sticker attached. In other words, the balls passing through the third passage CRt3 and the distribution member C170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member C110 includes a plate-shaped front part C111 forming the front, a plate-shaped bottom part C112 erected from the back surface of the front part C111, and one longitudinal side of the front part C111 and the bottom part C112 ( and a connecting portion C113 disposed on the arrow L direction side).

The front portion C111 has multiple through holes C111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front portion C111. The lower frame C86b, in an assembled state (unitized state), is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes C111a to the base plate 60.

In the front part C111, an outlet COPout is formed (perforated in the thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 72). As described above, the outflow port COPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flows out to the game area.

The bottom surface of the second intervening member C180 is disposed opposite the upper surface of the bottom surface portion C112, and a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the bottom surface portion C112 and the second intervening member C180 (recess C183). Therefore, compared to, for example, a case in which a through hole formed through the second intervening member C180 is used as part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and production costs can be reduced.

The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire length of the front surface portion C111, and the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C112 is in contact with the front surface of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. be touched. This suppresses the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires.

An receiving port COPin is formed in the connecting portion C113 (drilled in the plate thickness direction). As described above, the receiving port COPin is an opening that receives balls from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a. When the center frame C86 is attached (disposed) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame C86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion C111 and the connecting portion C113, and both are fastened and fixed with tapping screws. This connects the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 to the receiving port COPin.

The dish member C120 includes an upper bottom part C121 and a lower bottom part C122 that form the bottom of the passage, and an upper side wall part C123 and a lower side wall part C124 that form the side walls of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C121 extends in the left-right direction (arrow F-B direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and is formed with a downward incline in the direction away from the receiving opening COPin (arrow R direction). The upper bottom surface portion C121 is located vertically below the receiving opening COPin (arrow D direction), and a vertical step is formed between it and the upper frame passage CRt0. In other words, the dish member C120 is configured to allow balls to freely fall from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121.

A groove C121a with a U-shaped cross section is recessed in the center of the upper bottom surface portion C121 in the width direction (arrow L-R direction) (see Figure 84). The groove C121a extends linearly in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The groove width (dimension in the direction of arrows L-R) of the groove C121 is set smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the groove depth (dimension in the direction of arrows U-D) of the groove C121a is set to a depth that prevents the ball from contacting the bottom surface of the groove C121a.

Thereby, the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 can be supported at two locations (a pair of ridgeline portions where the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the groove C121a intersect). Therefore, compared to the case where the groove C121a is not formed (that is, the case where the ball is supported at only one location), the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased. Therefore, the impact of the ball falling from the upper frame passage CRt0 can be buffered (received) and the resistance when the ball rolls can be increased.

As described above, by dropping a ball from the upper frame passage CRt0 onto the upper bottom surface portion C121 and supporting the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 at two points, when two balls flow (drop) from the upper frame passage CRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) with a specified distance between them, the flow down of the leading ball is delayed in the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), making it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball. This makes it possible to reduce the distance between the leading and trailing balls.

The upper side wall portion C123 partitions the upstream and downstream ends of the upper bottom portion C121 (first passage CRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom portion C121 (first passage CRt1). Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension smaller than at least twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). This setting allows multiple balls to be guided only in series.

A cutout portion C123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), and the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) through this cutout portion C123a.

The lower bottom surface portion C122 extends in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) as a substantially straight passage when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) and the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrow D) (see Figure 84 (b)).

The lower side wall portion C124 has ends on one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and lower side wall portion C122 (second passage CRt2). ) and the aisle width. Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension smaller than at least twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). This setting allows multiple balls to be guided only in series.

When viewed from above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is arranged parallel to the upper bottom surface portion C121, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow B) is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow B).

The lower side wall portion C124 is not formed at the position corresponding to the notch portion C123a in the upper side wall portion C123, and as described above, water from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) is passed through the notch portion C123a. The ball is allowed to flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2).

A notch C124a is formed in the lower side wall C124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped curved lower bottom surface C122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is curved in an arc shape, and has an upwardly inclined side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122) from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). Since the ball is flown down, the flown down ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and then the ball is moved down the notch portion C124a. The ball can be caused to flow down from the bottom part C142 (third passageway CRt3).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom part C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom part C122 (second passage CRt2) with a predetermined interval apart, the lower bottom part C122 ( By using the reciprocating motion in the second path CRt2), it is possible to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball and reduce the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (making the balls connect). .

The lower bottom surface portion C122 has an outflow surface C122a recessed at a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (i.e., the lowest position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided along the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), balls with a reduced gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining that connected state.

In addition, the outflow surface C122a is formed in such a way that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) is larger on the side closer to the cutout portion C124a (see Figure 77).

Further, in a top view, when the ball is in contact with the lower side wall C124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch C124a, the ball rolls (traverses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the ball rolling (reciprocating) in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is located at the farthest position from the notch portion C124a (the lateral top of the ball contacts the lower side wall portion C124). position), an outflow surface C122a is formed to the extent that overlaps with the center of the sphere when viewed from above (this is the locus of the lower top of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface C122). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface portion C122, there is a risk that a ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) without ever reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) or before it has reciprocated a sufficient number of times due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. In other words, there is a risk that the leading ball and the trailing ball will not decrease the distance between them and the two balls will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining a gap between them.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed with a downward inclination in the direction away from the cutout portion C124a (the direction of the arrow L) (see FIG. 84). As a result, the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C122 presses the ball against the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a, and the ball can be made to roll (reciprocate) on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2).

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow. In other words, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow, it is possible to make the ball easily overcome (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and to make the ball easily move back and forth sufficiently along the lower bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are linked together).

Note that the arcuate shape of the lower bottom portion C122 (the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction of the lower bottom portion C122 (direction of arrow FB) and the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD), A circular arc shape that is convex in the downward direction (direction of arrow D, see FIG. 84(b)) has a radius of the circular arc shape at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction. The radius is made smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between (the region including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is increased.

As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction or the vicinity thereof), it is made easier to make the ball reciprocate, and it is also made easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball. , a stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball has become low (the ball does not reach one end in the longitudinal direction and the other end or the vicinity thereof, and the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a) In step ), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

Note that when the dish member C120 is disposed in such a manner that the extending direction of the lower bottom portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the window portion 60a of the base plate 60 Since the window portion 60a is disposed within the window portion 60a, the space in the front and rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the entire length of the lower bottom portion C122 (second passage CRt2) can be ensured, making it easy to connect the balls.

The back member C130 includes a main body C131 formed in a plate shape, and a lower stopper C132, an upper stopper C133, and an axis support seat C134 that are erected from the front of the main body C131.

An opening C131a is formed in the main body C131 to connect a passage (fifth passage CRt5) formed on the front side and rear side of the main body C131. Below the opening C131a, a recess C131b is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body C131. The recess C131b forms part of the fifth passage CRt5 between itself and the detour member C200.

The lower stopper portion C132 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the sorting member C170 when the sorting member C170 is displaced downward, thereby determining the second position of the sorting member C170 (see FIG. 82). On the other hand, the upper stopper portion C133 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the sorting member C170 when the sorting member C170 is displaced upward, thereby determining the first position (predetermined position) of the sorting member C170 (see FIG. 81).

The shaft support seat C134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C192. The shaft C192 is fixed to the decorative member C190, and the sorting member C170 is non-rotatably connected to the shaft C192 inserted from the back of the main body C131, so that the sorting member C170 and the decorative member C190 are integrally rotatably supported by the main body C131 (shaft support seat C134). The shaft C192 is supported by the shaft support seat C134 in a position along the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The first intermediate member C140 includes a plate-shaped main body C141, a bottom face C142, a top face C143, and a passageway C144 that stand up from the back surface of the main body C141 (the face on the side in the direction of arrow B). It is arranged on the left side of the member C130 when viewed from the front.

When the first intermediate member C140 is disposed on the back member C130, the upright tips (on the arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142, the top surface portion C143, and the passage portion C144 are brought into contact with the front surface of the back surface member C130. As a result, a third passage CRt3 is formed by a space partitioned between the back surface member C130 and the first intermediate member C140 (main body portion C141, bottom surface portion C142, and top surface portion C143), and the third passage CRt3 is formed between the back surface member C130 and the first intermediate member C140. A fourth passage CRt4 is formed by a space defined by C140 (passage portion C144) and the distribution member C170 in the second position (see FIG. 82).

Note that the bottom surface portion C142 is sloped downward from the pan member C120 side toward the distribution member C170 side. Further, the passage portion C144 includes an opposing portion C144a formed at a position facing the distribution member C170 in the second position, and a bottom portion C144b forming a rolling surface of the ball. It is formed to be inclined downward from the distribution member C170 side in the second position toward the opposing part C144a side, and also to be inclined downward from the back member C130 side to the front member C110 side. Therefore, the ball can be received into the fourth passage CRt4 from the distribution member C170 that has been displaced to the second position, and the ball can be caused to flow (roll) into the sixth passage CRt6.

Here, the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) of the dish member C120 rolls the ball in the front-to-back direction (the direction of the arrows F-B), the ball flows down from the dish member C120 to the bottom surface portion C142 in the left-to-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) (to the right in this embodiment), and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) rolls the ball flowing down from the dish member C120 in the left-to-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) (to the right in this embodiment).

In this case, the interval between the leading ball CB1 and the trailing ball CB2 (see FIG. 85) is determined by the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second path CRt2), and both balls CB1 and CB2 are It flows down from the side bottom part C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3) along the left-right direction, and also flows down (rolls) down the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3) in the left-right direction. ), the distance between both balls CB1 and CB2 can be confirmed from a front view, making it easier for the player to visually confirm. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

The second intermediate member C150 has a plate-shaped main body C151 and a bottom surface C152 standing upright from the rear surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C151, and is disposed on the right side of the rear surface member C130 when viewed from the front. When the second intermediate member C150 is disposed on the rear surface member C130, the standing tip (on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface C152 abuts against the front surface of the rear surface member C130.

A concave portion C151a is formed in the main body portion C151 by recessing its outer edge. The bottom surface portion C152 has a detour member C200 (gutter portion C203) disposed opposite to it on its lower surface, and a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess portion C151a and the opposing portion of the bottom portion C152 and the detour member C200 (gutter portion C203). be done. Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the detour member C200 is formed into a cylindrical shape and becomes a part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.

The first interposed member C160 is a member that forms a rolling surface of a ball in a part of the fifth passage CRt5, and is interposed between the facing member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space defined by the back surface member C130, the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the first intervening member C160.

The first interposed member C160 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (the direction of the arrow LR) and the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), which is directed downward in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow D). It is curved into a convex arc shape (see FIG. 82). Therefore, the balls distributed to the first intervening member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) by the distributing member C170 can be caused to reciprocate on the first intervening member C160 and then flow out to the opening C131a.

This allows the time required for the balls sorted by the sorting member C170 to flow out to the opening C131a to be longer, compared to a configuration in which the balls sorted by the sorting member C170 are directly sorted out to the opening C131a. In other words, it makes it easier for players hoping for a state in which there is a high probability of the ball entering the first winning port 64 (winning), to notice that such a state has been created, and allows them time to enjoy such a state. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The first interposed member C160 has an outflow surface C160a recessed at a position corresponding to the opening C131a of the back member C130 (i.e., the lowest vertical position of the rolling surface of the first interposed member C160). The outflow surface C160a is a portion for allowing the ball guided through the first interposed member C160 to flow out to the opening C131a, and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the opening C131a.

The distribution member C170 includes a main body C171 having a fitting hole C171a formed on one side, a receiving portion C172 formed on the other side of the main body C171 opposite the side on which the fitting hole C171a is formed, and a rolling portion C173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body C171, and is rotatable around a shaft C192 (shaft support portion C134) fitted into the fitting hole C171a.

The fitting hole C171a is formed as a hole with a D-shaped cross section, and the shaft C192, which has a cross-sectional shape that matches the fitting hole C171a, is fitted into the fitting hole C171a, thereby fixing the shaft C192 to the main body C171 so that it cannot rotate. The shaft C192 is also fixed to the decorative member C190 so that it cannot rotate, and therefore the main body C171 (distributing member C170) and the decorative member C190 are integrated (formed as one unit) via the shaft C192.

In this case, the center of gravity of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 is offset to one side (the side opposite the distribution member C170 across the axis C192, the right side in Figure 81) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the distribution member C170 is raised on the receiving section C172 side (rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in front view), and is in a state in which rotation is restricted by the upper stopper section C133 (disposed in the first position (predetermined position)) (see Figure 81).

On the other hand, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C170, the weight of the ball causes the overall center of gravity to be shifted to the other side (with respect to the axis C192) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). It is eccentric to the side where the dividing member C170 is disposed (the left side in FIG. 81). Therefore, when the ball is received in the receiving part C172, the distributing member C170 is lowered on the receiving part C172 side (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 when viewed from the front), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper part C132. (see FIG. 82).

At least a part of the main body part C191 of the decorative member C190 is made visible to the player, and as the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position, the decorative member C190 (main body part C191 C191) is also rotated, and the position (form) visually recognized by the player is changed. Therefore, based on the position (form) of the decorative member C190, the player can recognize the state of the distribution member C170 (ie, the direction in which the balls are distributed). Furthermore, the decorative member C190 can serve both as a weight for displacing the distribution member C170 and as a part for recognizing the distribution direction of the balls, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

After the distribution member C170 is placed in the second position, when the balls are discharged (flow out) from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140, the distribution member C170 is returned to the first position (predetermined position) by the action of the weight of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 (eccentricity from the axis C192 of the center of gravity).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C170 to the first position is performed by the weight (weight) of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190, so for example, a biasing spring may be provided. The structure can be simplified compared to the case where the biasing spring biases the distribution member C170 toward the first position.

Furthermore, compared to the case of using a biasing spring, the displacement of the distribution member C170 to the first position (return operation) can be made at a lower speed, making it easier for the trailing ball CB2 to reach the rolling part C173. can. That is, after the distribution member C170 starts to be displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, it is displaced (rotated) to a position where the trailing ball CB2 cannot flow onto the rolling portion C173. This can increase the amount of time it takes to complete the process. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility that the third ball that follows the trailing ball CB2 also reaches the rolling portion C173 (see FIGS. 85 to 87).

The receiving part C172 includes an opposing part C172a formed at a position facing the third passage CRt3 at the first position, and a facing part C172a that supports the ball received at the first position and rolls the ball toward the passage part C144 at the second position. and a bottom surface portion C172b forming a rolling surface for movement.

When the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C172 is formed such that the facing portion C172a is approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, and the bottom surface portion C172b is inclined upward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 81).

When the distribution member C170 is positioned in the first position, if the opposing portion C172a is inclined in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the rolling portion C173 side of the opposing portion C172a is inclined in a direction away from the third passage CRt3 more than the bottom surface portion C172b side), there is a risk that a ball that collides with the opposing portion C172a will be bounced upward and flow back into the third passage CRt3.

On the other hand, since the facing portion C172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, the opposing portion C172a The ball received from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) can be received by the opposing portion C172a and can be prevented from flowing back into the third passage CRt3.

Further, when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed to be inclined downward from the opposing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 (passage portion C144) of the first intermediate member C140. If so, the balls received in the receiving part C172 will flow out to the passage part C144 of the first intermediate member C140 at an early stage, making it impossible to utilize the weight of the balls, which will cause the distribution member C170 to reach the second position. There is a possibility that you will not be allowed to do so.

In contrast, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed so as to slope upward from the opposing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 when the sorting member C170 is disposed in the first position, so that the balls can be held on the bottom surface portion C172b at least until the sorting member C170 rotates a predetermined amount from the first position. This makes it possible to delay the time until the balls received in the receiving portion C172 flow out into the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140. As a result, the weight of the balls can be effectively utilized to ensure that the sorting member C170 reaches the second position.

In addition, for the reason mentioned above (prevention of backflow to the third passage CRt3), the opposing part C172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling part C173 side is closer to the third passage CRt3 than the bottom part C172b side.

When the sorting member C170 is placed in the second position, the receiving portion C172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C172b slopes downward from the opposing portion C172a toward the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 82). This allows the balls received in the receiving portion C172 to flow reliably into the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140.

In addition, while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface portion C172b, the weight of the ball acts on the distribution member C170, making it easier to maintain the distribution member C170 in the second position (i.e., in a state in which the trailing ball can be guided to the rolling portion C173 (fifth passage CRt5)).

The rolling portion C173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) the balls rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the second intervening member C160 (fifth passage CRt5). Yes, when the distribution member C170 is placed in the second position, the downstream end of the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 and the downstream end of the second intervening member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) It is located (erected) between the upstream end and the upstream end.

The upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 is formed to protrude from the opposing portion C172a of the receiving portion C172. That is, the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 is provided with a portion protruding from the opposing portion C172a toward the upstream side (first intermediate member C140 (third passage CRt3) side, arrow L direction). A plate-shaped portion is formed. By inserting this plate-shaped portion between the balls CB1 and CB2, both balls (balls CB1, CB2) can be separated.

When the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, the rolling motion is lowered relative to the height position at the downstream end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140. The height position at the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the portion C173 (rolling surface) is located vertically downward (in the arrow D direction). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173, and the distribution member C170 disposed at the second position is moved toward the first position by a predetermined amount (a predetermined rotation angle). ), the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 are arranged at the same height position.

When a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 flows into the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball displaces (rotates) the distributing member C170 downward from the first position, and the lower surface of the distributing member C170 abuts against the lower stopper portion C132, thereby positioning the distributing member C170 at the second position.

In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C170 will be bounced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C132. If the upward bounce of the distribution member C170 causes the height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) to be positioned vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140, there is a risk that the balls will not be able to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 into the rolling portion C173.

In particular, when a ball collides with the distributing member C170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173) that has been flipped upward, and the impact of the ball collision causes the distributing member C170 to be further flipped upward (the ball When the distributing member C170 is further pushed upward by the ball), the ball flows into the receiving part C172 even though it should have originally flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C173 ( There is a risk that it will be accepted.

On the other hand, when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) are Since a step is formed between them, even if the distribution member C170 is flipped upward due to an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 will be lower than the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 due to the step between the two. It can be suppressed from being located vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). That is, it is possible to allow the distribution member C170 to be flipped upward by the difference in level between the two. Therefore, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3). It is possible to easily flow (roll) from the rolling portion C173 into the rolling portion C173.

Furthermore, the distribution member C170 is formed such that the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C140, the face in the direction of the arrow L) is inclined downward from the rolling portion C173 toward the first intermediate member C140 (bottom surface portion C142). That is, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 is formed in a shape such that the edge portion on the receiving portion C172 (opposing portion C172a) side is closer to the first intermediate member C140 than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C173.

As a result, when a ball collides with the sorting member C170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173) that has been bounced upward, the direction of the force acting from the ball on the sorting member C170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173) can be set to a force in a direction that pushes the sorting member C170 downward. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C173 (a trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the preceding ball CB1 is a predetermined amount or less) to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) into the rolling portion C173.

The receiving section C172 and the rolling section C173 are arranged on the same side of C192 (the side where the weight of the ball rotates the sorting member C170 in the same direction). Therefore, even if the weight of the ball received by the receiving section C172 causes the sorting member C170 to be positioned in the second position and the ball is then discharged from the receiving section C172, the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling section C173 can be used to maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position. In other words, when there is a ball to be guided to the fifth passage CRt5, the weight of the ball can be used to maintain the position of the sorting member C170 in a position for guiding the ball to the fifth passage CRt5.

Therefore, there is no need to maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position by using the weight of the ball received in the receiving portion C172 (the ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C172b), and the extension length of the bottom surface portion C172b can be shortened, thereby making the sorting member C170 smaller. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the sorting member C170 can be increased.

Here, the distributing member C170 is arranged in the direction in which the balls roll from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) toward the receiving portion C172 (the direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the balls, the direction of arrow R), and The direction in which the ball rolls from to the passage portion C144 (the direction in which the received ball rolls, the direction of arrow L) is the opposite direction. That is, in the receiving portion C172, the downward direction (rolling) direction of the ball is reversed (changed in direction).

As a result, compared to the case where the direction in which the receiving part C172 receives the ball and the direction in which the ball rolls from the receiving part C172 to the passage part C144 are the same, the ball is distributed by the time required for reversal. The time for the ball to stay in the member C170 (receiving part C172) can be secured, and the weight of the ball retained in the receiving part C172 can be used to easily maintain the distribution member C170 in the second position. As a result, the ball can be stably rolled in the rolling portion C173.

Furthermore, by utilizing the reversal of the ball to ensure its residence time, the extension length of the bottom surface portion C172b in the receiving portion C172 can be shortened accordingly, and the distribution member C170 can be downsized. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the distribution member C170 can be increased.

The second intervening member C180 is a member that forms a rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage CRt6, and is interposed between the front member C111 and the opposing first intermediate member C140 and second intermediate member C150. That is, the sixth passage CRt6 is formed by a space partitioned by the front member C110, the first intermediate member C140, the second intermediate member C150, and the second intervening member C180.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 has a concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and lateral outflow surface C182) that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow the ball guided through the second interposed member C180 (sixth passage CRt6) to flow out into the play area. In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt6 has undulations, with the lateral outflow surface C182 located at the bottom of the undulations and the central outflow surface C181 located at the top of the undulations.

Note that the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front part C111 of the front member C110 is the upper surface (rolling edge) of the second intervening member C180, except for the area where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. (moving surface) upwards (in the direction of arrow U). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C180 flows out (flows down) into the game area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C180, and as described above, a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110.

The decorative member C190 includes a main body C191 formed in a plate shape and a shaft C192 fixed to the main body C191, and as described above, is connected (integrated) to the distribution member C170 via the shaft C192. ) to be done. In addition, on the front of the main body part C191, a design such as a character is displayed by printing or attaching a sticker, and the operation of the distribution member C170 is made visible to the player based on the movement (displacement) of the character. .

The axis C192 is disposed perpendicular to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 72). This allows the dimensions of the lower frame C86b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be reduced.

The detour member C200 includes a plate-shaped main body C201, a wall C202 that stands upright from the front of the main body C201 (the surface in the direction of arrow F), and a part of the wall C202 that further extends toward the front. It is provided with a gutter part C203 that is formed as a groove, and is disposed on the back side of the back member C130 at a position facing the opening C131a.

When the detour member C200 is disposed on the rear member C130, the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the wall portion C202 abuts against the rear face of the rear member C130 (main body portion C131), and the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the gutter portion C203 abuts against the rear face of the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the edge of the gutter portion C203 abuts against the bottom face of the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152).

As a result, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space partitioned between the back member C130 (main body portion C131) and the detour member C200 (main body portion C201 and wall portion C202), and the space partitioned between the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152) and the detour member C200 (gutter portion C203) (see FIG. 83).

The gutter portion C203 is inclined downward from the rear member C130 side toward the second intermediate member C150 side. Therefore, the ball that flows into the detour member C200 from the opening C131a of the rear member C130 can be made to roll on the gutter portion C203 and flow into the fifth passage CRt5 formed between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110 and the second intermediate member C180 (recess C183).

Next, the operation of distributing balls by the distributing member C170 will be explained. 85 to 87 are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame C86b showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member C170, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77.

Note that Figures 85(a) and 85(b) show the state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in the first position, and correspond to Figure 81. Figures 86(b) and 87 show the state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in the second position, and correspond to Figure 82.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C172 is positioned in a position that can receive (allow the ball CB1 to flow in) the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140.

That is, the receiving portion C172 has an opposing portion C172a disposed at a position intersecting an extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface), and a bottom portion C172b disposed at a position vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface).

When the distribution member C170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface (surface opposite the rolling surface, surface in the direction of arrow D) of the rolling portion C173 is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass).

On the other hand, when the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the rolling portion C173 is positioned in a position that cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in).

That is, the bottom surface portion C172b of the rolling portion C173 is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the extension line of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) (one step higher). The vertical distance (height of the step) between the rolling portion C173 and the extension line of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the sorting member C170 in the first position.

Note that when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the top surface portion C143 of the first intermediate member C140 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (the arrow L The distance between the ball and the ball (the end on the direction side) is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the ball (a size through which the ball cannot pass). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the distribution member C170 in the first position. However, this interval may be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

When the ball CB1 (the leading ball) and the ball CB2 (the trailing ball with a predetermined interval between them) roll on the bottom surface C142 of the first intermediate member C140, FIG. ), the ball CB1 flows into (receives) the receiving part C172 of the distribution member C170, the ball CB1 abuts (receives) the opposing part C172a, and is held in the receiving part C172.

Furthermore, when the gap between balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1 and comes into contact with ball CB1. As described above, when the sorting member C170 is placed in the first position, the gap between the downstream end of the top surface portion C143 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass), so that ball CB2 can be prevented from passing over ball CB1 and flowing into the rolling portion C173. In other words, ball CB2 can be made to wait behind (upstream of) ball CB1.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), when the ball CB1 is received in the receiving part C172, the weight of the ball CB1 causes the distribution member C170 to move from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. 86(a). is displaced (rotated). Further, when the ball CB2 has caught up with the ball CB1, the weight of the ball CB2 is also applied to the distribution member C170.

The receiving portion C172 has an area on the side of the opposing portion C172a that is connected to the bottom portion C172b, and an area on the side of the bottom portion C172b that is connected to the opposing portion C172a, i.e., the connecting portion between the opposing portion C172a and the bottom portion C172b, that is, is curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C192 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion is capable of holding the sphere.

Furthermore, the distance between the distribution member C170 (the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface portion C172b) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is When the distribution member C170 is placed in the first position, the size is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimensions through which the sphere cannot pass), and the distribution member C170 is displaced from the first position to the second position ( (rotation), it is gradually enlarged.

That is, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (the position between FIG. 86(a) and FIG. 86(b)), the above-mentioned The distance between the distribution member C170 (the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom part C172b) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting part between the bottom part C142 and the facing part C144a) is the diameter of the sphere. When the distribution member C170 is expanded to approximately the same size (a size that allows the ball to pass through) and is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position to the second position, the above-mentioned interval is further expanded and the second The maximum spacing is created in two positions.

Therefore, while the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C172 is maintained. That is, the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) while receiving the ball CB1 in the receiving portion C172 from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position. Thereby, the state in which the ball CB2 is kept in contact with the ball CB1 can be maintained, and the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 can be maintained.

In this case, the distance between the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface (surface opposite the rolling surface, surface in the direction of arrow D) of the rolling portion C173 is gradually reduced as the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass) before the sorting member C170 reaches a predetermined intermediate position. Therefore, the ball CB2 can be prevented from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C172.

In addition, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) on the bottom surface (surface opposite the rolling surface, surface on the arrow D direction side) of the rolling portion C173 is configured to pass closer to the axis C192 than the outer edge (outer edge on the opposite side to the axis C192) of the trajectory of the ball CB1 held in the receiving portion C172 (the connecting portion between the opposing portion C172a and the bottom surface portion C172b).

Therefore, the ball CB2 can be maintained in contact with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 can be maintained at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142, while the ball CB2 can be pushed back by the upstream end (the end on the direction of the arrow L) of the rolling portion C173. In other words, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 can be inserted between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 to separate the two balls. This makes it possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C172. In addition, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled into the rolling portion C173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

When the sorting member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the state shown in FIG. 86(a) toward the second position, the ball CB1 rolls on the bottom surface portion C172b toward the passage portion C144, and the ball CB2 flows down to the rolling portion C173 (is received by the rolling portion C173).

As shown in Figures 86(b) and 87, when the sorting member C170 is placed in the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 (fourth passage CRt4), and the ball CB2 rolls in the rolling portion C173 and flows into the first intermediate member C160 (fifth passage CRt5).

After the balls CB1 and CB2 flow into the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5, the sorting member C170 returns (displaces) from the second position toward the first position due to its own weight. Note that even when the sorting member C170 is disposed in the second position, or even after the sorting member C170 has started to displace (rotate) from the second position to the first position, if a third ball reaches the rolling portion C173 and flows onto the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C173 and flows (is guided) into the fifth passage CRt5.

As described above, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C140, the face in the direction of arrow L) is formed with a downward incline from the rolling portion C173 toward the first intermediate member C140 (bottom surface portion C142), so that even after the distribution member C170 has begun to displace (rotate) from the second position to the first position, the upstream inclined surface (end face) of the rolling portion C173 can be used to facilitate the flow of the third ball into the rolling portion C173.

The distribution member C170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position by the weight of only one ball. Therefore, when the distance between ball CB1 and ball CB2 is greater than a predetermined amount, both balls CB1 and CB2 are received in turn by the receiving portion C172, and are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4 through the distribution operation described above.

As described above, according to the lower frame C86b in the second embodiment, when the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are spaced apart by a predetermined amount or less (including the case where the space between the two balls is 0), The ball CB1 can be distributed (guided) to the fourth path CRt4, and the ball CB2 can be distributed (guided) to the fifth path CRt5 by the distribution member C170, which is displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, if the balls CB1 and CB2 are connected with an interval exceeding a predetermined distance, both balls (the balls CB1 and the balls CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth path CRt4. In this way, the guided path can be changed depending on the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving interest. be able to.

Next, the center frame C2086 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 103. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b in the third embodiment, and FIG. 89 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. Note that in FIGS. 88 and 89, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame C2086b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the lower frame C2086b includes a receiving port COP2000in formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage CRt2001 communicating with the receiving port COP2000in, and the first passage. The ball guided through CRt2001 (the ball that reciprocated along the longitudinal direction of the first passage CRt2001) flows down the second passage CRt2002, and the ball guided through the second passage CRt2002 is sorted by the distribution member C2170. The third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004 are flowed down, and the balls guided through the third passage CRt2003 and the balls that have fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (balls that have not reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) are flowing down. a sixth passage CRt2006 where the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 (the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flows down, and a fifth passage CRt2005 where the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows down. An outflow port COP2000out is formed as an opening for outflow to the gaming area (see FIGS. 96 and 97).

The center frame in the third embodiment is composed of an upper frame (not shown) and a lower frame C2086b. The upper frame in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the upper frame C86a in the second embodiment, except that the shape of its upper frame passage (not shown) differs from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a in the second embodiment, so a description of this will be omitted.

The upper frame passage is a passage that guides balls that flow in (enter) from the area on the left side of the play area when viewed from the front (left side of Figure 72) (the area between the center frame (upper frame) and rail 61 (see Figure 72)), and the downstream end of the upper frame passage is connected to the receiving port COP2000in of the lower frame C2086b. In other words, balls that flow in (enter) the upper frame passage from the play area flow in (enter) from the upper frame passage via the receiving port COP2000in into the first passage CRt2001 of the lower frame C2086b.

A distribution member C2170 that operates according to the weight of the balls is disposed on the lower frame C2086b (see FIGS. 96 and 97), and when a series of balls is guided through the second path CRt2002, , the leading ball is distributed to the third path CRt2003, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fourth path CRt2004. Note that if the interval between consecutive balls is larger than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the third path CRt2003.

Here, the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt4 is flowed down to the fifth passage CRt5, and the outlet COPout, which is the exit of the fifth passage CRt2005 (the opening that allows the ball to flow out to the gaming area), is the first It is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 72). Therefore, the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 is likely to win the first prize opening 64 (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 is high).

On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt2006, there is a concave surface formed with a downward slope toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) in order to cause the balls guided in the sixth passage CRt2006 to flow out to the gaming area. The central outflow surface C181 is not only formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the opening 64, but also positioned in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 72) from the vertical direction above the first winning opening 64. Side outflow surfaces C182 are formed (arranged) at two different locations. Moreover, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt2006, a side outflow surface C182 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C181 is formed at the top of the undulation.

Therefore, in the sixth passage CRt2006, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outflow surface C182 to the gaming area than the probability of flowing out from the central outflow surface C181 to the gaming area, and as a result, , it is difficult to win into the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning into the first winning hole 64 is lower than the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 mentioned above).

In this way, in the lower frame C2086b of this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, when a series of balls flows into the second passage CRt2002, the leading ball is diverted to the normal passage (third passage CRt2003), while the trailing ball is diverted to the fourth passage CRt2004, which directs the ball down a passage that is more likely to win the first winning port 64 (in this embodiment, the passage (fifth passage CRt2005) that almost certainly ensures that the ball will win the first winning port 64). Therefore, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning port 64 (ensuring a win), the player is made to look forward to the formation of a series of balls, which increases the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ball guided along the fourth passage CRt2004 is formed so that it can fall into the sixth passage along the way, and only balls that reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling can flow down (flow into) the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, in order to increase the probability of a ball winning the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a winning), after the trailing ball among the connected balls is sorted into the fourth passage CRt2004, the player is made to hope that the ball will reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling, which increases the interest of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C2086b will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 89 as well as Figures 90 to 103.

Figure 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b, and Figure 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. Figure 92 is a top view of the lower frame C2086b, Figure 93 is a front view of the lower frame C2086b, and Figure 94 is a rear view of the lower frame C2086b. Figure 95(a) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in Figure 93, and Figure 95(b) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVb in Figure 93.

Figures 96 and 97 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b taken along line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. Figure 98 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along line XCVIII-XCVIII in Figure 94, and Figure 99 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along line XCIX-XCIX in Figure 94. Note that Figure 96 shows the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, and Figure 97 shows the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 99, the lower frame C2086b includes a front member C2110, a plate member C2120 disposed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member C2110, and A back surface member C2130 that is arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval on the back surface (surface in the direction of arrow B), a first intermediate member C2140 and a second 2 intermediate member C2150, first intervening member C2160, magnetic part C2400 and receiving member C2500, distribution member C2170 interposed between facing back member C2130 and first intermediate member C2140, front member C2110 and back member A second intervening member C2180 is provided between the opposing members C2130, and a detour member C2200 and a magnet C2300 are provided on the back surface of the back member C2130.

The lower frame C2086b is configured as a single unit by fastening each component to the other components with tapping screws, and the distribution component C2170 is rotatably supported by the rear component C2130 and the first intermediate component C2140 (see FIG. 88).

In addition, in the lower frame C2086b, the other members except the distribution member C2170 are made of a light-transmitting resin material (that is, transparent through which the back side member and the sphere can be seen through), and the distribution member C2170 is made of a colored resin material. Constructed from resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball passing from the first passage CRt2001 to the sixth passage CRt2006, and the player can also visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution member C2170, making the game more interesting.

In this case, it is sufficient for the lower frame C2086b that at least the first intermediate member C2140 is made of a light-transmitting resin material. The player can visually check the state of the series of balls in the second path CRt2002 (whether the interval between the leading ball and the following ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, and If it can be visually confirmed that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170, the ball will flow into the first prize opening 64 from the outlet COPout with a high probability (in this embodiment, it will flow into the fifth passage CRt2005). This is because if the ball is guided through the fifth passageway CRt2005, almost all the balls will enter the player, so there is no need for the player to visually recognize the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005.

The distribution member C2170 is made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

Also, on the other hand, the first intermediate member C2140 may be made of a colored resin material, or may be painted or have a sticker attached to it. In other words, the balls passing through the third passage CRt2003 and the distribution member C2170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member C2110 has a plate-shaped front portion C111 that forms the front side, and a plate-shaped bottom portion C112 that stands upright from the back side of the front portion C111.

The front portion C111 has multiple through holes C111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front portion C111. The lower frame C2086b, in an assembled state (unitized state), is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes C111a to the base plate 60.

In the front part C111, an outlet COPout is formed (perforated in the thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 72). As described above, the outflow port COPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows out to the game area.

The bottom surface of the second intervening member C2180 is disposed opposite to the top surface of the bottom surface portion C112. Note that a cylindrical portion communicating with the outlet COPout is formed in the bottom portion C112, and this cylindrical portion is a part of the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, since an overlapping portion (seam) between the front member C2110 and the second intervening member C180 is not formed on the inner wall surface of the fifth passage CRt2005, when a player looks into the fifth passage CRt2005 from the outlet COPout, Not only can the appearance be improved, but also foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from entering through the overlapping portions (seams).

The bottom part C112 is formed continuously over the entire length of the front part C111, and the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom part C112 is in front of the first intermediate member C2140 and the first intervening member C2160. be touched. This suppresses the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires.

The dish member C2120 has an upper bottom surface portion C2121 and a lower bottom surface portion C2122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and a side wall portion C2124 that forms the side wall of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C2121 extends in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows LR) as a substantially straight passage when viewed from above, and is formed to slope downward in the direction away from the receiving port COP2000in (the direction of the arrow).

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and also in the direction of extension (direction of arrow FB) and in the vertical direction (direction of arrow The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the UD direction) is curved into a circular arc convex downward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 84(b)).

The side wall portion C2124 defines the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (first passage CRt2001), the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension at least smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

When viewed from above, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 intersects with the upper bottom surface portion C2121 at approximately 90 degrees, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow R) is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow F).

A notch C124a is formed in the side wall C2124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped lower bottom surface C2122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom portion C2122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the ball flows down from the upper bottom portion C2121 to the upwardly inclined side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom portion C2122). After reciprocating the ball that has flown down between one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom part C2122 (first passage CRt2001), it is moved from the notch part C124a to the bottom part C2142 (first passage CRt2001). The ball can be flowed down into the two-pass CRt2002).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

An outflow surface C122a is recessed in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a (that is, a position having the lowest height in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a part for causing the ball guided through the lower bottom part C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to flow out to the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002). It is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the surface.

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), balls with a reduced distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining that connected state.

In addition, the outflow surface C122a is formed in such a way that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) is larger on the side closer to the cutout portion C124a (see Figure 92).

Further, in a top view, when the ball is in contact with the lower side wall C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch C124a, the ball rolls (traverses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the ball rolling (reciprocating) in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) is positioned at the farthest position from the notch portion C124a (the lateral top of the ball contacts the lower side wall portion C2124). position), an outflow surface C122a is formed to the extent that it overlaps with the center of the sphere when viewed from above (this is the locus of the lower top of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface C2122). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface C2122, there is a risk that a ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001) will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) without ever reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001) or before it has reciprocated a sufficient number of times due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. In other words, there is a risk that the leading ball and the trailing ball will not decrease the distance between them and the two balls will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining a gap between them.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed with a downward inclination in the direction away from the cutout portion C124a (the direction of the arrow L) (see FIG. 96). As a result, the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 presses the ball against the side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a, and the ball can be made to roll (reciprocate) on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001).

Thereby, before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, it is possible to suppress the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the effect of the slope of the outflow surface C122a. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, the outflow surface C122a is easily crossed (crossed), and the ball is sufficiently reciprocated along the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are connected together).

The arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122, which is an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction), see Figures 84(b) and 95(b)) has a radius of the arc shape at one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction that is smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between the one end side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a). In other words, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is larger.

This makes it easier for the balls to reciprocate and for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball in the initial stage (the stage where the balls reciprocate to one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity), while making it easier for the leading and trailing balls to maintain a connected state in the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating balls has slowed (the stage where the balls do not reach the one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity and the balls reciprocate in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a). As a result, it is easier for the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining a connected state.

The back member C2130 includes a main body C2131 formed in a plate shape and a shaft support C2134 erected from the front of the main body C2131.

The main body C2131 is provided with an opening C2131a for connecting the passage (fifth passage CRt2005) formed on the front and back sides of the main body C2131, and an opening C2131c for avoiding interference with the distribution member C2170 (weight C2175). Below the opening C2131a, a recess C2131b is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body C2131. The recess C2131b forms part of the fifth passage CRt2005 between the opposing side and the detour member C2200.

The shaft support portion C2134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170. Note that the shaft C2174 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion C2134 and the shaft support portion C2141b of the first intermediate member C2140 in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The first intermediate member C2140 includes a plate-shaped main body C2141, a bottom surface C2142 erected from the rear surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C2141, a top surface C2143, a passage portion C2144, and a lower stopper portion C2145, and is disposed on the left side of the rear surface member C2130 when viewed from the front.

The main body C2141 is formed with an opening C2141a that connects the passages (third passage CRt2003 and sixth passage CRt2006) formed on the front and back sides of the main body C2141. In addition, an axis support seat C2141b is erected from the back of the main body C2141. The axis support seat C2141b is formed as an axis support (bearing) that rotatably supports the axis C2174 of the distribution member C2170.

When the first intermediate member C2140 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the erected tips (in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the top surface portion C2143 abut against the front surface of the rear member C2130. As a result, a second passage CRt2002 is formed by the space partitioned between the rear member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140 (main body portion C2141, bottom surface portion C2142, and top surface portion C2143), and a third passage CRt2003 is formed by the space partitioned between the rear member C2130, the first intermediate member C2140 (bottom surface portion C2142 and passage portion C2144), and the sorting member C2170 in the second position (see FIG. 97).

The bottom surface portion C2142 is inclined downward from the dish member C2120 side toward the sorting member C2170 side. The passage portion C2144 is located between the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) in the second position and the opening C2141a, and is formed with a downward incline from the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) in the second position toward the opening C2141a side. Therefore, when the passage portion C2144 receives a ball from the sorting member C2170 displaced to the second position, it can cause the ball to flow (roll) into the sixth passage CRt2006 via the opening C2141a.

The bottom portion C2142 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) when the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) is displaced upward. A first position is defined (see FIG. 96). On the other hand, the lower stopper portion C2145 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) when the distribution member C2170 (bottom portion C2172b) is displaced downward. (see FIG. 97).

When the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is displaced (raised) upward. That is, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position, the bottom portion C2173 is positioned higher (towards the arrow U) than the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom portion C2173 when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the first position.

The second intermediate member C2150 includes a plate-shaped main body C2151, a bottom face C2152 and wall face parts C2153, C2154 that are erected from the back surface of the main body C2151 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B). It is disposed on the right side of the back member C2130 when viewed from the front, with a predetermined spacing between the member C2140 and the member C2140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opposing interval (the interval in the arrow LR direction) between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 is equal to the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) dimension of the receiving member C2500. It is set to a value larger than the sum of at least twice the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, a space through which the ball can pass is ensured on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) (both with the first intermediate member C2140 and with the second intermediate member C2150). can do. Therefore, it is possible to increase the types (variations) of the direction in which the ball flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

When the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the bottom portion C2152 is positioned so as to be in communication with the opening C2131a of the rear member C2130, and is tilted downward toward the opening 2131a. Therefore, when the bottom portion C2152 receives a ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 (a ball that has fallen from the end of the magnetic portion C2400), it can cause the ball to flow (roll) into the opening C2131a. In other words, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed on the upper surface side of the bottom portion C2152.

In a state where the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the back member C2130, the upright tips (on the arrow B direction side) of the bottom part C2152 and the wall parts C2153, C2154 are in contact with the front surface of the back member C2130. Further, the main body portion C2151 and the wall portions C2153 and C2154 are projected upward (in the direction of arrow U) by a predetermined amount along the edge of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom portion C2152.

The wall portion C2153 located on the side farther from the magnetic portion C2400 forms a surface that intersects with an extension of the direction of movement of the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 (the direction along the lower edge (edge that attracts the ball) of the magnetic portion C2400). This allows the ball that is ejected from the fourth passage CRt2004 (that falls from the magnetic portion C2400) to be directly received by the wall portion C2153, or to be received by the wall portion C2153 after bouncing (jumping up) from the bottom portion C2152 and then dropped onto the bottom portion C2152. In this embodiment, the wall portion C2153 is formed to a position higher than the lower edge (edge that attracts the ball) at the end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the magnetic portion C2400.

On the other hand, the protruding dimension from the top surface of the bottom portion C2152 is smaller (lower) than the protruding dimension of the wall portion C2154 located closer to the magnetic portion C2400, and the protruding dimension of the main body portion C2151 is smaller (lower) than the protruding dimension of the wall portion C2153 located farther from the magnetic portion C2400. This allows the ball to fall from the bottom portion 2152 (fifth passage CRt2005) to the first intervening member C2160 or the second intervening member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006), increasing the interest of the game. Note that it is preferable that the protruding dimensions of the wall portion C2154 and the main body portion C2151 are smaller than the diameter of the ball.

The receiving member C2500 has a first bottom surface portion C2501 and a second bottom surface portion C2502 that form the upper surface (rolling surface), and is disposed between the opposing first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member 2150, at a position below the magnetic portion C2400 (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, a ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be received by the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 and allowed to flow down (roll) to the first intermediate member C2160.

The first bottom surface portion C2501 is formed with a downward incline from the connection portion with the second bottom surface portion C2502 toward the first intermediate member C2140 side (arrow L direction), and the second bottom surface portion C2502 is formed with a downward incline from the connection portion with the first bottom surface portion C2501 toward the second intermediate member C2150 side (arrow R direction). In addition, the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 are inclined downward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back side (back member C2130 side) (see FIG. 99).

As described above, on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows L-R), a space the size of at least one sphere is formed between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150.

Therefore, the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400) is rolled in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the first bottom part C2501 or the second bottom part C2502, and the first interposed member C2160 It can be flowed down to. In this case, the direction in which the ball is caused to flow down can be changed depending on the part (first bottom part C2501 or second bottom part C2502) that receives the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400).

In addition, the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400) is rolled in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the first bottom part C2501 or the second bottom part C2502, and then It can be made to flow down from the downstream end of the portion C2501 or the second bottom portion C2502 to the first intervening member C2160. This allows the ball to easily roll along the longitudinal direction of the first intervening member C2160.

Note that at least one or both of the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 may be inclined upward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back side (back surface member C2130 side), or the receiving member It may be non-inclined (that is, horizontal) from the front side of C2500 toward the back side (back side member C2130 side).

Further, the receiving member C2500 has a form in which a space through which the ball can pass is ensured only on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) (that is, one of the first intermediate member C2140 or the second intermediate member C2150). A space may be formed in which a ball can flow down (pass) only between one and the other, and a space in which a ball can flow down (pass) cannot be formed between one and the other. In this case, the longitudinal dimension of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 can be secured, and the rolling time of the ball can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The first intervening member C2160 is a member that forms a rolling surface that allows the ball that has flown down from the receiving member C2500 to flow down to the second intervening member C2180, and is a member that forms a rolling surface that allows the ball to flow down from the receiving member C2500 to the second intervening member C2180. It is interposed between the opposing sides.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member C2160 has a concave surface (central outflow A surface C2161 and a side outflow surface C2162) are formed. The central outflow surface C2161 is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the central outflow surface C181 (i.e., the first prize opening 64) of the second intervening member C2180, and the side outflow surface C2162 is They are formed (arranged) at two different positions from C2161 in the width direction of the game board 13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 72). Moreover, undulations are formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160, a side outflow surface C2162 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C2161 is formed at the top of the undulation.

The side outflow surface C2162 is formed (placed) at a different position toward the outside (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) of the game board 13 with respect to the side outflow surface C182 of the second intervening member C2180. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface C2162 can be made to flow down further outside than the side outflow surface C182 of the second intervening member C2180 (i.e., the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180 that slopes downward toward the side outflow surface C182). Therefore, such balls can be made to roll easily along the longitudinal direction of the second intervening member C2180. As a result, an opportunity is created for the ball to flow down from the central outflow surface C181 of the second intervening member C2180 (i.e., the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (wins)), which increases the interest of the game.

The distribution member C2170 includes a main body C2171 on which a shaft C2174 is supported, a receiving part C2172 formed on one side of the main body C2171, and a rolling part C2173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body C2171. A brass weight C2175 is provided (attached) to the main body part C2171 at a position opposite to the receiving part C2172 across the shaft C2174, and the shaft C2174 (shaft support part C2134, C2141b) is the center It is said to be rotatable.

The center of gravity of the distributing member C2170 is on the other side (the side where the weight C2175 is disposed, that is, the opposite side to the receiving part C21720 across the axis C2174, the right side in FIG. 96) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174). Eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the distributing member C2170 is in a state in which the receiving part C2172 side is raised (rotated clockwise around the axis C2174 when viewed from the front) and the rotation is restricted by the bottom part C2142 (in the first position). (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C2172 of the distribution member C2170, the weight of the ball causes the overall center of gravity to be on one side (the receiving portion C2172 is formed) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174). (ie, the side opposite to the weight C2175 with respect to the axis C2174, the left side in FIG. 97). Therefore, when the ball is received in the receiving part C2172, the distributing member C2170 is lowered on the receiving part C2172 side (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C2174 in front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper part C2145. (see FIG. 97).

After the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, when the balls are discharged (flow out) from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140, the sorting member C2170 is returned to the first position by the action of its own weight (eccentricity from the axis C2174 of the center of gravity).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C2170 to the first position is performed by the weight (mass) of the distribution member C2170 itself, so the structure can be simplified compared to, for example, a case in which a biasing spring is provided and the biasing spring biases the distribution member C2170 toward the first position.

In addition, compared to the case of using a biasing spring, the displacement of the distribution member C2170 to the first position (return operation) can be made at a lower speed, making it easier for the trailing ball CB2 to reach the rolling part C2173. can. That is, after the distribution member C2170 starts to be displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, it is displaced (rotated) to a position where the trailing ball CB2 cannot flow onto the rolling part C2173. This can increase the amount of time it takes to complete the process. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility that the third ball that follows the trailing ball CB2 also reaches the rolling portion C2173 (see FIGS. 100 to 102).

The receiving portion C2172 has an opposing portion C2172a formed at a position facing the second passage CRt2002 in the first position, and a bottom surface portion C2172b that supports the received ball in the first position and forms a rolling surface for rolling the ball toward the passage portion C2144 in the second position.

In the receiving part C2172, when the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the facing part C2172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom part C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, and the bottom part C2172b is the opposite part It is formed to be inclined upward from C2172a toward the bottom surface C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 96).

When the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, if the opposing portion C2172a is inclined in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the rolling portion C2173 side of the opposing portion C2172a is inclined in a direction away from the second passage CRt2002 more than the bottom surface portion C2172b side), there is a risk that a ball that collides with the opposing portion C2172a will be bounced upward and flow back into the second passage CRt2002.

On the other hand, since the opposing portion C2172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 when the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the opposing portion C2172a The balls received from the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002) can be received by the opposing part C2172a and can be prevented from flowing back into the third passage CRt2003.

In addition, when the sorting member C2170 is positioned at the first position, if the bottom surface C2172b is formed to slope downward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface C2142 (passage portion C2144) of the first intermediate member C2140, the balls received in the receiving portion C2172 will flow out into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 prematurely, and the weight of the balls will not be utilized, which may prevent the sorting member C2170 from reaching the second position.

On the other hand, the bottom portion C2172b is formed to be inclined upward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 when the distribution member C2170 is placed at the first position. The ball can be held on the bottom portion C2172b at least until the distribution member C2170 rotates by a predetermined amount from the first position. Thereby, the time until the ball received in the receiving part C2172 flows out to the passage part C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 can be delayed. As a result, the weight of the ball can be effectively utilized to ensure that the distribution member C2170 reaches the second position.

In this case, in this embodiment, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position, the angle of the upward inclination of the bottom surface portion C2172b in the region of the base end side (right side in FIG. 96, arrow R direction side) connected to the opposing portion C2172a is set to an angle greater than the angle of the upward inclination of the tip side (left side in FIG. 96, arrow L direction side) opposite the opposing portion C2172a. In other words, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the first position, the angle of the downward inclination of the bottom surface portion C2172b in the region of the tip side (left side in FIG. 96) opposite the opposing portion C2172a is set to an angle greater than the angle of the downward inclination of the base end side (right side in FIG. 96) connected to the opposing portion C2172a.

Therefore, in the initial stage when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upward inclination in the area on the base end side (right side of Figure 96) of the bottom surface C2172b is utilized to ensure that the ball is held in the receiving portion C2172 (bottom surface C2172b), while in the later stage, the downward inclination in the area on the tip end side (left side of Figure 96) of the bottom surface C2172b is utilized to smoothly deliver the ball into the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003).

For the reasons mentioned above (preventing backflow into the second passage CRt2002), the opposing portion C2172a may be inclined in a direction such that the rolling portion C2173 side is closer to the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom surface portion C2172b side.

The receiving portion C2172 is formed such that when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position, the bottom surface portion C2172b slopes downward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 ( (See Figure 97). Thereby, the ball received in the receiving part C2172 can be reliably flowed out to the passage part C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140.

In addition, while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the weight of the ball acts on the distribution member C2170, making it easier to maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position (i.e., a state in which the trailing ball can be guided to the rolling portion C2173 (fourth passage CRt4)).

The rolling portion C2173 is formed in a region opposite to the receiving portion C2172 (bottom portion 2172b) with the axis C2174 interposed therebetween. That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position by the weight of the ball received in the receiving part C2172, the area is raised upward (in the direction of arrow U) with the rotation. A rolling portion C2173 is formed in a region including at least. That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the downstream side of the rolling part C2173 is lifted upward, and the distance between it and the magnetic part C2400 is shortened. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily transferred (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position, if the rolling portion C2173 is formed only on the opposite side in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) across the axis C2174, the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passageway CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, there is a possibility that the distribution member C2170 may be rotated toward the first position due to the weight of the ball or the force of the fall. Therefore, the height position (vertical position) of the rolling part C2173 is lowered and the distance between it and the magnetic part C2400 is increased, so that the ball rolling on the rolling part C2173 is prevented from jumping to the magnetic part C2400. (adsorption) may not be possible.

On the other hand, the rolling portion C2173 is formed over a range (area) that overlaps the axis C2174 in the vertical direction when the distribution member C2170 is placed at the second position (see FIG. 97). That is, the region on the upstream side (second passage CRt2002 side) of the rolling portion C2173 is located on one side in the horizontal direction (on the arrow L direction side) with respect to the axis C2174, and the weight of the ball rolling on the upstream side is It can act as a force to maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position.

Therefore, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the weight of the ball and the momentum of the fall are used to apply an inertial force to the sorting member C2170 in a direction to maintain the state in the second position, and while the sorting member C2170 is attempting to displace (rotate) in a direction to maintain the state in the second position due to the action of that inertial force, the ball can be made to roll to the area downstream of the rolling portion C2173. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to jump (be attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

The extension length (length in the direction in which the ball is guided) of the bottom surface C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 is set to a dimension greater than the extension length of the rolling portion C2173. This makes it easier to create a state in which, while a ball is rolling on the rolling portion C2173, another ball is simultaneously rolling on the bottom surface C2172b of the receiving portion C2172. In other words, while a ball is rolling on the rolling portion C2173, the weight of another ball can be applied to the distribution member C2170 on the bottom surface C2172b of the receiving portion C2172.

As a result, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). ) can be suppressed. As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily transferred (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In particular, the bottom surface C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 extends in a direction away from the axis C2174 (in a direction perpendicular to the axis C2174), so that as the ball rolls on the bottom surface C2172b, the distance between the point of application of the force (the position where the weight of the ball acts) and the fulcrum (center of rotation) can be made larger (increased). In other words, as the ball rolls on the bottom surface C2172b, it becomes easier to maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position (the force required to displace (rotate) the distribution member C2170 arranged in the second position to the first position can be increased).

As a result, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). ) can be suppressed. As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily transferred (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

Here, the sorting member C2170 is configured so that the direction in which the balls roll from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) towards the receiving portion C2172 (the direction in which the receiving portion C2172 receives the balls, arrow R direction) is opposite to the direction in which the balls roll in the receiving portion C2172 (the direction in which the received balls are made to roll, arrow L direction). In other words, the sorting member C2170 is configured to reverse (change direction) the flow (rolling) direction of the balls in the receiving portion C2172.

As a result, compared to when the direction in which the receiving section C2172 receives the balls and the direction in which the balls roll in the receiving section C2172 are the same, the time the balls remain in the sorting member C2170 (receiving section C2172) can be secured for the time required for reversal, and the weight of the balls remaining in the receiving section C2172 can be utilized to easily maintain the sorting member C2170 in the second position. As a result, the balls can be stably rolled in the rolling section C2173.

The rolling part C2173 is a part for guiding (distributing) the balls rolling on the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004), and In the state where the partial member C2170 is placed in the second position, there is a gap between the downstream end of the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004). It is located (erected).

As described above, the rolling part C2173 has its upper surface (rolling surface) displaced (raised and lowered) in the vertical direction (arrows U-D) by displacing (rotating) the sorting member C2170 between the first position and the second position. This allows the rolling part C2173 to be positioned below the magnetic part C2400.

As a result, by placing the sorting member C2170 in the second position and displacing (raising) the rolling portion C2173 upward, it is possible to bring it closer to the magnetic portion C2400 and make it easier to attract the balls against the action of gravity, while by placing the sorting member C2170 in the first position and displacing (raising) the rolling portion C2173 downward, it is possible to move it away from the magnetic portion C2400 and reliably form a state in which the balls are not attracted, also utilizing the action of gravity.

The connection portion between the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 (the end on the arrow L direction side) and the opposing part C2172a of the receiving part C2172 is on the upstream side (first intermediate member C2140 (second passage CRt2002) side, arrow L direction) It is formed in the shape of an acute-angled protrusion that protrudes toward the By inserting this protrusion-shaped portion between the balls CB1 and CB2, both balls (balls CB1, CB2) can be separated.

When the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position, the height position of the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling part C2173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the height position of the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface part C2142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C2140. That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface part C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling part C2173, and when the sorting member C170 arranged in the second position is displaced (rotated) by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle) toward the first position, the downstream end of the bottom surface part C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 are arranged at the same height position.

When a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 flows into the receiving portion C2172, the weight of the ball displaces (rotates) the sorting member C2170 downward from the first position, and the lower surface of the sorting member C2170 abuts against the lower stopper portion C2145, thereby positioning the sorting member C2170 at the second position.

In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C2170 will be flipped upward (in the direction of arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C2145. The height position at the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 (rolling surface) is located vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom part C2142 (rolling surface) of C2140. Then, there is a possibility that the ball may not be able to flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173.

In particular, when a ball collides with the distributing member C2170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173) that has been flipped upward, and the impact of the ball collision causes the distributing member C2170 to be further flipped upward (the ball When the distributing member C2170 is further pushed upward by the ball), the ball flows into the receiving part C2172 even though it should have originally flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C2173 ( There is a risk that it will be accepted.

On the other hand, when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) are Since a step is formed between them, even if the distribution member C2170 is thrown upward by an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 will be lower than the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 due to the step between the two. It can be suppressed from being located vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). That is, it is possible to allow the distribution member C2170 to be flipped upward by the difference in level between the two. Therefore, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C2173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002). It is possible to easily flow (roll) from the to the rolling portion C2173.

As in the second embodiment, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C2140, the face in the direction of the arrow L) may be inclined downward from the rolling portion C2173 toward the first intermediate member C2140 (bottom surface portion C2142). In other words, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173 may have a cross-sectional shape in which the edge portion on the receiving portion C2172 (opposing portion C2172a) side is closer to the first intermediate member C2140 than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C2173.

As a result, when a ball collides with the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173) that has been bounced upward, the direction of the force acting from the ball on the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173) can be set to a force in the direction of pushing the sorting member C2170 downward. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C2173 (a trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the preceding ball CB1 is less than a predetermined amount) to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) into the rolling portion C2173.

The magnetic part C2400 is a long metal plate-like body, and is capable of attracting a ball by utilizing the magnetic force exerted by the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. Note that multiple magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C2400.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, a ball flows down from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173. The ball that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400. That is, the ball is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400 (the ridgeline formed by the intersection of the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) and the lower surface (surface in the direction of arrow D)) (see FIG. 103). The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C2400 is moved along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic portion C2400 by the momentum of the ball due to the jump (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the speed of the ball when it jumps from the rolling part C2173 of the distribution member C2170 to the magnetic part C2400, the position of the ball, the rotational state of the ball, etc.), the lower edge of the magnetic part C2400 An unstable state can be created in which the ball may fall (the ball may not reach the end). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In particular, the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004) forms a passage between the distribution member C2170 and the fifth passage CRt2005, which can increase the interest of the game. In other words, the balls distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170 are only balls (trailing ball CB2) that flow (roll) down the second passage CRt2002 when the distance between them and the preceding ball CB1 is less than a predetermined amount (i.e., when connected to the preceding ball CB1), and the possibility of such a trailing ball B2 occurring is relatively low. By displacing the ball (trailing ball B2) that reaches the distribution member C2170 through such a low possibility in an unstable state where there is a possibility of it falling (possibility of it not reaching the fifth passage CRt2005), the player is made to expect that it will pass through safely, which can increase the interest of the game.

The thickness dimension of the magnetic part C2400 is set to a value smaller than the diameter of the sphere (6% of the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment). Therefore, when the outer surface point CP1 of the sphere is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic part C2400, the outer surface point CP2, which is located below the position CP1, is abutted against the front surface of the main body part C2131. In this case, since the center of gravity of the sphere is located farther from the front surface of the main body part C2131 than the outer surface point CP2, the weight of the sphere (gravity acting on the center of gravity) acts as a force in a direction that presses the outer surface point CP2 against the front surface of the main body part 2131 with the outer surface point CP1 as the fulcrum (i.e., a force that rotates the sphere rightward (clockwise) around the outer surface point CP1 in FIG. 103) (see FIG. 103).

As a result, when a ball is attracted to the magnetic part C2400, the ball can be supported at two points, the outer surface point CP1 and the outer surface point CP2, and as a result, the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic part C2400 The movement of the ball along the line can be stabilized. Further, the moving speed of the ball can be slowed down (lower speed) by utilizing the frictional resistance between the outer surface point CP2 and the front surface of the main body portion 2131. Therefore, this also makes it possible to stabilize the movement of the ball and increase the time required to pass through the fourth passage CRt2004, thereby increasing the interest of players who hope that the ball will reach the fifth passage CRt2005 without falling. can be improved.

In this way, by arranging the magnet C2300 and the magnetic part C2400 with the main body part c2131 of the back member C2130 in between, and making the ball move (slide) along the magnetic part C2400, the attraction force can be adjusted. The passage path of the ball can be formed with a simple structure while making it easy to optimize the frictional force.

The second intervening member C2180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in the sixth passage CRt2006, and is interposed between the front member C2110 and the opposing first intermediate member C2140 and first intervening member C2160. In other words, the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed by the spaces partitioned by the front member C2110, the first intermediate member C2140, the first intervening member C2160, and the second intervening member C2180.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180 is formed with a concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and lateral outflow surface C182) that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow balls guided through the second intervening member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006) to flow out into the play area. In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed with undulations, with the lateral outflow surface C182 located at the bottom of the undulations and the central outflow surface C181 located at the top of the undulations.

The upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front portion C111 of the front member C2110 protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180, except for the areas where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. In other words, a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180 flows out (flows down) into the play area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second intervening member C2180, and as described above, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface C112 of the front member C2110. .

The detour member C2200 includes a plate-shaped main body C2201, a wall portion C2202 erected from the front surface (the surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the main body C2201, and a gutter portion C2203 formed by further extending a portion of the wall portion C2202 toward the front surface, and is disposed on the rear surface side of the rear surface member C2130 at a position opposite the opening C2131a.

When the detour member C2200 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the wall portion C2202 abuts against the rear face of the rear member C2130 (main body portion C2131), and the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the gutter portion C2203 abuts against the rear face of the second interposed member C2180, and the edge of the gutter portion C2203 abuts against the bottom face of the first interposed member C2160.

As a result, a space is partitioned between the back member C2130 (main body part C2131) and the detour member C2200 (main body part C2201 and wall surface part C2202), and a space is divided between the first interposed member C2160 and the detour member C2200 (gutter part C2203). A part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed by the partitioned space (see FIGS. 98 and 99).

Note that the gutter portion C2203 is inclined downward from the back member C2130 side toward the second intervening member C2180 side. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the detour member C2200 from the opening C2131a of the back member C2130 is rolled on the gutter portion C2203, and is moved between the bottom portion C112 of the front member C2110 and the second intervening member C2180 (recessed portion C183). It can be made to flow into the fifth passage CRt2005 formed in .

Next, the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170 will be described. Figures 100 to 102 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, and correspond to the cross section at line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. Figure 1036 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b at line CIII-CIII in Figure 102(b).

Note that FIGS. 100(a) and 100(b) show a state in which the distribution member C2170 is placed at the first position, and correspond to FIG. 96. 102(a) and 102(b) show a state in which the distribution member C2170 is placed at the second position, and correspond to FIG. 97.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), when the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the receiving portion C2172 can receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (ball CB1 can flow in).

That is, the receiving portion C2172 has an opposing portion C2172a disposed at a position intersecting an extension line of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface), and a bottom portion C2172b disposed at a position vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the extension line of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface).

When the distribution member C2170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L, the connection portion between the rolling portion C2173 and the opposing portion C2172a) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass).

On the other hand, when the sorting member C2170 is positioned in the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is positioned in a position that cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in).

That is, in the rolling part C2173, the bottom part C2172b is arranged at a position (one level higher) in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U) than the extension line of the bottom part C2142 (rolling surface). Note that the interval in the vertical direction (height of the step) between the rolling portion C2173 and the extension line of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 in the first position.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the top surface C2143 of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling portion C2173 is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass). This allows the ball to jump over the step and flow into the rolling portion C2172b of the sorting member C2170 in the first position.

In this case, when the distribution member C2170 is in the first position, the rolling part C2173 is opposite to the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002) across the axis C2174 in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction). It is located on the side and is inclined downward in a direction (in the direction of arrow R) away from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

Therefore, even if the ball climbs over the step and flows into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 in the first position, the distribution member C2170 is rotated toward the second position by the ball (i.e., The rolling part C2173 can be prevented from being lifted upward, and the ball can be caused to fall toward the second intermediate member 2150 (sixth passage CRt2006) along the downward slope of the rolling part C2173. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball that has climbed over the step from jumping onto (being attracted to) the magnetic part C2400 and flowing down the fourth passage CRt2004 (reaching the fifth passage CRt2005).

However, the magnetic portion C2400 may be disposed in a position where a ball that has overcome the step can jump onto (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400. In other words, when the gap between balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small and ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1 and overcomes ball CB1, the magnetic portion C2400 may be disposed in a position where ball CB2 can jump onto (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400. Since ball CB2 is a ball that should normally be sorted into the fourth passage CRt2004, it is possible to prevent such a ball from falling toward the second intermediate member 2150 (sixth passage CRt2006) and thereby prevent it from being disadvantageous to the player.

When the ball CB1 (the leading ball) and the ball CB2 (the trailing ball with a predetermined interval between them) roll on the bottom surface C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, FIG. ), the ball CB1 flows into (receives) the receiving part C2172 of the distribution member C2170, the ball CB1 contacts (receives) the opposing part C2172a, and is held in the receiving part C2172.

Also, if the distance between balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, ball CB2 will catch up with ball CB1 and come into contact with ball CB1. This allows ball CB2 to wait behind (upstream of) ball CB1.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), when ball CB1 is received by receiving portion C2172, the weight of ball CB1 displaces (rotates) sorting member C2170 from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 101(a). Also, when ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1, the weight of ball CB2 is also applied to sorting member C2170.

Here, the receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the area of the opposing portion C2172a that is connected to the bottom portion C2172b and the area of the bottom portion C2172b that is connected to the opposing portion C2172a, i.e., the connecting portion between the opposing portion C2172a and the bottom portion C2172b, are curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C2174 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion is capable of holding the sphere.

In addition, the distribution member C2170 (the region on the upstream side (arrow R direction side) of the rolling surface of the bottom part C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the downstream end (the arrow R direction side) of the bottom part C2142) When the distribution member C2170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the two is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension through which the sphere cannot pass), and the distance between the distribution members C2170 and By being displaced (rotated) toward the second position, it is gradually enlarged.

That is, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (a position between FIG. 101(a) and FIG. 101(b)), the gap between the above-mentioned sorting member C2170 (the area on the upstream side (arrow R direction) of the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end on the downstream side (arrow R direction) of the bottom surface portion C2142) is expanded to a dimension approximately equal to the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass), and when the sorting member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position toward the second position, the above-mentioned gap is further expanded, and the maximum gap is formed at the second position.

Therefore, while the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C2172 is maintained. In other words, the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) with the ball CB1 received in the receiving portion C2172 between the first position and the predetermined intermediate position. This allows the ball CB2 to remain in contact with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 to be maintained at the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142.

In this case, the distance between the downstream end (end on the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end on the direction of arrow L, the connection portion with the opposing portion C2172a) of the rolling portion C2173 is gradually reduced as the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass) before the sorting member C2170 reaches a predetermined intermediate position. This prevents the ball CB2 from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C2172.

In addition, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side, connecting part with the opposing part C2172a) of the rolling part C2173 is configured to pass closer to the axis C2174 than the outer edge (outer edge opposite the axis C2174) of the trajectory of the ball CB1 held in the receiving part C2172 (connecting part between the opposing part C2172a and the bottom part C2172b).

Therefore, it is possible to maintain the state in which the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1, and maintain the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142. part, the connecting part with the opposing part C2172a) can push back the ball CB2 (push back). That is, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 can be inserted between the balls CB1 and CB2 to separate both balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C2172. Further, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled toward the rolling portion C2173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

When the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) toward the second position from the state shown in FIG. 101(a), the ball CB1 moves toward the passage portion C2144 at the bottom surface as shown in FIG. 101(b). While being rolled on C2172b, the ball CB2 is flown down to the rolling part C2173 (accepted in the rolling part C2173).

As shown in Figures 102(a) and 102(b), when the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003), and the ball CB2 that rolls in the rolling portion C2173 jumps to (is attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004.

After the balls CB1 and CB2 have flowed into the third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004, the distribution member C2170 is returned (displaced) from the second position to the first position by its own weight.

Note that even when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position or even after the distribution member C2170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the third ball When the ball reaches the rolling portion C2173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C2173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173. In this case, depending on whether or not the ball CB1 is on the receiving part C2172 (bottom part C2172b), the rolling speed (momentum) of the third ball, etc., the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) It is determined whether the magnetic material is dropped into the magnetic section C2400 or jumped (adsorbed) by the magnetic part C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004. That is, two states can be formed.

The distribution member C2170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position by the weight of only one ball. Therefore, when the distance between ball CB1 and ball CB2 is greater than a predetermined amount, both balls CB1 and CB2 are received in turn by the receiving portion C2172, and are distributed to the third passage CRt2003 through the distribution operation described above.

As described above, according to the lower frame C2086b in the third embodiment, when the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are connected to each other with an interval equal to or less than the predetermined distance, the ball CB1 is distributed (guided) to the third path CRt2003. ), and the distribution member C2170, which is displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1, can lift the ball CB2 upward and distribute (guide) it to the fourth passage CRt2004, while the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are When the balls are connected with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the third path CRt2003. In this way, the guided path can be changed depending on the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving interest. be able to.

Next, the center frame C3086 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 104 to 107.

In the second embodiment, the distribution member C170 is rotated, but in the third embodiment, the distribution member C3170 is slidably displaced. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

104 and 106 are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. 105 and 107 are rear views of the lower frame C3086b. Note that FIGS. 104 and 105 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is placed in the first position, and FIGS. 106 and 107 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is placed in the second position. . 104 and 106 correspond to the cross section taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77.

The lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment is configured identically to the lower frame C86b in the second embodiment, except for the structure for displacing the distribution member C3170 and the structure for linking the decorative member C3190 to the distribution member C3170.

As shown in Figures 104 to 107, two linear guide grooves C3131c are provided in the main body C131 of the back member C3130, extending in the vertical direction in a parallel orientation. These two guide grooves C3131c are arranged in an orientation that inclines in the direction closer to the first intermediate member C140 as they move downward (in the direction of arrow D).

That is, the horizontal position (arrow LR direction) of the distribution member C3170 in the second position is closer to the intermediate member C140 (arrow L side) than the horizontal position of the distribution member C3170 in the first position. be located.

The distribution member C3170 has a total of four shafts C3171a, one pair above the other, protruding from the back surface of the main body C3171. The shafts C3171a are guided parts that are slidably inserted into the guide grooves C3131c, and the shafts C3171a slide along the guide grooves C3131c, causing the distribution member C3170 to slide (linearly move) between the first position and the second position.

One set of shafts C3171a is disposed in each of the left and right guide grooves C3131c. Therefore, the distribution member C3170 can be moved between the first position and the second position without causing a change in attitude due to rotation (that is, while maintaining the inclination angle of the bottom surface portion C172b and the rolling portion C173 constant). It is possible to slide between the two.

A collar CW having a diameter larger than the width of the guide groove C3131c is provided at the tip of the shaft C3171a inserted into the guide groove C3131c, and this collar CW acts as a stopper to prevent the shaft C3171a from slipping out of the guide groove C3131c.

The distribution member C3170 is defined (arranged) at the first position by the shaft c3171a coming into contact with the upper end (end in the direction of arrow U) of the guide groove C3131c and upward displacement being restricted (Fig. 104 and FIG. 105), the lower stopper portion C132 comes into contact with the lower surface of the distributing member C3170 to restrict downward displacement, thereby defining (arranging) the distributing member C3170 in the second position (see FIGS. 106 and 107). ).

The decorative member C3190 includes an arm portion C3193 that is integrally formed with the main body portion C191 and extends radially outward about the axis C192. It extends along the radial direction around the center. A shaft C3171a is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3193a.

The decorative member C3190 has its center of gravity eccentric to one side (the side opposite the distribution member C3170 across the axis C192, the left side of FIG. 105) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the decorative member C3190 is in a position in which the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward (rotating counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view, see FIG. 105), and the distribution member C3170 is in a state in which it is disposed in the first position by the axis C3171a being pushed upward by the arm portion C3193 (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

On the other hand, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C3170, the center of gravity of the distribution member C3170 and the decorative member C3190 as a whole is shifted from the center of gravity (axis C192) due to the weight of the ball. It is eccentric to the side (the side where the distribution member C3170 is disposed with respect to the axis C192, the right side in FIG. 107). That is, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the distribution member C3170 is lowered along the guide groove C3131c due to the weight of the ball and placed at the second position. Further, in the decorative member C3190, the arm portion C3193 is pushed down by the shaft C3171a and rotated clockwise around the shaft C192 when viewed from the rear (see FIG. 107).

When a ball is bowled from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 in the second position, the decorative member C3190 is rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view by utilizing the eccentricity of its center of gravity, and the arm portion C3193 is raised upward. As a result, the axis C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, and the distribution member C3170 is positioned (returned) to the first position (see Figures 104 and 105).

The operation of distributing the balls CB1 and CB2 by sliding the distributing member C3170 between the first position and the second position is the same as that of the second embodiment described above, so the explanation thereof will be as follows. Omitted.

As described above, according to the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment, when the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are connected with an interval equal to or less than a predetermined amount (including the case where the distance between the two balls is 0), The ball CB1 can be distributed (guided) to the fourth path CRt4, and the ball CB2 can be distributed (guided) to the fifth path CRt5 by the distribution member C170, which is displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, if the balls CB1 and CB2 are connected with an interval exceeding a predetermined distance, both balls (the balls CB1 and the balls CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth path CRt4. In this way, the guided path can be changed depending on the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving interest. be able to.

Here, in a structure in which the distribution member C170 is rotated around the axis C192 as in the case of the second embodiment, the amount of displacement of the receiving portion C172 is ensured (the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the fourth It is necessary to increase the length (distance) between the shaft C192 and the receiving part C172 (to enable displacement between the shaft C192 and the receiving part C172 in the width direction (between the shaft C192 and the receiving part C172). This results in an increase in the size of the distribution member C170 in the direction of connecting the .

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sorting member C3170 is displaced by sliding in the vertical direction, so the amount of displacement of the receiving portion C172 is ensured (i.e., it can be displaced between a position facing the third passage CRt3 and a position facing the fourth passage CRt4), while the sorting member C3170 can be made smaller in the width direction because there is no need to provide a part connecting the center of rotation (axis C192) and the receiving portion C172. In other words, the width dimension of the sorting member C3170 can be the length dimension of the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173 (the dimension in the direction of the arrows L-R).

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a dish member C4120 in the fifth embodiment will be described. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 108(a) is a top view of the dish member C4120 in the fifth embodiment, Figure 108(b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along line CVIIIb-CVIIIb in Figure 108(a), and Figure 108(c) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in Figure 108(a).

The dish member C4120 includes an upper bottom part C4121 and a lower bottom part C4122 that form the bottom of the passage, and an upper side wall part C4123 and a lower side wall part C4124 that form the side walls of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C4121 extends along the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as a substantially linear passageway (first passageway CRt4001) when viewed from above, and also extends in the direction approaching the lower side bottom surface portion C4122 (arrow LR direction). R direction).

The upper side wall portion C4123 defines the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can be guided only in series. However, the passage width may be a dimension that allows multiple balls to be guided in parallel (a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the ball).

A notch C4123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C4123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001), and the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) through this notch C4123a.

The lower bottom surface portion C4122 includes a linear portion C4122a extending along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) and having a substantially linear shape at one end and the other end in the extending direction when viewed from above; Between the pair of straight portions C4122a, an arcuate portion C4122b is formed, which is curved in an arc shape with the outflow surface C122a side being concave when viewed from above. The arc portion C4122b has a shape that projects most upstream (in the direction of the arrow L) in the extending direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 at approximately the center in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom portion C4122 in a plane including the extending direction (direction of arrow FB) and the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) changes as the pair of straight portions C4122a moves toward the circular arc portion C4122b. It is formed as a plane that slopes downward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow D), and is formed substantially horizontally at the arc portion C4122b. That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the circular arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction.

The lower side wall portion C4124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

The straight portion C4122a of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is disposed approximately perpendicular to the upper bottom surface portion C4121 when viewed from above, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (the end on the arrow R direction side) is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the end on the arrow B direction side, the upward sloping side of the straight portion C4122a).

The lower side wall portion C4124 is not formed at the position corresponding to the notch portion C4123a in the upper side wall portion C4123, and as described above, water is supplied from the upper bottom portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) via the notch portion C4123a. The ball is allowed to flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002).

A notch C124a is formed in the lower side wall C4124 on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the side toward the center of the arc in a top view, the side in the direction of arrow R) at approximately the center in the front-to-rear direction of the arc portion C4122b (the position where the curved shape protrudes most in the direction of arrow L), and balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see Figure 81) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom part C4122 is formed from a pair of straight parts C4122a and a circular arc part C4122b, and the upper bottom part C4121 is formed on the upward slope side of the straight part C4122a (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom part C4122). Since the ball is flown down from the (first passage CRt4001), the flown down ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). At the top, the ball can flow down from the notch C124a to the bottom C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 81).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

The arcuate portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 has a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (that is, approximately the center of the arcuate portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B) (the most protruding portion in the direction of arrow L of the curved shape). An outflow surface C122a is recessed in the position).The outflow surface C122a is a part for causing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second path CRt4002) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third path CRt3). It is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see FIG. 81).

Therefore, after reciprocating in the lower bottom part C4122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased can be smoothly flowed out (flowing down) to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3) using the outflow surface C122a. can. That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), the balls (balls in a series of states) in which the distance between the leading ball and the following ball is reduced (balls in a series of states) are moved in the state that they are in a series. It is possible to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the flow rate (see FIG. 81).

Note that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (dimension along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C4122, dimension in the direction of arrow FB) is equal to the width of the notch C124a. The closer the side is, the larger the shape is.

In addition, when the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side, arrow L direction side) of the cutout portion C124a in top view, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) rolls at the position furthest from the cutout portion C124a (the position where the lateral apex of the ball abuts on the lower side wall portion C4124), the outflow surface C122a is formed up to the range overlapping with the center of the ball in top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C4112, crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom part C4122, the ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom part C4122 (second passage CRt4002) will flow through the lower bottom part C4122 (second passage CRt4002). CRt4002) without reciprocating even once or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, there is a possibility that it will flow out (flow down) to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the effect of the slope of the outflow surface C122a. . That is, without reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball, there is a risk that both balls may flow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while remaining separated from each other.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is curved in an arc shape, and a notch portion C124a is formed on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the center side of the arc when viewed from above, the direction of arrow R). Therefore, a centrifugal force is applied to the ball rolling on the arc portion C4122b toward the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a, and the ball can be rolled (reciprocated) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) while being pressed against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a.

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 81) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow. In other words, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow, it is possible to make the ball easily overcome (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and to make the ball easily move back and forth sufficiently along the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are linked together).

Next, the lower frame C5086b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109(a). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 109(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C5086b in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line XCIX-XCIX in Figure 94. Note that Figure 109(a) only shows cross sections of the back member C2130, magnet C2300, and magnetic part C5400 of the lower frame C5086b.

The magnetic part C5400 is an elongated body made of metal, and a protrusion is provided to protrude vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the end on the opposite side (in the direction of arrow F) to the back surface member C2130. Therefore, the magnetic portion C5400 has a substantially L-shaped cross-section. Further, the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 is arranged such that the end thereof on the back member C2130 side is spaced apart from the front of the back member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere, and the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 is formed linearly in the width direction (arrow FB direction).

The magnetic part C5400 is capable of attracting the ball by utilizing the magnetic force exerted by the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. Note that multiple magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C5400.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, a ball flows down from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173. The ball that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 (see FIG. 102). That is, the ball is attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C5400. The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C5400 is moved to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400 by the momentum of the ball due to the jump (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C5400. This allows the ball that flows down along the magnetic portion C5400 to be guided to the fifth passage CRt2005 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, the protruding portion of the magnetic part C5400 is disposed at a position where the end on the back member C2130 side is separated from the front of the back member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere, so that the protrusion extends along the magnetic part C5400. The ball flowing down and the back surface member C2130 are prevented from coming into contact with each other. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frictional force from being applied to the ball, it is possible to increase the speed at which the ball flows down. In addition, since the ball is not supported in front of the back member C2130, it is possible to create an aspect in which the ball sways as it flows down, and there is a possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005). can be made higher. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the behavior of the ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the lower frame C6086b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109(b). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 109(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C6086b in the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line XCIX-XCIX in Figure 94. Note that Figure 109(b) only shows cross sections of the back member C2130, magnet C2300, and magnetic part C6400 of the lower frame C6086b.

The magnetic part C6400 in the seventh embodiment is different from the magnetic part C5400 in the sixth embodiment in that the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (i.e., a surface that is closer to the back member C2130 the further upward in the vertical direction), but the other configurations are the same as those of the magnetic part C5400 in the sixth embodiment.

The ball attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic section C6400 comes into contact with the back member C2130 due to the inclination of the bottom surface and the effect of the magnetic force directly applied by the magnet section C2300. This allows a frictional force to act on the ball, slowing down the speed at which the ball flows down along the magnetic section C6400. This allows the travel time of the ball to be extended, increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the ball can be sandwiched between the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130, preventing the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C6400.

Next, the center frame D86 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 110 to 122.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the center frame 86 is composed of one part, but in the eighth embodiment, the center frame D86 is composed of two members: an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 110 is a front view of the game board D13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in Figure 110, the center frame D86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 7) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b.

The upper frame D86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 110) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 110) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame D86b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 110) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame D86a and the lower frame D86b.

Note that the upper frame D86a is a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (a part disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 110) of the window 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 7). That is, the portion where the lower frame D86b is disposed) is omitted, and the other portions except for the omitted portion have the same structure as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

Next, the lower frame D86b will be described. FIG. 111 is a front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 112 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. Note that in FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame D86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in Figures 111 and 112, the lower frame D86b has an receiving port DOPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage DRt1 connected to the receiving port DOPin, a second passage DRt2 through which the ball guided through the first passage DRt1 flows down, a third passage DRt3 through which the ball guided through the second passage DRt2 (a ball that has reciprocated through the second passage DRt2 in its longitudinal direction (arrow F-B direction)) flows down, and a third passage DRt4 through which the ball guided through the third passage DRt3 (a ball that has reciprocated through the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction) flows down. The ball (which has reciprocated along the direction of the arrows L-R) is sorted into a fourth passage DRt4, a fifth passage DRt5, and a sixth passage DRt6 according to the position to which it flows down from the third passage DRt3, a seventh passage DRt7 through which the ball guided along the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 flows down, an eighth passage DRt8 through which the ball guided along the sixth passage DRt6 flows down, and an outlet DOPout formed as an opening through which the ball guided along the eighth passage DRt8 flows out to the play area (see Figures 119 to 121).

Note that the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 are connected to the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8, forming one passage. That is, the upstream part (first half) of the passage is formed by the sixth passage DRt6, and the downstream part (second half) is formed by the eighth passage DRt8.

In addition, an upper frame passage DRt0 (see FIG. 110) is formed in the upper frame D86a. The upper frame passage DRt0 is a passage that guides balls that flow in (enter) from the area on the left side of the play area when viewed from the front (left side of FIG. 110) (the area between the center frame D86 (upper frame D86a) and the rail 61), and the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 is connected to the receiving port DOPin of the lower frame D86b.

That is, the ball that has flown (entered) from the gaming area into the upper frame passage DRt0 flows (entered) from the upper frame passage DRt0 into the first passage DRt1 of the lower frame D86b via the receiving port DOPin.

The passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined by opposing side walls (side wall portion D142 of intermediate member D140 and side wall portion D132 of back member D130) spaced a predetermined distance apart, and one of the side walls defining the passage width (side wall portion D132 of back member D130) is partially divided (side wall is not formed), and a flow-down port DOPfl through which the balls can flow down is opened at a position adjacent to the divided area in a top view.

The ball guided through the third passage DRt3 (the ball that moves back and forth through the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows L-R)) can flow down (enter) either the fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5 or the sixth passage DRt6 via the flow-down port DOPfl.

The flow-down opening DOPfl is formed as a generally rectangular space (opening) when viewed from above, which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 (the direction of arrow B) and extends along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. The flow-down opening DOPfl is defined by the main body portion D131 and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130.

The upstream ends (upstream openings) of the fourth passage DRt4, the sixth passage DRt6, and the fifth passage DRt5 are arranged in sequence in the downstream opening DOPfl along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. That is, the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 is located at the longitudinal center of the outlet DOPfl, and the upstream ends (upstream opening) of the fourth passage DRt4 and fifth passage DRt5 are located at the sixth passage DRt6. They are located on one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) and the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) in the longitudinal direction of the downstream outlet DOPfl, with the upstream end of the passage DRt6 in between.

Therefore, a ball that reciprocates along the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction and flows down into an area including the longitudinal center of the downflow port DOPfl (arrow L-R direction) flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, and a ball that flows down into an area including one longitudinal side (arrow L side) or the other longitudinal side (arrow R side) of the downflow port DOPfl flows into (enters) the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5. In other words, whether a ball guided through the third passage DRt3 is assigned to either the fourth passage DRt4 or the sixth passage DRt6 is determined according to the position (area) into which it flows down from the third passage DRt3.

Here, the ball guided through the sixth passage DRt6 flows down (flows into) the eighth passage DRt8, and the outlet DOPout, which is the exit of the eighth passage DRt8 (an opening that allows the ball to flow out to the gaming area), is It is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110). Therefore, the balls distributed to the sixth path DRt6 are likely to win the first prize opening 64 (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 is high).

On the other hand, the ball guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 flows down (flows into) the seventh passage DRt7. A central outflow surface D151 is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 as a concave surface formed to be downwardly inclined toward the front side (direction of arrow F) for outflow to the area. In addition, side outflow surfaces D152 are formed (arranged) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left-right direction in FIG. 110) from above the first winning opening 64 in the vertical direction. Moreover, undulations are formed in the seventh passage DRt7, a side outflow surface D152 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface D151 is formed at the top of the undulation.

Therefore, a ball allocated to the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outlet surface D162 into the play area in the seventh passage DRt7 than from the central outlet surface D161 into the play area, and as a result, it is less likely to win the first winning hole 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64 than a ball allocated to the sixth passage DRt6 described above).

In this way, the lower frame D86b in this embodiment can make it easier for a ball reciprocating along the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction to enter the first winning hole 64 by being diverted to the sixth passage DRt6 (in this embodiment, the ball is almost guaranteed to enter the first winning hole 64). Therefore, when the ball reciprocates along the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction, the player is made to expect that the ball will be diverted to the sixth passage DRt6 in order to increase the probability of the ball entering the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a winning opportunity), and this can increase the interest of the game.

Here, in the lower frame D86b in this embodiment, a pair of displacement members D180 are provided at the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 so that they can be opened and closed (displaceable between the closed position and the open position). will be placed. The pair of displacement members D180 are rotatably supported at their proximal ends, and disposed with their distal ends opposite to the proximal ends facing upward (in the direction of arrow U), with the proximal ends serving as rotational axes. By displacing (rotating) the distal ends in a direction toward or away from each other, the distal ends are displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position.

The pair of displacement members D180 are arranged at a predetermined distance in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl, and balls that flow (enter) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6, and balls that do not flow (enter) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 flow (enter) into the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

The opposing distance on the distal end side of the pair of displacement members D180 is such that the opposing distance in the open position is larger than the facing distance in the closed position, and when the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position, the facing distance is set to the closed position. Compared to the case where the ball enters the sixth path DRt6, the area where the ball can flow into (enter the ball) is expanded, and the area where the ball can flow into (the ball enters) the fourth and fifth paths DRt4 and DRt5 is reduced. In other words, the ratio of the opposing interval on the tip side of the pair of displacement members D180 to the interval (dimension) in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the flow outlet DOPfl is smaller in the open position than in the closed position. be made larger. Therefore, when the pair of displacement members D180 are in the open position, the ball is more likely to flow into the sixth passage DRt6 than in the closed position.

In this case, as described below, when a ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position using the weight (mass) of the ball. Specifically, a rolling member D170 is disposed in the sixth passage DRt6, and while a ball is rolling on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 are disposed (displaced) in the open position, and while no ball is present on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 are disposed (displaced) in the closed position.

In this way, in the lower frame D86b of the present embodiment, when a ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position (the sixth passage DRt6). This makes it easier for the ball to enter the sixth path DRt6), thereby preventing the ball that follows the ball that has entered the sixth path DRt6 (for example, a ball reciprocating in the third path DRt3 in its longitudinal direction, a subsequent ball). This makes it easier for the ball to enter the sixth path DRt6.

Therefore, when the first ball enters the sixth path DRt6, the second ball following the ball enters the sixth path DRt6 due to the displacement (rotation) of the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position. If the following second ball enters the sixth path DRt6, the following second ball enters the sixth path DRt6 (second ball (by displacing the displacement member D180 to the open position using its weight), the third ball that follows next (the third ball that follows the second ball) is likely to enter the sixth path DRt6. States can be formed and these aspects can be repeated thereafter. Therefore, the player can expect that a chain of balls entering the sixth path DRt6 will occur due to the ball entering the sixth path DRt6. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the closed position, the minimum opposing distance is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (for example, 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere), and when displaced (rotated) to the open position, the opposing distance at the tip side is set to approximately three times the diameter of the sphere.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame D86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 122 in addition to FIGS. 111 to 112.

FIG. 113 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. FIG. 115 is a top view of the lower frame D86b, FIG. 116 is a front view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 117 is a rear view of the lower frame D86b.

118(a) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIa in FIG. 116, and FIG. 118(b) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIb in FIG. 116.

119(a), FIG. 120(a), and FIG. 121(a) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame D86b, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 115. 119(b), FIG. 120(b), and FIG. 121(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D86b.

Note that Figures 119(a) and 119(b) show a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, while Figures 121(a) and 121(b) show a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

Furthermore, Figures 120(a) and 120(b) show the state during the displacement when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)) and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position).

In addition, in Figures 120(a) and 121(a), the balls rolling on the rolling member D170 are omitted, and in Figures 119(b), 120(b), and 121(b), the detour member D200 is shown in a removed state.

Figure 122(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along line CXXIIa-CXXIIa in Figure 115, Figure 122(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along line CXXIIb-CXXIIb in Figure 115, and Figure 122(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in Figure 119.

As shown in FIGS. 111 to 122, the lower frame D86b includes a front member D110, a plate member D120 disposed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member D110, and A back surface member D130 is disposed facing each other at a predetermined distance on the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B), and is interposed between the facing front member D110 and the back surface member D130, and is arranged between the back surface of the front surface member D110 and the front surface of the back surface member D130. (the surface on the arrow F direction side), the intermediate member D140 is arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, the first interposed member D150 is interposed between the facing member D110 and the intermediate member D140, and the intermediate member D140 and A second intervening member D160 interposed between the opposing back member D130, a rolling member D170 and a displacement member D180 arranged between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the back member D130, and the back side of the back member D130. A transmission member D190 and a detour member D200 are disposed on the back member D130, and a displaceable member D180 is fixed to one side (the side in the direction of arrow F), and the other A shaft support member D210 whose side (arrow B side) can come into contact with the transmission member D190 is provided.

The rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 are disposed to be displaceable (rotatable) between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the back member D130, and the transmission member D190 is displaceable (rotatable) on the back side of the back member D130. will be placed in

In addition, in the lower frame D86b, each member is fastened and fixed to each other by tapping screws, and a rolling member D170, a displacement member D180, and a transmission member D190 are disposed movably on the back member D130 (rotatably). It is configured as a single unit (see Figure 111).

Further, in the lower frame D86b, other members except for the displacement member D180 and the transmission member D190 are made of a resin material that is light-transmissive (that is, transparent through which the back side member and the sphere can be seen through). The transmission member D190 is made of colored resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball passing from the first passage DRt1 to the eighth passage DRt8, and the opening/closing operation (opening/closing state) of the displacement member D180 can be made visible to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can.

In this case, in the lower frame D86b, it is sufficient that the member located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of at least one of the displacement member D180 and the rolling member D170 is made of a light-transmitting resin material. Alternatively, only a region located on the front side of at least one of the displacement member D180 and the rolling member D170 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. If the displacement member D180 can be visually recognized, the player can grasp whether the ball is likely to flow down (enter the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6 based on its open/closed state, and even if the displacement member D180 cannot be visually recognized, If the rolling member D170 can be visually recognized, the player can grasp the open/closed state of the displacement member D180 based on the rotational state of the rolling member D170 (position that changes depending on the presence or absence of a rolling ball), which increases the interest of the game. This is because it can be improved.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rolling member D170 is made of a colored resin material. This is because it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the rotational state of the rolling member D170 (the posture that changes depending on the presence or absence of a rolling ball).

Note that the rolling member D170, the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 are made of a light-transmissive (transparent or colored) resin material, and the front surfaces thereof are painted or have a sticker attached. Also good.

On the other hand, in the lower frame D86b, the member located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170 is made of a light-impermeable resin material (or is coated). The displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member D110 includes a plate-shaped front portion D111 that forms the front, a plate-shaped bottom portion D112 that stands upright from the back surface of the front portion D111, and a connecting portion D113 that is disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the front portion D111 and the bottom portion D112.

A plurality of insertion holes D111a are bored in the thickness direction of the front part D111 along the outer edges of the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D) and the side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the front part D111. In the assembled state (unitized state), the lower frame D86b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and a tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole D111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (disposed) on the base plate 60.

In the front part D111, an outlet DOPout is formed (perforated in the thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 110). As described above, the outflow port DOPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the eighth passage DRt8 flows out to the game area.

The bottom surface of the bottom surface portion D112 is disposed opposite the bottom surface of the first intervening member D150, and a portion (the most downstream portion) of the eighth passage DRt8 is formed between the bottom surface portion D112 and the first intervening member D150 (recess D153). Therefore, the structure can be simplified and production costs can be reduced, for example, compared to a case in which a through hole formed through the first intervening member D150 is used as part of the eighth passage DRt8.

The bottom surface portion D112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal area of the front surface portion D111, and the erected tip (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion D112 abuts over the entire area against the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the bottom surface portion D144 of the intermediate member D140. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering from the bottom side of the lower frame D86b.

In addition, in the bottom part D112, the vertical dimension of the part that partitions the eighth passage DRt8 from the front part D111 is larger than the vertical dimension of other parts of the bottom part D112, and the eighth part of the bottom part D112 The upright tip of the portion that defines the passage DRt8 is brought into contact with the front surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140.

A dish member D120 is disposed on the upper surface side (the side in the direction of the arrow U) of the connecting portion D113 and is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw.

The dish member D120 includes a receiving port DOPin, an upper bottom surface portion D121 and a lower bottom surface portion D122 that form the bottom surface of a passage that guides the ball received from the receiving port DOPin, and an upper side wall portion D123 that forms a side wall of the passage. and a lower side wall portion D124.

As described above, the reception port DOPin is an opening that receives the ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 of the upper frame D86a (see FIG. 110). Note that when the center frame D86 is attached (arranged) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame D86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion D111 and the connecting portion D113, and both are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. Thereby, the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 and the receiving port DOPin are communicated with each other.

The upper bottom portion D121 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and slopes downward in a direction away from the receiving port DOPin (direction of arrow B). It is formed by Note that the upper bottom surface portion D121 is located vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0, and a vertical step is formed between it and the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0. . That is, the dish member D120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion D121.

A groove D121a having a U-shaped cross section is formed in the center of the upper bottom surface portion D121 in the width direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 84). The groove D121a extends linearly in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The width of the groove D121a (dimension in the direction of arrow LR) is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the depth of the groove D121a (dimension in the direction of arrow UD) is made smaller than the bottom surface of the groove D121a. The depth is set so that the ball does not touch the ball.

Thereby, the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 can be supported at two locations (a pair of ridgeline portions where the upper bottom surface portion D121 and the groove D121a intersect). Therefore, compared to the case where the groove D121a is not formed (that is, the case where the ball is supported at only one location), the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to buffer (receive) the impact of the ball falling from the upper frame passage DRt0 and increase the resistance when the ball rolls.

As described above, by dropping a ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 onto the upper bottom surface portion D121 and supporting the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 at two points, when two balls flow (drop) from the upper frame passage DRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) with a specified distance between them, the flow down of the leading ball is delayed in the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1), making it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball. This makes it possible to reduce the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball.

The upper side wall portion D123 is a wall portion that partitions the downstream end (in the direction of arrow B) of the upper bottom portion D121 (first passage DRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom portion D121 (first passage DRt1). It is formed as a plate-shaped body that stands vertically (direction of arrow FB). Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension smaller than at least twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). This setting allows multiple balls to be guided only in series.

A notch D123a is formed in the upper side wall portion D123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1), and the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) through this notch D123a.

The lower bottom surface portion D122 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and also in the direction of extension (direction of arrow FB) and in the vertical direction (direction of arrow FB). The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the UD direction) is curved into an arc shape that is convex in the vertical direction downward (in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 121).

The lower bottom part D122 is located vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the downstream end of the upper bottom part D121 (the part where the notch D123a is formed), and A vertical step is formed between the two. That is, the dish member D120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper bottom surface portion D121 to the lower bottom surface portion D122.

The lower side wall portion D124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided, the direction of the arrow F-B) of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension at least smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, and preferably smaller than a dimension 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

The lower bottom portion D122 is arranged parallel to the upper bottom portion D121 in a top view, and is located between the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow B) of the upper bottom portion D121 and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom portion D122. (the end on the side in the direction of arrow B) are arranged at adjacent positions.

At the position corresponding to the notch D123a in the upper side wall D123, the lower side wall D124 is not formed, and as described above, water from the upper bottom surface D121 (first passage DRt1) is passed through the notch D123a. The ball is allowed to flow down (fall) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2).

A notch D124a is formed in the lower side wall D124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped curved lower bottom surface D122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface D122 (second passage DRt2) to the first intervening member D150 (third passage DRt3) through this notch D124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion D122 is curved in an arc shape, and the balls flow down from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) to one of the upwardly inclined sides (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122), so that the balls that flow down can be made to reciprocate between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), and then the balls can be made to flow down from the cutout portion D124a to the first intervening member D150 (third passage DRt3).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

The lower bottom surface portion D122 has an outflow surface D122a recessed at a position corresponding to the cutout portion D124a (i.e., the lowest vertical position). The outflow surface D122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) to flow out to the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion D122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface D122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), balls with a reduced distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3) while maintaining that connected state.

In addition, the outflow surface D122a is formed in such a shape that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion D122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) is larger on the side closer to the cutout portion D124a (see FIG. 115).

In addition, when viewed from above, when a ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion D124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the cutout portion D124a, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface D122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) rolls at a position furthest from the cutout portion D124a (a position where the lateral apex of the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion D124), the outflow surface D122a is formed up to a range that overlaps with the center of the ball in a top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion D122, crosses the outflow surface D122a).

In the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion D122 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to its extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and parallel to the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) in the horizontal direction (arrow F-D direction). -B direction) is formed in a straight line shape parallel to the B direction. However, as in the case of the embodiment described above (see FIG. 84), the lower bottom surface portion D122 may be tilted downward in the direction away from the notch portion D124a (in the direction of arrow L).

The outflow surface D122a is formed at one end side (in this embodiment, the upper side) of the center of the lower bottom surface D122 in the longitudinal direction (the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface D122, the arrow FB direction). It is disposed at a position biased towards (close to) the downstream end side of the bottom surface portion D121 (in the direction of arrow B) (see FIG. 121).

In this case, the height position of the lower bottom surface portion D122 in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD) is one end in the longitudinal direction (end in the direction of arrow B) and the other end (end in the direction of arrow F). are the same, and the arcuate shape of the lower bottom part D122 (the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction of the lower bottom part D122 (direction of arrow FB) and the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) The curvature between one longitudinal end side (arrow B direction side) and the outflow surface D122a is the same as the other longitudinal end side (arrow D direction). F direction side) and the outflow surface D122a. That is, the radius between one longitudinal end (the side in the direction of arrow B) and the outflow surface D122a is made smaller than the radius between the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow F) and the outflow surface D122a.

This makes it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball in the region between the other longitudinal end side (arrow F direction) and the outflow surface D122a, and also makes it easier for the leading ball and trailing ball to form a connected state by softening the collision when they catch up (i.e., by preventing the gap between the two balls from widening due to the impact when the trailing ball collides with the leading ball). As a result, it becomes easier for the two balls to flow out (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3) while connected together.

Note that when the dish member D120 is disposed in such a manner that the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) is along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB), the window portion 60a of the base plate 60 Since the window portion 60a is disposed within the window portion 60a, the space in the front and rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the entire length of the lower bottom portion D122 (second passage DRt2) can be ensured, making it easy to connect the balls.

The back member D130 has a main body D131 formed in a plate shape, is located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) than the main body D131, and is arranged in a parallel attitude to the main body D131, and is formed in a plate shape. It includes a side wall portion D132, a connecting portion D133 that connects the main body portion D131 and the side wall portion D132, and a partition wall D134 erected from the back surface of the main body portion D131.

The main body D131 is formed with a support portion D131a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a support hole D131b that supports the shaft D211 of the support member D210, an insertion hole D131c through which the body D192 of the transmission member D190 is inserted, openings D131d and D131e that allow a ball to pass through, and a protrusion D131f that can come into contact with the ball.

The pivot support D131a is formed as a bearing on the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main body portion D131, and the pivot support D141a is formed on the back surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the pivot support D131a. In the rolling member D170, the ends of the shaft D171 protrude from one side surface and the other side surface in the width direction (front-back direction, arrow FB direction). The shaft D171 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and both ends of the shaft D171 are supported by the shaft support D131a of the back member D130 and the shaft support D141a of the intermediate member D140, respectively. . Thereby, the rolling member D170 is rotatably disposed between the back surface member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

The shaft support hole D131b is formed as a hole that penetrates the main body portion D131 in the plate thickness direction (direction of the arrow FB), and a shaft support D141b is provided on the back surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the shaft support hole D131b. It is formed. The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is inserted into the shaft support hole D131b of the main body portion D131 and the shaft hole of the displacement member D180 in order in a posture along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB), and is inserted into one side of the displacement member D180. One end of the shaft D211 protruding from the side surface (on the intermediate member D140 side) is pivotally supported by the shaft support D141b of the intermediate member D140. Thereby, the displacement member D180 is rotatably disposed between the facing member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

The insertion hole D131c is formed penetrating the main body D131 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction) and is formed as an opening (hole) of a size that allows rotation of the trunk D192 of the transmission member D190. The transmission member D190 has ends of a shaft D191 protruding from one end face and the other end face in the axial direction (front-back direction, arrow F-B direction) of the trunk D192, and both ends of the shaft D191 are journaled by the journal support portion D141c of the intermediate member D140 and the journal support portion D201 of the detour member D200, respectively. As a result, the transmission member D190 is rotatably disposed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the detour member D200, on the back side of the back member D130.

The openings D131d and D131e are formed as openings (holes) having a size that allows a ball to pass through the main body D131 in the thickness direction (direction of arrow FB). That is, it is formed as an opening for communicating the passages (fifth passage DRt5 and eighth passage DRt8) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body portion D131. Note that the openings D131d and D131e are set to a size that allows only one ball to pass through them (two balls cannot pass through them at the same time).

Here, the sixth passage DRt6 is formed on the front side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (facing the intermediate member D140), and the eighth passage DRt8 is formed on the upstream side (first half) on the rear side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (facing the detour member D200) and on the downstream side (second half) on the front side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (inside the intermediate member D140, facing the front member D110 and the first intervening member D150).

Therefore, the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131d, and the upstream side (the first half) and the downstream side (the second half) of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131e. Ru. That is, the ball that has been flown down (guided) through the sixth passage DRt6 is moved from the front side of the back member D130 (main body part D131) to the back side by passing through the opening D131d, and flows into the eighth passage DRt8. . In addition, the ball that has flown down (guided) the upstream side (first half) of the eighth passage DRt8 is moved from the back side of the back member D130 (main body part D131) to the front side by passing through the opening D131e, and It flows into the downstream side (second half) of the 8 passage DRt8.

The protrusions D131f are formed as ridges (long, thin protrusions) that protrude from the front surface (surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the main body D131 and extend linearly along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), and are arranged at multiple locations (five locations in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (equally spaced in this embodiment) along the rolling direction of the balls in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170) (see FIG. 122(c)). The protruding dimensions and cross-sectional shape of the protrusions D131f are the same along the extension direction (vertical direction).

The lower end (the end on the side in the direction of arrow D) of protrusion D131f is set at a position where the distance between the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 arranged in the second position is smaller than the radius of the ball when viewed from the front (see FIG. 121). Therefore, even when the rolling member D170 is arranged in the second position, the ball and protrusion D131f can come into contact with each other.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the upper end of the protrusion D131f (the end on the side in the direction of arrow U) has a spherical distance from the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 disposed at the initial position (first position). (see FIG. 119). Therefore, even if the ball jumps upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface of the rolling member D170 (main body part D172) disposed at the second position, the ball and the protrusion D131f can come into contact with each other. Ru.

In this embodiment, the spacing (spacing in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the multiple protrusions D131f is set to a spacing approximately equal to the diameter of the ball. In addition, the multiple protrusions D131f are arranged at different positions along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6 relative to the multiple protrusions D141g protruding from the back surface of the intermediate member D140 (main body part D141). That is, the protrusions D131f of the back surface member D130 and the protrusions D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6 (see FIG. 122(c)). This allows the ball rolling in the sixth passage DRt6 to be delayed.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as a means for acting on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and this action applies resistance to the ball, slowing down the ball's speed. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170), and therefore makes it easier (longer) to maintain (lengthen) the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter).

The protruding tip of the protrusion D131f is curved to have an arc-like cross section. However, the cross section of the protrusion D131f may also be substantially rectangular. The protrusion D131f may also have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), or may have a shape that includes at least a portion of a curved shape extending to have an arc-like curve.

Note that when the protrusion D131f has a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the rolling surface of the ball (the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170) It is preferable that the upper side (in the direction of arrow U) is inclined in a direction that is located on the upstream side (in the direction of arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because when a ball that bounces up from the rolling surface collides with the protrusion D131f, a force component in the direction of pushing the ball back to the side opposite to the rolling direction (upstream side) is applied to the ball, making it easier to delay the ball. be.

The side wall portion D132 is disposed at a height position such that its upper edge (in the direction of the arrow U) is higher than the upper surface of the second intervening member D160 (in the direction of the arrow U), and the side wall portion D132 is located at a height above the upper surface of the second intervening member D160 (in the direction of the arrow U). Together with the portion D142, the passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined.

The partition wall D134, together with the main body D131 and the detour member D200, defines the eighth passage DRt8. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed opposite the main body D131, and the area defined by the partition wall D134 between them defines the eighth passage DRt8. The area defined by the partition wall D134 is formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape when viewed from the rear (as viewed in the direction of arrow F), with an opening D131d at one end in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow L) and an opening D131e at the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow R), and is inclined downward from one end in the longitudinal direction to the other end.

The intermediate member D140 has a main body D141 formed in a plate shape, and is located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the main body D141 and is arranged in a parallel attitude to the main body D141, and is formed in a plate shape. A side wall portion D142, a connecting portion D143 connecting the main body portion D141 and the side wall portion D142, a bottom portion D144 erected from the front side of the main body portion D141, and a partition wall (a partition wall erected from the back side of the main body portion D141). A fourth passageway dividing wall D145L, a fifth passageway dividing wall D145R, a sixth passageway dividing wall D146, and an eighth passageway dividing wall D147).

The main body portion D141 includes a shaft support D141a that pivotally supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a shaft support D141b that pivotally supports the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210, and a shaft support that pivotally supports the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190. D141c, openings D141d, D141e, and D141f that allow the ball to pass through, and a protrusion D141g that allows the ball to abut.

The pivot support parts D141a, D141b, and D141c are formed as bearings on the rear surface (the surface on the direction of arrow B) of the main body part D141, and as described above, are formed at positions facing the pivot support part D131a of the rear member D130, the pivot support hole D131b, and the pivot support part D201 of the detour member D200.

That is, the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170 is connected to the shaft support D131a of the back member D130 and the shaft support D141a of the intermediate member D140, and the shaft support member D210 is connected to the shaft support hole D131b of the back member D130 and the shaft support D141b of the intermediate member D140. The shaft D191 of the transmission member D190 is supported by the shaft support D141c of the intermediate member D140 and the shaft support D201 of the detour member D200, respectively. Incidentally, the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210, and the transmission member D190 are all arranged with their axial directions aligned in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB).

Openings D141d, D141e, and D141f are openings (holes) large enough to allow a ball to pass through, and are formed by penetrating the main body D141 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction).

The openings D141d and D141e are respectively formed as the exits of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 (openings through which the balls flow out to the seventh passage DRt7), and are formed from the upper surface (rolling surface of the balls) of the first intervening member D150. is also formed upwards. That is, the balls guided through the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 flow out (flow down) to the seventh passage DRt7 via the openings D141d and D141e.

The opening D141f is formed as a communication port (opening) that connects the downstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the back side of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141) with the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the front side of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141). In other words, the opening D141d is formed as part of the passage (eighth passage DRt8) that penetrates the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140.

The protrusion D141g is a protrusion (elongated stripe) that protrudes from the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the main body D141 and extends linearly along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow U-D). The protrusions are formed at multiple locations (protrusions) at predetermined intervals (equal intervals in this embodiment) along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170). In the embodiment, six locations) are provided (see FIG. 122(c)). Note that the protrusion dimensions and cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D141g are the same along the extending direction (vertical direction).

In this embodiment, the spacing between the multiple protrusions D141g (spacing in the direction of the arrows L-R) is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the ball. In addition, the multiple protrusions D141g are arranged at different positions along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6, relative to the multiple protrusions D131f protruding from the front of the back member D130 (main body part D131). That is, the protrusions D131f of the back member D130 and the protrusions D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6 (see FIG. 122(c)). This allows the ball rolling in the sixth passage DRt6 to be delayed.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as action means that act on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and by applying resistance to the ball, the speed of the ball can be lowered. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time required for the weight of the ball to act on the rolling member D170 (that is, the displacement member D180 is at least in the closed position) can be lengthened. It is easier to maintain (for a longer time) a state in which the ball is more open and the ball is more likely to enter the ball.

In this embodiment, the opposing distance (distance in the direction of arrow FB) between the front surface of the main body D131 of the back member D130 and the back surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140 is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. The opposing distance (distance in the direction of arrow FB) between the virtual surface (plane) in which the tips of the plurality of protrusions D131f are connected and the virtual surface (plane) in which the tips of the plurality of protrusions D141g are connected is , is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the sphere or slightly smaller than the diameter of the sphere. However, the opposing distance between both virtual surfaces may be set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The protruding tip of the protrusion D141g is curved to have an arcuate cross section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D141g may be approximately rectangular. Further, the protrusion D141g may have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD), or may have a curved shape extending in an arc shape. The shape may be included in the part.

When the protrusion D141g is formed into a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), it is preferable to incline the upper side (in the direction of the arrow U) of the ball's rolling surface (the upper surface of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in a direction that is located upstream (in the direction of the arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because, when a ball bounces up from the rolling surface and collides with the protrusion D141g, a force component is applied to the ball in a direction that pushes the ball back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (upstream), making it easier to delay the ball.

The side wall portion D142 is disposed at a height position where its upper edge (the side in the direction of the arrow U) is higher (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the second intervening member D160, and as described above, defines the passage width of the third passage DRt3 together with the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130.

The connecting portion D143 connects the lower edge (arrow D direction side) of the side wall portion D142 to the upper edge (arrow U direction side) of the main body portion D141 continuously over the entire longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), and the second intermediate member D160 is disposed on the upper surface side (arrow U direction side) of the connecting portion D143.

The connecting portion D143 faces the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R of the intermediate member D140 at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), and the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 are respectively formed between them. In other words, the connecting portion D143 forms the upper surfaces (upper inner surfaces) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5.

The bottom part D144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body part D141 in the area excluding the opening D141f, and the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the bottom part D144 is connected to the bottom part D112 in the front member D110. is brought into contact with the erected tip (in the direction of arrow B). That is, the bottom surface portion D144 is formed by being divided into a region where the opening D141f is opened and a region near the region.

In the region where the bottom portion D144 is divided (the region including the opening D141f), as described above, the upright tip of the portion of the bottom portion D112 of the front member D110 that partitions the eighth passage DRt8 is located below the opening D141f. The main body portion D141 is brought into contact with the front surface of the main body portion D141 on the left and right sides (the side in the direction of arrow L and the side in the direction of arrow R).

The fourth passage dividing wall D145L is a part that partitions the fourth passage DRt4 together with the main body part D141 and the connecting part D133 of the main body part D141 and the back member D130. ), and a part (vertical wall part) that receives the ball rolling on the rolling part (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the end point of the ball's rolling.

That is, the fourth passage partition wall D145L has a rolling portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the rolling portion is arranged at a position where one longitudinal end side (arrow R direction side) overlaps with the downflow port DOPfl when viewed from above (a position where it can receive (catch) a ball that has entered (flowed down) into the downflow port DOPfl), and is inclined downward toward the other longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side), and extends to a position where the other longitudinal end side overlaps with the lower edge of the opening D141d, and a vertical wall portion that runs along the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) is connected to the extended end (other longitudinal end).

Note that the fourth passage dividing wall D145L has a part (region overlapping with the opening D141d) on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow L) that is inclined downward toward the opening D141d, so that the fourth passage dividing wall D145L (rolling direction side) The ball that has reached the other end in the longitudinal direction of the moving surface is allowed to roll toward the opening D141d.

Therefore, the ball that enters the fourth passageway DRt4 from the outlet DOPfl is received (received) by one end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) of the fourth passageway dividing wall D145L, and the ball enters the fourth passageway dividing wall D145L. It is rolled toward the other end in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side). The ball that has reached the other end in the longitudinal direction abuts (receives) the vertical wall connected to the other end in the longitudinal direction, and after the rolling is regulated, it passes through the opening D141d to the seventh passage DRt7. 1 interposed member D150).

The fifth passage dividing wall D145R is a part that partitions the fifth passage DRt5 together with the main body part D141 and the connecting part D133 of the main body part D141 and the back member D130, and is a part whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the ball (rolling part ) and a portion (vertical wall portion) that receives the ball that has rolled on the rolling portion (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the end point of the ball's rolling.

In addition, the fifth passage dividing wall D145R is formed symmetrically with respect to the fourth passage dividing wall D145L with the displacement member D180 as the center when viewed from the front, and its structure and operation are similar to the fourth passage dividing wall D145L described above. Since the structure and operation are substantially the same as that of D145L, the explanation will be omitted.

The sixth passage dividing wall D146 is a part that divides the sixth passage DRt6 together with the main body part D141, the fourth passage dividing wall D145L, the main body part D131 of the back member D130, and the rolling member D170, and the upper surface is a rolling surface with a ball. A part (rolling part) where the ball rolls on the rolling part (rolling surface) is received by the inner wall surface and a part (vertical wall part) defines the end point of the ball's rolling.

That is, the sixth passage dividing wall D146 is arranged in parallel with one end of the rolling member D170 in the longitudinal direction (on the arrow L direction side, on the extension line of the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170), and prevents the rolling of the ball. A rolling part formed to be able to receive a ball rolled on member D170, and a rolling part connected to the end of the rolling surface (opposite side to rolling member D170) and extending in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD). and a vertical wall portion formed therein.

The sixth passage partition wall D146 has an upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion that is inclined downward toward the opening D141f, allowing the ball received from the rolling member D170 to roll toward the opening D141f.

Therefore, the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6 from the downflow port DOPfl and rolls on the rolling member D170, is received by the rolling portion (rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146, abuts (is received) against the vertical wall portion connected to the end of the rolling portion, and after its rolling is restricted, it flows out (flows down) into the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D141f.

The eighth passage dividing wall D147 is a part that divides a part of the eighth passage DRt8 (the part formed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140), and has a cylindrical shape with a substantially rectangular (frame-like) cross section. The opening D141f communicates with the opening D131e of the back member D130. That is, the balls flowing out from the opening D131e of the back member D130 flow into the passage (space) defined by the eighth passage partition wall D147, flow down (roll) through the passage (space), and then flow from the opening D141f. It flows out and flows into the remaining part of the eighth passage DRt8 (the part formed between the front member D110 and the first intervening member D150).

The first intervening member D150 is a member that forms a rolling surface of the ball in the seventh passage DRt7, and is interposed between the facing member D110 and the intermediate member D140. That is, the seventh passage DRt7 is formed by the space defined by the front member D110, the intermediate member D140, and the first intervening member D150. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150 is curved in an arc shape convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front, and is formed in the fourth passage DRt4 (opening D141d) or the fourth passageway DRt4 (opening D141d). The ball flowing down from the 5th passage DRt5 (opening D141e) is allowed to reciprocate along the curve.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member D150 is provided with a front side (arrow shown by the arrow A concave surface (a central outflow surface D151 and a side outflow surface D152) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the F direction side. Further, an undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the seventh passage DRt7, and a side outflow surface D152 is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while a central outflow surface D151 is arranged at the top of the undulation.

The upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front portion D111 of the front member D110 protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150, except for the areas where the central outflow surface D151 and the lateral outflow surface D152 are formed. In other words, a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150 flows out (flows down) into the play area only from the central outflow surface D151 or the lateral outflow surface D152.

A recess D153 is formed in the bottom surface of the first intervening member D150, and as described above, a part of the eighth passage DRt8 is formed between the recess D153 and the bottom surface D112 of the front member D110. .

The second intervening member D160 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in the third passage DRt3, and is interposed between the opposing back member D130 and intermediate member D140. That is, the third passage DRt3 is formed by the space partitioned between the back member D130, the intermediate member D140, and the second intervening member D160. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member D160 is curved in a circular arc that is convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front, allowing the balls that flow down from the second passage DRt2 to reciprocate along the curve.

In this embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member D160 is lowest at a position corresponding to the center (opposing space between a pair of displacement members D180) of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl, and is formed so that the height position increases toward one or the other longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side or arrow R direction side) of the second interposed member D160 (third passage DRt3).

That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member D160 extends from a position corresponding to the opposing space of the pair of displacement members D180 to one longitudinal end side or the other end side (arrow L direction side or arrow R direction side). It is formed with an upward slope. Therefore, the ball is allowed to reciprocate along the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the third passage DRt3.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intermediate member D160 is formed (recessed) with concave surfaces (central outflow surface D161 and lateral outflow surfaces D162) that are inclined downward toward the back side (arrow B direction) to allow the balls to flow out of the second intermediate member D160 (third passage DRt3) to the outflow port DOPfl.

The central outflow surface D161 is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the center (opposing space of a pair of displacement members D180) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl. On the other hand, the lateral outflow surface D162 is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the opposing space of the displacement member D180 (closed position) toward one or the other end of the second intervening member D160 (third passage DRt3) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, and is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the opposing space of the displacement member D180 (closer to the center of the opposing space than the tip of the displacement member D180) when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

Therefore, when the displacement member D180 is positioned in the closed position, a ball flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter the space between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 (i.e., the sixth passage DRt6), and a ball flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

On the other hand, when the displacement member D180 is positioned in the open position, both the ball flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow port DOPfl and the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 (i.e., the sixth passage DRt6).

In this embodiment, the length of the flow port DOPfl in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is such that the ball flows down (enters) into the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position. sphere) is set to possible dimensions.

That is, between the tip of the displacement member D180 disposed in the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130, there is a gap (interval) larger than the diameter of the sphere in the longitudinal direction of the flow outlet DOPfl (arrow It is secured (formed) in the LR direction). Thereby, even when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position, the ball can flow down (enter) not only into the sixth path DRt6 but also into the fourth path DRt4 or the fifth path DRt5. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

However, the length of the flow port DOPfl in the longitudinal direction (direction of the arrow LR) must be adjusted so that the ball flows down (enters) into at least one of the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position. (ball) may be set to impossible dimensions.

In other words, the gap (distance) between the tip of the displacement member D180 placed in the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130 may be smaller than the diameter of the ball when viewed from above (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass). This allows the ball to flow (enter) only into the sixth passage DRt6 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position. This can increase the interest of the game.

When viewed from above, the central outflow surface D161 has an extended length of its concave surface (dimension in the direction perpendicular to the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating in the third passageway DRt3 (arrow FB direction)) as a side outflow surface D161. It is made larger than the extended length of the surface D162 (concave surface). In addition, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 (arrow LR direction)) of the central outflow surface D161 is larger than that of the side outflow surface D161. (concave) width.

Therefore, even if the number of central outflow surfaces D161 formed (one location) is smaller than the number of side outflow surfaces D162 formed (two locations), the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 will not be able to reach the center outflow surface D161. The probability of the ball flowing down (entering the ball) from the ball to the flow outlet DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6) can be ensured.

The extension length and width of the concave surface may be set to be the same for the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surface D162. Also, contrary to this embodiment, the extension length of the central outflow surface D161 (concave surface) may be set to be smaller than the extension length of the side outflow surface D162 (concave surface). In these cases, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, it becomes difficult for the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 to flow down (enter) the downflow port DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6), and the advantage of placing the displacement member D180 in the open position can be relatively pronounced.

Furthermore, the formation of at least one or both of the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surfaces D162 (the recessed formation on the upper surface of the second intervening member D160) may be omitted. The positions where the balls reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 flow down to the outlet DOPfl are set uniformly along the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the outlet DOPfl, and the positions in the fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5, or the sixth passage It is possible to increase the randomness of which path of the path DRt6 the ball flows down (enters into).

The rolling member D170 includes an axis D171, a long plate-shaped main body D172 with the axis D171 disposed at one end in the longitudinal direction, a transmission part D173 disposed at the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 (the side opposite to the side where the axis D171 is disposed), and a weight part D174 disposed on the opposite side of the transmission part D173 (main body D172) across the axis D171, and is disposed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140 so as to be rotatable about the axis D171.

As described above, the axis D171 is arranged in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Therefore, by displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170 about the axis D171, the main body portion D172 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).

The main body D172 has an upper surface that forms a rolling surface for the balls in the sixth passage DRt6, and one end in the longitudinal direction (the side where the shaft D171 is disposed, the side in the direction of arrow L) is connected to the intermediate member D140. It is arranged in parallel with the rolling part (the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partitioning wall D146, and on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (opposite side to the side where the shaft D171 is arranged, side in the direction of arrow R) is disposed at a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 when viewed from above (a position where a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the pair of facing displacement members D180 can be received).

Whether the main body D172 is in any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the upper surface of one end side of its longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is positioned at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (the side in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The axis D171 is embedded inside the main body D172, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed up to a position beyond the axis D171. That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes above the axis D171 (the arrow U direction side) and then rolls (flows) into the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed as a flat surface on the transmission portion D173 side with the upper side (in the direction of arrow U) of the axis D171 as a boundary, and the weight portion D174 side is formed as a flat surface with the axis D171 as the center. Formed as a curved surface. That is, the shape of the upper surface of the main body D172 cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D171 is a linear shape on the transmission portion D173 side, and an arc shape concentric with the axis D171 on the weight portion D174 side (Fig. 119 reference).

Since the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed as a flat surface on the side closer to the transmission portion D173 than the axis D171, it is possible to suppress the ball rolling in that area from jumping upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main body portion D172 from being displaced upward due to the action of the weight portion D174 as the ball bounces upward.

The upper surface of the main body portion D172 does not need to be a straight line in cross section; it is sufficient if no steps are formed, and it may be formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball (a cross-sectional shape in which curves or curves and straight lines are smoothly connected, for example, a sine wave (sine curve) shape).

Here, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is moved to the rolling portion (the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140 before reaching the axis D171. A configuration is also conceivable in which the water is rolled (inflowed) to However, in such a configuration, the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D) due to the action of the weight of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body part D172 (rolling member D170 Since the ball is ejected from the top surface of the main body D172 (before the main body D172 is returned to the initial position (first position)), the influence of the inertial force accompanying the ejection of the ball (the weight of the ball is The rolling member D170 fluttering due to the effect that the rolling member D170 is momentarily stopped acting. When the rolling member D170 flaps, the opening/closing state of the displacement member D180 becomes unstable, which reduces the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 is rolled beyond the position above the axis D171 (in the direction of arrow U). The ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the main body D172 while the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is returned to the initial position (first position) by suppressing the effect of the weight of the ball. Therefore, even if the rolling member D170 is affected by the inertial force accompanying the ejection of the ball (the effect that the weight of the ball is momentarily no longer applied), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of flapping in the rolling member D170. As a result, the opening/closing state of the displacement member D180 can be stabilized and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 has a position above the axis D171 (in the direction of arrow U) as a boundary, and the weight part D174 side is centered on the axis D171. Formed as a curved surface. Therefore, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes above the axis D171 (in the direction of arrow U), the weight of the ball on the upper surface of the main body D172 is not applied. That is, in the present embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is located in an area closer to the transmission portion D173 than the position above the shaft D171 (in the direction of arrow U), and is above the shaft D171. The region closer to the weight portion D174 than the position does not function as a rolling surface.

The transmission part D173 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the transmission member D190, and extends from the other longitudinal end side of the main body part D172 toward the opposite side to the shaft D171 (the arrow R direction side). The extended tip side (arrow R direction side) of the transmission part D173 is disposed above (arrow U direction side) the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 (disposed in a position overlapping in a top view).

Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) around the axis D171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface and the transmission part D173 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed down) downward by the transmission part D173, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 around the axis D191 (see Figures 119 to 121).

The weight portion D174 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the rolling member D170, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body portion D172 toward the opposite side to the extension direction of the main body portion D172 (the direction of the arrow L), and has a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the rolling member D170 (main body D172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body D172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is positioned (eccentric) toward the weight portion D174 rather than the axis D171. As a result, by utilizing the weight of the weight portion D174 (eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D171), the rolling member D170 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (first position) in an unloaded state, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is able to return to the initial position by its own weight.

That is, in the rolling member D170, in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the main body D172), the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (as viewed from the front). , it is rotated counterclockwise around the axis D171), is placed at the initial position (first position), and is maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, due to the weight of the ball, the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole moves toward the main body D172 (with the axis D171 in between, the weight part D174 (opposite side) (eccentric). As a result, the rolling member D170, the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 are displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D171 when viewed from the front), and are brought to the second position. Placed.

In addition, in the first position (initial position) of the rolling member D170, the end surface of the main body part D172 on one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side) is aligned with the sixth passage dividing wall D146 of the intermediate member D140 (the vertical direction of the rolling part). The end face on the opposite side of the wall). That is, the rolling member D170 is configured such that when the main body D172 comes into contact with the sixth passage partition wall D146, the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced upward (counterclockwise in front view centering on the axis D171). rotation) is regulated and placed at the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 119).

On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D170 is determined by the upper surface of the weight portion D174 abutting against the sixth passage partition wall D146 (the lower surface of the rolling portion) of the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the weight portion D174 against the sixth passage partition wall D146, the downward displacement (clockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D171) of the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 is restricted, and the rolling member D170 is positioned in the second position (see FIG. 121).

When the rolling member D170 is arranged in the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side, and when the rolling member D170 is arranged in the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D170 (main body D172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D141f (the eighth passage DRt8).

In this way, the rolling member D170 rolls the ball by utilizing the downward slope of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172, and the rolling member D170 is rotatably rotated around the axis D171. The angle of the downward inclination of the top surface of the main body D172 with respect to the horizontal plane is the same as the angle of the downward inclination when the ball is rolling (receiving the weight of the ball) and the angle of the downward inclination when the ball is not rolling (the state where the ball is not rolling). The angle of downward slope is made smaller than the angle of downward slope in the unloaded state (no weight of the ball).

Thereby, it is possible to suppress the momentum from being imparted to the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass the upper surface of the main body portion D172 can be increased (lengthened). As a result, the time during which the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is increased, and the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position (the facing interval of at least one pair of displacement members D180 is closed). It is possible to easily maintain (make it longer) a state in which the facing distance is wider than the facing distance in the state in which the facing distance is disposed at the position.

In this embodiment, the rolling member D170 is formed so that when the weight of one ball is applied to the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body D172, the weight of the weight portion D174 side and the weight of the main body D172 side are balanced around the axis D171 (the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is located on a vertical line passing through the axis D171).

Therefore, when only one ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, that ball is located closer to the transmission part D173 (with respect to the axis D171) than the center of the main body D172 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction). In the state where the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is located (eccentrically) closer to the main body D172 than the axis D171, the eccentricity of the center of gravity causes the main body D172 and the transmission section D173 to move downward. (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around axis D171 when viewed from the front).

On the other hand, in a state where the ball is located on the axis D171 side (opposite side to the transmission section D173) with respect to the center of the main body D172 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is located on the axis D171. The body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity (centered on the axis D171 in front view). (rotated counterclockwise).

When two or more balls roll on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 (when the weight of two or more balls is applied to the main body D172), the rolling position of each ball (main body Regardless of the position of the rolling member D172 in the longitudinal direction, the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 is located (eccentric) closer to the main body D172 than the axis D171, and due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity, the center of gravity of the rolling member D172 and the transmission section D173 are It is displaced (descended) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around axis D171 when viewed from the front).

In this way, by providing a balancing position halfway (in this embodiment, at the center of the longitudinal direction) of the rolling surface (main body portion D172) of the rolling member D170 (in the direction of the arrows L-R), after the ball passes the balancing position, the rolling member D170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position. As a result, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the open position to the closed position.

In addition, when the weight of one ball acts, the position where the weight on the weight part D174 side and the weight on the main body part D172 side balance around the axis D171 is in the longitudinal direction of the main body part D172 (arrow LR). direction) may be closer to the axis D171 than the center, or may be closer to the transmission portion D173 than the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the main body portion D172.

The displacement member D180 is a member for guiding the ball flowing down (entering the ball) from the third passage DRt3 to the outlet DOPfl toward the sixth passage DRt6, and as described above, is pivotally supported by the shaft support member D210. and is displaced (rotated) between the closed and open positions.

The shaft support member D210 includes a shaft D211 fixed to the base end side of the displacement member D180, a protruding portion D212 that protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft D211 (radially outward), and a connecting pin D213 that protrudes from the protruding portion D212 in a position parallel to the shaft D211 (in the direction of the arrow F-B) and is connected to the transmission member D190.

As described above, in the shaft support member D210, the shaft D211 is pivotally supported by the shaft support D141b of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141) and the shaft support hole D131b of the back member D130 (main body portion D131). The projecting portion D212 is disposed on the back side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131), and the connecting pin D213 projects toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) in a posture parallel to the axis D211.

The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is fixed to the displacement member D180. Further, the connecting pins D213 are positioned at different positions with respect to the axis D211 in a direction (radial direction) perpendicular to the axial direction (arranged at eccentric positions with respect to the axis D211). Therefore, when the connecting pin D213 is displaced with the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190, the displacement of the connecting pin D213 is converted into rotation of the shaft D211, and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) together with the shaft D211. .

Note that the connecting pin D213 is disposed outside the axis D211 (on the opposite side to the space where the pair of displacement members D180 face each other). Therefore, by displacing (pushing down) the connecting pin D213 downward (in the direction of arrow D), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and the connecting pin D213 is displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). By being pushed up (pushed up), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the closed position.

The closed and open positions of the displacement member D180 are determined by the outer surface of the base end side of the displacement member D180 abutting against the side surfaces of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R. That is, by abutting the outer surface of the base end side of the displacement member D180 against the side surfaces of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and the fifth passage partition wall D145R, the displacement of the pair of displacement members D180 in a direction to bring them closer together (to reduce the opposing distance) or in a direction to move them apart (to increase the opposing distance) is restricted, and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed or open position (see Figures 119 to 121).

The displacement member D180 and the axial support member D210 are integrated (unitized) by fixing the axis D211 of the axial support member D210 to the base end side of the displacement member D180.

When the displacement member D180 and the pivot support member D210 are integrated into a part (hereinafter referred to as the "displacement member D180 unit"), at least when placed in the closed position, the center of gravity of the displacement member D180 unit as a whole is located (eccentric) toward the other displacement member D180 unit from the axis D211. In other words, when viewed from the direction of the axis D211 (arrow F-B), the center of gravity is located (eccentric) toward the other displacement member D180 unit from a virtual line passing through the axis D211.

As a result, the displacement member D180 unit is able to maintain its posture in the closed position by utilizing the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D211 (i.e., the eccentricity of the center of gravity acts as a force that rotates the pair of displacement members D180 in a direction that brings them closer to each other).

The transmission member D190 is a member for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 (shaft supporting member D210). ) and a cylindrical body D192 protruding from the end face on the other side (arrow B direction side), and a transmission target extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body D192 on one side in the axial direction. portion D193, and a main body portion D194 and a weight portion D195 that extend radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on the other axial side of the body portion D192.

The shaft D191 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB), and as described above, one end of the shaft D191 is inserted into the intermediate portion by inserting the body portion D192 into the insertion hole D131c of the back member D130. The shaft D191 is pivotally supported by a shaft support D141c of the member D140, and the other end of the shaft D191 is pivotally supported by a shaft support D201 of the detour member D200.

The transmitted portion D193 is a portion to which the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted from the rolling member D170 (transmission portion D173), and is located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the main body portion D131 in the back member D130. will be placed.

As described above, the extending tip side (direction side of arrow L) of the transmitted portion D193 is disposed below (direction side of arrow D) of the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 (disposed at an overlapping position in top view). When the transmitting portion D173 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D190 is displaced (pressed down) by the transmitting portion D173, and as a result, the transmitting member D190 is displaced (rotated) around axis D191 (see FIGS. 119 to 121).

Here, a predetermined gap is formed in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) between the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170, and when the rolling member D170 receives the weight of the ball and is displaced (descended) downward (arrow D direction), the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170 can come into contact with the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 after filling the predetermined gap. In other words, the rolling member D170 cannot press the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 downward unless it is displaced (descended) enough to fill the gap.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement of the rolling member D170 from being transmitted to the displacement member D180 when the displacement of the rolling member D170 is relatively small. This makes it difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts, such as, for example, hitting the gaming machine to displace (lower) the rolling member D170 or using a foreign object such as a wire to displace (lower) the rolling member D170.

The main body portion D194 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 to the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210, and is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion D131 in the rear member D130.

Grooves D194L and D194R are formed in the main body D194, and the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is slidably inserted into these grooves D194L and D194R. Thus, when the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted and the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 is displaced downward or upward (pushed down or up) by the inner wall surfaces of the insertion grooves D194L and D194R of the transmission member D190. As a result, the displacement member D180 unit is displaced (rotated), and the displacement member D180 is placed in the open or closed position.

When viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow F-B direction), the groove D194R has a width dimension (dimension in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the connecting pin D213 slides relative to one another) set to a dimension that is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213, and extends linearly along a direction that intersects with an arc centered on the axis D191. Therefore, while the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 inserted in the groove D194R is displaced downward or upward (pushed down or up) by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R.

The groove D194L extends in an arcuate shape having a center on the axis D191 side when viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (the direction of the arrow FB), and has an extending end on the lower side (an end on the side in the direction of the arrow D). , in a state where the rolling member D170 is placed at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed at the closed position, the width dimension of the groove at the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is located is the same as that of the connecting pin The upper extending end (the end in the direction of arrow U) is set to a diameter approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of D213, and the rolling member D170 is located at the second position, and the displacement member D180 is located at the open position. In this state, the width of the groove increases toward the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is located.

In detail, the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194L on the side farther from the axis D191 is shaped along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a shape obtained by dividing a circle centered on the axis D191 at a specified central angle), and the inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191 is curved in an arc shape whose distance from the axis D191 increases from the lower extension end (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow D) to the upper extension end (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow U).

In addition, in the shaft supporting member D210, since the connecting pin D213 is eccentric with respect to the axis D211, the distance between the connecting pin D213 and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 is the same as when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position. , and decreases as the displacement member D180 is displaced toward the open position. That is, as the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pressed down) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the distance between it and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 becomes smaller.

Therefore, when the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from a state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (i.e., a state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed up) to the uppermost position (in the direction of the arrow U), see FIG. 119), the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon (is not abutted against) by either of the inner wall surfaces along the extension direction of the groove D194R.

On the other hand, when the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from a state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (i.e., a state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed down) to the lowest position (in the direction of the arrow D), see FIG. 121), the connecting pin D213 is acted upon (contacted by) by the inner wall surface that is closer to the axis D191 among the inner wall surfaces along the extension direction of the groove D194L, and is gradually displaced (pushed up) upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by this action.

In this way, when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position, even if the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194L, and is not displaced downward (pushed down). Instead, after reaching the upper extension end (end on the side of the arrow U direction) of the groove D194L (see FIG. 120), it is displaced downward (pushed down) by the inner wall surface at the upper extension end.

This allows the operation modes (displacement modes) of the pair of displacement members D180 to be different from each other. In other words, it is possible to create a state in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin D213 and the upper extended end of the groove D194L (the end on the arrow U direction side, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 119).

When the rolling member D170 receives the weight of the ball and is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position), and the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 begins, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R, thereby starting the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position.

On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L is not displaced downward until it reaches the upper extending end of the groove D194L (the extending end in the direction of arrow U, the inner wall surface). (not pushed down), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the closed position.

When the transmission member D190 is further displaced (rotated) with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position), the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is moved from the groove D194R. It is continuously displaced (pressed down) by the inner wall surface along the extension direction, and thereby the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) is displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position. Continued.

On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L reaches the upper extending end (end in the direction of arrow U, inner wall surface) of the groove D194L (see FIG. 120), the connecting pin D213 is inserted into the groove D194L. It is displaced (pressed down) by the provided end portion (inner wall surface), thereby starting displacement of the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position.

Thereafter, both connecting pins D213 are displaced (pressed down), the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and when the rolling member D170 reaches the second position, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the open position. Member D180 is placed in the open position.

In this way, in this embodiment, the timing at which the pair of displacement members D180 start to displace (rotate) from the closed position to the open position can be made different (one can be delayed relative to the other). This allows a change to be made in the open state for a player who is expecting the displacement member D180 to displace to the open position (i.e., the ball flowing (scoring) into the sixth passage DRt6), making the game more interesting.

The weight portion D195 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the transmission member D190, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body portion D194 toward the opposite side of the axis D191 (the direction of the arrow R), with a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

The weight of the weight portion D195 causes the center of gravity of the transmission member D190 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the weight portion D195 rather than the axis D191. As a result, the transmission member D190 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (the position where the displacement member D180 is in the closed position, see FIG. 119) by utilizing the weight of the weight portion D195 (eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D191), and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is able to return to the initial position by its own weight (i.e., the displacement member D180 returns to the closed position).

In other words, when the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 is not displaced (pushed down) downward (in the direction of arrow D) by the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, the main body portion D194 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D191 in rear view) and placed in the initial position (the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position) and maintained in the initial position. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the transmission member D190 and a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

The detour member D200 is formed in a plate shape having a larger external shape in rear view than the partitioned area by the partition wall D134 of the back member D130, and is disposed on the upright end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the partition wall D134. By doing so, the eighth passage DRt8 is partitioned together with the partition wall D134. Further, in the detour member D200, a pivot support D201 is formed in an area that is outward in rear view from the partitioned area by the partitioning wall D134.

Next, the opening and closing operation of the displacement member D180 will be described with reference to Figures 119 to 121 and Figure 122 (c).

As shown in FIG. 119, when the ball is not flowing (entering) from the flow outlet DOPfl into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other), the rolling member D170 is at the initial position (first position). ). Therefore, the transmission member D190 is not acted upon by the rolling member D170, and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position.

In this state, when a ball (not shown) flows (enters) from the downflow port DOPfl into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180), the ball passes (flows down) between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 and falls onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the other longitudinal end side (opposite the axis D171, in the direction of arrow R) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, and then rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D172 towards one longitudinal end side (the axis D171 side, in the direction of arrow L).

As shown in FIG. 120, when a ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) toward the second position under the weight of the ball, and as shown in FIG. 121, when the rolling member D170 is further displaced (rotated) and reaches the second position, a pair of displacement members D180 are positioned in the open position, and the distance between the displacement members D180 is maximized.

A ball (not shown) rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 moves from one longitudinal end side (axis D171 side, arrow L side) of the main body D172 to the intermediate member D140. It rolls (inflows) into the rolling portion (the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partitioning wall D146, and rolls (inflows) into the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D131d.

After that, when the balls are no longer present on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 returns to the initial position (first position) by its own weight, and accordingly, the transmission member D190 returns to its initial position by its own weight, and the displacement member D180 is positioned in the closed position (see FIG. 119).

In this manner, in this embodiment, the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is supported rotatably around the axis D171, and a ball that flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 toward the axis D171 side (the direction of the arrow L).

As described above, the rolling member D170 is arranged at the other longitudinal end (the side opposite to the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow R) in a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 when viewed from above (a position where a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 can be received (catch)).

Therefore, the ball that has entered (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) can be dropped onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170.

Here, for example, in a structure in which the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 is set in a direction away from the axis D171, the ball is set on the rolling member D170 (main body part D172). At the initial stage of rolling, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is close, so the ball rolls a predetermined distance and the distance from axis D171 (the point of force and fulcrum) is close. Until the distance between the balls is secured, the weight of the weight portion D174 cannot be counteracted, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by the weight of the ball. I can't.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when the ball rolls on the top surface of the main body portion D172, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is secured in the initial stage, and the effect of the weight portion D174 can be reduced, so that the weight of the ball can easily displace (rotate) the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position).

In other words, immediately after the ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180), the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position), and the displacement member D180 can be quickly displaced toward the open position (and placed in the open position).

In particular, since the ball flowing into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) can be directly dropped onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball can be reduced. The rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) can be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by utilizing not only the action of the ball but also the falling momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball. In this respect as well, the displacement member D180 can be quickly displaced toward the open position (and placed in the open position).

Therefore, it is possible for the player who has witnessed the ball flowing down (entering the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) to immediately start displacing the displacement member D180 to the open position. It is possible to perform at a good tempo.

In addition, when multiple balls roll on the third passage DRt3, if the distance between a first ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) and a second ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth passage DRt6, a subsequent ball) following the first ball is relatively small, the subsequent second ball can be made to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180).

Since the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 approaches the axis D171, as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, The influence of the weight portion D174 can be increased by gradually shortening the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum). Therefore, the rolling member D170 can be gradually returned from the second position to the initial position (first position).

That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member D180, which has been placed in the open position, can be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position. As a result, for example, when another ball is reciprocating on the third path DRt3, the other ball will not flow into the sixth path DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player pay attention to whether or not the displacement member D180 is in an advantageous state in which it is opened (at least in a state in which the amount of opening is larger than the state in which it is disposed in the closed position).

Furthermore, when a ball that has flowed into (entered) the sixth path DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is dropped onto the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 rolls the dropped ball. It can be received on the side where the amount of displacement in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) of the moving member D170 is large (the side spaced apart from the axis D171).

Therefore, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) as energy for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170, that is, lifting the weight portion D174 upward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the balls that have fallen onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 from jumping upward. As a result, the weight of the ball is stably applied to the rolling member D170, and the state of the displacement member D180 is stabilized (for example, the displacement member D180 is prevented from being temporarily displaced (rotated) toward the closed position). )can.

In addition, the ball that has flown (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is separated from the rolling member D170 by a member (a fixed, non-displaceable member, such as the back member D130 or If the ball is dropped onto a part of the intermediate member D140), that other member is likely to be damaged, but as described above, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member D170. ), it is possible to suppress damage to the rolling member D170, the back surface member D130 that pivotally supports the rolling member D170, and the intermediate member D140 due to ball collisions. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased to the extent that the ball can be allowed to fall (the upper limit of the ball's fall height can be made gentler).

Protrusions D131f and D141g (acting means) are provided in a protruding manner on the main body D131 of the back member D130 and the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140, which form the side wall (inner surface) of the sixth passage DRt6. It is formed so as to be able to act on a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172.

That is, the protrusions D131f, D141g protrude from the main body parts D131, D141, which are arranged facing each other with a specified distance between them, toward the sixth passage DRt6 and extend linearly in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), and are arranged at specified intervals in the direction in which the balls roll in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170).

Therefore, when the ball passes through the sixth passage DRt6, not only when it rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, but also when it moves while floating above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, the protrusions D131f, D141g come into contact with the ball and provide resistance, thereby slowing down the speed of the ball.

As a result, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time required for the weight of the ball to act on the rolling member D170 (that is, the displacement member D180 is at least It is easier to maintain (for a longer time) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball than in the closed position.

In this case, the protrusions D131f, D141g are formed on both sides of the sixth passage DRt6 (main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170) and are arranged in a staggered pattern along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170), so that the ball can be made to abut alternately against the protrusions D131f, D141g as it passes through the sixth passage DRt6.

This not only provides resistance to the ball, but also adds a lateral (perpendicular to the rolling direction) velocity component to the ball's velocity component (the ball's path can be made to zigzag rather than straight). This lengthens the time it takes for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, from this point of view, it becomes easier to maintain (lengthen) the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter).

On the other hand, since the protrusions D131f and D141g extend in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), resistance is unlikely to be applied to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the ball bounces upward (arrow U direction) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 (main body part D172), the ball can be quickly dropped downward (rolling surface). Therefore, even if the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced upward by the action of the weight part D174 as the ball bounces upward, the weight of the ball can be quickly applied to the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, and the main body part D172 can be quickly returned to its original state.

As a result, while the ball passes through the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball acts on the main body portion D172, and the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier to maintain a state in which the ball can easily enter.

In the rolling member D170, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed as a flat surface. That is, the upper surface of the main body portion D172 is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball, and no step is formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 from jumping upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main body portion D172 from being displaced upward due to the action of the weight portion D174 as the ball bounces upward.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member D180 is formed to be able to be displaced (rotated), and the displacement (rotation) makes it easier for the ball to flow into the sixth passageway DRt6. In the changing structure, when a ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced to the side (open position) where the ball is more likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6. When one ball enters DRt6, the ball that follows that ball (for example, a ball reciprocating in the third path DRt3 in its longitudinal direction, a subsequent ball) is likely to enter the sixth path DRt6. can.

In other words, when a first ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the entry of the first ball into the sixth passage DRt6 displaces the displacement member D180, creating a state in which the following second ball (the second ball following the first ball) can easily enter the sixth passage DRt6, and when a second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the entry of the second ball into the sixth passage DRt6 displaces the displacement member D180, creating a state in which the following third ball (the third ball following the second ball) can easily enter the sixth passage DRt6, and these patterns can be repeated after the third ball.

Therefore, the player can expect that the inflow of one ball into the sixth path DRt6 will cause a chain of balls entering the sixth path DRt6. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In this case, the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the side where the ball is more likely to enter (open position) is achieved by utilizing the weight of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6. This eliminates the need for an actuator to drive the displacement member D180 and a sensor to control that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

In particular, in this embodiment, the rolling surface of the balls in the sixth passage DRt6 is formed by the rolling member D170, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) by the action of the weight of the rolling ball. , you can secure time to utilize the weight of the ball. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the ball easily flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the eighth embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be forcibly opened from the outside, but in the ninth embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be restricted from being forcibly opened from the outside. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 123(a) and 123(b) are cross-sectional views of the lower frame D2086b in the ninth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 115. Note that Figure 123(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, while Figure 123(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member D2190 includes an engaging portion D2196. Note that the transmission member D2190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the eighth embodiment only in that it further includes an engaging portion D2196, and the other configurations are the same.

The engaging portion D2196 is a portion that allows the rolling member D170 to be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, and restricts the displacement member D180, which is in the closed position, from being displaced (rotated) toward the open position when the rolling member D170 is in the initial position (first position). It is erected from the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of the arrow U) of the transmitted portion D193, and is disposed with its outer surface (surface opposite the axis D191) facing the extended tip (end on the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170.

The outer surface of the engagement portion D2196 (the surface opposite to the axis D191) is formed in a shape that does not intersect with the displacement locus of the extension tip (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the transmission portion D173 when the rolling member D170 rotates around the axis D171 (a shape that is in contact with the displacement locus, or a shape that has a gap between it and the displacement locus). Therefore, the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position) to the second position is permitted (see FIG. 123(b)).

Therefore, when a ball flows (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6 and rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball can be used to displace the rolling member D170 to the second position. As a result, the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 can displace (push) the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D2190 downward, displacing (rotating) the displacement member D180 to the open position.

Further, the outer surface of the engaging portion D2196 (the surface opposite to the axis D191) is connected to the transmission member when the rolling member D170 is placed at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed at the closed position. D2190 is formed in a shape that can restrict rotation in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (counterclockwise in FIG. 123(a), that is, the direction in which the displacement member D180 placed in the open position is displaced toward the open position).

Specifically, when the transmission member D2190 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (left in FIG. 123(a)), and the outer surface (the surface opposite the axis D191) of the engagement portion D2196 abuts against and presses against the extended tip (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, the extended tip of the transmission portion D173 is pressed in the direction toward the axis D171 (the axis D171 is positioned on the extension line of the force applied from the engagement portion D2196 to the extended tip of the transmission portion D173).

Therefore, a force component for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170 is not formed, and the rolling member D170 is maintained at the initial position (first position) (unrotatable), so that the transmission member D2190 The rotation in the counterclockwise direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 123(a)) when viewed from the front is restricted (see FIG. 123(a)). That is, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position is restricted.

In this way, according to this embodiment, when the rolling member D170 is placed in the initial position (first position) (i.e., when the weight of the ball is not acting on it), the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position can be restricted. That is, for example, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of forcibly displacing the displacement member D180 from the closed position toward the open position by inserting a foreign object such as a wire (making it easier for the ball to flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6).

In this case, in this embodiment, by utilizing the rolling member D170 (by engaging the engaging portion D2196 of the transmitting member D2190 with the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170), the displacement member D180 is changed from the closed position to the open position. Displacement (rotation) toward is regulated. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a component to restrict the displacement member D180 from being forcibly displaced (rotated), and the transmission member D190 can be used. The structure for suppressing fraudulent displacement can be simplified.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In the eighth embodiment, the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 rolls toward the axis D171, but in the tenth embodiment, the ball rolls on the rolling member D3170 in a direction away from (moving away from) the axis D3171. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

124(a) and 124(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame D3086b in the tenth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 115. In addition, in FIG. 124(a), the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, and in FIG. 124(b), the rolling member D170 is arranged at the closed position. A state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 124, the rolling member D3170 includes a shaft D3171, a long plate-shaped main body D3172 with the shaft D3171 disposed at the other end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side), and a main body D3172. A weight portion D3174 disposed on the other longitudinal end side of D3172 (the side on which the shaft D3171 is disposed) and a transmission portion D3173 disposed on the opposite side of the main body portion D3172 with the weight portion D3174 interposed therebetween. It is rotatably arranged around an axis D3171 between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

The parts D3171 to D3174 of the rolling member D3170 are substantially identical in function to the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the eighth embodiment, and differ only in their arrangement. The transmission member D3190 differs from the transmission member D3190 in the eighth embodiment only in the orientation (extension direction) of the transmitted part D3193, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

The shaft D3171 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and is supported by a shaft support (not shown) formed on the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140. Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) around the shaft D3171, the main body D3172 is displaced (raised and lowered) in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The main body portion D3172 is a portion whose upper surface forms a rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6, and one longitudinal end side (the side opposite to the side where the shaft D3171 is disposed, the side in the direction of arrow L) is connected to the intermediate portion. It is arranged in parallel with the rolling part (the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage dividing wall D146 of the member D140, and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side where the shaft D3171 is disposed, the side in the direction of arrow R) is disposed at a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 when viewed from above (a position where a ball that enters (flows down) between the pair of facing displacement members D180 can be received).

When the main body D3172 is disposed at the second position (posture), the upper surface of one end in the longitudinal direction (the opposite side to the side where the shaft D3171 is disposed, the side in the direction of arrow L) is aligned with the first end of the intermediate member D140. It is arranged at a height position that is approximately the same as the upper surface of the rolling portion (a portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the six-channel partitioning wall D146, or at a height position that is slightly above (in the direction of arrow U).

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is formed as a flat surface. This prevents the rolling ball from bouncing upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This prevents the main body D3172 from being displaced upward by the action of the weight D3174 as the ball bounces upward.

Note that the upper surface of the main body D3172 does not need to be a flat surface (the cross-section cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D3171 is a straight line), and it is sufficient if no steps are formed, and the upper surface is smooth along the rolling direction of the ball. It may be formed as a continuous smooth surface (a cross-sectional shape in which curves or curves and straight lines are smoothly continuous, for example, a sine wave (sinusoidal curve) shape).

The weight portion D3174 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170, and extends from the other longitudinal end side (the side where the shaft D3171 is disposed) of the main body portion D3172 toward the opposite side to the extension direction of the main body portion D3172 (the side indicated by the arrow R), and has a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

The transmission portion D3173 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 to the transmission member D3190, and is a portion opposite to the axis D3171 from the extension direction end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the weight portion D3174. It is further extended toward the side (arrow R direction side). The extended distal end side (arrow R direction side) of the transmission portion D3173 is disposed below (arrow D direction side) the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmission member D3190 (disposed in an overlapping position when viewed from above).

Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmission section D3173 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U), the transmission section D3173 The transmitted portion D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 is displaced upward (pushed up), and thereby the transmitting member D3190 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

In this embodiment, a protrusion protrudes (stands up) from the transmitting part D3173 toward the transmitted part D3193. However, a protrusion may protrude (stand up) from the transmitted part D3193 toward the transmitting part D3173. In other words, it is sufficient that the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 can be transmitted to the transmitting member D3190 via the transmitting part D3173 and the transmitted part D3193.

In an unloaded state where the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling member D3170 (main body D3172) (the ball is not rolling on the main body D3172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole is aligned with the axis. It is located (eccentrically) closer to the weight portion D3174 (and transmission portion D3173) than D3171. As a result, the rolling member D3170 is placed at the initial position (first position) in the no-load state by utilizing the weight of the weight part D3174 (and the transmission part D3173) (the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D3171). It is possible to maintain this posture, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position by its own weight (see FIG. 124(a)).

That is, in the rolling member D3170, in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the main body D3172), the main body D3172 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (in a front view, the axis D3171 (rotated clockwise around ), placed at the initial position (first position), and maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D3170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170, due to the weight of the ball, the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole moves toward the main body D3172 (with the axis D3171 in between, the weight part D3174 (opposite side) (eccentric). As a result, the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170 is displaced (descended) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D3171 when viewed from the front), and the rolling member D3170 is placed in the second position. .

The first position (initial position) of the rolling member D3170 is determined by the lower surface (surface on the arrow D side) of one longitudinal end side (arrow L side) of the main body D3172 abutting against a stopper portion protruding from the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the main body D3172 against the stopper portion, the downward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D3171) of the main body D3172 is restricted, and the rolling member D3170 is disposed in the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 124(a)).

On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D3170 is determined by the lower surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow D) of the weight portion D3174 abutting against a stopper portion protruding from the intermediate member D140. That is, by the weight portion D3174 abutting against the stopper portion, the upward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D3171) of the main body portion D3172 of the rolling member D3170 is restricted, and the rolling member D3170 is positioned in the second position (see FIG. 124(b)).

When the rolling member D3170 is arranged in the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side, and when the rolling member D3170 is arranged in the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D3170 (main body D3172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131d (eighth passage DRt8).

In this way, the rolling member D3170 rolls the ball by utilizing the downward slope of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172, and the rolling member D3170 is rotatably rotated around the axis D3171. In this embodiment, the angle of the downward inclination of the top surface of the main body D3172 with respect to the horizontal plane is such that the angle of the downward inclination when the ball is rolling (the state receiving the weight of the ball) is the angle of the downward inclination when the ball is rolling (the state where the ball is receiving the weight of the ball). It is made larger than the angle of the downward slope in the rolling state (no load state where the ball is not receiving weight).

In other words, in this embodiment, the ball that flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 falls to a position on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D3172, close to the axis D3171, and rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D3172 in a direction away from the axis D3171.

As a result, in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D3171 (fulcrum) is shortened, making the weight of the weight part D3174 dominant, and as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D3172, the distance from the axis D191 (distance between the point of force and the fulcrum) is gradually increased (lengthened) to counter the weight of the weight part D174. As a result, the rolling member D3170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position.

In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position, gradually increasing the amount of opening (the distance between the opposing displacement members D180). This allows, for example, when the second ball reciprocates along the third passage DRt3, to gradually increase the expectation that the second ball will flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing displacement members D180), making the game more interesting.

In addition, even if the distance between the first ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 and the second ball that follows the first ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth passage DRt6, the following ball) is relatively large, it is possible to make it easier for the following second ball to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180).

On the other hand, the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D3170 is away from (moves away from) the axis D171, so that at least when the ball reaches the end of the main body portion D3172 (one end in the longitudinal direction, the end on the side in the direction of arrow L), the rolling member D3170 is positioned in the second position.

That is, in the state immediately before the ball rolls (inflows) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172 to the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, the distance from the axis D191 (the point of force and When the weight of the ball was maximum acting on the main body D3172 (the distance between the ball and the fulcrum), the ball rolled ( When the ball is injected (inflow), the effect of the weight of the ball disappears instantaneously, and only the effect of the weight portion D3174 remains.

Therefore, the rolling member D3170 can be returned from the second position to the initial position (first position) at the maximum speed, and the displacement member D180, which has been placed in the open position, can be immediately placed in the closed position. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance with a good tempo. Also, whether the second ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) in time for the displacement member D180 to be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the open position. It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player pay attention to whether the game is true or not.

In addition, in the rolling member D3170 of this embodiment, when the number of balls rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is one ball, that ball is on one longitudinal end side of the main body D3172 (arrow The rolling member D3170 is gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position as the ball is rolled toward the end on the L direction side, and the ball is rotated in the longitudinal direction of the main body D3172. When the ball reaches one end (the end in the direction of arrow L) (at least before the ball rolls (inflows) into the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140), the rolling member D3170 is in the second position. is configured to be placed in

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125. In the eighth embodiment, only the rolling member D170 is disposed in the path from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout (the path formed by the sixth path DRt6 and the eighth path DRt8). A rolling member D170 and a second rolling member D4220 are disposed in the path from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout in the embodiment (the passage formed by the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8). Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

125(a) and 125(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D4086b in the eleventh embodiment, in which the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 are cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D4221. The condition is illustrated.

Note that FIG. 125(a) illustrates a state in which the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, and FIG. 125(b) illustrates a state in which the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 125, the back surface member D4130 includes a partition wall D4134 erected from the back surface thereof.

The partition wall D4134 partitions the eighth passage DRt8 together with the main body D131, the detour member D200, and the second rolling member D4220. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed opposite to the main body portion D131, and the area between the opposing members and defined by the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 is defined as the eighth passage DRt8.

The second rolling member D4220 includes a shaft D4221, a long plate-shaped main body D4222 with the shaft D4221 disposed on one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side), and one longitudinal end side of the main body D4222. It includes a weight part D4224 disposed on the side where the shaft D4221 is disposed, and a transmission part D4223 disposed on the opposite side of the main body part D4222 with the weight part D4224 in between. It is rotatably arranged between the member D200 and the shaft D4221.

The parts D4221 to D4224 of the second rolling member D4220 are substantially identical in function to the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the eighth embodiment, and differ only in their arrangement. The partition wall D4134 of the back member D4130 is different from the partition wall D134 in the eighth embodiment in that a portion of the wall forming the ball's rolling surface is omitted (replaced with the main body part D4222 of the second rolling member D4220), but the other configurations are the same.

The shaft D4221 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and is supported by a shaft support portion (not shown) formed on the back member D4130 and the detour member D200. Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) around the shaft D4221, the main body portion D4222 is displaced (raised and lowered) in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The main body portion D4222 is a portion whose upper surface forms a rolling surface for the ball in the eighth passage DRt8, and one longitudinal end side (the side where the shaft D4221 is disposed, the side in the direction of arrow L) is inserted into the opening D131e. The partition wall D4134 is arranged in parallel with the rolling part (the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134, and the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the shaft D4221 is arranged, the side in the direction of arrow R) is disposed on the downstream side of the opening D131d (a position where the ball flowing down from the opening D131d can be received).

Whether the main body D4222 is in any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the upper surface of one end of its longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D4221 is arranged, the arrow L direction side) is positioned at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (arrow U direction side) than the upper surface of the rolling part (the part whose upper surface becomes the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the ball into the opening D131e.

The shaft D4221 is buried inside the main body D4222, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is formed to a position beyond the shaft D4221. That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D4222 passes above the axis D4221 (in the direction of arrow U) and then rolls (inflows) to the rolling part of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the ball to the opening D131e. ) to be done.

The weight portion D4224 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220, and extends from one end of the main body portion D4222 in the longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D4221 is disposed) toward the opposite side to the extension direction of the main body portion D4222 (the side indicated by the arrow L), and has a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

The transmission portion D4223 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the transmission member D190, and is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the transmission member D190 from the end in the extending direction (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the weight portion D4224. It is extended toward D190 (weight portion D195). The extended distal end side (arrow U direction side) of the transmission portion D4223 is disposed below (arrow D direction side) the weight portion D195 of the transmission member D190 (disposed at an overlapping position in top view).

Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) around the axis D4221 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface and the transmission part D4223 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of the arrow U), the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed up) upward by the transmission part D4223, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 around the axis D191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the second rolling member D4220 (main body D4222) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body D4222), the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole is positioned (eccentric) toward the weight D4224 (and transmission part D4223) side rather than the axis D4221. As a result, the second rolling member D4220 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (first position) in an unloaded state by utilizing the weight (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D4221) of the weight of the weight D4224 (and transmission part D4223), and is able to return to the initial position (first position) by its own weight after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position (see FIG. 125(a)).

In other words, when the second rolling member D4220 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the main body portion D4222), the main body portion D4222 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D4221 when viewed from the front) and is placed in and maintained in the initial position (first position). This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the second rolling member D4220 and a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

On the other hand, when a ball rolls on the main body D4222 of the second rolling member D4220, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the main body D4222 (the opposite side of the weight D4224 across the axis D4221). As a result, the main body D4222 of the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D4221 when viewed from the front), and the second rolling member D4220 is positioned in the second position.

Note that the first position (initial position) of the second rolling member D4220 is such that the end surface (surface on the arrow L direction side) of one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side) of the main body portion D4222 is the second rolling member D4220. The second position is defined by the lower surface (the surface on the arrow D direction side) of the other longitudinal end side (the arrow R direction side) of the main body portion D4222 coming into contact with the partition wall D4134.

When the second rolling member D4220 is disposed at the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is tilted downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction to the one end in the longitudinal direction, and the second rolling member D4220 is in the second position. Even in the state where the main body portion D4222 is disposed, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D4222 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side to the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the second rolling member D4220 (main body portion D4222) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131e.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the rolling member D170 is disposed in the sixth passage DRt6, and the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the eighth passage DRt8 downstream of the sixth passage DRt6. be done. Therefore, compared to the eighth embodiment, even if the length of the path (passage, that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout) is the same, the second rolling member D4220 is not provided. As a result, the area where the weight of the ball can be used can be secured (lengthened). As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) the state in which the displacement member D180 is displaced to the open position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for a ball to enter the ball).

Here, in a configuration in which the longitudinal dimension (length of the upper surface (rolling surface)) of the first member (rolling member D170 (main body D172)) is extended to ensure (lengthen) a section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized, it becomes difficult to arrange the rolling member D170 with an extended longitudinal dimension in the limited space (widthwise dimension (arrow L-R direction)) of the lower frame D86b. If the arrangement positions of the pair of displacement members D180 are shifted to one widthwise side (arrow L direction side) of the lower frame D86b, it is possible to extend the longitudinal dimension (length of the upper surface (rolling surface)) of the rolling member D170 (main body D172) accordingly, but there is a limit to the length that can be extended. In addition, the third passage DRt3 cannot be shaped to allow the ball to move back and forth, which reduces the interest of the game.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, multiple members (in this embodiment, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are arranged to ensure (lengthen) the section in which the weight of the ball can be used, so the limited space of the lower frame D4086b can be effectively utilized to ensure (lengthen) a sufficient section in which the weight of the ball can be used. In addition, the third passage DRt3 can be shaped to allow the ball to move back and forth, which increases the excitement of the game.

In other words, the second rolling member D4220 is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the rolling member D170, and these are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), so that the thickness of the lower frame D4086b in the front-to-rear direction, which is dead space, can be effectively utilized, and the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 can ensure (lengthen) a section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized.

In addition, in this way, the pair of displacement members D180 can be arranged at the center of the width direction (arrow LR) of the lower frame D4086b while securing (lengthening) the section where the weight of the ball can be used. The DRt3 can be shaped so that the ball can reciprocate (a shape that slopes downward toward the center in the width direction), making the game more interesting.

In a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is arranged in a path (passage, i.e., the section from a pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), a predetermined displacement of the displacement member D180 (displacement from a closed position to an open position due to the weight of the ball, and a displacement mode in which the displacement member D180 returns to the closed position after the ball passes) is only formed once while one ball passes through the path, but if multiple members (rolling member D170 and second rolling member D4220) are arranged in the path (passage), the above-mentioned predetermined displacement of the displacement member D180 can be formed multiple times (twice in this embodiment) while one ball passes through the path. By repeatedly opening and closing the displacement member D180, a player who expects a ball to flow (enter) into the sixth path DRt6 can focus on the relationship between the displacement state of the displacement member D180 and other balls on the third path DRt3, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is disposed in the path (passage, that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), the path is divided into multiple (two or more) balls. Even if the ball passes, the displacement member D180 can be displaced in only one manner (i.e., it is moved from the closed position to the open position due to the weight of the ball and returned to the closed position after the ball passes), but it can be displaced in multiple ways. If the members (rolling member D170 and second rolling member D4220) are arranged in a path (passage), the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 that can be formed while a plurality of balls pass through the path is Can be done in multiple ways. That is, by combining the timings at which the weight of the ball acts on one and the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 (the timing at which the ball rolls), the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 can be varied. As a result, a surprising performance can be performed.

The transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170 is located above the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 (in the direction of the arrow U), and displaces (pushes) the transmitted part D193 downward when the weight of the ball acts on the main body part D172. The transmission part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220 is located below (in the direction of the arrow D) the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190, and displaces (pushes) the weight part D195 upward when the weight of the ball acts on the main body part D4222.

That is, when the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 operate under the action of the weight of the ball to displace (rotate) the transmission member D190, the directions of displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 are the same, The movements of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are not opposed. Similarly, when one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 returns to its initial position (displaced (rotated) by the weight of the weights D174 and D4224 without the weight of the ball acting on it), the rolling member Regardless of the state of motion of D170 or the other of the second rolling member D4220, one motion and the other motion are not opposed (both one motion and the other motion are allowed).

In this way, the displacement (rotation) when the weight of the balls of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 is applied can be transmitted to the transmission member D190 individually and independently, and the displacement (rotation) when the action of the weight of the balls of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 is released can be performed individually and independently.

Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass through the path (that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), depending on the rolling position of the balls, the rolling member D170 or the second It is also possible to displace (rotate) the transmission member D190 due only to the operation of one or the other of the rolling members D4220, or to displace (rotate) the transmission member D190 due to the operation of both one and the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220. The transmission member D190 can also be displaced (rotated), and by combining these, the manner in which the displacement member D180 is displaced can be diversified.

For example, if the weight of a ball is applied to one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 while the displacement member D180 is being displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, the movement of one of the balls causes the displacement. Member D180 can be displaced toward the open position during the displacement toward the closed position.

Further, for example, when the weight of the ball is applied to one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the displacement member D180 is being displaced (rotated) toward the open position by the operation of one of them, the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 may be rotated. When the weight of the ball is applied to the other of the moving member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the effect of the weight of the ball is greater on the other one (the force that displaces the displacement member D180 is stronger), the operation of the other Accordingly, the displacement member D180 can be displaced to the open position at a faster displacement speed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a member (transmission means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 and a member (transmission means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180 are provided. There is no need to separately provide a member for transmitting (transmitting means), and the transmitting member D190 can be used in common as such a member (transmitting means). Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the structure can be simplified. As a result, improved operational reliability and reduced product costs can be achieved.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 126 is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame D5086b in the twelfth embodiment, showing the state in which the detouring member D200 has been removed. Note that Figure 126(a) shows the state in which the rolling member D170 is placed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position.

As shown in FIG. 126, grooves D5194L and D194R are formed in the main body portion D5194, and connecting pins D213 of the shaft support member D210 are slidably inserted into these grooves D5194L and D194R, respectively.

The transmission member D5190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the eighth embodiment only in the shape of the groove D194L, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

When viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (the direction of the arrow F-B), the groove D5194L extends in an arc-like curve with its center on the axis D191 side, and the width of the groove is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213. The width of the groove is constant along the extension direction of the groove D5194L.

In detail, the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D5194L, both the inner wall surface on the side farther from the axis D191 and the inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191, have a shape along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a shape obtained by dividing a circle centered on the axis D191 at a specified central angle).

Therefore, the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon (does not come into contact with) both of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D5194L, and the connecting pin D213 is not acted on by (does not come into contact with) both of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D5194L, and is (the end in the direction of arrow U) is acted upon (displaced upward or downward (pushed down or pressed down) by the inner wall surface at the extending end on the lower or upper side.

As a result, according to the present embodiment, not only when displacing the displacing member D180 from the closed position to the open position, but also when displacing the displacing member D180 from the open position to the closed position, the operation mode (displacement mode) of the pair of displacing members D180 ) can be made different from each other (a state can be created in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated)).

Specifically, when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position, a predetermined distance is formed between the connecting pin D213 and the lower extending end (end in the direction of arrow D, inner wall surface) of the groove D5194L. A gap is formed (see Figure 121).

When the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the second position to the initial position (first position) is started, and accordingly the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D5190 to the initial position is started, the groove D194R The connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is displaced upward (pushed up) by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R, and thereby the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) Displacement (rotation) from the open position is started.

On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L is not displaced upward until it reaches the lower extending end of the groove D5194L (the extending end in the direction of arrow D, the inner wall surface). (not pushed up), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the open position.

When the transmission member D5190 is further displaced (rotated) with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member from the second position, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is aligned in the extending direction of the groove D194R. It continues to be displaced (pushed up) upward by the inner wall surface, thereby continuing the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position to the closed position.

On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L reaches the lower extending end (end in the direction of arrow D, inner wall surface) of the groove D5194L, the connecting pin D213 passes through the groove D5194L. The displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) starts to be displaced from the open position.

Thereafter, both connecting pins D213 are displaced upward (pushed up), the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and when the transmission member D190 reaches the initial position, the pair of displacement members D180 is placed in the closed position (see Figure 119).

In this way, in this embodiment, the pair of displacement members D180 not only start displacement (rotation) from the closed position to the open position, but also start displacement (rotation) from the open position to the closed position. The timing can also be different (delaying one relative to the other). As a result, for a player who expects the displacement member D180 to be in an open state (that is, a state in which the ball is likely to enter (enter) the sixth passageway DRt6), a change in the manner in which the displacement member D180 is displaced to the closed position is provided. This can increase the interest of the game.

Next, the lower frame D6086b in the 13th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 127 to 130.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which all the balls that flowed into (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 are guided to the eighth passage DRt8 (outlet DOPout), but in the sixth passage DRt6 of the thirteenth embodiment, The ninth passage DRt9 is connected in the middle of the ninth passage DRt9, and the ball that flows into the sixth passage DRt6 is routed to either the eighth passage DRt8 (outlet DOPout) or the ninth passage DRt9 (outlet DOP6out). You will be guided to one side. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 127 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D6086b in the thirteenth embodiment, and Figure 128 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D6086b. Figure 129 is a front view of the lower frame D6086b, and Figures 130(a) and 130(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D6086b.

Note that Figure 130(a) corresponds to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 115, and Figure 130(b) corresponds to the cross section taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in Figure 119.

As shown in FIGS. 127 to 130, the lower frame D6086b in the thirteenth embodiment has a ninth passage DRt9 connected in the middle of the sixth passage DRt6, and a game area in which the ball guided to the ninth passage DRt9 An outflow port DOP6out is formed as an opening for outflow to.

That is, a ball that flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 flows into (enters) the eighth passage DRt8, flows down the eighth passage DRt8, and then flows out from the outlet DOPout into the playing area, while a ball that flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and flows into (enters) the ninth passage DRt8 midway along the sixth passage DRt6 flows down the ninth passage DRt9, and then flows out from the outlet DOP6out into the playing area.

Here, the outlet DOPout, which is the outlet of the eighth passage DRt8 (the opening through which the balls flow out to the gaming area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 110). . Therefore, the ball that has flown down from the sixth passage DRt6 to the eighth passage DRt8 is likely to win the first prize opening 64 (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 is high).

On the other hand, the outlet DOP6out, which is the outlet of the 9th passage DRt9 (the opening that lets the balls out into the play area), is positioned horizontally to one side of the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110) (formed (positioned) in a position that does not overlap with the first winning opening 64 vertically downward). Therefore, balls that flow down from the 6th passage DRt6 to the 9th passage DRt9 are less likely to win the first winning opening 64 (there is a lower probability of the ball winning the first winning opening 64 than the balls that flow down to the above-mentioned 8th passage DRt8).

In this way, in the lower frame D6086b of this embodiment, when a ball reciprocating along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 is distributed to the sixth passage DRt6, the ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 is By reaching the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without being flown down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, it is easier to win in the first winning opening 64 (in this embodiment, the ball is almost certainly placed in the first winning opening 64). (can win prizes). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, in order to increase the probability that the ball will win in the first prize opening 64 (to ensure that the ball wins), it will not flow down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way and will be placed in the sixth passage DRt9. The player can be made to expect to reach the end of the passage DRt6, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Furthermore, if the ball flows down to the end of the sixth passage DRt6, the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 is maximized, making it easier to maintain the state in which the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position (making it easier for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6). On the other hand, if a ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 flows down to the ninth passage DRt9 midway, the weight of the ball cannot be acted on the rolling member D170, and the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the closed position (making it harder for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 remain displaced (rotated) to the open position, making it easier for the ball to be diverted from the third passage DRt3 to the sixth passage DRt6, and the player can expect the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without flowing down the ninth passage DRt9 along the way, which also increases the interest of the game.

The front member D6110 includes an opening DOP6out formed in the front part D111, and a plate-shaped bottom part D6112 that stands up from the back side of the front part D111, and the intermediate member D6140 stands up from the front side of the main body part D141. The main body portion D141 includes a bottom portion D144 and an opening D6148 formed in the main body portion D141.

The bottom surface portion D6112 is formed continuously over the entire length of the front surface portion D111, and the bottom surface portion D6144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body portion D141 in a region excluding the opening D141f. The erected tip (on the side in the direction of arrow B) and the erected tip (on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the bottom portion D6144 are in contact over the entire area. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering from the bottom side of the lower frame D6086b.

A portion of the bottom portions D6112 and D6144 (a portion located below the opening D6148 in the intermediate member D6140) forms a rolling surface of the ninth passage DRt9. The portion forming the rolling surface is spaced apart from the bottom surface of the first intervening member D150 by a predetermined distance (a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere).

Further, the portions of the bottom portions D6112 and D6144 that form the above-mentioned rolling surfaces are formed to be inclined downward toward approximately the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and the height position in the vertical direction is Outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a are recessed in the lowest portion (approximately the central portion in the longitudinal direction).

The outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a are parts for allowing the balls guided by the bottom surfaces D6112 and D6144 (portions forming rolling surfaces) to flow out to the outflow port DOP6out, and are concave surfaces that slope downward toward the outflow port DOP6out. It is formed as one piece. That is, the opening DOP6out is formed at a position corresponding to the outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a (a position where the sphere can flow out).

The opening D6148 of the intermediate member D6140 serves as an opening (hole) for receiving the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 (sixth passage DRt6) into the ninth passage DRt9, and extends the main body part D141 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction). It is formed through the That is, the opening 6148 is formed in one side wall of a pair of side walls that partition the sixth passage DRt6, and the upstream end of the ninth passage DRt9 is connected to the middle of the sixth passage DRt6 through the opening 6148. Ru.

The dimension of the opening D6148 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170 is set to a size that allows a plurality of balls (three balls in this embodiment) to pass through at the same time. Furthermore, the lower edge of the opening D6148 is located lower (in the direction of arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling member D170, which is placed in the second position (the position pushed down to the lowest position) due to the weight of the ball. (see FIG. 130(a)), and the upper edge of the opening D6148 is formed at the initial position (the first position, the position returned to the uppermost position) where the weight of the ball is not applied. It is formed at a position that is separated from the upper surface of the moving member D170 by a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball can pass through the opening D6148 regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170.

The side edge (hereinafter referred to as the "upstream side edge") located on the upstream side (arrow R direction side, right side in FIG. 130(a)) of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6 is the side edge of the rolling member D170 when viewed from the front. It is disposed downstream (on the arrow L direction, on the left side in FIG. 130(a)) of the upstream edge (on the arrow R direction, on the right side in FIG. 130(a)) of the sixth passage DRt6.

In this embodiment, the upstream side edge of the opening D6148 is arranged at a position (downstream position) that does not overlap in the vertical direction with the opposing space at the base of the pair of displacement members D180. That is, the base of the displacement member D180 located on the downstream side (arrow L direction side, left side in FIG. 130(a)) in the sixth passage DRt6 of the pair of displacement members D180 (opposed to the displacement member D180 located on the upstream side) It is located on the downstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere) than the opposite surface).

This prevents the ball from flowing (entering) between the opposing sides of the pair of displacement members D180 and falling into the sixth passage DRt6 from immediately flowing (entering) into the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148. However, it is possible to form a configuration in which a ball rolls on the rolling member D170. Therefore, the weight of the ball can be applied to the rolling member D170 to displace (rotate) the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position, and it is also possible to determine whether the ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 or not. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, a protrusion D141g is provided on the main body D141 to protrude from the upstream side edge of the opening D6148 at a position on the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 (the side in the direction of arrow R, the right side in FIG. 130(b)). Ru. Therefore, when the ball that enters (enters) between the opposing sides of the pair of displacement members D180 and falls into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls on the rolling member D170 along its longitudinal direction, the action of the protrusion D141g (contact) delays the rolling of the ball (reduces the speed), making it easier for the player to grasp the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, and the action (contact) of the protrusion D141g allows the ball to The player can expect the ball to move to the side opposite to the opening D6148 (to the side of the main body D131) and reach the end of the sixth path DRt6. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The side edge (hereinafter referred to as the "downstream side edge") located downstream (arrow L direction side, left side of Figure 130(a)) of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6 is disposed upstream (arrow R direction side, right side of Figure 130(a)) of the edge portion (axis D171) of the rolling member D170 on the downstream side (arrow L direction side, left side of Figure 130(a)) of the sixth passage DRt6 in a front view.

In this embodiment, the downstream edge of opening D6148 is disposed at a position (upstream position) that does not overlap with opening D131d in a front view. That is, it is located upstream in the sixth passage DRt6 by a predetermined distance (approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment) from the upstream edge of opening D131d in the sixth passage DRt6 (the side in the direction of arrow R, the right side in Figure 130(a)).

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing (entering) into the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148 even if the ball has reached the end of the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, if the ball passes the downstream edge of the opening D6148, the player can feel secure that the ball will be sure to flow (enter) into the eighth passage DRt8. This allows the player to keep a close eye on the ball's trajectory, increasing the player's interest in the game.

However, the downstream edge of opening D6148 may be positioned so that it overlaps with opening D131d in a front view (a position overlapping with or downstream from the downstream edge of opening D131d). In this case, even after the ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, it is not clear whether the ball will enter (enter) the eighth passage DRt8 or the ninth passage DRt9. This allows the player to keep an eye on the direction of the ball, increasing the fun of the game.

Further, as described above, the protrusions D131f and D141g are arranged in a staggered manner, and the protrusion D131f is provided to protrude from the main body D131 on the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 than the upstream side edge of the opening D6148. . Therefore, when the ball that has fallen into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls on the rolling member D170, the action (contact) of the protrusion D131f moves the ball toward the opening D6148 side (the main body D141 side) (rolling direction). change). That is, the ball subjected to the action of the protrusion D131f is located upstream in the sixth passage DRt6 (on the arrow R direction side, on the right side in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b)) than the upstream side edge of the opening 6148. The player is asked whether the ball collides with (contacts) the main body D141 and is bounced away from the opening D6148, or whether the ball flows (enters) into the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148. It can make the player pay attention and increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, multiple protrusions D131f of the main body D131 are disposed between the upstream and downstream edges of the opening D6148 in a position that overlaps when viewed from the front (see FIG. 130(a)). This allows the protrusions D131f to act on (contact) the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, causing a change in the rolling direction of the ball (a component of the rolling direction toward the opening D6148). This creates the possibility that the ball will flow (enter) the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148 due to contact with the protrusions D131f, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a position inclined by about 1 to 2 degrees with respect to the vertical direction (a so-called "lying" position, i.e., a position in which the top surface is positioned on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface of the pachinko machine 10). In this case, in this embodiment, the opening D6148 is formed in the wall portion (main body portion D141) located on the front side (front side of the pachinko machine 10, arrow F direction side) of the wall portions that define the sixth passage DRt6.

Therefore, when the ball rolls along the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170, the ball can easily pass through the main body D131 side due to the "laying down" of the pachinko machine 10, and as a result, the ball has the protrusion D131f. can be easily activated. On the other hand, the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is tilted upward from the main body D131 side toward the opening D6148 side due to the "laying down" of the Pachinko machine 10, so it is affected by the action of the protrusion D131f. The ball that has been moved toward the opening D6148 can be moved toward the main body D131 by the downward slope of the rolling surface (upper surface).

As a result, when the protrusion D131f acts on (contacts) the ball relatively strongly, the ball flows (enters) into the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148, while the protrusion When D131f acts (contacts) relatively weakly, the ball heading toward the opening D6148 can be returned to the main body D131 side by the downward slope of the rolling surface (upper surface). Therefore, depending on the mode of action of the protrusion D131f on the ball (the speed of the ball when making contact, the angle of approach of the ball, etc.), the rolling mode of the ball can be changed, and the interest of the game can be increased. .

Moreover, by utilizing the "laying down" of the pachinko machine 10 in this way, each member of the lower frame D6086b can be configured in a mutually orthogonal relationship. That is, the main body portion D131 and the main body portion D141 are arranged in parallel, and the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is orthogonal to the main body portions D131, D141 (that is, the axis D171 is arranged in parallel with the main body portion D131, D141). It can be configured such that it is pivoted in a posture orthogonal to D141. Therefore, there is no need to place only some of these members in an inclined position with respect to other members, or to support the shaft D171 in an inclined position, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to improve the moldability and assemblability of each part. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

131(a) to 131(c) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D7086b in the fourteenth embodiment, in which the rolling member D170 is located between the initial position (first position) and the second position. A transition state is illustrated when the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position.

In addition, in Fig. 131(a) to Fig. 131(c), the state in which the detouring member D200 is removed is illustrated. Also, Fig. 126(a) corresponds to a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (see Fig. 119), and Fig. 131(c) corresponds to a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (see Fig. 121). Fig. 131(b) corresponds to a state in the middle of displacement when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)) and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position) (see Fig. 120).

As shown in Figures 131(a) to 131(c), the transmission member D7190 in the 14th embodiment includes a display unit D7197 that is disposed on the outer edge of the main body D194 and extends from the outer edge of the main body D194 in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the axis D191. In detail, the display unit D7197 extends upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the longitudinal end of the main body D194, which is the end opposite the axis D191.

Here, the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the side wall D132 of the back member D130 and the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the side wall D142 of the intermediate member D140 are defined in the vertical direction (edge in the direction of arrow U). The positions (height positions) in the UD direction) are substantially the same.

As shown in FIG. 131(a), when the rolling member D170 is placed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 119), the longitudinal end (end opposite the axis D191) of the main body D194 is positioned at the uppermost position (arrow U direction side) as the transmission member D7190 is displaced (rotated). As a result, the extended tip side (part) of the display unit D7197 protrudes (is positioned) above the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130, and the protruding portion is visible to the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131(c), when the rolling member D170 is placed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position (see FIG. 121), the longitudinal end of the main body D194 (the end opposite the axis D191) is placed at the lowest position (arrow D direction side) due to the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D7190. As a result, the entire display unit D7197 is immersed (placed) below the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130 (the entire display unit D7197 is placed on the back side of the side wall portion D132). Therefore, the player cannot directly see the display unit D7197. However, it is possible to see the display unit D7197 through the intermediate member D140 and the back member D130.

In this way, the amount of protrusion (protruding dimension) of the extended tip side (part) of the display unit D7197 protruding from the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the back member D130 (side wall portion D132) is maximum when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 119) as shown in FIG. 131(a). As shown in FIG. 131(b) when the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position toward the open position, the above-mentioned amount of protrusion (size of the part visible to the player) gradually decreases, and is minimum (not protruding and not visible to the player) when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position (see FIG. 121).

Therefore, the player can visually check whether the extended tip side (part) of the display portion D7197 protrudes above the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the back member D130 (side wall portion D132). By doing so, the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (whether it is in the open position or the closed position) can be grasped. Furthermore, by visually checking the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension), it is possible to grasp the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (which position between the open position and the closed position).

Next, the lower frame D8086b in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134.

In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension) of the protrusion D131f toward the rolling member D170 side is constant regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. In the protrusion D131f of the fifteenth embodiment, the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension) toward the rolling member D8170 is changed (increased or decreased) depending on the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the lower frame D8086b in the 15th embodiment has the same configuration (e.g., shape and number) as D6086b in the 13th embodiment, except that the protrusion D131f includes the second protrusion D131fa and the weight of the weight portion D8174 of the rolling member D8170 is different. Therefore, a description of the configuration other than the second protrusion D131fa and the rolling member D6087 will be omitted.

Figures 132(a) and 132(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D8086b in the fifteenth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 115. Note that Figure 132(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (see Figure 119), while Figure 132(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (see Figure 121).

133(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame D8086b taken along the line CXXXIIIa-CXXXIIIa in FIG. 132(a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of frame D8086b. FIG. 134 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119.

As shown in FIGS. 132 to 134, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) protrusions D131f provided on the back member D8130 have rolling contact from predetermined (two in this embodiment) protrusions D131f. A second protrusion D131fa is provided to protrude toward the member D8170. In the present embodiment, the (predetermined) protrusion D131f from which the second protrusion D131fa protrudes is located on the downstream side (arrow There are two protrusions D131f located on the L direction side).

The main body D172 of the rolling member D8170 has a recess formed in the side surface (edge) on the side facing the back member D8130 in the direction in which the projection D131f is provided (the direction in which the projection D131f is received) when viewed from above. is formed (see FIG. 134). The recesses are arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (approximately equal intervals in this embodiment) along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170. That is, the recesses are formed (recessed) at positions facing the protrusion D131f.

In this embodiment, the shape of the recess when viewed from above is curved like an arc. However, it may be rectangular. In other words, the shape is not limited as long as it is large enough not to interfere with the second protrusion D131fa when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated).

The second protrusion D131fa protrudes from the front surface (surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the protrusion D131f toward the recess of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) described above, and the protruding tip side (part) of the second protrusion D131fa is received in the recess of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) described above (positioned in the internal space of the recess) when viewed from above (see FIG. 134). That is, when viewed from above, part of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) is formed by the second protrusion D131fa.

Note that the protruding tip of the second protrusion D131fa is curved to have an arcuate cross section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the second protrusion D131fa may be approximately rectangular. Further, the direction in which the second protrusion D131fa protrudes is the same as the direction in which the second protrusion D131f protrudes. However, the protrusion direction of the second protrusion D131fa may be a different direction (inclination direction) from the protrusion direction of the protrusion D131f.

The height position (position in the direction of arrows U-D) of the second protrusion D131fa is set so that when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the initial position (first position), the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa is substantially the same as or slightly lower than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 133(a)), and when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position, the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa is higher than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 133(b)).

That is, when the rolling member D8170 is disposed at the initial position (first position), the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6, FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b) ) right side surface) is arranged at a lower position (in the direction of arrow D) than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body D172, and passes through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172) It is possible to prevent the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa from coming into contact with (not acting on) the ball.

On the other hand, when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) a predetermined amount from the initial position (first position) toward the second position, at least a portion of the side of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6, the surface on the right side in Figures 132(a) and 132(b)) is positioned at a higher position (in the direction of arrow U) than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172, and the side of the second protrusion D131fa can be brought into contact (act on) the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling on the upper surface of the main body part D172).

When the rolling member D8170 is in the second position, the area of the side of the second protrusion D131fa, which is located at a higher position (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the ball) of the main body D172, is maximized. Therefore, in this case, even if the ball rolls (moves through the sixth passage DRt6) while bouncing on the rolling surface, it is possible to easily bring the side of the second protrusion D131fa into contact (act on) the ball.

The second protrusion D131fa is formed on the opposite side of the opening D6148 with the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) in between. That is, the second protrusion D131fa is provided to protrude toward the opening D6148. When the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 receives an action from the second protrusion D131fa (when it comes into contact with the second protrusion D131fa), the ball rolls due to the reaction of the action (contact). The ball is rolled into the opening D6148 (ninth passage DRt9) and easily flows into (enters into) the opening D6148 (ninth passage DRt9). That is, it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the end of the sixth path DRt6.

In the no-load state where the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling member D8170 (main body part D172) (the state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body part D172), as described above, the rolling member D8170 as a whole The center of gravity is located (eccentrically) closer to the weight D8174 than the axis D171, and the rolling member D8170 is maintained (or returned) at the initial position (first position). On the other hand, the ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D8170, and the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball shifts to the main body D172 side (on the opposite side from the weight D8174 across the axis D171). In the positioned (eccentric) state, the main body portion D172 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (arranged at the second position).

In this case, in the present embodiment, when one ball is located at position DP (see FIG. 132) of main body portion D172 (state where the weight of one ball acts on position DP), the rotation including that ball is The weight of the weight portion D8174 is set so that the center of gravity of the entire moving member D8170 is located on the axis D171.

In other words, assuming a static state in which the balls are not rolling, when one ball is located upstream of position DP of the main body D172 (opposite axis D171) (the weight of one ball acts on position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) toward the second position, when one ball is located at position DP of the main body D172 (the weight of the ball acts), the rolling member D8170 is balanced around axis D171 (i.e., the force that displaces (rotates) the rolling member D8170 is not formed), and when one ball is located downstream of position DP of the main body D172 (on the axis D171 side) (the weight of one ball acts on position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position.

With the rolling member D8170 configured in this manner, when a ball flows down from the third passage DRt3 onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) which is in the initial position (first position), the weight of the ball (and the momentum of the fall) displaces the main body D172 downward (in the direction of arrow D), and the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the second position.

When the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172 toward the downstream side (position DP), the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball gradually approaches the axis D171, so that the main body D172 is gradually displaced (rotated) upward (in the direction of arrow U), and rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position.

When the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 reaches position DP, the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 continues in the direction toward the first position due to the influence of the inertial force associated with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 up to that point, and when the ball passes position DP, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball is decentered toward the weight portion D8174, accelerating the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 in the direction toward the first position.

In the present embodiment, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes the position DP, the rolling member D8170 moves before reaching the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (in the direction of the arrow R). placed in the second position. That is, when only one ball flows down (enters the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa does not act on (contact) the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172.

However, due to factors such as the downstream position and direction of the ball from the third passage DRt3, and collisions with the displacement member D180 during the flow, the speed (rolling speed) of the ball toward the downstream side may be average. If the speed is faster than the rolling member D8170, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 reaches the upstream (or downstream) second protrusion D131fa before the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position. As a result, the ball may be acted upon by the second protrusion D131fa. In other words, even when only one ball is rolling, a case can be created in which the action of the second protrusion D131fa can be applied to the ball, making the player pay attention to the influence of the above-mentioned factors, and increasing the interest of the game. can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the distance between the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (arrow R direction side) and the position DP is set to approximately twice the diameter of the sphere. However, this distance can be set arbitrarily. When only one ball is rolled, by shortening the above-mentioned distance, the action of the second protrusion D131fa can be easily imparted to the ball, while by increasing the above-mentioned distance, the second protrusion This makes it difficult to apply the effect of the protrusion D131fa to the ball.

Here, in the present embodiment, in a state where two balls are located on the main body portion D172 (a state where the weight of the two balls acts), regardless of the respective positions of the two balls (for example, Even if both balls are located downstream of the position DP (between the axis D171 and the position DP), the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including those balls is located at the main body D172 rather than the axis D171. The weight of the weight portion D8174 is set so that it is eccentric to the side.

Therefore, for example, when only one ball rolls on the main body D172 and the rolling position of the ball exceeds the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is placed at the initial position (first position). Even in the state (that is, the state in which the second protrusion D131fa is not acting on (abutting) the ball and the ball is expected to reach the end of the sixth path DRt6), other balls are in the third path DRt3. When the balls flow into the sixth passage DRt6 (the two balls are positioned on the upper surface of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172)), the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position. (or at least displaced (rotated) toward the second position), and the second protrusion D131fa can act on (contact) the ball (a state in which the ball easily flows into (enters into) the ninth passage DRt9 ) can be formed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if only one ball (ball rolling on the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172)) enters the sixth passage DRt6, the ball is given a second bump. By making it difficult for the part D131fa to act (contact), it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 (allowing it to enter the first prize opening 64), while the first ball is rolled. In this state, when the second ball further flows down (enters the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa acts on (contacts) the first ball, and the second ball is brought into contact with the end of the sixth passage DRt6. 1 ball can be made difficult to reach.

That is, since the ball that has reached the end of the sixth path DRt6 is entered into the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 110) via the eighth path DRt8, the player can see that the ball is on the rolling member D8170. If it does not exist, it is expected that the ball will flow from the third path DRt3 to the sixth path DRt6. On the other hand, after the first ball flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the next ball ( It is expected that the second ball) will not further flow (enter the ball) into the sixth path DRt6. In this way, instead of always expecting balls to enter the sixth passageway DRt6, the expected situation is changed according to the number of balls entering the sixth passageway DRt6, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

In particular, in this embodiment, as described above, as the first ball approaches position DP, the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position toward the first position, and the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) from the open position to the closed position. When the first ball passes position DP, the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the first position, and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position.

In other words, as the first ball approaches the second protrusion D131fa, the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, making it difficult for the second ball to flow (enter) from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6. This increases the player's anticipation that the first ball will reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6.

Next, the center frame E86 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 147.

FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board E13 in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 135, the center frame E86 is a member that has a shape that can fit into the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a tapping screw or the like. It includes an upper frame E86a and a lower frame E86b.

The upper frame E86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 135) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 135) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame E86b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 135) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame E86a and the lower frame E86b.

The upper frame E86a is a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (a part disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 135) of the window 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 7)). , that is, the part where the lower frame E86b is disposed) is omitted, and the other parts except for the omitted part have the same structure as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

Next, the lower frame E86b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137. FIG. 136 is a front perspective view of the lower frame E86b, and FIG. 137 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame E86b. Note that in FIGS. 136 and 137, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame E86b to the base plate 60 are omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 138 to 156.

As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the lower frame E86b includes a pair of receiving ports EOPin formed as openings capable of receiving balls, and a pair of first passages ERt1 communicating with the pair of receiving ports EOPin. a pair of second passages ERt2 through which the balls guided through the pair of first passages ERt1 flow down; a pair of third passages ERt3 through which the balls guided through the pair of second passages ERt2 flow down; The balls guided to the pair of third passages ERt3 are sorted and flowed down by a projection E151 formed in a distribution passage E150, which will be described later, into a fourth passage ERt4, a fifth passage ERt5, a sixth passage ERt6, A seventh passage ERt7 is formed through which the ball guided through the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 is guided to the fourth passage ERt4, and an opening through which the ball guided through the fourth passage ERt4 flows out to the game area. An outlet EOPout is formed.

The pair of receiving openings EOPin, the first passage ERt1, the second passage ERt2, and the third passage ERt3 are each formed linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in FIG. 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 135) of the game board E13.

Furthermore, a pair of upper frame passages ERt0 are provided in the upper frame E86a (see FIG. 135). The upper frame passage ERt0 is a passage for guiding balls flowing down the game area, and the receiving port EOPin of the lower frame E86b is communicated with the downstream end of the upper frame passage ERt0.

That is, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage ERt0 from the play area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage ERt0 through the receiving opening EOPin into the first passage ERt1 of the lower frame E86b.

A sorting passage E150 operated by a drive motor E191 is provided in the lower frame E86b, and the balls come into contact with a protrusion E151 formed on the sorting passage E150, changing (altering) their flow direction, and are sorted from the third passage ERt3 to either the fourth passage ERt4, the fifth passage ERt5, or the sixth passage ERt6.

Here, the outlet EOPout, which is the outlet of the fourth passage ERt4 (the opening through which the balls flow out to the gaming area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 135). . Therefore, the balls distributed to the fourth passage ERt4 are likely to win into the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning into the first winning hole 64 is high).

In addition, since the balls distributed to the seventh passage ERt7 are guided to the fourth passage ERt4, it is easy to win the first prize opening 64.

In addition, the sixth passage ERt6 has a first outlet surface E141a formed (positioned) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the seventh passage ERt7 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the back side (arrow B direction) to guide a ball guided along the sixth passage ERt6 to the seventh passage ERt7. Therefore, a ball guided to the first outlet surface E141a of the sixth passage ERt6 is likely to enter the first winning hole 64.

On the other hand, the fifth passage ERt5 is formed to be inclined downward toward the sixth passage ERt6 side (arrow F direction side), and is formed on the back side of the boundary between the fifth passage ERt5 and the seventh passage ERt7 (arrow B direction side). A pair of standing wall portions E135c are respectively provided. Therefore, the balls distributed to the fifth passage ERt5 are more easily guided to the sixth passage ERt6 than to the seventh passage ERt7.

In the sixth passage ERt6, there are two points at different positions in the width direction of the game board E13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 135) with respect to the first outflow surface E141a, and two points on the front side (arrow F direction side, game area side). The second outflow surface E141b is formed (arranged) as a concave surface that is sloped downward toward the second outflow surface E141b.

The sixth passage ERt6 is undulated, with the second outlet surface E141b at the bottom of the undulations and the first outlet surface E141a at the top of the undulations. Therefore, a ball diverted to the sixth passage ERt6 is more likely to flow out from the second outlet surface E141b into the play area than to be sent from the first outlet surface E141a to the seventh passage ERt7.

In other words, balls diverted from the third passage ERt3 to the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 have a high probability of flowing out into the play area, and as a result, are less likely to win in the first winning hole 64 (they have a lower probability of winning in the first winning hole 64 than balls diverted from the third passage ERt3 to the fourth passage ERt4 described above).

In this way, in the lower frame E86b of this embodiment, when a ball abuts against the protrusion E151 formed on the distribution passage E150 and is distributed to either the fourth passage ERt4 or the sixth passage ERt6, the ball distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fourth passage ERt4 will easily enter the first winning port 64 (see Figure 135) (in this embodiment, the ball is almost certain to enter the first winning port 64), while the ball distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 will have difficulty traveling along the seventh passage ERt7 (and the fourth passage ERt4 formed downstream of the seventh passage ERt7) and entering the first winning port 64. Therefore, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a winning), the player is made to expect that the ball guided along the third path ERt3 will be sorted into the fourth path ERt4, which increases the interest of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame E86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 143 in addition to FIGS. 136 to 137.

Figure 138 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame E86b, and Figure 139 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame E86b. Figure 140 is a top view of the lower frame E86b, Figure 141 is a front view of the lower frame E86b, and Figure 142 is a rear view of the lower frame E86b. Figure 143(a) is a side view of the lower frame E86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLIIIa in Figure 141, Figure 143(b) is a side view of the lower frame E86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLIIIb in Figure 141, and Figure 143(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b along the line CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc in Figure 141.

As shown in Figures 136 to 143, the lower frame E86b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E130 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 disposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E130, a distribution passage E150, a central passage E160, and a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 disposed on the base member E130, a cover member E180 disposed at a predetermined interval on the underside (arrow D direction side) of the base member E130, and a drive means E190 disposed inside the cover member E180.

The driving means E190 is reciprocatably arranged on the cover member E180. Further, by engaging the distribution passage E150 with the driving means E190, the distribution passage E150 is arranged to be reciprocally movable on the base member E130.

The central passage E160, the flow path adjustment block E170, and the cover member E180 are each fastened to the base member E130 by tapping screws, and the guide member E120 and the base member E130 are each fastened to the front member E110 by tapping screws.

The interposed member E140 is held between the front member E110 and the base member E130. As a result, the lower frame E86b is configured as one (single) unit (see FIG. 136).

In addition, the lower frame E86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and balls can be seen through) with the exception of the distribution path E150 and the drive means E190, and the distribution path E150 and drive means E190 are made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to see the balls moving from the first path ERt1 to the seventh path ERt7, as well as the reciprocating movement of the distribution path E150, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The sorting passage E150 and the driving means E190 are made of a light-transmitting (transparent or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

On the other hand, in the lower frame E86b, the member located on the front side (direction of arrow F) of the drive means E190 is made of a light-impermeable resin material (or is painted or has a sticker attached). In this way, the driving means E190 may be configured to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member E110 comprises a plate-shaped front plate E111 that forms the front surface, and a plate-shaped bottom surface portion E112 that stands upright from the back surface of the front plate E111.

The front plate E111 includes a pair of vertical parts extending vertically at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and an inclined part connecting the vertical parts and tilting downward in the vertical direction from both ends in the longitudinal direction toward the center. It is formed.

The front plate E111 has multiple through holes E111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the front plate E111. When assembled (unitized), the lower frame E86b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes E111a to the base plate 60.

An receiving opening EOPin is formed in the front plate E111 (drilled in the plate thickness direction). As described above, the receiving opening EOPin is an opening that receives balls that flow (enter) into the upper frame passage ERt0 (see Figure 135).

An outlet EOPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) in the front plate E111 at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 135). The outlet EOPout is circular when viewed from the front, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outline of a ball. As described above, the outlet EOPout is an opening that serves as the exit when a ball guided through the fourth passage ERt4 flows out into the play area.

As described above, the front plate E111 has a protruding portion E111b protruding from the front side (arrow F direction) of the first outflow surface E141a. In addition, a notch E111c having substantially the same shape as the second outflow surface E141b in a front view is formed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the second outflow surface E141b. By passing through the notch E111c, the ball guided through the sixth passage ERt6 flows out (flows down) into the play area.

On the back surface of the front plate E111, a pair of restricting portions E111d are provided to protrude outward in the longitudinal direction of the inclined portion. An interposed member E140 is sandwiched between the front member E110 and the base member E130, and the restricting portion E111d abuts the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140, so that the interposed member E140 is connected to the base member E140. It is possible to suppress detachment upward (in the direction of arrow U) from E130. Thereby, it is not necessary to fasten and fix the intervening member E140 to the front member E110 or the base member E130 using tapping screws, and it is possible to reduce product costs.

The bottom surface portion E112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal length of the front plate E111, thereby preventing the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires.

The guide member E120 is for forming the first passage ERt1 together with the front member E110, and includes a pair of side parts E121 and a back part E122 that connects the pair of side parts E121.

The pair of side parts E121 are formed into plate-like bodies that are vertically elongated and substantially rectangular in side view. The pair of side parts E121 are arranged in the left-right direction with the surface on one end side in the transverse direction (the surface on the arrow F direction side) in contact with the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front plate E111 (front member E110). They are arranged facing each other with an interval larger than the diameter of the sphere (in the direction of arrow LR).

The back portion E122 connects the other short-side ends and the upper ends of the pair of side portions E121, and is curved in an arc that is convex from one short-side end to the other short-side end of the side portions E121.

A first passage ERt1 is formed by a space defined by the guiding member E120 and the front plate E111 (front member E110) so that the ball can move (flow down, fall). Further, the lower part (in the direction of arrow D) of the first passage ERt1 is opened. Thereby, the flowing direction of the ball that has passed through the receiving port EOPin and flowed into the first passage ERt1 can be changed (changed) downward and guided to the second passage ERt2.

The base member E130 is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and a plate-shaped plate erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131. A pair of first slope portions E133 formed between the wall plate E132 and the pair of opposing curved portions E131, a pair of attachment portions E134 formed between the pair of opposing first slope portions E133, and the pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of opposing first slope portions E133. The base member E130 is formed by connecting a second slope portion E135 formed between the opposing mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped projecting portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E130, and a pair of curved portions E131. A plate-shaped back plate E137 is provided. The detailed configuration of the base member E130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147 in addition to FIGS. 136 to 143.

The curved portion E131 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and also extends in the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and vertical direction (arrow U- The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the direction D) is curved into an arc convex downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 143(c)).

The curved portion E131 has an outflow surface E131a recessed at the lowest vertical position. The outflow surface E131a is a portion for allowing the balls guided through the curved portion E131 to flow out into the sorting passage E150, and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the sorting passage E150.

A cutout portion E132a is formed in the wall plate E132 on the sorting passage E150 side (the opposing side of the pair of wall plates E132). By passing through this cutout portion E132a, the balls can flow down from the curved portion E131 to the sorting passage E150. The cutout portion E132a is also formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball (about five times the diameter of the ball in this embodiment). The larger the size of the cutout portion E132a, the more easily the balls can flow down into the sorting passage E150 from any position in the front-to-rear direction.

A second passage ERt2 is formed by a space defined by the curved portion E131 and the wall plate E132. Note that the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) is arranged vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the guiding member E120 (first passage ERt1), and there is a vertical step between it and the first passage ERt1. It is formed. That is, the ball freely falls from the first path ERt1 to the second path ERt2.

In addition, the guide member E120 (first passage ERt1) is disposed vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the curved portion E131. Therefore, the ball can be sent from the first passage ERt1 to the end of the front side of the second passage ERt2.

As a result, the ball that flows down to the front end of the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can move back and forth in the front-to-back direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) along the arc-shaped curve of the curved portion E131. This allows the ball to be sent from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) with a velocity component in the front-to-back direction.

The first slope portion E133 is a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long and generally rectangular shape when viewed from above, and the end portion on the side of the curved portion E131 is located at a position vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) at a predetermined distance from the lower surface of the curved portion E131. will be placed. Further, the first slope portion E133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first slope portion E133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restriction portion E133b, and a groove portion E133c.

The insertion hole E133a is formed as an opening (perforated in the plate thickness direction) approximately at the center of the first sloped portion E133, and is formed so that an engaged portion E153 of a distribution passage E150, which will be described later, can be inserted therethrough (FIG. 138, 145(b)).

The restricting portion E133b is erected from the front edge of the insertion hole E133a on the underside of the first inclined portion E133, and its underside is formed parallel to the inclined surface of the first inclined portion E133 (see Figures 145(b) and 146(b)).

The groove portion E133c is a groove formed along the inclination direction at approximately the center of the first inclined surface portion E133 in the front-rear direction, and a pair is formed on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the insertion hole E133a. In the groove portion E133c, a guided portion E152 of the sorting passage E150 described later is arranged so as to be slidable in the inclination direction (see Figures 138, 145(a), and 147(a)). A guide wall is erected around the groove portion E133c to prevent damage to the groove portion E133c.

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the distribution passage E150 and a cover E202 are disposed on the first slope portion E133.

The cylindrical body E201 is for facilitating the displacement of the distribution passage E150 in the first slope portion E133, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and has an axial hole formed around its axis. A rotating shaft is inserted into the shaft hole, and the rotating shaft is arranged in the first slope portion E133 along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB). Thereby, the cylindrical body E201 is rotatably arranged on the first slope portion E133. By rotating the cylindrical body E201 around the axis, the distribution passage E150 that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body E201 can be easily displaced.

The cover E202 is for holding the cylindrical body E201 on the first sloped surface portion E133, and is formed in a plate shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the first sloped surface portion E133. The cover E202 has a hole larger than the insertion hole E133a at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E133a of the first sloped surface portion E133, and a groove having approximately the same outer shape as the groove portion E133c is formed at a position corresponding to the pair of groove portions E133c. In addition, a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E201 is formed at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201.

The cover E202 is disposed on the top surface of the first slope portion E133 with its top surface parallel to the slope surface of the first slope portion E133.

A rotating shaft longer than the hole drilled in the cover E202 at a position corresponding to the cylinder E201 is inserted into the cylinder E201, the cylinder E201 and the rotating shaft are disposed on the first inclined surface E133, and the first inclined surface E133 and the cover E202 are fastened and fixed with a tapping screw, so that the cover E202 can hold the rotating shaft and the cylinder E201 through which the rotating shaft is inserted on the first inclined surface E133.

The cylindrical body E201 is disposed through a hole formed in the cover E202 so that a part of its side surface (outer peripheral surface) protrudes from the top surface of the cover E202, so that the cylindrical body E201 and the distribution passage E150 are connected to each other. It becomes possible to make contact.

The mounting portion E134 is formed substantially horizontally vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the end of the first inclined surface portion E133 on the downward inclination direction. The front end of the mounting portion E134 is disposed closer to the back plate E137 (in the direction of arrow B) than the front end of the first inclined surface portion E133.

A curved portion E134a is provided by connecting the attachment portion E134, the first slope portion E133, and the second slope portion E135, and the curved portion E134a is formed by curving into an arc shape convex toward the back plate E137 side. be done.

The second slope portion E135 is a portion for forming (a part of) the fifth passage ERt5, and descends from the back plate E137 toward the front member E110 in the vertical direction lower than the attachment portion E134 (in the direction of arrow D). Formed at an angle. The second slope portion E135 is formed with an insertion hole E135a, a central passage E135b, a pair of upright wall portions E135c, a partition portion E135d, and a throwing wall E135e.

A fifth passage ERt5 is formed in a space defined by the second slope portion E135, the attachment portion E134, the curved portion E134a, and the back plate E137.

The insertion hole E135a is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) substantially in the center of the second slope portion E135 to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere. A recessed portion for inserting a lower end of a cylindrical wall E163 of a central passage E160, which will be described later, is provided on the outer periphery of the insertion hole E135a along the outer edge of the insertion hole E135a.

The central passage E135b is a portion for forming the seventh passage ERt7, and is curved into a circular arc convex downward in the vertical direction, and the curved shape is larger than the outer shape of a sphere. Thereby, when a ball is thrown into the central passage E135b, it is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown (outflow) from the central passage E135b to the slope of the second slope portion E135.

The central passage E135b connects the front edge (arrow F direction side) of the second slope portion E135 and the insertion hole E135a, and slopes downward from the front edge of the second slope portion E135 toward the insertion hole E135a. It is formed by Thereby, the ball guided to the central passage E135b can be thrown toward the insertion hole E135a. That is, the seventh passage ERt7 is formed by the arcuately curved space of the central passage E135b.

Note that the central passage E135b is arranged at a position overlapping the first outflow surface E141a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Thereby, the ball thrown from the first outflow surface E141a can be guided to the central passage E135b.

The pair of vertical wall parts E135c are parts for separating the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), and are used in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the central passage E135b. ) Projected vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) on the back plate E137 side (in the direction of arrow B) at both ends. The length of the pair of vertical walls E135c in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) is formed shorter than the length of the central passage E135b, and is arranged on the insertion hole E135a side (direction of arrow B) of the central passage E135b. Ru.

As a result, the ball flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) crosses the boundary between the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the pair of vertical wall portions E135c, and the ball is guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). On the other hand, the ball flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) abuts against the pair of vertical wall portions E135c, preventing it from crossing the boundary between (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), and the ball flows down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and is guided to the sixth passage ERt6. In this way, by making it more difficult for balls to be thrown into the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), the excitement of the game can be increased.

The partition portion E135d protrudes vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and is formed by connecting the outer edge of the insertion hole E135a to the back plate E137. This makes it possible to prevent the balls flowing down from one sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) from being guided to the other sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) side of the second inclined surface portion E135.

The ball-throwing wall E135e is formed by standing from the underside of the second inclined surface E135 (see FIG. 145(a)). The ball-throwing wall E135e is formed in a roughly U-shape when viewed from below, with an arcuate portion along the edge of the back side (arrow B direction) of the insertion hole E135a and straight portions extending from both ends of the arcuate portion to the front side (arrow F direction). This forms a space surrounded by the ball-throwing wall E135e that allows a ball to be thrown, and a ball that passes through the insertion hole E135a can be thrown to the back side passage E181b of the cover member E180 described later.

The protruding portion E136 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 side toward the second inclined surface portion E135 side, and a guide portion E136a is formed on the protruding portion E136.

The guide portion E136a is a portion for facilitating the assembly of the intervening member E140 to the base member E130, and is located vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the opposite end (inner side in the left-right direction) of the overhang portion E136. It is projected towards. A lower passage E143 of an intervening member E140, which will be described later, is provided between the pair of guide portions E136a facing each other.

The back plate E137 is formed from a plate shape that is horizontally long and substantially rectangular when viewed from the front. The back plate E137 is disposed in contact with the back side ends of the pair of first slope parts E133, the pair of attachment parts E134, and the second slope part E135, and the upper end of the back plate E137 is connected to the distribution passage E150 ( It is located above (in the direction of arrow U) the ball flowing down the third passage ERt3) and the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5). As a result, the back plate E137 guides the balls flowing down the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) or the second slope portion E135 (fifth path ERt5) to the back side of the back plate E137 (in the direction of arrow B). This can be suppressed.

The interposed member E140 includes a rolling portion E141 that extends in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrows LR) as a substantially linear path when viewed from above, and a vertically downward direction from the lower surface of the rolling portion E141 (arrow The contact portion E142 includes a plate-shaped contact portion E142 protruding toward the direction D), and a lower passage E143 erected from the back surface of the contact portion E142.

The rolling portion E141 is formed such that its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction (arrow LR direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is inclined downward toward the center in the extending direction. Ru.

The upper surface of the rolling portion E141 is formed with a downward incline from the front member E110 side (arrow F direction) to the base member E130 side (arrow B direction). As described above, the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 is formed with a first outflow surface E141a formed with a downward incline toward the back side (arrow B direction) and a second outflow surface E141b formed with a downward incline toward the front side (arrow F direction).

In addition, undulations are formed in the rolling portion E141, with the top of the undulations being located in front of the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). The second outflow surface E141b is located at the bottom of the undulations, while the first outflow surface E141a is located at the top of the undulations. Therefore, the first outflow surface E141a is located in front of the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

The first outlet surface E141a is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), so that the balls flowing down the first outlet surface E141a can be guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

A notch E141c is formed at both ends of the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and the protruding portion E111e of the front member E110 abuts on the notch E141c. Further, the intervening member E140 is disposed in contact with the upper surface of the extending portion E136. Thereby, the interposed member E140 is fixed to the base member E130 (front member E110). As a result, a sixth passage ERt6 is formed by a space defined by the intervening member E140 (the upper surface of the rolling portion E141), the base member E130, and the front member E110 (the back surface of the front plate E111).

In the contact portion E142, a passage opening E142a is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position that is the back surface of the outlet EOPout. The passage opening E142a is generally rectangular in front view and is formed to be slightly larger than the outline of a sphere.

The lower passage E143 is provided to protrude from the outer edge of the passage opening E142a toward the cover member E180 side (in the direction of arrow B), and the space defined by the lower passage E143 serves as (part of) the fourth passage ERt4. It is formed.

The lower passage E143 is formed to be inclined downward from the cover member E180 side toward the front member E110 side (arrow F direction side), and the side and lower surfaces of the lower passage E143 are formed to protrude from the upper surface toward the cover member E180 side. be done. That is, the upper surface of the lower passage E143 on the cover member E180 side is open.

Further, in the lower surface of the lower passage E143, a groove E143a having a U-shaped cross section is provided at the center in the width direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 144(a)). The groove E143a extends substantially linearly along the protruding direction of the lower surface of the lower passage E143.

The groove width (dimension in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the groove E143a is set smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the groove depth (dimension perpendicular to the bottom surface of the lower passage E143) of the groove E143a is set to a depth that prevents the ball from contacting the bottom surface of the groove E143a.

Thereby, the ball on the lower surface of the lower passage E143 can be supported at two locations (a pair of ridgeline portions where the lower surface of the lower passage E143 and the groove E143a intersect). Therefore, compared to the case where the groove E143a is not formed (that is, the case where the ball is supported at only one location), the ball can be guided in a stable state. To explain in detail, since the ball is sandwiched between the grooves E143a, it can flow down the center in the width direction while being suppressed from being displaced in the width direction.

As a result, if the center position of the outlet EOPout and the passageway E142a deviates due to dimensional tolerances or assembly tolerances, and a part of the front member E110 (front plate E111) is disposed in front of the passageway E142a, Even in a state where a part of the outer edge of the road entrance E142a is blocked by the front member E110 (front plate E111), the ball flowing down the lower passage E143 (fourth passage ERt4) passes through the outlet EOPout and is not played in the game. Exfiltrated into the realm.

As described above, the lower passage E143 is disposed between the pair of opposing guide portions E136a of the protruding portion E136. This makes it possible to easily dispose the lower passage E143 (interposition member E140) in the base member E130 by abutting the lower passage E143 against the pair of guide portions E136a when assembling the lower frame E86b.

The sorting passage E150 is for the balls to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface, and is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the first inclined surface E133 (cover E202). Thus, like the first inclined surface E133, the sorting passage E150 is disposed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 to the mounting portion E134. The sorting passage E150 has a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided portions E152 erected from the lower surface of the sorting passage E150, and an engaged portion E153 erected between the pair of guided portions E152. The detailed configuration of the sorting passage E150 will be described with reference to Figures 136 to 143 as well as Figures 144 to 147.

The protrusions E151 are parts for changing the direction of movement (flowing down) of the balls, and are regularly arranged on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 with multiple protrusions E151 spaced apart to allow the balls to move (flow down, roll) between them.
The shape of the protrusion E151 is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E150. The substantially hexagonal shape is formed such that two sides arranged parallel to the inclination direction of the sorting passage E150 are longer than the other four sides, in other words, the two sides are longer in the direction along the inclination direction of the sorting passage E150 than in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B). The other four sides except for the two long sides are formed to be the same length. The side surface of the protrusion E151 is formed to be inclined with respect to the sorting passage E150 (in this embodiment, inclined at approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150), and the protrusion E151 is formed in a manner in which a part of the apex side of the hexagonal pyramid is cut off. In other words, the cross-sectional area in a plane parallel to the sorting passage E150 is formed to be smaller as it moves away from the upper surface of the sorting passage E150.

The protrusions E151 are formed with their long sides parallel to each other in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) at a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, the distance between the opposing protrusions on the top surface of the sorting passage E150 is approximately one-quarter of the diameter of the sphere). In addition, a set of protrusions E151 arranged on the downward inclination direction of a set of protrusions E151 arranged in a row in the front-rear direction is shifted in the front-rear direction by half the distance between the protrusions E151 in the front-rear direction. In other words, in the front-rear direction, a set of protrusions E151 arranged on the downward inclination direction is arranged between the opposing protrusions E151 of a set of protrusions E151. This allows a ball that flows down between the long sides of a pair of protrusions E151 in the front-rear direction to abut against the protrusions E151 arranged on the downward inclination direction.

Further, the distance between the short sides of the protrusion E151 is the same as the distance between the long sides of the protrusion E151. As a result, one protrusion E151 is arranged in the distribution passage E150 so as to be spaced from the protrusions E151 arranged around it by the same distance. A third passage ERt3 is formed by a space defined by the upper surface of the distribution passage E150 and the inclined side surface E151a of the protrusion E151.

Note that the height of the protrusion E151 in this embodiment is approximately half the radius of the sphere. Furthermore, the distance between the protrusions E151 at the protruding tips is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) are in contact with the inclined side surfaces E151a of the adjacent protrusions E151. ERt3) can be moved (flowing down, rolling). That is, the protrusion E151 can prevent the ball from remaining in the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3).

When a ball moves (flows down, rolls) in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3), the flow direction of the ball is changed (changed) by contacting the protrusion E151, and the ball is guided between the opposing protrusions E151 formed on the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction side) or the back plate E137 side (arrow B direction side). In this way, the protrusions E151 can change (change) the flow direction of the ball that flows down along the inclined direction.

In addition, by moving (flowing down, rolling) between the long sides of adjacent protrusions E151 in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of arrows F-B), the ball can move (flowing down, rolling) from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 along the inclination direction of the distribution passage E150.

In addition, the balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 have their flow speed reduced by coming into contact with the protrusion E151. This allows the balls to flow down the sorting passage E150 for a longer period of time compared to when the sorting passage E150 does not have the protrusion E151.

In addition, since the protrusion E151 is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, it can be easily seen by the player. This makes it easier for the player to see the manner in which the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is changed. That is, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) moves at a relatively low speed, and it takes a relatively long time to move (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3). However, the time required for the ball to move (flowing down, rolling) can be further increased by contact with the protrusion E151. As a result, it is easier for the player to see the manner in which the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball is changed (changed), which can increase the interest of the game.

In this way, in this embodiment, the protrusion E151 can change (vary) the flow direction of the balls flowing down the distribution passage E150 and extend (vary) the flow time, which can increase the excitement of the game. In addition, by using a single part (the protrusion E151) to change (vary) the flow direction and extend (vary) the flow time, the number of parts can be reduced, which can reduce product costs.

In addition, since the distribution path E150 is arranged to be inclined, even when the downward speed of the ball decreases, the downward speed is increased due to the weight of the ball, so that the ball can flow down the third path ERt3.

The protrusion E151 disposed in contact with the front and rear edges of the distribution passage E150 is formed only partially in a substantially hexagonal shape.In other words, the shape of the protrusion E151 is cut off by the front and rear edges of the distribution passage E150. It is formed in a certain manner. Thereby, more third passages ERt3 can be formed in the distribution passage E150, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The guided portions E152 are arranged in pairs in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) with the engaged portion E153 between them, approximately in the center of the sorting path E150 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) (see Figures 145(a) and 147(a)). The front-to-rear dimension of the guided portion E152 is formed to be equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion E133c of the base member E130. By inserting the guided portion E152 into the groove portion E133c, the displacement of the sorting path E150 in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base member E130 is restricted.

As described above, a guide wall is provided around the groove portion E133c, so that the guided portion E152 comes into contact with the guide wall of the groove portion E133c, thereby preventing damage to the groove portion E133c.

The engaged portion E153 includes an engagement recess E153a whose back surface is recessed toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and a regulating piece E153b that protrudes toward the front from the lower end of the engaged portion E153. is formed (see FIG. 145(b)).

The engagement recess E153a is formed by extending in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). The restricting piece E153b is parallel to the inclined surface of the first inclined surface portion E133 (sorting passage E150) and is disposed below the restricting portion E133b of the first inclined surface portion E133 (arrow D direction). This makes it possible to prevent the restricting piece E153b and the restricting portion E133b from coming into contact when the sorting passage E150 is displaced in the inclined direction. On the other hand, the restricting piece E153b comes into contact with the restricting portion E133b, thereby preventing the sorting passage E150 from being displaced upward (arrow U direction).

The distribution passage E150 is disposed parallel to the slope of the first slope portion E133, in contact with the side surface of the cylindrical body E201 protruding from the top surface of the cover E202. By rotating the cylindrical body E201 about its axis as a rotation axis, the distribution passage E150 can be easily displaced.

In addition, at least a portion of the sorting path E150 is disposed below the curved portion E131, i.e., the sorting path E150 is disposed at a position where it does not pass completely from below the curved portion E131 to the attachment portion E134 side, and the distance between the sorting path E150 and the curved portion E131 is disposed to be smaller than the radius of the ball (see FIG. 145(a) and FIG. 147(a)). This makes it possible to prevent balls sent to the sorting path E150 from flowing out from below the curved portion E131 to both longitudinal ends of the base member E130. In addition, it is possible to prevent the balls from being pinched between the curved portion E131 and the sorting path E150.

The distribution passage E150 is formed as a generally rectangular plate that is long in the direction of the incline when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the incline. This makes it easier to send balls to the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) that is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) in the shorter direction than the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) that is arranged at one end side (downward inclination side) of the distribution passage E150 in the longitudinal direction.

In addition, the length of the distribution passage E150 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), which is the short side, is at least twice the diameter of the ball, and in this embodiment, is approximately 4.5 times the diameter of the ball. This allows multiple (two in this embodiment) ball movement (flowing down, falling) areas to be formed on the downward inclination side of the distribution passage E150. As a result, players can expect that the balls that flow down the distribution passage E150 will be sorted into the fourth passage ERt4, which has a high probability of winning the first winning hole 64, out of the multiple passages (fourth passage ERt4, fifth passage ERt5, and sixth passage ERt6) that are formed, and this can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, even if fraud is committed with the lower frame E86b, it is difficult to commit the fraud. To explain in detail, even if a fraudulent attempt is made by causing the ball to flow down to the fourth passage ERt4, either the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6, which have a lower probability of causing the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 than the fourth passage ERt4, the ball will move (flow down, fall) down the other of the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6, making the fraudulent attempt difficult.

A notch E150a is formed in part of the front side of the sorting passage E150 on the downward inclination direction. By passing through the notch E150a, the balls that flow down (fall) through the sorting passage E150 can easily come into contact with the flow path adjustment block E170.

The central passage E160 includes an erection passage E161 that extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, an upper hole E162 that opens (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at substantially the center of the erection passage E161 in the left-right direction, a cylindrical wall E163 that stands along the upper hole E162 from the underside of the erection passage E161, and installation parts E164 that are disposed at both left-right ends of the erection passage E161.

The width dimension of the erected passage E161 (the extension direction of the erected passage E161 and the direction perpendicular to the vertical direction, the direction of the arrows F-B) is made larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The erection passage E161 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including its extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) that is curved like a circular arc that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction). This allows the ball that flows down the erection passage E161 to be guided to the upper hole E162 that is formed approximately in the left-right center of the erection passage E161 (the vertically lowest part of the erection passage E161).

A rear wall E161a is formed on the erected passage E161, which stands vertically upward (in the direction of arrow F) from the edge of its rear end (in the direction of arrow B). This makes it possible to prevent balls that flow down the erected passage E161 from falling from the rear side.

The construction passage E161 is formed so that its cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to its extension direction is curved into an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction. Thereby, the ball that has flown down into the construction passageway E161 can be suppressed from flowing down (falling) from the front side thereof.

The upper hole E162 is circular in top view, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the insertion hole E135a formed in the second slope portion E135, that is, larger than the outer shape of a sphere. A projection E162a that projects upward is formed around the upper hole E162. This makes it difficult for the ball flowing down the construction passage E161 to be guided to the upper hole E162.

The cylindrical wall E163 is formed in a cylindrical shape with approximately the same inner diameter as the upper hole E162, and is disposed on the second sloped portion E135 with its lower end inserted into a recess formed on the outer periphery of the insertion hole E135a of the second sloped portion E135. This makes it possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the lower end of the cylindrical wall E163 and the upper surface of the second sloped portion E135. In addition, the central passage E160 can be positioned relative to the second sloped portion E135.

A notch E163a is formed in the cylindrical wall E163 at a position corresponding to the central passage E135b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the notch is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The arcuately curved space of the construction passage E161 and the space surrounded by the cylindrical wall E163 form (a part of) the fourth passage ERt4.

The mounting portion E164 is a vertically elongated, generally rectangular shape when viewed from above, and when the central passage E160 is fixed (disposed) to the base member E130 (mounting portion E134), the upper surface of the mounting portion E164 is formed flush with the upper surface of the cover E202 disposed on the first inclined surface portion E133. This makes it possible to prevent the distribution passage E150 and the central passage E160 (mounting portion E164) from coming into contact with each other even if the distribution passage E150 is displaced.

The flow path adjustment block E170 is used to change (vary) the direction in which the balls flow down, and is formed in a roughly triangular pyramid shape. The flow path adjustment block E170 is formed with a front wall E171 parallel to the front surface of the base member E130, an outer wall E172 facing the curved portion E134a, and an inner wall E173 facing the central passage E135b. A pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 are disposed on either side of the central passage E135b in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

When viewed from above, the flow path adjustment block E170 is formed in a triangular shape whose width increases toward the downward inclination side (arrow F direction) of the second inclined surface portion E135, and is disposed on the second inclined surface portion E135 with the front wall E171 and the front surface of the base member E130 formed flush. This makes it possible to prevent a ball flowing down the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) from abutting against the flow path adjustment block E170.

The outer wall E172 is curved convexly toward the curved portion E134a, and the inner wall E173 is curved concavely toward the center of the flow path adjustment block E170 from the central passage E135b. The space between the outer wall E172 and the curved part E134a and the space between the inner wall E173 and the central passage E135b are larger than the outer shape of the sphere. The spheres can each flow down between the E135b and the E135b.

The cover member E180 includes a front cover member E181 disposed below the base member E130 (in the direction of arrow D), and a back cover disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the front cover member E181. A member E182 is provided.

Note that the cover member E180 and the drive means E190, which will be described later, will be described with reference to FIG. 145 in addition to FIGS. 136 to 143 as appropriate.

The front cover member E181 includes a main body part E181a formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a main body part E181a approximately at the longitudinal center of the main body part E181a from the front cover member E181 side (direction of arrow F) to the back cover member E182 side. A back side passage E181b recessed toward (arrow B direction side), a motor mounting surface E181c arranged on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the main body E181a, and an upper part of the motor mounting surface E181c. the first top plate E181d disposed on the side (arrow U direction side), and the first top plate E181d vertically downward (arrow D direction) on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the motor mounting surface E181c. The first lower plate E181e is arranged in parallel with a predetermined interval, and the first lower plate E181e is arranged at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the first lower plate E181e. A second upper surface plate E181f and a second lower surface plate E181g are arranged in parallel to each other, and a plurality of slides (five in this embodiment) are arranged on the upper surfaces of the first lower surface plate E181e and second lower surface plate E181g. A protrusion E181h and a pivot support E181i disposed between the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) are formed.

The motor mounting surface E181c, the first upper plate E181d, the first lower plate E181e, the second upper plate E181f, and the second lower plate E181g are erected from the rear surface of the main body E181a.

In the back side passage E181b, there are formed a ball throwing plate E181b1 erected from the lower surface thereof, and a pair of support plates E181b2 erected on both sides of the ball throwing plate E181b1 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction). .

The throwing plate E181b1 in the longitudinal direction is disposed at a position corresponding to the center of the insertion hole E135a of the second slope portion E135, and a throwing slope portion E181b3 that slopes upward toward the rear side is formed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the upper surface of the throwing plate E181b1. As a result, the ball guided inside the cylindrical wall E163 of the central passage E160 abuts against the throwing slope portion E181b3, and the guiding direction is changed (changed) from the vertical downward direction (arrow D direction) to the front member E110 side (arrow F direction).

The pair of support plates E181b2 are used to guide the ball as it flows down the throwing plate E181b1, and are each formed vertically below the straight portion of the throwing wall E135e.

The upper surface of the back side passage E181b is formed with an opening, through which the ball throwing wall E135e of the second slope part E135 is inserted into the back side passage E181b, and the lower surface of the second slope part E135, the ball throwing plate E181b1, the ball throwing wall E135e, and the pair The space defined by the support plate E181b2 forms (a part of) the fourth passage ERt4.

The motor mounting surface E181c is a part where a mounting member E192 of a drive means E190, which will be described later, is arranged (fixed).A central notch E181c1 is formed in the longitudinal direction approximately in the center of the motor mounting surface E181c. The shape is approximately U-shaped when viewed from above, with the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) open.

The first top plate E181d and the second top plate E181f are arranged in parallel. Therefore, the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g are arranged in parallel. The space defined by the first upper surface plate E181d and the first lower surface plate E181e, the space defined by the second upper surface plate E181f and the second lower surface plate E181g, are connected to the first transmission member E194 of the drive means E190, which will be described later. This is a space for arranging two transmission members E195, respectively.

The upper surfaces of the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g each have a plurality of protrusions E181e1 (two on the first lower plate E181e and four on the second lower plate E181g in this embodiment) formed in the front-rear direction (direction of the arrows F-B). The protrusions E181e1 come into contact with the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195, thereby reducing the frictional force generated between the first lower plate E181e and the first transmission member E194 and between the second lower plate E181g and the second transmission member E195, and facilitating the displacement of the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195 (see FIG. 144(b)).

The slide protrusion E181h is for guiding the displacement of the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195, and includes the first upper plate E181d, the first lower plate E181e, the second upper plate E181f, and the second lower plate E181g. arranged parallel to the

The pivot support E181i is formed as a bearing on the rear surface (surface on the direction of arrow B) of the main body E181a, and a pivot support E182d is formed on the front surface of the rear cover member E182 at a position facing the pivot support E181i. The pinion gear E196 of the driving means E190 described below has ends of a shaft E197 protruding from its side surface (front-rear surface, surface in the direction of arrows F-B). The shaft E197 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B), and both ends of the shaft E197 are supported by the pivot support E181i of the front cover member E181 and the pivot support E182d of the rear cover member E182, respectively. This allows the pinion gear E196 to be rotatably disposed between the opposing front cover member E181 and rear cover member E182.

The rear cover member E182 includes a main body E182a formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a first top plate E182b erected from the front of the main body E182a on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the main body E182a, a second top plate E182c erected from the front of the main body E182a on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the main body E182a, and a pivot support E182d disposed on the front of the main body E182a in a position facing the pivot support E181i of the front cover member E181.

The first and second top plates E182b and E182c are respectively formed with a first notch E182b1 and a second notch E182c1 that are open on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F). The engagement bases E194b of the first and second transmission members E194 and E195, which will be described later, are inserted into the first and second notches E182b1 and E182c1, respectively.

The shaft support E182d is for pivotally supporting the shaft E197 of the drive means E190, and is formed as a bearing on the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main body portion E182a, and as described above, the front cover member E181 It is formed at a position facing the shaft support E181i.

That is, the shaft E197 of the drive means E190 is supported by the shaft support E181i of the front side cover member E181 and the shaft support E182d of the back side cover member E182, and its axial direction is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It is said to be in a tilted posture.

The drive means E190 includes a drive motor E191 that generates a drive force, a mounting member E192 disposed above the drive motor E191 (in the direction of arrow U), and a drive force transmission member E193 fixed to the shaft of the drive motor E191. , a first transmission member E194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E195 engaged with the first transmission member E194, and between the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195. It includes an interposed pinion gear E196 and a shaft E197 that passes through the axis of the pinion gear E196.

The drive motor E191 displaces the sorting passage E150 in its inclined direction, and is arranged with its axis pointing vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This allows the installation space in the front-to-rear direction to be smaller than when the axis is arranged to point in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B).

The mounting member E192 is for fixing (arranging) the drive motor E191 to the front cover member E181, and the mounting member E192 includes a base portion E192a formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape when viewed from above, A peripheral wall portion E192b is formed along the outer edge of the portion E192a to stand vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U).

An insertion hole for inserting the shaft of the drive motor E191 through the base portion E192a is bored in the thickness direction of the base portion approximately in the center thereof, and the drive motor E191 is installed with the shaft of the drive motor E191 inserted into the insertion hole. It is fixed (arranged) to the member E192. The upper end of the shaft of the drive motor E191 is arranged above the upper end of the peripheral wall portion E192b in the vertical direction.

The driving force transmitting member E193 is for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the first transmitting member E194, and is formed in a cylindrical shape smaller than the inner shape of the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c. A shaft of a drive motor E191 is fixed to the shaft center. The driving force transmitting member E193 is formed with an eccentric shaft E193a disposed at a position different from the axis, and a flange portion E193b protruding from the side wall of the driving force transmitting member E193.

The eccentric shaft E193a is a part that is engaged with the first transmission member E194, and is formed in a cylindrical shape smaller than the diameter of the driving force transmission member E193. When viewed from above, the outer edge of the eccentric shaft E193a is a part that is engaged with the first transmission member E194. It is placed inscribed on the outer edge of the Therefore, the axial center of the eccentric shaft E193a is arranged at a different position from the axial center of the driving force transmission member E193, that is, it is arranged eccentrically with respect to the axis of the drive motor E191. Therefore, when the drive motor E191 is driven, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circle centered on the axis of the drive force transmission member E193 (the axis of the drive motor E191) when viewed from above.

The flange portion E193b is a portion for restricting the displacement of the driving force transmission member E193 in the vertical direction (arrow U direction), and is disposed at the end on the driving motor E191 side (arrow D direction side) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). The outer shape of the flange portion E193b is formed into a circle larger than the inner shape of the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c, which allows the flange portion E193b to abut against the motor mounting surface E181c. As a result, the driving force transmission member E193 inserted into the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c can be prevented from detaching upward (arrow U direction) from the motor mounting surface E181c.

The first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the distribution passage E150.

The first transmission member E194 includes a main body E194a formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape when viewed from above, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the main body E194a, and a front member E110 side from the engagement base E194b. An engaging portion E194c that protrudes toward (the side in the direction of the arrow F), a first rack portion E194d that protrudes from the side surface on the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the main body portion E194a, and a lower surface of the main body portion E194a. A transmission recess E194e is formed.

The main body E194a is disposed above the driving force transmission member E193 (in the direction of the arrow U). The size of the main body E194a in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the driving force transmission member E193, and the driving force transmission member E193 is disposed between the front and rear ends of the main body E194a, i.e., at a position overlapping with the main body E194a when viewed from above.

The engagement portion E194c is generally circular when viewed from the front, and its outer shape is formed to be equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the inner walls of the engagement recess E153a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the engagement portion E194c to be inserted into the engagement recess E153a. The engagement portion E194c comes into contact with the inner walls of the engagement recess E153a in the left-right direction, allowing the driving force of the drive motor E191 to be transmitted to the sorting passage E150.

In addition, since the engagement recess E153a extends in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), the engagement portion E194c can be displaced vertically within the engagement recess E153a. In other words, the driving force of the drive motor E191 in the vertical direction can be prevented from being transmitted to the sorting passage E150.

In this way, the engagement portion E194c transmits the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 to the sorting passage E150, while not transmitting the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 to the sorting passage E150, allowing the sorting passage E150 to displace along the inclined surface of the first inclined portion E133 of the base member E130.

The first rack portion E194d has a rack gear E194d1 engraved on its underside that meshes with the pinion gear E196, and the pinion gear E196 is rotated by the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194.

The transmission recess E194e extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and is formed from the front end to the back end. Further, the width of the groove of the transmission recess E194e (distance between opposing inner walls in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer shape of the eccentric shaft E193a. By inserting the eccentric shaft E193a into the transmission recess E194e, the driving force of the drive motor E191 is transmitted to the first transmission member E194 via the driving force transmission member E193.

In more detail, when the drive motor E191 is driven, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape around the axis of the drive force transmission member E193 (the axis of the drive motor E191) in a top view. When the left-right inner walls of the transmission recess E194e come into contact with the eccentric shaft E193a, the left-right displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a caused by the drive of the drive motor E191 is transmitted to the first transmission member E194, and the first transmission member E194 is displaced in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the transmission recess E194e is formed from the front end to the rear end of the main body E194a, i.e., is formed longer than the outer shape of the driving force transmission member E193, so that the eccentric shaft E193a and the inner wall of the transmission recess E194e in the front-rear direction are not in contact with each other. Therefore, the front-rear displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a caused by the drive of the drive motor E191 is not transmitted to the first transmission member E194, and the first transmission member E194 can be prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction.

In addition, because the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from above, the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 can be set to a predetermined amount, that is, the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined amount. In addition, the left-right displacement of the first transmission member E194 can be made to reciprocate.

The second transmission member E195 is formed with a main body E195a that is substantially rectangular and elongated when viewed from the rear, a second rack portion E195b that protrudes from a side surface on one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the main body E195a, a guide groove E195c that is disposed in the approximate center in the longitudinal direction of the main body E195a, an engagement base E194b that protrudes from the top surface on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the main body E195a, and an engagement portion E194c that protrudes from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (the side in the direction of arrow F).

A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196 is engraved on the upper surface of the second rack portion E195b, and the rotation of the pinion gear E196 displaces the second transmission member E195 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The guide groove E195c extends in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction, arrow L-R direction) and is formed in the front cover member E181 on its inner side, through which a fastening portion is inserted for fastening the front cover member E181 and the rear cover member E182. By inserting the fastening portion of the front cover member E181 into the guide groove E195c, the left-right displacement of the second transmission member E195 can be guided. In addition, a tapping screw is screwed into the fastening portion of the front cover member E181, and the rigidity of the tapping screw can be utilized to prevent damage caused by contact between the fastening portion of the front cover member E181 and the guide groove E195c.

The pinion gear E196 is disposed with its axial direction aligned along the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). A shaft E197 is inserted into an insertion hole drilled in the axial direction, and the shaft E197 is supported by the shaft supports E181i, E182d disposed on the front cover member E181 and the rear cover member E182, so that the pinion gear E196 is rotatably disposed on the cover member E180.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147, the displacement (reciprocating) operation of the distribution passage E150 by the driving means E190 will be described. 144(a) and 146(a) are front views of the lower frame E86b in a state where the illustration of the front member E110 is omitted, and FIGS. 144(b) and 146(b) are front views of the rear side cover It is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame E86b in a state where the illustration of the member E182 is omitted, and FIGS. 144(c) and 146(c) are top views of the lower frame E86b.

145(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along the CXLVa-CXLVa line in FIG. 144(c), and FIG. 145(b) is a sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along the CXLVb-CXLVb line in FIG. FIG. 145(c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame E86b. 147(a) is a sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along the CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa line in FIG. 146(c), and FIG. 147(b) is a sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along the CXLVIIb-CXLVIIb line in FIG. 147(a). FIG. 147(c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame E86b.

Note that Figures 144 and 145 show the state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged in the first position, and Figures 146 and 147 show the state in which the sorting passage E150 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, when the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the first position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the base member E130. Located on the central passage E160 side. That is, the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are arranged close to each other, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 are also arranged close to each other.

When placed in the first position, the distribution passage E150 is placed above the installation part E164 of the central passage E160. This makes it easier to send balls that flow down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4).

Moreover, the notch E150a of the distribution passage E150 is arranged at a position close to the outer wall E172 of the flow path adjustment block E170 when viewed from above. Therefore, the balls flowing down the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) can be easily brought into contact with the outer wall E172. As a result, the direction of the ball being thrown can be changed (changed), making the game more interesting.

As shown in Figures 146 and 147, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the second position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are located on the curved portion E131 side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E130. That is, the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are disposed at positions spaced apart from each other compared to when they are disposed in the first position, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed at positions spaced apart from each other.

When placed in the second position, the end of the sorting passage E150 on the downward side in the inclined direction when viewed from above is positioned approximately in the center in the left-right direction of the installation section E164. Therefore, balls that pass (flow down, roll) through the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can roll on the upper surface of the installation section E164. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to be sent from the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope section E135 (fifth passage ERt5), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The sorting passage E150 and the first and second transmission members E194 and E195 are engaged by inserting the engagement portion E194c into the engagement recess E153a of the engaged portion E153. As described above, the engagement recess E153a is formed by extending in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) when viewed from the rear, so that the engagement portion E194c can be displaced in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) within the engagement recess E153a. As a result, even when the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195 is displaced in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), the sorting passage E150 can be displaced in the left-right direction as well as in the vertical direction. As a result, the sorting passage E150 can be displaced along its inclination direction (the inclination direction of the first inclined surface portion E133). That is, the sorting passage E150 and the protrusions E151 formed on its upper surface can be displaced (reciprocated) in a direction parallel to the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 (the direction from the end of the sorting passage E150 on the curved section E131 side to the end on the central passage E160 side). As a result, it is easy to impart a change (change) to the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls. Also, the change (change) in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls can be made more diverse.

Further, as described above, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is in contact with the inclined side surfaces E151a of the protrusion E151. Since the ball is arranged to be movable (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3), the ball can move (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3). It can be suppressed from remaining in the Therefore, in order to suppress the balls from staying in the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3), it is necessary to displace the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) with a complicated trajectory, or to displace the ball with a large displacement amount or displacement speed. Displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the drive means E190 can be simplified.

The displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position is achieved by displacing the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the curved portion E131 side (arrow L direction side) by driving the drive motor E191.

As described above, the eccentric shaft E193a is inserted into the transmission recess E194e of the first transmission member E194, and thus displaces from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side in the same manner as the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In addition, as the first transmission member E194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the pinion gear E196 that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 of the first rack portion E194d is rotated clockwise in rear view.

As a result, the second rack portion E195b that meshes with the pinion gear E196, that is, the second transmission member E195, is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, and the distribution passageway is engaged with the second transmission member E195. E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In this way, the displacement of the first transmission member E194 is transmitted to the second transmission member E195 via the pinion gear E196. This makes it possible to reduce the number of drive motors E191 installed and reduce production costs. In addition, the second transmission member E195 can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first transmission member E194, i.e., it is not necessary to synchronize the displacement of the first transmission member E194 and the displacement of the second transmission member E195, and this makes it possible to reduce production costs.

In addition, because the pinion gear E196 is used, the displacement of the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 can be in the opposite direction (opposite phase). In other words, the vibrations in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) that occur when the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) on the base member E130 (first inclined surface portion E133) can be canceled out by each other. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for vibration-damping members and reduce product costs.

The displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the second position to the first position is performed by driving the drive motor E191, similar to the displacement from the first position to the second position. Note that, other than the sorting passage E150, the direction of displacement of the first transmission member E194, the direction of displacement of the second transmission member E195, and the direction of rotation of the pinion gear E196, the displacement is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Here, by keeping the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a in the same direction, the sorting passage E150 can be reciprocated left and right (arrow L-R direction) between the first position and the second position. To explain in detail, among the circular displacements of the eccentric shaft E193a in top view, the displacement from the central passage E160 side toward the curved section E131 side displaces the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position. Also, among the circular displacements of the eccentric shaft E193a in top view, the displacement from the curved section E131 side toward the central passage E160 side displaces the sorting passage E150 from the second position to the first position.

In this way, by displacing the eccentric shaft E193a in a circular shape when viewed from above, the distribution passage E150 is reciprocated between the first position and the second position while the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a is maintained in the same direction. be able to. Thereby, switching of the drive direction of the drive motor E191 can be suppressed. As a result, a sensor for controlling the drive motor E191 can be eliminated, and product costs can be reduced.

Moreover, since the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced circularly in a top view, it is possible to suppress the first transmission member E194 from being displaced in the left-right direction by more than a predetermined amount. For example, in a configuration in which the drive motor E191 is engaged with the first transmission member E194 without the drive force transmission member E193, malfunction of the drive motor E191 or poor sensor control may cause the first transmission member E194 to move out of place. There is a possibility that the displacement will exceed the quantified value.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from above, and the first transmission member E194 is displaced in the left-right direction within a predetermined range, so that the first transmission member E194 can be prevented from coming into contact with other members (e.g., the central passage E160). In addition, the generation of vibrations caused by switching the driving direction of the drive motor E191 (stopping driving or restarting driving) can be prevented, and the reciprocating movement of the sorting passage E150 can be made smooth.

Returning from Figure 136 to Figure 143, we will now explain the ball flowing down the lower frame E86b.

By passing through the receiving opening EOPin formed in the front plate E111, the ball is guided to the first passage ERt1, and then falls down the first passage ERt1 due to the ball's own weight, and is guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2).

The ball guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) reciprocates in the front-to-back direction (direction of arrows F-B) due to its shape, and is guided to the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) by passing through the notch portion E132a in the wall plate E132. This allows the ball guided to the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to pass through the notch portion E132a while having a velocity component in the front-to-back direction.

Furthermore, since the notch E132a is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball, the ball can be guided from any position of the notch E132a to the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3).

This allows the balls flowing from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) in an irregular manner, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

As described above, the ball flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) has its flow direction changed (changed) by abutting against the protrusion E151. Here, the flow direction of the ball is changed (changed) to the rear side (arrow B direction), and the ball abuts against the rear plate E137 of the base member E130 and abuts against the side E151a of the protrusion E151 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction) of the rear plate E137. In other words, the ball is sandwiched between the rear plate E137 and the protrusion E151, which may inhibit the flow of the ball.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the distribution passage E150 is reciprocated along the inclination direction of the distribution passage E150 (first slope portion E133) by the drive motor E191, the back plate E137 and the protrusion E151 It is possible to prevent the ball from being pinched. In addition, by displacing (reciprocating) the distribution passage E150, the contact between the balls and the protrusion E151 can be made irregular, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution passage E150 can be made irregular. Changes in rolling direction can be varied. Thereby, it is possible to suppress monotonous changes (changes) in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution path E150. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

The balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) come into contact with the protrusion E151, and the speed of the flowing balls decreases, which allows the flow time of the balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to be extended (changed). In addition, the flow direction is changed (varied), so the balls are guided to either the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4), the second sloped portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6).

When a ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is sent to the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) of the central passage E160, the ball goes to the upper hole E162 formed approximately at the center in the left-right direction of the construction passage E161. You will be guided towards. The ball flowing down the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) flows down the upper hole E162 without its guiding direction being changed (changed) by the projection E162a protruding around the upper hole E162. It passes through and flows (falls) vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) inside the cylindrical wall E163 (fourth passage ERt4).

The ball that flows down (falls) inside the cylindrical wall E163 passes through the insertion hole E135a of the second inclined surface portion E135, is guided to the rear passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) of the front cover member E181, and when it comes into contact with the throwing inclined portion E181b3 of the throwing plate E181b1, its guiding direction is changed (transformed) from vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) to the front member E110 side (in the direction of arrow F), and flows down the top surface of the throwing plate E181b1 (see FIG. 143(c)).

The ball that flows down the top surface of the throwing plate E181b1 flows down the lower passage E143 (fourth passage ERt4) of the intermediate member E140, passes through the passage opening E142a of the abutment portion E142, and is discharged into the playing area from the outlet EOPout of the front member E110.

When the direction of a ball flowing down the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) is changed (changed) by the protrusion E162a protruding from the periphery of the upper hole E162, the ball is sent from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the erected passage E161 to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

When a ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is sent to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), the ball is sent to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt5). You will be guided to ERt7).

The ball flowing down on the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) toward the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) contacts the flow path adjustment block E170 disposed on the second slope portion E135. As a result, the direction of flow is changed (changed). The ball that has come into contact with the inner wall E173 of the flow path adjustment block E170 may be guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Among the balls flowing down the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5) toward the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) The ball is prevented from being guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) by coming into contact with a pair of vertical walls E135c arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the boundary with the passage ERt7). be done.

The ball guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) flows down toward the insertion hole E135a (direction of arrow B) of the second slope portion E135 according to its inclination direction, passes through the insertion hole E135a, and enters the front cover. It is guided to the back side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) of the member E181.

Here, among the balls guided to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), the balls thrown toward the rear plate E137 side (in the direction of arrow B) from the central passage E160 abut against the cylindrical wall E163. Therefore, passing through the insertion hole E135a is suppressed.

In addition, by abutting against the partition portion E135d formed on the second slope portion E135, the ball can be prevented from being sent from one side to the other in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the distribution passage E150, or from the other side to one side. As a result, a ball guided to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) can be prevented from being guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) by abutting against the side surface (surface formed in the left-right direction) of the attachment portion E134 and changing (changing) its flow direction.

In addition, by abutting against the partition portion E135d, the ball can be prevented from flowing down the back side (arrow B direction) of the cylindrical wall E163. This prevents the player from losing sight of the ball flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

A ball sent from the front end (end on the arrow F direction side) of the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) or the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) rolls on the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) toward the center of its extension direction. Here, the cross-sectional shape of the rolling portion E141 in a plane including its extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed with a downward inclination toward the center of the extension direction, so that the ball flowing down the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) reciprocates in the extension direction (left and right direction) along the shape of the rolling portion E141, and is guided from the first outflow surface E141a to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), or flows out (flows down) from the second outflow surface E141b into the play area.

Note that the flow path adjustment block E170 is arranged at a position that overlaps with the second outflow surface E141b in the left-right direction (direction of arrow LR) when viewed from the front. Thereby, the balls flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) can be prevented from directly flowing (flowing down) from the second outflow surface E141b to the game area. Therefore, the rolling portion E141 can be rolled, making the game more interesting.

As described above, by forming the protrusion E151 on the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3), the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls can be changed (altered). In other words, randomness can be imparted to the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls. That is, the protrusion E151 can function as a means of inhibiting or assisting the balls from passing through the sorting passage E150 (crossing the entire length of the sorting passage E150 (in the direction of the arrows L-R)).

Similarly, by providing the driving means E190, the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed (changed), and the ball passes through the distribution path E150 (in the longitudinal direction of the distribution path E150 (arrow LR direction)). ) The driving means E190 can function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the crossing over).

A ball that moves (flows down, rolls) through the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) and passes the end on the central path E160 side (has crossed completely in the longitudinal direction of the distribution path E150 (arrow L-R direction)) is guided to either the erected path E161 (fourth path ERt4) or the second inclined portion E135 (fifth path ERt5). In other words, the player can expect that the ball that flows down the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) (passes the end on the downward flow direction side) will be distributed to the erected path E161 (fourth path ERt4), which can increase the excitement of the game.

Here, a ball that passes through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (the side in the direction of arrow F) is sent (guided) to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), i.e., the passage where the probability of the ball winning the first winning opening 64 is low. In other words, a ball that does not completely cross the distribution passage E150 in the longitudinal direction has a low probability of winning the first winning opening 64.

As a result, the ball passes through the end of the central passage E160 side (downstream direction side) of the distribution passage E150 (crosses in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the distribution passage E150), and enters the first prize opening 64. The player can expect that the ball will be thrown (guided) to the constructed passageway E161 (central passageway E160, fourth passageway ERt4) where the probability of winning is high. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, by abutting against the protrusion E151, the speed at which the ball flows down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can be slowed down, and the time that the player can expect the ball to be guided to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) can be lengthened, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Moreover, the protrusion E162a allows the ball guided to the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) to be thrown to the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

On the other hand, due to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) formed in the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5), the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) The ball guided by can be thrown to the back side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) where it is easy to win into the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning into the first winning opening 64 is high). As a result, the player can expect that the ball will be guided to the back side passageway E181b (fourth passageway ERt4) until the ball flows out (flows down) into the game area, and the interest in the game can be increased. can.

Next, the lower frame E2086b in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 148 and 149.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the protrusion E151 is provided protrudingly on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150, but the upper surface of the distribution passage E2150 in the seventeenth embodiment is curved in an arc shape. . Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 148 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame E2086b in the seventeenth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CXLVa-CXLVa in FIG. 144. Note that FIG. 148(a) shows a state in which the distribution passage E2150 and the curved portion E131 are in contact with each other, and FIG. 148(b) shows an elastic spring E2190 configured as a coil spring in contrast to FIG. 148(a). indicates a contracted state. 149(a) is a front perspective view of the distribution passage E2150, and FIG. 149(b) is a front view of the distribution passage E2150 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIXb in FIG. 149(a). ) is a bottom view of the distribution passage E2150 as seen in the direction of arrow CXLIXc in FIG. 149(b), and FIG. 149(d) is a side view of the distribution passage E2150 as seen in the direction of arrow CXLIXd in FIG. 149(b). be.

As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the lower frame E2086b includes a front member E110, guiding members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and a front member E110. A base member E2130 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side), an intervening member E140 interposed between the opposing front member E110 and base member E2130, and a distribution passage disposed in the base member E2130. E2150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) elastic springs E2190 (see FIG. 136).

The base member E2130 includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), a plate-shaped wall board E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, and a pair of curved portions E132. A pair of flat parts E2133 formed between opposing sides of E131, a pair of attachment parts E134 formed above (in the direction of arrow U) of the pair of flat parts E2133 on the central passage E160 side, and It is formed by connecting a second sloped portion E135 formed between opposing sides, a pair of plate-shaped overhanging portions E136 (see FIG. 138) erected from the front of the base member E2130, and a pair of curved portions E131. A plate-shaped back plate E137.

The plane portion E2133 is formed from a plate-shaped body that is horizontally long and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and has a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support protrusions E2133a formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) support portions E2133b are formed on the passage E160 side.

The support protrusion E2133a is formed in a cylindrical shape. The support portion E2133b is a plate-like body that is generally rectangular in side view and protrudes from the upper surface of the planar portion E2133. At the tip end side of the protruding direction (the direction of arrow U), an insertion hole for inserting the support shaft E20j described below, i.e., an insertion hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the support shaft E20j, is drilled in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow F-B). The multiple support protrusions E2133a and multiple support portions E2133b are each arranged at a predetermined interval in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow F-B).

The distribution passageway E2150 slopes downward from the curved part E131 toward the attachment part E134, and is formed into a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sloped surface. On the lower surface of the distribution passageway E2150, a plurality of (in this embodiment, two) support protrusions E2150a are formed on both end sides in the longitudinal direction. In this case, two supporting portions E2150b are formed.

The support protrusions E2150a are disposed at positions corresponding to the support protrusions E2133a when viewed from above. The support portions E2150b are disposed at positions different from the support portions E2133b in the front-rear direction when viewed from above. In detail, the support portions E2150b are disposed between the opposing pairs of support portions E2133b.

The support portion E2150b is provided with an insertion hole that is substantially the same as the insertion hole formed in the support portion E2133b in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB).

A rolling surface E2151 is formed on the upper surface of the sorting passage E2150, along which the balls guided from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) flow, and the cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to the extension direction of the sorting passage E2150 is curved in an arc shape that is concave vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). The third passage ERt203 is formed by the space curved in an arc shape.

The end of the rolling surface E2151 on the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction, see FIG. 136) is formed vertically lower (arrow D direction) than the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the back plate E137 side (arrow B direction). Therefore, a ball flowing down the rolling surface E2151 is more likely to pass through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the intervening member E140 side and be sent to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) than to pass through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the back plate E137 side and abut against the back plate E137 (see FIG. 136).

As described above, the elastic spring E2190 is configured as a coil spring, and its inner diameter is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the support protrusions E2133a and E2150a. By inserting the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a inside the elastic spring E2190, the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a can support the elastic spring E2190.

With the elastic spring E2190 supported by the support protrusions E2133a and E2150a, the support shaft E20j can be inserted through the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b, allowing the sorting passage E2150 to engage with the flat portion E2133.

The support shaft E20j is for rotatably engaging the sorting passage E2150 with the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) as the rotation axis relative to the flat surface portion E2133, and is formed as a rod-shaped cylindrical body with an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b, and is inserted into the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b in a position along the front-to-rear direction.

As a result, the pair of sorting paths E2150 are rotatably engaged on the central path E160 side, and both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E2150 are displaced (reciprocated) up and down (in the directions of the arrows U and D) by the elastic spring E2190. That is, the pair of sorting paths E2150 are each engaged with the base member E2130 (flat surface portion E2133) so as to be displaceable (rotatable, reciprocating). In addition, both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E2150 (in the directions of the arrows L and R) are each disposed in contact with the underside of the curved portion E131.

In this state, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged in a contracted state, and the state of contact between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passage E2150 is maintained using the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190. That is, in the present embodiment, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed on the vertically lower side (arrow D direction side) of the distribution passage E2150, and displaces the distribution passage E2150 vertically upward (arrow U direction side). Formed in a manner.

In addition, in this state, the lowest vertical position of the rolling surface E2151 (in the direction of arrows U-D) is disposed vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the upper surface of the mounting portion E164 of the central passage E160. This makes it possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E2151 from coming into contact with the mounting portion E164, and to guide the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E2151 to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second inclined portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

Next, we will explain the ball flowing down the sorting passage E2150. The ball is guided to the sorting passage E2150 with a velocity component in the forward and backward directions by reciprocating in the front and rear directions (arrow F-B direction) on the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2), and while reciprocating in the front and rear directions on the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203), it flows down toward the central passage E160 in the inclined direction.

Due to the reciprocating movement in the front-rear direction, the ball that has passed the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the back plate E137 (arrow B direction side) comes into contact with the back plate E137 and returns to the rolling surface E2151 (third passageway). You will be guided to ERt203).

Meanwhile, when the ball passes through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the interposed member E140 side (the side in the direction of arrow F) due to the reciprocating movement in the forward and backward directions, it is guided to the interposed member E140 (the sixth passage ERt6) (see FIG. 136).

A ball that does not pass through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the intervening member E140 (the side in the direction of arrow F), i.e., is not guided to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) but passes through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the downward inclination direction, is guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

In this way, the rolling surface E2151 is curved into an arc shape whose cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the distribution passageway E2150 is convex toward the vertically downward direction (arrow D direction). The direction of the ball's flow can be changed (changed) with The ball can be guided (see Figure 136). That is, the player can expect that the balls flowing down the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203) will be sorted to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, when the ball thrown from the curved portion E131 (second path ERt2) contacts (falls) the rolling surface E2151 (third path ERt203), the distribution path E2150 is moved due to the ball's own weight. The curved portion E131 side rotates vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) with E20j as the rotation center. That is, the slope of the distribution path E2150 becomes smaller. As a result, the speed of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E2151 (third path ERt203) can be slowed down, and the time required for players to expect the ball to be guided to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) can be increased. , it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Further, as described above, the curved portion E131 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (direction of arrow F-B) and the vertical direction (direction of arrow U-D) in the downward direction in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D). Since it is curved in an arc shape that is convex toward The ball can be caused to flow down to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203) after reciprocating between the ball and the ball. Therefore, when the two balls flow from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203) with a predetermined distance apart, the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) By using the reciprocating motion of the ball, it is possible to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (making the balls lined up). As a result, while the leading ball is flowing down the rolling surface E2151 (third path ERt203), the trailing ball is guided to the rolling surface E2151 (third path ERt203), thereby reducing the weight of the leading ball and the trailing ball. The slope of the distribution path E2150 can be further reduced by the weight of the moving balls. As a result, it is possible to further lengthen the time during which the player expects the ball to be guided to the construction passageway E161 (fourth passageway ERt4), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the lower frame E3086b in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150.

In the above 17th embodiment, the upper surface of the sorting passage E2150 is curved in an arc shape, but in the 18th embodiment, the upper surface of the sorting passage E3150 is flat. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame E3086b in the eighteenth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CXLVa-CXLVa in FIG. 144. Note that FIG. 150(a) shows a state in which the distribution passage E3150 and the curved portion E131 are in contact, and FIG. 150(b) shows a state in which the elastic spring E2190 is compressed compared to FIG. 148(a). .

As shown in FIG. 150, the lower frame E3086b includes a front member E110, guiding members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and a back side ( A base member E3130 disposed on the side in the direction of arrow B), an intervening member E140 disposed between the facing member E110 and the base member E3130, a distribution passage E3150 disposed on the base member E3130, and a center It includes a passage E160, a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) elastic springs E2190, and a ball joint E3200 (see FIG. 136).

The base member E3130 is formed in the same way as the base member E2130 in the seventeenth embodiment, except that the socket E3220 of the ball joint E3200 is disposed on the plane part E3133 instead of the support part E2133b.

The socket E3220 of the ball joint E3200 is disposed approximately in the center of the flat surface E3133 in the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B) on the central passage E160 side of the support protrusion E2133a of the flat surface E3133.

Here, we will explain the ball joint E3200. The ball joint E3200 is formed of a ball member E3210 and a socket E3220.

The ball member E3210 is formed with a spherical portion E3211 and a fixed portion E3212 that is connected to the spherical portion E3211. The socket E3220 has a recessed receiving port E3221 formed with an outer diameter equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the spherical portion E3211 on its upper surface. When the spherical portion E3211 is inserted into the receiving port E3221, the ball member E3210 is displaceably engaged with the socket E3220.

The distribution passage E3150 slopes downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134, and is formed from a horizontally long substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sloped surface. On the lower surface of the distribution passageway E3150, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support protrusions E2150a are formed on both end sides in the longitudinal direction, and a ball member E3210 is formed closer to the central passageway E160 than the plurality of support protrusions E2150a. be done.

The support protrusion E2150a and the ball member E3210 are respectively disposed at positions corresponding to the support protrusion E2133a and the socket E3220 formed on the plane portion E3133 when viewed from above.

A rolling surface E3151 is formed on the upper surface of the distribution passage E3150 formed in the plate-like body, along which the balls guided from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) flow. The rolling surface E3151 forms the third passage ERt303.

With the elastic spring E2190 supported by the support protrusions E2133a and E2150a, the ball member E3210 (sphere portion E3211) disposed on the underside of the sorting passage E3150 can be inserted into the socket E3220 (receiving port E3221) disposed on the upper surface of the flat portion E3133, thereby engaging the sorting passage E3150 with the flat portion E3133.

As a result, the pair of sorting paths E3150 are rotatably engaged on the central path E160 side, and both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E3150 are displaced (reciprocated) up and down (in the directions of the arrows U and D) by the elastic spring E2190. That is, the pair of sorting paths E3150 are each disposed on the base member E3130 (flat surface portion E3133) so as to be displaceable (rotatable, reciprocating). In addition, both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E3150 (in the directions of the arrows L and R) are disposed in contact with the underside of the curved portion E131.

In this state, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged in a compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190 is utilized to maintain the abutment state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting path E3150. That is, in this embodiment, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged vertically downward (arrow D direction side) of the sorting path E2150, and is formed in a manner that displaces the sorting path E2150 vertically upward (arrow U direction side).

In addition, in this state, the end of the rolling surface E3151 on the downward slope side (direction of arrow D), that is, the lowest position in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) of the rolling surface E3151 is , is arranged vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the upper surface of the installation part E164 of the central passage E160. As a result, it is possible to suppress the contact between the balls that have flown down the rolling surface E3151 and the installation part E164, and to prevent the balls that have flowed down the rolling surface E3151 from entering the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope part E135 (the fifth You can be guided to the passage ERt5).

Next, the balls flowing down the distribution path E3150 will be explained. By reciprocating the curved portion E131 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the ball guided to the distribution passage E3150 with a velocity component in the front-rear direction passes through the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303). ) can be displaced in the front-rear direction, and flows down toward the central passage E160 according to the inclination direction.

Here, depending on the position in the front-to-rear direction where the ball abuts (falls) on the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution passage E3150 inclines toward the intermediate member E140 (arrow F direction) or toward the back plate E137 (arrow B direction) (see Figure 136).

To explain in detail, since the distribution passage E3150 is engaged with the base member E3130 (plane part E3133) via the ball joint E3200, the intervening member E140 (see FIG. 136) of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) ) side, the distribution passageway E3150 slopes downward from the curved part E131 side to the central passageway E160 side, and due to the ball's own weight, the distribution passageway E3150 slopes downward from the back plate E137 side to the intervening member E140 side. It slopes downward towards. On the other hand, when the ball contacts (falls) the back plate E137 side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution passage E3150 slopes downward from the curved part E131 side to the central passage E160 side, and Due to the weight of the ball, it tilts downward from the intervening member E140 side toward the back plate E137 side. That is, in the front-rear direction, the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) slopes downward toward the side on which the ball abuts (falls).

As a result, the direction of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) can be changed (changed), and the direction of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) can be changed (changed). The ball can be guided to any path of the installation member E140 (sixth path ERt6) (see FIG. 136). That is, the player can expect that the balls flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) will be distributed to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, when the ball thrown from the curved portion E131 (second path ERt2) contacts (falls) the rolling surface E3151 (third path ERt303), the distribution path E3150 is moved by the ball's own weight to the ball joint. The curved portion E131 side rotates vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) with E3200 as the rotation center. That is, the inclination of the distribution passageway E3150 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) becomes smaller. As a result, the speed of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third path ERt303) can be slowed down, and the time required for players to expect the ball to be guided to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) can be lengthened. , it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) in a plane including the extension direction (direction of arrows F-B) and the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D) is curved into an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (direction of arrow D) (see Figure 143 (c)). Therefore, the ball guided into the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can be caused to reciprocate between one end side and the other end side in the extension direction, and then allowed to flow down to the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303). Therefore, when two balls flow from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) with a certain distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (connecting the balls). As a result, while the leading ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the trailing ball is guided to the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), and the weight of the leading ball and the weight of the trailing ball can further reduce the inclination in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the sorting passage E3150. As a result, the time during which the player expects the ball to be guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) can be further extended, increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by making the balls flow down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), it may be possible to change (alter) the inclination direction of the sorting passage E3150 in the forward/backward direction (arrow F-B direction).

For example, while the leading ball is flowing down the intervening member E140 (see FIG. 136) side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the trailing ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303). ERt303) on the rear plate E137 side, the downward direction of the slope of the rolling surface E3151 in the front-rear direction may be changed (changed) from the intervening member E140 side to the rear plate E137 side. In this way, while the ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), by changing (changing) the inclination direction of the rolling surface E3151 in the front-rear direction, the destination of the ball can be changed, which improves the game. It can increase interest.

In this embodiment, the same elastic spring E2190 is provided on each of the multiple (two in this embodiment) support protrusions E2133a, but different elastic springs, i.e., elastic springs having different elastic coefficients, may also be provided.

For example, by making the elastic modulus of the elastic spring disposed on the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction side) smaller than the elastic modulus of the elastic spring disposed on the back plate E137 side (arrow B direction side). , the distribution passage E3150 can be easily tilted downward toward the intervening member E140 (see FIG. 136). As a result, the balls flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) are in contact with (held between) the rolling surface E3151 and the back plate E137, and the ball flows down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303). It can be prevented from flowing down, flowing down (falling) between the central passage E160 and the back plate E137, and being guided to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

Next, the lower frame E4086b in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 151 and 152.

In the above 16th embodiment, a pair of sorting passages E150 is provided, but in the 19th embodiment, in addition to the pair of sorting passages E150, a pair of second sorting passages E4150 is provided. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figures 151(a) and 152(a) are front views of the lower frame E4086b in the 19th embodiment, and Figures 151(b) and 152(b) are rear views of the lower frame E4086b. Note that Figures 151 and 152 are schematic illustrations, and in Figures 151(a) and 152(a), the illustration of the front member E110 and the guide member E120 is omitted. Also, in Figures 151(b) and 152(b), in order to facilitate understanding, only the sorting path E150, the second sorting path E4150, and the driving means E4190 are shown. Also, in Figure 151, the state in which the sorting path E150 is arranged in the first position is illustrated, and in Figure 152, the state in which the sorting path E150 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the lower frame E4086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and a front member E110. A base member E4130 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side), an intervening member E140 interposed between the facing front member E110 and the base member E4130, and a distribution passage disposed in the base member E4130. E150, a second distribution passage E4150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow passage adjustment blocks E170, and a cover member E4180 arranged at a predetermined interval on the lower surface side (arrow D direction side) of the base member E4130, and a driving means E4190 disposed inside the cover member E4180 (see FIG. 136).

The base member E4130 is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 136) formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and is erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131. A plate-shaped wall plate E132 formed between the two opposite sides, a pair of first slope parts E4133 formed between the pair of opposing curved parts E131, and a pair of third slope parts E4133 formed between the pair of opposite first slope parts E4133. A slope portion E4139, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of opposing third slope portions E4139, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of opposing mounting portions E134, and a base member E4130. It includes a pair of plate-shaped projecting parts E136 (see FIG. 138) that stand upright from the front of the board, and a plate-shaped back plate E4137 that is formed by connecting the pair of curved parts E131.

Since the third inclined surface portion E4139 is formed, the first inclined surface portion E4133 is disposed vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and is shorter in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) than the first inclined surface portion E133 in the 16th embodiment.

The third slope portion E4139 is disposed between the first slope portion E4133 and the attachment portion E134 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and is formed parallel to the first slope portion E4133.

The back plate E4137, like the first slope portion E4133, is arranged to extend vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the back plate E137 in the sixteenth embodiment.

The second sorting passage E4150 is formed to have a shorter length in the inclination direction than the sorting passage E150, but is otherwise identical, so its description will be omitted. By forming a protrusion E151 on the second sorting passage E4150, a third passage ERt3 is formed in the second sorting passage E4150. The second sorting passage E4150 is disposed between the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) and the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). In other words, the second sorting passage E4150 is disposed vertically below the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) (arrow D direction) and vertically above the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) (arrow U direction).

The driving means E4190 includes a driving motor E191 that generates a driving force, an attachment member E192 disposed above the driving motor E191 (in the direction of the arrow U), a driving force transmission member E193 fixed to the shaft of the driving motor E191, a first transmission member E4194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E4195 and a third transmission member E4198 engaged with the first transmission member E4194, a fourth transmission member E4199 engaged with the second transmission member E4195, and a plurality of pinion gears E196 (three in this embodiment).

Note that the plurality of pinion gears E196 in this embodiment are all the same, but for ease of understanding, the pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 is referred to as the pinion gear E196a, the The pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E4194 and the third transmission member E4198 is referred to as a pinion gear E196b, and the pinion gear E196 interposed between the second transmission member E4195 and the fourth transmission member E4199 is referred to as a pinion gear E196c. to distinguish them.

The first transmission member E4194 is different from the first transmission member E194 in the sixteenth embodiment in that an engagement base E4194b extends vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U), and a pinion gear is attached to the upper surface of the first rack part E4194d. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with E196b is carved.

The second transmission member E4195 is formed by extending an engagement base E4194b vertically upward (arrow U direction) compared to the second transmission member E195 in the 16th embodiment, and a rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196c is engraved on the upper surface of the main body part E4195a on one side (arrow L direction) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

The third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the second distribution passage E4150.

The third transmission member E4198 is formed with a main body E4198a, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the main body E4198a, and an engagement portion E194c (see FIG. 138) protruding from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (arrow F direction). A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196b is engraved on the lower surface of the main body E4198a, and the third transmission member E4198 is displaced in the left-right direction by the rotation of the pinion gear E196b.

The fourth transmission member E4199 is formed with a main body E4199a, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the main body E4199a, and an engagement portion E194c (see FIG. 138) protruding from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (arrow F direction). A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196c is engraved on the lower surface of the main body E4199a, and the fourth transmission member E4199 is displaced left and right by the rotation of the pinion gear E196c.

As shown in FIG. 151, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E4194, and the second transmission member E4195 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 are disposed close to each other, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed close to each other.

On the other hand, the second distribution passage E4150, the third transmission member E4198, and the fourth transmission member E4199 are located on the wall panel E132 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are disposed at positions spaced apart from each other, and therefore the pair of second distribution passages E4150 are also disposed at positions spaced apart from each other.

In addition, in a state where the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position, the end of the second distribution passage E4150 on the downward slope side is closer to the wall plate E132 than the end of the distribution passage E150 on the downward side of the slope direction. The second distribution passage E4150 located on the side, that is, when viewed from above, is arranged at a position where the entire second distribution passage E4150 overlaps with the distribution passage E150. Therefore, the second distribution path E4150 is arranged at a position where no path for the ball is formed.

As a result, the ball that has flowed down the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) does not move (flow down, roll) through the second distribution path E4150, but is thrown (falls) into the construction path E161 (fourth path ERt4). be done. That is, the ball can be made to flow down (fall) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the construction passage E161 (center passage E160, fourth passage ERt4). As a result, the ball flowing down (falling) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) comes into contact with the construction passage E161 and rebounds, so that the ball flows down (falls) from the construction passage E161 to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5). (fall) easily.

On the other hand, by allowing the ball to flow (fall) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), it may be possible to send the ball directly to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing (falling) down to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) due to contact with the protrusion E162a, compared to when the ball rolls down the erected passage E161 toward the upper hole E162 (see FIG. 140).

In this way, in this embodiment, by making the balls flow down (fall) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the construction passage E161 (center passage E160, fourth passage ERt4), compared to the sixteenth embodiment, This makes it difficult for the balls distributed to the construction passage E161 (center passage E160, fourth passage ERt4) to enter the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 135) (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 can be lowered). .

On the other hand, by sending the ball from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161, i.e., without the ball coming into contact with the protrusion E162a, the ball can easily pass through the upper hole E162. This allows the player to expect that the ball that has flowed down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) will pass directly through the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161, increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 152, when the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the second position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E4194, and the second transmission member E4195 are connected to the wall plate E132 in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. located on the side. That is, the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 are arranged at positions separated from each other compared to the state in which the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 also They are arranged at positions spaced apart from each other.

On the other hand, the second distribution passage E4150, the third transmission member E4198, and the fourth transmission member E4199 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are disposed closer to each other than when the distribution passage E150 is disposed in the first position, and therefore the pair of second distribution passages E4150 are also disposed closer to each other.

When the sorting passage E150 is placed in the second position, the end of the second sorting passage E4150 on the downward side in the inclination direction is located closer to the upper hole E162 than the end of the sorting passage E150 on the upward side in the inclination direction. That is, when viewed from above, a part of the second sorting passage E4150 is disposed in a visible position. This allows balls that have flowed down the sorting passage E150 to be guided to the second sorting passage E4150. As a result, it becomes easier to send balls that have flowed down the second sorting passage E4150 directly to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161.

Here, the second distribution passage E4150 is disposed vertically below the distribution passage E150 (in the direction of arrow D), so that when a ball flows (falls) from the second distribution passage E4150 to the erection passage E161, the amount of rebound of the ball due to contact with the erection passage E161 can be reduced compared to when the ball flows (falls) from the distribution passage E150 to the erection passage E161. This makes it possible to suppress the ball from flowing (falling) from the erection passage E161 to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

As shown above, by being guided from the distribution path E150 to the second distribution path E4150, the balls distributed to the construction path E161 (center path E160, fourth path ERt4) are sent to the first prize opening 64 (FIG. 135). (see) can make it easier to win a prize (the probability of winning a prize in the first prize opening 64 can be increased). Therefore, the player is made to expect that the ball will be guided to the second distribution path E4150 (the ball will be thrown from the distribution path E150 in a state where the distribution path E150 is placed in the second position), and the game will be improved. It can increase interest.

In addition, when the sorting passage E150 is positioned in the second position, a third passage ERt3 is formed in the second sorting passage E4150, so the flow time of the balls flowing down the third passage ERt3 can be extended (changed) compared to the 16th embodiment.

Further, by causing the ball to flow down (fall) from the distribution path E150 to the second distribution path E4150, it can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the protrusion E151 formed in the second distribution path E4150. Therefore, in addition to flowing down (falling) from the curved portion E131 to the distribution passage E150, by causing the ball to flow down (falling) from the distribution passage E150 to the second distribution passage E4150, the upper surface of the protrusion E151 is moved (flowed down). The ball can be easily moved (flowing, rolling), and the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) can be varied. To explain in detail, by moving (flowing down, rolling) the upper surface of the projection E151 formed in a planar shape, it is possible to suppress the ball from moving (flowing down, rolling) in the third passage ERt3. It is possible to easily form both a mode in which the passage ERt3 is moved (flowing down, rolling) and a mode in which the third passage ERt3 is not moving (flowing down, rolling).

Next, the reciprocating movement of the distribution passage E150 and the second distribution passage E4150 by the driving means E4190 will be explained.

The first and second transmission members E4194 and E4195 are engaged with the distribution passage E150, and the third and fourth transmission members E4198 and E4199 are engaged with the second distribution passage E4150 by inserting the engagement portion E194c into the engagement recess E153a of the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 145).

The displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position, and the associated displacement of the second sorting passage E4150 from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side, is achieved by the drive motor E191 displacing the eccentric shaft E193a of the drive force transmission member E193 from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the wall plate E132 side (arrow L direction side).

When the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the first transmission member E4194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side. Thereby, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E4194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

Further, due to the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 from the center passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the pinion gear E196a that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the lower surface of the first rack part E4194d rotates clockwise in rear view. The pinion gear E196b, which meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the upper surface of the first rack portion E4194d, is rotated counterclockwise in rear view.

As a result, the second transmission member E4195 (second rack part E195b) that meshes with the pinion gear E196a is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, and the distribution passage E150 that is engaged with the second transmission member E4195 is displaced from the first position to the second position. Further, the third transmission member E4198 (body portion E4198a) that meshes with the pinion gear E196b is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side, and the second distribution passage E4150 that is engaged with the third transmission member E4198 is , is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side.

In addition, as the second transmission member E4195 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the pinion gear E196c that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the upper surface of the main body portion E4195a of the second transmission member E4195 is rotated clockwise in rear view.

As a result, the main body E4199a of the fourth transmission member E4199, which meshes with the pinion gear E196c, is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side, and the second distribution passage E4150 engaged with the fourth transmission member E4199 is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side.

The displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the second position to the first position and the accompanying displacement of the second distribution passage E4150 from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side are from the first position of the distribution passage E150. Similar to the displacement to the second position and the accompanying displacement from the wall plate E132 side of the second distribution passage E4150 to the central passage E160 side, this is performed by driving the drive motor E191.

Here, other than the displacement directions of the sorting passage E150, the second sorting passage E4150, the first transmission member E4194 to the fourth transmission member E4199, and the rotation direction of the pinion gears E196a, E196b, and E196c, the displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position and the associated displacement of the second sorting passage E4150 from the wall panel E132 side to the central passage E160 side are the same, so a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in this embodiment, one drive motor E191 can reciprocate the pair of distribution passages E150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150, which reduces the number of drive motors E191 and reduces product cost. It is possible to reduce the amount of

Further, the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 can cause the displacement of the second transmission member E4195 to the fourth transmission member E4199, that is, the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 to the fourth transmission member E4199 can be linked. Thereby, the displacements of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150 can be linked. As a result, a sensor for controlling the reciprocating movement of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150 can be eliminated, and product costs can be reduced.

Next, the lower frame E5086b in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 156.

In the above 16th embodiment, a pair of sorting passages E150 is provided. In the 20th embodiment, in addition to the sorting passage E150, a third sorting passage E5150 is provided between the pair of sorting passages E150. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

Figures 153(a) and 155(a) are front views of the lower frame E5086b in the 20th embodiment, and Figures 153(b) and 155(b) are rear views of the lower frame E5086b. Figures 154 and 156 are top views of the lower frame E5086b. Note that Figures 153 to 156 are illustrated diagrammatically, and in Figures 153(a) and 155(a), the front member E110 and the guide member E120 are omitted, and in Figures 154(a) and 156(a), the guide member E120 is omitted. Also, for ease of understanding, only the sorting passage E150, the third sorting passage E5150, and the driving means E5190 are displayed in Figures 153(b) and 155(b). 154(b) and 156(b) show only the third sorting path E5150 and the driving means E5190, and show only the external shape of the third sorting path E5150. 153 and 154 show the state where the sorting path E150 is arranged in the first position, and 155 and 156 show the state where the sorting path E150 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in Figures 153 to 156, the lower frame E5086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 (see Figure 136) arranged on both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E5130 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 interposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E5130, a distribution passage E150, a third distribution passage E5150, a central passage E160, and a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 arranged on the base member E5130, a cover member E5180 arranged at a predetermined interval on the underside (arrow D direction side) of the base member E5130, and a drive means E5190 arranged inside the cover member E5180.

The base member E5130 is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and a plate-shaped plate erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131. A pair of first slope portions E5133 formed between the wall plate E132 and the pair of opposing curved portions E131, a pair of third mounting portions E5139 formed between the pair of opposing first slope portions E5133, A pair of attachment portions E134 formed between the pair of opposing third attachment portions E5139, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of opposing attachment portions E134, and a pair of attachment portions E135 that are erected from the front of the base member E5130. A pair of plate-shaped overhanging parts E136 (see FIG. 138) and a plate-shaped back plate E5137 formed by connecting the pair of curved parts E131.

Since the third mounting portion E5139 is formed, the first inclined surface portion E5133 is disposed vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and is shorter in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) than the first inclined surface portion E133 in the 16th embodiment.

The third attachment part E5139 is for displaceably engaging the third distribution passage E5150, and is disposed between the first slope part E5133 and the attachment part E134 in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD). The upper surface is horizontal.

A third guide portion E5139a is formed on the upper surface of the third attachment portion E5139 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side), into which a guided portion E5152 of a third distribution passage E5150, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. .

The third guide portion E5139a includes a plate-shaped body that is vertically elongated and approximately rectangular when viewed from above, and a pair of plates that protrude from both ends of the plate-shaped body in the extending direction (arrow FB direction) toward the third mounting portion E5139. It is formed from a U-shaped body when viewed from the side. The guided portion E5152 is slidably inserted into the space surrounded by the third guide portion E5139a and the third attachment portion E5139.

Like the first slope portion E5133, the back plate E5137 is arranged to extend vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the back plate E137 in the sixteenth embodiment.

The third distribution passage E5150 is for the ball to flow down the upper surface thereof, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above. The guided portion E5152 is formed on one side in the direction of arrow R), and the engaged portion E5153 is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (on the side in the direction of arrow L).

Since the protrusion E151 is formed in the third sorting passage E5150, a third passage ERt3 is formed in the third sorting passage E5150. In addition, the arrangement of the protrusion E151 on the upper surface of the third sorting passage E5150 is the same as the arrangement of the sorting passage E150.

The guided portion E5152 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and as described above, when the guided portion E5152 is inserted into the space surrounded by the third guide portion E5139a and the third mounting portion E5139, the third distribution passage E5150 can be displaced in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).

The engaged portion E5153 is for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the third distribution path E5150, and protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the end face of one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the third distribution path E5150. A rack gear E194d1 is engraved on the side face of the lower end of the engaged portion E5153 on the other longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow R).

The dimension of the third sorting passage E5150 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed to be larger than the distance between the pair of sorting passages E150 arranged at the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent balls flowing down (falling) from the sorting passage E150 from coming into contact with the guided portion E5152 or the engaged portion E5153 arranged at both ends of the third sorting passage E5150 in the longitudinal direction. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the guided portion E5152 or the engaged portion E5153.

The guided part E5152 is inserted into the third guide part E5139a, and the third distribution passage E5150 is inserted into the third mounting state when the rack gear E194d1 carved in the engaged part E5153 and the second pinion gear E5196, which will be described later, mesh with each other. It is arranged in part E5139 (base member E5130).

The drive means E5190 includes a drive motor E191 that generates a drive force, a mounting member E192 disposed above the drive motor E191 (in the direction of arrow U), and a drive force transmission member E193 fixed to the shaft of the drive motor E191. , a first transmission member E5194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E5195 engaged with the first transmission member E4194, a pinion gear E196, and a second pinion gear E5196.

The first transmission member E5194 is formed by extending an engagement base E5194b vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) compared to the first transmission member E194 in the 16th embodiment, and a rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the second pinion gear E5196 is engraved on the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the first rack portion E5194d.

The second transmission member E4195 is formed by extending the engagement base E5194b vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) compared to the second transmission member E195 in the 16th embodiment.

The second pinion gear E5196 is different from the pinion gear E196 in that it is disposed with its axial direction along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and has a larger dimension (thickness) in the axial direction, The other configurations are the same. Note that the axial dimension (thickness) of the second pinion gear E5196 is the vertical dimension of the first rack portion E5194d of the first transmission member E5194 and the lower end of the engaged portion E5153 of the third distribution passage E5150. The size of the rack gear E194d1 is larger than the sum of the vertical dimensions of the rack gear E194d1. Thereby, the second pinion gear E5196 is formed to be able to mesh with the first rack portion E5194d and the engaged portion E5153 at different positions in the vertical direction.

As shown in Figures 153 and 154, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E5194, and the second transmission member E5195 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E5130. That is, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195 are disposed close to each other, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed close to each other.

The third distribution passage E5150 is disposed between the central passage E160 and the rear panel E5137 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) (hereinafter referred to as the "third position"). This makes it possible to prevent balls that flow down (fall) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) between the central passage E160 and the rear panel E5137 from being sent to the fifth passage ERt5 by being guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3). As a result, the player can expect that the balls guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) will be sorted into the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), which can increase the interest of the game. In addition, since the third passage ERt3 is formed in the third distribution passage E5150, the flow time of the balls flowing down the third passage ERt3 can be extended (changed) compared to the 16th embodiment.

Moreover, the distance between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137 facing each other in the front-rear direction is formed to be smaller than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from being pinched between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137, and the ball can flow down on the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3).

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, when the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the second position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E5194, and the second transmission member E5195 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the base member E5130. It is located on the curved portion E131 side. That is, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195 are arranged at positions separated from each other compared to the state where they are arranged at the first position, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 are also arranged at positions separated from each other. will be placed.

The third distribution path E5150 is disposed at a position where at least a portion of it overlaps with the central path E160 when viewed from above, i.e., above the central path E160 (in the direction of the arrow U) (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth position"). This makes it possible to prevent balls from being guided to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) by guiding them from the distribution path E150 to the third distribution path E5150. Note that balls guided to the third distribution path E5150 are sent to the second sloped portion E135 (fifth path ERt5) by crossing the front or rear end of the third distribution path E5150.

Further, the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at a position where the distance between the facing part and the back plate E5137 in the front-rear direction is larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the balls flowing down from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137 can be transferred to the second slope portion without coming into contact with the third distribution passage E5150. You can be guided to E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

As described above, in this embodiment, compared to the sixteenth embodiment, when the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the first position and the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at the third position, the distribution The ball thrown from the branch path E150 can be easily guided to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4). On the other hand, in a state where the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position and the third distribution passage E5150 is arranged at the fourth position, the ball thrown from the distribution passage E150 is transferred to the center passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4). ) can be difficult to navigate. That is, depending on the arrangement position of the third distribution passage E5150 (distribution passage E150), the difficulty level of throwing a ball to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) can be changed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, since the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed between a pair of opposing distribution passages E150, it may be possible to guide a ball that has flowed down the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). In other words, the ball flowing down the third passage ERt3 can be sent to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) in addition to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the second sloped portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the reciprocating movement of the distribution passage E150 and the third distribution passage E5150 by the drive means E5190 will be explained.

The distribution passage E150 and the first and second transmission members E5194 and E5195 are engaged with each other by inserting the engagement portion E194c into the engagement recess E153a of the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 145).

The displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position, and the associated displacement of the third sorting passage E5150 from the third position to the fourth position, are achieved by the drive motor E191 displacing the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the curved portion E131 side (arrow L direction side).

When the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In addition, as the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the pinion gear E196 that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 of the first rack portion E5194d is rotated clockwise in rear view.

As a result, the second rack portion E195b of the second transmission member E5195 that meshes with the pinion gear E196 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, and the distribution passage E150 that is engaged with the second transmission member E5195 is , is displaced from the first position to the second position.

Also, by the displacement of the first transmission member E5194 from the central passage E160 side to the curved part E131 side, the second pinion gear meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the first rack part E5194d. E5196 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above.

As a result, the engaged portion E5153 of the third distribution passage E5150 that meshes with the second pinion gear E5196 is displaced from the back plate E5137 side (arrow B direction side) to the interposed member E140 side (arrow F direction side). , As a result, the third distribution passage E5150 is displaced from the third position to the fourth position.

The displacement of the sorting path E150 from the second position to the first position and the associated displacement of the third sorting path E5150 from the fourth position to the third position are performed by driving the drive motor E191, similar to the displacement of the sorting path E150 from the first position to the second position and the associated displacement of the third sorting path E5150 from the third position to the fourth position.

Note that, except for the displacement direction of the distribution passage E150, the third distribution passage E5150, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195, and the rotation direction of the pinion gear E196 and the second pinion gear E5196, the distribution passage E150 is in the first position. Since this is the same as the displacement from the second position to the second position and the accompanying displacement from the third position to the fourth position of the third distribution passageway E5150, a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in this embodiment, a single drive motor E191 can reciprocate through a pair of sorting paths E150 and the third sorting path E5150, thereby reducing the number of drive motors E191 and reducing product costs.

In addition, the second transmission member E5195 and the third distribution passage E5150 can be displaced by the displacement of the first transmission member E5194, that is, the displacements of the first transmission member E5194, the second transmission member E5195, and the third distribution passage E5150 can be linked. This allows the displacements of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the third distribution passage E5150 to be linked. As a result, a sensor for controlling the reciprocating movement of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the third distribution passage E5150 can be eliminated, and product costs can be reduced.

Further, the second pinion gear E5196 meshes with the engaged portion E5153 and the first rack portion E5194d at different positions in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, the engaged portion E5153 and the first rack portion E5194d are engaged with each other in the vertical direction upward (in the direction of the arrow U). The engaging portion E5153 is engaged, and the first rack portion E5194d is engaged vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). As a result, the directions of displacement of the first transmission member E5194 and the third distribution passage E5150 can be orthogonal, that is, the first transmission member E5194 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the base member E5130, and The third distribution passage E5150 can be displaced in the lateral direction of the base member E5130 (arrow FB direction). This makes it possible to suppress the number of pinion gears and reduce product costs.

Next, the lower frame E6086b in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 157(a).

In the sixteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) along (parallel to) the first slope portion E133 of the base member E130, but in the twenty-first embodiment, The arrangement angle of the distribution passage E6150 with respect to the first slope portion E6133 is changed (changed). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 157(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame E6086b in the twenty-first embodiment. Note that FIG. 157(a) corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa in FIG. 146. In addition, since the lower frame E6086b is formed line (plane) symmetrical (left-right symmetry in FIG. 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 135) of the game board E13, only one side (arrow L direction side) is formed. Illustrated.

The lower frame E6086b in the 21st embodiment is formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 16th embodiment, except for the base member E130 and the distribution passage E150, so only the base member E6130 and the distribution passage E6150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), the base member E6130 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E6133 formed between the opposing curved portions E131, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the opposing first inclined surfaces E6133, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the opposing mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E6130, and a plate-shaped back panel E6137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 138).

The first slope portion E6133 is a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long and generally rectangular shape when viewed from above, and the end portion on the curved portion E131 side is located at a position vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) at a predetermined interval from the lower surface of the curved portion E131. will be placed. Further, the first slope portion E6133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first slope portion E6133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restriction portion E133b (see FIGS. 145(b) and 146(b)), a groove portion E133c, and a protruding portion E6133d.

The protrusion E6133d is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the first inclined surface E6133 on the curved portion E131 side of the base member E6130 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

The first inclined surface portion E6133 is provided with a plurality of cylindrical bodies E6201 (four in this embodiment) for displacing the sorting passage E6150, and a cover E6202.

The cylindrical body E6201 is formed in the same shape as the cylindrical body E201 in the sixteenth embodiment except that the outer shape is larger. As a result, the distribution passage E6150 is arranged above (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the distribution passage E150 in the sixteenth embodiment.

Since the outer shape of the cylindrical body E6201 is made larger, the cover E6202 has a hole drilled in the position corresponding to the cylindrical body E6201 that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E6201.

A pair of cylindrical bodies E6201 arranged on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) are arranged on the first slope part E6133, whereas in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) A pair of cylindrical bodies E6201 arranged on the side of the curved part E131 are arranged on the protruding part E6133d. Thereby, the inclination angle of the distribution passageway E6150 can be made different from the inclination angle of the first slope portion E6133, in particular, it can be made larger. As a result, the displacement (reciprocation) of the distribution passageway E6150 can be made non-parallel to the first slope portion E6133.

The rear plate E6137 has a distribution passage E6150 arranged above the distribution passage E150 in the sixteenth embodiment (in the direction of arrow U). It is formed to extend upward (in the direction of arrow U).

The sorting passage E6150 has a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided parts E6152 erected from the lower surface of the sorting passage E6150, and an engaged part E6153 erected between the pair of guided parts E6152.

As described above, since the arrangement position of the sorting path E6150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the arrangement position of the sorting path E150 in the 16th embodiment, the guided portion E6152 and the engaged portion E6153 are formed by extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) relative to the guided portion E152 and the engaged portion E153 in the 16th embodiment. Since the engaged portion E6153 is formed by extending downward, the engaging recess E6153a is also formed by extending downward, similar to the engaged portion E6153.

This prevents the guided portion E6152 from slipping out of the groove portion E133c of the first inclined surface portion E7133, and restricts the displacement of the distribution passage E6150 in the front-rear direction relative to the base member E6130. It also prevents the engagement recess E153a from coming into contact with the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194.

Next, lower frames E7086b and E8086b in the twenty-second and twenty-third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 157(b) and 157(c).

In the above 16th embodiment, a case was described in which a pair of sorting passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) along (parallel to) the first inclined surface portion E133 of the base member E130, but in the 22nd and 23rd embodiments, the arrangement angle of the sorting passages E7150, E8150 changes (is altered) as the sorting passages E7150, E8150 are displaced. Note that the same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 157(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E7086b in the 22nd embodiment, and Figure 157(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E8086b in the 23rd embodiment. Figures 157(b) and 157(c) correspond to the cross section taken along line CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa in Figure 146. Also, since the lower frames E7086b, E8086b are formed with linear (planar) symmetry (left-right symmetry in Figure 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 135) of the game board E13, only one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) is shown.

The lower frames E7086b and E8086b in the 22nd and 23rd embodiments are formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 16th embodiment, except for the base member E130 and distribution passage E150. , only the base members E7130, E8130 and the distribution passages E7150, E8150 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the base member E7130 in the twenty-second embodiment is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction). , a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, a pair of first slope portions E7133 formed between the pair of opposing curved portions E131, and a pair of first slope portions E7133 of the pair of first slope portions E7133. A pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the opposing mounting portions, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, and a pair of plate-shaped projecting portions erected from the front of the base member E7130. E136, and a plate-shaped back plate E7137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 138).

The first inclined surface portion E7133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E7133 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E7133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 145(b) and 146(b)), and a groove portion E133c.

The first inclined surface portion E7133 is provided with a plurality of (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E7201a and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E7201b for displacing the sorting passage E150, as well as a cover E7202.

The cylinders E7201a are disposed at the same position in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) and are disposed on the central passage E160 side of the first inclined surface portion E7133. The cylinders E7201a are formed in the same shape as the cylinders E201 in the 16th embodiment, except that their outer dimensions are larger than those of the cylinders E201 in the 16th embodiment. As a result, the distribution passage E6150 is disposed above (arrow U direction) the distribution passage E150 in the 16th embodiment.

The cylindrical bodies E7201b are arranged at the same position in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and are arranged on the curved part E131 side of the first slope part E7133. Note that the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201b is formed larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a. As a result, the distribution passage E7150 is arranged above (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the distribution passage E150 in the sixteenth embodiment. Further, the inclination angle of the distribution passageway E7150 can be made different from the inclination angle of the first slope portion E7133, in particular, it can be made larger. As a result, the displacement (reciprocation) of the distribution passage E7150 can be made non-parallel to the first slope portion E7133.

The cover E7202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical bodies E7201a, 7201b at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E7201a, 7201b, since the outer shape of the cylindrical bodies E7201a, 7201b is large.

The rear plate E7137 has a distribution passage E7150 arranged above the distribution passage E150 in the sixteenth embodiment (in the direction of arrow U). It is formed to extend upward (in the direction of arrow U).

The sorting passage E7150 has a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided parts E7152 erected from the lower surface of the sorting passage E7150, an engaged part E7153 erected between the pair of guided parts E7152, and a sloped part E7154 formed on the lower surface of the sorting passage E7150 on the curved part E131 side.

As described above, since the distribution passage E7150 is arranged above (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the distribution passage E150 in the sixteenth embodiment, the guided portion in the sixteenth embodiment The guided portion E7152 and the engaged portion E7153 are formed to extend downward (in the direction of arrow D) with respect to the guided portion E152 and the engaged portion E153. Since the engaged portion E7153 is formed to extend downward, the engaging recess E7153a is also formed to extend downward similarly to the engaged portion E7153.

This prevents the guided portion E7152 from slipping out of the groove portion E133c of the first inclined surface portion E7133, and restricts the displacement of the distribution passage E7150 in the front-rear direction relative to the base member E7130. It also prevents the engagement recess E7153a from coming into contact with the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194.

The sloped surface E7154 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 side toward the central passage E160 side, and the cylindrical body 7201b abuts against the sloped surface E7154. Therefore, the inclination angle of the distribution passage E7150 increases as it moves from the first position to the second position. In other words, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E7150 can be changed (modified). This allows the change (modification) of the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls to be diversified, and prevents the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls from becoming monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 157(c), the base member E8130 in the 23rd embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E8133 formed between the opposing curved portions E131, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the opposing first inclined surfaces E8133, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the opposing mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E8130, and a plate-shaped back panel E8137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 138).

The first inclined surface portion E8133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E8133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E8133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 145(b) and 146(b)), a groove portion E133c, and a curved guide portion E8133d.

The first inclined surface portion E8133 is provided with multiple (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies 7201a for displacing the sorting passage E8150, and a cover E8202.

Since the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a is large, the cover E8202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E7201a.

The curved guide portion E8133d is a portion for changing (altering) the inclination angle of the sorting passage E8150, and is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the curved guide portion E8133d on the curved portion E131 side of the first inclined surface portion E8133, and its upper surface is curved in an arc shape that is concave downward (in the direction of arrow D).

The end of the distribution path E8150 on the curved portion E131 side is abutted against the arc-shaped curved surface of the curved guide portion E8133d, and supports (holds) the distribution path E8150 together with the cylindrical body E7201a. As the distribution path E8150 moves from the first position to the second position, the end of the curved portion E131 side is displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) along the curved surface of the curved guide portion E8133d. This allows the inclination angle of the distribution path E8150 to be increased. That is, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution path E8150 can be changed (changed). This allows the change (change) in the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls to be diversified, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls can be prevented from becoming monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The rear plate E8137 is formed to extend upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the rear plate E137 in the 16th embodiment, since the arrangement position of the sorting passage E8150 is arranged upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the arrangement position of the sorting passage E150 in the 16th embodiment.

The distribution passageway E8150 is erected between a plurality of projections E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided parts E8152 erected from the lower surface of the distribution passageway E8150, and the pair of guided parts E8152. and an engaged portion E8153.

As described above, since the distribution passage E8150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the distribution passage E150 in the sixteenth embodiment, the guided portion in the sixteenth embodiment The guided portion E8152 and the engaged portion E8153 are formed to extend downward (in the direction of arrow D) with respect to the guided portion E152 and the engaged portion E153. Since the engaged portion E8153 is formed to extend downward, the engaging recess E8153a is also formed to extend downward like the engaged portion E8153.

This suppresses the guided portion E8152 from coming out of the groove portion E133c of the first slope portion E8133, and restricts the displacement of the distribution passage E8150 in the front-back direction with respect to the base member E8130. Further, it is possible to suppress the engagement recess E8153a and the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 from coming into contact with each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, lower frames E9086b and E10086b in the twenty-fourth embodiment and the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described.

In the sixteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (parallel) (reciprocated) along the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the base member E130, but in the twenty-fourth embodiment In this embodiment and the twenty-fifth embodiment, the distribution passageway E150 is displaced (reciprocated) in a non-parallel manner in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the base members E9130, E10130. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 158(a) is a partial top view of the lower frame E9086b in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 158(b) is a partial top view of the lower frame E10086b in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that in FIG. 158, illustration of the distribution path E150 is omitted for easy understanding. In addition, since the lower frames E9086b and E10086b are formed line (plane) symmetrical (left-right symmetrical in FIG. 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 135) of the game board E13, ) are shown.

The lower frames E9086b and E10086b in the 24th embodiment and the 25th embodiment are formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 16th embodiment except for the base member E130, so the base member E9130, Only E10130 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 158(a), the base member E9130 in the twenty-fourth embodiment is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction). , a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, a pair of first slope portions E9133 formed between the pair of opposing curved portions E131, and a pair of first slope portions E9133 of the pair of first slope portions E9133. A pair of mounting parts E134 formed between opposing mounting parts, a second slope part E135 formed between the pair of mounting parts E134 facing each other, and a pair of plate-shaped projecting parts erected from the front of the base member E9130. E136, and a plate-shaped back plate E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved parts E131 (see FIG. 138).

The first inclined surface portion E9133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E9133 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E9133 is formed with an insertion hole E9133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 145(b) and 146(b)), and a groove portion E9133c.

The first inclined surface portion E9133 is provided with multiple (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the sorting passage E150, and a cover E9202.

The cylinder E201 is disposed along (parallel to) the groove E9133c, and the cover E9202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylinder E201 drilled at a position corresponding to the cylinder E201, and a hole roughly the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion hole E9133a drilled at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E9133a.

A pair of grooves E9133c are formed on both the left and right sides (arrows L-R) of the insertion hole E9133a.

The insertion hole E9133a and the pair of grooves E9133c extend non-parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E9130. More specifically, they extend at an angle forward (arrow F direction) from the curved portion E131 side toward the central passage E160 side. Therefore, the distribution passage E150 (see FIG. 140) is displaced along (parallel to) the extension direction of the grooves E9133c.

That is, when the distribution passage E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the distribution passage E150 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, and is also displaced to the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). . As a result, the protrusion E151 (see FIG. 140) of the distribution passage E150 can be easily brought into contact with the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150, and the ball The direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) can be easily changed (changed) to the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). As a result, it becomes difficult for the ball to be thrown to the intervening member E140 (sixth path ERt6).

On the other hand, when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 and is also displaced forward (in the direction of arrow F). This makes it easier to abut the protrusion E151 of the sorting passage E150 against the rear side (in the direction of arrow B) of a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, making it easier to change (alter) the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball to the forward side (in the direction of arrow F). As a result, it becomes easier to send the ball to the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6).

Note that since the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 is inserted into and engaged with the engagement recess E153a (see FIG. 145(a)), the first transmission member E194 is moved in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Even when the distribution passage E150 is displaced (reciprocating) in a non-parallel manner with respect to the displacement (reciprocating movement) of can be maintained.

In this way, the direction in which the balls tend to move (flow down, roll) can be changed (modified) when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position and when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, making it possible to diversify the change (change) in the direction in which the balls move (flow down, roll).

As shown in FIG. 158(b), the base member E10130 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction). , a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, a pair of first slope portions E10133 formed between the pair of opposing curved portions E131, and a pair of first slope portions E10133 of the pair of first slope portions E10133. A pair of mounting portions E134 formed between opposing mounting portions, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, and a pair of plate-shaped overhang portions erected from the front of the base member E10130. E136, and a plate-shaped back plate E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved parts E131 (see FIG. 138).

The first inclined surface portion E10133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E10133 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E10133 is formed with an insertion hole E10133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 145(b) and 146(b)), and a groove portion E10133c.

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the distribution passage E150 and a cover E10202 are disposed on the first slope portion E10133.

The cover E10202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E201 at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201, and a hole approximately the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion hole E10133a at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E10133a.

The insertion hole E10133a is formed with a larger width (opening) in the front-rear direction than the insertion hole E133a in the 16th embodiment. This makes it possible to prevent the insertion hole E10133a from coming into contact with the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 145(a)) even when the sorting passage E150 (see FIG. 140) displaces (reciprocates) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) and also displaces (reciprocates) in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The groove portion E10133c is formed in a shape in which curves are combined when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the first inclined surface portion E10133. In addition, a pair of groove portions E10133c are formed on both sides of the insertion hole E10133a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the sorting passage E150 to be displaced in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) and in the front-back direction (arrow F-B direction) when the sorting passage E150 displaces from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position. As a result, the sorting passage E150 can be displaced forward (arrow F direction) and backward (arrow B direction) in the process of displacing from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position, and the number of changes (changes) in the direction in which the balls are likely to move (flow down, roll) can be increased.

Note that since the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 is inserted into and engaged with the engagement recess E153a (see FIG. 145(a)), the first transmission member E194 is moved in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Even when the distribution passage E150 is displaced (reciprocating) in a non-parallel manner with respect to the displacement (reciprocating movement) of can be maintained.

Next, referring to Figures 159(a) and 148, the distribution passage E11150 in the 26th embodiment will be described.

In the above 17th embodiment, the sorting passage E2150 rotates around the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) relative to the flat surface E2133 as the rotation axis. In the 26th embodiment, however, the sorting passage E11150 rotates around the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) relative to the flat surface E2133 as the rotation axis. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 159 (a) is a front perspective view of the sorting passage E11150 in the 26th embodiment. The sorting passage E11150 is formed in the same manner as the sorting passage E2150 in the 17th embodiment, except for the number and positions of the support parts E2150b of the sorting passage E2150, so a description of parts other than the support parts E11150b of the sorting passage E11150 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the support portion E11150b of the sorting passage E11150 is formed to protrude from the underside of the sorting passage E11150 on the central passage E160 side toward the central passage E160 side. The support portion E11150b is disposed approximately in the center of the sorting passage E11150 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The support portion E11150b has an insertion hole substantially the same as the insertion hole drilled in the support portion E2150b, i.e., an insertion hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the support shaft E20j, drilled in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the support portion E11150b.

As a result, in the lower frame E11086b in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the distribution passage E11150 can be rotated with respect to the flat portion E2133 using the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) as the rotation axis. Specifically, the curved portion E131 side of the distribution passage E11150 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) using the axis of the insertion hole bored in the support portion E11150b as the rotation axis. Thereby, a velocity component in the front-rear direction can be imparted to the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface E2151 of the distribution path E11150, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be diversified. As a result, it is possible to suppress monotonous changes in the direction of movement (flowing, rolling) of the ball, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, distribution paths E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 in the 27th to 30th embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 159(b) to 159(e). Note that the 27th to 30th embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 136 as appropriate.

In the above 16th embodiment, the protrusion E151 is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E150. However, in the 27th to 30th embodiments, the protrusions E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 of the sorting passages E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 are formed in various shapes. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 159(b) is a diagram of the distribution path E12150 in the twenty-seventh embodiment when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the distribution path E12150, and FIG. 159(c) is a diagram of the distribution path E13150 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 159(d) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the distribution path E12150 in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. 159(e) is a view in a direction perpendicular to the path E13150. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of passage E13150. Note that FIGS. 159(d) and 159(e) correspond to the cross section taken along the CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa line in FIG. 146. Furthermore, since the protrusions E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are regularly arranged on the upper surfaces of the distribution passages E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, only a portion thereof is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 159(b), the projection E12151 of the distribution passage E12150 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is formed to protrude spherically from the upper surface of the distribution passage E12150. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E12150 can be moved (flowing down, rolling) along the outer surface of the projection E12151, and the ball is displaced (flowing down, rolling) toward the upward side in the inclination direction. (backflow, rolling) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily see how the direction of movement (flowing, rolling) of the ball is changed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The distance between the protrusions E12151 facing each other is formed to be greater than the diameter of the sphere. This prevents the sphere from remaining in the sorting passage E12150, and allows it to move (flow down, roll) along (parallel to) the inclination direction of the sorting passage E12150 from the end of the sorting passage E12150 on the curved section E131 side toward the end of the central passage E160 side. As a result, in order to prevent the sphere from remaining in the sorting passage E12150, it is possible to prevent the sorting passage E12150 from being displaced along a complex trajectory or with a large displacement amount or displacement speed, and the driving means E190 can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 159(c), the projection E13151 of the distribution passage E13150 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is protruded from the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150, and has a substantially rhombic (quadrangular) shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passage E13150. formed into a shape. Further, the protrusion E13151 is formed in a manner in which a portion of the apex side of a quadrangular pyramid is cut off, similar to the protrusion E151 in the sixteenth embodiment. In other words, the cross-sectional area in a plane parallel to the distribution passageway E13150 becomes smaller as the distance from the upper surface of the distribution passageway E13150 increases.

This makes it possible to omit the straight line portion formed along (parallel to) the inclination direction relative to the protrusion E151 in the 16th embodiment, thereby reducing the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball in the inclination direction on the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150. In other words, it is possible to increase the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball in a direction perpendicular to the inclination direction on the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of times the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed (changed) before it is guided to either the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in FIG. 159(d), the projection E14151 of the distribution passage E14150 in the twenty-ninth embodiment is formed to protrude conically from the upper surface of the distribution passage E14150. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution path E14150 can be moved (flowing down, rolling) along the outer surface of the protrusion E14151, and the ball can also move over the protrusion E14151. Movement (flowing down, rolling) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily see how the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball is changed, and it is possible to prevent the change in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball due to the protrusion E14151 from becoming monotonous. It can be suppressed and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 159(e), the side surface of the projection E15151 of the distribution passage E15150 in the 30th embodiment is recessed toward the center of the projection E15151. Thereby, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E15150 can easily overcome the protrusion E15151, and the directions of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be varied. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the lower frame E16086b in the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160(a).

In the 19th embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the protrusion E151 is formed on the upper surface of the second distribution passage E4150 and the direction of flow (rolling) of the ball is changed (changed), but in the 31st embodiment, A ball is flown (rolled) toward a specific location. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 160(a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame E16086b in the 31st embodiment. Note that Figure 160(a) illustrates the state in which the sorting passage E150 is placed in the second position.

The lower frame E16086b in the 31st embodiment is formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E4086b in the 19th embodiment, except for the second distribution passage E4150, so only the second distribution passage E16150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 160(a), the second sorting passage E16150 is arranged parallel to the sorting passage E150 in a front view, that is, the second sorting passage E16150 is arranged at a downward incline from the wall plate E132 toward the mounting portion E134 (see FIG. 152(a)). The second sorting passage E16150 is formed as a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the second sorting passage E16150, and the length in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the front-rear direction of the sorting passage E150 on the central passage E160 side. As a result, when the sorting passage E150 is arranged in the second position, balls passing through the end of the sorting passage E150 on the central passage E160 side can be sent (guided) to the second sorting passage E16150. In other words, it is possible to prevent balls that flow down from the end of the sorting passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (the side in the direction of arrow F) or from the cutout portion E150a of the sorting passage E150 from being sent (guided) to the second sorting passage E16150.

A guide portion E16154 is erected on the outer edge of the second distribution passage E16150, and a guide notch E16154a is formed in the guide portion E16154 on the central passage E160 side. The guide notch E16154a is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed at a position corresponding to the central passage E160 (construction passage E161) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the ball that has passed through the guide notch E16154a of the second distribution passage E16150 (has crossed the second distribution passage E16150 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) is transferred to the center passage E160 (construction passage E161). The ball can be thrown (guided, dropped) to the fourth path ERt4).

In addition, the guide section E16154 can prevent balls sent (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150 from being sent (guided, falling) from anywhere other than the guide cutout section E16154a, so that the balls can be sent (guided, falling) more reliably to the central passage E160 (the erected passage E161, the fourth passage ERt4). This makes it easier for balls to enter the first winning opening 64 in the second distribution passage E16150 (increasing the probability of winning in the first winning opening 64) than in the distribution passage E150.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position, that is, in a state where the ball can be thrown (guided) from the distribution passage E150 to the second distribution passage E16150, the distribution passage E150 It is possible to make it easier for the ball passing through the end on the central passage E160 side to enter the first prize opening 64 (increase the probability of winning the first prize opening 64), thereby increasing the interest of the game (see FIG. 135). .

On the other hand, the ball flowing down from the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (arrow F direction side) or the notch E150a of the distribution passage E150 is thrown (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. can be suppressed. This allows the player to expect the ball to pass through the end of the distribution path E150 on the central path E160 side.

In addition, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged in the first position, it is possible to prevent balls flowing down from the end of the distribution passage E150 from being sent (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. This allows the player to expect that the ball will pass through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the central passage E160 side when the distribution passage E150 is arranged in the second position. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest of the game.

Next, the lower frame E17086b in the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160(b).

In the 20th embodiment, a protrusion E151 is formed on the top surface of the third sorting passage E5150, and the direction in which the balls flow (roll) is changed (altered). In the 32nd embodiment, the balls flow (roll) toward a specific position. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description is omitted.

FIG. 160(b) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame E17086b in the 32nd embodiment. Note that FIG. 160(b) shows a state in which the distribution passageway E150 is arranged at the first position.

The lower frame E17086b in the 32nd embodiment is formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E5086b in the 20th embodiment, except for the third distribution passage E5150, so only the third distribution passage E17150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 160(b), the third distribution path E17150 extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a substantially linear path when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is curved into an arc that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction). The third distribution path E17150 is also disposed with a downward incline from the rear panel E5137 side (arrow B direction) to the interposed member E140 side (arrow F direction).

A guide portion E17154 is erected on the outer edge of the third distribution passage E17150, and a guide cutout portion E17154a is formed in the guide portion E17154 by cutting out the guide portion E17154 on the side of the intermediate member E140 (the side in the direction of the arrow F). The guide cutout portion E17154a is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, and is formed at a position corresponding to the upper hole E162 of the central passage E160 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This allows the ball that has passed through the guide cutout portion E17154a (having crossed the second distribution passage E16150 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction)) to be sent (guided, dropped) to the upper hole E162 (fourth passage ERt4) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

In addition, the guide portion E17154 can prevent the ball thrown (guided) to the third distribution path E17150 from being thrown (guided, dropped) from other than the guide notch E17154a, and more reliably The ball can be thrown (guided, dropped) to the passageway ERt4) or the central passageway E135b (seventh passageway ERt7). Thereby, the third distribution path E17150 can make it easier to win a ball into the first prize opening 64 (higher the probability of winning a prize in the first prize opening 64) than the distribution path E150.

In this way, in this embodiment, the ball passes through the end of the distribution path E150 on the center path E160 side and is thrown (guided) to the center path E160 (fourth path ERt4) or the third distribution path E17150. It is possible to easily win the ball into the first winning hole 64 (higher probability of winning into the first winning hole 64), and the interest in the game can be increased (see FIG. 135).

In addition, when the distribution passage E150 is placed in the first position, the ball can be thrown (guided) from the third distribution passage E17150 to the upper hole E162 (fourth passage ERt4), and the distribution passage E150 is placed in the first position. In the arranged state, the ball can be thrown (guided) from the third distribution path E17150 to the center path E135b (seventh path ERt7). That is, even when the distribution path E150 is placed in either the first position or the second position, it is possible to easily win the ball into the first winning hole 64 (higher the probability of winning into the first winning hole 64).

On the other hand, balls that have passed through the end of the distribution path E150 on the central path E160 side but have not been sent (guided) to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) or the third distribution path E17150, i.e., balls that have been sent (guided) to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth path ERt5), are less likely to enter the first winning hole 64 (lowering the probability of entering the first winning hole 64). This allows the player to expect that the ball will pass through the end of the distribution path E150 on the central path E160 side, as well as be sent (guided) to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) or the third distribution path E17150. As a result, the gameplay can be diversified and the interest of the game can be increased.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment. The same applies to the modified examples (separate embodiments) shown below, in which a part or all of the configuration in one modified example is combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another modified example, and a different embodiment is created. It is also possible to use a modified example. The embodiments to which the modifications shown below are applied are arbitrary, and any modification (combination or replacement of modifications) may be applied to any embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the balls are first caused to flow toward the front by the sorting device 300, and then flow backwards, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to ensure the time required for the balls to flow downward by forming multiple bends in the path or a deceleration protrusion that decelerates the balls, without forming a portion that causes the balls to flow toward the front.

In the above first embodiment, the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 is described as being curved, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any shape can be used as long as it can block the flow of balls by contact. For example, it may be configured as an inclined flat surface, or may be formed with many small protrusions protruding from a flat surface, so that an irregular load is applied to the colliding ball.

In the first embodiment described above, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down the distribution device 300, the case is explained in which the ball flows down exclusively through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left and right center portions of the specific prize opening 65a, and the ball may be formed to be able to directly flow into the third flow path forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one at a time, they do not pass through the opening, but when multiple balls enter the specific winning opening 65a together, the balls may be configured to pass through the opening. In this case, the time it takes for the balls to reach the sliding displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a pass through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. In other words, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left and right directions, or the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the front and back directions (flowing down toward the front side).

In the first embodiment described above, the channel directions and inclinations of the flow channel components 334 to 336 have been described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to these. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of "laying down" that is routinely performed.

"Laying down" refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 in a tilted position in the front-to-rear direction, rather than in a vertical position. Normally, pachinko machines are installed in a position (laying down) tilted backwards by about 1 degree (four-five rin). Compared to the explanation of the sorting device 300 alone (not laying down) above, when considering an installation angle of about 1 degree, the meaning of the inclination of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 336, which have a tilt in the front-to-rear direction, changes.

That is, in the sorting device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is tilted downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is downwardly inclined by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although they are designed to be inclined, when considering the installation angle, both the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path that slopes downward by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is not easily affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the balls flowing down through the sorting device 300 is the same in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336, and the acceleration is slightly smaller in the second flow path component 335. This allows the speed at which the balls flow down in the left and right directions to be slowed down, making it easier for the player to see the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. Also, since the first flow path component 334 remains shorter than the third flow path component 336, the balls can pass through the first flow path component 334 in a shorter time than they pass through the third flow path component 336.

In this way, the flow of balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the rest of the Pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path forming part 334, 336 is made smaller than the angle of bending (approximately 1 degree), the direction of flow of the ball in the flow path forming parts 334, 336 will change depending on the quality of bending (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the tilt angle to be larger than the tilt angle.

In addition, if the flow path inside the sorting device 300 is configured to allow the balls to flow in the forward and backward directions and is visible, it may be possible to determine the degree of tilt of the pachinko machine 10 from slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the path. If it is desired to allow the degree of tilt to be determined, the sorting device 300 should be configured so that the flow path is easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member are arranged around the front side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 so that the degree of "staleness" cannot be ascertained from the slight difference in the velocity of the ball. 162 are arranged so as to surround it, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is arranged on the lower side to reduce visibility.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is made poor except from the normal player's line of sight (in the range of about 0 degrees to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). Thereby, it is possible to avoid comparing the flow speeds of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 to determine the degree of "slumber" of the Pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path component 336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the relationship of the inclinations may be reversed, or the inclinations may be the same.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape or may have a stepwise bent flow path shape.

Furthermore, although the flow path is configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or may be bent at an obtuse angle at the connection point. Additionally, crunes may be employed as each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336.

Although the first embodiment described above is designed such that the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming section 336 is 0.3 seconds, the design is not limited to this. For example, it may be designed such that the time required to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even if the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 is transferred to the ball on the downstream side. In this case, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be made to function as a blindfold for the balls flowing down.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, protrusions are provided that are elongated and protrude alternately from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting the downward direction of the game ball, and the protrusions collide with the game balls. It may also be configured to slow down the ball. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the time for the ball to flow down without increasing the path length.

Note that the deceleration protrusions may be arranged evenly over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be arranged unevenly. For example, by forming a protrusion only in the third flow path configuration part 336 without forming a protrusion in the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 335, the third flow path configuration part 336 It is possible to configure the ball to flow slowly down the third flow path forming part 336 while allowing the ball to reach the point quickly.

Further, the direction in which the protrusions are provided may be such that they are protruded alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the ball's downward path, or they may be protruded from the bottom to the top at a predetermined interval. You can also go in that direction.

In the case of a protrusion from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the ball is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer walls toward the left and right inner sides, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side but toward the partition plate section 338 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of protruding upward from the bottom, the protrusion itself may function as a cover for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the height and position of the protrusion in consideration of the player's line of sight. .

The protrusions may be formed so that they can move in and out. In this case, they may be able to block the flow of the ball when in the protruding state, and resume the flow of the ball when in the retracted state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the slide displacement member 370 is covered by the balls flowing down the front side is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be covered by this decorative member. This decorative member may be driven, or may be operated by the weight of the balls.

In addition, the case where the ball provides a screen is not limited to the case where the ball is placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is placed on the back side of the sliding displacement member 370 and the state of the sliding displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the screen function can be achieved by placing the ball between the sliding displacement member 370 and the mirror.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be placed behind the gaming area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning hole 63 may be blindfolded. Anything is fine.

In the above first embodiment, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are described as being formed from linear flow paths capable of guiding balls one by one, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed as meandering flow paths, or flow paths that branch into multiple paths, or they may be configured to have different flow path widths, with balls more likely to remain in the areas where the flow path width is large.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a blindfolding effect is created by the balls heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, and 140 may be arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect at the front side), and the slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by the discharge path and the balls arranged on the discharge path.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a exclusively passes through the first flow path configuration section 334 and flows to the second flow path configuration section 335 side (near side). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-like distribution mechanism that distributes the balls is disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing toward the second flow path configuration part 335, so that some of the balls are sorted. The balls may flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device so as to operate in a constant manner from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a constant pattern from the power on of the Pachinko machine. It may be controlled as follows.

When controlling the drive, for example, the balls may be controlled to flow to the second flow path component 335 side when the type of winning ball changes. For example, when a ball enters a specific winning port 65a and the number of balls that enter exceeds the count number (10 balls/round) (excess winning), the balls may be configured to flow to the second flow path component 335 side. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 side can be compared with the number of excess winning balls paid out, allowing the player to quickly grasp the additional profit that can be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

For example, in a configuration where the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 flows down the sorting device 300, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full) and the ball enters, The ball may be configured to flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. In this case, the player can be made aware that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is full by visually recognizing the balls flowing on the second channel forming part 335 side. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

If the displacement is caused by the weight of the ball, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or it may be configured to perform a different action depending on the number of arriving balls. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the balls may not flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning openings 65a together, the balls may flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335. The reverse may also be possible.

Further, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right sides.

Here, if the time for the ball to flow down from the specific prize opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the game may be delayed due to the long ball ejection time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-mentioned distribution mechanism, a certain number of balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a are allowed to flow down to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and subsequent balls are The liquid may be discharged without passing through the flow path forming section 335. Thereby, there is no need to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is disposed below the third pattern display device 81, and the balls are directed toward the front near the bottom end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the specific winning port 65a may be disposed above the bottom edge of the third pattern display device 81, and the flow path components 334-336 of the distribution device 300 may be disposed adjacent to the third pattern display device 81 or toward the front of the display area when viewed from the front.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be made to be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player obtains from the falling ball on the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can check the display to determine whether the profit is large or small. You can easily check whether you have earned it or not.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the ball rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 may be arranged in such a manner that the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336 is not vertically displaced when viewed from the front and can be visually recognized as overlapping the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336. Also good. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300 but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path forming section 336.

In the above first embodiment, the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370 is described as switching the slide displacement member 370 to the front position at a time when the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to switch to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be caused to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows to follow the leading ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed enters the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

If the trailing ball is positioned to blind the forward flow ball, the player will not be able to see when the forward flow ball's flow changes (downward) toward the special chance detection sensor SE11, because the trailing ball will hide it. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player is likely to believe that the ball has not entered the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, which improves the presentation effect of the display in gaming machines that maintain the player's sense of anticipation by displaying the time-saving state and the probability variation state in the same way.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 may be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, The degree of freedom in the downward direction of the ball is increased by arranging a It may be configured so that it can be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the slide displacement member 370 and each of the protrusions 317 to 319 are formed separately, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protrusions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the respective protrusions 317 to 319 may be configured to protrude from the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as operation pattern Y, which takes into account the possibility of being hidden by the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to incorporate control that causes the LED of the light-emitting means 351 to emit light when it is hidden by the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width length of the guide slot 616 to form an external phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using magnetic force or the biasing force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is configured to have a shape that is bent at an intermediate position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slot may be configured to have a shape that is bent multiple times. In this case, multiple positions can be formed where the resistance to the vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ while the rotating member 620 is rotating. For example, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed in a shape that allows the supported member 640 to be guided so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is fixed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 may be formed through which the axis O1 can move, and the guide slot 616 through which the axis O1 is guided may be switched by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620), or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be shape-changeable.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration was described in which the first performance surface 661a faces diagonally forward and left when the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and right when positioned to the left of the third pattern display device 81, or the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and upward (downward) when positioned below (upper) the third pattern display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal side of the displacement, but the structure is not limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the linearly moving member functions favorably to ensure the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a horizontally sliding member is fixed to the active side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.) limited to. On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Note that, irrespective of this favorable effect, a linear sliding member may be connected to the active side of the supported member 640.

In the above first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and decorations are applied to three sides that intersect at right angles, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and each side may be configured to be controlled to stop in a position facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display that can be easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the rotation member 620 and the second decorative rotation member 660 can intersect at right angles, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with the front-rear component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the second operating unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is disposed near the elongated hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet is configured to generate an attractive force with a magnet disposed on the right front plate member 710, and this attractive force It may be arranged so that this is more likely to occur in the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700.

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, when using the coil spring CS2, the biasing force is not limited to one that is generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, but may be configured so that the biasing force is generated in response to the expansion displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the above first embodiment, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed to maintain the position of the shaft rotating member 785 until the attractive force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support tube that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the gaming area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode may be adopted in which it protrudes to the front side by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be crossed from below to the front, or the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be extended forward from above the gaming area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction so that the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized together, thereby reducing the discriminating ability. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, instead of a mode in which the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 rotate while facing the front side, it may be a mode in which they rotate while facing left and right outwards. Further, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the first embodiment described above, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 are configured to rotate (reverse) the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member 834 using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 and a protruding piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotation timing of the rotating member 834 can be determined depending on the design of the groove.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation when the output of the detection sensor 813 changes from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is reversed with the detectable portion 844 not arranged on the detection sensor 813, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detectable portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are different in some places, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870, 880, or both decorative members 870, 880 may be plated.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by providing a torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. Note that in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to be generated at all times regardless of switching of the operating mode, so a torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operating mode is switched to the integral rotation operation, making it easier to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to the integral rotation operation.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. However, when the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation, the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 is exposed, so that the light LD1 can be reflected.

In the second to seventh embodiments, the balls roll in series on the bottom portions C142, C2142 of the first intermediate members C140, C2140, and the distribution members C170, C2170, C3170 (the receiving portions C172, C2172, C3172 or Although we have explained the case where only one ball flows into the moving parts C173, C2173, C3173) at the same time, two or more balls can roll in parallel on the bottom parts C142, C2142 of the first intermediate members C140, C2140, and the distribution A configuration may be adopted in which two or more balls are simultaneously introduced into the members C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portions C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portions C173, C2173, C3173).

In the second to seventh embodiments described above, the ball flowing down the area on the left side (left side in FIG. 72) of the game area when viewed from the front (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61) is The case where the ball flows into (enters) the side frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b has been described, but instead of or in addition to this, the ball flows down the area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 72) of the gaming area. A configuration may also be adopted in which a ball that is played flows into (enters into) the lower frame C86b, C2086b, or C3086b.

In the second to seventh embodiments described above, a case has been described in which one upper frame passage CRt0 is communicated with the intake ports COPin and COP2000in, but a plurality of upper frame passages CRt0 are formed in the upper frame C86b, and they are connected to each other. It may be configured to communicate with the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in.

In the second to seventh embodiments, the case where the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 return to the first position by their own weight has been described. However, a biasing means may be provided, and the biasing force of the biasing means may be applied as an auxiliary force when the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 return to the first position. Alternatively, the biasing force may be applied as an auxiliary force when the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 are displaced to the second position. Examples of the biasing means include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a leaf spring.

In the second and third embodiments described above, the distribution members C170, C2170 are directly supported on the shafts C192, C2174, but the distribution members C170, C2170 may be displaceable by a link mechanism. In this case, the link mechanism may be a parallel link mechanism or an unequal length link mechanism.

In the third embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the passage (fourth passage CRt2004) through which the balls that have rolled on the rolling part C2173 of the distribution member C2170 passes is formed by the magnetic part C2400, but it is similar to other passages. In addition, a fourth passage CRt2004 may be formed as a passage through which the balls roll along the rolling surface and pass (flow down).

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the guide groove C3131c is formed in a straight line, but it may be formed in a curved line. Further, the shape may be a combination of straight lines and curved lines.

In the fifth embodiment, the arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom portion C4122 is formed to have a uniform arc shape (same curvature) when viewed from above, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It may also be formed by combining circular arc shapes with different radii. For example, the curvature of the arc at one end and the other end in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the arc portion C4122b is the same as the curvature of the arc in the region between the one end and the other end (the region including the outflow surface C122a). In other words, the curvature of the arc in the area including the outflow surface C122a may be made smaller than the curvature. In this case, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof), it is made easier to reciprocate the ball, and the ball following the preceding ball is At the stage when the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball has become low (the ball does not reach one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a In the stage where the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the ball, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

In the fifth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom portion C4122 in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is approximately horizontal in the arcuate portion C4122b. In other words, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the circular arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction. It may be curved into a circular arc shape that is convex in the direction (direction). Alternatively, it may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane similar to the pair of linear portions C4122a, or may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane different from the pair of linear portions C4122a. As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof), it is easy to reciprocate the ball, and the ball that follows the preceding ball At the stage when the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball has become low (the ball does not reach one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a In the stage where the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the ball, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

In the above fifth embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (straight line portion C4122a and arc portion C4122b) may be formed to slope downward in a direction away from the cutout portion C124a (the direction of arrow L). This allows the ball to roll (reciprocate) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) while being pressed against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a.

In the second, third, and fifth embodiments described above, a protrusion may be provided around the outflow surface C122a to protrude vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from rolling from the outflow surface C122a to both ends in the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portions C122, C2122, and C4122, and it is possible to easily cause the ball to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). .

In the sixth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 is described as being linear in the width direction (arrow F-B direction), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 may be curved in an arc shape. If the arc shape has a radius that is approximately the same as the radius of the ball and is convex toward the vertical upward direction (arrow U direction), the contact area between the ball and the magnetic part C5400 can be increased, and the ball can be prevented from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C5400. On the other hand, if the arc shape is convex toward the vertical downward direction (arrow D direction), the ball can be made to sway as it flows down, and the possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. As a result, the player can be drawn to the behavior of the ball, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In the seventh embodiment, the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (that is, a surface that approaches the back member C2130 as it goes upward in the vertical direction). The present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed as an inclined surface facing away from the back member C2130 (that is, a surface that is further away from the back member C2130 as it goes upward in the vertical direction). Thereby, the ball attracted to the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130 can be arranged in a position where they are separated from each other, and it is possible to suppress the ball flowing down along the magnetic part C6400 from coming into contact with the back member C2130. .

In the third and seventh embodiments, the main body C2131 of the back member C2130 approaches the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 side (direction of arrow F) as it goes vertically downward (direction of arrow D) (i.e., It may also be formed as a surface that approaches the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400 as it goes downward. This allows the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 and the back member C2130 to sandwich the ball flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C6400, and prevents the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C6400. can be suppressed.

In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments, in addition to the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130, a magnet C2300 may be additionally disposed vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). . When the added magnet C2300 is placed vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the center of the ball attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, the magnetic force acting on the ball is reduced by the added magnet C2300. Since the orientation is upward in the vertical direction, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling before moving to the downstream ends of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400. On the other hand, when the added magnet C2300 is placed vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the center of the ball attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, the added magnet C2300 acts on the ball. Since the direction of the magnetic force is vertically downward, the possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased.

In the third, sixth and seventh embodiments, the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back surface member C2130 may be formed to extend vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D). This allows the ball to be attracted by the effect of the magnetic force directly applied from the magnet C2300 in addition to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400, and prevents the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400.

In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments described above, differences in strength may be provided between the magnetic forces of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400. For example, if the magnetic force of the magnet C2300 disposed on the upstream side is stronger than the magnetic force of the other magnets C2300, the balls rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling part C2173 are transferred to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. In other words, it can be easily guided to the fourth passage CRt2004. Furthermore, for example, if the magnetic force of one magnet C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 is weaker than the magnetic force of the other magnets C2300, a ball passing through that one magnet C2300 may be dropped from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. (the possibility of not being able to reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. Thereby, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments described above, the arrangement direction of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be changed. For example, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the downstream side is inclined vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the upstream side.In other words, the magnets C2300 When arranged in a convex manner, the balls flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400 can be easily directed toward the magnet C2300 arranged on the downstream side, and the balls can fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. can be restrained from doing so. On the other hand, with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the upstream side, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged on the downstream side is arranged so as to be inclined vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). When arranged in a concave manner, there is a possibility that the balls will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 at the boundary between the upstream side and the downstream side of the magnet C2300 (the possibility that the balls will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005). Can be made high. Further, the array shape of the magnets C2300 may be formed in a linear shape or may be formed in a circular arc shape. Further, instead of the magnet C2300, the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be arranged in the above shape (convex or concave, and linear or arcuate).

In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments described above, adjacent magnets C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be formed apart from each other. In this case, it is possible to create a section in which the magnetic force is not applied to the ball in the extending direction of the magnetic sections C2400, C5400, and C6400, and there is a possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic section C2400, C5400, and C6400 in this section (the fifth passage The possibility of not being able to reach CRt2005 can be increased.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement member D180 may be formed to be displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170. That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are arranged at the initial position (first position), the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, and the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are arranged at the second position. In the closed state, the displacement member D180 may be arranged in the closed position. In this case, when the ball flows down (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the side where it becomes difficult for the ball to flow down (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, the first ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, and before the first ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, the second ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6. The interest of the game can be increased by making it more difficult for the first ball to fall (enter) into the sixth path DRt6 than when the first ball flows down (enters) into the sixth path DRt6.

In addition, when forming the displacement member D180 so that it is displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 are When the structure in which the displacement (rotation) from the initial position (first position) to the second position is transmitted to the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 is described above (eighth embodiment to fifteenth embodiment) ) and vice versa. That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 are displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 move in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case. The positional relationship between the transmitting parts D173, D3173 and the transmitted parts D193, D3193 may be set so that the transmitting parts D173, D3173 are rotated as shown in FIG.

Specifically, in the eighth embodiment, the transmitted portion D193 is extended in the direction away from the rolling member D170 (right side in FIG. 119(a), direction of arrow R), and the transmitted portion D193 is When the transmitting portion D173 extends upward and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting portion D173 extends the transmitted portion D193 downward (arrow D direction) (that is, rotate the transmission member D190 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 119(a)) from the case of the eighth embodiment).

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the transmitted portion D3193 is extended toward the rolling member D170 (left side in FIG. 124(a), direction of arrow L), and the transmitted portion D3173 extends below the transmitted portion D3193. is extended, and when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting part D3173 pushes the transmitted part D3193 upward (in the direction of arrow U) (i.e. , the transmission member D3190 may be rotated in the opposite direction to that in the tenth embodiment (clockwise in FIG. 124(a)).

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a pair of displacement members D180 is displaced by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 (the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is transmitted to the pair of displacement members D180 by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190), but a configuration may be used in which two transmission members are provided and one of the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced by the first transmission member and the other by the second transmission member (the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170 or the second rolling member D4220 is transmitted to one and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 by the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively).

In this case, for example, in the eleventh embodiment, the displacement of the rolling member D170 may be transmitted by the first transmission member, and the displacement of the second rolling member D4220 may be transmitted by the second transmission member. Thereby, the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which the facing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between the front surface of the main body D131 of the rear member D130, D4130, D8130 and the rear surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140, D6140 in the sixth passage DRt6 is constant along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), and the facing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between an imaginary surface (plane) connecting the tips of multiple protrusions D131f and an imaginary surface (plane) connecting the tips of multiple protrusions D141g is constant along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), but at least one of these facing distances may be changed along the vertical direction.

For example, the opposing interval may be made narrower as it goes upward (in the direction of arrow U, in the direction away from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body portions D172, D3172)). . Thereby, the balls that have jumped up from the upper surfaces (rolling surfaces) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body portions D172, D3172) can be quickly lowered, and the weight of the balls can be easily applied. This technical idea also applies to the opposing spacing in the eighth passage DRt8.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, protrusions D131f, D141g are provided protruding from the front of the main body D131 of the back members D130, D4130, D8130 and the back of the main body D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140, respectively. However, recesses may be provided on the front of the main body D131 of the back members D130, D4130, D8130 and the back of the main body D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140, respectively. The recesses can also delay the passage (rolling) of the balls.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the protrusions D131f and D141g are exemplified as an example of a delay means for delaying the passage of the ball, but other means may be used. Examples of other means include means (such as a windmill, a metal elastic spring (leaf spring or coil spring), a resin elastic piece, a rubber sheet, etc.) that are arranged at a position where the ball passing (rolling) on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172, D3172, or D4222 of the rolling member D170, D3170, or the second rolling member D4220 can come into contact with the ball, and are displaced or deformed by the contact. In other words, examples of means that use energy (kinetic energy or viscous resistance) generated by contact with the ball to delay the passage of the ball are exemplified.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172, D3172, D4222 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is flat, but the upper surface (rolling surface) may be provided with irregularities or steps. This provides resistance to the ball, slowing its passage (rolling).

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the sixth passage DRt6 (the opposite side of the pair of displacement members D180) Although a case has been described in which the ball is made easier to enter (enter the ball) into the center, a configuration opposite to this may be used. That is, the initial position of the displacement member D180 is the open position, and when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position. The ball may be made less likely to flow into (enter into) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). In this case, the game state may be such that the ball flowing into the fourth path DRt4 or the fifth path DRt5 is more advantageous than the ball flowing into the sixth path DRt6.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 are provided to transmit the displacement of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180. Although described, the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 may be omitted. That is, by directly connecting the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 and the displacement member D180 (displacement member D180 unit), the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is controlled. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the information is directly transmitted to the displacement member D180.

For example, grooves D194L and D194R of the transmission member D190 (body portion D194) are provided in the rolling member D170, D3170, 8170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is provided in the grooves D194L and D194R. Connect (insert). Thereby, since the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, and D5190 are omitted, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, in the initial position (when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position), a gap is formed between the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting members D190 and D2190 and the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170 in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D), while no gap is formed between the transmitted part D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 and the transmitting part D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight part D195 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220 in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D). However, this may be reversed.

In other words, in the initial position (when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position), no gap is formed in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) between the transmitted part D193 of the transmission members D190 and D2190 and the transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170, and a gap may be formed in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) between the transmitted part D3193 of the transmission member D3190 and the transmission part D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190 and the transmission part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which the pair of displacement members D180 are rotatable, but at least one (or both) of the pair of displacement members D180 may be configured to be slidable. . Even with a sliding displacement configuration, the ease with which the ball enters the sixth path DRt6 can be changed and the interest of the game can be improved. Examples of the slide displacement include a straight line, a curved line, and a combination of a straight line and a curved line.

This displacement mode is the same for rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, second rolling member D4220, and transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190, and at least one of these (or A configuration may also be used in which all of the components can be slid and displaced.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 are configured to be able to return to their initial positions by their own weight. Although the case has been described in which the case is returned to the initial position, a biasing means for applying a biasing force in the direction of returning to the initial position may be provided. If these returns to the initial position can be performed quickly, the displacement member D180 can be quickly placed in the closed position, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Note that examples of the biasing means include a coil spring, a leaf spring, a torsion spring, and a rubber-like elastic body.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a pair of displacement members D180 are described, but the number of displacement members D180 may be one or three or more. In other words, it is sufficient that the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by changing the distance between the pair of displacement members D180. However, the distance between the pair of displacement members D180 may not be changed. For example, the displacement (rotation) directions of one and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 may be the same (the distance between the displacement members is kept constant, and the position of the open portion at the tip of the displacement member D180 is displaced left and right (in the direction of the arrows L-D)). In other words, it is sufficient that the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, one of the pair of displacement members D180 is always linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190, and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 is the transmission member D190, D2190. , D3190, D5190, and D7190 are not interlocked for a predetermined period of time, but a configuration in which both of the pair of displacement members D180 are always interlocked with the displacement of transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 has been described. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which both of the pair of displacement members D180 are not interlocked with the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 for a predetermined period.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusions D131f and D141g are formed continuously along the extending direction (vertical direction), but the protruding parts D131f and D141g are It may be formed discontinuously (formed intermittently) along the direction. This makes it easier to provide resistance to the upward bounce of the ball. In this case, the protrusions D131f and D141g may be arranged in a staggered manner along the extension direction (vertical direction). This makes it easier to provide resistance to the upward bounce of the ball.

Although not described in the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a restricting means may be provided to restrict the movement of the ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing pair of displacement members D180) and fallen onto the upper surface of the main body portion D172, D3172 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 in the direction opposite to the rolling direction in the main body portion D172, D3172 (the direction of arrow R). The restricting means may be provided in any of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the back member D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate member D140, D6140. In addition, examples of the restricting means include a portion that is erected from either the rolling member D170, D3170, or D8170, the back member D130, D4130, or D8130, or the intermediate member D140 or D6140 and is shaped so that it can come into contact with a ball.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which a ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) falls onto the upper surface of the main body parts D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170. However, a configuration in which a ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) falls onto the upper surface of a portion (receiving portion) formed in the back member D130, D4130, D8130 or the intermediate member D140, D6140, and flows (rolls) from the receiving portion into the main body parts D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 may also be used. Once the impact of the fall has subsided (become smaller), the main body parts D172 and D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170 and D8170 can receive the ball, suppressing flapping (vibration) of the displacement member D180 in the initial stage when the weight of the ball acts.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) are arranged in parallel (side by side) when viewed from above (in the direction of arrow D) (i.e., arranged at different positions in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of arrow F-B)). In this case, the dimensions of the lower frames D86b to D8086b in the up-down direction (in the direction of arrows U-D) can be reduced. However, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) may also be arranged in parallel (side by side) when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow B) (i.e., arranged at different positions in the up-to-down direction (in the direction of arrows U-D)). In this case, it is preferable that the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) overlap when viewed from above (in the direction of arrow D). This allows the dimensions of the lower frames D86b-D8086b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are arranged (parallel) in parallel when viewed from above (viewed in the direction of arrow D). The two rolling members D4220 may be arranged in series (arranged linearly along the longitudinal direction) when viewed from above (viewed in the direction of arrow D).

In the fourteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the display section D7197 is disposed on the main body section D194, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display section D7197 may be disposed on the weight section D195. That is, the display portion D7197 may be disposed on the outer edge of the weight portion D195 and may be extended from the outer edge of the weight portion D195 in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the axis D191.

In this case, the arrangement of the display part D9197 is opposite to that described above (the display part D7197 is made invisible to the player with the displacement member D180 placed in the closed position, and the display part D7197 is made invisible to the player when the displacement member D180 is in the open position). The amount of protrusion of the display portion D7197 can be maximized in the state in which the display portion D7197 is placed at this position. Furthermore, by utilizing the weight of the display section D7197, it is possible to reduce (or omit) the amount of metal weights buried in the weight section D195, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing material costs. can be achieved.

In the above fifteenth embodiment, the second protrusion D131fa is formed on only some (two in this embodiment) of the multiple (five in this embodiment) protrusions D131f. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of the second protrusions D131fa formed is arbitrary, and may be one, or may be three or more. The second protrusion D131fa may be formed on all of the multiple protrusions D131f. In addition, the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusions D131f that overlap the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 in a front view, or the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusions D131f that do not overlap the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 in a front view.

In the fifteenth embodiment, when the rolling member D8170 is disposed at the first position, the dimension in which the upper surface of the second protrusion D131fa protrudes from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is on the upstream side (axis Although a case has been described in which the second protrusion D131fa located on the side farther from D171 has a larger size, the size is not necessarily limited to this, and each second protrusion D131fa may have the same size. Alternatively, the size of the second protrusion D131fa located on the downstream side (the side closer to the axis D171) may be larger.

In the 16th to 32nd embodiments, an inclined surface may be formed by sloping the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 downward toward the back side (arrow B direction) at a position corresponding to between the curved portion E134a and the flow path adjustment block E170 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140. This creates the possibility of sending a ball reciprocating on the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5). A ball sent to the fifth passage ERt5 may be guided to the seventh passage ERt7, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the 16th to 32nd embodiments, the case where the rear wall E161a is formed on the erected passage E161 of the central passage E160 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. In addition to the rear wall E161a, a front wall may be formed that stands vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow F) from the edge of the front end side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the erected passage E161. This makes it possible to prevent the ball guided to the erected passage E161 from passing through the edge of the front end side of the erected passage E161 and flowing down (falling) to the second inclined portion E135. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball guided to the erected passage E161 to pass through the upper hole E162, that is, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to flow down the fourth passage ERt4 and enter the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is increased).

In the 16th to 32nd embodiments, a case has been described in which the protruding portion E111b is provided protruding from the front plate E111, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protruding portion E111b does not have to be provided protruding. This creates the possibility that a ball rolling on the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140 will be sent to the first winning opening 64. In other words, it is possible to increase the probability that a ball rolling on the rolling portion E141 will win the first winning opening 64.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the drive motor E191 operates the distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, The two distribution passages E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 are displaced (reciprocating), and in the 17th, 18th, and 26th embodiments, the distribution passages E2150, E3150 are moved by the elastic spring E2190. , E11150 is displaced (rotated), but it is not necessarily limited to this. , the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 may be displaced. As a result, the distribution passages E150, E2150, E3150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E11150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passages E4150, E16150, and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 in the left and right direction (arrow In addition to being able to be displaced (reciprocating) in the LR direction), it can also be displaced (reciprocating) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the movement (flowing down It is possible to easily change (change) the direction of movement (flowing, rolling) of the ball. Moreover, in the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, there is a ball between the back plate E137 and the projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151. It is possible to suppress being pinched.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 27th to 32nd embodiments, a pair of distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, and a pair of second distribution paths E4150, E16150 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) between a pair of opposing curved portions E131. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and a pair of distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, and a pair of second distribution paths E4150, E16150 may be arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) between a pair of opposing curved portions E131.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th to 25th embodiments, and the 27th to 32nd embodiments, a case has been described in which one pinion gear E196 is arranged between the first rack portion E194d of the first transmission member E194 and the second rack portion E195b of the second transmission member E195, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and multiple pinion gears may be arranged. In this case, by making the number of teeth of each pinion gear different, that is, by making them act as a reducer, the displacement speed of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) engaged with the first transmission member E194 can be made different from the displacement speed of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) engaged with the second transmission member E195. In addition, by arranging an even number of pinion gears, the displacement direction of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) engaged with the first transmission member E194 can be made the same as that of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) engaged with the second transmission member E195.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 27th to 32nd embodiments, the grooves E133c, E9133c, and E10133c formed on both sides of the insertion holes E133a, E9133a, and E10133a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) have been described as having the same shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this and they may be formed in non-identical shapes. This allows the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 to reciprocate in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and to be displaced in a manner that rotates around the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) in a top view. In detail, the engaged portion E153 (engagement recess E153a) can be used as a rotation axis to displace the curved portion E131 side and the central passage E160 side of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 in different directions in the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B).

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting paths E4150 and E16150, and the third sorting path E4150 and E16150. Although the above description concerns a case where the protrusions are provided from the upper surfaces of the paths E5150 and E17150, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions may be formed in recesses provided in the upper surfaces of the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting paths E4150 and E16150, and the third sorting paths E5150 and E17150. The recesses may also have discontinuous outer edges, and the spaces formed between the protruding protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be recesses.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 32nd embodiments, the protrusions E151 and E15151 are formed in an approximately hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150. In the 27th embodiment, the protrusions E12151 are formed in a spherical shape. In the 28th embodiment, the protrusions E13151 are formed in an approximately rhombic (quadrilateral) shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E13150. In the 29th embodiment, the protrusions E14151 are formed in a circular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E14150. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions E151 and E15151 may be formed in an approximately polygonal shape such as an approximately pentagonal or approximately heptagonal shape, or in a polygonal pyramid shape. They may also be formed in a cylindrical shape. Also, it may be formed into a shape combining straight lines and curved lines. Also, the inclination angles of the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 with respect to the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 have been described as being the same, but this is not necessarily limited thereto, and the inclination angles of the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be different for each side surface. For example, by making the inclination angle of the side formed on the downward side of the inclination direction with respect to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 approximately perpendicular, it is possible to suppress the balls from displacing (backflow, rolling) to the upward side of the inclination direction. Also, for example, by making the inclination angle of the side formed on the downward side of the inclination direction with respect to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 smaller than the inclination angle of the side formed on the upward side of the inclination direction, it is possible to easily displace (backflow, roll) the balls to the upward side of the inclination direction. As a result, it becomes easier for players to visually see how the direction of the ball's movement (flowing down, falling) changes (is altered), which increases the player's interest in the game.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 27th to 32nd embodiments, a case has been described in which a plurality of protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged in the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and it is sufficient that at least one protrusion E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged in each.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage Although a case has been described in which the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are provided on the upper surface of E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), the distribution is not limited to this. Projections E151, E12151, E13151 on a part of the upper surface of the passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), E14151 and E15151 may be provided respectively.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage Although a case has been described in which the projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 on the upper surface of E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 are arranged at constant intervals, this is not necessarily the case, and each projection The arrangement intervals of E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be different from each other. For example, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 are arranged on the center side in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). By increasing the spacing between the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, the ball is thrown to the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, compared to when the ball is thrown to both ends in the front-rear direction. The number of times of contact can be reduced. As a result, the ball moves along the inclination direction on the front-rear center side of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150. It becomes easier to flow down. That is, the direction of the ball's flow can be made difficult to change. As a result, the ball thrown to the center side in the longitudinal direction of the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 is sent to the construction passage E16 ( It can be easily guided to the fourth passage ERt4). Further, the distance between the opposing protrusions E151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be larger than approximately 1/4 of the diameter of the sphere, or may be smaller than approximately 1/4 of the diameter of the sphere. good. By increasing the distance between opposing sides (arrangement interval), the upper surfaces of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, second distribution passage E4150, and third distribution passage E5150 are moved. A mode in which the ball can be brought into contact with the projections E151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 while increasing the speed of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling), and the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed. This makes it easier for players to visually recognize the information.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage Although the case where the E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passage E5150, E17150 are continuously displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and by intermittently driving the drive motor E191, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, second distribution passages E4150, E16150, and third distribution passages E5150, E17150 may be intermittently displaced. As a result, inertia force can be applied to the balls flowing down the distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution paths E4150, E16150, and the third distribution paths E5150, E17150, The impact force when abutting against the projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 can be changed (changed), and the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed (changed) in various ways.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage Although the case where the E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 are driven by the drive motor E191 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and they may be driven by a solenoid or an elastic spring.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th to 25th embodiments, and the 27th to 32nd embodiments, a driving force transmission member E193 is fixed to the shaft of the drive motor E191, and the rotation of the drive motor E191 in one direction causes the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150, E16150, and the third sorting path E4150, E16150, to be rotated in one direction. Although the case where paths E5150 and E17150 are reciprocated has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150, E16150, and the third sorting path E5150, E17150 may be reciprocated by switching the drive direction of the drive motor E191.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 27th to 32nd embodiments, the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged in the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 so that the balls can flow down. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the flow down of the balls may be suppressed by the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151. This allows the trailing ball to abut against the leading ball whose flow down is suppressed, and the flow down direction of the trailing ball can be changed (changed). That is, the leading ball whose flow is suppressed can have the same effect on the trailing ball as the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, and can change (change) the movement (flow, roll) direction of the balls flowing down the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150. Also, the flow direction of the balls can be changed (changed) irregularly. In addition, when a trailing ball that flows down abuts on a leading ball whose flow is suppressed, the leading ball can resume flowing down.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th and 27th to 32nd embodiments, the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151 and E15151 are formed at an inclination of approximately 45 degrees relative to the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150, and the protruding height of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151 and E15151 is approximately half the radius of the sphere, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be inclined at an angle greater than 45 degrees relative to the upper surfaces of the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting path E4150, and the third sorting path E5150. The protrusion height of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be formed to be higher than approximately half the radius of the sphere, or may be formed to be lower than approximately half the radius of the sphere. By increasing the inclination angle of the side of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 relative to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150, or by increasing the protrusion height, the movement (flowing down, rolling) time of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 can be lengthened. On the other hand, by reducing the inclination angle of the side of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 relative to the upper surface of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150, or by lowering the protrusion height, the movement (flowing down, rolling) time of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 can be lengthened. In addition, the balls can easily move (flow down, roll) through the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 by climbing over the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151 and E15151, and the direction in which the balls move (flow down, roll) can be diversified.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passage Although a case has been described in which the regulating piece E153b is formed on the E4150, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the regulating piece E153b may not be formed. Thereby, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 can be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the inclined surface thereof. To explain in detail, the weight of the balls flowing down (falling) acts on the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passage E4150, so that the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passage E4150 are connected to the first transmission member E194, E4194, E5194, the second transmission member E195, E4195, E5195, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth It can rotate around the engagement portion E194c that is engaged with the transmission member E4199. As a result, the inclination angles of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 can be changed (changed), and the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150 , E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3), the movement (flowing down, rolling) time of the balls can be extended (changed).

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 has a notch E150a. Although the case where the notch E150a is formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the notch E150a may not be formed. Thereby, the number of protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 formed on the upper surface of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 can be increased. In addition, it is possible to easily throw the ball from the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), that is, it is easy to win into the first prize opening 64 (first The probability of winning a prize in the winning hole 64 is high).

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, a pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of Although the case where one and the other of the two distribution passages E4150 and E16150 are formed in the same manner has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, The number or spacing of the protrusions E151 may be different between E13150, E14150, E15150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150 and E16150. As a result, the flowing time and direction of the balls flowing down can be made different between one and the other of the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passage E4150, E16150. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th and 27th to 32nd embodiments, a pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 are each described as being displaced linearly (planarly) symmetrically (left-right symmetrically in Figure 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 135) of the game board E13, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and one and the other of the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 may be displaced asymmetrically. This allows the balls to flow for different times and in different directions on one side of the pair of distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution path E4150, E16150 (third path ERt3), making the game more interesting.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the eighteenth embodiment, and the twenty-sixth embodiment, protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be formed on the upper surfaces of the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150. Thereby, the direction of movement (downward, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution paths E2150, E3150, E11150 (third path ERt3) can be varied.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the eighteenth embodiment, and the twenty-sixth embodiment, the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150 are displaced by the elastic springs E2190, but the distribution passages are not necessarily limited to this. In addition to E2150, E3150, and E11150, the curved portion E131 and the wall plate E132 may be displaced by an elastic spring E2190. Thereby, it is possible to change (change) the displacement speed of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the curved part E131 (second passage ERt2) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the distribution passage E2150, The direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls that move (flowing down, rolling) through E3150, E11150 (third passage ERt3) can be varied.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the eighteenth embodiment, and the twenty-sixth embodiment, the case where the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 come into contact has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 do not have to come into contact with each other. In this case, by making the distance between the lower surface of the curved part E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150 smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the ball can be connected to the lower surface of the curved part E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150 It is possible to suppress leakage from between.

In the 17th, 18th and 26th embodiments, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed between the flat portion E2133 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, E11150. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic spring E2190 may be disposed between the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, E11150. In this case, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed in a stretched state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190 is utilized to maintain the contact state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, E11150, or the distance between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, E11150 is maintained in a state smaller than the diameter of a sphere.

In the 17th, 18th and 26th embodiments, the cases where the distribution passages E2150, E3150 and E11150 are displaced by the elastic spring E2190 are described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and they may be displaced by a drive motor or a solenoid.

In the seventeenth and eighteenth embodiments, the support shaft E20j engages the plane portion E2133 with the distribution passages E2150, E3150, the elastic spring E2190 is configured as a coil spring, and the elastic spring E2190 connects the distribution passages E2150, E3150 with each other. Although a case has been described in which the E3150 is displaced (rotated) upward in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrow U), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic spring E2190 may be configured as a torsion spring. In this case, it is sufficient to engage the torsion spring with the support shaft E20j, thereby suppressing the provision of the support protrusions E2133a and E2150a for engaging the elastic spring E2190. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

In the 17th and 18th embodiments, the distribution paths E2150 and E3150 are rotated around the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) as a rotation axis, and in the 26th embodiment, the distribution path E11150 is rotated around the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) as a rotation axis. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the distribution paths E2150, E3150, and E11150 may be rotated around the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it easier for balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution paths E2150, E3150, and E11150 to move in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the change in the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) can be diversified. As a result, the change in the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the seventeenth and eighteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which the support protrusions E2133a of the flat portion E2133 are formed on both end sides in the longitudinal direction, and the support parts E2133b are formed closer to the center passage E160 than the support protrusions E2133a. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the support portions E2133b may be formed on both end sides in the longitudinal direction, and the support projections E2133a may be formed closer to the central passage E160 than the support portions E2133b. Furthermore, the support protrusions E2133a may be formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction and on the central side in the longitudinal direction than the support protrusions E2133a, and the support portion E2133b may be formed between the support protrusions E2133a in the longitudinal direction.

In the 19th embodiment and the 20th embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion E151 is provided in the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), but this is not necessarily the case. However, the projection E151 may not be provided. That is, the upper surfaces of the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) may be formed flat. This allows the player to easily predict the displacement of the ball flowing down (falling) from the distribution path E150. Further, the protrusion E151 is disposed in a part of the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), and the protrusion E151 is not disposed in the remaining part. good.

In the 19th embodiment, a case has been described in which the second distribution passage E4150 is formed to have a shorter length in the inclination direction than the distribution passage E150, and the other things are the same, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, the length of the second distribution passage E4150 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) may be formed to be larger than the length of the distribution passage E150 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the ball moved (flowing down, rolling) to the second distribution path E4150 can be easily guided (thrown) to the intervening member E140.

In the 19th embodiment, when the sorting passage E150 is placed in the first position, the end of the second sorting passage E4150, E16150 on the downward side in the inclination direction is located closer to the wall plate E132 than the end of the sorting passage E150 on the downward side in the inclination direction. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the end of the second sorting passage E4150, E16150 on the downward side in the inclination direction may be located closer to the upper hole E162 (center passage E160) than the end of the sorting passage E150 on the downward side in the inclination direction. This makes it easier to send the balls that flow down (fall) the sorting passage E150 to the second sorting passage E4150, E16150, and makes it easier for the balls sorted to the center passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) to enter the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 135) (increases the probability of winning the first winning hole 64).

In the 20th embodiment, when the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are arranged at the fourth position, at least a part of the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are arranged at a position overlapping the central passage E160 when viewed from above. Although the case is described above, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are located at a position where all of the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 in the transverse direction (arrow FB direction) overlap the central passage E160 when viewed from above. It may be arranged. This makes it difficult to guide the ball thrown from the distribution path E150 to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4).

In the twentieth embodiment, when the third distribution passage E5150, E17150 is disposed at the fourth position, at least a part of the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at a position overlapping the central passage E160 in a top view. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the third distribution passage E5150, E17150 may be disposed closer to the intermediate member E140 side (arrow F direction side) than the central passage E160 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). This allows the player to expect that the balls guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) will be distributed to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4), just as in the case where the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at the third position, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In the 22nd embodiment, the slope portion E7154 is formed linearly, and in the 23rd embodiment, the curved guide portion E8133d is formed curved in an arc shape, but this is not necessarily the case. The slope portion E7154 may be curved into an arc shape, and the curved guide portion E8133d may be formed into a straight line. Further, the slope portion E7154 or the curved guide portion E8133d may be formed in a shape that is a combination of a straight line and a circular arc.

In the 24th embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower frame E9086b is formed line (plane) symmetrical (left-right symmetry in FIG. 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 135) of the game board E13. The present invention is not limited to this, and the lower frame E9086b may be formed asymmetrically. For example, the groove E9133c formed on one side of the base member E9130 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is inclined toward the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction side) as it goes from the curved portion E131 side toward the central passage E160 side. The groove E9133c formed on the other side of the base member E9130 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is formed on the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction side) as it goes from the central passage E160 side to the curved part E131 side. ) may be formed with an inclination. For example, the groove portion E9133c may be formed in the same manner on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the base member E9130 when viewed from above, and the mode of displacement of the distribution passage E150 may be the same.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the groove portion E10133c is formed in a shape that is a combination of curved lines when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the first slope portion E10133. Alternatively, it may be formed in a shape that is a combination of a straight line and a curved line.

In the 31st and 32nd embodiments, the guide portions E16154, E17154 are provided on the outer edges of the second distribution passage E16150 and the third distribution passage E17150, excluding the guide cutouts E16154a, E17154a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and it is sufficient that they are formed on at least a part of the outer edges. This makes it easier to win at the first winning port 64 (increases the probability of winning at the first winning port 64) compared to when the guide portions E16154, E17154 are not formed on the outer edges of the second distribution passage E16150 and the third distribution passage E17150, and increases the interest of the game.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path configuring means blinds the passing means>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the path forming means, and a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass, and the path forming means is configured to It is characterized by comprising a displaceable means that can be placed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of the first game ball on the upstream side of the passing means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the path forming means. Game machine A1.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, which includes a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and in which the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302. There is a machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the decorative board 302 makes it difficult to always recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is necessary to confirm whether the ball has entered the ball detection hole 431 and to continue or stop shooting the game ball. It was not possible to accommodate the game mode of playing, and there was a possibility that players would feel dissatisfied. That is, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in the portions related to the shooting operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the route configuring means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, when the first game ball is easily visible, it is easier to check the flow of the first game ball and decide whether to continue or stop the game ball firing operation. Improvements can be made in related areas.

The form of the specified displaceable means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the displaceable means is a second gaming ball flowing down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A1, the visibility of the first game ball can be changed by using the game ball guided toward the passing means, so that the displaceable means Compared to the case where other decorative members are prepared as a decorative member, material costs and design costs can be reduced.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the path configuration means in gaming machine A2 has a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 has a forward/backward path that allows a second gaming ball to be positioned in front of the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming ball can hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball when viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine A3, the forward/rearward path is configured such that when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path configuration means at the launch interval set in the launch device, the second gaming ball hides at least a portion of the first gaming ball. Gaming machine A4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 can also provide the effect of making it difficult to recognize a first gaming ball as a second gaming ball when multiple gaming balls flow down the path configuration means with the launch intervals unchanged. This makes it possible to create a difficult-to-recognize situation even under normal circumstances.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3 or A4, in the front-rear direction path, the front-side component is arranged closer to the center of the gaming area than the back-side component.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A3 and A4, gaming machine A5 can configure a forward/backward path that is inclined along the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means, making it easier for the first gaming ball to be hidden by the second gaming ball. In other words, the blindfolding effect can be improved.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A5, the front side component is positioned in the line of sight of the player who is looking at the passing means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 can produce a similar blindfolding effect regardless of the length of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball placed on the forward/backward path.

In other words, it is usually believed that the closer the first and second game balls are to each other, the greater the concealment effect, but if the first and second game balls are positioned in the line of sight, the effect of the distance between them can be eliminated.

A gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the path configuration means in any of the gaming machines A2 to A6 includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball, and a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows the gaming ball to flow down in the left-right direction upstream of the front-rear direction path.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A6, gaming machine A7 can also block the player's line of sight with gaming balls flowing down a left-right path, so a concealing effect can be created not only when the player views the passed-through means with a line of sight that does not shift left or right relative to the passed-through means, but also when the player shifts left or right and peers at the passed-through means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed-through means, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a concealing effect can be created in all directions).

This effect is significantly produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with walls. That is, in a configuration in which the left and right sides are sealed by a wall, the wall serves as a blindfold on the left and right sides, making it easy to create a state in which the passing means cannot be seen.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the route configuring means has a first downstream route in which the game ball passes through the passed means in a first manner, and a second downstream route in which the game ball passes in a second manner. and a downstream path, wherein the first game ball can be visually recognized at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means, regardless of which downstream path of the path configuration means the first game ball flows down. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being configured as follows.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machine A8 can make it difficult to recognize the flow pattern of the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the passing means, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means.

The first and second aspects are not limited in any way. For example, the direction in which the ball flows down may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

A gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a branching means is provided on the upstream side of the passing means for dividing the flow direction of the gaming ball, the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flow direction of the received gaming ball, and the path configuration means is configured so that gaming balls whose flow paths are divided by the branching means and that reach the switching means flow down the same path for a predetermined section.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A8, the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route for a predetermined section, so the game balls that reach the switching means immediately It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the flow of the game ball compared to the case where the flow pattern corresponds to the flow path of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game ball.

In the gaming machine A9, the path configuration means has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming balls flowing down, and the protruding portion acts to branch the gaming balls in the branching means. A10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A9, gaming machine A10 can use the protruding portion to branch the game balls, improving the durability of the structure compared to, for example, a case in which branching is caused by the movement of a valve body.

In the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion includes a first protruding portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second protruding portion extending in a direction different from the first protruding portion, and the first protruding portion A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion is different from the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A10, gaming machine A11 can differentiate the effect of the first protrusion on the gaming ball from the effect of the second protrusion on the gaming ball depending on the way the gaming ball flows down. This makes it possible to use the fixed first and second protrusions to branch the gaming ball according to a predetermined rule depending on the way the gaming ball flows down.

<Points that appeal to the introduction of the ball passing through the path configuring means to the passing means>
A route configuring means configured to allow a game ball to flow down the route configuring means, and a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route configuring means to pass, and the route configuring means is configured to have a higher speed than the passing means. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined part constituting an upstream side, the predetermined part being arranged on a side more conspicuous than the passing means and configured to be able to guide a game ball to the passing means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize with a decorative plate 302, and a large winning part 300 is provided. Depending on the state of the winning parts 300, there are gaming machines in which the game balls may fall away from the decorative board 302, or the game balls may flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative board 302 (for example, in special machines). (Refer to Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the highly visible game balls that come off the decorative board 302 and flow down are configured so that they deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and are hidden behind the decorative board 302. Since a part of the game ball flowing down is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player pays attention to the game ball. Since things tend to be wasted, there is a possibility that players may feel dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of making the way the game ball flows down after it has attracted attention so that it is meaningful to draw attention to.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined part placed on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, the degree of attention to the game ball can be improved; This can be associated with the game ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flown down the predetermined portion passes through the passing means, so that it is possible to improve the point that it is meaningful to pay attention to the game ball that has attracted attention.

In addition, this configuration makes it easier to guide the player's gaze to the game ball flowing down the specified area, reducing the possibility that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

Note that the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed on the display device side that easily catches players' attention, it may be placed on the prize opening side or the starting opening side, it may be placed on the front side (near side) that is easy for players to see, or it may be placed on the front side (front side) that is easy for players to see. The stage side (mainly the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where the game ball is temporarily held) is a place where the ball tends to attract attention as a place where the probability of ball landing is significantly high, and the side where the game ball is temporarily held is directly connected to winning the jackpot. The V prize opening side, the ball rental device side as an operation target, the production operation button side, the area where the game ball that strayed from the ball entry opening flows down (the area where players are frustrated and follow it with their eyes), The bright side or other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. Alternatively, a less conspicuous side may be intentionally formed to make it relatively conspicuous.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1, the path configuration means has a second predetermined portion that makes a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means less noticeable than when the ball entered, and the predetermined portion is positioned on a more noticeable side than the second predetermined portion.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, before the game ball that enters the path forming means flows down the predetermined part, the attention force is lowered in the second predetermined part, so that the game ball can flow down the predetermined part. It is possible to highlight the attention of the game ball when playing.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the predetermined portion of gaming machine B1 or B2 has sections where the flow speed of gaming balls differs.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can improve the effect of attracting the player's attention compared to when there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming balls.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the second flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is higher than the first flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Game machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that enters the path forming means reaches the predetermined part.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the predetermined portion includes a section in which the displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B4, there is a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different, regardless of the magnitude of the actual falling speed of the game ball. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball at any predetermined location when viewed in a predetermined direction, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the predetermined location and diverted from other parts. .

The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a difference between displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front and displacement on a straight line having a front-to-rear component, a difference between displacement on a straight line and displacement in a curved or serpentine shape, or some other difference.

Gaming machine B6 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B5, and is characterized in that it is equipped with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce gaming balls into the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is disposed outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Gaming machine B6 can ensure the visibility of the introduction means in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B5. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the introduction means while also increasing the attention to gaming balls that are likely to pass through the passing means.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured to cause the game ball on the front side of the path forming means to flow downward so as to avoid the line of sight directed toward the passing means or the predetermined part. A gaming machine B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B6, the game ball is configured to be able to flow downward on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the game ball is directed to the passing means. Since an avoidance means is provided to avoid this, it is possible to both secure the size of the game area and ensure the visibility of the game ball toward the passing means.

Note that the manner in which the game ball falls under the influence of the avoidance means is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow downward while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or it may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or it may flow down while avoiding the position in front of the means to be passed. With the last position that the player can see as a reference, it may flow down while avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position. It's fine, and anything else is fine.

In the gaming machine B7, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which the falling game balls can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the flowing game balls cannot be accepted, and the accepting state changing means is , a game machine B8 characterized in that, in changing the state from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, the game ball that has reached the accepting state changing means in the accepting state can be guided to the path configuring means side. .

In addition to the effects of game machine B7, game machine B8 can prevent game balls that reach the receiving state change means and then flow down like a bridge from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means.

Gaming machine B9 is characterized in that it is provided with a partitioning means that is arranged above the passing means in a front view of gaming machine B7 or B8 and that partitioning means partitions the gaming area, and that the partitioning means is configured to allow gaming balls to flow down the left and right outer sides.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B7 or B8, the dividing means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the passing means, so that the field of view toward the passing means can be improved. It can be made easier to secure.

The partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that forms the flow surface of the game balls, or it may be a ball entry port forming means through which the game balls can enter. The partitioning means may be a means with a fixed shape (appearance) or a means with a variable shape (appearance).

In the game machine B9, the route configuring means includes an acceptance state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an acceptance state in which the falling game balls can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the falling game balls cannot be accepted, and A gaming machine B10 characterized in that a portion on the side of the state changing means is configured to easily guide the game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B9, it is possible to configure the game ball to be received by the partitioning means to push the game ball into the receiving state changing means while it is being received by the receiving state changing means. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball that skids while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passing means.

For example, the receiving state changing means is assumed to be a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a left-right axis, and the partitioning means is assumed to be a first winning port located above the special winning port of the special winning device. A game ball that reaches the special winning port just before the opening/closing plate is closed is often pinched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening that is covered by the opening/closing plate, and slides sideways in the direction of the edge (the direction of the pivoting axis of the opening/closing plate).

After skidding, the game ball can reach any position in the formation range of the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate, so if at least a part of the opening/closing plate is placed above the means to be passed, There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball may pass through the front position of the passing means after falling to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front after sliding sideways, it will be necessary to position the opening and closing plate so as to avoid the position of the passing means when viewed from the front, which reduces the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

In contrast, gaming machine B10 makes it easier to prevent the game ball from falling onto the front side of the opening and closing plate after sliding sideways, improving the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

Gaming machine B11 is any one of gaming machines B7 to B10, characterized in that gaming balls flowing down the path configuration means and gaming balls flowing down the front side of the path configuration means are configured to flow down in a similar manner.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B7 to B10, gaming machine B11 makes it difficult to distinguish between gaming balls that flow down the path forming means and may pass through the passed means and gaming balls that flow down the front side of the path forming means and do not pass through the passed means, making it difficult to determine the number of gaming balls flowing down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between cases where it is easy and difficult for game balls to enter the path forming means from game balls flowing down near the path forming means.

A gaming machine B12, which is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, and includes a light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, gaming machine B12 makes it easier to avoid the front of the ball flowing down a specified area reflecting light, making it difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the path length to the V-hole while saving space>
A gaming machine C1 comprising: a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down; a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to switch between a first state in which the gaming balls can flow down to the passed means and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means comprises a delay means which delays the vertical displacement of the gaming balls, and the delay means allows the gaming balls to flow down towards the passed means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution section 75 configured to be movable from side to side is disposed in the falling path of a game ball that enters the second grand prize opening 12, and the distribution section 75 is configured to be movable from side to side. There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to change the direction of flow (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is essential that the allocating section 75 operate for a short period of time to prevent erroneous winnings in the specific area 73 and the ball being bitten by the allocating section 75, and some players may There were cases where the player felt unsure of the behavior of the portion 75 and was unable to continue playing the game with peace of mind.

One example of a solution to this problem is to lengthen the flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. For example, by changing the position of the distribution section 75 from directly below the second large prize opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the play area (near the first large prize opening 10), it is possible to ensure a long flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. This is thought to reduce the possibility of an erroneous prize entry into the specific area 73.

On the other hand, if this means is implemented, it will be necessary to ensure visibility of the falling path of the game ball over a wide range from the second big prize opening 12 to the first big prize opening 10, and within this range there will be no freedom in designing the gaming area. degree is limited. That is, in order to avoid erroneous winnings in the specific area 73, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area is restricted over a wide range.

In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding incorrectly entering game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the route configuring means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even if the vertical length of the route configuring means in front view is shortened to save space, the route configuring means can be inserted into the route configuring means. It is possible to secure a long time for the game ball to pass through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it becomes necessary to operate the state switching means to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path configuration means, so that erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device that switches whether or not the game ball can enter the path configuration means for a short period of time. This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

The form of the delay means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a form in which a protrusion for deceleration is formed in the flow path, or a form in which a predetermined flow path is provided that causes the game ball to flow down a flow path having a forward/rearward component.

In the game machine C1, the delaying means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the downstream path toward the front side is more likely to cause the game ball to flow down than the downstream path toward the back side. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is configured such that the acceleration of the game machine C2 increases.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to ensure a long period during which the player is allowed to visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down a predetermined flowing path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the delay means in gaming machines C1 or C2 has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the gaming ball flowing down is greater in a flow path toward the front side than in a flow path in which the gaming ball flows down while maintaining its front-to-rear position.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to ensure a long period of time during which the player can visually see the gaming balls flowing on the near side. Thereby, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined downstream path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inclination of the predetermined downstream path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined downstream path on the game ball side may be used.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the gaming ball passes through a position located in front of the passing means when viewed in the predetermined direction.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, gaming machine C4 can reduce the visibility of the area near the passed means when the gaming ball is placed in the front position. This can increase the attention to the area near the passed means.

A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a plurality of the front positions can be configured in the gaming machine C4.

According to gaming machine C5, by arranging game balls at multiple front positions, the game balls at the front can hide at least a portion of the game ball at the back. Since the passing means is arranged behind the game ball at the back, the field of view toward the passing means can be blocked by the multiple game balls, and the visibility of the passing means can be reduced.

In this case, if the interval between balls entering a specified flow path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is always positioned at one of the front positions, making it possible to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the route forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral manner when viewed from above.

Gaming machine C6 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C1 to C5, and in addition, it can shorten the vertical width required to install a path configuration means of the same length.

In addition, compared to the case where a folded path is formed, there is no need to reduce the thickness of the channel wall, so the strength of the flow path can be improved. The possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

Gaming machine C7 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C6, characterized in that the path configuration means includes a front-rear flow path section extending in the front-rear direction.

Gaming machine C7 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C1 to C6, but also reduces the width of the path configuration means, so that a pair of path configuration means can be configured symmetrically with a reduced width.

Gaming machine C8 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C7, characterized in that the passing means is positioned diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path configuration means.

Gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C7, makes it easier for the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means to be within the field of view of a player looking from the front side.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the path configuration means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and a second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and is configured so that the profits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls of the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times, and furthermore, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times. Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the manner in which the second receiving means receives the game balls, attention to the game balls can be improved.

The manner in which the game balls are received is not limited in any way. For example, the game balls may be received only by the first receiving means, or only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the second receiving means. Also, the frequency with which balls enter each receiving means may differ, or the balls may enter at different positions.

In the gaming machine C9, the change in the profit obtained by the player depends on whether the game ball is accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether the first receiving means and the second receiving means A game machine C10 characterized in that the problem occurs depending on whether a game ball is received by both of the game balls.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, it is possible to make it easier for the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain. .

It should be noted that the profits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the falling game balls, or the benefits related to the game obtained by the falling game balls (paying out prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state becoming variable after the jackpot ends, etc.) The game state may change to the normal state (falling down, etc.).

In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the gaming machine C11 is characterized in that the route configuring means is configured such that the path from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means is symmetrical.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C9 or C10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly fired from the left or right side.

In any of gaming machines C9 to C11, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state change means or the state change state. Gaming machine C12 is characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change, so that the player's skill regarding shooting the game ball is improved. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profits obtained by the player.

A gaming machine C13 in the gaming machine C12, characterized in that the state change mode of the acceptance state changing means is configured in a plurality of types.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine C12, gaming machine C13 can change the reception mode of the gaming balls to the first reception means and the second reception means even when the gaming balls are launched in a certain launch mode. This makes it possible to adjust the profits that the player can obtain from the mode of state change of the reception state change means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the direction in which the ball flows>
Gaming machine XA1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passing means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path forming means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, wherein the state switching means is configured so that the direction of displacement occurring during the state change is along the direction in which the game ball flows down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the flow direction of the game balls and the opening and closing direction of the opening and closing plate of the big prize component 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening and closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game balls, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening and closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, since the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the downward direction of the game ball, the state of the game ball in the state where the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means is By causing a displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence the rolling manner of the game ball to change. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

For example, when a game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top of it, the ball will move in the forward direction of rolling rotation relative to the game ball. Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid leftward with the game ball on top of it, applying a load to the game ball that rotates it in the opposite direction to the rolling rotation, thereby slowing down the rotation of the game ball.

In addition, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the bottom end of the rolling game ball, a load can be applied to the game ball that is not only in the rolling direction of the game ball, but also has a component in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction, so that the change in the flow pattern of the game ball can be made complex and irregular.

Due to these influences on the falling state of the game ball, the falling state of the ball riding on the state switching means can be varied in various ways during the opening/closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball becomes bored. You can concentrate on playing the game without worrying about it.

In addition, the positional relationship between the opening and closing operation of the state switching means and the gaming ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be positioned so that it rubs against the side of the gaming ball, or it may be positioned so that it collides with the gaming ball in the direction opposite to the flow of the gaming ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in such a manner as to collide with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that the closing operation is performed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball is flowing down, and the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation is performed in the forward direction of the direction in which the game ball is flowing, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. It may be configured to be regulated with less resistance.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that allows balls to flow in a first direction when open and in a second direction when closed>
Gaming machine XB1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passed means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passed means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, wherein the state switching means is configured to be able to guide the game ball in a first direction in the introduction state, and to be able to guide the game ball in a second direction in the non-introduction state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 that can configure a plurality of types of falling paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended to the front, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. Therefore, I will not provide any guidance. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a part other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the falling of the game ball (such as a frame part). There is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

In contrast, with the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the gaming ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or not, making it unnecessary to use a dedicated component for guiding the flow path of the gaming ball, thereby reducing the number of components required. This makes it possible to diversify the flow direction of the gaming ball in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set horizontally with respect to a game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only a slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in direction after guidance by the state switching means starts. can be achieved.

The arrangement of the guide portion that causes the guiding action by the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide part may be disposed on a movable member included in the state switching means, or the guide part may be disposed on a non-movable part around the state switching means, and the game ball is moved to the guide part by the movement of the movable member. It may be configured so that it can be switched to a state where it is easy to approach or come into contact with it.

When the guide part is disposed on a movable member, the design must take into consideration not only the guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also the effect on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. It is preferable to do so.

For example, when the state switching means includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of flow of the game balls, rather than providing a wall with a planar shape perpendicular to the direction of flow, it is preferable to )-shaped wall portion makes it easier to avoid a situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction of causing the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

<Separation, inversion, combination, and rotation are all part of the same movement>
A gaming machine D1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to change the visible surface, the displacement means comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and configured such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced relative to each other in a predetermined manner of displacement.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, the rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of the base arm 220 is configured to be able to rotate multiple times (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, although the rotating base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface visible to the player is the same, which creates the problem that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the visible surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable as the displacement means is displaced, attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

Moreover, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by the relative displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined manner includes a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other with respect to a gathering part where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged together, and a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the second displacement member includes at least a second displacement member that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, with only the first displacement as the displacement based on the gathering part, the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced at the terminal part where the distance from the gathering part is the shortest or longest, and the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced. The first displacement member and the second displacement member may appear stationary, which may reduce the production effect, but by mixing the second displacement, displacement in the rotational direction can also be caused at the terminal end. Therefore, the performance effect can be improved.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the predetermined displacement in gaming machine D1 or D2 includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 inverts the surface that is visible due to the third displacement, making it possible to significantly change the decorations that are visible to the player before and after the third displacement.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by adsorption or adhesion, and the load related to the fixation is applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it operates in a direction that limits the displacement of members.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machine D4 has a load related to the fixing that acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first and second displacement members, so the displacement of the first and second displacement members can be designed taking into account the load related to the fixing.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission by gears, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement will occur. However, if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the component due to the load will become apparent, causing a delay in the timing of the displacement of the component.

The degree of fixation may also be configured to vary depending on the visible surfaces of the first and second displacement members.

In this case, since the effect of fixing differs depending on the side that is visually recognized, it is possible to set the strength of the fixing on the side that is visually recognized by the player.

This allows, for example, inverted surfaces of the same displacement means to be easily viewed as one surface tightly joined together and integrated, while the other surface can be easily viewed as loosely joined together and easily displaced relative to one another.

In addition, for example, by configuring the degree of adhesion of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs.

The manner in which the magnet can be attached is not limited in any way. For example, the magnet can be attached with an adhesive tape, or the magnet can utilize the adhesive force between the magnet and the metal part. The first and second inverted members can also be designed to use, for example, fixing screws or bolts as the metal part that is attached to the magnet.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in a first displacement mode, and displaces in the reverse direction in a second displacement mode different from the first displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to displace in the first displacement mode after displacing in the predetermined mode.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is set before the first displacement mode. Since the displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which the predetermined mode is added, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. This makes it possible to reduce the attention paid to the displacement means at the time of retreat, thereby relatively increasing the attention paid to the displacement means displaced at the production position.

With conventional machines, the manner of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, so after extending to the presentation position (the position in front of the liquid crystal display area) and producing the effect, before retracting to the retraction position (position outside the liquid crystal display area). Had to rotate again multiple times in the opposite direction. In this case, there was a possibility that it would become a problem that the line of sight would tend to focus on the member that is retreating from the presentation position.

The type of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

A game machine D6 in the game machine D5, wherein the displacement means includes a release means configured to release load transmission when the operating resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacing means can be changed by varying the operational resistance of the internal structure of the displacing means.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6 includes a light emitting unit that irradiates light toward the displacement unit, the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition mode of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the surface to be viewed is one side or the other side.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. You can change it by changing it.

For example, there are cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light as a unit. It can be changed with .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Features gaming machine D8.

According to gaming machine D8, in any of gaming machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structural parts during displacement.

In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be displaced by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement and contraction can be performed to some extent after being displaced from the production position to the retreat position. By controlling the displacement, it is possible to suppress the increase in attention to the displacement means when displacing from the presentation position to the retreat position, compared to the case where the displacement is performed in a displacement manner including enlargement/contraction from the start of displacement. .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means. Game machine D9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 to D7, gaming machine D9 can reduce the number of detection means. Various types of values for the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, they may be values for the respective positions and attitudes of different movable members, or they may be values related to the change in the operating mode when the operating mode changes at a predetermined timing.

The arrangement of the detection means is not limited in any way. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure that detects the arrangement and attitude of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip end side of the displacement means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means comprises the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be reversible between a position in which the surface facing the player is one side and a position in which the surface is the other side, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, whereas when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are indistinguishable. Gaming machine D10.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, gaming machine D10 can maintain high expectations from the player that a reversal action will occur, regardless of the state of the first and second displacement members when one side is facing the player.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
A gaming machine E1 is provided with a displacement means having a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to see depending on the arrangement.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversing unit 71 configured to be reversible, and are configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visible surface (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, and therefore the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the visible surface. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

In contrast, with gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible depending on the position, so that the line of sight of a player who wishes to see the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner that follows the path of the change in position of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, an opening portion is provided that opens so that the displacement means can be viewed, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, a player who views the back side through the opening can easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

In gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when the displacement means is disposed at the edge of the opening, the displacement means is closer to the back side than when disposed at the center of the opening. .

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, when the displacing means is arranged at the center of the opening, the displacing means can be largely seen on the front side, and the displacing means can be placed on the edge of the opening. When the displacement means is arranged, the movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacement means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means has a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and when the first visible surface and the second visible surface of one set are visible, the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are difficult to see.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, by applying different characters and figures to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set, the displacement means A first visible surface and a second visible surface of a set that are not intended to be visually recognized are configured so that different characters and figures can be visually recognized by a player who visually recognizes them. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement means from becoming unsightly in appearance.

For example, if the first set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a low expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, and the second set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a high expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, the level of expectation of a jackpot can be confirmed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. In this case, the display of the expectation of a jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained even after the displacement means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, so that the display of the expectation of a jackpot can continue to be visible even to a player who has taken their eyes off the liquid crystal display device.

Note that there are no limitations to the manner in which it is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by shielding with a shielding means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being configured.

According to gaming machine E5, it is possible to easily avoid predicting the pair of first and second visible surfaces that will be displayed to the player during the action of switching (before confirmation) the pair of first and second visible surfaces that are visible in gaming machine E4. This makes it possible to improve attention to the displacement means.

The manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are configured to be difficult to recognize during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make them difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) may be configured to be separable from the other parts and operated in a separated state to make them difficult to recognize, or a light-emitting means may be used to set the brightness to create a relatively dark part to make it difficult to recognize.

In this case, the manner in which the separation occurs is not limited in any way. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, the device may be configured to operate facing backward so that only one of the part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is not visible, or the device may be configured to operate in a state in which the part and the other part are simultaneously visible but are misaligned.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it has an opening section in which the displacement means is open so as to be visible in gaming machine E5, and the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is positioned in the center of the opening section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E5, gaming machine E6 makes it easier for players to see the switching action, improving attention to the switching action.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the first visible surface and the other portion faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side. Game machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visible surface is made visible during operation, and the entire first visible surface is made invisible, so that the first visible surface is made visible during operation. Possible aspects can be made difficult to recognize.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7 includes a second displacement means configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to cover the second displacement means as well as the second displacement means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible surface visible.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, by configuring at least a part of the second visible surface to be difficult to see by the second displacement means, the performance position of the displacement means can be changed. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement means is displaced. A game machine E9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface that is visible when viewed in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so that the game The surface that is easy to visually recognize can be arbitrarily changed without depending on the amount of change in the person's line of sight.

A gaming machine E10, which is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E9, the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E9, gaming machine E10 can increase the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state by changing the posture of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E9 or E10, it has an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means, and in the first state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E9 or E10, there are two states in which the auxiliary means is disposed close to the displacement means so that they can be seen together, and a state where the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separately seen. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions that the displacement means gives to the player.

The type of the auxiliary means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a means whose arrangement is fixed, or it may be a movable means.

Gaming machine E12 is characterized in that in gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which it is viewed integrally with the displacement means and a state in which it is viewed separately from the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch between making the displacement means and the auxiliary means visible integrally or separately, so that variations in the visible mode depending on the number of members are possible. can be increased.

<Points at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the installation means at the same time differs between sections>
A gaming machine F1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, an arrangement means for arranging a first part on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second part of the arrangement means, wherein the support means is configured to be capable of controlling the arrangement of the second part relative to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. There is a game machine that is equipped with a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotary accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220. (see official bulletin). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is tilted, there is a possibility that a malfunction will occur in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotary accessory 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, resulting in a low degree of freedom in displacement.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of increasing the design freedom for the displacement of the displaceable parts.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arrangement means is supported at at least two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the support means can control the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part, the arrangement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced while stably supporting the arrangement means. Can be done. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the arrangement means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

The manner of the support means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be supported in a manner that restricts displacement in a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected to a displaceable second displacement means and supported. Furthermore, control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control, such as restricting (guiding) the displacement of the second part with a wall portion.

A gaming machine F2, characterized in that in the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace a first section and a second section, the support means has a first range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the first section, and a second range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the second section, and the direction in which the second part is displaced in the first range is different from the direction in which the second part is displaced in the second range.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 allows the displacement speed of the arrangement means to be varied even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is configured to allow changes in the displacement direction of the second portion, so that the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

A gaming machine F3 in the gaming machine F1 or F2, wherein the support means includes a restriction section that limits displacement of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first range and the second range. When displacing the portion from the side with larger displacement toward the side with smaller displacement, it is possible to easily stop the second portion at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.

The type of load required to displace the second part relative to the first part is not limited in any way. For example, the second part may be pulled, or the second part may be pushed.

Note that the form of the restricting portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be possible to set an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be a mode in which the direction of displacement of the second portion is switched.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means is based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that a relative displacement amount of is smaller than a relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means in the first section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F2 and F3, gaming machine F4 can create a section where the relative amount of displacement of the arrangement means based on the displacement means becomes smaller at a mid-displacement position of the displacement means, so that in addition to the end position of the displacement of the displacement means, positions can be provided where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit. As a result, the number of positions where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit can be increased.

A gaming machine F5 is one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, characterized in that the displacement speed (ratio) of the second part based on the displacement speed of the first part is configured to be variable.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, gaming machine F5 can change the displacement speed of the second part of the arrangement means on the support means side even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, so that a motion presentation can be created in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is variable through simple drive control of the drive means (constant speed drive).

A gaming machine F6, characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the supporting means is configured to reduce a displacement speed at a displacement end of the second portion.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from bouncing back, and it is possible to make it easier to stop the arrangement means at an early stage at the end of the displacement.

Note that the method for preventing the second portion from bouncing back is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used in which the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) is reduced; A method may also be used in which the displacement of the second portion is restricted by a geometrical device such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

Furthermore, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, but may also include increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion. For example, the displacement resistance of the second portion may be improved by applying a load using magnetic force or the like at the end of the displacement of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved using a biasing force such as a coil spring. good.

Gaming machine F7, characterized in that the support means in the gaming machine F6 is configured so that the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part intersects with the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part when the first part stops at the displacement end.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F6, the support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part due to the displacement of the first part allows the second part to be moved even when the first part stops. The return displacement (bound) of the part 2 can be reduced.

A gaming machine F8 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, and is characterized in that it is provided with a supported means that is displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is configured to displace by an amount of displacement that corresponds to the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complex effect can be performed by the supported means that is displaced together with the arrangement means.

The manner in which the supported means is displaced is not limited in any way. For example, the supported means may be displaced so as to move parallel to the disposition means on a predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced, or the supported means may be displaced in a manner different from the manner in which the disposition means is displaced (for example, a sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) (for example, a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis) at a position away from the predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced.

The manner in which the displacing means is displaced with respect to the amount of displacement of the displacing means is not limited in any way. For example, the displacing means may be a change in posture, or may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, while the first part is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second part has a section in which it can be reciprocated in a direction intersecting the displacement locus of the first part. Game machine F9.

Gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F8, can achieve a displacement mode in which the amount of relative displacement of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, increases and then decreases) while the first part is displaced, thereby realizing a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the position of the second part is maintained.

A gaming machine F8 or F9, characterized in that the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F8 and F9, gaming machine F10 can make the displacement mode of the supported means the same as that of the displacement means, sandwiching the placement means. This gives the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own drive means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arrangement means includes a posture changing means that changes its posture so that the surface facing the player side is switched between a first surface and a second surface as the placement means is displaced; A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is in a posture facing the player when the second portion is placed at the end of displacement. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player, so that the second portion reaches the end of displacement. Since the player can understand that the game has been reached, it is possible to configure the final stage of the performance operation by the displacement means in an easy-to-understand manner.
<About the concept of the invention using distribution members C170 to C3170 as an example>
In a gaming machine equipped with a displacement member, at least a portion of which is disposed in a ball passage path and is formed to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the The displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the first ball is guided to a first passage, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. in the state, a second ball following the first ball is guided into the second passage, and the displacement member is arranged in the predetermined position when the weight of the ball is not applied. The gaming machine CA1 is characterized by:

Here, a game machine is known that is equipped with a distribution member that operates based on the weight of the game balls and distributes the game balls into a first passage and a second passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). . However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, regardless of the state of the game balls that have arrived, the game balls are simply distributed alternately to the first passage and the second passage in the order in which they arrive, so the player is forced to pay attention to such distribution operation. There was a problem that the game was not sufficiently interesting.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine CA1, when a first ball passing through a passageway reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, and the first ball is guided to the first passage. When the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the first ball, the second ball following the first ball is guided to the second passage. When the weight of the balls is not acting on the displacement member, the displacement member is positioned at a predetermined position. Therefore, when the first ball is followed by a second ball with a distance of less than a predetermined amount, the first ball is guided to the first passage, and the second ball can be guided to the second passage by the displacement member displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. On the other hand, when the first ball is followed by a second ball with a distance exceeding a predetermined amount, the first ball is guided to the first passage, and the displacement member is positioned at a predetermined position before the second ball arrives, so that the second ball can also be guided to the first passage. In this way, the path that is guided can be changed depending on the state of the ball train (the distance between the leading ball and the following ball), which allows the player to focus on the state of the balls and increase the excitement of the game.

The second ball following the first ball means a ball following the first ball at a distance smaller than a predetermined amount. Therefore, the second ball may roll or flow down while in contact with the first ball.

In the gaming machine CA1, the gaming machine CA2 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member.

According to the game machine CA2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine CA1, the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member, so that the structure is improved compared to the case where a biasing spring is used. Can be simplified. Additionally, since the displacement to the displacement member can be made at a lower speed than when using a biasing spring, it is possible to make sure that the displacement member is placed in a predetermined position before guiding the second ball to the second path. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility that a third ball following the second ball can also be guided to the second path.

In the gaming machine CA2, the displacement member includes a main body portion that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight portion that is connected to the main body portion and functions as a weight that displaces the main body portion to the predetermined position, and at least a portion of the weight portion is visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine CA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA2, there is also a main body that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body and displaces the main body to a predetermined position. Since at least a part of the weight part is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player recognize the direction in which the ball is guided based on the position (state) of the weight part. can. Furthermore, the weight can serve both of the roles of a weight for displacing the main body and a part for recognizing the guiding direction of the ball, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In gaming machines CA1 to CA3, gaming machine CA4 is characterized in that the displacement member includes a first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls.

According to gaming machine CA4, in any of gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member includes the first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, so that the first ball While rolling on one surface, the weight of the ball can be applied to the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball (that is, a state in which the second ball can be guided to the second passage).

The gaming machine CA4 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is arranged so that the second ball guided to the second passage rolls. A gaming machine CA5, characterized in that the second surface is arranged at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction.

According to gaming machine CA5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA4, the displacement member has a second surface along which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the second surface is disposed at a position that overlaps with the axis in the vertical direction, so that the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. This allows the second ball to roll stably. It also ensures the possibility of guiding the third ball following the second ball to the second passage.

In the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the gaming machine CA6 is characterized in that the first surface is longer than the second surface.

According to gaming machine CA6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is longer than the second surface, so that while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is easy to create a state in which the first ball rolls on the first surface at the same time. In other words, by having the weight of the first ball act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be rolled stably. It is also possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can be guided to the second passage.

A gaming machine CA7 is any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA6, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member and an axis that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface extends in a direction away from the axis.

According to gaming machine CA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines CA4 to CA6, the displacement member includes a second surface on which a second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and extends in the direction away from the axis, so as the first ball rolls toward the first path, the weight of the first ball can be effectively applied to the displacement member. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position due to the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be rolled stably. Further, it is possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can also be guided to the second path.

Any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA7 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passageway. A game machine CA8 comprising a second surface on which a ball rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially disposed with the shaft interposed therebetween.

Gaming machine CA8 has the same effects as any of gaming machines CA4 to CA7, but also includes a base member and an axis that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member has a second surface on which a second ball that is guided to a second passageway rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially positioned with the axis in between, which increases the degree of freedom in positioning the displacement member.

Any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA7 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passageway. A game machine CA9 comprising a second surface on which a ball rolls, and at least a portion of the first surface and the second surface are arranged on the same side with respect to the shaft.

According to the gaming machine CA9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the gaming machine CA9 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member has a second The second ball guided into the passage has a second surface on which it rolls, and the first and second surfaces are at least partially disposed on the same side with respect to the axis, so that the first ball rolls on the second surface. Even if the second ball is ejected from the first surface, the weight of the second ball can be used to change the position of the displacement member to a position for guiding the second ball to the second path. As a result, the length of the first surface can be shortened, and the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

Any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9 includes an upstream surface on which a ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface is arranged in a rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface. A gaming machine CA10 characterized by reversing the .

According to the gaming machine CA10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, the gaming machine CA10 is provided with an upstream surface on which the first ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, so that the time required for the first ball to stay on the first surface can be secured for the time required for the reversal. Therefore, by making the weight of the first ball act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the third ball following the second ball can also be guided to the second passage. Furthermore, the length of the first surface can be shortened, which increases the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement member.

A gaming machine CA11 is any one of gaming machines CA1 to CA10, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and an upstream surface disposed on the base member along which the ball rolls toward the first surface, and the shaft is disposed in a position perpendicular to the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface and the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine CA11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the shaft is disposed in a posture perpendicular to the vertical direction and the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface, so that the base member It is possible to downsize the unit in which the displacement member is disposed. In particular, by arranging the base member so that the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface is along the width direction of the gaming machine, the width direction of the gaming machine can be effectively utilized and space for disposing the displacement member can be secured. It's easy to do.

A gaming machine CA12 is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, characterized in that it has a base member and the displacement member is arranged on the base member so that it can be slidably displaced.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the gaming machine CA12 has a displacement member arranged on the base member so that it can slide and be displaced. This allows the displacement member to be made smaller than when, for example, the displacement member is rotatably supported on the base member, and therefore more space can be secured for arranging other members on the base member.

A gaming machine CA13, which is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA12, includes a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and an upstream surface disposed on the base member and along which a ball rolls toward the first surface, the displacement member includes a second surface along which the second ball rolls, the second ball being guided to the second passage in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is positioned vertically lower than the downstream end of the upstream surface.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the displacement member may jump up due to the impact caused by the displacement, and this jump-up of the displacement member causes the displacement member to move away from the downstream end of the upstream surface. If the upstream end of the second surface is located above, there is a possibility that the second ball may not be able to roll from the upstream surface to the second surface. In particular, when the second ball collides with the upstream end of the displaced member that has jumped up (the upstream end of the second surface), the impact causes the displacement member to further jump up (the second ball pushes up the displaced member), and the There is a possibility that the second ball may flow into the path (first surface) where the first ball should roll.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CA13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA12, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the downstream end of the upstream surface Since the upstream end of the second surface is located vertically downward, if the displaceable member rebounds due to the impact caused by the weight of the first ball, it will be lower than the downstream end of the upstream surface. Also, the upstream end of the second surface can be prevented from being located upward. Therefore, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

A gaming machine CA14 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface.

According to gaming machine CA14, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface, so that when the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, it bounces back (jumps up) due to the impact, and when the second ball collides with the upstream end of the jumped-up displacement member (the upstream end of the second surface), the force acting from the second ball on the displacement member can be made to act as a force in the direction of pushing down the displacement member. As a result, the second ball can be made to roll smoothly from the upstream surface to the second surface.

A gaming machine CA15, which is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, has an upstream surface along which a ball rolls toward the first surface, the displacement member has a first surface along which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the displacement trajectory of the upstream surface side of the displacement member is located at a position farther away from the upstream surface than the displacement trajectory of the upstream surface side of the first ball at the reversing position of the first surface.

According to the gaming machine CA15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, it is in the position where the first surface is reversed. Since the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is set at a position farther away from the upstream surface than the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the first sphere, the second sphere may erroneously flow into the first surface ( acceptable) can be suppressed. That is, the second ball is brought into contact with the first ball to keep the second ball apart from the first surface, and the upstream surface side of the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. The second ball can be pushed away from the first surface at the end.

In the gaming machine CA15, the displacement member moves the first ball to a position where the rolling direction of the first surface is reversed until the first ball is displaced from the predetermined position by a predetermined amount or more due to the weight of the first ball. A gaming machine CA16 characterized by fastening.

According to gaming machine CA16, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA15, the displacement member holds the first ball in a position that reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the weight of the first ball displaces it from the predetermined position by a predetermined amount or more, so that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second ball from erroneously flowing into (being accepted by) the first surface. In other words, the second ball is abutted against the first ball to keep it away from the first surface, and the upstream end of the displacement member, which is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, can more reliably push the second ball away in a direction away from the first surface.

Any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16 includes an inflow section, a reciprocating surface on which a ball flowing from the inflow section rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and an outflow section that causes the ball to flow out from the reciprocating surface, and the outflow section The gaming machine CA17 is characterized in that a part is located upstream of the displacement member in the passage route.

According to the gaming machine CA17, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, there is an inflow part, a reciprocating surface on which the ball flowing in from the inflow part rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and a ball from the reciprocating surface. Since the outflow part is located on the upstream side of the displacement member in the passage path, the first ball and the second ball are connected at an interval of a predetermined amount or less, and the first ball The second ball can be easily made to reach the displacement member in a state in which the ball and the second ball are connected with an interval of a predetermined distance or less. In other words, even if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when flowing from the inflow part is larger than the predetermined distance, by being reciprocated on the reciprocating surface, the first ball and the second ball The distance from the second ball can be narrowed (the distance can be set to a predetermined amount or less).

A gaming machine CA18 is characterized in that the width dimension of the reciprocating surface in the gaming machine CA17 is set to a width dimension that allows one ball to pass through.

According to the gaming machine CA18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA17, the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to a width dimension that allows one ball to pass through, so that the ball flows from the inflow portion to the reciprocating surface and reciprocates on the reciprocating surface. It is possible to suppress the first and second balls being displaced from passing each other. Therefore, when the first ball and the second ball are reciprocated on the reciprocating surface, the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be easily closed (the distance can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less). .

A gaming machine CA19 is characterized in that the reciprocating surface of the gaming machine CA18 is inclined upward as it approaches one side and the other side, and the outlet portion is located at the bottom of the reciprocating surface.

According to the gaming machine CA19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upward toward one side and the other side, and the outflow portion is disposed at the lowest part of the reciprocating surface. The first ball and the second ball can flow out from the outflow part in a state where the inertia of the reciprocating displacement on the surface is weakened. That is, it is possible to maintain the state in which the first sphere and the second sphere are connected at an interval of a predetermined amount or less, and to make it easier to flow out.

A gaming machine CA20 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA19, the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line when viewed from above.

According to the gaming machine CA20, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CA19, since the reciprocating surface is formed in a linear shape when viewed from above, when the first ball and the second ball are reciprocated on the reciprocating surface, , the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be easily narrowed (the distance can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less).

A gaming machine CA21 is one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, characterized by having an attraction member that is formed so that the attraction force of a magnet can act on a ball and is arranged with at least its lower surface inclined downward.

According to the gaming machine CA21, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, the machine is provided with an attraction member that is formed so that the attraction force of a magnet can act on the ball and is arranged with at least its lower surface tilted downward, so that such an attraction member can form a passageway for the ball, improving the interest of the game. That is, when a ball is attracted to the downwardly tilted lower surface of the attraction member, the ball can slide by its own weight and be displaced along the lower surface of the attraction member. In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the relationship between the inertial force acting on the ball and the attraction force), an unstable state can be created in which there is a possibility that the ball will fall from the lower surface of the attraction member (i.e., the ball may not reach the end of the passageway (the lower surface of the attraction member)). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member is characterized by having a bottom surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material, and a magnet that applies a magnetic force to the bottom surface forming member.

According to the gaming machine CA22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member includes a lower surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material and a magnet that applies magnetic force to the lower surface forming member, so that the attraction member is spherical. By having a structure in which the surface on which the ball slides is formed by the lower surface of the lower surface forming member, it is easy to adjust the attraction force and optimize the frictional force, and the passage path of the ball can be reliably formed with a simple structure.

Gaming machine CA23 is characterized in that, in gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA21 or CA22, gaming machine CA23 enhances the excitement of the game because the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage. That is, the second ball can be guided by the displacement member to reach the second passage only if the second ball reaches the displacement member while connected to the first ball with a gap of less than a predetermined amount, and this possibility is relatively low. By displacing the second ball, which has arrived through such a low possibility, in an unstable state where there is a possibility that it may fall (it may not reach the end of the bottom surface of the suction member), the player is made to hope that it will pass through safely, enhancing the excitement of the game.

The gaming machine CA23 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is configured such that the first ball guided to the first passage rolls. and a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, the first surface and the second surface at least partially sandwiching the shaft. A gaming machine CA24 characterized in that it is arranged at.

Gaming machine CA24 has the same effects as gaming machine CA23, but also includes a base member and an axis that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member. The displacement member has a first surface along which a first ball guided to the first passage rolls, and a second surface along which a second ball guided to the second passage rolls. The first and second surfaces are at least partially disposed with the axis in between, so that the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball (the position of the first surface is displaced downward), thereby displacing the position of the second surface upward. This makes it easier for the second ball rolling on the second surface to be attracted to the underside of the attraction member.

In gaming machine CA24, gaming machine CA25 is characterized in that the second surface is arranged at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine CA25, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA24, since the second surface is arranged at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction, the second surface is displaced by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. It is possible to suppress the member from being displaced toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward). Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the adsorption member.

A gaming machine CA26 characterized in that the first surface is longer than the second surface in the gaming machine CA24 or CA25.

According to the gaming machine CA26, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines CA24 and CA25, the first surface is longer than the second surface, so that while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the first ball can easily roll on the first surface at the same time. That is, while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the weight of the first ball is made to act on the displacement member, so that the displacement member is prevented from being displaced toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward) by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attraction member.
<Concept of the invention using plate members C120, C2120, and C4120 as examples>
A gaming machine CB1 is characterized in that the gaming machine has a ball passage, the passage comprising a first passage that allows the ball to move back and forth in the forward and backward directions, and a second passage that is connected to the first passage and allows the ball to pass along the left and right directions.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a passage member (stage) that allows the ball to move back and forth is known (JP Patent Publication 2016-198607). However, the above gaming machine has a problem in that the game is not sufficiently interesting.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CB1, the passage includes a first passage that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction, and a second passage that communicates with the first passage and allows the ball to pass along the left-right direction. Since the game is equipped with a passageway, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A gaming machine CB2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CB1, when a first ball and a second ball following the first ball pass through the second passage, the passage to which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed according to the distance between the first ball and the second ball.

According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CB1, when a first ball and a second ball that follows the first ball pass through the second path, the first ball The paths through which the first and second balls are guided are changed depending on the distance between the balls and the second ball, so that the balls are guided to a predetermined path (i.e., the first and second balls are guided to a predetermined path). It is possible to make the player expect that the distance between the ball and the second ball will be a predetermined distance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this case, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is determined by the reciprocating motion in the first path, and the first ball and the second ball cause the ball to pass along the left-right direction. Since the ball flows down from the first path to the second path, the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be easily seen by the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine CB2, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second path is equal to or less than a predetermined amount, at least the second ball is guided to a path that is more advantageous than the path that is guided when the distance exceeds the predetermined amount;
The gaming machine CB3 is characterized in that the first passage is formed so that the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced by the first ball and the second ball being reciprocated.

According to the game machine CB3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine CB2, if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is less than or equal to the predetermined amount, the distance is increased by the predetermined amount. at least a second ball is guided to a path that is more advantageous than the path it would be guided in if it exceeds Since the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced, the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less. As a result, the player can expect to be guided to an advantageous passage, and the interest in the game can be increased.

A game machine CB4, which is any one of the game machines CB1 to CB3, and includes a game board with an opening in the center, and the second passage is disposed at the opening of the game board.

According to the gaming machine CB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines described in any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, the gaming machine CB4 includes a gaming board with an opening in the center, and the second passage is arranged in the opening of the gaming board. Therefore, the space in the front and rear directions can be used effectively. Therefore, it is possible to easily ensure the full length of the second passage.
<About the concept of the invention using magnetic parts C2400, c5400, c6400 (passage part CRt2004) as an example>
In a gaming machine equipped with a displacement member, at least a portion of which is disposed in a ball passage path and is formed to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the The displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball A gaming machine CC1 characterized in that the ball passes through an upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member and is guided to a path different from that of the first ball.

Here, a game machine is known that is equipped with a distribution member that operates based on the weight of the game balls and distributes the game balls into a first passage and a second passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). . However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, the ball only flows downward in the weight direction, so there is a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CC1, when the first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and the displacement member moves toward the first ball. When the second ball is displaced from the predetermined position by a weight of , it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CC1, the path through which the second ball is guided through the upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member is formed by a magnetic part that can attract the ball by magnetic force. CC2.

According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CC1, the path through which the second ball is guided through the upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member is formed by a magnetic part that can attract the ball by magnetic force. Therefore, it is possible to form a mode in which the ball is dropped in the middle of such a path. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CC2, the gaming machine CC3 is characterized in that the magnetic part is located above a portion of the displacement member that is lifted upward.

According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CC2, since the magnetic part is located above the portion lifted upward of the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. If this is not the case, even if the second ball passes through a portion that should be lifted upward, it is possible to reliably create a mode in which the second ball is not attracted to the magnetic part.

In the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported on a shaft, and the part on which the weight of the first ball acts and the part that is lifted upward are located on either side of the shaft of the displacement member, which is the gaming machine CC4.

According to gaming machine CC4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported, and the part on which the weight of the first ball acts and the part that is lifted upward are located on either side of the rotation axis, so that when the second ball passes through the part that is lifted upward, the weight of the first ball can be used to make it easier to maintain the part through which the second ball passes in an upwardly lifted state.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
The gaming machine DA1 is provided with a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway, the displacement member being displaced when a ball enters the passageway, thereby changing the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening and closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced when the ball enters the passage, and changes the ease with which the ball enters the passage, so that the first ball When a ball is hit into the path and a second ball is expected to be hit into the path, or conversely, when the first ball is hit into the path, the second ball is expected to go into the path. When it is expected that the ball will not be hit, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the second ball will hit the path. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine DA1, gaming machine DA2 is characterized in that, when a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage.

According to the game machine DA2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DA1, when a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. It is possible to make it easier for balls that follow the pitched ball (other balls that have not entered the path, subsequent balls) to enter the path. In other words, if one ball enters the passage, a situation can be created in which the following balls are likely to enter the passage in succession, and if the following ball enters the passage, the following balls Due to the ball entering the path, a state can be created in which the next following ball is likely to enter the path. Therefore, the player can expect that a chain of balls entering the aisle will occur due to the ball entering the aisle. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine DA1, gaming machine DA3 is characterized in that, when a ball enters the passageway, the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the passageway.

According to the game machine DA3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced to the side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passage when a ball enters the passage, so that the first effect is achieved. In a state where the ball has entered the passage, if it is expected that the second ball will not enter the passage, it is possible to make it difficult for the second ball to enter the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine DA4, which is one of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage.

According to the gaming machine DA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that enters the passage to move the ball to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator are not required, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine DA2 or DA3, a rolling member that allows a ball entered into the passage to roll and is displaced by the weight of the rolled ball; and a rolling member that transfers the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member. and a transmission means for transmitting the information, and the displacement member is configured such that the rolling member is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and the displacement of the rolling member is transmitted by the transmission means to the passage. A gaming machine DA5 characterized in that the game machine is displaced to a side where it becomes easier for a ball to enter the passage or a side where it becomes difficult for a ball to enter the passage.

According to the gaming machine DA5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DA2 or DA3, the ball that enters the passage can roll, and a rolling member that is displaced by the weight of the rolled ball, and and a transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and the displacement of the rolling member is transmitted by the transmission means. As a result, the ball is displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passageway or to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passageway, so that while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, the ball is not allowed to enter the passageway. The displacement member can be displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage. That is, it is possible to easily maintain (for a longer period of time) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

A gaming machine DA6, which is a gaming machine DA5, includes a plurality of the rolling members.

According to the gaming machine DA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DA5, since it is equipped with a plurality of rolling members, the zone for the ball to roll (rollable distance) is secured, and the ball enters the passage. The period during which the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage can be lengthened. That is, it is possible to easily maintain (for a longer period of time) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

In the gaming machine DA5 or DA6, the ball that enters the passage is rolled on the rolling member by the downward inclination of the rolling member, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is rolling is smaller than the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is not rolling. In the gaming machine DA7,

According to the gaming machine DA7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines DA5 and DA6, a ball that has entered the passage is caused to roll on the rolling member by the downward inclination of the rolling member, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is rolling is made smaller than the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is not rolling, so that it is possible to suppress the imparting of momentum to the ball rolling on the rolling member. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

A gaming machine DA8 is one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA7, characterized in that the rolling member returns by its own weight to the state before it was displaced by the weight of the ball.

According to the game machine DA8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DA5 to DA7, the rolling member is returned by its own weight to the state before being displaced by the weight of the ball, so that the rolling member is driven. This eliminates the need for an actuator for the actuator and a sensor for controlling the actuator, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

A game machine DA9, which is any one of the game machines DA5 to DA8, and is characterized in that it includes an action means that acts on the ball rolling on the rolling member.

According to the game machine DA9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DA5 to DA8, it is provided with an effect means that acts on the ball rolling on the rolling member, so that it can influence the rolling of the ball. That is, by the action of the action means, resistance can be applied to the rolling of the ball, and the rolling speed can be lowered. This increases the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

In the gaming machine DA9, the action means is formed as a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface of the passage and extends in the vertical direction, and a plurality of such action means are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling surface. In the gaming machine DA10,

According to gaming machine DA10, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DA9, the action means is formed as a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface of the passage and extends vertically, and multiple protrusions are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling surface, so that when the ball rolls on the rolling surface, the protrusions (action means) come into contact with it, providing resistance to the rolling of the ball and slowing down the rolling speed. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

On the other hand, since the protrusion (acting means) extends along the vertical direction, resistance is hardly applied to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when a ball jumps upward from the rolling surface of the rolling member, the ball can be quickly dropped downward (to the rolling surface). Therefore, even if the rolling member is displaced upward as the ball bounces upward, the rolling member can be quickly returned to the state in which it was displaced by the weight of the ball. As a result, the displacement member, which had been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the path, is moved back to its initial position (the position before the ball enters the path) by the ball bouncing up from the rolling surface. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects that result in reversion.

In gaming machine DA10, gaming machine DA11 is characterized in that the rolling member is formed as a smooth surface on which the rolling surface on which the ball rolls is smoothly continuous along the rolling direction of the ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DA10, gaming machine DA11 has a rolling member in which the rolling surface on which the ball rolls is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball, so that the ball rolling on the rolling surface can be prevented from bouncing upward (vertically). This prevents the occurrence of a malfunction in which the displacement member that has been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway is returned to its initial position (the position before the ball entered the passageway) by the ball bouncing up from the rolling surface.

The rolling surface does not need to be flat, but may be undulating (a surface whose cross-sectional shape is formed by smoothly connecting arcs). In other words, the rolling surface does not need to have any steps with a height of at least 1/10 of the diameter of the ball.

In the gaming machine DA10 or DA11, the protrusions are formed on both sides of the inner surface of the passage across the rolling surface, and the protrusions on one inner surface and the protrusions on the other inner surface are formed on the inner surface of the passage. A game machine DA12 characterized in that the rolling members are arranged in a staggered manner along the rolling surface.

According to gaming machine DA12, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DA10 or DA11, protrusions are formed on both sides of the rolling surface on the inner side of the passage, and the protrusions on one inner side and the protrusions on the other inner side are arranged in a staggered pattern along the rolling surface of the rolling member, making it easier for the ball to come into contact with the protrusions as it rolls on the rolling surface. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain (for longer) a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

A gaming machine DA13 is any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, characterized in that the rolling member is rotatably supported on a shaft, and a ball that enters the passage rolls on the rolling member toward the supported portion.

According to the game machine DA13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that enters the passage is directed toward the supported part. Since the ball rolls on the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member can be maximized in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the rolling member. That is, the displacement member can be quickly displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage when the ball enters the passage and reaches the rolling member. Therefore, if the distance between a ball that has entered the path and the ball that follows it (other balls that have not entered the path, subsequent balls) is relatively small (for example, if both balls are When the balls are flown down in succession), it is possible to make it easier or harder for the following balls to enter the passage.

In addition, as the ball continues to roll, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually reduced. In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member that was on the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage can be gradually displaced toward its initial position (the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage). This changes expectations that the ball will enter the passage, making the game more interesting.

Furthermore, when a ball that has entered the passageway falls onto the rolling member, the fallen ball can be received at a position where the displacement of the rolling member is large (a position away from the pivoted portion). Thus, the kinetic energy of the fallen ball is absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member, preventing the ball from bouncing upward. As a result, the weight of the ball can be stably applied to the rolling member, stabilizing the state of the displacement member (for example, preventing the displacement member from being temporarily displaced to a side that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the passageway or to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passageway).

A gaming machine DA14 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DA13, a ball that enters the passage falls onto the rolling member.

According to the gaming machine DA14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DA13, the ball that enters the passage is dropped onto the rolling member, so the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is used to move the rolling member. It can be quickly displaced. As a result, the displacement member can be quickly displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passageway. Therefore, if the distance between a ball that has entered the path and the ball that follows it (other balls that have not entered the path, subsequent balls) is relatively small (for example, if both balls are Even when the balls are flown down in succession, it is possible to make it easier or harder for the trailing balls to enter the passage.

Furthermore, when the ball that has entered the passage member is dropped onto a member other than the rolling member (a fixed, non-displaceable member), damage to the other member is likely to occur. For example, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member, thereby suppressing damage. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the passage can be increased by allowing the ball to fall.

A gaming machine DA14 in the gaming machine DA13, wherein the ball rolling on the rolling member is rolled at least to the pivotally supported portion of the rolling member.

According to the gaming machine DA14, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine DA13, the ball rolling on the rolling member is rolled at least to the pivotally supported part (rotating shaft) of the rolling member, so that the rolling member Compared to the case where the ball is ejected before reaching the pivoted part (rotation axis) of the ball, the effect of inertial force accompanying the ejection of the ball (the effect that the weight of the ball is no longer applied) is suppressed, It is possible to suppress the rolling member from flapping in the rotational direction. Therefore, the state of the displacement member can be stabilized (for example, the displacement member can be prevented from being temporarily displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passageway).

A gaming machine DA16 is any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, characterized in that the rolling member is rotatably supported, and a ball that enters the passage rolls on the rolling member in a direction away from the supported portion.

According to the gaming machine DA16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported on a shaft, and the ball that has entered the passage rolls on the rolling member in a direction away from the supported part. Therefore, when the ball rolls on the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member can be maximized at a later stage (when the ball has rolled beyond a predetermined amount). In other words, the timing at which the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is easier to enter the passage or the side where the ball is more difficult to enter the passage can be delayed. Therefore, when the distance between the ball that has entered the passage and the ball following it (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) is relatively large, the following ball can be made easier or more difficult to enter the passage.

Further, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually increased. That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member can be gradually displaced toward the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage. This changes the expectation that the ball will enter the passageway, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine DA17, which is one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA16, is characterized in that when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement member is restricted from displacing to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage.

According to the gaming machine DA17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines DA5 to DA16, the displacement member is moved to the side or passage where the ball is more likely to enter the passage when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball. Since displacement to the side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passageway is restricted, it is illegal to forcibly displace the displacement member to the side where it becomes easier for the ball to enter the passageway or to the side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passageway. can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is regulated by the rolling member, so that the ball is more likely to enter the passage, or A game machine DA18 characterized in that displacement of the displacement member to a side where it becomes difficult for a ball to enter the passageway is restricted.

According to gaming machine DA18, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is restricted by the rolling member, restricting the displacement of the displacement member to the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage, so there is no need to provide a separate part to restrict the forced displacement of the displacement member, and the transmission means can be reused. In other words, the structure for suppressing fraudulent acts that forcibly displace the displacement member can be simplified.

A gaming machine DA19 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball fills the gap and then comes into contact with the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine DA19, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball abuts against the transmission means after filling the gap, so that when the displacement of the rolling member is relatively small, the displacement of the rolling member cannot be transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means. In other words, in order to displace the displacement member to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage, it is necessary to form a displacement in the rolling member that exceeds the gap, and therefore it is difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts such as hitting the gaming machine to displace the rolling member or displacing the rolling member with a foreign object such as a wire.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine having a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that is displaceable and changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway,
The gaming machine DB1 is characterized in that the displacement speed of the displacement member is made variable.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DB1, the displacement speed of the displacement member is configured to be changeable, so that the speed of change in the ease with which the ball enters the passage can be changed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine DB1 is characterized in that the speed of displacement of the displacement member toward a side where it is easier for a ball to enter the passageway is faster than the speed of displacement toward a side where it is more difficult for a ball to enter the passageway. Game machine DB2.

According to gaming machine DB2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DB1, the displacement member is faster in displacement to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than in displacement to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, so that a state where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage is quickly created, and a well-paced presentation can be provided for players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. Also, by relatively slowing down the displacement speed to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, a period of time where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage is secured, and players hoping for the ball to enter the passage can focus on whether or not the ball will enter the passage in time. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine DB1 is characterized in that the displacement speed of the displacement member toward a side where it is easier for a ball to enter the passageway is slower than the displacement speed toward a side where it is more difficult for a ball to enter the passageway. A gaming machine DB3.

According to gaming machine DB3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DB1, the displacement member is slower in displacement speed to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, so that it gradually increases the ease with which the ball can enter the passage, and it is possible to gradually raise the expectations of players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. Also, by quickly creating a state in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, it is possible to provide a well-paced presentation for players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball entered into the passageway to move the ball to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway. Game machine DB4 is characterized in that it is displaced to the side where it becomes difficult.

According to gaming machine DB4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member is displaced by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to either the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, thereby eliminating the need for an actuator for driving the displacement member or a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine having a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that is displaceable and changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway,
The displacement member is provided in plurality,
A gaming machine DC1, characterized in that one of the plurality of displacement members has a displacement mode different from the other displacement members.

A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and changes the ease with which a ball can enter the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). This prior document discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the conventional gaming machines described above have a problem in that the games are not sufficiently interesting.

In contrast, the gaming machine DC1 is equipped with multiple displacement members, one of which has a different displacement pattern from the other displacement members in the passage, so that the combination of the displacement patterns of the multiple displacement members can greatly change the ease with which a ball can enter the passage. As a result, the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

Examples of the displacement mode include the timing at which the displacement begins, the displacement direction, the displacement speed, and combinations of these.

In the gaming machine DC1, the gaming machine DC2 is characterized in that the displacement of the one displacement member is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the displacement of the other displacement member was started.

In addition to the effects of the game machine DC1, the game machine DC2 has the advantage that the displacement of one displacement member begins after the displacement of the other displacement member has begun and a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the position at which the ease of a ball entering the passage is changed can be varied, as well as the timing. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DC1 or DC2, comprising an upstream passageway through which the ball flows down into the passageway, and a displacement direction of the displacement member is substantially parallel to a rolling direction of the ball in the upstream passageway. Machine DC3.

According to the game machine DC3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DC1 or DC2, it is provided with an upstream passageway through which the ball flows down into the passageway, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is approximately parallel to the rolling direction of the ball in the upstream passageway. Therefore, the rolling direction and rolling position of the ball rolling in the upstream passage and the displacement direction and displacement position of the displacement member can be related to the ease with which the ball enters the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DC4, which is any one of the gaming machines DC1 to DC3, is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage.

According to the game machine DC4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DC1 to DC3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that enters the passage to move the ball to the side or side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator are not required, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
<About the concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is displaceably formed and changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage,
comprising a rolling member configured to allow a ball entered into the passage to roll;
The displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member to be displaced to a side where it becomes easier for the ball to enter the passageway or a side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passageway,
The gaming machine DD1 is characterized in that the rolling member is formed such that the ball can fall in the middle of the ball's rolling path.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

In contrast, gaming machine DD1 is equipped with a rolling member that is formed so that a ball that has entered the passage can roll, and the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, and since the rolling member is formed so that the ball can fall midway along its rolling path, the period during which the weight of the ball can be utilized can be changed depending on the distance the ball rolls along its rolling path. In other words, the ease with which the ball can enter the passage can be changed depending on the state of the ball rolling on the rolling member. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the game machine DD1, the game machine DA2 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member.

According to the game machine DD2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DD1, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member to be displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. While the ball that has entered the passage rolls on the rolling member, it is possible to make it easier for the balls following the ball (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) to enter the passage.

That is, when one ball enters the passage and while that ball is rolling on the rolling member, a state can be created in which the trailing ball easily enters the passage, and the trailing ball enters the passage. If the ball enters and rolls on the rolling member, a state can be created in which the next trailing ball is likely to enter the passage. Therefore, the player can expect that a chain of balls entering the aisle will occur due to the ball entering the aisle. On the other hand, if a ball that has entered the passage is dropped in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member, the weight of the ball cannot be utilized, making it impossible to create a condition that makes it easier for the following ball to enter the passage. . This allows the player to pay attention to the rolling state of the ball (whether it can reach the end of the rolling path or not). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine DD3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DD1, it is provided with a dropping means that makes it easier for the rolling balls to drop from the rolling member when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member.

According to the game machine DD3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DD1, when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member, it is equipped with a falling means that makes it easier for the rolling balls to fall from the rolling member. In a state where the ball is rolling on the rolling member, the player can pay attention to whether or not another ball will further flow down into the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the displacement member in the gaming machine DD3 may be one that uses the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member to be displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway, and the displacement member may be displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway. It may be displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to be hit. In the former case, while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, there is a high possibility that another ball will further flow down into the passage, so it is difficult to determine whether such another ball will flow down into the passage or not. This makes it easier for players to pay attention to where the game is going. In the latter case, while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, it is possible to reduce the possibility that another ball will further flow down into the passage, giving the player a sense of security.

The game machine DD2 or DD3 is provided with a falling passage through which a ball that has fallen in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member passes, and the ball that has passed through the falling passage is given a more advantageous game than the ball that has passed through the passage. A gaming machine DD4 characterized in that conditions are provided.

According to the gaming machine DD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines DD2 and DD3, a falling passage through which the ball that falls on the way of the rolling path of the rolling member passes is provided, and the ball that passes through the falling passage is given more favorable game conditions than the ball that passes through the passage, so that the player can pay more attention to whether the ball falls on the way of the rolling path of the rolling member. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.
<Concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: A downwardly inclined thorny stage is driven to move back and forth, and the thorns give randomness to the destination of the ball as it flows down the stage along the downward incline. The reciprocating drive suppresses the ball from being held by the thorns.>
A gaming machine EA1 is provided with a passage member formed so that a ball can move, the gaming machine being characterized by comprising a displacement means formed so as to be able to displace at least a portion of the passage member and to impart a change in the direction of movement of the ball.

A gaming machine equipped with a passageway member through which a ball can move is known (JP Patent Publication 2016-198607). This prior document discloses a technology for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passageway member). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the change in the direction of the ball's movement is monotonous, making the game less interesting.

In response to this, the gaming machine EA1 is equipped with a displacement means that is configured to displace at least a portion of the passage member to change the direction of movement of the ball, and by displacing the passage member with the displacement means, it is possible to diversify the change in the direction of movement of the ball moving through the passage member. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the direction of movement of the ball from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EA2, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine EA1, a means for imparting a change in the direction of movement of the ball is provided in the passage member, the passage member has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the means for imparting a change in the direction of movement of the ball is provided with a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion.

According to the gaming machine EA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EA1, it is provided with an imparting means arranged on the passage member for imparting a change in the moving direction of the ball, the passage member has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the imparting means has a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion, so that the change in the moving direction of the ball when rolling on the passage member (rolling portion) can be diversified, and the change in the moving direction of the ball can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the moving direction of the ball is changed. In other words, the ball rolling on the rolling part has a relatively low moving speed, and it takes a relatively long time to move the rolling part, but the time required for the ball to move is further increased by the action received from the protrusion or recess. Can be done. As a result, the manner in which the moving direction of the ball is changed can be easily seen by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine EA2, the displacement means displaces the passage member in a displacement direction having at least a displacement component parallel to a rolling direction of a ball rolling on a rolling portion of the passage member. EA3.

According to the gaming machine EA3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine EA2, the displacement means displaces the passage member in a displacement direction that has at least a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling portion of the passage member. Therefore, a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball can be formed in the protrusion. As a result, it is possible to easily change the direction of movement of the ball. Furthermore, the direction of movement of the ball can be varied.

Gaming machine EA4 is characterized in that in gaming machine EA2 or EA3, the protrusions are arranged with at least an interval that allows a ball to move between the protrusions.

According to the gaming machine EA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines EA2 and EA3, the protrusions are arranged with at least a gap between them that allows the ball to move, so that the ball can be prevented from staying in the passage member (rolling portion). Therefore, in order to prevent the ball from staying in the passage member (rolling portion), it is possible to prevent the passage member (rolling portion) from being displaced along a complex trajectory or with a large displacement amount or displacement speed. As a result, the displacement means can be simplified.
<Concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: A given value is given when a stage is passed>
The gaming machine EB1 is provided with a passage member through which a ball can move, and is characterized in that it is provided with a change means for changing the ease with which a ball can pass through the passage member, and is formed so that a predetermined value can be imparted to a ball that has passed through the passage member.

A gaming machine including a passage member in which a ball is movable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). This prior art document discloses a technique for reciprocating a ball along a stage (passage member). However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is not possible to give the player the ability to enjoy the game of seeing whether or not the ball can pass through (whether or not it can cross the stage and reach the end), and the interest of the game is lost. The problem was that it was insufficient.

In response to this, gaming machine EB1 is equipped with a change means for changing the ease with which a ball can pass through the passage member, and is configured so that a predetermined value can be imparted to a ball that has passed through the passage member, so that the player can enjoy the game of whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not there is a possibility of the ball passing through the passage member and being awarded the predetermined value). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine EB2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine EB1, the change means includes a displacement means for displacing at least a portion of the passage member.

According to the game machine EB2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine EB1, the changing means includes a displacement means for displacing at least a part of the passage member, so that when the ball moves through the passage member, the displacement means causes the passage member to By displacing the ball, randomness can be imparted to the direction of movement of the ball. That is, the displacement means (displacement of the passage member) functions as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member (crossing the passage member and obtaining the possibility of being assigned a predetermined value). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not it can cross the passage member and obtain the possibility of being given a predetermined value). . As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine EB3, in which the passage member in the gaming machine EB2 has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the changing means has a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion.

According to the gaming machine EB3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine EB2, the passage member is provided with a rolling part in which a ball is formed to be able to roll, and the changing means is protruded from the rolling part of the passage member. Since the plurality of protrusions or the plurality of recesses provided in the rolling part are provided, randomness can be imparted to the rolling direction (moving direction) of the ball rolling on the rolling part. In other words, the protrusions and recesses can function as means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member (traversing the passage member and obtaining the possibility of being given a predetermined value). It is possible to enhance the gameplay of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not the ball can cross the passage member and obtain the possibility of being given a predetermined value). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines EB1 to EB3, the passage member includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball passing through the first passage member can move, and the passage member has the predetermined value. is formed to be able to be applied to the ball passing through the second passage member, and the changing means changes the ease with which the ball passes through the first passage member, and the change means changes the ease with which the ball passes through the first passage member; A gaming machine EB4 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that the ease with which the ball passes can be varied.

According to the game machine EB4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines EB1 to EB3, the passage member includes a first passage member and a second passage formed such that a ball passing through the first passage member can move. a member, the predetermined value is configured to be impartable to the ball passing through the second passage member, and the changing means changes the ease with which the ball passes through the first passage member; Since the second passage member is formed in such a manner that the ease of passage of the ball can be varied, it is possible to determine whether the ball can pass through the passage member (crossing the passage member and reaching a predetermined value). The first passage member and the second passage member can provide the player with the ability to enjoy the game (whether or not the possibility of being granted the same can be obtained) in different ways between the first passage member and the second passage member. As a result, the gameplay can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

Examples of means for changing the ease of ball passage include the shape and attitude (tilt), the displacement mode of the passage member (type of displacement (rotation, linear displacement, curvilinear displacement, combinations of these), displacement direction, displacement speed, mode of reciprocating motion (period, amplitude), etc.), and the mode of the surface (rolling surface) of the passage member along which the ball moves (presence or absence of protrusions or recesses, mode of protrusions and recesses (size, shape, arrangement, etc.)). In other words, when the mode for changing the ease of ball passage in the first passage member is different from the mode for changing the ease of ball passage in the second passage member, it means that at least some or all of the above-mentioned means are different between the first passage member and the second passage member.
<Concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: Retention means for retaining balls>
Gaming machine EC1 is provided with a passage member formed to allow a ball to move, the machine comprising: a ball entry means formed to allow a predetermined value to be assigned to an entered ball; and a second passage member formed to allow a ball that has passed through the passage member to move, the passage member and the second passage member being formed to allow a ball to fall midway along the ball's movement path, and a ball that has passed through the second passage member being more likely to enter the ball entry means than a ball that has passed through the passage member.

A gaming machine including a passage member in which a ball is movable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). This prior art document discloses a technique for reciprocating a ball along a stage (passage member). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the ball that is thrown down from a predetermined position on the stage enters the winning hole (ball entry hole) directly, so there is a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EC1, the ball entering means is formed to be able to impart a predetermined value to the ball that has entered the ball, and the second passage is formed such that the ball that has passed through the passage member can move. Since the ball passes through the passage member and moves through the second passage member, the time required for the ball to enter the ball entry means can be increased accordingly. In other words, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player can expect the ball to enter the ball entering means, thereby heightening the player's sense of anticipation. In particular, since the ball that has passed through the second passage member is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the ball that has passed through the passage member, the player feels a sense of exhilaration that the ball is about to enter the ball entry means. You can have the player hold the ball and follow the direction of the ball. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine EC1, the second passage member includes a rolling part formed so that a ball can roll, and a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling part or a plurality of protrusions recessed in the rolling part. A gaming machine EC2 characterized by having a recessed portion.

According to the gaming machine EC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine EC1, the second passage member includes a rolling part in which a ball can roll, and a plurality of protrusions or rolling parts protruding from the rolling part. Since the moving part is provided with a plurality of recesses, the moving direction of the ball when rolling on the second passage member (rolling part) is changed, and whether or not the ball can pass through the second passage member ( It is possible to provide the player with the ability to enjoy the game (whether or not he or she can cross the second passage member and obtain the possibility of the ball entering the ball entering means). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

It also makes it easier for players to see the movement of the ball. That is, while the ball rolls on the rolling part at a relatively slow speed and it takes a relatively long time for the rolling part to move, the action of the protrusions and recesses can further increase the time it takes for the ball to move. As a result, it is easier for players to follow the direction of the ball, and the period during which the ball can be expected to enter the ball entry means is extended, building up the player's sense of anticipation.

Amusement machine EC3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a displacement means that is configured to displace the passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball in the gaming machine EC1 or EC2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EC1 and EC2, gaming machine EC3 is equipped with a displacement means that is capable of displacing the passage member and imparting a change in the moving direction of the ball, so that it is possible to impart randomness to the moving direction of the ball. In other words, the displacement means (displacement of the passage member) can function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member and reaching the second passage member. This creates a gameplay that allows the player to enjoy whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not the ball can reach the second passage member, and ultimately whether or not the ball can enter the ball entry means). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

Amusement machine EC4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second displacement means that is configured to displace the second passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball in the gaming machine EC3.

According to the gaming machine EC4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine EC3, it is provided with a second displacement means that can displace the second passage member and change the moving direction of the ball, so that the moving direction of the ball can be changed randomly. can be given gender. That is, as means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member and reaching the second passage member, and from passing through the second passage member and entering the ball entry means, the second passage member is used. 2 displacement means (displacement of the second passage member) can function. Therefore, whether or not the ball that has passed through the passage member can reach the second passage member, and whether the reached ball can pass through the second passage member (whether the ball can enter the ball entry means or not) ) can create a fun gameplay experience. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine EC5, in which the displacement mode of the passage member by the displacement means is different from the displacement mode of the second passage member by the second displacement means.

According to the game machine EC5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine EC4, the manner in which the passage member is displaced by the displacement means and the manner in which the second passage member is displaced by the second displacement means are different, so that the manner in which the ball is displaced is improved. can be diversified. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the manner in which the passage member is displaced by the displacement means and the manner in which the second passage member is displaced by the second displacement means are different means, for example, the type of displacement (rotation, linear displacement, curved displacement, or a combination thereof). ), displacement direction, displacement speed, mode of reciprocating motion (period, amplitude), etc., at least in part or in whole, are different between the first passage member and the second passage member.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, DA1 to DA19, DB1 to DB4, A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of DC1 to DC4, DD1 to DD4, EA1 to EA4, EB1 to EB4, and EC1 to EC5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, DA1 to DD4, and EA1 to EC5. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined play area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the play area. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) located at a specific position within the game area opens in a specific manner, allowing balls to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of winning balls.

Gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, DA1 to DD4 and EA1 to EC5, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a gaming machine equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped by the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever) and stopped by the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, the definitive identification information at the time of stopping being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, the gaming machine using balls as gaming media, requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
65b Opening and closing plate (part of introduction means, receiving state changing means, avoidance means)
86 Center frame (opening)
141 Design elements (partition means, part of avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 Opening (second specified portion, ball receiving portion)
317 Long front-rear protrusion (part of the first flow path, part of the protrusion, second protrusion, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner protruding portions (part of the branching means, part of the protruding portion, first protruding portion, part of the state switching means)
319 Left and right outer protrusions (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of path configuration means)
330 Middle member (part of delay means, part of route configuration means)
334 First flow path configuration section (part of the path configuration means, front and rear flow path section)
335 Second flow path configuration portion (predetermined portion, part of path configuration means, left-right path)
336 Third flow path configuration section (part of the path configuration means, front-rear direction path, front-rear flow path section)
351 Light emitting means 370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of path configuration means)
600 First operating unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (support means)
616a: Straight portion (part of the support means, first area, limiting portion)
616b Curved portion (part of the support means, second area, limiting portion)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of the installation means)
642 Cylindrical part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Protruding decorative part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (position changing means)
661a: First performance surface (first visible surface, first surface)
661b Second performance surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decorative fixing members (part of auxiliary means)
700 Second operating unit (displacement means)
787a1 First main decorative surface (part of first visible surface)
787a2 First minor decorative surface (part of the second visible surface)
787b1 Second main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787b2 Second minor decorative surface (part of the second visible surface)
800 Third operating unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outer light emitting unit (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of assembly)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 First covered part (part of the visible surface)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 Second Covering Section (Part of the Visible Surface)
C1 collar (part of the arrangement means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid portion (part of the mounting means, second portion)
P1 sphere (part of the displaceable means)
SE11: Probability change detection sensor (part of the passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)
C13 Game board C60 Base board (game board)
C60a Openings C122, C2122, C4122 Lower bottom surface portion (reciprocating surface, first passage)
C122a Outflow surface (outflow section)
C123a, C4123a Cutout section (inlet section)
C130, C2130 Back member (base member)
C140, C2140 First intermediate member (base member)
C142, C2142 Bottom surface (upstream surface, second passage)
C144, C2144 Passage section (first passage)
C170, C2170, C3170 Distribution member (displacement member, main body)
C172, C2172 Receiving section (first surface)
C172b, C2172b Bottom surface (first surface)
C173, C2173 Rolling part (second surface)
C2174 Axis C190 Decorative member (weight part)
C192 Shaft C2300 Magnet (attraction member)
C2400, C5400 Magnetic part (attraction member, lower surface forming member)
COPin, COP2000in Receiving port (inlet)
CRt2 Second passage (first passage)
CRt3 Third passage (second passage)
CRt4 Fourth passage (first passage)
CRt5 Fifth passage (second passage)
CRt2001 1st passage (1st passage)
CRt2002 Second Passage (Second Passage)
CRt2003 3rd passage (1st passage)
CRt2004 4th passage (2nd passage)
CRt2005 5th passage (2nd passage)
CB1 ball (first ball)
CB2 ball (second ball)
D13 Game board (game machine)
D131f Protrusion (acting means, protrusion)
D131fa Second protrusion (dropping means)
D141g Protrusion (acting means, protrusion)
D170, D3170, D8170 Rolling member D180 Displacement member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 Transmission member (transmission means)
D4220 Second rolling member (rolling member)
DRt3 Third passage (upstream passage)
DRt6 6th Passage (Passage)
DRt9 9th Passage (Fall Passage)
E135b Central passage (ball entry means)
E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E133150, E14150, E15150 Distribution passage (passage member, first passage member)
E2150, E3150, E11150 Distribution passage (passage member)
E4150, E16150 Second distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E5150, E17150 Third distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 Protrusions (imparting means, protrusions, changing means, displacement means)
E2151, E3151 Rolling surface (rolling part)
E160 Central passage (ball entry means)
E190, E4190, E5190 Driving means (changing means, displacing means, second displacing means)
E2190 Elastic spring (displacement means)
E196, E196a Pinion gear (displacement means)
E196b, E196c Pinion gear (second displacement means)
E5196 Second pinion gear (second displacement means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A gaming machine equipped with a passageway member along which a ball can move is known (Patent Document 1). This prior document discloses a technique for rolling a ball back and forth along a stage (passageway member).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198607

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the balls that flow down from a designated position on the stage go directly into the winning hole (ball entry hole), which creates a problem in that the game is not very entertaining.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is provided with a passage member formed so that the ball can move, a ball entry means formed so that a predetermined value can be assigned to the entered ball, and a second passage member formed so that the ball that has passed through the passage member can move, and the passage member and the second passage member are formed so that the ball can fall midway along the ball's movement path, and the ball that has passed through the second passage member is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a ball that has passed through the passage member.

The gaming machine described in claim 1 can increase the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable prize winning device and a distribution device. 13A and 13B are front oblique views of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable prize winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a variable prize winning device. FIG. FIG. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16; An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and winnings for normal patterns. This is a diagram showing the changes over time in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member of the distribution device in the first round for each jackpot type. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a performance standby state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40 . A front view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an extended state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operating unit in the extended state. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the amount and angle of displacement of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotating member; 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams showing changes in angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. 28. be. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 30. be. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 4A and 4B are front views of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b). 1A to 1C are front views of the performance device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in a time series. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. (a) to (d) are front schematic diagrams of operation units schematically illustrating examples of combined operations of each operation unit in chronological order. (a) to (d) are front schematic diagrams of operation units schematically illustrating examples of combined operations of each operation unit in chronological order. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow LXXXa in FIG. 78, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow LXXXb in FIG. 78. A cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77. A cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77. 79 is a sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. 78. FIG. 77(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame at part LXXXIVa in FIG. 81, and FIG. 77(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame at line LXXXIVb-LXXXIVb in FIG. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77. 78 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. FIG. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of a lower frame according to a third embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower frame. 94A is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 93, and FIG. 94B is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. A cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. 93 is a sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 92. FIG. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCVIII-XCVIII in Figure 94. 95 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. 94. FIG. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. 93 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 92. FIG. 93 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 92. FIG. 102(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CIII-CIII. FIG. FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a lower frame in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a top view of the dish member in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member taken along the line CVIIIb-CVIIIb in FIG. 108(a), and (c) is a top view of the dish member in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the dish member taken along the CVIIIc-CVIIIc line in a). (a) is a sectional view of the lower frame in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the XCIX-XCIX line in FIG. 94, and (b) is a sectional view of the lower frame in the seventh embodiment. , corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 8th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is a top view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is a front view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower frame. 116A is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIa in FIG. 116, and FIG. 116B is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIb in FIG. 4A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. 4A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along the CXXIIa-CXXIIa line in FIG. 115, (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along the CXXIIb-CXXIIb line in FIG. ) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of a lower frame in a ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame in the tenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a partial enlarged rear view of the lower frame in the twelfth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame in a 13th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame. 23A to 23C are partial enlarged rear views of a lower frame in a fourteenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame in the fifteenth embodiment. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CXXXIIIa-CXXXIIIa in FIG. 132(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 132(b). It is a diagram. 120 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section taken along the CXXIIc-CXXIIc line in FIG. 119. It is a front view of the game board in a 16th embodiment. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. 141 , (a) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIIIa in FIG. 141 , (b) is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIIIb in FIG. 141 , and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame along line CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc in FIG. 141 . (a) is a front view of the lower frame in a state where illustration of the front member is omitted, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame in a state where illustration of the back side cover member is omitted. (c) is a top view of the lower frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CXLVa-CXLVa in FIG. 144(c), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CXLVb-CXLVb in FIG. 145(a). is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame. (a) is a front view of the lower frame with the front member omitted, (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame with the rear cover member omitted, and (c) is a top view of the lower frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa line in FIG. 146(c), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the CXLVIIb-CXLVIIb line in FIG. 147(a), (c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame. 145 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the seventeenth embodiment, corresponding to the cross section taken along line CXLVa-CXLVa in FIG. 144. (a) is a front perspective view of the distribution passage, (b) is a front view of the distribution passage as seen in the direction of arrow CXLIXb in Fig. 149 (a), and (c) is a front perspective view of the distribution passage in Fig. 149 (b) FIG. 149(d) is a bottom view of the distribution passage when viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIXc in FIG. 149(b), and FIG. 145 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the eighteenth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CXLVa-CXLVa in FIG. 144. FIG. (a) is a front view of the lower frame in the nineteenth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. 23A is a front view of the lower frame in the nineteenth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a front view of the lower frame in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is a top view of the lower frame. 20(a) is a front view of the lower frame in the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the twenty-first embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the twenty-second embodiment, and (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame in the embodiment. 20A is a partial top view of a lower frame in a twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 20B is a partial top view of a lower frame in a twenty-fifth embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view of the distribution passage, (b) is a view of the distribution passage in the twenty-seventh embodiment as seen in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passage, and (c) is a diagram of the distribution passage in the twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 12(d) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the distribution passage in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and (e) is a view in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passage in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the distribution passage. 3A is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the thirty-first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame in the thirty-second embodiment. FIG.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 71, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). (not shown) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80 etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to shield various structures arranged on the outside of the center frame 86 from its front side to the rear side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, whereas when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held in response to winnings in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the state shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot has ended as an added value, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability fluctuation), in other words, a state of play in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability fluctuation) includes a game state in which the probability of a jackpot increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), and the probability of a hit of the second pattern described below increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability fluctuation, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than during a probability fluctuation. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second pattern increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state when it is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100. During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in the time saving state for a period of 100 fluctuations.

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 140a (electric device) associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric device 140a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140 than when the electric device 140a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 140a is released in one win is not determined, and the winning of the second symbol is not determined. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal probability.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the back case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window 60a of the base plate 60. It is arranged. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and back. has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower portions are displayed. Three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that, instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for displaying fluctuations. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning lotteries can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning lottery, giving the player more opportunities to have the electric device 140a of the second winning slot 140 open. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 140 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 140a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for balls to enter the second prize opening 140. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 140a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning hole 140, and balls can always be won.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate 67, making it easier to win at the second winning port 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning port 140 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured symmetrically, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" and for the second winning slot 140 with a "left hit". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is shot.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b (see Figure 11) as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include the drive motors 631, 731, 782, and 861.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be explained. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. In FIG. 6(a), the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b is illustrated in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the ball from flowing down to the specific winning opening 65a, and in FIG. The opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state in which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened to allow the ball to flow down. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The variable winning device 65 is formed so that when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 65b is inclined downward toward the rear side so that it can receive a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b and guide it to the specific winning opening 65a.

Since the electric device 140a is located above the center of the opening and closing plate 65b (see Figure 2), the balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are limited to balls that stray from the electric device 140a and flow down. In other words, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b in the center, but mainly in the parts on the outside of the electric device 140a. In other words, the placement of balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the outside of the opening and closing plate 65b.

Note that the arrangement of the ball after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball may be placed closer to the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening/closing plate 65b side (glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) is formed as a curved surface that protrudes downward as it goes toward the back side from the lower end of the front end which is arranged opposite to the front end). The degree to which momentum is lost due to collision can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be placed closer to the left-right center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either forward or backward. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in a side view is formed to be located at the lower front, making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening and closing plate 65b side. In addition, the front design member 141 is shaped so that the left and right width becomes smaller as it moves downward at the left and right ends, making it easier to secure space between the opening and closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the balls that have landed on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without leakage. On the near side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right ends of the lower surface 163a so that a ball rolling to the left and right outside by the lower surface 163a can move over with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b outside the left and right of this inclined flow lower surface 163a1, a guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion that extends forward and inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is shifted rearward as it moves inward to the left and right.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided downward along the slope of the slope, so that the ball can be guided down the slope. 163a1 with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts its closing operation with a ball riding on the opening/closing plate 65b, even if the ball is located on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will not continue. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, if the flow of the ball deteriorates and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball that is swept backward due to the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b bounces off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction of opening the opening/closing plate 65b (in the front side), it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b will open unintentionally or otherwise malfunction.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the opening and closing plate 65b closes by rising up. In other words, a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the movement of the opening and closing plate 65b, so that the ball does not move to the left or right of the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b, and almost all of the balls resting on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning opening 65a.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged closer to the left and right outer sides or there are a large number of balls, there is a possibility that the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will be delayed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface part 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate part 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, so that the flow of balls guided to the specific prize opening 65a can be retained. Therefore, the speed of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be maintained.

In addition, instead of modifying the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rests in the open state is formed in a flat surface (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b first flows backward, and then flows left and right due to the effect of the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, making it easier to avoid ball collisions on the opening/closing plate 65b.

That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will once move backward in parallel, so it is possible to avoid the balls colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to the case where the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b has a horizontally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a and a horizontal flow is formed in the rolling ball, the rolling surface on the opening/closing plate 65b is Since the possibility that the movement of the ball will become irregular can be reduced, unintended malfunctions can be prevented.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surfaces 163a3 that abut against the pivot tips at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby improving the reproducibility of the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b. The abutment surfaces 163a3 are formed in a pair on the left and right, and are designed to match the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact. This makes it easier to stabilize the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b, and by receiving the load at the time of abutment on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, improving durability.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 and has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening/closing plate 65b disposed opposite to the opening/closing plate 65b with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed in front of the contact surface 163a3, and is configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface 163a3 is chipped, it may become impossible to maintain the repeatability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-to-rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b come into surface contact with the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, thereby maintaining the stability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b. This improves the reproducibility of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

Note that the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since contact with the opening/closing plate 65b occurs when the contact surface portion 163a3 has a normal shape, there may be a disadvantage that load is likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the game ball that is in the process of being received by the opening and closing plate 65b can be configured to be received in a manner that pushes it into the opening and closing plate 65b due to the shape of the front design member 141 described above.

That is, in the state in which the ball is being accepted (for example, in a state in which it is sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific prize opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball does not match the lower shape of the front design member 141. When it touches, it can be made to flow down inside the specific winning a prize opening 65a by being guided by its curved shape. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where a ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming section 336, making it easier to ensure visibility to the third flow path forming section 336. can do.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b, so when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b is arranged on the right and left sides of the electric accessory 140a. limited to.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided by the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to the left and right outer positions than the electric accessory 140a. Thereby, on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a, it is possible to secure visibility at the left and right inner positions than the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration downstream of the specific winning port 65a (the side where the balls flow after passing through the specific winning port 65a) will be described. Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that Figures 7 and 8 show the configuration arranged on the base plate 60 with all components removed except for the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, there are balls that have entered the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the general winning hole 63 (see FIG. 2). A collection gutter 150 is provided in which a path for flowing the ball to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

The collecting gutter 150 has a grooved portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the grooved portion that faces the base plate 60 is open. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge passage is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path section 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning opening 64, a second flow path section 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning opening 140, and a plurality of third flow path sections 153 that form flow paths on the left and right for balls that enter the general winning openings 63 located on both the left and right sides.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left, and the second flow path section 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right. The third flow path section 153 is configured as a flow path that extends below the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are positioned in the left-right center of the play area when viewed from the front, the flow of balls that enter the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is directed from the left-right center to the left-right outer side by the collecting gutter 150. This allows a space to be created below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and this space can be used to position the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described below.

9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300. It is an exploded rear perspective view of. Note that in FIGS. 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is illustrated, and illustrations of other parts are omitted, and illustrations of other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, The base of the base plate 60 is visible. Further, in FIG. 9, for convenience of explanation, the center frame 86 is shown assembled to the base plate 60.

The following describes the fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. The variable winning device 65 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 at the top that is fastened to the variable winning device 65, and an insertion hole 331 at the left and right that is fastened to the collecting gutter 150. In other words, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as they are, whether the distribution device 300 is provided or the distribution device 300 is not provided. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collection gutter 150 can be used in common.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path along which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profits obtained by the player are controlled to change based on the detection results of the balls flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, and details will be described later.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like, and a fixed member disposed on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and a receiving member 163 is arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive the ball that has passed through the specific prize opening 65a. , an intervening member 164 that is arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervenes as a connecting part with the sorting device 300; A state switching device 165 is fastened to and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether electricity is applied or not.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, the rear side of the fixed member 161 is three-dimensional, projecting toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that abuts the base plate 60 on the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to accommodate this boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. In other words, the boundary portion 161a is the portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary part 161a, there is a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate-like shape that is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. and a pair of left and right extended support plates 161b having a substantially T-shape, including a longitudinally elongated plate-like part extending downward at a midway position of the laterally elongated plate-like part.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the rear range of the specific winning opening 65a and the downstream path of the distribution device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support part 161c protrudes from the horizontally long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support part 161d protrudes from the vertically long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary part 161a. The protruding support portion 161e that protrudes from the top surface of the portion has a function of supporting the sorting device 300, and the details will be described later.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f, which is protruded symmetrically below the center of the specific winning opening 65a inside the boundary 161a, has the function of contacting the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 and guiding the balls as they flow down.

Multiple through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged on the inside and outside of the boundary portion 161a. Multiple fastened portions 161h having female threads for inserting the fastening screws that are inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged on the inside of the boundary portion 161a.

The fastening portion 161i, which has a female thread for threading the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is positioned outside the boundary portion 161a at the gap (center position from left to right) of the boundary portion 161a. In other words, the fastening portion 161i is disposed at the connection portion (see FIG. 9) between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric role object 140a among the through holes formed in the base plate 60.

The front design member 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is uniform. The ball is allowed to flow down within the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161.

The rear side of the front design member 162 is provided with a number of fastening portions 162a that are arranged in positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and have female threads that allow the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g to be screwed in, and a number of extension portions 162b, 162c that extend to the rear side in a shape that covers the fastening portions 162a from above.

The extending parts 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened part 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened part 162a. can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the downward flow path of the ball. That is, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b (two locations on the left and right center sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outer sides. It is possible to suppress the ball riding on the portion 162b from flowing to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side. That is, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, by forming the upper surfaces of the extension parts 162c (two parts on both the left and right ends) that extend to both the left and right ends as inclined surfaces that slope downwards toward the inside of the left and right sides, the flow path of the balls flowing on the extension parts 162c can be unified with the flow path of the balls on the extension parts 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the area in which the flowing balls are arranged compared to the number of balls flowing down (the ball arrangement density can be increased), and to secure areas where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (space where no flow path is formed).

Although the front design member 162 illustrated in FIG. 11 is shown in a plain color and has good visibility on the back side, the front design member 162 does not need to be in a plain color. For example, the front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated by pasting a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or a groove may be dug in the front design member 162 in a geometric pattern, and the groove may be illuminated with light. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent with a plain color or with the above-described decoration added.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material into a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) with an open front side, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, a contact surface portion 163a3, and an auxiliary contact surface 163a4. , a lower surface portion 163a forming a downstream surface on the inside of the frame, a ball passage hole 163b provided as a through hole through which a ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position that matches the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161. A plurality of insertion holes 163c into which the fastening screws arranged in and fastened and fixed to the fastened part 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female threaded part into which the fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and which are located in the left and right center. It includes a pair of fastened parts 163d disposed on the sides, and a plurality of fastened parts 163e each having a female threaded part into which a fastening screw inserted into the state switching device 165 is screwed.

The lower surface 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outward from the left and right central portions as apexes, and is provided with an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward to the rear at a position one step lower than the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces, so that a ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that engages with the back side of the receiving member 163. In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage hole 163b is detected by the detection sensor SE1.

The intervening member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has a main body part 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downwardly toward the rear, and a fastened part of the receiving member 163 that is formed through the upper side of the main body part 164a. A pair of insertion holes 164b into which the fastening screws screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is arranged, and both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a. A pair of fastened parts 164d formed with female threads into which fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened part 164d formed through the upper part of the main body part 164a to be fastened with the fixed member 161. It includes an insertion hole 164e into which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light emitting board 164c is disposed with the surface on which the LED is arranged facing obliquely forward and upward, and when viewed from the front, the light emitting board 164c is positioned directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 6), and the second winning prize It is placed directly below the mouth 140. Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of view of a player who desires to enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and gazes at the spot diagonally backward and downward.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light emitting board 164c to light up when the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a The player can easily understand whether or not a problem has occurred.

With the above-described configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. As a result, the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 can be fixed more firmly than the case where the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. Further, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the arrangement of the sorting device 300 between the fixed member 161 and receiving member 163 and Relative positional displacement can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws screwed into the fastened part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for passing wires and for heat radiation. A lower case part 165b formed in the shape of a deep box with an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, and an electromagnetic solenoid 165c that is engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c. A slide portion 165d that slides and a rotary member that is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in an arrangement such that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case portion 165b and rotates as the slide portion 165d slides. It includes a moving part 165e and an upper lid part 165g which is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted through a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating part 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped part can engage with it, and the transmission protrusion 65c that protrudes rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b fits into this recess and engages with it. The transmission protrusion 65c is positioned eccentrically from the metal shaft rod part 65d that forms the rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. By configuring it in this way, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused to occur in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating part 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 seen from below.

As shown in Figures 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted therethrough, a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough, a substrate 350 that is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED disposed on the front side, and a substrate 350 that is connected to the middle member 330 and the upper member 310. It is equipped with a state switching device 360 that is housed in a position between the member 310 and is configured to be able to switch states depending on whether or not electricity is applied, a sliding displacement member 370 that is arranged below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state switching device 360 switches states, and a lower member 380 that is arranged below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the sliding displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 and has an insertion hole 381 formed therethrough that can insert a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150.

Before describing the details of the configuration of each part, we will provide an overview of the function of the sorting device 300. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow.

The balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b flow down through the interior of the upper member 310, the flow path configurations 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the interior of the lower member 380, and the balls that flow down from the lower member 380 are discharged into the ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are configured so that they can be seen by the player, and the way they flow down provides not only a dramatic effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also provides the player with an effect. It produces an effect related to gaming profits, such as causing a change in profits.

Differences in the manner in which the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380, the position of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's line of sight naturally tends to focus on the location where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the location where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as will be described later). It has been devised with the premise of concentration.

Next, the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a thin-walled member that is U-shaped when viewed from above and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed therethrough to be able to receive balls, a pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent seal members 313 that are attached as markers, a pair of upper surface parts 314 that extend from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side, a plurality of insertion tube parts 315 in which through holes are formed through which fastening screws that are screwed into the middle member 330 can be inserted, a fastening part 316 having a female thread through which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed, and the upper member 310. 10 from the underside, a pair of long front-rear projections 317 arranged side by side, a pair of inner left-right projections 318 arranged between the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, and a storage recess 320 formed as a recess large enough to accommodate the upper part of the substrate 350.

The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that receives balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and allows them to flow downward, and its upper front edge is shaped as if it had been cut with an inclined surface so that it is flush with the back surface of the plate of the inclined detection sensor SE1 (see Figure 12). This allows the upper front edge of the opening 312 to come into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

In addition, the opening 312 is formed with an opening size that does not allow the ball to enter the inside of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. This reduces the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b to the opening 312.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by receiving light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and becoming brightly visible, but details will be given later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the downward flow path of the ball below the upper member 310. A first upper surface part 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and a second upper surface part connected to the front end of the first upper surface part 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. By configuring the left and right intervals between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b to be longer toward the near side, it is possible to secure the field of view of the player who views the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion cylinder portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface side to receive the screw head of the fastening screw. Therefore, although the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visible to the player.

The insertion tube portion 315 is positioned to match the fastening portion 332d having a female thread formed in the inner member 330. In particular, the fastening portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, as will be described in detail later.

The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged with the threaded portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, although the fastened portion 316 is arranged on the front side, the screw head is made less noticeable to the player viewing the screw head from diagonally above. Thereby, while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are firmly fixed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the sorting device 300 from becoming poor due to the fastening screws.

The reason why the fastened part 316 is only formed on the right side is because the insertion tube part 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, so one fastening position is sufficient on the front side, and the screw head is facing downward. The reason for this is that the appearance of the sorting device 300 will be better if the arrangement is omitted if it is unnecessary, even if it is less noticeable. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portions 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged as a pair on the left and right sides.

The fastened portion 316 is arranged at a position that avoids the downward path of the balls and minimizes deterioration in the appearance of the sorting device 300, but the details will be described later.

The undersides of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319, which form each pair, are formed as curved surfaces that use the same point as a reference point and become lower the further away from that point. The curved surfaces of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319 have different shapes, and the difference in shape is intended to control the way the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (approximately box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the front side. A pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a box-like shape, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 that are recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 and forming a downward flow path for the ball; A pair of second flow path forming portions 335 connected to the front end portion of the flow path forming portion 334 to form a flow path for the sphere and recessed in the front side of the front frame portion 333; and the second flow path forming portions. A pair of third flow path forming portions 336 are connected to the left and right inner end portions of the front frame portion 335 to form a flow path for the ball, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

In addition, the middle member 330 includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and is formed penetrating the lower bottom of the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and functions as a discharge path for the ball. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path forming portion 336 left and right, and a left and right long rectangle formed from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336. A pair of alignment protrusions 339 are provided as protrusions.

The rear frame portion 332 does not constitute a downward flow path for the ball, unlike the front side portion that configures a downward flow path for the ball, and is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a that is formed vertically through the front end of the left and right center portions and is configured to allow the slide displacement member 370 to be placed therein, and a through hole that is elongated in the left and right direction. A plurality of guide holes 332b are formed through the lower bottom portion and guide the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a female screw portion is formed into which a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed. It includes a fastened part 332c and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female screw part at its upper end into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

The front frame portion 333 has a light diffusion treatment applied to the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom, which reduces visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333. The front frame portion 333 is formed in a frame shape that is roughly square when viewed from above, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a countersunk hole through which a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted.

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are each parts that form the flow path of the balls, and are designed to have different flow directions and inclination angles of the balls, etc., but details will be given later.

In addition, the open part 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position of the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 allows the symmetrical protruding part 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable prize winning device 65 to enter. This is a gap for the purpose of That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter into the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge hole 337 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and is configured in a pair on the left and right, and is formed in a size that allows the ball to be discharged through at least two paths. That is, it is configured to have a horizontal length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the ball through hole of the detection sensor SE1. All you have to do is design the shape.

In addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming part 336 as described above, the partition plate part 338 also functions as a guide part that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, but the details will be described later. The positioning protrusion 339 is a part that is fitted into the protrusion 383a of the lower member 380 to avoid misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the details will be described later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape with the lower portion 353 being longer in the left-right direction than the upper portion 352, and has a recessed portion 354 for positioning at the lower end on the left side of the lower portion 353.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the left-right direction, the left-right long lower portion 353 is supported by being sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the front-rear direction, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling out upwards, thereby fixing the arrangement; details of the arrangement, together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351, will be described later.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. a sliding portion 362 that is engaged with and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and rotates as the sliding portion 362 slides. , is provided.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to be able to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes from the right side to the right, and a lower side. A guided portion 362c is provided that protrudes downward from the front and rear central portions of and is formed with an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above in the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the inner member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the sliding portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, it is formed long in the left-right direction, so that the position of the sliding portion 362 can be maintained by engaging the guided portion 362c with the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, circular or rectangular.

The rotating part 363 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed into a vertically elongated cylindrical shape at the L-shaped connection part, and has a penetrating portion large enough to allow the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted therethrough. A supporting cylinder part 363a having a hole, an upper cylinder part 363b which projects upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into a through-hole of the overhang part 362b, and a longitudinal part of the L-shape A lower cylindrical portion 363c is provided that protrudes downward from the side tip portion in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the rotating part 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder part 363a as a central axis. The displacement of this rotating part 363 occurs due to a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger slides and the slide part 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by passing electricity through the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical part 363b inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b is displaced, and the lower cylindrical part 363c is displaced accordingly, resulting in the displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and includes a thin plate portion 371 supported by being sandwiched from above and below between the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, upper protrusions 376 protruding upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a recessed portion 378 recessed at the protruding end of the protrusion protruding upward in the left-right center rearward of the upper protrusions 376 and formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 is provided with a pair of supported holes 371a formed on the left and right sides in the rear half, a recessed portion 372 recessed from the front end in the left and right center portion to a long length in the front-to-rear direction with a left-to-right width shorter than the spacing of the upper protrusions 376, a pair of lower protrusions 373 protruding downward in a protruding shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, a plurality of upper and lower protrusions 374 protruding in both the up and down directions in a protruding shape along the left and right edges of the rear half, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the long guide hole 386 of the lower member 380.

The lower protrusion portion 373 and the upper and lower protrusion portions 374 are portions that are intended to face and slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 disposed on the upper and lower sides, and compared to contact on a plane, the middle member 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are This is a protrusion for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

The upper protrusion 376 is a columnar portion that is generally trapezoidal in front view, and is positioned so as to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332. The width length of the gap on the left and right inner sides of the upper protrusion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protrusion 376.

In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 between the left and right inner gaps, and is configured to suppress displacement in the left-right direction by contacting the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be well guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction so that it can accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to displace in the front-rear direction.

The protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom part of the rear frame part 332, so that the lower cylindrical part of the rotating part 363 The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is designed as a through hole whose shape includes the entire area in which the upper protruding portion 376, which is intended to be inserted, and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed, are placed.

The lower member 380 includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a long, thin plate shape on the left and right, and a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape below the plate-like portion 382 that allows multiple detection sensors SE1 (four in this embodiment) to be arranged side by side on the left and right.

The sensor holding frame 389 is formed in a frame shape with openings on the rear side where the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and on the top and bottom sides through which the ball passes through the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, and the other parts are closed.

The plate-shaped portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position that matches the through hole of the detection sensor SE1, just as the sensor holding frame portion 389 has a through hole formed in the up-down direction. The plate-shaped portion 382 has a protrusion portion 383 that protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position between the two detection sensors SE1 on the left and right inside, a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right sides, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions rearward of the protrusion portion 383 and are fitted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370. It is equipped with a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude in an insertable position, a pair of guide protrusions 385 that are formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions outside the guide protrusions 384, a long guide hole 386 that extends in the same straight line as the protrusions 383 when viewed from above, a curved surface portion 387 that is formed in a curved surface shape that protrudes rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 that is formed through so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the inner member 330 can be inserted.

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left-right thickness that is slightly shorter than the left-right gap width of the recess 372 of the sliding displacement member 370, and the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged so that the recess 372 sandwiches the protrusion 383. In other words, the protrusion 383 functions as a guide that guides the forward/rearward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed such that the left and right inner ends are at the same positions as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the positioning protrusion 339 are fitted in such a way that they are in contact with the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the left and right sides of the middle member 330 are aligned with respect to the lower member 380. The position of the direction can be determined appropriately. At the same time, by bringing the back surface of the frame front part of the lower member 380 (the part that connects the protrusion part 383 and the protrusion part 383a on the front end side) into contact with the front face of the alignment protrusion part 339, the lower The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid positional deviation between the third flow path forming part 336 as a structure of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a structure of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long from side to side, and is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the sliding displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

With this, it is possible to prevent a collision between the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383, so that, for example, the end of the forward displacement is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 collide. The durability of the protruding portion 383 can be improved compared to the structure. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be maintained for a long time.

Note that even if the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, it is not a part that would immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, although the guide protrusion 384 is normally designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period of time (for example, 3 years) without damage, after the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, the protrusion 383 The strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed taking into consideration that they will be used in a state where they collide with the slide displacement member 370. That is, the lifespan of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the design may be such that the strength of the protrusion 383 can withstand the remaining period. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in its shape can be improved.

The guide protrusion 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide protrusion 385. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused by a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide elongated hole 386 is an elongated hole formed with a left-right width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted therethrough. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is an abutment surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the inner member 330. In this embodiment, it guides the ball that enters the outlet 71, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. This makes it possible to prevent the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. The insertion hole 388 is also positioned on the left and right outer side and on the rear side of the area in which the multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of parts, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate part 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the recessed part 372, and the lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the protrusion 383, the guide hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and is displaced in the front-back direction. As a result, the load during guidance can be shared among multiple positions, so it is possible to avoid applying the load locally, and avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion that guides the slide displacement member 370. Can be done.

As can be seen from this, the sliding displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, the sliding displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper protrusions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 guided by the protrusion portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are improperly assembled and the positional deviation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 will be inhibited. Here, it is preferable that the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 keep the displacement to a small value as they are parts that continuously constitute the flow path of the ball, and since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is said to be good, It is possible to guarantee that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the misalignment of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 will not be performed properly, and by detecting that the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is poor, it is possible to control the system to issue an error notification because there is a possibility that the relative positioning of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued while the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is in a poor state, and therefore it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. Here, the configuration related to the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration entering the flow path of the balls will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the distribution device 300, FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG.

In the figures from Fig. 15 to Fig. 18, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state in which it is disposed in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

A ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335 that follows, and the third flow path configuration section 336 that follows are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths is formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the balls to flow down toward the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is formed with the flow direction of the balls flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 as a reference. The third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in the left and right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that flows in the same direction as the previous rotation direction with respect to the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the balls to flow down on the back side in the front-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the direction.

In this way, by forming the flow path in a spiral shape with a right-angled bending angle, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow speed of the ball increases toward the downstream side. To be more specific, the ball flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 accelerates toward the front side, and the subsequent flow direction at the second flow path forming part 335 does not have a front-rear component. It is possible to realize a flow mode in which the influence of acceleration in the component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path forming part 336 following the second flow path forming part 335, the flow is directed backward, which is opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming part 334, so that the flow is received from the acceleration in the front and rear direction. It is possible to realize a flow pattern with less influence.

Therefore, for example, unlike a downward flow mode where the ball consistently flows down in the same direction (for example, leftward) from beginning to end, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive flow speed of the ball on the downstream side. In other words, it is possible to make it easier to make the falling speed of the ball uniform throughout the flow path, it is possible to maintain a high level of attention of the player to the ball, and it is easier to avoid a situation where the player loses sight of the ball. It has the effect of being able to

For example, it is also possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but forming the second flow path component 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging and backflow of the balls. If the second flow path component 335 is not formed (if the left-right length of the second flow path component 335 is 0), that is, if the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the balls by 180 degrees from the flow toward the front to the flow toward the rear at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the flow direction of the balls is large, and in particular the speed direction needs to be reversed back and forth, making it difficult to make the balls flow smoothly, and the balls are likely to become stuck, clogged, or flow back, which may cause malfunctions.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, if the switching angle of the flowing direction is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), no reversal of the velocity direction of the ball occurs, so that the ball can flow down smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid ball stagnation, clogging, and backflow.

The shape of the flow path at the connection end of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 will be explained. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protruding part 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball. be done.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed such that a portion located downstream of the ball is further retreated from the path of the ball than a portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the lateral width of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f disposed opposite to each other is longer than the lateral width of the partition plate portions 338 disposed adjacent to each other. Further, the rear end portions on the left and right sides of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged opposite to each other are arranged closer to the front side than the flow path side surfaces of the second flow path forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (Fig. 17 reference).

Thereby, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from causing a backflow of the ball.

Further, at the connecting end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, the side wall part 334a formed in a curve at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flow direction of the ball. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) that is arranged downward toward the front side is provided so as to protrude upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334. The curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the ball in a manner that bends the direction in which the ball flows down.

That is, the ball that passes through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path forming part 334, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the side wall part 334a, changing the flow direction, flows down the second flow path forming part 335, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion part 161f, changing the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the protruding support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and aligned. In other words, the side wall portion 334a is supported by being sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and misalignment in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 can be aligned in the left-right direction.

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described below. With regard to the longitudinal inclination angle, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of approximately 7 degrees relative to the horizontal, the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal, and the third flow path component 336 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path component 334, and a slightly gentler common inclination angle is set in the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

Regarding length, each flow path component 334-336 is formed so that the front frame portion 333, which is formed with a square outer shape when viewed from above, forms the inner side, and a large square having the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame portion 333 forms the outer side. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is 45 mm, forming a flow path with a width of 12 mm around the perimeter.

Therefore, for a normally used 11 mm diameter sphere, the clearance with the flow path is set to 1 mm total on both sides of the sphere, so the sphere flows down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) is set at approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance, and misalignment of the sphere as it flows down can be suppressed.

Of the portions constituting the ends of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 arranged on a square surrounding the square-shaped front frame part 333, the upstream end of the first flow path configuration part 334 is Since only the constituting curved protrusion 334b is arranged inside (on the front side) of the apex of the square, the first flow path forming section 334 is connected to the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336. It's relatively short.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the flow paths formed by the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 are approximately the same length (33 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres), and this length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component 334 (22 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres).

From the ratio of the longitudinal inclination angle and length of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 described above, it can be explained that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is not constant. In other words, the time taken to pass through the first flow path forming section 334, which has the largest inclination angle and the shortest path length, is longer than the time required to pass through the second flow path forming section 335, where the inclination angle is gentler and the path length is 1.5 times longer. And it is shorter than the time to pass through the third flow path forming part 336.

In this embodiment, with this configuration, when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the arrangement is moved to the back side, and a portion is hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1. The ball can be quickly displaced to the front side from a state where the visibility of the ball is poor, and the state can be switched to a state where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, the speed at which the ball flows down can be slowed down, eliminating the need for the player to quickly move their gaze toward the ball, reducing the gaming burden on the player who is focusing on the ball (eye strain caused by eye movement).

When focusing on the balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, which have high visibility in this way, the balls flow down in the left and right direction along the second flow path forming part 335. Compared to the case where the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path forming part 336, the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is smaller, which reduces the gaming burden on the player who focuses on the ball. , can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336.

In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are the same, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming part 336 are the same. are considered to be equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball in front view is different, as a result, the apparent velocity of the ball (displacement velocity of the ball in front view) is lower than that of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. The ball flowing down is slower than the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335.

The only place where the ball's flow path changes is at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, where the player's burden is minimized and the player's attention is easily drawn to the ball, and in other areas the ball's flow path is the same for each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, the player's line of sight is naturally likely to be focused on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden on the player who focuses their gaze in this way can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to ensure the player's field of vision when focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, in this embodiment, an opening 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17), which prevents the flesh of the second flow path component 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, the symmetrical protrusion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only with the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball, and the formation of shaped portions is omitted above and below it. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the top and bottom, and space is secured above and below it (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to when the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed with thickness on the top and bottom, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 will be obstructed by the symmetrical protrusion 161f, and visibility can be improved.

The third flow path component 336 is also configured so that balls that deviate from the opening and closing plate 65b and head toward the outlet 71 gather toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, balls that enter the outlet 71 flow downward below the third flow path component 336, come into contact with the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and are discharged downward.

Assuming that the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 are viewed from the diagonally upward front, the balls entering the outlet 71 will flow down the back side of the third flow path component 336. As a result, the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the balls entering the outlet 71 will be viewed overlapping from the front to the back, and the total number of balls entering the field of view focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 will be increased.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or whether the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a and enters the out port 71, the ball will enter a field of view that draws attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the balls are directed toward the specific winning port 65a, i.e., the configuration of the nails set into the base plate 60 (the so-called quality of the gauge), the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is positioned at a position that overlaps in the front-to-back direction with the position where most of the shot balls (excluding balls that enter the other winning ports 63, 64, 140) gather. This allows the balls flowing down to efficiently guide the player's gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in addition, in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is improved except for the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. It is configured to reduce the

For example, on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, a light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed in a shape similar to a prism to produce a light diffusion effect. In FIG. 17, the portion visually recognized as having a sawtooth shape is the light diffusion processed surface 333b, which is formed over almost the entire inner periphery of the inner surface and above and below.

When the effect of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, so while it is possible to make the surface shine brilliantly, it also prevents the line of sight from being blocked by the light. visibility of the rear side becomes poor. According to the present embodiment, visibility is poor in a state where light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when no light is irradiated, visibility is at least as low as in a state where light is irradiated. visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is an object blocking the light, the shadow of the object will be seen as a black dot, making its position easier to determine.

Processed surfaces similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b are also formed in other parts. For example, there is a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back side of the left and right external protrusions 319, a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back side of the front frame of the rear frame portion 332, etc. (Fig. 17 reference).

Further, a processed surface formed in a similar shape is a plate-shaped part extending to the back side of the second upper surface part 314b of the upper member 310, and which is attached to the front frame-shaped part 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include a light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered, and a light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. be done.

With these configurations, in this embodiment, light is diffused on the back side, the lower surface side, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336. A processed surface is formed to create the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

When no light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface, from the player's perspective looking at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side, the ball that has changed direction left or right from the third flow path component 336 is hidden by the front frame portion 333, making it immediately difficult to see.

Furthermore, let's look at the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen, from the perspective of the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration section 336 when viewed diagonally from above. However, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, the light is irradiated onto the light diffusion processed surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen. .

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball has flowed down from the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, it is necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336. , it is possible to further improve attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to create a state in which the shadow of the ball is easily visible as a black spot. In this way, by switching between the presence and absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the ball. Also, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the black spot, it is possible to create a situation in which the black spot is hidden by the ball, and a situation in which the black spot is visible and not hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the flow formed by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 consistently It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the channel.

This can prevent the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time. The effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, which would hinder the ball's flow downward or slow it down. In addition, by ensuring visibility inside the flow path, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball from decreasing even while it is flowing down the flow path formed by each flow path component 334 to 336.

The light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to create both the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light-diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility remains high without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in this embodiment, the visibility of the fastening screws is reduced.

That is, the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, so that it can be used to conceal areas where it would be difficult to form the light diffusion surface 333b. When light is irradiated onto the front frame portion 333, the light diffusion surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screw reflects the light and shines, so that it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side, including areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusing surface 332e of the inner member 330 is formed on the back side of each flow path component 334-336, and in addition to providing a brilliant glow, the purpose of this is to provide a function of concealing the board 350 and the state switching device 360 that are disposed on the back side. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is disposed on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a screen, making it easier to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The substrate 350 is housed in a manner that it is supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, but is positioned with a gap between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332 at the center from left to right, and the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in that gap (see FIG. 18). In other words, the substrate 350 is positioned so that the sliding displacement member 370 is sandwiched between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332.

To be more specific, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower part 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame part 332 from the front and back at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support location, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 is provided with a thick wall portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, there is a gap due to the lack of this wall thickness. The slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper part 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, and is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front and rear directions.

Therefore, by irradiating light from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352, the light diffusing surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can have a brilliantly shining effect, and further, the visibility of the area on the back side of the intervening member 164 can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion surface 164f, and since the light diffusion surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape imitating a prism formed along the entire surface in the vertical direction, the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as a light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it can be made to appear as if light is being emitted from above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the light diffusion surface 164f is positioned at the center of the left and right of the receiving member 163. However, even if it is positioned behind the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the view and will not be clearly visible. Therefore, if it is formed within the gap between at least one pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be achieved.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is positioned so that light is directed toward the sealing member 313 and the portion below it through which the balls flow, as will be described in more detail below.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its significance will be described. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. In Figures 19 and 20, when shown, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state disposed in a rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the functions of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically, and include a probability change detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12 that have a common function. The probability change detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inner side in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction.

The function of these four detection sensors SE1 is different from that of the detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. In other words, when a ball that has entered a specific winning opening 65a is detected as having entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 for each detection) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see Figure 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 does not function as a detection sensor that pays out prize balls, but rather as a detection sensor that detects balls entering the machine and changes the game state after the big win game ends.

As described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to a high probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor to switch whether or not the next jackpot will be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate part 371 covers the upper side of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11 is The ball is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided by the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member, and is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can flow smoothly toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see Figures 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retreats rearward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, allowing the ball to pass through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In other words, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the position (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11 during a jackpot game, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the special probability state. In other words, when it is not detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11, and it has only passed through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the normal state (or time-saving state).

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the types of jackpots are variable jackpot and normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 are prepared for each type of jackpot.

In other words, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11 and makes it easy for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12; details of this control will be described later.

In this way, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the attention of the player. On the other hand, many fraudulent acts in which the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is illegally changed have been discovered, and countermeasures against such acts are important.

As a premise, the position of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360. In other words, when no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are positioned on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side, so that the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the recess of the slide displacement member 370 The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear position by displacing the portion inserted into the mounting portion 378 to the rear side. This is a normal operating mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraud may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). There is a possibility that the thin metal wire is pressed against the slide displacement member 370 and the slide displacement member 370 is pushed to the back side, thereby attempting to fraudulently create a state in which the ball can enter the accurate change detection sensor SE11. be.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate part 371 is arranged below the bottom part of the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18). When passing the thin metal wire through the path forming portion 336 and pressing it against the slide displacement member 370, it is difficult to press it against the front end of the thin plate portion 371, and the wire must be pressed against the upper protruding portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 has a curved surface shape that releases the load to the left and right sides as described above, so even if a thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load cannot be released to the left and right sides. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is incorrectly displaced to the rear position.

Furthermore, in addition to the fact that the path to reach the slide displacement member 370 is not a straight line but winds in a spiral, the slide displacement member 370 itself is arranged far from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the back side. (about 10 cm), it can be difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the design freedom of the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the position of the sliding displacement member 370 was often maintained by mechanically devising (displacement regulation) the mechanism that transmits the driving force, and in such cases the configuration of the state switching device 360 was limited. In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the sliding displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply load to it in the first place, it is possible to partially omit the conditions required for the state switching device 360, and the design freedom of the state switching device 360 can be increased.

In addition, when a pressure load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 by using a thin metal wire threaded through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself will obstruct the flow of the ball down the third flow path component 336, making it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit that the player obtains varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so avoid balls that enter the ball incorrectly as much as possible. It is advisable to avoid it.

In conventional models, it was common to configure the system to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11. However, in this embodiment, no movable parts are provided to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11 (see Figures 19 and 20), and the system is configured to allow balls to enter the normal detection sensor SE12 as well.

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls flowing down passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the probability variation state after the jackpot game is ensured. In this embodiment, based on this idea, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12, material costs can be reduced, and product costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since no movable members are disposed, there is a good effect that maintenance associated with failures or malfunctions of the movable members is not required, and the usage life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the lifespan of the movable members.

On the other hand, as a device other than the movable member, in order to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 were improved. The shape and shape have been devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position is provided in a portion fixedly disposed inside the flow path (i.e., a protrusion). This is achieved by the shape of the mounting portions 317, 318, 319). This will be explained below.

First, we will explain how to improve the shape of the flow path. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal as it goes toward the center in the left-right direction (the partition plate part 338 side) in the transverse direction. (See Figure 15).

This inclination angle is set to be similar in angle and direction to the longitudinal direction inclination of the second flow path forming part 335, so that the inclination from the second flow path forming part 335 to the third flow path forming part 336 is The bouncing of the ball when the ball flows in (the bouncing in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338) can be reduced.

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate part 338 side. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 can be placed on the side close to the partition plate part 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the rear position. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate part 338) in the arranged state.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the left-right direction path of the flow path formed by each flow path forming part 334 to 336 is formed only by the second flow path forming part 335, and Since the inclination direction is on the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the speed in the left-right direction is generated in the left-right inward direction. This can also reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 located apart from the partition plate section 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be described. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the first to be positioned adjacent to the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest of the protrusions 317, 318, 319, but are positioned closer to the front than the center of the detection sensor SE1 and closer to the front than the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, so that they come into contact without fail with the ball that passes the rear end of the third flow path component 336 while sliding against the partition plate 338.

The protruding end surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is formed to extend outward and downward to the left and right than the front end side of the protrusion, so that the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, a ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abuts against the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction that is a mixture of a left and right outward component and a downward component, and flows downward.

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are formed in a small size, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not alone determine whether the downward direction of the ball is downward or outward to the left and right; Functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are arranged upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the above-mentioned momentum is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after contacting the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained separately. When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper protrusion 376 and the longitudinally elongated protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18). and flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

The protruding end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protrusion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guideline, the upper protrusion 376 forms a curved surface that starts on the inner left and right sides and ends at a position rear of the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17), while the long front-rear protrusion 317 forms a curved surface that starts on the ceiling surface of the flow path and ends at a position close to the end position (rear end position) of the front side 376a at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward outward to the left and right, and the ball is forced outward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318, and uses that momentum to flow down in the outward left and right direction, allowing the ball to flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing down in the left and right outward direction, and by suppressing the ball bouncing, the ball can flow down smoothly. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the downward direction of the ball but to suppress the ball's bounce, its shape is significantly different from the front and rear elongated protrusions 317, and the protruding ends are connected to the probability change detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above SE11 to above normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), so when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be disposed rearward of the center of the thickness of the left and right external protrusions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, a load having a rearward component is likely to be applied to the ball, which makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing back toward the front.

These configurations make it easier to prevent balls from clogging or flowing backwards when multiple balls are flowing downstream.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion portion 376 are retracted rearward of the long front-rear protrusion portion 317, so the ball abuts against the long front-rear protrusion portion 317 and flows.

The surface shape of the protruding end (curved surface) of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped so that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path component 336, and the center of the thickness is located directly behind the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so it is easy to apply a load to the ball that it comes into contact with that has a suppressed left-right component. This load functions as a load that flows the ball diagonally downward and forward, because the protruding tip of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped like a concave curved surface (see Figure 20).

Therefore, if the ball does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318, it will be subjected to a load from the front and rear long protrusions 317 diagonally downward and flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Depending on the location of impact with the front-rear long protrusions 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (causing a backflow). However, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball is given momentum diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. Therefore, even if the ball bounces back to the front side, it will only collide with the rear end of the lower base of the third flow path component 336 (see Figure 20) or the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 19), making it easier to avoid the ball flowing back through the third flow path component 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear and the ball flows toward the special rate detection sensor SE11, the ball is displaced outward to the left and right due to the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318, just as it is when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the front and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. The use of this will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. If the slide displacement member 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position) while the ball is flowing down the third flow path component 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, a forward load may be applied to the ball, and a load may be applied in a direction (forward) that causes the ball to flow backward through the third flow path component 336.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 that is in operation can be eliminated, so there is a possibility that the ball will flow backwards. can be made less sensitive.

In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without exception. The effect of guiding the ball that has reached the rear end of the flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right sides can be produced. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow backwards.

In addition, the opening movement of the sliding displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not a movement in a direction opposite to the ball, but rather a movement away from the ball, so even if the movement is performed when the ball is resting on the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, a load that pushes the ball back toward the front is unlikely to be generated. Therefore, even if the opening movement is controlled to be performed at any timing without taking into account the position of the ball, it is not thought to make it easier for the ball to flow back.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (still in the preliminary stage of flowing outward to the left and right), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the ball. Since a load is applied in the direction (direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped and it is easy to shift it to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 performs an opening operation while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of the previous rolling. , it is possible to easily guide the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the present embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the above-mentioned sorting device 300, we will explain how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's point of view. Below, as an example, we will explain cases where the angle of the line of sight relative to the horizontal direction is different.

Figure 21 is a front view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, Figure 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in Figure 16, and Figure 23 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, play the game by keeping your head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a horizontal line of sight or in a direction that is inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22). Alternatively, the player may play the game by bringing his or her head close to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is tilted downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be made mainly by comparing FIGS. 22 and 23. Note that in FIGS. 21 to 23, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state for convenience.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines. Note that the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), but only the left half is shown to facilitate understanding. The function of the light emitting means 351 located at the top has been described above, so here we will explain the three light emitting means 351 in the left half located in the lower portion 353.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates light towards the seal member 313. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed in a red transparent color, so when light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This can increase the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. As the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path forming portion 336 (see Figure 18), it can draw attention to the third flow path forming portion 336.

The light diffusion surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). This prevents the light from the light emitting means 351 from being visually stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion surface 332e, and allows the light to be concentrated around the sealing member 313.

Although there are no limitations to the light emission control, for example, during a jackpot game, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, it is possible to control the light to be irradiated onto the sealing member 313, thereby drawing attention to the sealing member 313 and naturally guiding the gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 located below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to positions directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is such that when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 disposed directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 emits light, while when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 is caused to emit light. When the ball enters the ball, by controlling the light emitting means 351, which is usually placed directly above the detection sensor SE12, to emit light, the player can be informed of the location where the ball has passed.

Light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion processed surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

Therefore, the position at which the light from the light emitting means 351 is visible is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (visualized as a strip of light extending vertically). Therefore, as shown in Figures 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The angle of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 (5 degrees) is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be seen. However, because the slide displacement member 370 displaces in the front-to-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the changes caused by the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 23, when viewed from a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrower, making it more difficult to confirm the change in the flow pattern of the balls at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 compared to the view in Figure 22. However, in this field of view, it is easier to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

In addition, since the placement through hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 through, the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) placed inside the rear frame portion 332 can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During an actual jackpot game, multiple balls are guided to the specific winning port 65a during a round of play, and flow down each of the flow path components 334-336 in order. When multiple balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight to the ball at the back will be obstructed by the ball at the front.

For example, when a plurality of balls are arranged in the third flow path forming part 336, those balls are arranged at the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the ball on the far side is hidden by the ball on the near side.

In addition, when a ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12, it flows outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the third flow path component 336. After it leaves the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion surface 333b of the front frame portion 333, so it is preferable to grasp the movement of the ball in the process of leaving the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction. However, if there is a ball (a ball that is slightly shifted left-right from the third flow path component 336) that flows from the downstream end position of the second flow path component 335 (position of ball P1) to the upstream end position of the third flow path component 336 (position of ball P2), the ball will hide the ball in the process of leaving the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be grasped by visually checking whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336. In contrast, in this embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the line of sight, it is configured so that the ball can flow down a path that includes the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336 (movement from the position of ball P1 to the position of ball P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, it may be impossible to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the balls flowing through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and the balls flowing through the second flow path forming part 335 are clearly separated by the vertical arrangement, so the upstream side It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball becomes a blindfold. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path visually recognized at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized when viewed from the direction becomes smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 flows diagonally downward to the right regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370, and then the flow path switches between the direction toward the special bonus detection sensor SE11 and the direction toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, the area of the ball visible at the switching position is smaller than when the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right.

Another possible mode of switching is a case where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path is switched either directly down or to the right. For example, if the left and right inward protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows directly downward from the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. This is the position behind the center line of the component 336.

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path forming part 336 as in the present embodiment, the ball is displaced below the bottom of the third flow path forming part 336. By falling (falling by the vertical difference between the lower bottom upper surface of the third flow path forming part 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate part 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the ball is attached to the third flow path forming part 336 itself. In addition to the effect of partially hiding the ball, the ball is also partially hidden by the front frame portion 333 by displacing the ball to the left and right outside of the range visible through the third flow path forming portion 336.

Therefore, the visible area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 from the player's perspective becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. Thereby, it is possible to further improve attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as the directional view for identifying the downstream direction of the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming part 336, , each has its advantages and disadvantages. This allows the player to adjust and select his or her preferred viewing method, rather than requiring the player to play the game in a single-minded way, even when it comes to the visual recognition method of the sorting device 300. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's field of view can be achieved by various methods, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, the third flow path forming portion Since the roof portion 336 can be in a state as if removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily recognized.

Regarding the directional views in FIGS. 22 and 23, visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be explained. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, so the thickness of the members allows for transparency. Because there is less light, visibility will be obstructed.

Since the range in which the field of view is obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 in the directional view in FIG. 23 than in the directional view in FIG. 22. There is sex.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above and are configured to reduce the refraction of light (see FIG. 12). This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the distribution device 300 from being impaired.

Even the parts that cannot be made flat due to functionality are formed so as to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support parts 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are designed to prevent players looking at the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 from obstructing the line of sight of the player facing diagonally downward. It is located outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower).

For example, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed at the center height of the ball and is thin-walled to the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). This prevents the entire ball from being hidden even if the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned between the ball and the player's eyes, ensuring visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path configurations 334-336.

Balls that miss the specific winning hole 65a flow down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flow down toward the outlet 71. The effect on visibility of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 will be explained below.

Figures 22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening and closing plate 65b is open. When the opening and closing plate 65b is open, balls flowing down from above the opening and closing plate 65b land on the opening and closing plate 65b and are guided toward the specific winning port 65a, so balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 are balls that deviate to the left or right of the opening and closing plate 65b. These balls flow down between the extension parts 162b and 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the outlet 71.

As shown in Figures 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the position of the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 is lower than each of the flow path components 334-336, making it easier to avoid a reduction in visibility of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336 due to the balls flowing on the inner rail 61.

On the other hand, the balls flowing down the inner rail 61 flow toward the left-right center of the play area at a gentle angle, just like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, so like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, it has the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the left-right center of the play area. This effect guides the player's gaze to the outlet 71 as well as to the third flow path component 336. In other words, because the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are in the same left-right position (left-right center position), the player can move their gaze up and down to guide their gaze to a state where both the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are visible.

Therefore, whether the ball launched toward the gaming area can easily enter the specific winning hole 65a efficiently (or whether the number of wasted balls during the jackpot game can be reduced) may deviate and form the extended portion 162b and the extended portion. 162c (or whether useless balls frequently occur during a jackpot game), the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path configuration section 336 by the balls flowing down. can be played.

In other words, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, and if the ball misses the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the inner rail 61.

Normally, a ball heading toward the out port 71 is considered a waste ball and does not have any effect in the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, the player's line of sight is directed toward the ball heading toward the out port 71. It can have a role of guiding the flow path to the third flow path forming part 336.

Note that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball flows on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming part 335, thereby reducing the visibility of the second flow path forming part 335. There is sex.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 and an electric accessory 140a are arranged above the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and a third flow path configuration part 336 is arranged below the left-right middle position of the specific winning opening 65a. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second prize opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a, so the ball can be prevented from flowing down the front side of the third channel forming part 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its rear end portion is reduced due to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the time required for the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the shape growth of the channel forming parts 334 to 336, but this arrangement is likely to cause this problem. Efforts are being made to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's perspective, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide for the arrangement of the third flow path forming part 336. is formed short.

Moreover, since the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), when the player's line of sight is directed diagonally downward and rearward, which is a frequent line of sight as shown in FIG. 23, it appears as if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so close that its outline is embedded into the outline of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a configured to be long on the left and right and passes through the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at both left and right ends has a symmetrical flow path configuration. It is collected at the lower left and right center side of the specific winning a prize opening 65a via the sections 334 to 336. Thereby, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a in the left and right direction. In addition, since the structure required as the downward flow path of the ball can be made so that the horizontal length becomes shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61. can.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design concept is to position the specific winning opening 65a close to the outlet 71, and instead of a structure that causes the balls to flow directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335, a structure is adopted in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335 through the third flow path component 336, making it possible to form the outlet 71 (an opening disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387) directly below the second flow path component 335. This shortens the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the outlet 71.

In this way, by shortening the vertical and horizontal widths of the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 at the player's line of sight, the vertical width of the area occupied by the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 can be shortened in the design of a play area where the size when viewed from the front is limited to a certain standard, thereby improving the design freedom of the play area.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be positioned near the bottom end of the play area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a left-right symmetrical play area.

Next, we will explain the flow of the balls after they enter the distribution device 300, and an example of the operation pattern of the movable parts (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into account.

First, as a premise, a ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 in that order (see Figures 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is designed so that the ball passes through each of the flow path components 334-336 in approximately 0.3 seconds.

In other words, after the ball enters the specific winning port 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path component 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball will be placed at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 for 0.9 seconds. The ball is configured so that it will never reach the detection sensor SE1. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, it is possible to design the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 without fear of hitting the ball incorrectly.

Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winnings to the V winning sensor, which is commonly found in pachinko machines equipped with a V-probability variable attacker, there is a control to release the opening/closing board for a short time at the start of the round game R. control with naturalness) can be made unnecessary. As a result, the operation mode of the opening/closing board that opens and closes the specific winning hole becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment where he or she can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-probability variable attacker in the above example, a ball that enters immediately after the V-probability variable attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, the ball that enters the ball immediately after the release of the V-probability variable attacker On the contrary, the entering ball produces a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 by the ball), so it is not necessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering immediately after release. .

The time required for the ball to pass through can be set arbitrarily depending on the length and inclination of each flow path component 334-336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (whether it is smooth or uneven, etc.), etc.

With reference to FIG. 24, the contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 24(b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first winning random number counter acquired based on the starting winning matches any judgment value defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of winning hole that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 falls within the range of "0 to 9". is defined in association with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "10 to 19", and the jackpot A2 is associated with and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot A2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 39" is associated with the big winning B1 (see 202b3 in Figure 24 (b)).

In the case of jackpot B1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "40 to 49" is associated with the big winning type B2 (see 202b4 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B2 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 79" is associated with the big winning type C1 (see 202b5 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot C1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with a big winning type C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot C2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

As described above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large amount of prize balls compared to the case where a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery, which will be described later. On the other hand, since a 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start hitting the ball earlier in order to obtain a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 2 (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning slot 140), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 99" is associated with jackpot a (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot a, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

As described above, if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140), a 15-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery, you can get a larger amount of payout prize balls than if you win the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. It is possible to increase the motivation for playing the game for drawing No. 2 (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning hole 140).

Further, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured, there is little possibility that the disadvantage to the player will become large. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern, which has the disadvantage that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has the advantage that the ball easily enters the specific winning hole 65a, the special symbol 2 lottery By setting the operation pattern of the variable prize winning device 65 for the jackpot in the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of the disadvantages and highlight only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game. .

That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the special symbol 2 lottery will be delayed, so it is possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (time efficient for paying out prize balls).

The setting of the jackpot type for special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type for special symbol 2 may be set in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced and controlled by the operation pattern Y. This jackpot type may also be set at a small rate (for example, about 20%).

This can increase the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, preventing the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. In other words, the player can visually confirm the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370, and the timing of the displacement movement can make the player happy or sad, increasing the player's interest.

As described above, during the special symbol probability change, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the normal symbol fluctuation time becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric device 140a when the normal symbol wins becomes longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it is easier to get the ball into the second winning slot 140, so it is easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol probability change state is reached, it is easier to get a special symbol jackpot, and the special symbol probability change state, which is more likely to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance) when a jackpot is reached, is more likely to be repeated, making it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play while strongly expecting to move to the special symbol probability change state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is stipulated for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing time-based changes in the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines that a jackpot has been awarded in the special winning determination process, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type) after the special winning display (pattern changing presentation) has ended. Below, we will explain the operation control of the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the sliding displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 that is performed when a jackpot game is awarded. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is the same from the second round onwards. Therefore, the driving mode in the first round for each type of jackpot will be explained below.

In the case of jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls that enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting to prevent multiple balls from entering the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "balls entering consecutively"). It is not our intention to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible for one ball to arrive at each of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a and enter the specific winning hole 65a at once.

In the case of jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The drive is controlled so that it is displaced to the rear position.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 19), passes in front of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 20).

At this time, since the number of balls disposed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side is limited to one, the visibility of the other balls will not be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time as the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced to the rear position, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370, 0.8 seconds, is set based on the idea that this is a time shorter than the time it takes for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and a time longer than the time it takes for the ball to reach the third flow path component 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the ball passes through the second flow path forming part 335 and reaches the third flow path forming part 336 in about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning hole 65a, Even if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball disposed in the third flow path forming part 336, regardless of the timing of the ball's entry. (See Figure 22). As a result, it is possible to avoid the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370 from being noticeable, and attract attention to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 as the ball enters the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. can be improved.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path forming part 336, so there is a low possibility that the line of sight will be obstructed by the ball, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused. can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, because the second flow path forming portion 335 is disposed close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and disposed further forward than the sliding displacement member 370, the player's gaze is likely to be drawn to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. In other words, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 (for example, by displaying "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to easily avoid the player seeing the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

In this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 is configured to be separated in the center from the left to the right, so if the ball enters the specific winning port 65a on one side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be seen without being blocked by the balls flowing down by focusing on the rear of the third flow path component 336 on the side where no balls are entering (see Figure 22).

In this way, in the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side is limited to one, which increases the attention to that ball and allows the player to easily see whether the ball passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of a jackpot B1 or B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 seconds. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time to allow a plurality of balls to enter in a row on the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "entering with consecutive balls").

In this control example, the interval between ball launches is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the interval between balls flowing down does not change from when they were launched, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b opens once every 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, because the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, it is possible to restrict the next ball from entering each of the flow path components 334-336 before the two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of a jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot B1, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot B2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or two (or more). When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, visibility is not reduced by other balls, so the player can easily see the ball passing through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the first The opening/closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long time within the operating time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

In this control example, since the opening/closing plate 65b maintains the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in succession. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, before the two balls pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the next ball It may also occur that the ball enters the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, in the third operation pattern, the visibility of the balls arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is higher than that of the balls arranged on the upstream side. It is easy to cause a situation where it deteriorates.

In the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of a jackpot C2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In this way, regardless of whether the ball is passed through the definite change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, the opening/closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state. Since the time required to reach the ball is controlled from the structure, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball jamming.

At this time, the appearance of each of the channel components 334 to 336 differs depending on whether there is one ball or two balls arranged in each of the channel components 334 to 336 on either side. When there is only one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, so the game A person can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when there are two balls placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. Visibility of the ball on the side may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the third operating pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of play R, so compared to the second operating pattern, the arrangement of the balls in each flow path component 334-336 is more likely to become disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is more likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the round game R to proceed quickly. In other words, the round end condition (elapse of the round playing time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls) of a specified number of pachinko balls. It is easy to meet the winning requirement early, and it is possible to avoid prolonging the jackpot game.

In particular, for the special symbol 2 jackpot, there is a 100% probability that the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled by the operation pattern X, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while daringly allowing the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 to deteriorate, it is possible to realize the progress of the jackpot game in a short time by giving priority to avoiding the prolongation of the jackpot game. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's interest in jackpot games.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the first round round game R ends, the timer means uses an electromagnetic solenoid to keep the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed. 165c, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the specific winning hole. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open the opening/closing plate 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long time. After the second round, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is ejected (see FIG. 17).

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls), The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

After that, just like the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with a first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening and closing plate 65b moves between the closed state and the open state to open and close the specific winning hole 65a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game is controlled and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

In this control example, the short-opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be performed in all rounds, or in rounds other than the first round (e.g., the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

As described above, according to the present control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening/closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference in the opening pattern (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening/closing plate 65b, and each flow is The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 disposed downstream of the path configuration parts 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration part 336 can be made different. Thereby, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball by the detection sensor SE1 disposed on the downstream side of the third flow path forming section 336 can be motivated to devise the manner in which the ball is launched.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur due to a plurality of balls being placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 at the same time. By intentionally widening the firing interval of the balls (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the 1st operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning a prize opening 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

On the other hand, if the interval between ball launches is increased, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, which may result in the round game R becoming protracted. In other words, the player can select how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding protracted play in the round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a short period (e.g., 1.0 second) may be allowed to pass after the start of the round game R, allowing the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball is placed in the third flow path component 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of operation pattern Y), and therefore it is possible to avoid the displacement action of the slide displacement member 370 being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if the period until the ball is ejected is set aside, the period until the prescribed number of balls enters the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can be entered from either the left or right side through the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned firing mode that widens the pitch interval between balls and the firing mode that increases the period until the ball is launched is maintained when the ball enters on the left side, and the ball is maintained in any firing mode when the ball enters on the right side. Even if you play the game by firing, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Specifically, at least the first ball is fired to the right side, and some (for example, the second) ball is fired as a firing mode in which the ball aimed at the specific winning hole 65a is shot to the left and right. All you have to do is shoot the ball to the left and the remaining balls to the right.

In this case, the focus is not on the balls flowing down the right flow path as each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but on the balls flowing down the left flow path, thereby avoiding the line of sight being obstructed by other balls. At the same time, it is possible to visually check whether the ball flowing down the left channel passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are constantly being fired toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid prolonging the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, It is possible to avoid prolongation of the round game R.

The purpose of shooting the balls left and right is not to limit the number of balls that enter the left flow path to one. In particular, it is sufficient to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left flow path components 334-336 to one during the approximately 0.9 seconds it takes for a certain ball to pass through the left flow path, and during the rest of the time, it is sufficient to shoot the balls so that they enter the left and right flow paths at will.

This makes it possible to prevent balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a from colliding with each other and spilling one out to the left or right of the specific winning opening 65a, even in cases where the open width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, when the ball's entry path is limited to a small number of paths due to the arrangement of the electric device 140a or the nail arrangement (see Figure 2)). Note that although the nail arrangement in Figure 2 is asymmetrical, it may also be symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operating unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be explained. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in FIG. 27, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operating unit 500 includes a rear case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back side of the game board 13 (for example, arranged parallel to it) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the back case 510 extends from the front end of the outer wall part 512 as a flat plate. A support plate portion 513 for support is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a that protrudes toward the front side and has a shape that can fit into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a number of insertion holes 513b that are drilled so that fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted through them.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the convex part may have a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. It is also possible to use a protrusion having a shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the internal shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operating unit 500 includes a back case 510, a first operating unit 600 disposed on the inner right side of the back case 510, and a second operating unit 700 disposed on the inner lower part of the back case 510. and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inner upper part of the back case 510. In addition, on the inside left side of the rear case 510, there is a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED, and a substrate is disposed so as to cover the substrate from the front side, and is made of a light-transmitting material and has a light diffusion process applied to the entire surface. A diffuser decorative plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is disposed to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is disposed above the opening 511a, all of which are disposed on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of the operating unit 500 will be described.

28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. In FIG. 28, each of the operating units 600 to 800 is shown in a production standby state, and in FIG. 29, a state in which the first operating unit 600 of each of the operating units 600 to 800 has changed from a production standby state to an extended state, FIG. 30 shows a state in which the second operating unit 700 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

Note that in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface facing the front of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated with imaginary lines. On the inside, the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be clearly seen, but on the outside of the center frame 86, although the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member, , the view is easily obstructed by the nails provided on the base plate 60, the various prize openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Therefore, for example, when the operating units 600 to 800 are disposed outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG. 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front tends to decrease.

The frame shape of the center frame 86 differs from that shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, but its role is the same. In addition, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is curved downward on the front side of the third operating unit 800, but it is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, but a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed on the inner frame side of the center frame 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front. Therefore, the role of rolling a ball placed on the upper side of the center frame 86 to both the left and right is the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper frame part (upper outer frame part) of the actual center frame 86 is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the third operating unit 800 from left to right.

In FIGS. 31 and 32, a state in which the third operating unit 800 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state is illustrated. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces the front side and the third operating unit 800 is individually combined, and in FIG. 32, the second decorative member 880 faces the front side and a series of the third operating units 800 A combined state is illustrated.

The displacement that switches between the state in FIG. 31 and the state in FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed while the third operation unit 800 is in the production standby state, it will cause damage to the surrounding decorative members. Since the decoration members 870 and 880 may collide with each other and cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (or in a state in which it is displaced downward from the performance standby state to a sufficient degree to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880), and the decorative members On the premise that displacements of 870 and 880 are allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is instructed to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). The details will be explained later.

In FIG. 33, the third operating unit 800 in the extended state and the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, which is slightly displaced downward from the extended state, are illustrated, and in FIG. 34, the first operating unit 35 shows a state in which the third operating unit 800 has been shifted to the production standby state and the first operating unit 600 has been displaced to the extended state from the state shown in FIG. 33. Illustrated.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operating unit 800 partially overlaps with the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operating unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the standby state, and the state change of the third operation unit 800 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the standby state, thereby making it possible to prevent the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 from overlapping when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the placement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (it is possible to allow the front-to-back positions to overlap).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the position of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state is set to an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), thereby preventing the second operating unit 700 from overlapping with the other operating units 600, 800 in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the positioning of each operating unit 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be tolerated).

In particular, the function of the second operating unit 700 as a performance device is improved by configuring multiple viewing states of the second operating unit 700, including a state in which it is viewed in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a state in which it is viewed in a state in which it is slightly receding from the opening 511a but positioned close to the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 28 to 35, the first operating unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first performance surface 661a that faces diagonally left in a performance standby state, a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the first performance surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c that is adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, letters, etc.

In the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, where visibility from the front side is likely to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first performance surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the front surface is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L with reference to the arrow F-B), the third The first point of view from the perspective of a player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81. The visibility of the presentation surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends in front of the third pattern display device 81, facing directly toward the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the second presentation surface 661b faces directly ahead, improving the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b at the player's line of sight viewing the second decorative rotating member 660.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player according to the arrangement, and also to change the visibility of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c that are visible to the player. For the purpose of improving the posture, the posture can be changed depending on the arrangement.

In other words, it is not limited to a planar change in posture parallel to the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), but is designed to have an angle change that is intentional in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be in the front-to-back direction and to be directly facing the display surface, so visibility can be improved by having the display surface facing forward (in the direction of arrow F), but on the other hand, the closer to the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be at an angle, so visibility can be improved by making the display surface at an angle to be directly facing the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front of the board, and is positioned in the upper right corner of the rear case 510 and hidden from view by the player when the first operating unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see Figure 28) and intermediate performance state (see Figure 34).

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see Figure 28), the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned inside the center frame 86 so that it overlaps with the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 from the front when viewed from the front, making it visible to the player.

In this state, the right edge of the exterior shape of the protruding decorative portion 652b is located to the right of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by utilizing the decoration on the front side of the board of the protruding decorative portion 652b, a display effect can be created that gives the player the illusion that the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

In more detail, the right edge of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state, the left edge of the first performance surface 661a of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the right end RE1 of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible roughly coincide with each other.

In contrast, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the protruding decorative part 652b is positioned so that it extends beyond the right end RE1 of the area to the right. Therefore, by relating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the decoration on the front of the board of the protruding decorative part 652b, the player can visually perceive as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 has expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area. This makes it possible to realize an unexpected presentation.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying a polka dot pattern on the third symbol display device 81 and making the decoration on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b a similar polka dot pattern; A certain number is written on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative part 652b in the same font as the number variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the number for notifying the success or failure of the lottery). An example is given below.

Examples of associating the above-mentioned display with decoration include, for example, a case in which six of the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is colored with the remaining color, or a case in which a wooden stick is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with its right end aligned with the right edge of the area RE1 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with a flame-like decoration, thereby evoking the image of a fire when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state.

The presentation mode of the overhang decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b. The light-emitting means for changing the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, so It is possible to avoid restrictions on the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when expanding the display area.

The object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to a display, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on a member of the second operating unit 700 (e.g., covering member 787), or the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (decoration of the first covering portion 875, decoration of the second covering portion 885) formed on a member of the third operating unit 800 (e.g., first decorative member 870, second decorative member 880).

Figure 36 is a front perspective view of the first action unit 600, and Figure 37 is a rear perspective view of the first action unit 600. The first action unit 600 is configured in a complex displacement manner in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the protruding decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is displaced relative to the second decorative rotating member 660, allowing the player to visually see the different appearances before and after the displacement.

Figure 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in Figures 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, a drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported on the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably arranged on the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

The fixing means 610 fixes the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 disposed opposite to the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510 and the base member 611 disposed on the front side of the base member 611. A front lid member 612 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612.

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement part 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement part 613, and a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614, and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Be prepared.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that is a mixture of straight and curved sections, the details and function of which will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, and is disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and is externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. A transmission elongated hole 623 formed in the middle part of the main body part 621 as a long hole extending in the linear direction; A circular through hole 624 that is bored as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to Be prepared.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured so that one arm abuts against the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm abuts against a protruding piece of the front cover member 612, and is configured to generate a biasing force in a direction that raises the rotating member 620 (clockwise when viewed from the front).

In addition, in the shaft support of the cylindrical part 622, with the support fastening part 615 inserted into the cylindrical part 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female threaded part formed at the tip of the support fastening part 615. Ru. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed, as will be described in detail later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, a transmission gear 633 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam 634 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633.

In addition, with the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c inserted into the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, a fastening screw is screwed into the female threaded part formed at the tip of the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c. Thereby, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

An arcuate hole 613d is formed in the front cover member 612, and extends through the cylindrical portion 613c along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c. A cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes into a cylindrical shape is inserted through the cylindrical portion 634a.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and has the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and an extension portion 634b that extends in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position that includes the cylindrical portion 634a.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and its front side is inserted into the transmission slot 623 of the rotating member 620. Here, the width length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623 is designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. This makes it possible to reduce the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623.

The extension portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1, which is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to grasp the position of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a tubular portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 with a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643, a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tube with a perforated bottom on the rear side of the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 extended toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is located.

With the above-described configuration, driving force can be transmitted between the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by meshing with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

Note that with the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are pivotally supported by the main body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 has a rear side of the bottom disposed close to the front edge of the front cover member 612, and is provided with an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so that the intermediate gear 644 can mesh with the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 on the front side of the bottom, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circle centered on the tubular center and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and will be described in detail later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms an orthogonal rotation axis, a front rotating member 652 that is supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, an electric decoration board 653 that is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b of the front rotating member 652 and has a light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened to the rear side, a wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened to the main body member 651 from the front side and forms a cylindrical space for wiring, a front decorative portion 656 that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and fastened by screwing in a fastening screw that is inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is supported on the outside of the cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 includes a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a cylindrical shape on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at a diametrical position at the tip thereof. A cutout portion 651c is provided on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b to reduce the wall portion.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening to secure an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is inserted, in order from the base end, through the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the guide elongated hole 616 of the front cover member 612, and is fastened and fixed by threading a fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped cover portion C2 into the female threaded portion 651b at the tip.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are supported coaxially on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are configured to be displaceable along the guide elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid part C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of its circumferential part, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is arranged to face the notch part 651c of the main body member 651, thereby providing a path for electrical wiring. form.

A part of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, and the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. Other wiring is formed in the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (on the upper side, that is, on the side facing the main body member 651 on the vertically opposite side of the half-cylindrical portion 655a). through the gap) and guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the terminal is connected to the connector of the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end thereof, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed to mesh with each other. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The front rotating member 652 has gear teeth 652a formed as a bevel gear and a protruding decorative part 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the protruding decorative part 652b, and light from a light-emitting means arranged on the illumination board 653 can be used to light up or flash the protruding decorative part 652b.

The front rotating member 652 is fastened to the rear rotating member 654, so that the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate together.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical part 651d of the main body member 651 and the half-cylindrical part 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and is rotatably supported by the gear of the front rotating member 652. Gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with teeth 652a are provided.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, and the details of their operation will be described later. In addition, the gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 comprises a box-shaped member 661 fastened to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fastened to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring retaining plate 663 disposed between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and fastened to the tip of the semi-cylindrical portion 651d, 655a.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 662 also undergoes a rotational displacement in conjunction with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described below. This may cause the electrical wiring passing between the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a to become twisted or disorganized when being guided into the connector of the illumination board 662. However, the function of the wiring retaining plate 663, which has a through hole for temporarily retaining the wiring, is to prevent the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized.

Note that in this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is inevitable that the electrical wiring will be twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it may place an excessive burden on electrical wiring or It is possible to avoid the situation where the wiring gets twisted.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (the rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a) that is parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotating member 660 from coming off from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illuminated board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board coincides with the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661. On the thickness-wise side of the illuminated board 662, the first performance surface 661a is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the front side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, and the third performance surface 661c is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction.

In this way, the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is located on the back side (the second performance surface 661b). By being arranged on the illuminating side), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated when the second effect surface 661b is placed on the front side (the extended state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED emits light, the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where LEDs are arranged behind the illumination board 662, it is possible to avoid the light from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so that the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by the light that illuminates the third performance surface 661c. can also be illuminated. Thereby, it is possible to increase the types of presentation modes that illuminate the second presentation surface 661b, and to improve the brightness of the second presentation surface 661b during a light emission presentation.

The decorative fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed with decorative letters and figures visible to the player, and is equipped with an illuminated board 671 that shines light diagonally forward and to the left from its back side. The decorative fixing member 670 is fixed to the right side of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player's line of sight towards the decorative fixing member 670 is always tilted diagonally to the right. In other words, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illuminated board 671 to the left, the light can be illuminated on the side where the player's eyes are likely to be located.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge and a right edge that are raised toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge and the left edge and the front cover member 612. This front-to-rear gap functions as a gap through which the pivot member 620 passes when tilting and displacing.

Figure 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, Figure 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, and Figure 42 is a side view of the first operating unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in Figure 40. Note that the base member 611 (see Figure 38) and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make it easier to understand the shape.

In the standby state for performance, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (e.g. parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to displace while sliding along the transmission long hole 623. In other words, when the displacement starts, there is no assistance from inertia compared to during the displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large, but by configuring to reduce the displacement resistance as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the displacement starts.

The same is also true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in this embodiment, the displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (i.e., the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so that the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a arranged in the transmission long hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position for the performance waiting state and the position for the extended state) is along (e.g., parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the rotating member 620 starts to displace from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rotation angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are The rotation angle of the side rotating member 654 is the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 mesh with the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660, which is perpendicular to the rotation axis.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is similar to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a of the front rotating member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the standby state will be explained in chronological order. Figure 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate state, and Figure 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate state. Figure 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and Figure 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. Note that the base member 611 and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make the shape easier to understand.

Between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees, and between the intermediate performance state and the extended state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees.

In the intermediate presentation state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third presentation surface 661c facing the front side. In the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide elongated hole 616 has a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end, and a curved line (approximately arcuate shape) connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a. A curved portion 616b formed in the curved portion 616b.

When the first operating unit 600 is in the intermediate performance state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the straight section 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight section 616a and the curved section 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the curved section 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the production standby state and the intermediate production state is a linear displacement along the linear part 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate production state and the extended production state is a linear displacement along the curved part 616a. 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change its state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is disposed at the proximal end of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement resistance generated between the rotating member 620 and the guide slot 616 may increase due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616. However, in this embodiment, the rotation member 620 This is suppressed by configuring the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 to be along the displacement direction.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the production standby state (FIG. 41) is a downward tilting displacement, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right. has been done.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that displaces inside the guide slot 616.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 48(a) and FIG. 48(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values are shown as positive downward displacement amounts and negative upward displacement amounts, and in FIG. 48(b), the values in FIG. 48(a) are shown as bar graphs.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operating unit 600 is The rotating member 620 in the extended position is illustrated by a solid line.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624, and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. There is.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640, which is connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620. Therefore, hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 is explained below. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 occurs as a result of the sum of the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) caused by the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 caused by the posture change of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in a vertical position, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left and right direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is arranged at 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). range). That is, there are two conditions for reducing the displacement in the vertical direction.

Both of these conditions are reversed in the extended state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is such that a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement tends to occur.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, when the guide elongated hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable that the first operation unit 600 be stopped in an intermediate effect state (midway position of tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in this embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, a curved part 616b is combined below the straight part 616a. Thereby, when the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b, it is possible to increase the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling forcefully beyond the arrangement in the intermediate presentation state.

The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the active side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the left side of the linear portion 616a. (See FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 is reciprocated in the vertical direction.

This allows the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 to be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the linear portion 616a, the supported member 640 appears to the player as if it is rotating around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, a sliding displacement in the left-right direction can be generated by utilizing the run-up caused by the rotational displacement centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to when the entire supported member 640 is caused to slide in the left-right direction from the start of the displacement. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts to operate can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured in association with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 based on the driving part of the supported member 640 is maintained counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of the change in posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (reversed).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the impression to the player that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning motion), and the second decorative rotating member 660 The displacement mode can be a forceful displacement mode.

Even in a situation where the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component and is a displacement in the direction along the direction of gravity (downward), so the load required to start displacing the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

The effect caused by the curved portion 616b will be explained. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to adopt a curved portion for the guide slot 616. That is, as described above, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed of only a straight portion, regardless of whether or not a bent portion is employed to increase displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by deliberately adopting the curved portion 616b, it is intended to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is The same is true for downward displacement.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, the curved portion 616b is formed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (rightward) opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640, and the curved portion 616b is formed in the lower half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (leftward) that follows the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement on the driving side of the supported member 640 becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, so that the supported member A high displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be ensured.

This can prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when vertically displacing the driven side of the supported member 640 from a specific initial position to a terminal position along an arbitrary path, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the vertical velocities will be equal. If the displacement is slow at the beginning, the displacement speed increases at the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction, which is shown for comparison in FIG. 47, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilting displacement start side of the rotating member 620. The displacement becomes maximum at the displacement end (lower displacement end) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the lower end of displacement, the vertical displacement amount of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is The quantity UE1 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis line OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back, which may adversely affect the performance of the first operating unit 600 if the performance is to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by employing the curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is set to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

In this case, uniformity does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes limiting the range of speed. In particular, in this embodiment, during tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start of entry into the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases after entry into the lower half of the curved portion 616b begins.

In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the supported member 640 from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required per unit time, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised). At the start of driving in the case of (operation), the amount of displacement that lifts the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced, so the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described with reference to Figure 49. Figure 49 is a schematic diagram showing the change in angle θ [degrees] accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be equated with the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined in accordance with the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth 652a and the gear tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are both set to 1. Therefore, the angle θ and the rotation angle with the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, and therefore the change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44); The angle from this state to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

In the production standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the first production surface 661a tilted to the left by 45 degrees (the third production surface 661c to the right by 45 degrees), so that the change in angle θ Accordingly, each time the state is switched from the intermediate presentation state to the overhanging state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third presentation surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second The presentation surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by designing the guide elongated hole 616 to determine the position of the supported member 640. In other words, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the position of the second decorative rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even if only a sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the detection of the second decorative rotating member 660 is performed based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The placement and orientation may be determined by the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

That is, if the extension part 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 is activated from that state. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. This also makes it possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 being constant even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This will be explained below.

The change in angle θ is roughly the same as the change in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state is roughly larger (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned in the upper half of the curved section 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate presentation state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally changes from the presentation standby state to the intermediate presentation state. The angle change is below the level of the previous state (down to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by being configured so that the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotation member 620 changes in size, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 similarly changes in size. It can be configured as follows. That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easy to maintain that posture, while in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotating member 660 The rotation angle of the member 660 can be easily increased, and the surface facing the player (performance surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be controlled to be slow or slow. As described above, in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, the arrangement and posture are changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the position is changed at the center of the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a. Rotational displacement about the rotation axis is performed simultaneously.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a becomes noticeably large when the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight portion 616a of the guide slot 616 into the curved portion 616b.

In other words, during tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate performance state is reached, and even if the second decorative rotating member 660 moves up and down (bounces back) slightly from the position on the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate performance state, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state in which the third performance surface 661c faces the front side (see Figure 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate performance state, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the change in posture in the rotational direction is clearly visible. In other words, the player can visually see that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantly rotating and displaced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and is placed close to the decorative fixing member 670. In view of integral visual recognition (see FIG. 28), it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from springing back upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to equalize the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that the rotating member 620 is It is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the supported member 640 is disposed at the lower end of displacement, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the central portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (e.g., the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615, which serves as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unruly due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660, which are supported on the rotation tip side of the rotating member 620, and stabilizes the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b bounces back (in the upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement of the rotating member 620. is configured to suitably impede displacement of the . That is, in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the direction that is inclined toward the upper left direction is the short side direction, and displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the member 640 from rebounding.

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the active side of the supported member 640, and the case where the active side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of displacement The displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 in is different from that in FIG.

If there was no guide, the former would be expected to displace downward and left along the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 (the rotation direction of the rotating member 620); however, in this embodiment, by being guided by the long guide hole 616, it is slightly deflected left and right in the direction along the long guide hole 616 and displaces downward.

On the other hand, the latter is a circular orbit centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the displacement direction is not along the guide elongated hole 616 but along the short direction of the guide elongated hole 616. This makes it possible to suppress the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 and prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The characteristics of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. When the state of the first operating unit 600 changes from the extended state to the performance standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly applied to the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration disposed on the supported member 640. It is used to upwardly displace the rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the less load is required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, when the rotational member 620 starts rotational displacement from the extended state of the first operation unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotational member 660. The design is such that the value of the angle θ is the lowest. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the rising displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is in a posture ( It is placed in a position facing vertically).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as an inertia force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is reduced. The load can be generated in such a manner that the moving member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can withstand the load with a small local elastic displacement by dispersing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the rotational axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in front view, it is possible to more easily avoid a situation where the rotating member 620 is broken or damaged. . In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front lid member 612, and the front lid member 612 is configured to withstand a load that cannot be borne by the rotating member 620 by elastically deforming. Therefore, damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative part 652b is a member that rotates and displaces around the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even if the change in position of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from a performance standby state to an overhanging state, the overhanging decorative part 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the protruding state is approximately 135 degrees, and the protruding decorative part 652b rotates approximately 45 degrees. Here, when the protruding decorative part 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the performance standby state, it feels like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see Figure 28). However, in this embodiment, the supported member 640, which is the basis for the rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b, itself changes its posture in a manner that rotates clockwise, so it is possible to avoid collision with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members).

In other words, by configuring the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be movable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative part 652b is a part that is fixedly positioned based on the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the overhanging state, when the supported member 640 changes from its overhanging state position to its performance standby state position, the overhanging decorative part 652b may overhang to the upper left of the supported member 640, potentially causing a negative effect on the performance, such as colliding with another operating unit 800 or partially obscuring the overhang display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotating direction of the active side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driven side of the supported member 640. When 640 extends toward the third symbol display device 81 side, it extends in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 is displaced from the third symbol display device 81 toward the retreating side, it retracts in conjunction with it. Therefore, the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be placed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 from the player's perspective can be determined from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. That is, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between about 135 degrees, which is the change width of the angle θ, and about 90 degrees, which is the attitude change angle of the supported member 640.

In this embodiment, the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1, a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1, b2 above the horizontal line, the difference between the angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is calculated as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, the Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

This allows the player to visually perceive the protruding decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 as if it were being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means other than the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620.

With this configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 can be such that, from the player's perspective, there is a section in which it is a sliding movement, and there is a section in which it is a rotational movement. The displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This effect can be achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into separate sections where the posture change is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, and sections where the posture change is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. In other words, the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates relative to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's point of view, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b is influenced by the side that is dominant as the displacement of the supported member 640.

Therefore, in a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, it can be visually recognized that the overhanging decorative portion 652b is being rotated, and in a section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is It can be visually recognized that the decorative portion 652b is slidingly displaced.

As described above, the rotating member 620 is rotatably displaceable so as to constitute a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and the case where it is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end has been described. However, the driving direction may be switched so that the displacement occurs in the opposite direction at a position midway through the displacement range.

For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control the rotation to return to the performance standby state. In this case, since the rotating member 620 needs to be stopped midway down, it may be necessary to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in order to ensure an accurate stopping position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, near the intermediate performance state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, a larger portion of the driving force is allocated to the second decorative rotating member 660, and therefore the portion allocated to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be relatively reduced, automatically suppressing the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, making it easier to stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state without having to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in advance.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be explained. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the back case 510, and is a player's field of view when viewing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). The standby state (see FIG. 28) in which the display is evacuated below the opening 511a to ensure that The state is mainly switched between the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 35).

Figure 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and Figure 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In Figures 50 and 51, the peripheral components of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is shown in a non-exploded state.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, a pivoting arm member 720 disposed between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 and pivotable about the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the pivoting arm member 720, and a lifting plate member 740 to which the tip of the pivoting arm member 720 is guidably connected and which is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered. The lifting/lowering plate member 740 is provided with a left rear plate member 750 fastened to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the rear side thereof, a set of front support members 760 that are configured as a left-right pair and fastened to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, a blind decorative member 768 that is fastened to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal bar 702, and a lifting/lowering reversal performance device 770 that is configured to be displaceable in a manner that combines lifting/lowering displacement and forward/rearward displacement on the lifting/lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support part 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming part 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between the rear case 510, a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) that are arranged to detect the position of the detection part 735 of the drive transmission device 730, a front upper inclined part 714 that is inclined in a manner that the further it goes upward at the front side of the left side and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder part 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a plurality of fastening parts 718 that form female threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The detection sensors 713 are multiple photocoupler type sensors that are spaced apart so that the detection grooves are positioned at positions where the detectable parts 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 is arranged to match the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for performance, the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state, and the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and from the output result, the output is changed to the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700.

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical protruding portion 511b that protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and is formed into a long plate shape having a dogleg shape when viewed from the front. a support cylinder part 722 which is provided in a cylindrical shape to protrude rearward at the bent part of the main body part 721, and whose inner peripheral side shape is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion part 511b to be inserted therethrough. , a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721, and a long hole 723 formed in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721; A cylindrical fastened part 724 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the direction of A cylindrical fastened part 725 that projects in a cylindrical shape and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side and a rear case 510 that is wrapped around the supporting cylinder part 722 in the upward direction (left side) a torsion spring SP2 that provides a biasing force in the direction of lifting the .

A step is formed on the left side of the main body portion 721 so that the arrangement is shifted toward the front side compared to the proximal side portion of the support cylinder portion 722, and a support plate is placed in the gap formed on the back side by the step. 701 is arranged.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like part that is fastened to the bottom wall part 511 of the rear case 510, and has an arc-shaped long hole part 701a that is drilled so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastening part 725. A fastening screw is inserted through the long hole part 701a with a ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, and is screwed into the cylindrical fastening part 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is supported on the support plate 701 via the cylindrical fastening part 725 so as not to fall off.

The support plate 701 is fastened to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that the left side of the pivot arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. This prevents the pivot arm member 720 from being displaced toward the front side due to a load applied to the left side of the pivot arm member 720, so that the displacement of the pivot arm member 720 can be stably supported.

The right side of the main body part 721 is arranged in the gap between the back case 510 and the gap forming part 712. That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line passing through the width center and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the elongated hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the rotational direction component of the rotating arm member 720 of the load is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731. , a transmission gear 733 that meshes with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 that meshes with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are respectively pivotally supported at corresponding positions by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the right front plate member 710. A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed into the thread. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support part 711 includes the cylindrical protrusion 711a described above and an arc-shaped hole 711b that is drilled in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 has a detection portion 735 formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion, protruding toward the front side, and formed so as to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b, and a detection portion 735 extending so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. and a cylindrical protrusion 736a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the distal end of the extension part 736 toward the back side.

The detected portion 735 is formed to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the attitude of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) based on the output from the detection sensor 713. is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed to be able to be inserted into the long hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole 723. be done.

A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed in. When this fastening screw is screwed in and fixed, the pivot arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a in an undetachable manner.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down as the rotating arm member 720 rotates. It includes horizontally elongated members 742 that are long on the left and right sides and are fastened and fixed.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702, which is fixed to the rear case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned vertically, can be inserted therethrough, allowing for vertical displacement along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both the left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741 and stabilizing the position of the guided member 741.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the oblong member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

The horizontal member 742 includes a long hole 743 that is drilled in the shape of a long oval with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 to be inserted, a cylindrical portion 744 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side above the long hole 743, and a pair of guide portions 745 that are disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant to the left and right of the cylindrical portion 744.

The fastening screw, which is inserted through the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, is screwed into the cylindrical fastening portion 724, so that the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 via the cylindrical fastening portion 724 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion into which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up/down reversal performance device 770 is inserted, and supports the up/down reversal performance device 770 in a state that it can be moved back and forth. That is, the elevating and reversing effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with reference to the elevating plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion tube portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that pulls the lift plate member 740 and the lift reversal performance device 770 apart.

The guide portion 745 is made up of a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a long plate portion 745a extending from front to back, and a rotating cylinder portion 745b rotatably supported on a pair of front and rear shaft portions that protrude outwardly to the left and right from the plate portion 745a.

The rotating cylinder section 745b rotates when the above-mentioned lifting/reversing performance device 770 moves forward and backward, and functions as a part that guides the forward and backward movement, but details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, has a front upper inclined portion 751 formed on the front side of the right side in a manner that the further upward it approaches the front side, and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a number of fastening portions 752 formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 includes a three-dimensional decorative part 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate to which an LED is fixed to the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decorative part 768a. , is configured so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED.

The front support members 760 each include a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a receiving inclined portion 762 arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and inclined toward the front side as the back surface of the plate moves upward.

The fixing plate part 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw part. This is the board part.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, and by guiding the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 to this guide path, the up/down reversal effect device 770 moves in the front/rear direction. It is configured to move up and down while being displaced. This vertical displacement will be explained below.

Figure 52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in Figure 28, and Figure 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in Figure 28. Figures 52(a) and 52(b) show the second operation unit 700 in a standby state for performance.

Figure 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in Figure 33, and Figure 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in Figure 33. Figures 53(a) and 53(b) show intermediate performance states of the second operating unit 700.

54(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 54(a) and 54(b), the extended state of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated.

The lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in Figures 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described. In this description, Figures 28, 30, and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

At the start of driving force transmission from the production standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. The same thing also holds true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, so that the displacement resistance that the gear cam member 734 receives in the rotational direction from the pivot arm member 720 is maximized, making it easier to stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the lifting/lowering reversing device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is disposed on the back side of the lower side of the center frame 86, and is upwardly displaced toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced toward the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is reduced by a configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, and by a configuration in which the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting and reversing plate member 740.

That is, the pair of rotary cylinder parts 774e include a receiving slope part 762 and a front upper slope part 714, 751 which are arranged in symmetrical positions (the front upper slope part 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, (see), and by rolling the rotating cylinder part 774e around the cylindrical part 774d, it is displaced along the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751. Displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotating cylinder parts 745b aligned in the front-rear direction, the front rotating cylinder part 745b is designed to be positioned slightly upward, which helps to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771, thereby preventing the rotating cylinder part 774e from applying excessive load to the receiving inclined part 762 and the front upper inclined parts 714, 751.

In other words, in this embodiment, the performance device 780 is designed so that its center of gravity (position of the axis of rotation) is located slightly forward of the front-to-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is constantly biased in a forward tilt direction by gravity. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are prone to displacement such that the front side drops and the rear side rises.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotary cylinder part 745b is arranged in close proximity when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, and is arranged slightly upward, and is arranged in close proximity when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rotating cylinder portion 745b on the rear side is arranged slightly below. Therefore, forward tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b because there is a gap between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b because there is a gap between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. This allows the rotating cylinder portion 745b to roll normally, and reduces the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The displacement of the lift-up/down reversing device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the geometrical guidance described above. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the forward/backward displacement can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the lift-up/down reversing device 770 is displaced toward the front side compared to the downward displacement.

The up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, which is divided into vertical displacement and front-to-rear displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but in this case, the forward-to-rear displacement can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the driving force required to lift the lifting and reversing performance device 770 from becoming excessive.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it has a natural length in the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the vertical reversal effect device 770 is arranged below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 prevents the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 due to the driving force of the drive motor 731. On the other hand, when the up/down reversal performance device 770 is arranged above the arrangement in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up/down reversal performance device 770.

Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to drive from the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, the stop timing may be slightly less than ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate presentation state by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

Furthermore, for example, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal when stop control is performed in the same way, the second operation unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and the downward movement due to its own weight will be due to the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, it is possible to move the second operation unit 700 toward the intermediate presentation state and maintain the arrangement.

In addition, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the extended state of the second operating unit 700, and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, if the lifting and reversing performance device 770 passes the intermediate performance state downward, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, making it easier to prevent a large downward displacement beyond the intermediate performance state. And even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state.

Here, the operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770 by displacing it in the front and back direction along with the vertical movement will be explained. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it moves in and out of a frame bordered by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of view.

Most of these movable gadgets are designed with an emphasis on how they look when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, appearance is often not taken into consideration, under the assumption that they will not attract the player's attention.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the edge of the field of view when viewing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the inside of the center frame 86, , the line of sight reaches to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the gaming area), so if the movable accessory retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 looks bad, the player's It may reduce interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, not only the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52) After forming a decorative surface on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the direction of displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is changed from the player side (front side) as the base end to the rear side. By setting the direction of displacement along a line that spreads out (sloping downward toward the rear), that is, the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, each decorative surface can easily fit into the player's field of view. It consists of

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be brought into the player's field of vision without any difficulty. The details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front surface (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, in FIG. The decorations (figures, patterns, characters, pictures, etc.) formed on the decorative surface 787a2) are formed as decorations related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other. The first decoration and the second decoration are formed as mutually different decorations.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is positioned in the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 26) located behind it when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for a performance, so it is easily visible when the player moves their gaze to switch between paying attention to the ball flowing down the play area formed outside the center frame 86 (see Figure 2) and paying attention to the display performance unfolding on the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state is displayed on the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. It can be made visible to the player through the side.

Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the performance standby state so as to be easily recognized, and the player's attention can be continuously drawn to the covering member 787 arranged inconspicuously.

Furthermore, as will be described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatably displaceable to switch the decorative surface facing the player, the content of the decorative surface that is visible to the player in the extended state differs. cases can arise.

For example, if the lifting and reversing display device 770 is placed in a display standby state before the player can see the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (because the player misses it or the operating speed is too fast), and the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the front side, most of the front side will be hidden by the game board 13 in the display standby state, and the player will be forced to focus on the liquid crystal display displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, reducing his or her ability to focus on the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be seen from the top side, as in this embodiment, the player can visually check the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the performance standby state and understand the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance" or "jackpot") that were visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state.

As a result, for players who miss the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 can be continuously notified by the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. This makes it possible to maintain high attention to the covering member 787 regardless of the state, such as the performance standby state or the extended state.

In this embodiment, the forward/rearward displacement of the lifting/reversing effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is configured as a displacement from a state in which it is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface of the play area to a position forward of the rear end surface of the play area.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the front of the covering member 787 faces the back of the plate of the center frame 86, and the center frame 86 has a flow path forming portion 86a formed to protrude toward the covering member 787.

The flow path forming portion 86a is formed so that the ball that jumps into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, and then the ball enters the center frame 86. The rear side part of the guide channel for guiding the balls that have flowed down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 once backward, then flowed forward again, and toward the first winning opening 64 provided in the gaming area. (See Figure 9). That is, due to the flow path forming portion 86a, the rear end surface BE1 of the gaming area is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Because a ball that flows down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning port 64, the flow path forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, and especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86, the flow path forming portion 86a is likely to attract the player's attention. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, making it easy to configure a state in which the performance device 780 in the performance standby state comes into the player's field of vision.

When the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

In other words, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time is displaced toward the front so as to enter a front-to-rear position that is the same as the front-to-rear position of the play area. Therefore, it can be made to appear to the player that the covering member 787 has climbed onto the center frame 86 and is moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is raised and lowered, the performance device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear position of its front end face is configured to match (coincide) with the front-to-rear position of the second performance surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

As a result, the front-to-back positions of the second performance surface 661b (see Figure 29) of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 (Figure 30) of the second operating unit 700, which are positioned close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state, are aligned, making it easier to visually recognize them as a single unit.

On the other hand, the longitudinal position of the performance device 780 is lowered further back in the intermediate performance state and the performance standby state than in the extended state, so that the box-shaped member 661 of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 can be easily viewed separately (independently) compared to the extended state.

The elevating and reversing effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 includes a lower long portion 772 formed long in the left-right direction, a cylindrical insertion tube portion 773 that protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 toward the back side, a pair of guide extension portions 774 that extend from both left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 to the back side, an upper long portion 775 that is formed integrally with the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 and formed long in the left-right direction by a connecting portion that extends up and down, a plurality of guide portions 776 that are arranged on both left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 toward the back side and are configured to be able to guide the linear plate member 784 of the performance device 780 in the left-right direction, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the left-right center of the upper long portion 775 and can support the drive transmission device, and a light-emitting performance means 778 that is fastened and fixed to the front sides of the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775.

The insertion cylindrical part 773 is a part that is inserted into the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a size relationship that allows it to slide on the inner periphery of the cylindrical part 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-back direction. That is, by inserting the insertion cylindrical portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the elevating plate member 740.

The guide extension 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the up-down direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a whose width faces the left-right direction, a second horizontal plate 774c connected to the vertical plate 774a below the first horizontal plate 774b whose width faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), a pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d protruding outward from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a, and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so that it extends more inwardly to the left and right than the widthwise ends of the first horizontal plate 774b. This widthwise extension is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740 in the assembled state, and the mutual abutment suppresses the tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward. In other words, by ensuring a width such that the second horizontal plate 774c is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward based on the lifting plate member 740.

The cylindrical portions 774d are not arranged in pairs in the vertical direction, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is disposed shifted toward the front compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclinations of the front upper inclined parts 714 and 751 are parallel to the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical parts 774d (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclinations of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be brought into contact with the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762 at the same time. can be brought into contact with Thereby, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and local loads can be easily avoided.

The guide portion 776 includes a plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in a vertically aligned pair and having female threads formed on the inner circumference, and a plurality of anti-disengagement plate portions 776b fastened to connect the pair of left and right cylindrical portions 776a.

The fall prevention plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the multiple cylindrical portions 776a, and is fastened to the cylindrical portion 776a by inserting fastening screws into the insertion holes from the rear side and screwing them into the cylindrical portion 776a, and functions as a part for preventing the linear plate member 784 from falling off, but details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, a cylindrical protrusion portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically from the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d drilled at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a wiring fastener member 777e that is fastened and fixed to the back side.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and when the fastening screw is screwed into it while it is inserted into the transmission gear 781b, it supports the up-down inversion member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

A fastening screw screwed into a female threaded portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper elongated portion 775 can be inserted through the insertion hole 777d, and the fastening screw allows the transmission device holding plate 777 to be inserted into the upper elongated portion 775. It is fastened and fixed.

The wiring fastening member 777e is a part for holding and fastening the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. By forming the transmission device holding plate 777, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can also be improved.

The light-emitting means 778 is equipped with two elongated plate-shaped electric lighting boards 778a, one above the other, on the left and right sides of which light-emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-diffusing member 778b, which is a plate member made of a light-transmitting resin material arranged on the front side of the electric lighting boards 778a and on which a light-diffusing process is performed.

The upper illumination board 778a is equipped with a pair of detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side, one above the other. The detection sensors 778d are photocoupler type detection devices, and are configured to be able to detect the position of the up-down inversion member 781 of the performance device 780 by arranging an arc-shaped protrusion 781d in the detection groove, as described in detail below.

The lower light diffusion member 778b has multiple fastening portions formed on the back side, and fastening screws are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions to the fastening portions, thereby fastening and fixing the fastening screws so that they are not noticeable.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has through holes 778c on both the left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws are inserted into the through holes 778c from the front side and screwed into the female threaded portion 775b of the upper long portion 775, thereby fastening and fixing the upper light diffusion member 778b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and there is a possibility that it will be noticeable without countermeasures, but in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always facing the front side of the insertion hole 778c. Since the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation where the head of the fastening screw stands out and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by arranging the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted can be increased.

The production device 780 is a device that has an outer shape disposed around the upper elongated portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-and-down reversing member 781 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. , a drive motor 782 to which a drive gear 782a that transmits a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the up-and-down reversing member 781 is fixed to a drive shaft, and one end at each of both longitudinal ends of the up-down reversing member 781 a pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported; a pair of translational plate members 784 that have the other end of the intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported and whose displacement is guided in the left-right direction by a guide portion 776; A pair of shaft rotating members 785 are arranged between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) about a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotation member 785 is a linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 jointly supported with the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed in a fixed phase to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 in a manner that cannot be removed; Covering members 787 are disposed before and after the end plate member 785d and have a left-right length that covers the left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775.

The upside-down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b that protrudes in a gear-like shape from the rear side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both ends of the main body plate portion 781a in the long direction toward the rear side, and an arc-shaped protrusion 781d that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b and protrudes from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole in the center that extends in the front-rear direction, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side, so that the up-down inversion member 781 is axially supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down inversion member 781. In other words, the up-down inversion member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one-side support hole 783a is formed displaces in accordance with the cylindrical protrusion 781c, which displaces as the up-down inversion member 781 rotates.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light-emitting performance means 778. In other words, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can be placed in either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the position of the upside-down member 781 can be determined between two positions in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a position in between (a position in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is not positioned in either of the detection grooves of the pair of detection sensors 778d).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in the shape of a long rod (narrow plate shape), and has one side support hole 783a bored at one end and pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 781c, A cylindrical other cylindrical portion 783b whose inner circumferential side is formed penetratingly at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b. ).

A female screw is formed on the inner circumference of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw is inserted into the female screw and passed through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side. This allows the intermediate arm member 783 to be pivotally supported by the upside-down member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protrusion portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, an arc-shaped plate portion 784b that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of long hole portions 784c that are drilled in an elliptical shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel to each other in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged ... It is equipped with a pair of protruding portions 784e formed as protruding portions extending in the front-rear direction on the opposing sides, a pair of fastening portions 784f arranged in a cylindrical shape that opens on the rear side at the end of the support plate portion 784d and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side, a placement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical protruding portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, a ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the pivot member 786, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a square box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the pivot member 786.

The cylindrical protrusion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b, and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference. That is, a fastening screw inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 784a so that it cannot fall off.

The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b so as to face each other radially in the assembled state, limiting the tilt displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b relative to the rotation axis. This makes it possible to stabilize the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a fastening screw is inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b and screwed into the female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a, so that the linear plate member 784 is supported on the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In this supported state (assembled state), the linear plate member 784 is slidably displaceable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. In other words, the linear plate member 784 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e functions as a protrusion for determining the left-right arrangement of the metal rod 785a, but details will be described later.

The placement hole 784g is an opening to avoid interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785, but details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member arranged in a pair on the left and right and supported by the linear plate member 784, and includes a metal rod 785a formed in an approximately cylindrical shape from a metal material, a recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 785a, a bevel tooth member 785c arranged on the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, in which bevel teeth (bevel gears) that mesh with the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 are formed, an end plate member 785d arranged on the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, a ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a of the end plate member 785d in a manner that it is raised from the end plate member 785d, and a rotational position stabilization portion 785f that is a portion protruding from the left and right inner parts of the end plate member 785d and in which a metal screw is screwed and fixed to a female screw portion formed inside.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear plate member 784, and the protrusion portion 784e is disposed to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured with a dimensional relationship that restricts left-right displacement with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, the diameter of the deep part of the groove of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e, and the diameter of the part where the recessed groove portion 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e.

Thereby, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that allows the metal rod to rotate about its axis and to suppress displacement in the left and right direction.

The bevel member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the bevel tooth member 785c has partially entered the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 causes the bevel tooth portion 783c to mesh with the bevel tooth member 785c. can be assembled into.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear plate member 784, it cannot fall off toward the front side, and its displacement toward the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner circumferential shape that corresponds to the non-circular shape (e.g., D-shaped cross section) of the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner circumferential shape and the tip of the metal rod 785a are formed with a dimensional relationship that allows for an interference fit, thereby being fixed in place.

Note that the method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be fixed using an adhesive or the like, or a female thread may be formed at the tip of the metal rod 785a, and a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d may be screwed into the female thread. The end plate member 785d may be fastened and fixed to the metal rod 785a, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784. By holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e and configuring the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a to be in sliding contact with the inner periphery of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, it is possible to make the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and to reduce the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the disposed metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and includes an insertion hole 786a drilled to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 784f to be inserted therethrough, a ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784, and a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape capable of holding a magnet Mg between the magnet holding half 784i of the linear plate member 784.

When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 786a from the back side is screwed into the fastened portion 784f and the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786 are assembled, the back side of the metal rod 785a is inserted into the plate portion of the shaft support member 786. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with openings on the left and right inner sides, and are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotation member 785, and have different sides on the opposite side. A decoration consisting of figures, patterns, letters, or pictures that can be interpreted with meaning is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), and a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface of the first main decorative surface 787a1. When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is formed on the side that is visible to the player, and the back surface thereof is A second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed. Note that the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed on a side that is visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members that are formed from two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d, and are formed in a substantially box shape with left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It includes a plurality of extending portions 787c that extend toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d that is recessed in a portion between the extending portions 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides. .

The extending portions 787c are formed such that their ends abut or are placed close to each other when the covering member 787 is placed close to each other (see FIG. 26). Thereby, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as one unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion for visibly opening up the circular portion located at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light-emitting performance means 778 and the arc plate portion at the upper center of the left and right of the upper long portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in a close arrangement state (see Figure 26), and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 is formed so that its state can be switched between a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see Figures 29 and 52), and a state in which the second main decorative surface 787b1 faces the front and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see Figure 30) in response to the operation of the performance device 780. First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. In FIG. 57(a), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a vertical arrangement state (also called an upright vertical arrangement state) in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and in FIG. 57(b), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a state in which it has rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusions 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIG. 57(a) and FIG. 57(b), the end plate member 785d of the left axial rotation member 785 and the right axial rotation member 785 are omitted from the illustration in order to make it easier to understand.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In the inverted vertical arrangement state where the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the up-down reversing member 781 is in an upright vertical arrangement state or an inverted vertical arrangement state, and the audio lamp control is performed from the output of the detection sensor 778d. Device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of presentation device 780.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this attitude change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other side cylindrical portion 783b is the amount of left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. corresponds to

Here, we will explain the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur. These displacements do not occur simultaneously and to the same extent, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, to give an overview, the up-down inversion member 781, intermediate arm member 783, and linear plate member 784 are configured as a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down inversion member 781 rotates around the cylindrical protrusion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is journaled on the cylindrical protrusion 781c of the up-down inversion member 781, moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 that passes through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed from the front, so that the displacement direction of the linear plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is restricted. The pair of left and right linear plate members 784 simultaneously move in opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 until it rotates approximately 24 degrees from the vertical position shown in FIG. 57(a). Length L1 is illustrated as half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width ends).

In addition, due to the change in state from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the change in posture around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front, which is less than half the 15 degrees that is the angle between adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Because the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of load (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs at opposing positions in the front-to-rear direction, i.e., on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

FIG. 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a), FIG. 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c is displaced upwardly. ). In addition, in FIG. 58(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are illustrated as being arranged in an overlapping manner, and this overlapping width is the same as the bevel tooth portion 783c. This is absorbed by elastic deformation between the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the up-and-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. rotate in the direction of rotation.

When the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other cylindrical portion 783b, and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees accordingly. In other words, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the rotation angle around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to the pressure caused by the displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear tooth, and the bevel tooth member This is not enough to reliably rotate the 785c gear teeth. In other words, the amount of displacement required for the abutting representative tooth to rotate to the arrangement of the adjacent tooth (according to the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c being arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation by an angle of 30 degrees) quantity).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the displacement accompanied by the pressure is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, and the orientation of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotational direction is maintained from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. 57(b).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c causes the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f ( (See FIG. 54) is caused by opposing adsorption forces.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilization portion 785f so as to restrict the right-side shaft rotating member 785 from rotating backward, and the right-side shaft rotating member 785 receives a biasing force from the magnet Mg in the forward rotation direction. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the right-side shaft rotating member 785 to the rotational displacement.

Furthermore, for the left-hand shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is placed on the front side of the end plate member 785d, similar to the right side, while the magnet Mg is placed on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See Figure 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotation member 785 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

In this embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. It is designed to be able to generate loads exceeding .

As a result, elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). If the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c will rotate beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg will be separated from the metal screw of the rotational position stabilization portion 785f, causing an extreme decrease in magnetic force. The intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg, will undergo rotational displacement while elastically recovering.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the momentum in the rotational direction of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotational speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This improvement in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the speed of the operation of the cover member 787 without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, so while reducing the burden of control design for the drive motor 782, the effect of the cover member 787 can be adjusted. The effect can be improved.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs due to the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts to rotate.

The rotational position stabilization parts 785f that receive the attractive force of the magnet Mg are configured as a pair, one above the other; when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, one of the rotational position stabilization parts 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the orientation is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, the other (see FIG. 52(b), the upper) rotational position stabilization part 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force.

In other words, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see Figures 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg effectively acts to limit the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785. Therefore, when displacing from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force can cause the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 to be delayed regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58(a) to the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the vertical reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in the front view beyond the position shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment, the slider crank mechanism is used as described above, and so the same action occurs. That is, near the vertical position, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 is large and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down reversing member 781 approaches the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so that the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is The amount of rotation increases. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the translational plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotational movement of the upside-down member 781, which starts from a vertically disposed state and ends in a vertically disposed state, first the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases, then the degree of rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 increases, and again the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases.

Due to the linear displacement and rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 (see FIG. 55). Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be explained.

Figures 59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the performance device 780. Figures 59(a) to 59(c) show the inversion operation of the lift-and-lower inversion performance device 770 in chronological order. Figure 59(a) shows the performance device 780 in an upright vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an upright position, Figure 59(b) shows the performance device 780 when the upside-down member 781 has been rotated 90 degrees from the vertical position, and Figure 59(c) shows the performance device 780 in an inverted vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an inverted position.

The upside-down member 781 changes its state from the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) to the inverted vertical position by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical position, the orientation of the covering member 787 is inverted 180 degrees based on the upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)). This switches the decorative surface visible to the player (see FIG. 59(c)).

The vertical inversion member 781 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front from the inverted vertical arrangement state to return to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)). Therefore, the reversing operation changes between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. ) The state can be repeatedly switched between the states shown in ).

As described above, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the axial rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 783c. Here, based on the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward direction. In other words, the pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 toward the front, and the left covering member 787 faces the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 toward the front (see FIG. 59(b)).

This makes it possible to prevent the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 from being viewed in unison during rotational displacement of the covering member 787.

Therefore, the contents of the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be made to be different on the left and right sides, and the contents of the decorative surface can be configured so as to be difficult for the player to recognize. The amount of information that the covering member 787 provides to the player can be reduced.

This reduces the player's focus on the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. In addition, when the rotational displacement stops, the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), which has the effect of making it easier for the player to maintain their line of sight on the covering member 787 until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 change to the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the first main decorative surface 787a1). When the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the production device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is unlikely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operating unit 700, the view of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) will be blocked by the third operating unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for presentation (see FIG. 52) and the presentation device 780 is positioned below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes more easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and prevented from facing the player, so that it does not draw attention to itself, but is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the performance standby state.

As a result, the appearance of the second action unit 700 can be changed depending on the arrangement, so the presentation performance is excessively low relative to the cost of arranging the second action unit 700 (occupying space, burden of concealing it well). This makes it easier to avoid the situation from occurring.

After the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 are rotated and displaced, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the position of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

In this embodiment, the metal member that attracts the Mg magnet is composed of a metal screw, so compared to designing a dedicated metal member, it is possible to reduce member costs and improve maintainability. .

As described above, the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by linear displacement in the left-right direction, so the arrangement of the performance device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, when the second operating unit 700 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), performing the rotational displacement causes the decorative members such as the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750, and the front support member 760 arranged on the left and right, and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof, to collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, thereby making it possible to rotationally displace the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is performed only when it is determined that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state based on the output of the detection sensor 713. Executable control is based on the premise that Thereby, rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be caused normally.

The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other when the up-down reversing member 781 is vertically arranged, and in this state, are arranged opposite to the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 in front and rear. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement around the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension portion 787c will collide with the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772, A problem occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close together produces the effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be seen as one, and is a necessary configuration for production. It is preferable that it can be maintained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction before rotationally displaced (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear displacement of the length L1, the extension part 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting part between the upper elongate part 775 and the lower elongate part 772, and the extension part 787c and the upper elongate part 775 It is possible to avoid a problem in which the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the lower elongated portion 772 collide with each other.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) in the length L1, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the covering member 787 can be suppressed to a small value.

This makes it possible to keep the attention of the covering member 787 low and to make the rotational displacement less noticeable compared to when the position of the covering member 787 changes significantly during rotation, and therefore allows the decorative surfaces 787a1-787b2 to be designed without regard for appearance during rotational displacement, thereby improving design freedom.

Note that the timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attraction force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change is made to lengthen the horizontal width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the presentation device 780 remains the same, but the magnet Mg By changing the magnet to a magnet with a large attraction force, it is possible to avoid the collision between the above-mentioned connecting portion and the extending portion 787c, as in the present embodiment.

As shown in phantom lines in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from lowering the performance effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787. The insertion holes 778c are arranged asymmetrically to match the left and right decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which a fastening screw is inserted, it is no longer possible to arrange an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screws are made of metal and do not transmit light, they are easily visible in the dark during light-emitting effects.

Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c avoiding areas that are made to shine brightly to make them stand out, and as a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is made asymmetrical.

It is of course permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, if the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identical, there is no disadvantage to arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the design of the illumination board 778a can be made easier.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the center of the light diffusing member 778b is replaced by the extending portion 787c. Even in a state where it is not surrounded by the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and other mechanical parts are hidden from view.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is The shape is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right elongated parts of the upper elongated part 775 disposed in the upper elongated part 775. Further, the vertical reversing member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disc portion of the upper elongated portion 775 disposed on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement locus fits within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the presentation device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, so that the presentation effect of the appearance of the presentation device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. can be avoided.

The explanation will be returned to FIG. 26. The third operation unit 800 is disposed above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the performance standby state, and is supported by the tips of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the back case 510. This unit is configured to be able to move up and down as the lifting arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 60 and 61, the portions that make up the displacement of the third operation unit 800 are illustrated, and the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed on the outside are not illustrated.

60 and 61, the third operating unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by a lifting arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened to the center of the held member 810, an inner rotating member 830 journaled on the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted into the inner periphery, an outer rotating member 840 journaled on the main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members housed in the held member 810 and for transmitting a drive force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 includes a disc-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing part 812 which is recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical part 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw for fixing is inserted and a through hole through which an electric wiring is inserted. , a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove facing the side that can receive the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840; and a motor holding portion 814 that holds the drive motor 861. A plurality of cylindrical protrusions 815 protrude from the front side as cylindrical parts that pivotally support the transmission gear 863 in a non-removable manner, and a double cylindrical part that pivotally supports the load response gear 865 in a non-removable manner on the front side. A plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 are provided.

The perforated lid member 817 includes a circular hole 818 bored in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from the inner peripheral edge thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting device such as an LED that is fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822 and has a light emitting device such as an LED on the front side. A disk-shaped illumination board 823 and an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting plate made of a light-transmitting resin material that can cover the illumination board 823 from the front side. It includes a decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and configured to be slidable on the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical part 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fixing the fixed cylinder. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 in a non-rotatable manner.

The cylindrical part 821 is formed to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and through this penetrating part, the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 is routed to the front side and arranged behind the illumination board 823. Connected to the connector.

The illumination board 823 has an inner light emitting part 823a arranged as an LED at the vertices of a pentagon and a central position equidistant from these vertices, and an outer light emitting part 823b arranged at 15 places at equal intervals on the circumference. and. The inner light emitting section 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting section 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diametrically).

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As described below, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting unit 823b is irradiated onto the plated parts 871a of the first decorative members 870, which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each first decorative member 870 is irradiated with light from three LEDs.

The outer light emitting part 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting part 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. Since they are arranged at equal intervals on the circle, the light from the same number (in this embodiment, three) of LEDs is always directed to each first decorative member 870 regardless of the rotational orientation of the first decorative member 870. can be irradiated.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the amount of light LD1 irradiated to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured so that its inner diameter side can slide on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while its outer diameter side can slide on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side and a cylindrical portion that protrudes rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion, but the outer diameter of this cylindrical portion is formed slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that it is slidably fitted inside the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 between them, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 that is configured to be rotatable around it is prevented. In addition, by disposing the sliding member 825 on the side that has the advantage in terms of strength, that is, the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load generated during sliding or when sliding is poor (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 comprises a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, a plurality of metal rods 832 fastened to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 831 with their long lengths aligned radially, a plurality of linear motion members 833 formed so that the metal rods 832 can be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable while being guided by the metal rods 832, and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at the radially outer portions of the linear motion members 833.

The main body portion 831 includes the above-mentioned circular flange-like portion 831a and a plurality of sliding protrusions that extend rearward in a protrusion shape with the circular flange-like portion 831a as a base end at angular positions (5 locations) between adjacent metal rods 832. A plurality of recessed portions 831c are provided at the opposite end of the circular flange portion 831a at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The sliding protrusion 831b is a portion configured to be able to slide on the inner curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and is designed to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction. The protruding tip is formed to have a semicircular cross section.

As described above, the sliding ridge 831b is positioned at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal bars 832, or in other words, on the opposite side of the metal bar 832 (a position shifted by 180 degrees) with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840.

As a result, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832, and the outer rotating member 840, on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported, is loaded so as to be displaced radially outwardly. Even if the outer rotary member 840 is subjected to a movement, the sliding projection 831b can receive the displacement of the outer rotary member 840, so that the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotary member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotary member 830 is can be maintained at a low level.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted, and by disposing the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, mutual relative rotation is disabled. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b that are spaced apart from each other in the linear motion direction and that protrude cylindrically toward the rear, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c that is formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 based on the cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b and is inserted into the rotating member 834, and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed in the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c.

The recessed groove 833d is located on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction by slidingly fitting the protruding portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 onto the outside, as will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in the shape of a bevel gear, and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude in a cylindrical shape parallel to the translational direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over ¾ of the circumference (approximately 270 degrees) necessary for operation.

The cylindrical protruding portion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumferential side, and the decorative members 870, 880 can be attached by screwing the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880. It functions to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 comprises a cylindrical main body 841, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extension arms 842 extending radially outward at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 841, gear teeth 843 formed on the outer periphery along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a detection target 844 extending radially outward from the main body 841 in a position that allows it to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

The extended arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By inserting the cylindrical portion 842a into the side rod portion 851 and inserting a fastening screw into the female thread, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and function as a part that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, as will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member, and includes a proximal rod portion 851 whose one end is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the other portions of the proximal rod portion 851. A thickened part 852 whose thickness is increased toward the front side at the end side, and a distal end rod part 853 which extends from the front end of the thickened part 852 in parallel to the longitudinal direction of the proximal rod part 851. , and a rotation transmitting part 854 formed by having gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod part 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that links with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a that is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows the cylindrical protrusion 833a to rotate with respect to each other when inserted therethrough, a guide hole 854b that is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and that guides the cylindrical protrusion 833b when inserted therethrough, and a bevel gear part 854c that is formed in a bevel gear shape with the supported hole 854a as the central axis and that forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel gear part 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 that is fastened and fixed to the motor holding part 814, a drive gear 862 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a drive gear 862 that is non-removably supported by the cylindrical protrusion 815. A plurality of transmission gears 863 are meshed with each other so that driving force can be transmitted through gears 862, a central annular gear 864 is meshed with the transmission gears 863, and a plurality of transmission gears 864 are provided on the front side of the arrangement of the central annular gears 864. A pair of load response gears 865 are arranged offset and pivotally supported by the double cylindrical protrusion 816 so as not to fall off, and a pair of load response gears 865 are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gears 865. A torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865 is provided.

The central annular gear 864 is formed into an annular shape, and is designed to allow the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 to be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and has a recess so that it can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a protrudes from the bottom plate toward the front side with an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation part 831c, and a coaxial double ring-shaped bottom plate disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a. and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the front side.

In the assembled state, when the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed part 831c, the rear end of the main body part 831 of the inner rotary member 830 is placed in the gap between the support annular parts 864b in a dimensional relationship such that it is an intermediate fit. Or they are fitted with an interference fit dimension. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

The arrangement of the recessed portions 831c and the transmission protrusions 864a is not limited in any way. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or they may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are equally spaced, the assembly can be done quickly by matching the positions of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed part 831c without considering the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864. It becomes possible to do so. As in this embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (same at 72 degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are Since it is thought that the influence of displacement during assembly is small, it is effective to set them at equal intervals.

If the spacing is uneven, the number of man-hours required to align the central ring gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 before assembling increases by one during the assembly process, but Using this arrangement, the postures of the inner rotary member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be aligned.

The load response gear 865 is arranged to be able to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840 . Since the torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, the load response gear is 865 is configured to be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is regulated (restricted).

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) that transmits driving force in one direction is configured as a set with the transmission direction being reversed, and the switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 62 and 63, a decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and illustration of a portion for configuring displacement is omitted.

As shown in Figures 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 comprises the inner rotating member 830 described above, a first decorative member 870 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 and covers one side of the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the opposite side of the first decorative member 870.

The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton part 871 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a first covering part 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeleton part 871. , is provided.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated and configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered part 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmissive resin material, and the surface thereof has figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on it. When the front side faces the front side, the pattern etc. can be visually recognized by the player.

In this embodiment, each of the multiple (five) first covered portions 875 has an independent pattern or the like drawn on it. Therefore, by changing the first covered portion 875 that emits strong light through the light emission control of the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered portions 875, it is possible to vary the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention.

For example, if the third pattern display device 81 is controlled to perform a display presentation that draws the player's attention to which first covered portion 875 will stop on the third pattern display device 81 side, and at the same time the inner rotating member 830 is controlled to rotate, the first covered portion 875 on the third pattern display device 81 side can be continuously changed in accordance with the rotation, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the first covered portion 875 for the period until the rotation stops.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton part 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a second covering part 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton part 881. , is provided.

The second skeleton portion 881 has a retaining piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so that it cannot fall off.

A metal screw is screwed into the second covering part 885 at a position (close position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering part 885 acts, and the magnet Mg2 is attracted to this metal screw, thereby ensuring the integrity of the second covering part 885 in the combined state (particularly the combined state, see Figure 32).

The second covered portion 885 has a figure, pattern, or character design (hereinafter also referred to as "design, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface is facing forward, the design, etc. is visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the multiple (in this embodiment, five) second covering portions 885 are configured so that the multiple (at least two and up to five) second covering portions 885 are grouped together, and each second covering portion 885 is decorated to form part of a circular body so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined, they are visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front.

Although the pattern etc. drawn on the second covering part 885 is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the content grasped from the second covering part 885 in the serially combined state is the direction of rotation of the second decorative member 880. The design is such that there is no big difference even if the arrangement of the two is different. That is, the design does not have clear vertical and horizontal directions as a pattern, but has a design in which the outer shape does not change noticeably even when rotated (in this embodiment, it is circular).

Therefore, the more firmly the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be integrated, the better the production performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covered part 885 side is firmly integrated by the adsorption force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that when the second covered part 885 is disposed on the front side, the combined state It is possible to improve the presentation performance in this situation.

In addition, in each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is disposed on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the orientation of the second covering portion 885 is reversed front to back by the switching rotation operation described below, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screw that each magnet Mg2 attracts is simply replaced with a metal screw that is screwed into the adjacent second covering portion 885 on the opposite side, and since the five second covering portions 885 are arranged in a circular ring shape, there is no change in the degree of attraction when integrated.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. This makes the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side slightly weaker, but this is done to avoid any deterioration in the presentation performance.

In other words, since each of the first covered parts 875 has an independent picture drawn on it, even if the degree of integration in the combined state is weak and the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly shifted, the game There is no possibility that the person will not be able to recognize the pattern etc. that is visible to the user. Therefore, it is possible to avoid deterioration in performance of the performance using the picture drawn on the first covering part 875.

Furthermore, since the strength of the integration on the first covered part 875 side is weak, vibrations that occur due to vertical displacement (stopping from) and rotational displacement (stopping from) as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation. ), the arrangement of the combined first covered portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering part 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be achieved with a conventional machine in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but a single circular member. It is possible to improve the effect of the production by the covering part 875.

In view of the above, in the combined state in which multiple decorative members 870, 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces forward is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the state in which the second decorative member 880 faces forward is also referred to as the united state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual combined state and the united state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a), 66(b), 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

Figures 64 to 67 show in chronological order the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see Figure 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

That is, it is illustrated in chronological order in rear view and front view, and it illustrates how the inner rotating member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual combined state (FIG. 64(a), FIG. 66(a)). .

In addition, in Figures 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is depicted as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. In addition, the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (Figures 64 (a) and 66 (a)) is illustrated as angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotational operation is also referred to as a "switching rotational operation" hereinafter), the intermediate Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotation member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotation member 840. In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in Figures 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and displaces around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the configuration between the above-mentioned components, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, a change in the position of the supported hole 854a corresponds to a change in the position of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmission section 854 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830, and is also displaced in the circumferential direction, so that the rotation supported by the rotation transmission section 854 Similarly, the member 834 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and at the same time, it is displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened thereto are not fixed even at the radial end position, and the circumferential displacement can be maintained. Therefore, compared to a case where the displacement is completed only by radial linear displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700), the presentation effect during the switching rotation operation can be maintained at a high level.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, a rotational movement with high acceleration is generated using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58). , the arrangement of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the translational direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is intended to weaken the impression that it is fixed.

In other words, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased, and even in a situation where a period in which the change in left-right position is small continues at the end of the left-right outward displacement (a period near the dead point of the slider crank), the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high dramatic effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is likely that a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and the rotational axis of the outer rotating member 840 may become misaligned. In the embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) about the axis of rotation, so that each load cancels out the other. This makes it possible to suppress misalignment of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840, thereby making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (enlargement/contraction displacement) in the rotational operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid collision with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by detecting that the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state to determine the posture of the lifting arm member 801. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

In addition, with the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmission part 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened to the rotating member 834 are also displaced radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displaced circumferentially.

When the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel teeth portion 854c (see Figures 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel teeth portion 834a (see Figure 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 rotate around the metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. Further, the rotation direction increases so that the angle θ32 moves away from the virtual position line 832F in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and since the rotation member 834 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ) is set in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the virtual position line 832F.

When rotating together, the rotating member 834 is in a position where either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, so that when the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) as the maximum value of the angle θ31 due to the rotation of the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 rotates half a circle (180 degrees).

In other words, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) does not produce an action that retards the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832. As a result, a gap may be created between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the suction force may be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 starts, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 is lost. No delaying effects occur.

This makes it possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate and displace the decorative members 870 and 880. In other words, the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, making it possible to miniaturize the drive motor 861.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and finished early, the degree of attention of the player to the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The rapidity at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 relative to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 so that it is not constant.

For example, in the process of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged with a reduced diameter and can rotate integrally is 45 degrees. In this case, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and when the virtual position line 832F is further rotated by an angle of 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)). reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from a state in which integral rotation is possible than during rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 will be used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, the intermediate arm member 850, and the decorative members 870 and 880, but due to the above-mentioned configuration, the integral rotation operation is not possible. Since it is possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating from the possible state, the load on the drive motor 861 is not excessive when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating. You can avoid it from getting too big.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting the position in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during rotational displacement. can. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connection surfaces between the first covered portion 875 and the second covered portion 885) are visible, and the decorative members 870, 880 It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the side part of the

During the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. Further, the arrangement also overlaps with the extending arm portion 842 that is adjacent to the extending arm portion 842 in which the cylindrical portion 842a that is rotatably supported is disposed. Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by arranging the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal end rod portion 851 and the distal end side rod portion 851 are arranged on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 can be made to overlap in the front and rear, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

Furthermore, by arranging the proximal rod portion 851 on the front side of the extended arm portion 842 and the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the extended arm portion 842, the switching rotation operation can be controlled. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged before and after the extended arm portion 842, and a collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is the direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction in front view in the individually combined state, see FIG. 66). ). In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, thereby receiving resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction described above (clockwise direction in front view in the individual combined state), or in a direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (in the front view counterclockwise direction in the individual combined state), If the intermediate arm member 850 continues to rotate in the same direction after reaching a state in which rotation is restricted (for example, from the individual combined state to the serial combined state) due to rotation in the same direction, the outer A load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the posture maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 and rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued to be restricted in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the rotation direction. , the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the combined state (this rotational operation will be referred to as " (Also referred to as "integral rotational motion").

The integral rotational movement occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, the integral rotational movement occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are disposed close to each other in a combined state.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the diametrically expanding direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the third operation unit 800 is on standby. An integral rotation operation can be performed in the state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation operation is executable and controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) can perform a switching rotation operation accompanied by radially expanding displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, and a unitary rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radially expanding displacement. Either operation can be performed in either drive direction, but the operations have priority, and any operation cannot be instantly performed in any rotation direction.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), a switching rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and an integral rotation operation can be performed by continuing the rotation in this state. Also, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, but an integral rotation operation cannot be performed immediately by rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

For example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which rotation is restricted, If the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation will be executed again, and it will not be possible to immediately perform the integrated rotation operation clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

In this manner, the operating mode of the third operating unit 800 in this embodiment changes the relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 depending on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted in the rotation direction of the drive motor 861.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to be able to determine whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, and based on the determination result, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 is described below.

Figure 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving state of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in a chronological order. As shown in Figure 68, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) controls the third operation unit 800 to alternate between normal and reversed performances.

During a reversal presentation, an operation including a switching rotational operation is executed, and during a normal presentation, an operation not including a switching rotational operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the third operating unit 800 is extended and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed, and after the state of the moving parts is determined from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control for normal performance is executed. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870, 880 collide with surrounding decorative members, even if the state of the moving parts cannot be determined from the output of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on.

As the drive direction of the drive motor 861, forward rotation and reverse rotation are described. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the integral rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, drive control during normal performance before reaching the reversal performance will be explained. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally.

Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being moved up and down by the up and down movement of the up and down arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated simultaneously with the up and down movement. It is controlled so that it can also cause movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together when the position of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the lifting arm member 801 may be raised and lowered when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 stop rotating together.

Since the drive motor 861 has a forward rotation direction only, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detectable portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. By determining this output switch, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of drive time from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be controlled to stop in any position.

Next, drive control during reversal performance will be explained. First, during the reversal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is placed in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the normal direction until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. Due to the reverse rotation drive, the third operation unit 800 performs a switching rotation operation, but during this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

If the driving motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotational direction, a series of combined states will be reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 will rotate together. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only reverse rotation drive control is performed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from a reverse performance to a normal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is put into an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the reverse direction until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in normal rotation. The forward rotation drive causes the third operation unit 800 to perform a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate together. After the start of the rotational movement, the outer rotating member 840 starts to rotate, causing the detected portion 844 to move away from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 to be switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have started to rotate together due to the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation starts, the performance transitions back to normal. The restrictions on drive control during this normal performance are the same as those described for the normal performance that preceded the above-mentioned reverse performance.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 is used to determine whether to switch the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can also be used for standard judgment. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced compared to the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 from the state where the integral rotation operation continues or from the state where the rotation is stopped to the opposite direction. That is, irrespective of the attitude of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the serial combined state.

Therefore, in the case of controlling to switch to the series combination state at the timing of the jackpot announcement in the motion production, it is possible to avoid the player guessing whether or not there will be a jackpot announcement based on the attitude of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decorations in the series of combinations are designed so that the contents perceived by the player do not differ greatly depending on the rotational direction arrangement of the second decoration member 880. That is, even if the arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 in the rotational direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the contents that the player perceives as a series of combined states at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the series combination state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, it is possible to omit the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the series combination state, so the first decorative member in the individual combination state Regardless of the attitude of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

In this way, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both the forward and reverse rotation directions of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

FIG. 69 is a sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along the line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 extends from the rear end where the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end where the illumination board 823 is arranged. Electric wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and terminals are connected to connectors provided on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, so that the LEDs arranged on the illumination board 823 can be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light emitting part 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging part 824a which bulges out to the front side in the central part side of the transparent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that is visible to the player in the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated to the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged in the front, and acts to illuminate the decorative members 870, 880 from the inside.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) where the decorative member 870 is placed on the front side and a series combined state (see FIG. 32) where the decorative member 880 is placed on the front side. Therefore, the light LD1 can be used to switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871, and the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side. This allows most of the light LD1 to be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 when the light LD1 is emitted can be improved.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly positioned, and the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to rotate around it, so the relationship between the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 can change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, if the light LD1 is irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a during rotation, the light LD1 irradiated from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. Therefore, without measures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and it may be difficult to perform a performance in which the decorative members 870, 880 rotate together while emitting light at a constant brightness.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the plating portion 871a configured to be able to reflect the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination board 823. and is designed so that its center is located near the center of the first covered portion 875 when viewed from the front.

The light LD1 is positioned so that its optical axis faces the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is positioned. As a result, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a and travels toward the center of the radius of curvature, illuminating the vicinity of the center of each of the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, the plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering part 875, regardless of the arrangement of the plating part 871a with respect to the outer light emitting part 823b. As a result, light can be stably irradiated near the center of the front plate part of the first covered part 875, so that the first covered part 875 can be seen with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation. be able to.

Furthermore, the first skeleton part 871 is a part to which a plating process is performed in the same way as the plating process to the plating part 871a, and has an outer plating part 871b disposed outside the first covering part 875 when viewed from the front. Be prepared. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b as well as the plating part 871a, but since the outer plating part 871b is arranged at the rear compared to the arrangement of the plating part 871a, the light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b. The degree of illumination can be weakened.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the light perceived outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875.

The illuminated board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely blocked, so not all of the light from the outer light-emitting part 823b is irradiated to the inside.

First, in FIG. 69, the internal structure is visible between the member edge 875a of the first covering part 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering part 885, which is arranged opposite to the member edge 875a. A gap VA1 of a certain size is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b protrudes outward from the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

Moreover, there is a gap between the member outer end 875b of the first covering part 875 and the member outer end 885b of the second covering part 885, which are arranged to face the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 is formed which exceeds the area required to avoid this.

The gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of, first, avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring that the length of the metal rod 832 is sufficient, and ensuring that the metal rod 832 can guide the linear displacement of the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834.

Second, the gap VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted into the skeleton parts 871 and 881, and is screwed into the cylindrical protruding part 834b of the rotating member 834, thereby attaching the decorative members 870 and 880 to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembly path for fastening screws for fastening and fixing.

Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that passes through the transparent parts of the framework 871, 881. Because the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light that passes through the gap VA and travels outward is visually recognized as light that passes through equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotational operation of the decorative members 870, 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be rotated in the same manner. This makes it possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the light radiating radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 is visible in a rotating light-emitting state, without the need to control the lighting state of the light from the outer light-emitting portion 823b (for example, by keeping all the lights on).

In the combined state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeletal portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, which suppresses the reflection of light LD1 by the second skeletal portion 881.

As a result, only the light (weak light) of the light LD1 that is far from the optical axis is irradiated within the frame of the second covering portion 885, so the intensity of the light emitted by the second covering portion 885 can be weakened. On the other hand, the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, so the intensity of the light radiating out radially from the center of rotation of the third operating unit 800 can be improved.

A light diffusion decorative portion 885c is formed from a colored (in this embodiment, the color of the circular body is set to an arbitrary color) light-transmitting resin material and is arranged around the circumference of the frame of the second covering portion 885, with light diffusion processing formed on the inside. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light that is incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusion decorative portion 885c to emit surface light.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light that is viewed through the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c arranged in the circumferential direction, creating the effect that each of the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c of the five second decorative members 880 is viewed as a single unit by the player.

Here, as described above, if the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be firmly integrated, the performance performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. This integration can be achieved by visually recognizing that the light diffusing decorative portions 885c are continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve performance performance in the combined state when the second covered portion 885 is disposed on the front side.

The outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end face 885b1 that is adjacent to (contacts) the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 based on the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the combined state (see FIG. 32), the first covered portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed on the back side is visible to the player. It is possible to reduce the degree of interference, and the influence on the performance can be reduced.

This makes it easier to prevent the color of the first covering part 875 from coming into view when the frame of the first covering part 875 and the frame of the second covering part 885 are colored in different colors and the second covering part 885 is positioned in front.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is placed in the extended state by itself in the combined state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where the other operating units 600 and 700 are both extended (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operating unit 800, and it is easy for the line of sight to view the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction to pass through. Therefore, without countermeasures, the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is easily recognized, which tends to reduce the performance effect.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, in the united state, the end face 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is positioned rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface, so that even if the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is visible when viewed from an oblique direction, most of the side surface can be seen as part of the second covering portion 885, and the degree to which the first covering portion 875 is visible can be reduced. As a result, in the united state, the second covering portion 885 can be made easier to see than the first covering portion 875, improving the presentation effect.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the series combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotary member 830, so that the inner rotary member 830 rotates, while the outer rotary member 840 acts as a torque limiter. The rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

Although the sliding protrusion 831b is intended to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will increase, and the torque limiter 866 Therefore, the allowable value for load transmission must be increased, which tends to hinder downsizing of the torque limiter 866.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. To this end, this embodiment has the following features. For example, the only supporting points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 regarding rotation are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. , other parts are configured to leave gaps. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the structure can be configured to easily reduce displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened to the central ring gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress forward displacement based on the central ring gear 864, and the sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. In other words, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction pushing it forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 abuts against the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and rear.

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter. The protrusion portion 822b that protrudes from the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the protruding portion 822b contacts the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced compared to the case where the entire back surface of the short diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. Can be done. Thereby, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotational direction can be reduced.

Note that since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected to be reduced when the weight of the fastening screws increases accordingly. Can be done.

Fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be explained. In explaining this fixing, reference will be made to FIGS. 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton part 871 into a female screw of the fastened part 876 formed at the rear part of the frame of the first covering part 875. After the first covering part 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton part 871 by screwing into the frame part 871, the overhanging part 873 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed part of the first skeleton part 871 is screwed into the first covering part 875. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitting outward) and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protrusion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton part 881 into a female screw of the fastened part 886 formed at the rear part of the frame of the second covering part 885. After the second covering part 885 is fastened and fixed to the second frame part 881 by screwing into the second frame part 881, the overhanging part 883 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed part of the second frame part 881 is screwed into the second covering part 885. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitting it outside) and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protrusion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be configured to undergo linear or rotational displacement in response to linear or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834.

In the process of fixing, the overhanging parts 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the translational member 833, thereby changing the arrangement of the skeleton parts 871, 881 on the translational member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832). ) is defined, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton parts 871 and 881 from falling off from the translational member 833.

Since the skeleton parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and the rotation The member 834 can be prevented from falling off from the translational member 833.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotating member 834 is assembled to the translational member 833, the portions that define the arrangement of the rotational member 834 on the translational member 833 are fixed to the skeleton parts 871, 881 to which the rotational member 834 is fixed. Therefore, the number of steps for assembly and disassembly can be reduced, unlike the case where the portion that defines the arrangement on the translational member 833 is formed on the rotational member 834 itself.

That is, for example, during disassembly, by removing the fastening screws that fasten and fix the skeleton parts 871, 881 to the rotating member 834, the regulation of the arrangement of the skeleton parts 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 can be released. Instead, the regulation of the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linearly moving member 833 can also be canceled. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

The combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to Figs. 70 and 71. Figs. 70(a) to 70(d) and Figs. 71(a) to 71(d) are schematic front views of the operational unit 500 that chronologically explain examples of combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800. In the explanation of Figs. 70 and 71, Figs. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

70 and 71, each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and each covering part 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800 The decorations are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified by letters or the like.

That is, the word "Normal" is displayed vertically on the first presentation surface 661a, the word "Activate" is displayed horizontally on the second presentation surface 661b, and the symbol "!" is displayed along the longitudinal direction on the third presentation surface 661c.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the words "Start of War," the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 has the words "A pinch is an opportunity," and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has the words "Attack." The characters "Patience!?" are shown on the second sub-decorative surface 787b2, respectively.

Furthermore, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering part 875, and five "○" numbers are shown in the second covering part 885. ” symbol is shown.

In FIG. 70(a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is placed in a performance standby state (see FIG. 28). Note that above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's perspective.

In addition, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By performing the integral rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, the first covered portions 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate effect state during the continuation of the integral rotation operation or after stopping, the third effect surface 661c is extended inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 are It can make your movements lively.

For example, when the third performance surface 661c is visible, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600 by controlling the performance so that the expectation level of jackpot in the lottery increases. can.

When the integral rotational movement is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700 can be viewed as an integrated unit.

This can increase the attention to the first decorative member 870 that is placed close to the second operation unit 700, and by starting a display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 on the third pattern display device 81 while returning the third operation unit 800 to a standby state for effect, the player's gaze can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 that draws attention is not limited to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting section 823b (see FIG. 60) that is arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, an LED that irradiates light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 side that attracts attention can be used. By lighting up the LED and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870.

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit are sequentially switched in the rotational direction so that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotated along the coaxial circle. The player may be able to visually confirm that the player is playing the game. Further, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration member 870 sequentially reaches the position to be irradiated with light from the LED through an integral rotation operation. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 both have vertically elongated decorations, allowing them to be viewed as a single unit. In particular, the front side of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, enhancing the effect of being viewed as a single unit.

On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71(a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the middle of the process shown in FIG. 70(b), the first operation Since the second decorative rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a horizontally long decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second operating unit 700 also has a horizontally long decoration. can be visually recognized integrally with the covering member 787.

Although FIG. 35 shows the intermediate effect state of the second operating unit 700, if the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state as shown in FIG. 71(a), the covering member 787 and The vertical distance between the two decorative rotating members 660 is further reduced, and the ability to see them as one unit can be enhanced.

At this time, the protruding decorative portion 652b protrudes to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be expanding further to the right than the right end RE1 of the area prevents the player from feeling cramped even if the second presentation surface 661b is positioned closer to the right edge.

This also allows the player to see that the second performance surface 661b is positioned toward the center of the third pattern display device 81, similar to the second main decorative surface 787b1, thereby enhancing the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second performance surface 661b being viewed as a single unit.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second presentation surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second It is possible to enhance the effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second presentation surface 661b, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are visually recognized as one.

In Figures 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversal operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in Figure 70(d), but since the second decorative rotating member 660 is not positioned on the left or right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the reversal operation of the covering member 787 (see Figure 59) can be performed even when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state.

As mentioned above, when the covering member 787 is flipped over, the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 on the left and right are faced forward, making them non-distinguishable. However, as shown in Figure 70(d), the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may be combined to make the content discernible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 70(d), the player can discern the meaning of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the driving of the second action unit 700 in this state, the player can focus his/her attention on the subsequent movement of the second action unit 700, thereby focusing the player's gaze on the second action unit 700.

For example, when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is a loss, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to FIG. 70(c), and when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is still not to be notified or that the lottery result is a big win, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to continue to be inverted to the state shown in FIG. 71(a), thereby drawing the player's attention to the second operating unit 700.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance. Note that above the second operating unit 700, the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second performance surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written horizontally, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content has a series of meanings, including "attack activated," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

In the first operation unit 600, in the production standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first production surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are vertically written. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize them as a whole. Furthermore, since the content is a series of meanings with "Normal Time", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

In this manner, in this embodiment, each of the presentation surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 is made to be seen as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). It consists of Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an effect standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 because the third operation unit 800 performs an integral rotation operation. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation operation is executed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same unified state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set so that the switching rotation operation is executed at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during symbol fluctuation to notify whether the jackpot has been won or not. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing whether or not a jackpot will be announced based on the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the final stage of the display performance (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or in the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the game is a jackpot hit or not. It is possible to maintain the same level of expectations among people. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form decorations that can be viewed individually or in combination. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not completed only in each operation unit 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration in which each of the operation units 600 to 800 is related to each other.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 can be executed is affected by their arrangement. That is, if each of the operating units 600 to 800 is driven at an inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that component operations will collide and malfunction. Therefore, drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the components of other units. controlled as follows.

For example, the first operating unit 600 is controlled to change to the extended state when the second operating unit 700 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the second operation unit 700 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The change to the extended state of the second operating unit 700 may be performed in any state of the first operating unit 600, and the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the production standby state.

The change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the first operation unit 600 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

In the control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and no rotation is performed or only an integral rotation operation occurs, the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined that the process is in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control by which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in a performance standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

As mentioned above, the drive control of each operating unit 600 to 800 is not possible at any time, but is controlled so that it is executed after determining the arrangement of the components of the other units.

Next, the center frame C86 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 72 to 87.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the center frame 86 is composed of one part, but in the second embodiment, the center frame C86 is composed of two members: an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 72 is a front view of the game board C13 in the second embodiment. As shown in Figure 72, the center frame C86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 7) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b.

The upper frame C86a is disposed along the upper side (upper side in FIG. 72) and the left and right (left and right sides in FIG. 72) inner edges of the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame C86b is arranged along the inner edges of the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60. 60 along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 72) of the window portion 60a. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame C86a and the lower frame C86b.

The upper frame C86a is a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (a part disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 72) of the window 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 7)). , that is, the part where the lower frame C86b is disposed) is omitted, and the other parts except for the omitted part have the same structure as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

Next, the lower frame C86b will be described. Figure 73 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 74 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. Note that in Figures 73 and 74, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame C86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the lower frame C86b includes a receiving port COPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage CRt1 communicating with the receiving port COPin, and a first passage COPin. A second passage CRt2 where the ball guided through CRt1 flows down, and a third passage where the ball guided through the second passage CRt2 (the ball that reciprocated along the longitudinal direction of the second passage CRt2) flows down. CRt3, a fourth passage CRt4 and a fifth passage CRt5 through which the balls guided through the third passage CRt3 are sorted and flowed down by the distribution member C170, and a fourth passage CRt4 and fifth passage CRt5 through which the balls guided through the fourth passage CRt4 flow down. Six passages CRt6 and an outlet COPout formed as an opening through which the balls guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flow out to the game area are formed (see FIGS. 81 and 82).

The upper frame C86a has an upper frame passage CRt0 (see FIG. 72) formed therein. The upper frame passage CRt0 is a passage that guides balls that flow in (enter) from the area on the left side of the play area when viewed from the front (left side of FIG. 72) (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61), and the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 is connected to the receiving port COPin of the lower frame C86b.

That is, the ball that has flown (entered) from the gaming area into the upper frame passage CRt0 flows (entered) from the upper frame passage CRt0 into the first passage CRt1 of the lower frame C86b via the reception port COPin.

A distribution member C170 that operates according to the weight of the balls is disposed on the lower frame C86b (see FIGS. 81 and 82), and when a series of balls is guided through the third passage CRt3, , the leading ball is distributed to the fourth path CRt4, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fifth path CRt5. Note that if the interval between consecutive balls is larger than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the fourth path CRt4.

Here, the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt5 (the opening through which the balls flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 72). Therefore, balls distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 are likely to win at the first winning hole 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning hole 64).

On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt6, not only is a central outflow surface C181 formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow balls guided along the sixth passage CRt6 to flow out into the play area, but side outflow surfaces C182 are also formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in Figure 72) from vertically above the first winning opening 64. In addition, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt6, with side outflow surfaces C182 formed at the bottom of the undulations and a central outflow surface C181 formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, a ball allocated to the fourth passage CRt4 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outlet surface C182 into the play area in the sixth passage CRt6 than from the central outlet surface C181 into the play area, and as a result, it is less likely to win the first winning hole 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64 than a ball allocated to the fifth passage CRt5 described above).

In this way, in the lower frame C86b of this embodiment, when a series of balls flows into the third passage CRt3, the preceding balls are distributed to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4), while the following balls are distributed to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4). The ball is sorted to a path where it is easy to win the first prize opening 64 (in the present embodiment, a passage (fifth passage CRt5) that almost certainly allows the ball to win the first prize opening 64). Therefore, in order to increase the probability that a ball will win in the first prize opening 64 (reliably win a prize), the player can expect that a state in which the balls will be connected will be formed, and the interest in the game can be increased.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C86b will be described with reference to Figures 73 to 74 as well as Figures 75 to 87.

Figure 75 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 76 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. Figure 77 is a top view of the lower frame C86b, Figure 78 is a front view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 79 is a rear view of the lower frame C86b. Figure 80(a) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXa in Figure 78, and Figure 80(b) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXb in Figure 78.

Figures 81 and 82 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77, and Figure 83 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in Figure 78. Figure 84(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b at part LXXXIVa in Figure 81, and Figure 84(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b taken along line LXXXIVb-LXXXIVb in Figure 77. Note that Figure 81 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in a first position, and Figure 82 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in a second position.

As shown in Figures 73 to 84, the lower frame C86b includes a front member C110, a dish member C120 disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the front member C110, a back member C130 disposed opposite to the back surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the front member C110 at a predetermined distance, a first intermediate member C140 disposed on the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the back member C130, and a second intermediate member C140 disposed on the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the back member C130. The panel is provided with a second intermediate member C150 arranged facing the rear member C130 at a predetermined distance from the rear member C130 (the surface facing the front direction), a first intermediate member C160 and a distribution member C170 interposed between the rear member C130 and the second intermediate member C150, a second intermediate member C180 interposed between the front member C110 and the first and second intermediate members C140, C150, and a decorative member C190 and a detouring member C200 disposed on the rear surface of the rear member C130.

The lower frame C86b is constructed as a single unit by fastening each component together with tapping screws, and the distribution component C170 and decorative component C190 are rotatably supported on the back component C130 (see Figure 73).

In addition, the lower frame C86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and balls can be seen through) except for the distribution member C170 and decorative member C190, and the distribution member C170 and decorative member C190 are made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to visually see the balls passing through the first passage CRt1 to the sixth passage CRt6, as well as the distribution action of the distribution member C170 and the associated displacement of the decorative member C190, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient that at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 of the lower frame C86b are made of a light-transmitting resin material. This is because the player can visually confirm at least one or both of the line-up of balls in the third passage CRt3 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the distribution operation by the distribution member C170, while visually confirming that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170, and therefore such balls will enter the first winning hole 64 from the outlet COPout with a high probability (almost all balls in this embodiment), and therefore it is sufficient that the player does not need to visually confirm the balls being guided down the fifth passage CRt5.

The distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 may be made of a light-transmissive (or colored) resin material, and may be painted on the front side or may have a sticker attached thereto.

On the other hand, at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 may be made of a colored resin material, or at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 may be made of a colored resin material. It may be painted or a sticker may be attached. That is, the configuration may be such that the balls passing through the third passage CRt3 and the distribution member C170 are not visible to the player from the front side.

The front member C110 comprises a plate-shaped front portion C111 that forms the front, a plate-shaped bottom portion C112 that stands upright from the back surface of the front portion C111, and a connecting portion C113 that is disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the front portion C111 and the bottom portion C112.

A plurality of insertion holes C111a are formed in the front part C111 in the thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the front part C111. In the assembled state (unitized state), the lower frame C86b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and a tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) on the base plate 60.

In the front portion C111, an outlet COPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 72). As described above, the outlet COPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flows out into the play area.

The bottom surface of the second intervening member C180 is disposed on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion C112, and a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the bottom surface portion C112 and the second intervening member C180 (recessed portion C183). Ru. Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the through hole formed through the second intervening member C180 is made a part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.

The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal direction of the front surface portion C111, and the erected tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C112 abuts against the front surfaces of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering.

An receiving port COPin is formed in the connecting portion C113 (drilled in the plate thickness direction). As described above, the receiving port COPin is an opening that receives balls from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a. When the center frame C86 is attached (disposed) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame C86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion C111 and the connecting portion C113, and both are fastened and fixed with tapping screws. This connects the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 to the receiving port COPin.

The dish member C120 includes an upper bottom part C121 and a lower bottom part C122 that form the bottom of the passage, and an upper side wall part C123 and a lower side wall part C124 that form the side walls of the passage.

The upper bottom portion C121 extends in the left-right direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and slopes downward in a direction away from the receiving port COPin (direction of arrow R). It is formed by Note that the upper bottom surface portion C121 is located vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the receiving port COPin, and a vertical step is formed between it and the upper frame passage CRt0. That is, the dish member C120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121.

A groove C121a with a U-shaped cross section is recessed in the center of the upper bottom surface portion C121 in the width direction (arrow L-R direction) (see Figure 84). The groove C121a extends linearly in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The groove width (dimension in the direction of arrows L-R) of the groove C121 is set smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the groove depth (dimension in the direction of arrows U-D) of the groove C121a is set to a depth that prevents the ball from contacting the bottom surface of the groove C121a.

This allows the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 to be supported at two points (a pair of ridges where the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the groove C121a intersect). This makes it possible to increase the contact area between the ball and the passage compared to when the groove C121a is not formed (i.e., when the ball is supported at only one point). This allows the impact of the ball falling from the upper frame passage CRt0 to be cushioned (accepted) and the resistance when the ball rolls to be increased.

As described above, by dropping the ball from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom part C121 and supporting the ball on the upper bottom part C121 at two places, two When a ball flows (falls) from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom part C121 (first passage CRt1), the ball delays the falling of the preceding ball in the upper bottom part C121 (first passage CRt1), and the ball moves backward. This allows the ball to easily catch up with the ball in front. Therefore, the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball can be reduced.

The upper side wall portion C123 defines the upstream and downstream ends of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can be guided only in series.

A cutout portion C123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), and the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) through this cutout portion C123a.

The lower bottom portion C122 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and also in the direction of extension (direction of arrow FB) and in the vertical direction (direction of arrow FB). The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the UD direction) is curved into a circular arc convex downward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 84(b)).

The lower side wall portion C124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

The lower bottom portion C122 is arranged parallel to the upper bottom portion C121 in a top view, and is located between the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow B) of the upper bottom portion C121 and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom portion C122. (the end on the side in the direction of arrow B) are arranged at adjacent positions.

At the position corresponding to the cutout portion C123a in the upper side wall portion C123, the lower side wall portion C124 is not formed, and as described above, the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) via the cutout portion C123a.

A notch C124a is formed in the lower side wall C124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped curved lower bottom surface C122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is curved in an arc shape, and has an upwardly inclined side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122) from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). Since the ball is flown down, the flown down ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and then the ball is moved down the notch portion C124a. The ball can be caused to flow down from the bottom part C142 (third passageway CRt3).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

The lower bottom surface portion C122 has an outflow surface C122a recessed at a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (i.e., the lowest position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided along the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

Therefore, after reciprocating in the lower bottom part C122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased can be smoothly flowed out (flowing down) to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3) using the outflow surface C122a. can. That is, by utilizing the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), the balls (balls in a series of states) in which the distance between the leading ball and the following ball is reduced (balls in a series of states) are moved in the state that they are in a series. can be made to flow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the same.

Note that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (dimension along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C122, dimension in the direction of arrow FB) is equal to the width of the notch C124a. The closer the side is, the larger the shape is (see FIG. 77).

In addition, when viewed from above, when a ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the cutout portion C124a, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) rolls at a position furthest from the cutout portion C124a (a position where the lateral apex of the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C124), the outflow surface C122a is formed up to a range that overlaps with the center of the ball in a top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C122, crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom part C122, the ball that has flown down to the lower bottom part C122 (second passage CRt2) will flow into the lower bottom part C122 (second passage CRt2). CRt2) may flow out (flow down) to the bottom portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) due to the slope of the outflow surface C122a without reciprocating once or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times. . That is, without reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball, there is a risk that both balls may flow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while remaining separated from each other.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed to be inclined downward in the direction away from the cutout portion C124a (in the direction of arrow L) (see FIG. 84). As a result, due to the effect of the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C122, the ball is pressed against the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a, and the ball is It can be rolled (reciprocated) in two passages CRt2).

Thereby, before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, it is possible to suppress the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the effect of the slope of the outflow surface C122a. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, the ball is made to easily cross over (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and the ball is sufficiently reciprocated along the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). It can be easily done. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are connected together).

The arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C122, which is an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction), see FIG. 84(b)) has a radius of the arc shape at one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction that is smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between the one end side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a). In other words, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is larger.

As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction or the vicinity thereof), it is made easier to make the ball reciprocate, and it is also made easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball. , a stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball has become low (the ball does not reach one end in the longitudinal direction and the other end or the vicinity thereof, and the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a) In step ), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

Note that when the dish member C120 is disposed in such a manner that the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the window portion 60a of the base plate 60 Since the window portion 60a is disposed within the window portion 60a, the space in the front and rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the entire length of the lower bottom portion C122 (second passage CRt2) can be ensured, making it easy to connect the balls.

The back surface member C130 includes a main body portion C131 formed in a plate shape, and a lower stopper portion C132, an upper stopper portion C133, and a shaft support portion C134 that are erected from the front of the main body portion C131.

An opening C131a is formed in the main body C131 to connect a passage (fifth passage CRt5) formed on the front side and rear side of the main body C131. Below the opening C131a, a recess C131b is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body C131. The recess C131b forms part of the fifth passage CRt5 between itself and the detour member C200.

The lower stopper portion C132 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the distribution member C170 when the distribution member C170 is displaced downward, and defines the second position of the distribution member C170 (see FIG. 82). . On the other hand, the upper stopper portion C133 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the distribution member C170 when the distribution member C170 is displaced upward, and defines a first position (predetermined position) of the distribution member C170. (See Figure 81).

The shaft support seat C134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C192. The shaft C192 is fixed to the decorative member C190, and the sorting member C170 is non-rotatably connected to the shaft C192 inserted from the back of the main body C131, so that the sorting member C170 and the decorative member C190 are integrally rotatably supported by the main body C131 (shaft support seat C134). The shaft C192 is supported by the shaft support seat C134 in a position along the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The first intermediate member C140 includes a plate-shaped main body C141, a bottom face C142, a top face C143, and a passageway C144 that stand up from the back surface of the main body C141 (the face on the side in the direction of arrow B). It is arranged on the left side of the member C130 when viewed from the front.

When the first intermediate member C140 is disposed on the back member C130, the upright tips (on the arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142, the top surface portion C143, and the passage portion C144 are brought into contact with the front surface of the back surface member C130. As a result, a third passage CRt3 is formed by a space partitioned between the back surface member C130 and the first intermediate member C140 (main body portion C141, bottom surface portion C142, and top surface portion C143), and the third passage CRt3 is formed between the back surface member C130 and the first intermediate member C140. A fourth passage CRt4 is formed by a space defined by C140 (passage portion C144) and the distribution member C170 in the second position (see FIG. 82).

The bottom surface portion C142 is inclined downward from the dish member C120 side toward the sorting member C170 side. The passage portion C144 includes an opposing portion C144a formed at a position facing the sorting member C170 in the second position, and a bottom surface portion C144b forming a rolling surface for the balls, and the bottom surface portion C144b is inclined downward from the sorting member C170 in the second position toward the opposing portion C144a side, and is also inclined downward from the back member C130 side toward the front member C110 side. Therefore, the balls can be received from the sorting member C170 displaced to the second position into the fourth passage CRt4 and can flow out (roll) into the sixth passage CRt6.

Here, the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) of the dish member C120 rolls the ball in the front-to-back direction (the direction of the arrows F-B), the ball flows down from the dish member C120 to the bottom surface portion C142 in the left-to-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) (to the right in this embodiment), and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) rolls the ball flowing down from the dish member C120 in the left-to-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) (to the right in this embodiment).

In this case, the distance between the leading ball CB1 and the trailing ball CB2 (see FIG. 85) is determined by the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and the balls CB1 and CB2 flow down in the left-right direction from the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and also flow down (roll) in the left-right direction on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), so the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 can be confirmed when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to see. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

The second intermediate member C150 has a plate-shaped main body C151 and a bottom surface C152 standing upright from the rear surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C151, and is disposed on the right side of the rear surface member C130 when viewed from the front. When the second intermediate member C150 is disposed on the rear surface member C130, the standing tip (on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface C152 abuts against the front surface of the rear surface member C130.

A concave portion C151a is formed in the main body portion C151 by recessing its outer edge. The bottom surface portion C152 has a detour member C200 (gutter portion C203) disposed opposite to it on its lower surface, and a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess portion C151a and the opposing portion of the bottom portion C152 and the detour member C200 (gutter portion C203). be done. Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the detour member C200 is formed into a cylindrical shape and becomes a part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.

The first interposed member C160 is a member that forms a rolling surface of a ball in a part of the fifth passage CRt5, and is interposed between the facing member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space defined by the back surface member C130, the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the first intervening member C160.

The first interposed member C160 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (the direction of the arrow LR) and the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), which is directed downward in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow D). It is curved into a convex arc shape (see FIG. 82). Therefore, the balls distributed to the first intervening member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) by the distributing member C170 can be caused to reciprocate on the first intervening member C160 and then flow out to the opening C131a.

Thereby, for example, compared to a configuration in which the balls distributed by the distribution member C170 directly flow out to the opening C131a, the time required for the balls to flow out to the opening C131a can be lengthened. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player who expects the formation of a state in which there is a high probability of a ball entering the first winning hole 64 (winning a prize) to be aware that such a state has been formed, and also to ensure time to enjoy such a state. be able to. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

The first interposed member C160 has an outflow surface C160a recessed at a position corresponding to the opening C131a of the back member C130 (i.e., the lowest vertical position of the rolling surface of the first interposed member C160). The outflow surface C160a is a portion for allowing the ball guided through the first interposed member C160 to flow out to the opening C131a, and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the opening C131a.

The distribution member C170 includes a main body C171 having a fitting hole C171a formed on one side, a receiving portion C172 formed on the other side of the main body C171 opposite the side on which the fitting hole C171a is formed, and a rolling portion C173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body C171, and is rotatable around a shaft C192 (shaft support portion C134) fitted into the fitting hole C171a.

The fitting hole C171a is formed as a hole with a D-shaped cross section, and the shaft C192, which has a cross-sectional shape that matches the fitting hole C171a, is fitted into the fitting hole C171a, thereby fixing the shaft C192 to the main body C171 so that it cannot rotate. The shaft C192 is also fixed to the decorative member C190 so that it cannot rotate, and therefore the main body C171 (distributing member C170) and the decorative member C190 are integrated (formed as one unit) via the shaft C192.

In this case, the center of gravity of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 is offset to one side (the side opposite the distribution member C170 across the axis C192, the right side in Figure 81) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the distribution member C170 is raised on the receiving section C172 side (rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in front view), and is in a state in which rotation is restricted by the upper stopper section C133 (disposed in the first position (predetermined position)) (see Figure 81).

On the other hand, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C170, the weight of the ball causes the overall center of gravity to be shifted to the other side (with respect to the axis C192) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). It is eccentric to the side where the dividing member C170 is disposed (the left side in FIG. 81). Therefore, when the ball is received in the receiving part C172, the distributing member C170 is lowered on the receiving part C172 side (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 when viewed from the front), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper part C132. (see FIG. 82).

At least a part of the main body part C191 of the decorative member C190 is made visible to the player, and as the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position, the decorative member C190 (main body part C191 C191) is also rotated, and the position (form) visually recognized by the player is changed. Therefore, based on the position (form) of the decorative member C190, the player can recognize the state of the distribution member C170 (ie, the direction in which the balls are distributed). Furthermore, the decorative member C190 can serve both as a weight for displacing the distribution member C170 and as a part for recognizing the distribution direction of the balls, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, after the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, when the ball is discharged (flowed) from the receiving part C172 to the passage part C144 of the first intermediate member C140, the distribution member C170 The decorative member C190 is returned to the first position (predetermined position) by the action of its own weight (the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis C192).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C170 to the first position is performed by the weight (weight) of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190, so for example, a biasing spring may be provided. The structure can be simplified compared to the case where the biasing spring biases the distribution member C170 toward the first position.

In addition, compared to when a biasing spring is used, the displacement (returning operation) of the sorting member C170 to the first position can be slowed down, making it easier for the trailing ball CB2 to reach the rolling portion C173. In other words, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for the sorting member C170 to be displaced (rotated) to a position where the trailing ball CB2 cannot flow onto the rolling portion C173 after it starts to displace (rotate) from the second position toward the first position. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility for a third ball, which is further behind the trailing ball CB2, to reach the rolling portion C173 (see Figures 85 to 87).

The receiving portion C172 has an opposing portion C172a formed at a position facing the third passage CRt3 in the first position, and a bottom surface portion C172b that supports the received ball in the first position and forms a rolling surface for rolling the ball toward the passage portion C144 in the second position.

In the receiving part C172, when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, the facing part C172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom part C142 of the first intermediate member C140, and the bottom part C172b is the opposite part. It is formed to be inclined upward from C172a toward the bottom surface C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 81).

When the distribution member C170 is positioned in the first position, if the opposing portion C172a is inclined in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the rolling portion C173 side of the opposing portion C172a is inclined in a direction away from the third passage CRt3 more than the bottom surface portion C172b side), there is a risk that a ball that collides with the opposing portion C172a will be bounced upward and flow back into the third passage CRt3.

In contrast, when the distribution member C170 is positioned in the first position, the opposing portion C172a is oriented approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, so that the balls received from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 are received by the opposing portion C172a, preventing them from flowing back into the third passage CRt3.

Further, when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed to be inclined downward from the opposing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 (passage portion C144) of the first intermediate member C140. If so, the balls received in the receiving part C172 will flow out to the passage part C144 of the first intermediate member C140 at an early stage, making it impossible to utilize the weight of the balls, which will cause the distribution member C170 to reach the second position. There is a possibility that you will not be allowed to do so.

On the other hand, the bottom portion C172b is formed to be inclined upward from the opposing portion C172a toward the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 when the distribution member C170 is placed at the first position. The ball can be held on the bottom portion C172b at least until the distribution member C170 rotates by a predetermined amount from the first position. Thereby, the time until the ball received in the receiving part C172 flows out to the passage part C144 of the first intermediate member C140 can be delayed. As a result, the weight of the ball can be effectively utilized to ensure that the distribution member C170 reaches the second position.

In addition, for the reason mentioned above (prevention of backflow to the third passage CRt3), the opposing part C172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling part C173 side is closer to the third passage CRt3 than the bottom part C172b side.

When the sorting member C170 is placed in the second position, the receiving portion C172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C172b slopes downward from the opposing portion C172a toward the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 82). This allows the balls received in the receiving portion C172 to flow reliably into the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140.

In addition, while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface portion C172b, the weight of the ball acts on the distribution member C170, making it easier to maintain the distribution member C170 in the second position (i.e., in a state in which the trailing ball can be guided to the rolling portion C173 (fifth passage CRt5)).

The rolling portion C173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) the balls rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the second intervening member C160 (fifth passage CRt5). Yes, when the distribution member C170 is placed in the second position, the downstream end of the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 and the downstream end of the second intervening member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) It is located (erected) between the upstream end and the upstream end.

The upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 is formed to protrude from the opposing portion C172a of the receiving portion C172. That is, at the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173, a plate-shaped portion is formed that protrudes from the opposing portion C172a toward the upstream side (first intermediate member C140 (third passage CRt3) side, arrow L direction) from the opposing portion C172a. By inserting this plate-shaped portion between ball CB1 and ball CB2, the two balls (balls CB1, CB2) can be separated.

When the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, the height position of the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the height position of the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140. That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173, and when the distribution member C170 disposed at the second position is displaced (rotated) by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle) toward the first position, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 are disposed at the same height position.

Here, when the ball rolling on the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 flows into the receiving part C172, the distribution member C170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the ball. (rotation), and the lower surface of the distribution member C170 comes into contact with the lower stopper portion C132, so that the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position.

In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C170 will be bounced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C132. If the upward bounce of the distribution member C170 causes the height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) to be positioned vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140, there is a risk that the balls will not be able to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 into the rolling portion C173.

In particular, if a ball collides with the distributing member C170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling part C173) that has been flipped upward, and the impact of the ball collision causes the distributing member C170 to be further flipped upward (the ball When the distributing member C170 is further pushed upward by the ball), the ball flows into the receiving part C172 even though it should have originally flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C173 ( There is a risk that it will be accepted.

On the other hand, when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) are Since a step is formed between them, even if the distribution member C170 is flipped upward due to an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 will be lower than the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 due to the step between the two. It can be suppressed from being located vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). That is, it is possible to allow the distribution member C170 to be flipped upward by the difference in level between the two. Therefore, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3). It is possible to easily flow (roll) from the roller into the rolling portion C173.

Furthermore, the distribution member C170 is formed such that the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C140, the face in the direction of the arrow L) is inclined downward from the rolling portion C173 toward the first intermediate member C140 (bottom surface portion C142). That is, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 is formed in a shape such that the edge portion on the receiving portion C172 (opposing portion C172a) side is closer to the first intermediate member C140 than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C173.

As a result, when a ball collides with the sorting member C170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173) that has been bounced upward, the direction of the force acting from the ball on the sorting member C170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173) can be set to a force in a direction that pushes the sorting member C170 downward. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C173 (a trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the preceding ball CB1 is a predetermined amount or less) to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) into the rolling portion C173.

The receiving part C172 and the rolling part C173 are arranged on the same side with respect to C192 (the side where the direction in which the distribution member C170 is rotated due to the weight of the ball is the same). Therefore, even if the weight of the ball received in the receiving part C172 causes the distribution member C170 to be placed in the second position and then the ball is ejected from the receiving part C172, the weight of the ball rolling in the rolling part C173 is The distributing member C170 can be maintained in the second position by using the distributing member C170. That is, when there is a ball to be guided to the fifth passage CRt5, the weight of the ball can be used to maintain the attitude of the distribution member C170 to the attitude for guiding the ball to the fifth passage CRt5. .

Therefore, there is no need to maintain the distribution member C170 in the second position by using the weight of the ball received in the receiving part C172 (the ball rolling on the bottom part C172b), and the extended length of the bottom part C172b can be reduced. can be made shorter, and the distribution member C170 can be made smaller accordingly. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the distribution member C170 can be increased.

Here, the sorting member C170 is configured so that the direction in which the balls roll from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) towards the receiving portion C172 (the direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the balls, arrow R direction) is opposite to the direction in which the balls roll from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 (the direction in which the received balls are made to roll, arrow L direction). In other words, the sorting member C170 is configured to reverse (change direction) the flow (rolling) direction of the balls in the receiving portion C172.

As a result, compared to when the direction in which the receiving section C172 receives the balls and the direction in which the balls roll from the receiving section C172 to the passage section C144 are the same, the balls can be retained in the sorting member C170 (receiving section C172) for the time required for reversal, and the weight of the balls retained in the receiving section C172 can be used to easily maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position. As a result, the balls can be stably rolled in the rolling section C173.

In addition, by utilizing the inversion of the balls, the residence time can be secured, and the extension length of the bottom surface portion C172b in the receiving portion C172 can be shortened accordingly, thereby making the distribution member C170 smaller. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the distribution member C170 can be increased.

The second interposed member C180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in the sixth passage CRt6, and is interposed between the front member C111 and the opposing first and second intermediate members C140 and C150. That is, the sixth passage CRt6 is formed by the space partitioned between the front member C110, the first and second intermediate members C140 and C150, and the second interposed member C180.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 has a concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and lateral outflow surface C182) that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow the ball guided through the second interposed member C180 (sixth passage CRt6) to flow out into the play area. In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt6 has undulations, with the lateral outflow surface C182 located at the bottom of the undulations and the central outflow surface C181 located at the top of the undulations.

Note that the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front part C111 of the front member C110 is the upper surface (rolling edge) of the second intervening member C180, except for the area where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. (moving surface) upwards (in the direction of arrow U). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C180 flows out (flows down) into the game area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is formed in the bottom of the second intervening member C180, and as described above, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom C112 of the front member C110. .

The decorative member C190 comprises a main body C191 formed in a plate shape and an axis C192 fixed to the main body C191, and as described above, is connected (integrated) to the distribution member C170 via the axis C192. A pattern such as a character is displayed on the front of the main body C191 by printing or attaching a sticker, and the operation of the distribution member C170 can be visually recognized by the player based on the movement (displacement) of the character.

The axis C192 is disposed perpendicular to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 72). This allows the dimensions of the lower frame C86b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be reduced.

The detour member C200 includes a plate-shaped main body C201, a wall C202 erected from the front (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main body C201, and a gutter C203 formed by further extending a portion of the wall C202 toward the front side, and is disposed on the rear side of the rear member C130 at a position opposite the opening C131a.

In a state where the detour member C200 is disposed on the back member C130, the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the wall portion C202 is in contact with the back surface of the back member C130 (main body portion C131), and the gutter portion C203 is The upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow F) is in contact with the back surface of the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the edge of the gutter portion C203 is in contact with the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C150 (bottom surface portion C152). be touched.

As a result, a space is partitioned between the back member C130 (main body part C131) and the detour member C200 (main body part C201 and wall part C202), and the second intermediate member C150 (bottom part C152) and the detour member C200 (gutter part A part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space partitioned into C203) (see FIG. 83).

Note that the gutter portion C203 is inclined downward from the back member C130 side toward the second intermediate member C150 side. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the detour member C200 from the opening C131a of the back member C130 is rolled on the gutter C203, and is passed between the bottom part C112 of the front member C110 and the second intervening member C180 (recess C183). It can be made to flow into the fifth passage CRt5 formed in .

Next, the operation of distributing balls by the distributing member C170 will be explained. 85 to 87 are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame C86b showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member C170, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77.

Note that FIGS. 85(a) and 85(b) show a state in which the distribution member C170 is placed at the first position, and correspond to FIG. 81. 86(b) and 87 show a state in which the distribution member C170 is placed at the second position, and correspond to FIG. 82.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C172 is positioned in a position that can receive (allow the ball CB1 to flow in) the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140.

That is, the receiving portion C172 has an opposing portion C172a disposed at a position intersecting an extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface), and a bottom portion C172b disposed at a position vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface).

In addition, when the distribution member C170 is placed in the first position, the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the bottom surface (the rolling surface) of the rolling portion C173 are connected to each other. The distance between the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) on the opposite surface (the surface in the direction of arrow D) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension that allows the ball to pass through). .

On the other hand, when the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the rolling portion C173 is positioned in a position that cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in).

That is, the bottom surface portion C172b of the rolling portion C173 is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the extension line of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) (one step higher). The vertical distance (height of the step) between the rolling portion C173 and the extension line of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the sorting member C170 in the first position.

Note that when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the top surface portion C143 of the first intermediate member C140 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (the arrow L The distance between the ball and the ball (the end on the direction side) is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the ball (a size through which the ball cannot pass). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the distribution member C170 in the first position. However, this interval may be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

When the ball CB1 (the leading ball) and the ball CB2 (the trailing ball with a predetermined interval between them) roll on the bottom surface C142 of the first intermediate member C140, FIG. ), the ball CB1 flows into (receives) the receiving part C172 of the distribution member C170, the ball CB1 abuts (receives) the opposing part C172a, and is held in the receiving part C172.

Further, when the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 comes into contact with the ball CB1. As described above, when the distribution member C170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end of the top surface portion C143 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere ( Since the dimensions are set such that the ball cannot pass through, the ball CB2 can be prevented from climbing over the ball CB1 and flowing into the rolling portion C173. That is, the ball CB2 can be made to wait behind (on the upstream side) the ball CB1.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), when ball CB1 is received by receiving portion C172, the weight of ball CB1 displaces (rotates) sorting member C170 from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 86(a). Also, when ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1, the weight of ball CB2 is also applied to sorting member C170.

The receiving portion C172 has an area on the side of the opposing portion C172a that is connected to the bottom portion C172b, and an area on the side of the bottom portion C172b that is connected to the opposing portion C172a, i.e., the connecting portion between the opposing portion C172a and the bottom portion C172b, that is, is curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C192 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion is capable of holding the sphere.

Furthermore, the distance between the distribution member C170 (the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface portion C172b) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is When the distribution member C170 is placed in the first position, the size is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimensions through which the sphere cannot pass), and the distribution member C170 is displaced from the first position to the second position ( (rotation), it is gradually enlarged.

That is, when the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (a position between FIG. 86(a) and FIG. 86(b)), the gap between the above-mentioned sorting member C170 (the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface portion C172b) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the opposing portion C144a) is expanded to a dimension approximately equal to the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass), and when the sorting member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position toward the second position, the above-mentioned gap is further expanded, and the maximum gap is formed at the second position.

Therefore, while the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C172 is maintained. In other words, the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) with the ball CB1 received in the receiving portion C172 between the first position and the predetermined intermediate position. This allows the ball CB2 to remain in contact with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 to be maintained at the downstream end of the bottom portion C142.

In this case, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end on the bottom surface (the surface opposite to the rolling surface, the surface on the arrow D direction side) of the rolling portion C173. As the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the distance between the distribution member C170 and the end (the end on the arrow L direction side) is gradually reduced. Before reaching a predetermined intermediate position, a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension through which the sphere cannot pass) is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C172.

Moreover, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the ball CB1 held in the receiving part C172 (the connecting part between the facing part C172a and the bottom part C172b) Locus of the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) on the bottom surface (surface opposite to the rolling surface, surface in the direction of arrow D) of the rolling portion C173, relative to the outer edge (the outer edge on the opposite side to the axis C192) is configured to pass on the side closer to the axis C192.

Therefore, it is possible to maintain the state in which the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1, and maintain the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142. ) can push back the ball CB2. That is, by inserting the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 between the balls CB1 and CB2, both balls can be separated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C172. Moreover, it is possible to gradually roll the ball CB2 to the rolling portion C173 and stabilize the subsequent rolling.

When the sorting member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the state shown in FIG. 86(a) toward the second position, the ball CB1 rolls on the bottom surface portion C172b toward the passage portion C144, and the ball CB2 flows down to the rolling portion C173 (is received by the rolling portion C173).

As shown in Figures 86(b) and 87, when the sorting member C170 is placed in the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 (fourth passage CRt4), and the ball CB2 rolls in the rolling portion C173 and flows into the first intermediate member C160 (fifth passage CRt5).

After the balls CB1 and CB2 have flowed into the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5, the distribution member C170 is returned (displaced) from the second position to the first position by its own weight. Note that even when the distribution member C170 is placed at the second position, or even after the distribution member C170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the third ball When the ball reaches the rolling portion C173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C173 and flows (guides) into the fifth passage CRt5.

As described above, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C140, the face in the direction of arrow L) is formed with a downward incline from the rolling portion C173 toward the first intermediate member C140 (bottom surface portion C142), so that even after the distribution member C170 has begun to displace (rotate) from the second position to the first position, the upstream inclined surface (end face) of the rolling portion C173 can be used to facilitate the flow of the third ball into the rolling portion C173.

The distribution member C170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position by the weight of only one ball. Therefore, when the distance between ball CB1 and ball CB2 is greater than a predetermined amount, both balls CB1 and CB2 are received in turn by the receiving portion C172, and are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4 through the distribution operation described above.

As described above, according to the lower frame C86b in the second embodiment, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance of less than a predetermined amount (including the case where the distance between the two balls is 0), ball CB1 is sorted (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4, and ball CB2 is sorted (guided) to the fifth passage CRt5 by the sorting member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of ball CB1. On the other hand, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be sorted (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. In this way, the guided passage can be changed depending on the state of the line of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), which can improve the interest.

Next, the center frame C2086 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 103. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 88 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b in the third embodiment, and Figure 89 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. Note that in Figures 88 and 89, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame C2086b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the lower frame C2086b includes a receiving port COP2000in formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage CRt2001 communicating with the receiving port COP2000in, and the first passage. The ball guided through CRt2001 (the ball that reciprocated along the longitudinal direction of the first passage CRt2001) flows down the second passage CRt2002, and the ball guided through the second passage CRt2002 is sorted by the distribution member C2170. The third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004 are flowed down, and the balls guided through the third passage CRt2003 and the balls that have fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (balls that have not reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) are flowing down. a sixth passage CRt2006 where the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 (the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flows down, and a fifth passage CRt2005 where the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows down. An outflow port COP2000out is formed as an opening for outflow to the gaming area (see FIGS. 96 and 97).

Note that the center frame in the third embodiment is composed of an upper frame (not shown) and a lower frame C2086b. The upper frame in the third embodiment is different from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a in the second embodiment in the shape of its upper frame passage (not shown), and the other configurations are the same as in the second embodiment. Since it has the same configuration as the upper frame C86a, a description thereof will be omitted.

The upper frame passage is a passage that guides balls that flow in (enter) from the area on the left side of the play area when viewed from the front (left side of Figure 72) (the area between the center frame (upper frame) and rail 61 (see Figure 72)), and the downstream end of the upper frame passage is connected to the receiving port COP2000in of the lower frame C2086b. In other words, balls that flow in (enter) the upper frame passage from the play area flow in (enter) from the upper frame passage via the receiving port COP2000in into the first passage CRt2001 of the lower frame C2086b.

A distribution member C2170 that operates according to the weight of the balls is disposed on the lower frame C2086b (see Figures 96 and 97). When a series of balls is guided down the second passage CRt2002, the leading ball is distributed to the third passage CRt2003, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004. If the distance between the series of balls is greater than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the third passage CRt2003.

Here, the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt4 is flowed down to the fifth passage CRt5, and the outlet COPout, which is the exit of the fifth passage CRt2005 (the opening that allows the ball to flow out to the gaming area), is the first It is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 72). Therefore, the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 is likely to win the first prize opening 64 (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 is high).

On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt2006, there is a concave surface formed with a downward slope toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) in order to cause the balls guided in the sixth passage CRt2006 to flow out to the gaming area. The central outflow surface C181 is not only formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the opening 64, but also positioned in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 72) from the vertical direction above the first winning opening 64. Side outflow surfaces C182 are formed (arranged) at two different locations. Moreover, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt2006, a side outflow surface C182 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C181 is formed at the top of the undulation.

Therefore, in the sixth passage CRt2006, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outflow surface C182 to the gaming area than the probability of flowing out from the central outflow surface C181 to the gaming area, and as a result, , it is difficult to win into the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning into the first winning hole 64 is lower than the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 mentioned above).

In this way, in the lower frame C2086b of this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, when a series of balls flows into the second passage CRt2002, the leading ball is diverted to the normal passage (third passage CRt2003), while the trailing ball is diverted to the fourth passage CRt2004, which directs the ball down a passage that is more likely to win the first winning port 64 (in this embodiment, the passage (fifth passage CRt2005) that almost certainly ensures that the ball will win the first winning port 64). Therefore, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning port 64 (ensuring a win), the player is made to look forward to the formation of a series of balls, which increases the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ball guided along the fourth passage CRt2004 is formed so that it can fall into the sixth passage along the way, and only balls that reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling can flow down (flow into) the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, in order to increase the probability of a ball winning the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a winning), after the trailing ball among the connected balls is sorted into the fourth passage CRt2004, the player is made to hope that the ball will reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling, which increases the interest of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C2086b will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 103 in addition to FIGS. 88 to 89.

Figure 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b, and Figure 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. Figure 92 is a top view of the lower frame C2086b, Figure 93 is a front view of the lower frame C2086b, and Figure 94 is a rear view of the lower frame C2086b. Figure 95(a) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in Figure 93, and Figure 95(b) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVb in Figure 93.

Figures 96 and 97 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b taken along line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. Figure 98 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along line XCVIII-XCVIII in Figure 94, and Figure 99 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along line XCIX-XCIX in Figure 94. Note that Figure 96 shows the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, and Figure 97 shows the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 99, the lower frame C2086b includes a front member C2110, a plate member C2120 disposed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member C2110, and A back surface member C2130 that is arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval on the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B), a first intermediate member C2140 and a 2 intermediate member C2150, first intervening member C2160, magnetic part C2400 and receiving member C2500, distribution member C2170 interposed between facing back member C2130 and first intermediate member C2140, front member C2110 and back member A second intervening member C2180 is provided between the opposing members C2130, and a detour member C2200 and a magnet C2300 are provided on the back surface of the back member C2130.

The lower frame C2086b is configured as a single unit by fastening each component to the other components with tapping screws, and the distribution component C2170 is rotatably supported by the rear component C2130 and the first intermediate component C2140 (see FIG. 88).

In addition, the lower frame C2086b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and balls can be seen through) for all components except for the distribution member C2170, and the distribution member C2170 is made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to visually see the balls passing through the first passage CRt2001 to the sixth passage CRt2006, and also allows the player to visually see the distribution action of the distribution member C2170, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient that at least the first intermediate member C2140 of the lower frame C2086b is made of a light-transmitting resin material. This is because if the player can visually confirm the arrangement of the balls in the second passage CRt2002 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the distribution operation by the distribution member C2170, and can visually confirm that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170, the ball will enter the first winning hole 64 from the outlet COPout with a high probability (in this embodiment, almost all balls enter the fifth passage CRt2005), so it is sufficient that the player does not visually confirm the balls being guided along the fifth passage CRt2005.

Note that the distribution member C2170 may be made of a light-transmissive (or colored) resin material, and may have its front surface painted or may have a sticker attached thereto.

Also, on the other hand, the first intermediate member C2140 may be made of a colored resin material, or may be painted or have a sticker attached to it. In other words, the balls passing through the third passage CRt2003 and the distribution member C2170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member C2110 has a plate-shaped front portion C111 that forms the front side, and a plate-shaped bottom portion C112 that stands upright from the back side of the front portion C111.

A plurality of insertion holes C111a are formed in the front part C111 in the thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the front part C111. The lower frame C2086b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) on the base plate 60.

In the front part C111, an outlet COPout is formed (perforated in the thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 72). As described above, the outflow port COPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows out to the game area.

The bottom surface of the second intervening member C2180 is disposed opposite to the top surface of the bottom surface portion C112. Note that a cylindrical portion communicating with the outlet COPout is formed in the bottom portion C112, and this cylindrical portion is a part of the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, since an overlapping portion (seam) between the front member C2110 and the second intervening member C180 is not formed on the inner wall surface of the fifth passage CRt2005, when a player looks into the fifth passage CRt2005 from the outlet COPout, Not only can the appearance be improved, but also foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from entering through the overlapping portions (seams).

The bottom part C112 is formed continuously over the entire length of the front part C111, and the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom part C112 is in front of the first intermediate member C2140 and the first intervening member C2160. be touched. This suppresses the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires.

The dish member C2120 has an upper bottom surface portion C2121 and a lower bottom surface portion C2122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and a side wall portion C2124 that forms the side wall of the passage.

The upper bottom portion C2121 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow LR direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and is inclined downward in the direction away from the receiving port COP2000in (arrow direction). It is formed by

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 extends in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) (see Figure 84 (b)).

The side wall portion C2124 defines the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (first passage CRt2001), the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension at least smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

The lower bottom portion C2122 intersects the upper bottom portion C2121 at approximately 90 degrees when viewed from above, and the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the upper bottom portion C2121 and one end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom portion C2122. The two sides (ends in the direction of arrow F) are arranged at adjacent positions.

A notch C124a is formed in the side wall C2124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (lowest vertical position) of the lower bottom surface C2122 curved in an arc shape. The ball is allowed to flow down from the lower bottom part C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is curved in an arc shape, and the ball flows down from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the upwardly inclined side (one end side of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 in the longitudinal direction), so that the ball that flows down can be made to move back and forth between one end side and the other end side of the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), and then the ball can be made to flow down from the cutout portion C124a to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 has an outflow surface C122a recessed at a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (i.e., the lowest position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided along the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), balls with a reduced distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining that connected state.

In addition, the outflow surface C122a is formed in such a way that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) is larger on the side closer to the cutout portion C124a (see Figure 92).

In addition, when viewed from above, when a ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the cutout portion C124a, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) rolls at a position furthest from the cutout portion C124a (a position where the lateral apex of the ball abuts on the lower side wall portion C2124), the outflow surface C122a is formed up to a range that overlaps with the center of the ball in a top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface C2122, there is a risk that a ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001) may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) without ever reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001) or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. In other words, there is a risk that the leading ball and the trailing ball may not decrease the distance between them, and the two balls may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while still spaced apart.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed to be inclined downward in the direction away from the notch portion C124a (in the direction of arrow L) (see FIG. 96). As a result, due to the action of the slope of the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the ball is pressed against the side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch portion C124a, and the ball is pushed against the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passageway). CRt2001) can be used to roll (reciprocate).

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow. In other words, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to overcome (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and to make the ball move back and forth sufficiently along the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are linked together).

The arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122, which is an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction), see Figures 84(b) and 95(b)) has a radius of the arc shape at one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction that is smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between the one end side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a). In other words, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is larger.

As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction or the vicinity thereof), it is made easier to make the ball reciprocate, and it is also made easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball. , a stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball has become low (the ball does not reach one end in the longitudinal direction and the other end or the vicinity thereof, and the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a) In step ), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom portion C2142 (second passageway CRt2002) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

The back member C2130 includes a main body C2131 formed in a plate shape and a shaft support C2134 erected from the front of the main body C2131.

The main body C2131 is provided with an opening C2131a for connecting the passage (fifth passage CRt2005) formed on the front and back sides of the main body C2131, and an opening C2131c for avoiding interference with the distribution member C2170 (weight C2175). Below the opening C2131a, a recess C2131b is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body C2131. The recess C2131b forms part of the fifth passage CRt2005 between the opposing side and the detour member C2200.

The shaft support seat C2134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170. The shaft C2174 is supported by the shaft support seat C2134 and the shaft support seat C2141b of the first intermediate member C2140 in a position along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The first intermediate member C2140 includes a plate-shaped main body part C2141, a bottom face part C2142, a top face part C2143, a passage part C2144, and a lower stopper part C2145, which are erected from the back surface of the main body part C2141 (the surface in the direction of arrow B). and is arranged on the left side of the back member C2130 when viewed from the front.

The main body C2141 is formed with an opening C2141a that connects the passages (third passage CRt2003 and sixth passage CRt2006) formed on the front and back sides of the main body C2141. In addition, an axis support seat C2141b is erected from the back of the main body C2141. The axis support seat C2141b is formed as an axis support (bearing) that rotatably supports the axis C2174 of the distribution member C2170.

When the first intermediate member C2140 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the erected tips (in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the top surface portion C2143 abut against the front surface of the rear member C2130. As a result, a second passage CRt2002 is formed by the space partitioned by the rear member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140 (main body portion C2141, bottom surface portion C2142, and top surface portion C2143), and a third passage CRt2003 is formed by the space partitioned by the rear member C2130, the first intermediate member C2140 (bottom surface portion C2142 and passage portion C2144), and the sorting member C2170 in the second position (see FIG. 97).

The bottom surface portion C2142 is inclined downward from the dish member C2120 side toward the sorting member C2170 side. The passage portion C2144 is located between the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) in the second position and the opening C2141a, and is formed with a downward incline from the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) in the second position toward the opening C2141a side. Therefore, when the passage portion C2144 receives a ball from the sorting member C2170 displaced to the second position, it can cause the ball to flow (roll) into the sixth passage CRt2006 via the opening C2141a.

The bottom surface portion C2142 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced upward, thereby determining the first position of the sorting member C2170 (see FIG. 96). On the other hand, the lower stopper portion C2145 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced downward, thereby determining the second position of the sorting member C2170 (see FIG. 97).

Note that when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is displaced (raised) upward. That is, the bottom surface portion C2173 when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position is higher than the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom surface portion C2173 when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the first position. It is located on the U side).

The second intermediate member C2150 includes a plate-shaped main body C2151, a bottom face C2152 and wall face parts C2153, C2154 that are erected from the back surface of the main body C2151 (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B). It is disposed on the right side of the back member C2130 when viewed from the front, with a predetermined spacing between the member C2140 and the member C2140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opposing interval (the interval in the arrow LR direction) between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 is equal to the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) dimension of the receiving member C2500. It is set to a value larger than the sum of at least twice the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, a space through which the ball can pass is ensured on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) (both with the first intermediate member C2140 and with the second intermediate member C2150). can do. Therefore, it is possible to increase the types (variations) of the direction in which the ball flows down, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

When the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the back member C2130, the bottom portion C2152 is placed in a position where it can communicate with the opening C2131a of the back member C2130, and is tilted downward toward the opening 2131a. Therefore, when the bottom part C2152 receives the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 (the ball that has fallen from the end of the magnetic part C2400), it can cause the ball to flow (roll) into the opening C2131a. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed on the upper surface side of the bottom surface portion C2152.

In a state where the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the back member C2130, the upright tips (on the arrow B direction side) of the bottom part C2152 and the wall parts C2153, C2154 are in contact with the front surface of the back member C2130. Further, the main body portion C2151 and the wall portions C2153 and C2154 are projected upward (in the direction of arrow U) by a predetermined amount along the edge of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom portion C2152.

The wall portion C2153 located on the far side from the magnetic portion C2400 intersects with the extension line of the movement direction of the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 (direction along the lower edge (edge that attracts the ball) of the magnetic portion C2400). form a surface. As a result, the ball ejected from the fourth passage CRt2004 (falling from the magnetic part C2400) is directly received by the wall part C2153, or is received by the wall part C2153 after bouncing (jumping up) by the bottom part C2152, It can be dropped onto the bottom part C2152. In the embodiment, the wall portion C2153 is formed to a position higher than the lower edge (edge to which the ball is attracted) at the end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the magnetic portion C2400.

On the other hand, the protruding dimension from the top surface of the bottom portion C2152 is smaller (lower) than the protruding dimension of the wall portion C2154 located closer to the magnetic portion C2400, and the protruding dimension of the main body portion C2151 is smaller (lower) than the protruding dimension of the wall portion C2153 located farther from the magnetic portion C2400. This allows the ball to fall from the bottom portion 2152 (fifth passage CRt2005) to the first intervening member C2160 or the second intervening member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006), increasing the interest of the game. Note that the protruding dimensions of the wall portion C2154 and the main body portion C2151 are preferably smaller than the diameter of the ball.

The receiving member C2500 includes a first bottom part C2501 and a second bottom part C2502 that form an upper surface (rolling surface), and is located between the opposing first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member 2150, and has a magnetic part C2400. It is arranged at a position below (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, the ball falling from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400) can be received by the first bottom part C2501 and the second bottom part C2502, and can be caused to flow down (roll) to the first intervening member C2160.

The first bottom part C2501 is formed to be inclined downward from the connection part with the second bottom part C2502 toward the first intermediate member C2140 side (in the direction of arrow L), and the second bottom part C2502 is formed to be inclined downward from the connection part with the second bottom part C2502 It is formed to be inclined downward from the connection part with the second intermediate member C2150 (in the direction of arrow R). Further, the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 are tilted downward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back side (back surface member C2130 side) (see FIG. 99).

As described above, on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (the direction of the arrows L-R), a space the size of at least one sphere is formed between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150.

Therefore, the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400) can be rolled in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first bottom surface part C2501 or the second bottom surface part C2502, and can flow down to the first interposed member C2160. In this case, the direction in which the ball flows down can be changed depending on the part (first bottom surface part C2501 or second bottom surface part C2502) that receives the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400).

In addition, the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be made to roll in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502, and then flow down from the downstream end of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 to the first intermediate member C2160. This makes it easier to make the ball roll along the longitudinal direction of the first intermediate member C2160.

Note that at least one or both of the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 may be inclined upward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back side (back surface member C2130 side), or the receiving member It may be non-inclined (that is, horizontal) from the front side of C2500 toward the back side (back side member C2130 side).

Further, the receiving member C2500 has a form in which a space through which the ball can pass is ensured only on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) (that is, one of the first intermediate member C2140 or the second intermediate member C2150). A space may be formed in which a ball can flow down (pass) only between one and the other, and a space in which a ball can flow down (pass) cannot be formed between one and the other. In this case, the longitudinal dimension of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 can be secured, and the rolling time of the ball can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The first intervening member C2160 is a member that forms a rolling surface that allows the ball that has flown down from the receiving member C2500 to flow down to the second intervening member C2180, and is a member that forms a rolling surface that allows the ball to flow down from the receiving member C2500 to the second intervening member C2180. It is interposed between the opposing sides.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160 is formed with concave surfaces (central outflow surface C2161 and side outflow surface C2162) that are inclined downward toward the front side (arrow F direction) to allow the balls to flow out to the second interposed member C2180. The central outflow surface C2161 is formed (placed) at a position vertically above the central outflow surface C181 (i.e., the first winning hole 64) of the second interposed member C2180, and the side outflow surface C2162 is formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 72) of the game board 13 from the central outflow surface C2161. In addition, undulations are formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160, and the side outflow surface C2162 is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and the central outflow surface C2161 is formed at the top of the undulations.

Note that the side outflow surface C2162 is located outward (in the direction of arrow L or direction of arrow R) in the width direction of the game board 13 (the left-right direction in FIG. 72) with respect to the side outflow surface C182 of the second intervening member C2180. are formed (arranged) with different Therefore, the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface C2162 is directed to the outside of the side outflow surface C182 of the second intervening member C2180 (that is, the second intervening member C2180 slopes downward toward the side outflow surface C182). It can be made to flow down to the upper surface (rolling surface). Therefore, such a ball can be easily rolled along the longitudinal direction of the second intervening member C2180. As a result, it is possible to create an opportunity for the ball to flow down from the central outflow surface C181 of the second intervening member C2180 (that is, to enter the first prize opening 64 (win)), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The distribution member C2170 includes a main body C2171 on which the shaft C2174 is supported, a receiving portion C2172 formed on one side of the main body C2171, a rolling portion C2173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body C2171, and a brass weight C2175 disposed (attached) to the main body C2171 at a position opposite the receiving portion C2172 across the shaft C2174, and is rotatable around the shaft C2174 (shaft support seat portions C2134, C2141b).

The distribution member C2170 has its center of gravity eccentric to the other side (the side where the weight C2175 is disposed, i.e., the side opposite the receiving portion C21720 across the axis C2174, the right side in FIG. 96) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the distribution member C2170 is in a state where the receiving portion C2172 side is raised (rotated clockwise around the axis C2174 in a front view) and the rotation is restricted by the bottom portion C2142 (disposed in the first position) (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C2172 of the distribution member C2170, the weight of the ball causes the overall center of gravity to be on one side (the receiving portion C2172 is formed) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174). (ie, the side opposite to the weight C2175 with respect to the axis C2174, the left side in FIG. 97). Therefore, when the ball is received in the receiving part C2172, the distributing member C2170 is lowered on the receiving part C2172 side (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C2174 in front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper part C2145. (see FIG. 97).

After the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, when the balls are discharged (flow out) from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140, the sorting member C2170 is returned to the first position by the action of its own weight (eccentricity from the axis C2174 of the center of gravity).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C2170 to the first position is performed by the own weight (weight) of the distribution member C2170. The structure can be simplified compared to the case where member C2170 is urged toward the first position.

In addition, compared to when a biasing spring is used, the displacement (returning operation) of the sorting member C2170 to the first position can be slowed down, making it easier for the trailing ball CB2 to reach the rolling part C2173. In other words, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for the sorting member C2170 to be displaced (rotated) to a position where the trailing ball CB2 cannot flow onto the rolling part C2173 after it starts to displace (rotate) from the second position toward the first position. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility for a third ball, which is further behind the trailing ball CB2, to reach the rolling part C2173 (see Figures 100 to 102).

The receiving part C2172 includes an opposing part C2172a formed at a position facing the second passage CRt2002 at the first position, and a part that supports the received ball at the first position and rolls the ball toward the passage part C2144 at the second position. and a bottom surface portion C2172b forming a rolling surface for movement.

When the sorting member C2170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the facing portion C2172a is approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, and the bottom surface portion C2172b is inclined upward from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 96).

When the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, if the opposing portion C2172a is inclined in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the rolling portion C2173 side of the opposing portion C2172a is inclined in a direction away from the second passage CRt2002 more than the bottom surface portion C2172b side), there is a risk that a ball that collides with the opposing portion C2172a will be bounced upward and flow back into the second passage CRt2002.

In contrast, when the distribution member C2170 is positioned in the first position, the opposing portion C2172a is oriented approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, so that the balls received from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 are received by the opposing portion C2172a, preventing them from flowing back into the third passage CRt2003.

In addition, when the sorting member C2170 is positioned at the first position, if the bottom surface C2172b is formed to slope downward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface C2142 (passage portion C2144) of the first intermediate member C2140, the balls received in the receiving portion C2172 will flow out into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 prematurely, and the weight of the balls will not be utilized, which may prevent the sorting member C2170 from reaching the second position.

In contrast, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed so as to incline upward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 when the sorting member C2170 is disposed in the first position, so that the balls can be held on the bottom surface portion C2172b at least until the sorting member C2170 rotates a predetermined amount from the first position. This makes it possible to delay the time until the balls received in the receiving portion C2172 flow out into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140. As a result, the weight of the balls can be effectively utilized to ensure that the sorting member C2170 reaches the second position.

In this case, in this embodiment, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position, the angle of the upward inclination of the bottom surface portion C2172b in the region of the base end side (right side in FIG. 96, arrow R direction side) connected to the opposing portion C2172a is set to an angle greater than the angle of the upward inclination of the tip side (left side in FIG. 96, arrow L direction side) opposite the opposing portion C2172a. In other words, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the first position, the angle of the downward inclination of the bottom surface portion C2172b in the region of the tip side (left side in FIG. 96) opposite the opposing portion C2172a is set to an angle greater than the angle of the downward inclination of the base end side (right side in FIG. 96) connected to the opposing portion C2172a.

Therefore, in the initial stage when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the receiving part C2172 is While ensuring that the ball is held in the (bottom part C2172b), in the latter stage, the downward slope in the area on the tip side (left side in FIG. 96) of the bottom part C2172b is used to move the ball to the passage part C2144 (third passage CRt2003). The ball can be released smoothly.

For the reasons mentioned above (preventing backflow into the second passage CRt2002), the opposing portion C2172a may be inclined in a direction such that the rolling portion C2173 side is closer to the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom surface portion C2172b side.

The receiving portion C2172 is formed such that when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position, the bottom surface portion C2172b slopes downward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 ( (See Figure 97). Thereby, the ball received in the receiving part C2172 can be reliably flowed out to the passage part C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140.

In addition, while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the weight of the ball acts on the distribution member C2170, making it easier to maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position (i.e., a state in which the trailing ball can be guided to the rolling portion C2173 (fourth passage CRt4)).

The rolling portion C2173 is formed in an area on the opposite side of the receiving portion C2172 (bottom surface portion 2172b) across the axis C2174. That is, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position due to the weight of the balls received by the receiving portion C2172, the rolling portion C2173 is formed in an area that includes at least an area that is raised upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with the rotation. That is, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the downstream side of the rolling portion C2173 is lifted upward, and the distance between the rolling portion C2173 and the magnetic portion C2400 is shortened. This makes it easier for the balls rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to jump (be attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, if the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position and the rolling portion C2173 is formed only on the opposite side of the axis C2174 in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction), when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the weight of the ball and the force of the fall may cause the sorting member C2170 to rotate towards the first position. Therefore, the height position (vertical position) of the rolling portion C2173 is lowered and the distance between the rolling portion C2173 and the magnetic portion C2400 is increased, which may cause the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to not jump to (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400.

On the other hand, the rolling portion C2173 is formed over a range (area) that overlaps the axis C2174 in the vertical direction when the distribution member C2170 is placed at the second position (see FIG. 97). That is, the region on the upstream side (second passage CRt2002 side) of the rolling portion C2173 is located on one side in the horizontal direction (on the arrow L direction side) with respect to the axis C2174, and the weight of the ball rolling on the upstream side is It can act as a force to maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position.

Therefore, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the weight of the ball and the momentum of the fall are used to apply an inertial force to the sorting member C2170 in a direction to maintain the state in the second position, and while the sorting member C2170 is attempting to displace (rotate) in a direction to maintain the state in the second position due to the action of that inertial force, the ball can be made to roll to the area downstream of the rolling portion C2173. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to jump (be attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

The extended length of the bottom portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 (the length in the direction in which the ball is guided) is set to be larger than the extended length of the rolling portion C2173. Therefore, while a ball is rolling on the rolling portion C2173, it is possible to easily create a state in which another ball is simultaneously rolling on the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172. That is, while the ball is rolling on the rolling portion C2173, the weight of another ball can be applied to the distribution member C2170 on the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172.

This makes it possible to prevent the weight of the ball from displacing the sorting member C2170 from the second position toward the first position (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 being displaced downward) when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173. As a result, it becomes easier for the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to jump (be attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In particular, since the bottom part C2172b of the receiving part C2172 extends in a direction away from the axis C2174 (direction perpendicular to the axis C2174), as the ball rolls on the bottom part C2172b, the point of force application (the ball's The distance between the weight acting position) and the fulcrum (rotation center) can be increased. That is, as the ball rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b, it is possible to easily maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position (even though the distribution member C2170 placed in the second position is displaced (rotated) to the first position). (can increase the required force).

As a result, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). ) can be suppressed. As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily transferred (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

Here, the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the direction in which the ball rolls from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) toward the receiving part C2172 (the direction in which the receiving part C2172 receives the ball, the direction of arrow R), and The direction in which the ball rolls (the direction in which the received ball is rolled, the direction of arrow L) is the opposite direction. That is, in the receiving portion C2172, the downward direction (rolling) direction of the ball is reversed (changed in direction).

As a result, compared to the case where the direction in which the receiving part C2172 receives the ball and the direction in which the ball rolls in the receiving part C2172 are the same, the ball is transferred to the distributing member C2170 (the receiving part C2170) by the time required for reversal. The time for the ball to stay in the receiving part C2172) can be secured, and the weight of the ball retained in the receiving part C2172 can be used to easily maintain the distribution member C2170 in the second position. As a result, the ball can be stably rolled in the rolling portion C2173.

The rolling part C2173 is a part for guiding (distributing) the balls rolling on the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004), and In the state where the partial member C2170 is placed in the second position, there is a gap between the downstream end of the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004). It is located (erected).

As described above, the rolling part C2173 has its upper surface (rolling surface) displaced (raised and lowered) in the vertical direction (arrows U-D) by displacing (rotating) the sorting member C2170 between the first position and the second position. This allows the rolling part C2173 to be positioned below the magnetic part C2400.

As a result, by arranging the distribution member C2170 in the second position and displacing (raising) the rolling part C2173 upward, it is brought closer to the magnetic part C2400 and attracts the ball against the action of gravity. On the other hand, by arranging the distribution member C2170 in the first position and displacing (raising) the rolling part C2173 downward, it is separated from the magnetic part C2400 and the ball can be moved by using the action of gravity. It is possible to reliably form a mode in which no adsorption occurs.

The connecting portion between the upstream end (the end on the side of the arrow L) of the rolling portion C2173 and the opposing portion C2172a of the receiving portion C2172 is formed in an acute protrusion shape that protrudes toward the upstream side (the first intermediate member C2140 (second passage CRt2002) side, in the direction of the arrow L). By inserting this protrusion-shaped portion between ball CB1 and ball CB2, the two balls (balls CB1, CB2) can be separated.

In a state where the distribution member C2170 is placed at the second position, the rolling motion is The height position at the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of portion C2173 (rolling surface) is located vertically downward (in the arrow D direction). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173, and the distribution member C170 disposed at the second position is moved toward the first position by a predetermined amount (a predetermined rotation angle). ), the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 are arranged at the same height position.

Here, when the ball rolling on the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 flows into the receiving part C2172, the distribution member C2170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the ball. (rotation), and the lower surface of the distribution member C2170 comes into contact with the lower stopper portion C2145, so that the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position.

In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C2170 will be flipped upward (in the direction of arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C2145. The height position at the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 (rolling surface) is located vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom part C2142 (rolling surface) of C2140. Then, there is a possibility that the ball may not be able to flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173.

In particular, when a ball collides with the distributing member C2170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173) that has been flipped upward, and the impact of the ball collision causes the distributing member C2170 to be further flipped upward (the ball When the distributing member C2170 is further pushed upward by the ball), the ball flows into the receiving part C2172 even though it should have originally flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C2173 ( There is a risk that it will be accepted.

On the other hand, when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) are Since a step is formed between them, even if the distribution member C2170 is thrown upward by an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 will be lower than the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 due to the step between the two. It can be suppressed from being located vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). That is, it is possible to allow the distribution member C2170 to be flipped upward by the difference in level between the two. Therefore, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C2173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002). It is possible to easily flow (roll) from the to the rolling portion C2173.

As in the second embodiment, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C2140, the face in the direction of the arrow L) may be inclined downward from the rolling portion C2173 toward the first intermediate member C2140 (bottom surface portion C2142). In other words, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173 may have a cross-sectional shape in which the edge portion on the receiving portion C2172 (opposing portion C2172a) side is closer to the first intermediate member C2140 than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C2173.

As a result, when a ball collides with the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173) that has been bounced upward, the direction of the force acting from the ball on the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173) can be set to a force in the direction of pushing the sorting member C2170 downward. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C2173 (a trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the preceding ball CB1 is less than a predetermined amount) to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) into the rolling portion C2173.

The magnetic part C2400 is a long plate-shaped body made of metal, and is capable of attracting a ball by using the magnetic force acting from the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130. Note that a plurality of magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C2400.

With the distribution member C2170 disposed at the second position, when the ball flows down from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173, the upper surface of the rolling portion C2173 ( The ball that has rolled on the rolling surface (rolling surface) jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400. That is, it is attracted to the lower edge (the ridgeline formed by the intersection of the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) and the lower surface (the surface in the direction of arrow D)) of the magnetic portion C2400 (see FIG. 103). The ball attracted to the magnetic part C2400 is moved along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic part C2400 due to the momentum of the ball due to jumping (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward slope of the magnetic part C2400.

In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the speed of the ball when it jumps from the rolling part C2173 of the distribution member C2170 to the magnetic part C2400, the position of the ball, the rotational state of the ball, etc.), the lower edge of the magnetic part C2400 An unstable state can be created in which the ball may fall (the ball may not reach the end). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In particular, the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004) forms a passage between the distribution member C2170 and the fifth passage CRt2005, which can increase the interest of the game. In other words, the balls distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170 are only balls (trailing ball CB2) that flow (roll) down the second passage CRt2002 when the distance between them and the preceding ball CB1 is less than a predetermined amount (i.e., when connected to the preceding ball CB1), and the possibility of such a trailing ball B2 occurring is relatively low. By displacing the ball (trailing ball B2) that reaches the distribution member C2170 through such a low possibility in an unstable state where there is a possibility of it falling (possibility of it not reaching the fifth passage CRt2005), the player is made to expect that it will pass through safely, which can increase the interest of the game.

The thickness dimension of the magnetic part C2400 is set to a value smaller than the diameter of the sphere (in this embodiment, 6% of the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, in the ball whose outer surface point CP1 is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400, the outer surface point CP2 at a position lower than the position CP1 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion C2131. In this case, the center of gravity of the sphere is located farther from the front of the main body C2131 than the outer surface point CP2, so the weight of the ball (gravity acting on the center of gravity) moves the outer surface point CP2 to the main body with the outer surface point CP1 as the fulcrum. 2131 (see FIG. 103).

As a result, when a ball is attracted to the magnetic part C2400, the ball can be supported at two points, outer surface point CP1 and outer surface point CP2, and as a result, the movement of the ball along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic part C2400 can be stabilized. In addition, the frictional resistance between the outer surface point CP2 and the front surface of the main body part 2131 can be used to slow down the movement of the ball. This also stabilizes the movement of the ball, and increases the time it takes to pass through the fourth passage CRt2004, increasing the interest of the player who hopes that the ball will reach the fifth passage CRt2005 without falling.

In this way, the magnet C2300 and the magnetic part C2400 are arranged on either side of the main body part c2131 of the back member C2130, and the ball is moved (slid) along the magnetic part C2400, making it easy to adjust the attraction force and optimize the frictional force, while forming a path for the ball with a simple structure.

The second intervening member C2180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage CRt2006, and is interposed between the facing member C2110, the first intermediate member C2140, and the first intervening member C2160. . That is, the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed by the space partitioned by the front member C2110, the first intermediate member C2140, the first interposed member C2160, and the second interposed member C2180.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180 is provided with the front side (arrow A concave surface (a central outflow surface C181 and a side outflow surface C182) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the F direction. Further, an undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt2006, and a side outflow surface C182 is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while a central outflow surface C181 is arranged at the top of the undulation.

The upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front portion C111 of the front member C2110 protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180, except for the areas where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. In other words, a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180 flows out (flows down) into the play area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is formed in the bottom of the second intervening member C2180, and as described above, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom C112 of the front member C2110. .

The detour member C2200 includes a plate-shaped main body C2201, a wall C2202 that stands up from the front of the main body C2201 (the surface in the direction of arrow F), and a part of the wall C2202 that further extends toward the front. It is provided with a gutter part C2203 that is formed as a groove, and is disposed on the back side of the back member C2130 at a position facing the opening C2131a.

In a state where the detour member C2200 is disposed on the back member C2130, the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the wall portion C2202 is in contact with the back surface of the back member C2130 (main body portion C2131), and the gutter portion C2203 is The erected tip (the side in the direction of arrow F) is brought into contact with the back surface of the second intervening member C2180, and the edge of the gutter portion C2203 is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the first intervening member C2160.

As a result, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed by the space partitioned between the rear member C2130 (main body portion C2131) and the detour member C2200 (main body portion C2201 and wall portion C2202), and the space partitioned between the first intervening member C2160 and the detour member C2200 (gutter portion C2203) (see Figures 98 and 99).

The gutter portion C2203 is inclined downward from the rear member C2130 side toward the second intermediate member C2180 side. Therefore, the ball that flows into the detour member C2200 from the opening C2131a of the rear member C2130 can be made to roll on the gutter portion C2203 and flow into the fifth passage CRt2005 formed between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110 and the second intermediate member C2180 (recess C183).

Next, the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170 will be described. Figures 100 to 102 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, and correspond to the cross section at line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. Figure 1036 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b at line CIII-CIII in Figure 102(b).

Note that Figs. 100(a) and 100(b) show the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, and correspond to Fig. 96. Figs. 102(a) and 102(b) show the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the second position, and correspond to Fig. 97.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), when the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the receiving portion C2172 can receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (ball CB1 can flow in).

That is, in the receiving part C2172, the opposing part C2172a is arranged at a position that intersects the extension line of the bottom part C2142 (rolling surface), and is located vertically lower than the extension line of the bottom part C2142 (rolling surface). The bottom portion C2172b is arranged at a position (in the direction of arrow D).

When the distribution member C2170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L, the connection portion between the rolling portion C2173 and the opposing portion C2172a) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass).

On the other hand, when the sorting member C2170 is positioned in the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is positioned in a position that cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in).

That is, the bottom surface portion C2172b of the rolling portion C2173 is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the extension line of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) (one step higher). The vertical distance (height of the step) between the rolling portion C2173 and the extension line of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C2172b of the sorting member C2170 in the first position.

Note that when the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the top surface portion C2143 of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the arrow L (the end on the direction side) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension that allows the sphere to pass through). This allows the ball to overcome the step and flow into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 in the first position.

In this case, when the distribution member C2170 is in the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is located on the opposite side of the axis C2174 from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction), and is tilted downward in the direction away from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) (arrow R direction).

Therefore, even if the ball climbs over the step and flows into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 in the first position, the distribution member C2170 is rotated toward the second position by the ball (i.e., The rolling part C2173 can be prevented from being lifted upward, and the ball can be caused to fall toward the second intermediate member 2150 (sixth passage CRt2006) along the downward slope of the rolling part C2173. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball that has climbed over the step from jumping onto (being attracted to) the magnetic part C2400 and flowing down the fourth passage CRt2004 (reaching the fifth passage CRt2005).

However, the magnetic portion C2400 may be disposed in a position where a ball that has overcome the step can jump onto (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400. In other words, when the gap between balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small and ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1 and overcomes ball CB1, the magnetic portion C2400 may be disposed in a position where ball CB2 can jump onto (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400. Since ball CB2 is a ball that should normally be sorted into the fourth passage CRt2004, it is possible to prevent such a ball from falling toward the second intermediate member 2150 (sixth passage CRt2006) and thereby prevent it from being disadvantageous to the player.

When the ball CB1 (the leading ball) and the ball CB2 (the trailing ball with a predetermined interval between them) roll on the bottom surface C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, FIG. ), the ball CB1 flows into (receives) the receiving part C2172 of the distribution member C2170, the ball CB1 contacts (receives) the opposing part C2172a, and is held in the receiving part C2172.

Further, when the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 comes into contact with the ball CB1. Thereby, the ball CB2 can be made to stand by behind (on the upstream side) of the ball CB1.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), when ball CB1 is received by receiving portion C2172, the weight of ball CB1 displaces (rotates) sorting member C2170 from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 101(a). Also, when ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1, the weight of ball CB2 is also applied to sorting member C2170.

Here, the receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the area of the opposing portion C2172a that is connected to the bottom portion C2172b and the area of the bottom portion C2172b that is connected to the opposing portion C2172a, i.e., the connecting portion between the opposing portion C2172a and the bottom portion C2172b, are curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C2174 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion is capable of holding the sphere.

In addition, the gap between the sorting member C2170 (the area on the upstream side (arrow R direction) of the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end on the downstream side (arrow R direction) of the bottom surface portion C2142) is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass) when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the first position, and is gradually enlarged as the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position toward the second position.

That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (a position between FIG. 101(a) and FIG. 101(b)), the above-mentioned Between the distribution member C2170 (the region on the upstream side (in the direction of arrow R) of the rolling surface of the bottom part C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end part on the downstream side (in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom part C2142) When the interval is expanded to a dimension that is approximately the same as the diameter of the ball (dimension that allows the ball to pass through), and the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position to the second position, the above-mentioned interval is further enlarged to form a maximum spacing at the second position.

Therefore, while the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C2172 is maintained. That is, the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) while receiving the ball CB1 in the receiving portion C2172 from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position. Thereby, the state in which the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1 can be maintained, and the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 can be maintained.

In this case, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side, the connecting portion with the opposing portion C2172a) of the rolling portion C2173. The distance between the balls is gradually reduced by displacing (rotating) the distributing member C2170 from the first position to the second position, and before the distributing member C2170 reaches the predetermined intermediate position, It is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter (a dimension that the ball cannot pass through). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C2172.

In addition, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side, connecting part with the opposing part C2172a) of the rolling part C2173 is configured to pass closer to the axis C2174 than the outer edge (outer edge opposite the axis C2174) of the trajectory of the ball CB1 held in the receiving part C2172 (connecting part between the opposing part C2172a and the bottom part C2172b).

Therefore, the ball CB2 can be maintained in contact with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 can be maintained at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142, while the ball CB2 can be pushed back by the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end on the direction of the arrow L, the connecting portion with the opposing portion C2172a). In other words, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 can be inserted between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 to separate the two balls. This makes it possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C2172. In addition, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled into the rolling portion C2173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

When the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) toward the second position from the state shown in FIG. 101(a), the ball CB1 moves toward the passage portion C2144 at the bottom surface as shown in FIG. 101(b). While being rolled on C2172b, the ball CB2 is flown down to the rolling part C2173 (accepted in the rolling part C2173).

As shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 102(b), when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position, the balls CB1 flow from the receiving portion C2172 to the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003). At the same time, the ball CB2 that has rolled on the rolling portion C2173 jumps (is attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004.

After the balls CB1 and CB2 have flowed into the third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004, the distribution member C2170 is returned (displaced) from the second position to the first position by its own weight.

When the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, or even after the sorting member C2170 starts to move (rotate) from the second position to the first position, if the third ball reaches the rolling portion C2173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C2173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173. In this case, depending on whether the ball CB1 is on the receiving portion C2172 (bottom surface portion C2172b) or the rolling speed (momentum) of the third ball, it is determined whether the ball CB1 falls to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) or jumps (is attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004. In other words, two states can be formed.

Note that the distribution member C2170 is configured to be able to be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position with only the weight of one ball. Therefore, when the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is larger than a predetermined amount, both the balls CB1 and CB2 are received in the receiving part C2172 in order, and after passing through the above-mentioned sorting operation, they are transferred to the third passage CRt2003. be distributed to.

As described above, according to the lower frame C2086b in the third embodiment, when the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are connected to each other with an interval equal to or less than the predetermined distance, the ball CB1 is distributed (guided) to the third path CRt2003. ), and the distribution member C2170, which is displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1, can lift the ball CB2 upward and distribute (guide) it to the fourth passage CRt2004, while the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are When the balls are connected with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the third path CRt2003. In this way, the guided path can be changed depending on the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving interest. be able to.

Next, the center frame C3086 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 104 to 107.

In the second embodiment, the distribution member C170 is rotated, but in the third embodiment, the distribution member C3170 is slid. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figures 104 and 106 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment, and Figures 105 and 107 are rear views of the lower frame C3086b. Note that Figures 104 and 105 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is arranged in a first position, and Figures 106 and 107 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is arranged in a second position. Also, Figures 104 and 106 correspond to a cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77.

Here, the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment is different from the lower frame C86b in the second embodiment in the structure for displacing the distribution member C3170 and the structure for interlocking the decoration member C3190 with the distribution member C3170. Except for this point, the other configurations are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, in the main body C131 of the back member C3130, two linear guide grooves C3131c are provided extending vertically in parallel to each other. These two guide grooves C3131c are arranged in such a manner that they are inclined in a direction closer to the first intermediate member C140 as they move downward (in the direction of arrow D).

That is, the horizontal position (arrow LR direction) of the distribution member C3170 in the second position is closer to the intermediate member C140 (arrow L side) than the horizontal position of the distribution member C3170 in the first position. be located.

The distribution member C3170 has a total of four shafts C3171a, each consisting of a pair of upper and lower shafts, protruding from the back surface of the main body C3171. The shaft C3171a is a guided portion that is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3131c, and by sliding the shaft C3171a along the guide groove C3131c, the distribution member C3170 is moved to the first position and the second position. It is slid (directly moved) between.

A pair of shafts C3171a are disposed in each of the left and right guide grooves C3131c. Therefore, the distribution member C3170 can slide between the first position and the second position without causing a change in posture due to rotation (i.e., while maintaining a constant inclination angle of the bottom surface portion C172b and the rolling portion C173).

A collar CW having a diameter larger than the width of the guide groove C3131c is provided at the tip of the shaft C3171a inserted into the guide groove C3131c, and this collar CW acts as a stopper to prevent the shaft C3171a from slipping out of the guide groove C3131c.

The distribution member C3170 is defined (arranged) at the first position by the shaft c3171a coming into contact with the upper end (end in the direction of arrow U) of the guide groove C3131c and upward displacement being restricted (Fig. 104 and FIG. 105), the lower stopper portion C132 comes into contact with the lower surface of the distributing member C3170 to restrict downward displacement, thereby defining (arranging) the distributing member C3170 in the second position (see FIGS. 106 and 107). ).

The decorative member C3190 is formed integrally with the main body C191 and has an arm C3193 that extends radially outward around the axis C192. A linear guide groove C3193a extends radially around the axis C192 on the arm C3193. The axis C3171a is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3193a.

The decorative member C3190 has its center of gravity eccentric to one side (the side opposite the distribution member C3170 across the axis C192, the left side of FIG. 105) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the decorative member C3190 is in a position in which the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward (rotating counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view, see FIG. 105), and the distribution member C3170 is in a state in which it is disposed in the first position by the axis C3171a being pushed upward by the arm portion C3193 (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

On the other hand, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the sorting member C3170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the sorting member C3170 and the decorative member C3190 as a whole to be offset to the other side (the side where the sorting member C3170 is arranged with respect to the axis C192, the right side in Figure 107) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). In other words, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball causes the sorting member C3170 to descend along the guide groove C3131c and to be positioned in the second position. Also, the decorative member C3190 has its arm portion C3193 pushed downward by the axis C3171a, and is rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in rear view (see Figure 107).

When a ball is bowled from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 in the second position, the decorative member C3190 is rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view, taking advantage of the eccentricity of its center of gravity, and the arm portion C3193 is raised upward. As a result, the axis C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, and the distribution member C3170 is positioned (returned) to the first position (see Figures 104 and 105).

The operation of distributing the balls CB1 and CB2 by sliding the distributing member C3170 between the first position and the second position is the same as that of the second embodiment described above, so the explanation thereof will be as follows. Omitted.

As described above, according to the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance of less than a predetermined amount (including the case where the distance between the two balls is 0), ball CB1 is sorted (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4, and ball CB2 is sorted (guided) to the fifth passage CRt5 by the sorting member C170 displaced to the second position by the weight of ball CB1. On the other hand, when ball CB1 and ball CB2 are adjacent to each other with a distance exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be sorted (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. In this way, the guided passage can be changed depending on the state of the line of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), which can improve the interest.

Here, in a structure in which the sorting member C170 rotates around the axis C192, as in the second embodiment, in order to ensure the amount of displacement of the receiving portion C172 (allowing it to displace between the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the position facing the fourth passage CRt4), it is necessary to increase the length (distance) between the axis C192 and the receiving portion C172, which results in an increase in the size of the sorting member C170 in the width direction (the direction connecting the axis C192 and the receiving portion C172).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the distribution member C3170 is slid in the vertical direction, the amount of displacement of the receiving part C172 is ensured (i.e., the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the position facing the fourth passage CRt4). Since there is no need to provide a portion connecting the rotation center (axis C192) and the receiving portion C172, the distribution member C3170 can be made smaller in the width direction. That is, the dimension in the width direction of the distribution member C3170 can be set to the length dimension (dimension in the arrow LR direction) of the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a dish member C4120 in the fifth embodiment will be described. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

108(a) is a top view of the dish member C4120 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 108(b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along the line CVIIIb-CVIIIb in FIG. 108(a). 108(c) is a sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along the line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in FIG. 108(a).

The dish member C4120 includes an upper bottom part C4121 and a lower bottom part C4122 that form the bottom of the passage, and an upper side wall part C4123 and a lower side wall part C4124 that form the side walls of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C4121 extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a substantially straight passage (first passage CRt4001) when viewed from above, and is formed with a downward incline in the direction approaching the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (arrow R direction).

The upper side wall portion C4123 defines the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can be guided only in series. However, the passage width may be a dimension that allows multiple balls to be guided in parallel (a dimension larger than twice the diameter of the ball).

A notch C4123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C4123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001), and the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) through this notch C4123a.

The lower bottom surface portion C4122 includes a linear portion C4122a extending along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) and having a substantially linear shape at one end and the other end in the extending direction when viewed from above; Between the pair of straight portions C4122a, an arcuate portion C4122b is formed, which is curved in an arc shape with the outflow surface C122a side being concave when viewed from above. The arc portion C4122b has a shape that projects most upstream (in the direction of the arrow L) in the extending direction (the direction of the arrow LR) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 at approximately the center in the front-rear direction.

The cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed as a plane that slopes downward vertically (arrow D direction) toward the arc portion C4122b in the pair of straight line portions C4122a, and is formed approximately horizontally in the arc portion C4122b. In other words, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction.

The lower side wall portion C4124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

The straight portion C4122a of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is disposed approximately perpendicular to the upper bottom surface portion C4121 when viewed from above, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (the end on the arrow R direction side) is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the end on the arrow B direction side, the upward sloping side of the straight portion C4122a).

At the position corresponding to the cutout portion C4123a in the upper side wall portion C4123, the lower side wall portion C4124 is not formed, and as described above, the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) via the cutout portion C4123a.

A notch C124a is formed in the lower side wall C4124 on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the side toward the center of the arc in a top view, the side in the direction of arrow R) at approximately the center in the front-to-rear direction of the arc portion C4122b (the position where the curved shape protrudes most in the direction of arrow L), and balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see Figure 81) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom part C4122 is formed from a pair of straight parts C4122a and a circular arc part C4122b, and the upper bottom part C4121 is formed on the upward slope side of the straight part C4122a (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom part C4122). Since the ball is flown down from the (first passage CRt4001), the flown down ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). At the top, the ball can flow down from the notch C124a to the bottom C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 81).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom part C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom part C4122 (second passage CRt4002) with a predetermined interval apart, the lower bottom part C4122 ( By using the reciprocating motion in the second path CRt4002), it is possible to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball and reduce the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (making the balls connect). .

The arcuate portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 has a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (that is, approximately the center of the arcuate portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B) (the most protruding portion in the direction of arrow L of the curved shape). An outflow surface C122a is recessed in the position).The outflow surface C122a is a part for causing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second path CRt4002) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third path CRt3). It is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see FIG. 81).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), balls with a reduced gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining that connected state (see FIG. 81).

Note that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (dimension along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C4122, dimension in the direction of arrow FB) is equal to the width of the notch C124a. The closer the side is, the larger the shape is.

In addition, when the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side, arrow L direction side) of the cutout portion C124a in top view, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) rolls at the position furthest from the cutout portion C124a (the position where the lateral apex of the ball abuts on the lower side wall portion C4124), the outflow surface C122a is formed up to the range overlapping with the center of the ball in top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C4112, crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom surface C4122, the ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002) may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) without ever reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002) or before it has reciprocated a sufficient number of times due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. In other words, there is a risk that the leading ball and the trailing ball will not decrease the distance between them and the two balls will flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) while still spaced apart.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is curved in an arc shape, and a notch portion C124a is formed on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the center side of the arc when viewed from above, the direction of arrow R). Therefore, a centrifugal force is applied to the ball rolling on the arc portion C4122b toward the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a, and the ball can be rolled (reciprocated) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) while being pressed against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a.

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 81) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow. In other words, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow, it is possible to make the ball easily overcome (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and to make the ball easily move back and forth sufficiently along the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are linked together).

Next, the lower frame C5086b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109(a). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 109(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C5086b in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-section taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. 94. In addition, in FIG. 109(a), only the cross section of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300, and the magnetic part C5400 of the lower frame C5086b is illustrated.

The magnetic part C5400 is a long metal body, and a protrusion is provided on the end opposite the back member C2130 (the side in the direction of arrow F) that protrudes vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). Therefore, the cross section of the magnetic part C5400 is formed into a substantially L-shape. The protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 is disposed such that the end on the back member C2130 side is located at a distance greater than the radius of a sphere from the front of the back member C2130, and the cross section of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 is formed into a straight line in the width direction (the direction of arrows F-B).

The magnetic part C5400 is capable of attracting the ball by utilizing the magnetic force exerted by the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. Note that multiple magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C5400.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, a ball flows down from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173. The ball that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 (see FIG. 102). That is, the ball is attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C5400. The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C5400 is moved to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400 by the momentum of the ball due to the jump (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C5400. This allows the ball that flows down along the magnetic portion C5400 to be guided to the fifth passage CRt2005 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 is disposed at a position where the end on the back member C2130 side is located at a distance from the front of the back member C2130 that is greater than the radius of the ball, so that the ball flowing down along the magnetic part C5400 is prevented from coming into contact with the back member C2130. This prevents frictional forces from acting on the ball, and increases the speed at which the ball flows down. In addition, because the ball is not supported on the front of the back member C2130, it is possible to form a state in which the ball wobbles as it flows down, and to increase the possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005). As a result, the player is drawn to the behavior of the ball, and the interest of the game is increased.

Next, the lower frame C6086b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109(b). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 109(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C6086b in the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line XCIX-XCIX in Figure 94. Note that Figure 109(b) only shows cross sections of the back member C2130, magnet C2300, and magnetic part C6400 of the lower frame C6086b.

The magnetic part C6400 in the seventh embodiment is different from the magnetic part C5400 in the sixth embodiment in that the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (that is, closer to the back member C2130 as it is upward in the vertical direction). The other configurations are the same as those of the magnetic part C5400 in the sixth embodiment, except that the magnetic part C5400 is formed as a magnetic part C5400 in the sixth embodiment.

The ball attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic section C6400 comes into contact with the back member C2130 due to the inclination of the bottom surface and the effect of the magnetic force directly applied by the magnet section C2300. This allows a frictional force to act on the ball, slowing down the speed at which the ball flows down along the magnetic section C6400. This allows the travel time of the ball to be extended, increasing the interest of the game.

Further, the ball can be sandwiched between the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130, and the ball can be prevented from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C6400.

Next, the center frame D86 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 122.

In the first embodiment, the center frame 86 is constructed from one part, but in the eighth embodiment, the center frame D86 is constructed from two members, an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Figure 110 is a front view of the game board D13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in Figure 110, the center frame D86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 7) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b.

The upper frame D86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 110) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 110) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame D86b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 110) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame D86a and the lower frame D86b.

Note that the upper frame D86a is a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (a part disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 110) of the window 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 7). That is, the portion where the lower frame D86b is disposed) is omitted, and the other portions except for the omitted portion have the same structure as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

Next, the lower frame D86b will be described. FIG. 111 is a front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 112 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. Note that in FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame D86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the lower frame D86b includes a receiving port DOPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage DRt1 communicating with the receiving port DOPin, and a first passage. A second path DRt2 through which the ball guided through DRt1 flows down, and a ball guided through the second path DRt2 (a ball that reciprocated in the second path DRt2 along its longitudinal direction (arrow FB direction)) The ball guided through the third passage DRt3 (the ball that reciprocated along the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the third passage DRt3) flows down the third passage DRt3. A fourth passage DRt4, a fifth passage DRt5, and a sixth passage DRt6, which are sorted according to the position where they are flowed down, and a seventh passage DRt7, through which the balls guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 are flowed down. An eighth passage DRt8 through which the balls guided through the sixth passage DRt6 flow down, and an outflow port DOPout formed as an opening through which the balls guided through the eighth passage DRt8 flow out to the game area are formed ( (See FIGS. 119 to 121).

The sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 are connected to each other by the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8, forming a single passage. That is, the upstream part (first half) of the passage is formed by the sixth passage DRt6, and the downstream part (second half) of the passage is formed by the eighth passage DRt8.

Further, an upper frame passage DRt0 (see FIG. 110) is formed in the upper frame D86a. The upper frame passage DRt0 guides balls that enter (enter) from the left side (left side in FIG. 110) of the game area when viewed from the front (the area between the center frame D86 (upper frame D86a) and the rail 61). The downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 communicates with the receiving port DOPin of the lower frame D86b.

That is, the ball that has flown (entered) from the gaming area into the upper frame passage DRt0 flows (entered) from the upper frame passage DRt0 into the first passage DRt1 of the lower frame D86b via the receiving port DOPin.

The passage width of the third passage DRt3 is divided by side walls (the side wall part D142 of the intermediate member D140 and the side wall part D132 of the back member D130) that face each other at a predetermined interval, and one of the side walls that divide the passage width. (The side wall portion D132 of the back surface member D130) is partially divided (the side wall is not formed), and a flow port DOPfl through which a ball can flow is opened at a position adjacent to the divided region in a top view. Ru.

The ball that has been guided through the third passage DRt3 (the ball that has reciprocated in the third passage DRt3 along its longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction)) is transferred to the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage through the outlet DOPfl. The ball can flow down (enter the ball) into either DRt5 or the sixth passage DRt6.

The flow-down opening DOPfl is formed as a generally rectangular space (opening) when viewed from above, which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 (the direction of arrow B) and extends along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. The flow-down opening DOPfl is defined by the main body portion D131 and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130.

In the downflow port DOPfl, the upstream ends (upstream openings) of the fourth passage DRt4, the sixth passage DRt6, and the fifth passage DRt5 are arranged in sequence along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. That is, the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 is located in the longitudinal center of the downflow port DOPfl, and the upstream ends (upstream openings) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 are located on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) and the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the downflow port DOPfl, respectively, with the upstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 in between.

Therefore, a ball that reciprocates along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 and flows down to an area including the center of the flow outlet DOPfl in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) flows (enters the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6. Balls that flow down to a region including one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) or the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the outflow port DOPfl flow (enter the ball) into the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5. Ru. That is, which of the fourth passage DRt4 to the sixth passage DRt6 the ball guided through the third passage DRt3 is distributed to is determined depending on the position (area) of the ball flowing down from the third passage DRt3.

Here, the ball guided through the sixth passage DRt6 flows down (flows into) the eighth passage DRt8, and the outlet DOPout, which is the exit of the eighth passage DRt8 (an opening that allows the ball to flow out to the gaming area), is It is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110). Therefore, the balls distributed to the sixth path DRt6 are likely to win the first prize opening 64 (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 is high).

On the other hand, when the ball is guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5, it flows down (flows into) the seventh passage DRt7. In the seventh passage DRt7, a central outflow surface D151 is formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side) to allow the ball guided through the seventh passage DRt7 to flow out into the play area. In addition, side outflow surfaces D152 are formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 110) from vertically above the first winning opening 64. In addition, undulations are formed on the seventh passage DRt7, with side outflow surfaces D152 formed at the bottom of the undulations and a central outflow surface D151 formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, the probability that the balls distributed to the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 will flow out to the gaming area from the side outflow surface D162 in the seventh path DRt7 is higher than the probability that the balls will flow out from the central outflow surface D161 to the gaming area. is high, and as a result, it is difficult to win into the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning into the first winning hole 64 is lower than the ball distributed to the above-mentioned sixth passage DRt6).

In this way, the lower frame D86b in the present embodiment makes it easier for the balls reciprocating in the third path DRt3 along the longitudinal direction to win in the first prize opening 64 by distributing them to the sixth path DRt6. (In this embodiment, it is possible to almost certainly make the ball win in the first prize opening 64). Therefore, when the ball reciprocates along the longitudinal direction of the third path DRt3, it is distributed to the sixth path DRt6 in order to increase the probability that the ball will win in the first prize opening 64 (to ensure winning). It is possible to make the player expect that the game will be played, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the lower frame D86b in this embodiment, a pair of displacement members D180 are disposed at the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 so as to be openable and closable (displaceable between a closed position and an open position). The pair of displacement members D180 are disposed such that the base ends are rotatably supported and the tip ends opposite the base ends are disposed on the upper side (the side indicated by the arrow U), and the tip ends are displaced (rotated) in a direction approaching or separating from each other around the base ends as a rotation axis, thereby displacing (rotating) between the closed position and the open position.

The pair of displacement members D180 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the outlet DOPfl, and the ball that has flown (entered) between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other is Balls that flow into (enter into) the passage DRt6 but do not flow into (enter into) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 flow into (enter into) the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

The distance between the tips of the pair of displacement members D180 is larger in the open position than in the closed position, and when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position, the area in which the ball can flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 is enlarged and the area in which the ball can flow (enter) the fourth and fifth passages DRt4, DRt5 is reduced compared to when the pair of displacement members D180 are in the closed position. In other words, the proportion of the distance between the tips of the pair of displacement members D180 to the distance (dimension) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl is larger in the open position than in the closed position. Therefore, when the pair of displacement members D180 are in the open position, it is easier for balls to flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 compared to when they are in the closed position.

In this case, as described below, when a ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position using the weight (mass) of the ball. Specifically, a rolling member D170 is disposed in the sixth passage DRt6, and while a ball is rolling on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 are disposed (displaced) in the open position, and while no ball is present on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 are disposed (displaced) in the closed position.

In this way, in the lower frame D86b of this embodiment, when a ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position (making it easier for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6), thereby making it easier for balls following the ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 (for example, a ball reciprocating in the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3, a subsequent ball) to enter the sixth passage DRt6.

Therefore, when the first ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position, creating a state in which the following second ball is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6. When the following second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the following third ball (the third ball following the second ball) is likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6 due to the entry of the following second ball into the sixth passage DRt6 (due to the displacement of the displacement members D180 to the open position using the weight of the second ball), and these modes can be repeated thereafter. Therefore, the entry of a ball into the sixth passage DRt6 makes the player look forward to the occurrence of a chain reaction of balls entering the sixth passage DRt6. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the closed position, the minimum value of the facing distance is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (for example, 1.3 of the diameter of the sphere). double) and is displaced (rotated) to the open position, the opposing interval on the tip side is set to approximately three times the diameter of the sphere.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame D86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 122 in addition to FIGS. 111 to 112.

Figure 113 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and Figure 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. Figure 115 is a top view of the lower frame D86b, Figure 116 is a front view of the lower frame D86b, and Figure 117 is a rear view of the lower frame D86b.

Figure 118(a) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXVIIIa in Figure 116, and Figure 118(b) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXVIIIb in Figure 116.

119(a), FIG. 120(a), and FIG. 121(a) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame D86b, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 115. 119(b), FIG. 120(b), and FIG. 121(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D86b.

Note that Figures 119(a) and 119(b) show a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, while Figures 121(a) and 121(b) show a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

Furthermore, Figures 120(a) and 120(b) show the state during the displacement when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)) and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position).

Further, in FIGS. 120(a) and 121(a), illustration of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 is omitted, and in FIGS. 119(b), 120(b), and 121(b), A state in which the detour member D200 is removed is illustrated.

122(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along the line CXXIIa-CXXIIa in FIG. 115, and FIG. 122(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along the line CXXIIb-CXXIIb in FIG. 115. 122(c) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along the line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119.

As shown in FIGS. 111 to 122, the lower frame D86b includes a front member D110, a plate member D120 disposed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member D110, and A back surface member D130 is disposed facing each other at a predetermined distance on the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B), and is interposed between the facing front member D110 and the back surface member D130, and is arranged between the back surface of the front surface member D110 and the front surface of the back surface member D130. (the surface on the arrow F direction side), the intermediate member D140 is arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, the first interposed member D150 is interposed between the facing member D110 and the intermediate member D140, and the intermediate member D140 and A second intervening member D160 interposed between the opposing back member D130, a rolling member D170 and a displacement member D180 arranged between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the back member D130, and the back side of the back member D130. A transmission member D190 and a detour member D200 are disposed on the back member D130, and a displaceable member D180 is fixed to one side (the side in the direction of arrow F), and the other A shaft support member D210 whose side (arrow B side) can come into contact with the transmission member D190 is provided.

The rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 are disposed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the back member D130 in a displaceable (rotatable) manner, and the transmission member D190 is disposed on the back side of the back member D130 in a displaceable (rotatable) manner.

The lower frame D86b is configured as a single unit by fastening each component to the other components with tapping screws, and the rolling component D170, the displacement component D180, and the transmission component D190 are each displaceably disposed (rotatably supported) on the back component D130 (see FIG. 111).

In addition, the lower frame D86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and the ball can be seen through) except for the displacement member D180 and the transmission member D190, and the displacement member D180 and the transmission member D190 are made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to see the ball passing through the first passage DRt1 to the eighth passage DRt8, and also allows the player to see the opening and closing operation (opening and closing state) of the displacement member D180, which increases the fun of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient that the lower frame D86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material in the member located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of at least one of the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170. Alternatively, only a part of the front side of at least one of the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. If the displacement member D180 can be seen, the player can understand whether the ball is likely to flow down (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 based on its open/closed state. Even if the displacement member D180 is not visible, if the rolling member D170 can be seen, the player can understand the open/closed state of the displacement member D180 based on the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (the position that changes depending on the presence or absence of a rolling ball), which can increase the interest of the game.

Therefore, it is preferable to construct the rolling member D170 from a colored resin material, because this allows the player to easily visually recognize the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (the position that changes depending on the presence or absence of a rolling ball).

The rolling member D170, the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 are made of a light-transmitting (transparent or colored) resin material, and may have a painted front surface or a sticker attached.

On the other hand, the lower frame D86b may be configured so that the components located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the displacement member D180 or rolling member D170 are made of a light-impermeable resin material (or are painted or have a sticker attached) so that the displacement member D180 or rolling member D170 is not visible to the player from the front side.

The front member D110 includes a plate-shaped front part D111 forming the front, a plate-shaped bottom part D112 erected from the back surface of the front part D111, and one longitudinal side of the front part D111 and the bottom part D112 ( and a connecting portion D113 disposed on the arrow L direction side).

The front portion D111 has multiple through holes D111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction side) and the lateral side (arrow L direction side) of the front portion D111. The lower frame D86b, in an assembled state (unitized state), is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes D111a to the base plate 60.

In the front part D111, an outlet DOPout is formed (perforated in the thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 110). As described above, the outflow port DOPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the eighth passage DRt8 flows out to the game area.

The bottom surface of the first intervening member D150 is disposed on the upper surface of the bottom surface portion D112, and a portion of the eighth passage DRt8 (the most downstream ) is formed. Therefore, for example, compared to the case where the through hole formed through the first intervening member D150 is made a part of the eighth passage DRt8, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.

The bottom surface portion D112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal area of the front surface portion D111, and the erected tip (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion D112 abuts over the entire area against the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the bottom surface portion D144 of the intermediate member D140. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering from the bottom side of the lower frame D86b.

The bottom surface portion D112 has a larger erection dimension from the front surface portion D111 of the portion that defines the eighth passage DRt8 than the erection dimension of the other portions of the bottom surface portion D112, and the erection tip of the portion of the bottom surface portion D112 that defines the eighth passage DRt8 abuts against the front surface of the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140.

A plate member D120 is disposed on the upper surface side (the side in the direction of arrow U) of the connecting portion D113, and is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw.

The dish member D120 has an receiving opening DOPin, an upper bottom surface portion D121 and a lower bottom surface portion D122 that form the bottom surface of the passage that guides the balls received from the receiving opening DOPin, and an upper side wall portion D123 and a lower side wall portion D124 that form the side walls of the passage.

As described above, the reception port DOPin is an opening that receives the ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 of the upper frame D86a (see FIG. 110). Note that when the center frame D86 is attached (arranged) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame D86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion D111 and the connecting portion D113, and both are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. Thereby, the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 and the receiving port DOPin are communicated with each other.

The upper bottom portion D121 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and slopes downward in a direction away from the receiving port DOPin (direction of arrow B). It is formed by Note that the upper bottom surface portion D121 is located vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0, and a vertical step is formed between it and the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0. . That is, the dish member D120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion D121.

A groove D121a with a U-shaped cross section is recessed in the center of the upper bottom surface portion D121 in the width direction (arrow L-R direction) (see Figure 84). The groove D121a extends linearly in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The groove width (dimension in the arrow L-R direction) of the groove D121a is set smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the groove depth (dimension in the arrow U-D direction) of the groove D121a is set to a depth such that the ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the groove D121a.

Thereby, the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 can be supported at two locations (a pair of ridgeline portions where the upper bottom surface portion D121 and the groove D121a intersect). Therefore, compared to the case where the groove D121a is not formed (that is, the case where the ball is supported at only one location), the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to buffer (receive) the impact of the ball falling from the upper frame passage DRt0 and increase the resistance when the ball rolls.

As described above, by dropping the ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom part D121 and supporting the ball on the upper bottom part D121 at two places, the ball can be dropped at two places with a predetermined distance apart. When a ball flows (falls) from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom part D121 (first passage DRt1), in the upper bottom part D121 (first passage DRt1), the falling of the preceding ball is delayed and the following ball is This allows the ball to easily catch up with the ball in front. Therefore, the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball can be reduced.

The upper side wall portion D123 is a wall portion that partitions the downstream end (in the direction of arrow B) of the upper bottom portion D121 (first passage DRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom portion D121 (first passage DRt1). It is formed as a plate-shaped body that stands vertically (direction of arrow FB). Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension smaller than at least twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). This setting allows multiple balls to be guided only in series.

A notch D123a is formed in the upper side wall portion D123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom portion D121 (first passage DRt1). The ball is allowed to flow down from the passage DRt1) to the lower bottom portion D122 (second passage DRt2).

The lower bottom surface portion D122 extends in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D) is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow D) (see FIG. 121).

The lower bottom part D122 is located vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the downstream end of the upper bottom part D121 (the part where the notch D123a is formed), and A vertical step is formed between the two. In other words, the dish member D120 is configured to allow the ball to fall freely from the upper bottom portion D121 to the lower bottom portion D122.

The lower side wall portion D124 has ends on one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction of guiding the ball, the arrow FB direction) of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), and the lower bottom surface portion. D122 (second passage DRt2) and the passage width are respectively partitioned. Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension smaller than at least twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). This setting allows multiple balls to be guided only in series.

When viewed from above, the lower bottom surface portion D122 is arranged parallel to the upper bottom surface portion D121, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end (end portion on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the upper bottom surface portion D121 is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (end portion on the side in the direction of arrow B).

The lower side wall portion D124 is not formed at the position corresponding to the notch portion D123a in the upper side wall portion D123, and as described above, water is supplied from the upper bottom portion D121 (first passage DRt1) through the notch portion D123a. The ball is allowed to flow down (fall) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2).

A cutout portion D124a is formed in the lower side wall portion D124 at a position corresponding to the bottom portion (the lowest height position in the vertical direction) of the lower bottom surface portion D122 curved in an arc shape. The ball is allowed to flow down from the lower bottom portion D122 (second passage DRt2) to the first interposed member D150 (third passage DRt3) via the portion D124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion D122 is curved in an arc shape, and the balls flow down from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) to one of the upwardly inclined sides (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122), so that the balls that flow down can be made to reciprocate between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), and then the balls can be made to flow down from the cutout portion D124a to the first intervening member D150 (third passage DRt3).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom part D121 (first passage DRt1) to the lower bottom part D122 (second passage DRt2) with a predetermined interval apart, the lower bottom part D122 ( By using the reciprocating motion in the second path DRt2), it is possible to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (making the balls connected). .

The lower bottom surface portion D122 has an outflow surface D122a recessed at a position corresponding to the cutout portion D124a (i.e., the lowest vertical position). The outflow surface D122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) to flow out to the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion D122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface D122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), balls with a reduced distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3) while maintaining that connected state.

Note that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface of the outflow surface D122a (dimension along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface D122, dimension in the direction of arrow FB) is equal to the width of the notch D124a. The closer the side is, the larger the shape is (see FIG. 115).

Further, in a top view, when the ball is in contact with the lower side wall D124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch D124a, the ball rolls (traverses) on the outflow surface D122a. That is, the ball rolling (reciprocating) in the lower bottom surface D122 (second passage DRt2) is located at the farthest position from the notch D124a (the lateral top of the ball contacts the lower side wall D124). position), the outflow surface D122a is formed to the extent that it overlaps with the center of the sphere when viewed from above (this is the locus of the lower top of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface D122). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface D122a).

In the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion D122 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to its extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and parallel to the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) in the horizontal direction (arrow F-D direction). -B direction). However, as in the case of the embodiment described above (see FIG. 84), the lower bottom surface portion D122 may be tilted downward in the direction away from the notch portion D124a (in the direction of arrow L).

The outflow surface D122a is formed at a position biased toward (close to) one end (in this embodiment, the downstream end side of the upper bottom surface portion D121, the arrow B direction side) rather than the center in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion D122, the arrow F-B direction) (see Figure 121).

In this case, the height position of the lower bottom surface portion D122 in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD) is one end in the longitudinal direction (end in the direction of arrow B) and the other end (end in the direction of arrow F). are the same, and the arcuate shape of the lower bottom part D122 (the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction of the lower bottom part D122 (direction of arrow FB) and the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) The curvature between one longitudinal end side (arrow B direction side) and the outflow surface D122a is the same as the other longitudinal end side (arrow D direction). F direction side) and the outflow surface D122a. That is, the radius between one longitudinal end (the side in the direction of arrow B) and the outflow surface D122a is made smaller than the radius between the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow F) and the outflow surface D122a.

This makes it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball in the region between the other longitudinal end side (arrow F direction) and the outflow surface D122a, and also makes it easier for the leading ball and trailing ball to form a connected state by softening the collision when they catch up (i.e., by preventing the gap between the two balls from widening due to the impact of the trailing ball colliding with the leading ball). As a result, it becomes easier for the two balls to flow out (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3) while connected together.

Note that when the dish member D120 is disposed in such a manner that the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) is along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB), the window portion 60a of the base plate 60 Since the window portion 60a is disposed within the window portion 60a, the space in the front and rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the entire length of the lower bottom portion D122 (second passage DRt2) can be ensured, making it easy to connect the balls.

The back member D130 has a main body D131 formed in a plate shape, is located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) than the main body D131, and is arranged in a parallel attitude to the main body D131, and is formed in a plate shape. It includes a side wall portion D132, a connecting portion D133 that connects the main body portion D131 and the side wall portion D132, and a partition wall D134 erected from the back surface of the main body portion D131.

The main body D131 is formed with a support portion D131a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a support hole D131b that supports the shaft D211 of the support member D210, an insertion hole D131c through which the body D192 of the transmission member D190 is inserted, openings D131d and D131e that allow a ball to pass through, and a protrusion D131f that can come into contact with the ball.

The pivot support portion D131a is formed as a bearing on the front surface (surface on the direction of arrow F) of the main body portion D131, and a pivot support portion D141a is formed on the rear surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the pivot support portion D131a. The rolling member D170 has ends of the shaft D171 protruding from one side surface and the other side surface in the width direction (front-rear direction, arrow F-B direction). The shaft D171 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and both ends of the shaft D171 are supported by the pivot support portion D131a of the rear member D130 and the pivot support portion D141a of the intermediate member D140, respectively. This allows the rolling member D170 to be rotatably disposed between the opposing rear member D130 and intermediate member D140.

The shaft support hole D131b is formed as a hole that penetrates the main body portion D131 in the plate thickness direction (direction of the arrow FB), and a shaft support D141b is provided on the back surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the shaft support hole D131b. It is formed. The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is inserted into the shaft support hole D131b of the main body portion D131 and the shaft hole of the displacement member D180 in order in a posture along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB), and is inserted into one side of the displacement member D180. One end of the shaft D211 protruding from the side surface (on the intermediate member D140 side) is pivotally supported by the shaft support D141b of the intermediate member D140. Thereby, the displacement member D180 is rotatably disposed between the facing member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

The insertion hole D131c is formed to penetrate the main body portion D131 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction), and is formed as an opening (hole) having a size that allows rotation of the body portion D192 of the transmission member D190. In the transmission member D190, the ends of a shaft D191 protrude from one end face and the other end face in the axial direction (front-back direction, arrow FB direction) of the body portion D192, and both ends of the shaft D191 are connected to the intermediate member. It is pivotally supported by the pivot support D141c of D140 and the pivot support D201 of the detour member D200, respectively. Thereby, the transmission member D190 is rotatably disposed between the intermediate member D140 and the detour member D200 and on the back side of the back member D130.

The openings D131d and D131e are formed as openings (holes) having a size that allows a ball to pass through the main body D131 in the thickness direction (direction of arrow FB). That is, it is formed as an opening for communicating the passages (fifth passage DRt5 and eighth passage DRt8) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body portion D131. Note that the openings D131d and D131e are set to a size that allows only one ball to pass through them (two balls cannot pass through them at the same time).

Here, the sixth passage DRt6 is formed on the front side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (facing the intermediate member D140), and the eighth passage DRt8 is formed on the upstream side (first half) on the rear side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (facing the detour member D200) and on the downstream side (second half) on the front side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (inside the intermediate member D140, facing the front member D110 and the first intervening member D150).

Therefore, the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131d, and the upstream side (first half) and downstream side (second half) of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131e. That is, the ball flowing down (guided) the sixth passage DRt6 passes through the opening D131d, moves from the front side to the back side of the back member D130 (main body part D131), and flows into the eighth passage DRt8. Also, the ball flowing down (guided) the upstream side (first half) of the eighth passage DRt8 passes through the opening D131e, moves from the back side to the front side of the back member D130 (main body part D131), and flows into the downstream side (second half) of the eighth passage DRt8.

The protrusion D131f is a protrusion (elongated stripe) that protrudes from the front surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the main body D131 and extends linearly along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow U-D). The protrusions are formed at multiple locations (protrusions) at predetermined intervals (equal intervals in this embodiment) along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170). In the embodiment, they are arranged at five locations (see FIG. 122(c)). Note that the protrusion dimensions and cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D131f are the same along the extending direction (vertical direction).

When viewed from the front, the distance between the lower end (end on the arrow D direction side) of the protrusion D131f and the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 arranged at the second position is smaller than the radius of the sphere. position (see Figure 121). Therefore, even when the rolling member D170 is placed in the second position, the ball and the protrusion D131f can come into contact with each other.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the upper end of the protrusion D131f (the end on the side in the direction of arrow U) has a spherical distance from the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 disposed at the initial position (first position). (see FIG. 119). Therefore, even if the ball jumps upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface of the rolling member D170 (main body part D172) disposed at the second position, the ball and the protrusion D131f can come into contact with each other. Ru.

In this embodiment, the spacing (spacing in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the multiple protrusions D131f is set to a spacing approximately equal to the diameter of the ball. In addition, the multiple protrusions D131f are arranged at different positions along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6 relative to the multiple protrusions D141g protruding from the back surface of the intermediate member D140 (main body part D141). That is, the protrusions D131f of the back surface member D130 and the protrusions D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6 (see FIG. 122(c)). This allows the ball rolling in the sixth passage DRt6 to be delayed.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as action means that act on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and by applying resistance to the ball, the speed of the ball can be lowered. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time required for the weight of the ball to act on the rolling member D170 (that is, the displacement member D180 is at least in the closed position) can be lengthened. It is easier to maintain (for a longer time) a state in which the ball is more open than the ball, making it easier for the ball to enter the ball.

The protruding tip of the protrusion D131f is curved to have an arc-like cross section. However, the cross section of the protrusion D131f may also be substantially rectangular. The protrusion D131f may also have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), or may have a shape that includes at least a portion of a curved shape extending to have an arc-like curve.

When the protrusion D131f is formed into a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), it is preferable to incline the upper side (in the direction of the arrow U) of the ball's rolling surface (the upper surface of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in a direction that is located upstream (in the direction of the arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because, when a ball bounces up from the rolling surface collides with the protrusion D131f, a force component is applied to the ball in a direction that pushes the ball back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (upstream), making it easier to delay the ball.

The side wall portion D132 is disposed at a height position where its upper edge (the side in the direction of the arrow U) is higher (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the second intervening member D160, and defines the passage width of the third passage DRt3 together with the side wall portion D142 of the intermediate member D140.

The partition wall D134 partitions the eighth passage DRt8 together with the main body portion D131 and the detour member D200. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed opposite to the main body portion D131, and the area between the opposing members and partitioned by the partition wall D134 is defined as the eighth passage DRt8. The area partitioned by the partition wall D134 is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear (viewed in the direction of arrow F), and has an opening D131d at one longitudinal end (direction of arrow L) and an opening D131d at the other longitudinal end (direction of arrow L). Openings D131e are respectively arranged on the arrow R direction side) and are inclined downward from one longitudinal end side to the other end side.

The intermediate member D140 has a main body D141 formed in a plate shape, and is located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the main body D141 and is arranged in a parallel attitude to the main body D141, and is formed in a plate shape. A side wall portion D142, a connecting portion D143 connecting the main body portion D141 and the side wall portion D142, a bottom portion D144 erected from the front side of the main body portion D141, and a partition wall (a partition wall erected from the back side of the main body portion D141). A fourth passageway dividing wall D145L, a fifth passageway dividing wall D145R, a sixth passageway dividing wall D146, and an eighth passageway dividing wall D147).

The main body portion D141 includes a shaft support D141a that pivotally supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a shaft support D141b that pivotally supports the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210, and a shaft support that pivotally supports the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190. D141c, openings D141d, D141e, and D141f that allow the ball to pass through, and a protrusion D141g that allows the ball to abut.

The pivot supports D141a, D141b, and D141c are formed as bearings on the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the main body portion D141, and as described above, the pivot supports D131a of the back member D130, the pivot support hole D131b, and the detour member D200. Each is formed at a position facing the pivot support D201.

That is, the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170 is supported by the shaft support portion D131a of the back member D130 and the shaft support portion D141a of the intermediate member D140, the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is supported by the shaft support hole D131b of the back member D130 and the shaft support portion D141b of the intermediate member D140, and the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190 is supported by the shaft support portion D141c of the intermediate member D140 and the shaft support portion D201 of the detour member D200. The shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210, and the transmission member D190 are all disposed with their axial directions aligned with the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).

The openings D141d, D141e, and D141f are formed as openings (holes) having a size that allows a ball to pass through the main body D141 in the thickness direction (arrow FB direction).

The openings D141d and D141e are respectively formed as the exits of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 (openings through which the balls flow out to the seventh passage DRt7), and are formed from the upper surface (rolling surface of the balls) of the first intervening member D150. is also formed upwards. That is, the balls guided through the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 flow out (flow down) to the seventh passage DRt7 via the openings D141d and D141e.

The opening D141f is formed as a communication port (opening) that connects the downstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the rear side of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141) with the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the front side of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141). In other words, the opening D141d is formed as part of the passage (eighth passage DRt8) that penetrates the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140.

The protrusions D141g are formed as ridges (long, thin protrusions) that protrude from the back surface (surface on the side facing the direction of arrow B) of the main body D141 and extend linearly in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrows U-D), and are arranged at multiple locations (six locations in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (equally spaced in this embodiment) along the rolling direction of the balls in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170) (see FIG. 122(c)). The protruding dimensions and cross-sectional shape of the protrusions D141g are the same along the extension direction (vertical direction).

In this embodiment, the spacing between the multiple protrusions D141g (spacing in the direction of the arrows L-R) is set to be approximately equal to the diameter of the ball. In addition, the multiple protrusions D141g are arranged at different positions along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6, relative to the multiple protrusions D131f protruding from the front of the back member D130 (main body part D131). That is, the protrusions D131f of the back member D130 and the protrusions D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the ball rolling direction (longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in the sixth passage DRt6 (see FIG. 122(c)). This allows the ball rolling in the sixth passage DRt6 to be delayed.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as a means for acting on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and this action applies resistance to the ball, slowing down the ball's speed. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170), and therefore makes it easier (longer) to maintain (longer) the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter).

In this embodiment, the opposing distance (distance in the direction of arrow FB) between the front surface of the main body D131 of the back member D130 and the back surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140 is set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. The opposing distance (distance in the direction of arrow FB) between the virtual surface (plane) in which the tips of the plurality of protrusions D131f are connected and the virtual surface (plane) in which the tips of the plurality of protrusions D141g are connected is , is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the sphere or slightly smaller than the diameter of the sphere. However, the opposing distance between both virtual surfaces may be set to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The protruding tip of the protrusion D141g is curved to have an arc-like cross section. However, the cross section of the protrusion D141g may also be substantially rectangular. The protrusion D141g may also have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), or may have a shape that includes at least a portion of a curved shape extending to have an arc-like curve.

Note that when the protrusion D141g has a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD), the rolling surface of the ball (the main body D172 of the rolling member D170) It is preferable that the upper side (in the direction of arrow U) is inclined in a direction that is located on the upstream side (in the direction of arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because when a ball that bounces up from the rolling surface collides with the protrusion D141g, a force component in the direction of pushing the ball back to the side opposite to the rolling direction (upstream side) is applied to the ball, making it easier to delay the ball. be.

The side wall portion D142 is disposed at a height position where its upper edge (the side in the direction of the arrow U) is higher (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the second intervening member D160, and as described above, defines the passage width of the third passage DRt3 together with the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130.

The connecting portion D143 connects the lower edge (arrow D direction side) of the side wall portion D142 to the upper edge (arrow U direction side) of the main body portion D141 continuously over the entire longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), and the second intermediate member D160 is disposed on the upper surface side (arrow U direction side) of the connecting portion D143.

The connecting portion D143 faces the fourth passage dividing wall D145L and the fifth passage dividing wall D145R of the intermediate member D140 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (direction of the arrow UD), and the fourth passage DRt4 is formed between the facing portions. and a fifth passage DRt5 are formed, respectively. That is, the connecting portion D143 forms the upper surface (upper inner surface) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5.

The bottom surface portion D144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body portion D141 in the area excluding the opening D141f, and the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the bottom surface portion D144 abuts against the erected tip (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110. In other words, the bottom surface portion D144 is formed divided in the area where the opening D141f is opened and in the area nearby.

In the area where the bottom surface portion D144 is divided (the area including the opening D141f), as described above, the erected tip of the portion of the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110 that defines the eighth passage DRt8 abuts against the front surface of the main body portion D141 on the lower side (arrow D direction side) and the left and right lateral sides (arrow L direction side and arrow R direction side) of the opening D141f.

The fourth passage dividing wall D145L is a part that divides the fourth passage DRt4 together with the main body part D141 and the connecting part D133 of the main body part D141 and the back member D130. ) and a portion (vertical wall portion) that receives the ball that has rolled on the rolling portion (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the end point of the ball's rolling.

That is, in the fourth passage partitioning wall D145L, a rolling portion extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and one longitudinal end side (arrow R direction side) of the rolling portion is located at the flow port DOPfl when viewed from above. (a position where the ball that has entered (flowed down) the ball can be received) and is tilted downward toward the other end in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow L); The other end in the longitudinal direction is extended to a position where it overlaps the lower edge of the opening D141d, and the extended end (the other end in the longitudinal direction) is connected to a vertical wall portion extending in the up-down direction (arrow UD direction).

Note that the fourth passage dividing wall D145L has a part (region overlapping with the opening D141d) on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow L) that is inclined downward toward the opening D141d, so that the fourth passage dividing wall D145L (rolling direction side) The ball that has reached the other end in the longitudinal direction of the moving surface is allowed to roll toward the opening D141d.

Therefore, the ball that enters the fourth passage DRt4 from the downflow port DOPfl is received (caught) at one longitudinal end side (arrow R direction side) of the fourth passage partition wall D145L and rolls on the fourth passage partition wall D145L toward the other longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side). The ball that reaches the other longitudinal end abuts (is caught) against the vertical wall portion connected to the other longitudinal end, and after its rolling is restricted, it flows out (flows down) into the seventh passage DRt7 (first intervening member D150) through the opening D141d.

The fifth passage dividing wall D145R is a part that partitions the fifth passage DRt5 together with the main body part D141 and the connecting part D133 of the main body part D141 and the back member D130, and is a part whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the ball (rolling part ) and a portion (vertical wall portion) that receives the ball that has rolled on the rolling portion (rolling surface) on the inner wall surface and defines the end point of the ball's rolling.

In addition, the fifth passage dividing wall D145R is formed symmetrically with respect to the fourth passage dividing wall D145L with the displacement member D180 as the center when viewed from the front, and its structure and operation are similar to the fourth passage dividing wall D145L described above. Since the structure and operation are substantially the same as that of D145L, the explanation will be omitted.

The sixth passage dividing wall D146 is a part that divides the sixth passage DRt6 together with the main body part D141, the fourth passage dividing wall D145L, the main body part D131 of the back member D130, and the rolling member D170, and the upper surface is a rolling surface with a ball. A part (rolling part) where the ball rolls on the rolling part (rolling surface) is received by the inner wall surface and a part (vertical wall part) defines the end point of the ball's rolling.

That is, the sixth passage partition wall D146 is provided in parallel with one longitudinal end side of the rolling member D170 (the side in the direction of arrow L, on the extension of the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170) and has a rolling portion formed to be able to receive the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, and a vertical wall portion connected to the end of the rolling surface (the side opposite the rolling member D170) and formed along the up-down direction (the direction of arrows U-D).

In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling part of the sixth passage partition wall D146 is inclined downward toward the opening D141f, so that the ball received from the rolling member D170 can be rolled toward the opening D141f. .

Therefore, the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6 from the downflow port DOPfl and rolls on the rolling member D170, is received by the rolling portion (rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146, abuts (is received) against the vertical wall portion connected to the end of the rolling portion, and after its rolling is restricted, it flows out (flows down) into the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D141f.

The eighth passage partition wall D147 is a section that partitions a part of the eighth passage DRt8 (the part formed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140), and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a roughly rectangular (frame-like) cross section, and connects the opening D141f to the opening D131e of the back member D130. That is, the ball that flows out from the opening D131e of the back member D130 flows into the passage (space) partitioned by the eighth passage partition wall D147, flows down (rolls) through the passage (space), and then flows out from the opening D141f and into the remainder of the eighth passage DRt8 (the part formed between the front member D110 and the first intervening member D150).

The first intervening member D150 is a member that forms a rolling surface of the ball in the seventh passage DRt7, and is interposed between the facing member D110 and the intermediate member D140. That is, the seventh passage DRt7 is formed by the space defined by the front member D110, the intermediate member D140, and the first intervening member D150. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member D150 is curved in an arc shape convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front, and is formed in the fourth passage DRt4 (opening D141d) or the fourth passageway DRt4 (opening D141d). The ball flowing down from the 5th passage DRt5 (opening D141e) is allowed to reciprocate along the curve.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member D150 has a concave surface (central outflow surface D151 and lateral outflow surface D152) that slopes downward toward the front side (arrow F direction) to allow the ball guided through the first intervening member D150 (seventh passage DRt7) to flow out into the play area. In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the seventh passage DRt7 has undulations, with the lateral outflow surface D152 located at the bottom of the undulations and the central outflow surface D151 located at the top of the undulations.

Note that the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front part D111 of the front member D110 is the upper surface (rolling edge) of the first interposed member D150, except for the area where the central outflow surface D151 and the side outflow surface D152 are formed. (moving surface) upwards (in the direction of arrow U). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member D150 flows out (flows down) into the game area only from the central outflow surface D151 or the side outflow surface D152.

A recess D153 is formed in the bottom surface of the first intermediate member D150, and as described above, a portion of the eighth passage DRt8 is formed between the recess D153 and the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110.

The second intervening member D160 is a member that forms a rolling surface of the ball in the third passage DRt3, and is interposed between the facing member D130 and the intermediate member D140. That is, the third passage DRt3 is formed by the space defined by the back member D130, the intermediate member D140, and the second intervening member D160. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member D160 is curved in an arc shape convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front, so that the ball flowing down from the second passage DRt2 can be It is possible to reciprocate along the curve.

In the present embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member D160 is located at a position corresponding to the center in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) of the outlet DOPfl (the opposing space of the pair of displacement members D180). is the lowest, and the height position increases toward one end or the other end (in the direction of arrow L or direction of arrow R) in the longitudinal direction of the second intervening member D160 (third passageway DRt3). Ru.

That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intermediate member D160 is formed with an upward inclination from a position corresponding to the opposing space of the pair of displacement members D180 toward one or the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of arrow L or the direction of arrow R). Therefore, the ball can reciprocate along the longitudinal direction (the direction of arrows L-R) of the third passage DRt3.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intermediate member D160 is formed (recessed) with concave surfaces (central outflow surface D161 and lateral outflow surfaces D162) that are inclined downward toward the back side (arrow B direction) to allow the balls to flow out of the second intermediate member D160 (third passage DRt3) to the outflow port DOPfl.

The central outflow surface D161 is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the center (opposing space of a pair of displacement members D180) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl. On the other hand, the lateral outflow surface D162 is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the opposing space of the displacement member D180 (closed position) toward one or the other end of the second intervening member D160 (third passage DRt3) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, and is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the opposing space of the displacement member D180 (closer to the center of the opposing space than the tip of the displacement member D180) when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

Therefore, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, the ball flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the outlet DOPfl is allowed to enter between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other (i.e., the sixth passage DRt6). The balls flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the outflow port DOPfl are allowed to enter the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

On the other hand, when the displacement member D180 is positioned in the open position, both the ball flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow port DOPfl and the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 (i.e., the sixth passage DRt6).

In this embodiment, the longitudinal dimension (arrow L-R direction) of the flow-down port DOPfl is set to a dimension that allows the ball to flow down (enter) the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position.

That is, a gap (distance) larger than the diameter of the ball is secured (formed) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the flow-down port DOPfl between the tip of the displacement member D180 arranged in the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130 when viewed from above. This makes it possible for the ball to flow down (enter) not only the sixth passage DRt6, but also the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5, even when the displacement member D180 is arranged in the open position. This can increase the interest of the game.

However, the longitudinal dimension (in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the outflow port DOPfl may be set to a dimension that prevents the ball from flowing down (entering) at least one of the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position.

In other words, the gap (distance) between the tip of the displacement member D180 placed in the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130 may be smaller than the diameter of the ball when viewed from above (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass). This allows the ball to flow (enter) only into the sixth passage DRt6 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

When viewed from above, the central outflow surface D161 has an extended length of its concave surface (dimension in the direction perpendicular to the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating in the third passageway DRt3 (arrow FB direction)) as a side outflow surface D161. It is made larger than the extended length of the surface D162 (concave surface). In addition, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 (arrow LR direction)) of the central outflow surface D161 is larger than that of the side outflow surface D161. (concave) width.

Therefore, even if the number of central outflow surfaces D161 formed (one location) is smaller than the number of side outflow surfaces D162 formed (two locations), the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 will not be able to reach the center outflow surface D161. The probability of the ball flowing down (entering the ball) from the ball to the flow outlet DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6) can be ensured.

Note that the extended length and width of the concave surface may be set to be the same on the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surface D162. Moreover, contrary to this embodiment, the extension length of the central outflow surface D161 (concave surface) may be smaller than the extension length of the side outflow surface D162 (concave surface). In these cases, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, it is difficult for the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 to flow down (enter the ball) into the outflow port DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6), and the relative Specifically, the advantage when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position can be significant.

Furthermore, the formation of at least one or both of the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surfaces D162 (the recessed formation on the upper surface of the second intervening member D160) may be omitted. The positions where the balls reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 flow down to the outlet DOPfl are set uniformly along the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the outlet DOPfl, and the positions in the fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5, or the sixth passage It is possible to increase the randomness of which path of the path DRt6 the ball flows down (enters into).

The rolling member D170 includes a shaft D171, a long plate-shaped main body D172 on which the shaft D171 is disposed at one longitudinal end, and the other longitudinal end of the main body D172 (on which the shaft D171 is disposed). A transmission part D173 disposed on the opposite side of the transmission part D173 (main body part D172) with the axis D171 in between, and a weight part D174 disposed on the opposite side of the transmission part D173 (main body part D172), and D140 and is rotatably arranged around an axis D171.

As described above, the axis D171 is arranged in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Therefore, by displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170 about the axis D171, the main body portion D172 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).

The main body portion D172 is a portion whose upper surface forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6, and one longitudinal end side (the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is juxtaposed to the rolling portion (the part whose upper surface serves as the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, and the other longitudinal end side (the side opposite the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow R) is arranged in a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 in a top view (a position that can receive (catch) a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180).

Whether the main body D172 is in any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the upper surface of one end side of its longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is positioned at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (the side in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The axis D171 is embedded inside the main body D172, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed up to a position beyond the axis D171. That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes above the axis D171 (the arrow U direction side) and then rolls (flows) into the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed as a flat surface on the transmission portion D173 side with the upper side (in the direction of arrow U) of the axis D171 as a boundary, and the weight portion D174 side is formed as a flat surface with the axis D171 as the center. Formed as a curved surface. That is, the shape of the upper surface of the main body D172 cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D171 is a linear shape on the transmission portion D173 side, and an arc shape concentric with the axis D171 on the weight portion D174 side (Fig. 119 reference).

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed as a flat surface on the side closer to the transmission part D173 than the shaft D171, so that the ball rolling in that area can be prevented from bouncing upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, the main body D172 can be prevented from being displaced upward by the action of the weight part D174 as the ball bounces upward.

Note that the upper surface of the main body D172 does not need to have a straight line in cross section, it is sufficient if there is no step, and the upper surface of the main body D172 does not need to have a straight line in cross section. They may be formed in a continuous cross-sectional shape, for example, a sine wave (sinusoidal curve) shape.

Here, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is moved to the rolling portion (the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140 before reaching the axis D171. A configuration is also conceivable in which the water is rolled (inflowed) to However, in such a configuration, the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D) due to the action of the weight of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body part D172 (rolling member D170 Since the ball is ejected from the top surface of the main body D172 (before the main body D172 is returned to the initial position (first position)), the influence of the inertial force accompanying the ejection of the ball (the weight of the ball is The rolling member D170 fluttering due to the effect that the rolling member D170 is momentarily stopped acting. When the rolling member D170 flaps, the opening/closing state of the displacement member D180 becomes unstable, which reduces the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 is rolled beyond the position above the axis D171 (in the direction of arrow U). The ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the main body D172 while the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is returned to the initial position (first position) by suppressing the effect of the weight of the ball. Therefore, even if the rolling member D170 is affected by the inertial force accompanying the ejection of the ball (the effect that the weight of the ball is momentarily no longer applied), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of flapping in the rolling member D170. As a result, the opening/closing state of the displacement member D180 can be stabilized and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, as described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed as a curved surface with the weight D174 side centered on the axis D171, with the boundary being a position above the axis D171 (arrow U direction). Therefore, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes above the axis D171 (arrow U direction), the weight of the ball does not act on the upper surface of the main body D172. That is, in this embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is an area on the transmission part D173 side from the position above the axis D171 (arrow U direction), and the area on the weight D174 side from the position above the axis D171 does not function as a rolling surface.

The transmission part D173 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the transmission member D190, and extends from the other longitudinal end side of the main body part D172 toward the opposite side to the shaft D171 (the arrow R direction side). The extended tip side (arrow R direction side) of the transmission part D173 is disposed above (arrow U direction side) the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 (disposed in a position overlapping in a top view).

Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) around the axis D171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface and the transmission part D173 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed down) downward by the transmission part D173, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 around the axis D191 (see Figures 119 to 121).

The weight portion D174 is a portion for eccentrically centering the center of gravity of the rolling member D170, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body D172 toward the side opposite to the extending direction of the main body D172 (in the direction of arrow L). At the same time, a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight is buried inside.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the rolling member D170 (main body D172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body D172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is positioned (eccentric) toward the weight portion D174 rather than the axis D171. As a result, by utilizing the weight of the weight portion D174 (eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D171), the rolling member D170 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (first position) in an unloaded state, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is able to return to the initial position by its own weight.

That is, in the rolling member D170, in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the main body D172), the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (as viewed from the front). , it is rotated counterclockwise around the axis D171), is placed at the initial position (first position), and is maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, when a ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the main body D172 (the opposite side of the axis D171 from the weight D174). As a result, the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170 are displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D171 when viewed from the front), and the rolling member D170 is positioned in the second position.

The first position (initial position) of the rolling member D170 is determined by the end face of one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side) of the main body part D172 abutting against the sixth passage partition wall D146 (end face opposite the vertical wall part of the rolling part) of the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the main body part D172 against the sixth passage partition wall D146, the upward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D171) of the main body part D172 and the transmission part D173 is restricted, and the rolling member D170 is disposed in the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 119).

On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D170 is defined by the upper surface of the weight portion D174 coming into contact with the sixth passage dividing wall D146 (lower surface of the rolling portion) of the intermediate member D140. That is, in the rolling member D170, the weight portion D174 is brought into contact with the sixth passage partitioning wall D146, so that the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 are displaced downward (in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the axis D171). rotation) is regulated and placed in the second position (see FIG. 121).

When the rolling member D170 is arranged in the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side, and when the rolling member D170 is arranged in the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D170 (main body D172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D141f (the eighth passage DRt8).

In this way, the rolling member D170 rolls the ball by utilizing the downward inclination of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172, where the rolling member D170 is rotatably supported around the axis D171, and the angle of downward inclination of the upper surface of the main body D172 relative to the horizontal plane when the ball is rolling (when the weight of the ball is being received) is smaller than the angle of downward inclination when the ball is not rolling (when the weight of the ball is not being received and no load is being applied).

This makes it possible to prevent momentum from being imparted to the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172. This makes it possible to increase (lengthen) the time it takes for the ball to pass over the upper surface of the main body part D172. As a result, the time during which the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 (main body part D172) is lengthened, making it easier (longer) to maintain (lengthen) the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (a state in which the opposing distance between at least one pair of displacement members D180 is wider than the opposing distance when disposed in the closed position).

In this embodiment, the rolling member D170 is rotated around the axis D171 on the weight part D174 side in a state where the weight of one ball is applied to the center of the main body part D172 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction). It is formed so that the weight and the weight of the main body portion D172 are balanced (the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is located on a vertical line passing through the axis D171).

Therefore, when only one ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, and that ball is located on the transmission part D173 side (opposite the axis D171) rather than the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body D172, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is located (eccentric) closer to the main body D172 than the axis D171, and due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity, the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (when viewed from the front, they rotate clockwise around the axis D171).

On the other hand, when the ball is located on the axis D171 side (opposite the transmission part D173) from the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body part D172, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is located (eccentric) on the weight part D174 side from the axis D171, and due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity, the main body part D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (when viewed from the front, they are rotated counterclockwise around the axis D171).

When two or more balls roll on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 (when the weight of two or more balls is applied to the main body D172), the rolling position of each ball (main body Regardless of the position of the rolling member D172 in the longitudinal direction, the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 is located (eccentric) closer to the main body D172 than the axis D171, and due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity, the center of gravity of the rolling member D172 and the transmission section D173 are It is displaced (descended) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around axis D171 when viewed from the front).

In this way, by providing a balancing position halfway (in this embodiment, at the center of the longitudinal direction) of the rolling surface (main body portion D172) of the rolling member D170 (in the direction of the arrows L-R), after the ball passes the balancing position, the rolling member D170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position. As a result, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the open position to the closed position.

In addition, when the weight of one ball acts, the position where the weight on the weight part D174 side and the weight on the main body part D172 side balance around the axis D171 is in the longitudinal direction of the main body part D172 (arrow LR). direction) may be closer to the axis D171 than the center, or may be closer to the transmission portion D173 than the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the main body portion D172.

The displacement member D180 is a member for guiding the ball flowing down (entering the ball) from the third passage DRt3 to the outlet DOPfl toward the sixth passage DRt6, and as described above, is pivotally supported by the shaft support member D210. and is displaced (rotated) between the closed and open positions.

The shaft supporting member D210 includes a shaft D211 fixed to the base end side of the displacement member D180, an overhanging portion D212 that overhangs in a direction (radially outward) perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft D211, and the overhanging portion. A connecting pin D213 is provided that projects from D212 in a posture parallel to the axis D211 (a posture along the arrow FB direction) and is connected to the transmission member D190.

As described above, in the shaft support member D210, the shaft D211 is pivotally supported by the shaft support D141b of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141) and the shaft support hole D131b of the back member D130 (main body portion D131). The projecting portion D212 is disposed on the back side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131), and the connecting pin D213 projects toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) in a posture parallel to the axis D211.

The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is fixed to the displacement member D180. Further, the connecting pins D213 are positioned at different positions with respect to the axis D211 in a direction (radial direction) perpendicular to the axial direction (arranged at eccentric positions with respect to the axis D211). Therefore, when the connecting pin D213 is displaced with the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190, the displacement of the connecting pin D213 is converted into rotation of the shaft D211, and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) together with the shaft D211. .

Note that the connecting pin D213 is disposed outside the axis D211 (on the opposite side to the space where the pair of displacement members D180 face each other). Therefore, by displacing (pushing down) the connecting pin D213 downward (in the direction of arrow D), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and the connecting pin D213 is displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). By being pushed up (pushed up), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the closed position.

The closed position and the open position of the displacement member D180 are defined by the proximal outer surface of the displacement member D180 coming into contact with the side surfaces of the fourth passageway dividing wall D145L and the fifth passageway dividing wall D145R. That is, the displacement member D180 is moved in a direction in which the pair of displacement members D180 are brought closer to each other (opposing Displacement in the direction in which the distance becomes smaller) or in the direction in which they are separated from each other (in the direction in which the facing distance becomes larger) is regulated, and they are placed in the closed position or the open position (see FIGS. 119 to 121).

The displacement member D180 and the axial support member D210 are integrated (unitized) by fixing the axis D211 of the axial support member D210 to the base end side of the displacement member D180.

When the displacement member D180 and the pivot support member D210 are integrated into a part (hereinafter referred to as the "displacement member D180 unit"), at least when the part is placed in the closed position, the center of gravity of the displacement member D180 unit as a whole is located (eccentric) toward the other displacement member D180 unit from the axis D211. In other words, when viewed from the direction of the axis D211 (arrow F-B), the center of gravity is located (eccentric) toward the other displacement member D180 unit from a virtual line passing through the axis D211.

As a result, the displacement member D180 unit is able to maintain its posture in the closed position by utilizing the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D211 (i.e., the eccentricity of the center of gravity acts as a force that rotates the pair of displacement members D180 in a direction that brings them closer to each other).

The transmission member D190 is a member for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 (axial support member D210), and includes a shaft D191, a cylindrical body portion D192 from which the shaft D191 protrudes from an end face on one axial side (arrow F direction side) and an end face on the other axial side (arrow B direction side), a transmitted portion D193 extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on one axial side of the body portion D192, and a main body portion D194 and a weight portion D195 extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on the other axial side of the body portion D192.

The shaft D191 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (arrows F-B), and as described above, one end of the shaft D191 is supported by the support portion D141c of the intermediate member D140 by inserting the body portion D192 into the insertion hole D131c of the back member D130, and the other end of the shaft D191 is supported by the support portion D201 of the detour member D200.

The transmitted part D193 is a part to which the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted from the rolling member D170 (transmitting part D173), and is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the main body part D131 of the back member D130.

As described above, the extended tip side (arrow L direction side) of the transmitted part D193 is arranged below (arrow D direction side) the transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170 (arranged at a position overlapping when viewed from above), and when the transmission part D173 is displaced (lowered) downward (arrow D direction), the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed down) downward by the transmission part D173, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 around the axis D191 (see Figures 119 to 121).

Here, a predetermined gap is formed in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) between the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170, and when the rolling member D170 receives the weight of the ball and is displaced (descended) downward (arrow D direction), the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170 can come into contact with the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 after filling the predetermined gap. In other words, the rolling member D170 cannot press the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 downward unless it is displaced (descended) enough to fill the gap.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement of the rolling member D170 from being transmitted to the displacement member D180 when the displacement of the rolling member D170 is relatively small. This makes it difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts, such as, for example, hitting the gaming machine to displace (lower) the rolling member D170 or using a foreign object such as a wire to displace (lower) the rolling member D170.

The main body D194 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 to the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210, and is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the main body D131 in the rear member D130.

Grooves D194L and D194R are formed in the main body D194, and the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is slidably inserted into these grooves D194L and D194R. Thus, when the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted and the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 is displaced downward or upward (pushed down or up) by the inner wall surfaces of the insertion grooves D194L and D194R of the transmission member D190. As a result, the displacement member D180 unit is displaced (rotated), and the displacement member D180 is placed in the open or closed position.

When viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow F-B direction), the groove D194R has a width dimension (dimension in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the connecting pin D213 slides relative to one another) set to a dimension that is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213, and extends linearly along a direction that intersects with an arc centered on the axis D191. Therefore, while the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 inserted in the groove D194R is displaced downward or upward (pushed down or up) by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R.

When viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow F-B direction), the groove D194L is extended in an arc-shaped curve with its center on the axis D191 side, and the width dimension of the groove at the lower extension end (the end on the arrow D direction side, the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is located when the rolling member D170 is in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is in the closed position) is set to a dimension that is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213, and the width dimension of the groove increases toward the upper extension end (the end on the arrow U direction side, the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is located when the rolling member D170 is in the second position and the displacement member D180 is in the open position).

Specifically, among the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D194L, the inner wall surface on the side far from the axis D191 has a shape along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a circular shape centered on the axis D191). The inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191 extends from the lower extension end (the end in the direction of arrow D) to the upper extension end (the end in the direction of arrow U). It is curved into an arc shape in which the distance from the axis D191 increases as it goes toward the end.

In addition, since the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is eccentric with respect to the axis D211, the distance between the connecting pin D213 and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 is maximum when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, and decreases as the displacement member D180 is displaced toward the open position. In other words, the more the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed down) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the smaller the distance between the connecting pin D213 and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 becomes.

Therefore, when the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from a state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (i.e., a state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed up) to the uppermost position (in the direction of the arrow U), see FIG. 119), the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon (is not abutted against) by either of the inner wall surfaces along the extension direction of the groove D194R.

On the other hand, the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (that is, the state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pressed down) most downwardly (in the direction of arrow D), see FIG. 121). ), the connecting pin D213 is acted upon (abutted) by the inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191 among the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D194L, and is gradually moved upward ( (in the direction of arrow U) (pushed up).

In this way, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194L even if the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated). , is not displaced downward (not pushed down), and after reaching the upper extending end (end in the direction of arrow U) of the groove D194L (see FIG. 120), at the upper extending end thereof. It is displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface.

Thereby, the operation modes (displacement modes) of the pair of displacement members D180 can be made different from each other. That is, a state can be created in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated).

That is, in this embodiment, when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, there is a gap between the connecting pin D213 and the upper extending end (end in the direction of arrow U, inner wall surface) of the groove D194L. A predetermined interval is formed (see FIG. 119).

When the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) under the weight of the ball and the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 is started, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R , is displaced (pressed down) downward by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R, thereby causing the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) to be displaced (rotated) from the closed position. will be started.

On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L is not displaced downward until it reaches the upper extending end of the groove D194L (the extending end in the direction of arrow U, the inner wall surface). (not pushed down), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the closed position.

When the transmission member D190 is further displaced (rotated) in accordance with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position), the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R continues to be displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R, thereby continuing the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position to the open position.

On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L reaches the upper extended end of the groove D194L (the end on the direction of the arrow U, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 120), it is displaced (pushed down) downward by the upper extended end (inner wall surface), thereby starting the displacement of the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position.

Thereafter, both connecting pins D213 are displaced (pressed down), the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and when the rolling member D170 reaches the second position, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the open position. Member D180 is placed in the open position.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the timings at which the pair of displacement members D180 start displacing (rotating) from the closed position to the open position can be made different (one is delayed relative to the other). As a result, for the player who expects the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the open position (that is, the inflow of the ball into the sixth passageway DRt6), a change can be formed in the open state, increasing the interest of the game. be able to.

The weight portion D195 is a portion for eccentrically centering the center of gravity of the transmission member D190, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body portion D194 toward the side opposite to the axis D191 (in the direction of arrow R). A metal (brass in this embodiment) weight is buried in the hole.

The weight of the weight portion D195 causes the center of gravity of the transmission member D190 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the weight portion D195 rather than the axis D191. As a result, the transmission member D190 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (the position where the displacement member D180 is in the closed position, see FIG. 119) by utilizing the weight of the weight portion D195 (eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D191), and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is able to return to the initial position by its own weight (i.e., the displacement member D180 returns to the closed position).

In other words, when the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 is not displaced (pushed down) downward (in the direction of arrow D) by the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, the main body portion D194 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D191 in rear view) and placed in the initial position (the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position) and maintained in the initial position. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the transmission member D190 and a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

The detour member D200 is formed in a plate shape having an outer shape larger in rear view than the partitioned area by the partition wall D134 of the rear member D130, and is disposed on the erected tip surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the partition wall D134 to partition the eighth passage DRt8 together with the partition wall D134. In addition, the detour member D200 has a shaft support portion D201 formed in an area that is outward in rear view from the partitioned area by the partition wall D134.

Next, the opening/closing operation of the displacement member D180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121 and FIG. 122(c).

As shown in FIG. 119, when no balls are flowing (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180) from the outflow port DOPfl, the rolling member D170 is positioned in the initial position (first position). Therefore, the transmission member D190 is not acted upon by the rolling member D170, and the displacement member D180 is positioned in the closed position.

In this state, when a ball (not shown) flows (enters) from the flow outlet DOPfl into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other), the ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). After passing through (flowing down) the upper surface (rolling surface) of the other longitudinal end of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 (the opposite side to the axis D171, the side in the direction of arrow R), the main body D172 is rolled with the upper surface facing toward one end in the longitudinal direction (axis D171 side, arrow L direction side).

As shown in FIG. 120, when the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 moves toward the second position under the weight of the ball. When the rolling member D170 is further displaced (rotated) and reaches the second position as shown in FIG. The spacing is maximized.

A ball (not shown) rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 moves from one longitudinal end side (axis D171 side, arrow L side) of the main body D172 to the intermediate member D140. It rolls (inflows) into the rolling portion (the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partitioning wall D146, and rolls (inflows) into the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D131d.

After that, when the ball is no longer present on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 is returned to the initial position (first position) by its own weight, and along with this, the transmission member When D190 is returned to the initial position by its own weight, the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 119).

As described above, in this embodiment, the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is rotatably supported around the axis D171, and the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). ) is rolled on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 toward the axis D171 side (arrow L direction side).

As described above, the rolling member D170 is arranged at the other longitudinal end (the side opposite to the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow R) in a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 when viewed from above (a position where a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 can be received (catch)).

Therefore, the ball that flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180) can be dropped onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170.

Here, for example, in a structure in which the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 is set in a direction away from the axis D171, the ball is set on the rolling member D170 (main body part D172). At the initial stage of rolling, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is close, so the ball rolls a predetermined distance and the distance from axis D171 (the point of force and fulcrum) is close. Until the distance between the balls is secured, the weight of the weight portion D174 cannot be counteracted, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by the weight of the ball. I can't.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D172, in the initial stage, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is determined. Since the influence of the weight portion D174 can be reduced, the rolling member D170 can be easily displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by the weight of the ball.

That is, immediately after the ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other), the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position), and the displacement The member D180 can be quickly displaced toward the open position (and placed in the open position).

In particular, since the balls that have flowed into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing pair of displacement members D180) can be dropped directly onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) can be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by utilizing not only the effect of the weight of the balls but also the momentum (kinetic energy) of the falling balls. In this respect, too, the displacement of the displacement member D180 toward the open position (and placement at the open position) can be performed quickly.

Therefore, it is possible for the player who has witnessed the ball flowing down (entering the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) to immediately start displacing the displacement member D180 to the open position. It is possible to perform at a good tempo.

In addition, when multiple balls roll on the third passage DRt3, if the distance between a first ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) and a second ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth passage DRt6, a subsequent ball) following the first ball is relatively small, the subsequent second ball can be made to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180).

Since the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 approaches the axis D171, as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, The influence of the weight portion D174 can be increased by gradually shortening the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum). Therefore, the rolling member D170 can be gradually returned from the second position to the initial position (first position).

That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member D180, which has been placed in the open position, can be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position. As a result, for example, when another ball is reciprocating on the third path DRt3, the other ball will not flow into the sixth path DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player pay attention to whether or not the displacement member D180 is in an advantageous state in which it is opened (at least in a state in which the amount of opening is larger than the state in which it is disposed in the closed position).

Furthermore, when a ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) falls onto the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 can receive the fallen ball on the side of the rolling member D170 that has a larger amount of displacement in the up-down direction (the side farther away from the axis D171) (the side in the direction of the arrows U-D).

Therefore, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) as energy for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170, that is, lifting the weight portion D174 upward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the balls that have fallen onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 from jumping upward. As a result, the weight of the ball is stably applied to the rolling member D170, and the state of the displacement member D180 is stabilized (for example, the displacement member D180 is prevented from being temporarily displaced (rotated) toward the closed position). )can.

In addition, if a ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) is dropped onto a member other than the rolling member D170 (a fixed, non-displaceable member, for example, part of the back member D130 or intermediate member D140), this other member is likely to be damaged. However, as described above, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member D170, thereby suppressing damage to the rolling member D170 and the back member D130 and intermediate member D140 that support the rolling member D170 due to the collision of the ball. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased by the amount that the ball can be allowed to fall (the upper limit of the height to which the ball can fall can be made more lenient).

The main body D131 of the back member D130 and the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140, which form the side wall (inner surface) of the sixth passage DRt6, are provided with protrusions D131f and D141g (acting means) that are capable of acting on a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g protrude into the sixth passage DRt6 from the main body parts D131 and D141, which are arranged facing each other with a predetermined interval apart, and extend in a straight line along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD). A plurality of balls are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170).

Therefore, when the ball passes through the sixth passage DRt6, not only when it rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, but also when it moves while floating above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, the protrusions D131f, D141g come into contact with the ball and provide resistance, thereby slowing down the speed of the ball.

As a result, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the displacement member D180 is at least more open than in the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter) can be maintained (lengthened).

In this case, the protrusions D131f and D141g are formed on both sides of the sixth passage DRt6 (main body part D172 of the rolling member D170), and are formed in the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (main body part of the rolling member D170). Since the balls are arranged in a staggered manner along the longitudinal direction of D172, when the balls pass through the sixth passage DRt6, the balls can be brought into contact with the protrusions D131f and D141g alternately.

This not only applies resistance to the ball, but also adds a lateral velocity component (direction perpendicular to the rolling direction) to the ball's velocity component (the ball's path is zigzag instead of straight). can). Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth path DRt6 can be increased. Therefore, from this point of view, it is easier to maintain (longer) the time during which the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 (that is, the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position and the ball is more likely to enter the ball). )can.

On the other hand, since the protrusions D131f and D141g extend along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), it is difficult to apply resistance to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when a ball jumps upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172), it is possible to quickly drop the ball downward (rolling surface). can. Therefore, even if the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced upward by the action of the weight D174 as the ball bounces upward, the weight of the ball can be quickly transferred to the main body D172 of the rolling member D170. can be applied to quickly return the main body portion D172 to its original state.

As a result, while the ball passes through the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball acts on the main body D172, and the displacement member D180 is opened at least more than in the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter the ball. can be easily maintained.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is formed as a flat surface. That is, the upper surface of the main body D172 is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball, and no steps are formed. This makes it possible to prevent the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 from bouncing upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This makes it possible to prevent the main body D172 from being displaced upward by the action of the weight portion D174 as the ball bounces upward.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the displacement member D180 is formed to be displaceable (rotatable), and in the structure in which the ease with which balls flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement (rotation), when a ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced to the side (open position) where the ball is more likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6, so that when a ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, it becomes easier for the ball following that ball (for example, a ball reciprocating in the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3, a subsequent ball) to enter the sixth passage DRt6.

In other words, when a first ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the entry of the first ball into the sixth passage DRt6 displaces the displacement member D180, creating a state in which the following second ball (the second ball following the first ball) can easily enter the sixth passage DRt6, and when a second ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the entry of the second ball into the sixth passage DRt6 displaces the displacement member D180, creating a state in which the following third ball (the third ball following the second ball) can easily enter the sixth passage DRt6, and these patterns can be repeated after the third ball.

Therefore, the player can expect that the flow (sinking) of one ball into the sixth passage DRt6 will trigger a chain reaction of balls into the sixth passage DRt6. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In this case, the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the side where the ball is more likely to enter (open position) is achieved by utilizing the weight of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6. This eliminates the need for an actuator to drive the displacement member D180 and a sensor to control that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

In particular, in this embodiment, the rolling surface of the balls in the sixth passage DRt6 is formed by the rolling member D170, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) by the action of the weight of the rolling ball. , you can secure time to utilize the weight of the ball. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the ball easily flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the eighth embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be forcibly opened from the outside, but in the ninth embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be restricted from being forcibly opened from the outside. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 123(a) and 123(b) are cross-sectional views of the lower frame D2086b in the ninth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 115. Note that Figure 123(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, while Figure 123(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member D2190 includes an engaging portion D2196. Note that the transmission member D2190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the eighth embodiment only in that it further includes an engaging portion D2196, and the other configurations are the same.

The engagement portion D2196 is a portion that allows the rolling member D170 to be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, and restricts the displacement member D180, which is in the closed position, from being displaced (rotated) toward the open position when the rolling member D170 is in the initial position (first position). It is erected from the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of the arrow U) of the transmitted portion D193, and is disposed with its outer surface (surface opposite the axis D191) facing the extended tip (end on the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170.

The outer surface of the engaging portion D2196 (the surface on the opposite side to the axis D191) corresponds to the displacement of the extending tip (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the transmitting portion D173 when the rolling member D170 is rotated about the axis D171. It is formed in a shape that does not intersect with the locus (a shape that is in contact with the displacement locus or a shape that has a gap between it and the displacement locus). Therefore, displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position) to the second position is allowed (see FIG. 123(b)).

Therefore, when a ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6 and rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball is used to move the rolling member D170. can be displaced to a second position. As a result, the transmitted portion D173 of the rolling member D170 can displace (push down) the transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D2190 downward, and the displacement member D180 can be displaced (rotated) to the open position.

The outer surface of the engagement portion D2196 (the surface opposite to the axis D191) is formed into a shape that can restrict the rotation of the transmission member D2190 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (left in FIG. 123(a) , i.e., the direction in which the displacement member D180 disposed in the open position is displaced toward the open position) when the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position.

Specifically, when the transmission member D2190 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (left in FIG. 123(a)), and the outer surface (the surface opposite the axis D191) of the engagement portion D2196 abuts against and presses against the extended tip (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, the extended tip of the transmission portion D173 is pressed in the direction toward the axis D171 (the axis D171 is positioned on the extension line of the force applied from the engagement portion D2196 to the extended tip of the transmission portion D173).

Therefore, a force component for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170 is not generated, and the rolling member D170 is maintained (unrotatable) in the initial position (first position), restricting the rotation of the transmission member D2190 in the counterclockwise direction (left direction in FIG. 123(a)) as viewed from the front (see FIG. 123(a)). In other words, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position is restricted.

In this way, according to this embodiment, when the rolling member D170 is placed in the initial position (first position) (i.e., when the weight of the ball is not acting on it), the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position can be restricted. That is, for example, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of forcibly displacing the displacement member D180 from the closed position toward the open position by inserting a foreign object such as a wire (making it easier for the ball to flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6).

In this case, in this embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position is restricted by utilizing the rolling member D170 (engaging the engagement portion D2196 of the transmission member D2190 with the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170). Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate part to restrict the displacement member D180 from being forcibly displaced (rotated), and the transmission member D190 can be used, which simplifies the structure for preventing unauthorized forcible displacement of the displacement member D180.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In the eighth embodiment, the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 rolls toward the axis D171, but in the tenth embodiment, the ball rolls on the rolling member D3170 in a direction away from (moving away from) the axis D3171. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 124(a) and 124(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D3086b in the tenth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 115. Note that Figure 124(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, while Figure 124(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 124, the rolling member D3170 includes a shaft D3171, a long plate-shaped main body D3172 with the shaft D3171 disposed at the other end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side), and a main body D3172. A weight portion D3174 disposed on the other longitudinal end side of D3172 (the side on which the shaft D3171 is disposed) and a transmission portion D3173 disposed on the opposite side of the main body portion D3172 with the weight portion D3174 interposed therebetween. and is rotatably disposed about an axis D3171 between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

The parts D3171 to D3174 of the rolling member D3170 are substantially identical in function to the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the eighth embodiment, and differ only in their arrangement. The transmission member D3190 differs from the transmission member D3190 in the eighth embodiment only in the orientation (extension direction) of the transmitted part D3193, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

The shaft D3171 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB), and is supported by a shaft support (not shown) formed in the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140. Therefore, by displacing (rotating) the rolling member D3170 about the axis D3171, the main body portion D3172 is displaced (elevated) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction).

The main body portion D3172 is a portion whose upper surface forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6, and one longitudinal end side (the side opposite to the side where the axis D3171 is arranged, the side in the direction of arrow L) is juxtaposed to the rolling portion (the part whose upper surface serves as the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, and the other longitudinal end side (the side where the axis D3171 is arranged, the side in the direction of arrow R) is arranged in a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 in a top view (a position that can receive (catch) a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180).

When the main body D3172 is placed in the second position (posture), the upper surface of one end of its longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the axis D3171 is disposed, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is placed at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (the side in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is formed as a flat surface. This prevents the rolling ball from bouncing upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This prevents the main body D3172 from being displaced upward by the action of the weight D3174 as the ball bounces upward.

The upper surface of the main body D3172 does not need to be a flat surface (a cross section cut by a plane perpendicular to the axis D3171 is a straight cross section), but it is sufficient if no steps are formed, and it may be formed as a smooth surface that is smoothly connected along the rolling direction of the ball (a cross section shape in which curves or curves and straight lines are smoothly connected, for example, a sine wave (sine curve) shape).

The weight portion D3174 is a portion for making the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 eccentric, and is opposite to the extending direction of the main body portion D3172 from the other longitudinal end side of the main body portion D3172 (the side where the shaft D3171 is disposed). It extends toward the side (in the direction of arrow R), and a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight is embedded inside.

The transmission portion D3173 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 to the transmission member D3190, and is a portion opposite to the axis D3171 from the extension direction end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the weight portion D3174. It is further extended toward the side (arrow R direction side). The extended distal end side (arrow R direction side) of the transmission portion D3173 is disposed below (arrow D direction side) the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmission member D3190 (disposed in an overlapping position when viewed from above).

Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmission section D3173 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U), the transmission section D3173 The transmitted portion D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 is displaced upward (pushed up), and thereby the transmitting member D3190 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

In this embodiment, a protrusion is provided (erected) from the transmitting portion D3173 toward the transmitted portion D3193. However, a protrusion may be provided (erected) from the transmitted portion D3193 toward the transmitted portion D3173. That is, it is sufficient that the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 can be transmitted to the transmitting member D3190 via the transmitting portion D3173 and the transmitted portion D3193.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the rolling member D3170 (main body D3172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body D3172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole is positioned (eccentric) toward the weight D3174 (and transmission part D3173) side rather than the axis D3171. As a result, by utilizing the weight of the weight D3174 (and transmission part D3173) (eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D3171), the rolling member D3170 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (first position) in an unloaded state, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is able to return to the initial position by its own weight (see FIG. 124(a)).

That is, in the rolling member D3170, in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the main body D3172), the main body D3172 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (in a front view, the axis D3171 (rotated clockwise around ), placed at the initial position (first position), and maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D3170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, when a ball rolls on the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the main body D3172 (the opposite side of the axis D3171 from the weight D3174). As a result, the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (when viewed from the front, it is rotated counterclockwise around the axis D3171) and is positioned in the second position.

The first position (initial position) of the rolling member D3170 is determined by the lower surface (surface on the arrow D side) of one longitudinal end side (arrow L side) of the main body D3172 abutting against a stopper portion protruding from the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the main body D3172 against the stopper portion, the downward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D3171) of the main body D3172 is restricted, and the rolling member D3170 is disposed in the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 124(a)).

On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D3170 is determined by the lower surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow D) of the weight portion D3174 abutting against a stopper portion protruding from the intermediate member D140. That is, by the weight portion D3174 abutting against the stopper portion, the upward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D3171) of the main body portion D3172 of the rolling member D3170 is restricted, and the rolling member D3170 is positioned in the second position (see FIG. 124(b)).

When the rolling member D3170 is arranged in the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side, and when the rolling member D3170 is arranged in the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D3170 (main body D3172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131d (eighth passage DRt8).

In this way, the rolling member D3170 rolls the ball by utilizing the downward inclination of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172. The rolling member D3170 is rotatably supported around the axis D3171, and in this embodiment, the angle of downward inclination of the upper surface of the main body D3172 with respect to the horizontal plane when the ball is rolling (when the weight of the ball is being received) is made larger than the angle of downward inclination when the ball is not rolling (when the weight of the ball is not being received and no load is being applied).

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 is dropped to a position near the axis D3171 on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172, and the ball enters the sixth passage DRt6. The upper surface is rolled in a direction in which it is separated from the axis D3171 (a direction away from it).

As a result, in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D3171 (fulcrum) is shortened. , the weight of the weight part D3174 is made dominant, and as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D3172, the distance from the axis D191 (distance between the point of force and the fulcrum) is gradually increased (lengthened), and the weight of the weight part D3174 is set to be dominant. The weight of the portion D174 can be counteracted. As a result, the rolling member D3170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position.

In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position, gradually increasing the amount of opening (the distance between the opposing displacement members D180). This allows, for example, when the second ball reciprocates along the third passage DRt3, to gradually increase the expectation that the second ball will flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing displacement members D180), making the game more interesting.

In addition, even if the distance between the first ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 and the second ball that follows the first ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth passage DRt6, the following ball) is relatively large, it is possible to make it easier for the following second ball to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180).

On the other hand, the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D3170 is away from (moves away from) the axis D171, so that at least when the ball reaches the end of the main body portion D3172 (one end in the longitudinal direction, the end on the side in the direction of arrow L), the rolling member D3170 is positioned in the second position.

That is, in the state immediately before the ball rolls (inflows) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172 to the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, the distance from the axis D191 (the point of force and When the weight of the ball was maximum acting on the main body D3172 (the distance between the ball and the fulcrum), the ball rolled ( When the ball is injected (inflow), the effect of the weight of the ball disappears instantaneously, and only the effect of the weight portion D3174 remains.

Therefore, the rolling member D3170 can be returned from the second position to the initial position (first position) at maximum speed, and the displacement member D180 that was in the open position can be instantly placed in the closed position. This allows for a performance with good tempo. In addition, the player can focus on whether the second ball will enter (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180) in time for the displacement member D180 to be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the open position, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, when a single ball is rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172, the rolling member D3170 is gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position as the ball rolls toward one longitudinal end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the main body D3172, and is configured so that when the ball reaches one longitudinal end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the main body D3172 (at least before the ball rolls (flows into) the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140), the rolling member D3170 is positioned in the second position.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125. In the eighth embodiment, only the rolling member D170 is disposed in the path from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout (the path formed by the sixth path DRt6 and the eighth path DRt8). A rolling member D170 and a second rolling member D4220 are disposed in the path from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout in the embodiment (the passage formed by the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8). Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figures 125(a) and 125(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D4086b in the eleventh embodiment, showing the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D4221.

Note that FIG. 125(a) illustrates a state in which the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, and FIG. 125(b) illustrates a state in which the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 125, the rear member D4130 has a partition wall D4134 erected from its rear surface.

The partition wall D4134, together with the main body D131, the detour member D200, and the second rolling member D4220, defines the eighth passage DRt8. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed opposite the main body D131, and the area defined between them by the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 defines the eighth passage DRt8.

The second rolling member D4220 includes a shaft D4221, a long plate-shaped main body D4222 with the shaft D4221 disposed on one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side), and one longitudinal end side of the main body D4222. It includes a weight part D4224 disposed on the side where the shaft D4221 is disposed, and a transmission part D4223 disposed on the opposite side of the main body part D4222 with the weight part D4224 in between. It is rotatably arranged between the member D200 and the shaft D4221.

Note that the functions of the parts D4221 to D4224 of the second rolling member D4220 are substantially the same as those of the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the eighth embodiment, and only the arrangement is different. Further, in the partition wall D4134 of the back member D4130, a part of the wall portion forming the rolling surface of the ball is omitted compared to the partition wall D134 in the eighth embodiment (main body portion D4222 of the second rolling member D4220 ), but the other configurations are the same.

The shaft D4221 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and is supported by a shaft support portion (not shown) formed on the back member D4130 and the detour member D200. Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) around the shaft D4221, the main body portion D4222 is displaced (raised and lowered) in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The upper surface of the main body D4222 forms the rolling surface for the balls in the eighth passage DRt8, and one longitudinal end (the side where the axis D4221 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is juxtaposed to the rolling portion (the part whose upper surface becomes the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the balls to the opening D131e, and the other longitudinal end (the side opposite the side where the axis D4221 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow R) is arranged downstream of the opening D131d (at a position that can receive (accept) the balls flowing down from the opening D131d).

Whether the main body D4222 is in any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the upper surface of one end of its longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D4221 is arranged, the arrow L direction side) is positioned at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (arrow U direction side) than the upper surface of the rolling part (the part whose upper surface becomes the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the ball into the opening D131e.

The axis D4221 is embedded inside the main body D4222, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is formed up to a position beyond the axis D4221. That is, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D4222 passes above the axis D4221 (the direction of the arrow U), it rolls (flows) into the rolling portion of the partition wall D4134, which rolls the ball into the opening D131e.

The weight portion D4224 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220, and extends from one end of the main body portion D4222 in the longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D4221 is disposed) toward the opposite side to the extension direction of the main body portion D4222 (the side indicated by the arrow L), and has a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

The transmission part D4223 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the transmission member D190, and extends from the extension direction end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the weight part D4224 toward the transmission member D190 (weight part D195). The extension tip side (arrow U direction side) of the transmission part D4223 is disposed below (arrow D direction side) the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190 (disposed in a position overlapping in a top view).

Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D4221 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmission part D4223 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U), the transmission The weight portion D195 of the transmission member D190 is displaced upward (pushed up) by the portion D4223, and thereby the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

In a no-load state where the weight of the ball is not applied to the second rolling member D4220 (main body part D4222) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body part D4222), the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole The position is located (eccentric) closer to the weight portion D4224 (and transmission portion D4223) than the axis D4221. As a result, the second rolling member D4220 uses the weight of the weight portion D4224 (and the transmission portion D4223) (the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D4221) to move the second rolling member D4220 to the initial position (first position) in the no-load state. It is possible to maintain the posture arranged in the position, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position (first position) by its own weight (see Fig. 125(a)). ).

In other words, when the second rolling member D4220 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the main body portion D4222), the main body portion D4222 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D4221 when viewed from the front) and is placed in and maintained in the initial position (first position). This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the second rolling member D4220 and a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the main body D4222 of the second rolling member D4220, the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole moves toward the main body D4222 (with the axis D4221 in between) due to the weight of the ball. (on the opposite side to the weight portion D4224) (eccentrically). As a result, the second rolling member D4220 is disposed at the second position with the main body D4222 being displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D4221 when viewed from the front). Ru.

Note that the first position (initial position) of the second rolling member D4220 is such that the end surface (surface on the arrow L direction side) of one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side) of the main body portion D4222 is the second rolling member D4220. The second position is defined by the lower surface (the surface on the arrow D direction side) of the other longitudinal end side (the arrow R direction side) of the main body portion D4222 coming into contact with the partition wall D4134.

When the second rolling member D4220 is disposed at the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is tilted downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction to the one end in the longitudinal direction, and the second rolling member D4220 is in the second position. Even in the state where the main body portion D4222 is disposed, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D4222 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side to the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the second rolling member D4220 (main body portion D4222) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131e.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the rolling member D170 is disposed in the sixth passage DRt6, and the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the eighth passage DRt8 downstream of the sixth passage DRt6. be done. Therefore, compared to the eighth embodiment, even if the length of the path (passage, that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout) is the same, the second rolling member D4220 is not provided. As a result, the area where the weight of the ball can be used can be secured (lengthened). As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) the state in which the displacement member D180 is displaced to the open position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for a ball to enter the ball).

Here, the longitudinal dimension (length of the upper surface (rolling surface)) of the first member (rolling member D170 (main body part D172)) is extended to secure (lengthen) a section where the weight of the ball can be used. With this configuration, it is difficult to arrange the rolling member D170 whose longitudinal dimension is extended in the limited space (width direction (arrow LR direction) dimension) of the lower frame D86b. By biasing the installation position of the pair of displacement members D180 to one side in the width direction (arrow L direction side) of the lower frame D86b, the longitudinal dimension (upper surface (rolling surface)) of the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) Although it is possible to extend the length of the moving surface), there is a limit to the length that can be extended. Further, the third passage DRt3 cannot be shaped to allow the ball to move back and forth, which reduces the interest of the game.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, multiple members (in this embodiment, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are arranged to ensure (lengthen) the section in which the weight of the ball can be used, so the limited space of the lower frame D4086b can be effectively utilized to ensure (lengthen) a sufficient section in which the weight of the ball can be used. In addition, the third passage DRt3 can be shaped to allow the ball to move back and forth, which increases the excitement of the game.

In other words, the second rolling member D4220 is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction) of the rolling member D170, and these are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), so that the thickness of the lower frame D4086b in the front-to-rear direction, which is dead space, can be effectively utilized, and the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 can ensure (lengthen) a section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized.

In addition, in this way, the pair of displacement members D180 can be arranged at the center of the width direction (arrow LR) of the lower frame D4086b while securing (lengthening) the section where the weight of the ball can be used. The DRt3 can be shaped so that the ball can reciprocate (a shape that slopes downward toward the center in the width direction), making the game more interesting.

In a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is disposed in the path (passage, that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), the displacement occurs while one ball passes through the path. Although the predetermined displacement of the member D180 (displacement mode in which it is placed from the closed position to the open position due to the weight of the ball and returned to the closed position after the ball passes) is formed only once, multiple members (rolling If the member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are disposed in a path (passage), the above-mentioned predetermined displacement of the displacement member D180 is performed multiple times (mainly) while one ball passes through the path. In the embodiment, it can be formed twice). By repeatedly opening and closing the displacement member D180, the player who expects the ball to flow into the sixth passage DRt6 can see the displacement state of the displacement member D180 and the other balls on the third passage DRt3. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by focusing on the relationship between

In addition, in a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is arranged in a path (passage, i.e., the section from a pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), even if multiple (two or more) balls pass through the path, the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 is only one (i.e., the displacement mode in which the displacement member D180 is arranged from the closed position to the open position due to the weight of the ball and returns to the closed position after the ball passes). However, if multiple members (rolling member D170 and second rolling member D4220) are arranged in the path (passage), the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 that can be formed while multiple balls pass through the path can be multiple. In other words, the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 can be diversified by combining the timing at which the weight of the ball acts on one and the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 (the timing at which the ball rolls). As a result, it is possible to perform a surprising performance.

The transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 is located above the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D190 (in the direction of arrow U), and when the weight of the ball acts on the main body portion D172, the transmitted portion D193 is Displace it downward (push it down). The transmission portion D4223 of the second rolling member D4220 is located below the weight portion D195 of the transmission member D190 (in the direction of arrow D), and when the weight of the ball acts on the main body portion D4222, the weight portion D195 is Displace it upward (push it up).

That is, when the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 move due to the weight of the ball to displace (rotate) the transmission member D190, the direction of displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 is the same, and the movements of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are not opposed. Similarly, when one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 moves to return to the initial position (displaced (rotated) by the weight of the weight parts D174, D4224 without the weight of the ball acting), regardless of the state of the movement of the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, the movement of one is not opposed to the movement of the other (both the movement of one and the movement of the other are allowed).

In this way, the displacement (rotation) when the weight of the balls of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 is applied can be individually and independently transmitted to the transmission member D190, and the rolling member D170 and the When the action of the weight of the ball of the second rolling member D4220 is released, the displacement (rotation) can be performed individually and independently.

Therefore, when multiple balls pass through the path (passage, i.e., the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), depending on the rolling positions of the balls, the transmission member D190 can be displaced (rotated) due to the movement of only one or the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, or the transmission member D190 can be displaced (rotated) due to the movement of both the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, and by combining these, the manner in which the displacement member D180 is displaced can be diversified.

For example, if the weight of a ball is applied to either the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 while the displacement member D180 is being displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, the movement of either of them can displace the displacement member D180 toward the open position while it is being displaced toward the closed position.

Further, for example, when the weight of the ball is applied to one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the displacement member D180 is being displaced (rotated) toward the open position by the operation of one of them, the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 may be rotated. When the weight of the ball is applied to the other of the moving member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the effect of the weight of the ball is greater on the other one (the force that displaces the displacement member D180 is stronger), the operation of the other Accordingly, the displacement member D180 can be displaced to the open position at a faster displacement speed.

In addition, according to this embodiment, there is no need to provide a separate member (transmission means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 and a separate member (transmission means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 can be used as such a member (transmission means). This reduces the number of parts and simplifies the structure. As a result, improved operational reliability and reduced product costs can be achieved.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 126 is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame D5086b in the twelfth embodiment, showing a state with the detour member D200 removed. Note that FIG. 126(a) shows a state in which the rolling member D170 is placed at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed at the closed position.

As shown in FIG. 126, grooves D5194L and D194R are formed in the main body D5194, and the connecting pins D213 of the shaft support member D210 are slidably inserted into these grooves D5194L and D194R.

Note that the transmission member D5190 is different from the transmission member D190 in the eighth embodiment only in the shape of the groove D194L, and the other configurations are the same.

The groove D5194L extends in an arcuate shape having a center on the axis D191 side when viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow FB direction), and the width of the groove is larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213. Set. The width dimension of the groove is constant along the extending direction of the groove D5194L.

In detail, the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D5194L, both the inner wall surface on the side farther from the axis D191 and the inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191, have a shape along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a shape obtained by dividing a circle centered on the axis D191 at a specified central angle).

Therefore, the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon (does not come into contact with) both of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D5194L, and the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon (does not come into contact with) both of the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D5194L, and is (the end in the direction of arrow U) is acted upon (displaced upward or downward (pushed down or pushed down) by the inner wall surface at the extending end on the lower or upper side.

As a result, according to the present embodiment, not only when displacing the displacing member D180 from the closed position to the open position, but also when displacing the displacing member D180 from the open position to the closed position, the operation mode (displacement mode) of the pair of displacing members D180 ) can be made different from each other (a state can be created in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated)).

Specifically, when the displacement member D180 is in the open position, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin D213 and the lower extension end of the groove D5194L (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow D, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 121).

When the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the second position to the initial position (first position) is started, and accordingly the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D5190 to the initial position is started, the groove D194R The connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is displaced upward (pushed up) by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R, and thereby the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) Displacement (rotation) from the open position is started.

On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L is not displaced upward until it reaches the lower extending end of the groove D5194L (the extending end in the direction of arrow D, the inner wall surface). (not pushed up), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the open position.

When the transmission member D5190 is further displaced (rotated) in accordance with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member from the second position, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R continues to be displaced (pushed up) upward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R, thereby continuing the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position to the closed position.

On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L reaches the lower extension end of the groove D5194L (the end on the direction of arrow D, the inner wall surface), it is displaced (pushed up) upward by the lower extension end (inner wall surface), thereby starting the displacement of the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position.

After that, both connecting pins D213 are displaced (pushed up) upward, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and when the transmission member D190 reaches the initial position, the pair of displacement members D180 are positioned in the closed position (see FIG. 119).

In this way, in this embodiment, not only the timing at which the pair of displacement members D180 start to displace (rotate) from the closed position to the open position, but also the timing at which they start to displace (rotate) from the open position to the closed position can be made different (one delayed relative to the other). This allows for variation in the manner in which the displacement members D180 are displaced to the closed position, making the game more interesting for players who expect the displacement members D180 to be in an open state (i.e., a state in which it is easy for balls to flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6).

Next, the lower frame D6086b in the 13th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 127 to 130.

In the eighth embodiment, all balls that flow into (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 are guided to the eighth passage DRt8 (outlet DOPout). In the thirteenth embodiment, however, the ninth passage DRt9 is connected to the sixth passage DRt6, and balls that flow into (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 are guided to either the eighth passage DRt8 (outlet DOPout) or the ninth passage DRt9 (outlet DOP6out). The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D6086b in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 128 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D6086b. FIG. 129 is a front view of the lower frame D6086b, and FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame D6086b.

Note that FIG. 130(a) corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 115, and FIG. 130(b) corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119.

As shown in Figures 127 to 130, the lower frame D6086b in the 13th embodiment is formed with a ninth passage DRt9 that is connected to the middle of the sixth passage DRt6, and an outlet DOP6out that is formed as an opening through which balls guided to the ninth passage DRt9 flow out into the play area.

That is, a ball that flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 flows into (enters) the eighth passage DRt8, flows down the eighth passage DRt8, and then flows out from the outlet DOPout into the playing area, while a ball that flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and flows into (enters) the ninth passage DRt8 midway along the sixth passage DRt6 flows down the ninth passage DRt9, and then flows out from the outlet DOP6out into the playing area.

Here, the outlet DOPout, which is the outlet of the eighth passage DRt8 (the opening through which the balls flow out to the gaming area), is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 110). . Therefore, the ball that has flown down from the sixth passage DRt6 to the eighth passage DRt8 is likely to win the first prize opening 64 (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 is high).

On the other hand, the outlet DOP6out, which is the outlet of the 9th passage DRt9 (the opening that lets the balls out into the play area), is positioned horizontally to one side of the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110) (formed (positioned) in a position that does not overlap with the first winning opening 64 vertically downward). Therefore, balls that flow down from the 6th passage DRt6 to the 9th passage DRt9 are less likely to win the first winning opening 64 (there is a lower probability of the ball winning the first winning opening 64 than the balls that flow down to the above-mentioned 8th passage DRt8).

In this way, in the lower frame D6086b of this embodiment, when a ball reciprocating along the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction is diverted to the sixth passage DRt6, the ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 does not flow down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, but reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, making it easier for the ball to win the first winning hole 64 (in this embodiment, the ball is almost guaranteed to win the first winning hole 64). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a win), the player can expect the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without flowing down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, which increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if the ball flows down to the end of the sixth passage DRt6, the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 is maximized, making it easier to maintain the state in which the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position (making it easier for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6). On the other hand, if a ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 flows down to the ninth passage DRt9 midway, the weight of the ball cannot be acted on the rolling member D170, and the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the closed position (making it harder for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 remain displaced (rotated) to the open position, making it easier for the ball to be diverted from the third passage DRt3 to the sixth passage DRt6, and the player can expect the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without flowing down the ninth passage DRt9 along the way, which also increases the interest of the game.

The front member D6110 includes an opening DOP6out formed in the front part D111, and a plate-shaped bottom part D6112 that stands up from the back side of the front part D111, and the intermediate member D6140 stands up from the front side of the main body part D141. The main body portion D141 includes a bottom portion D144 and an opening D6148 formed in the main body portion D141.

The bottom surface portion D6112 is formed continuously over the entire length of the front surface portion D111, and the bottom surface portion D6144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body portion D141 in a region excluding the opening D141f. The erected tip (on the side in the direction of arrow B) and the erected tip (on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the bottom portion D6144 are in contact over the entire area. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering from the bottom side of the lower frame D6086b.

A part of the bottom surface portions D6112, D6144 (the part located below the opening D6148 in the intermediate member D6140) forms the rolling surface of the ninth passage DRt9. The part forming the rolling surface is formed with a predetermined distance (a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere) between it and the bottom surface of the first interposed member D150.

Further, the portions of the bottom portions D6112 and D6144 that form the above-mentioned rolling surfaces are formed to be inclined downward toward approximately the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and the height position in the vertical direction is Outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a are recessed in the lowest portion (approximately the central portion in the longitudinal direction).

The outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a are parts for allowing the balls guided by the bottom surfaces D6112 and D6144 (portions forming rolling surfaces) to flow out to the outflow port DOP6out, and are concave surfaces that slope downward toward the outflow port DOP6out. It is formed as one piece. That is, the opening DOP6out is formed at a position corresponding to the outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a (a position where the sphere can flow out).

The opening D6148 of the intermediate member D6140 serves as an opening (hole) for receiving the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 (sixth passage DRt6) into the ninth passage DRt9, and extends the main body part D141 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction). It is formed through the That is, the opening 6148 is formed in one side wall of a pair of side walls that partition the sixth passage DRt6, and the upstream end of the ninth passage DRt9 is connected to the middle of the sixth passage DRt6 through the opening 6148. Ru.

The dimension of the opening D6148 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170 is set to a size that allows multiple balls (three balls in this embodiment) to pass through at the same time. The lower edge of the opening D6148 is formed at a position lower (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling member D170 that is placed in the second position (the position pushed down to the bottom) by the weight of the ball (see FIG. 130(a)), and the upper edge of the opening D6148 is formed at a position that is spaced apart from the upper surface of the rolling member D170 that is placed in the initial position (the first position, the position returned to the top) without the weight of the ball acting thereon, with a distance greater than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball can pass through the opening D6148 regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170.

The side edge (hereinafter referred to as the "upstream side edge") located on the upstream side (arrow R direction side, right side in Figure 130(a)) of the sixth passage DRt6 of the opening D6148 is disposed downstream (arrow L direction side, left side in Figure 130(a)) of the edge portion on the upstream side (arrow R direction side, right side in Figure 130(a)) of the sixth passage DRt6 of the rolling member D170 in a front view.

In this embodiment, the upstream side edge of the opening D6148 is arranged at a position (downstream position) that does not overlap in the vertical direction with the opposing space at the base of the pair of displacement members D180. That is, the base of the displacement member D180 located on the downstream side (arrow L direction side, left side in FIG. 130(a)) in the sixth passage DRt6 of the pair of displacement members D180 (opposed to the displacement member D180 located on the upstream side) It is located on the downstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 by a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere) than the opposite surface).

This prevents a ball that has flowed (entered) between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 and fallen into the sixth passage DRt6 from immediately flowing (entering) into the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148, and allows the ball to roll on the rolling members D170. Therefore, the weight of the ball can be applied to the rolling members D170 to displace (rotate) the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position, and the player can be made to pay attention to whether the ball will reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6, increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, a protrusion D141g is provided on the main body D141 to protrude from the upstream side edge of the opening D6148 at a position on the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 (the side in the direction of arrow R, the right side in FIG. 130(b)). Ru. Therefore, when the ball that enters (enters) between the opposing sides of the pair of displacement members D180 and falls into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls on the rolling member D170 along its longitudinal direction, the action of the protrusion D141g (contact) delays the rolling of the ball (reduces the speed), making it easier for the player to grasp the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, and the action (contact) of the protrusion D141g allows the ball to The player can expect the ball to move to the side opposite to the opening D6148 (to the side of the main body D131) and reach the end of the sixth path DRt6. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The side edge (hereinafter referred to as the "downstream side edge") located on the downstream side (the arrow L direction side, the left side in FIG. 130(a)) of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6 is the side edge of the rolling member D170 when viewed from the front. It is disposed on the upstream side (on the arrow R direction, on the right side in FIG. 130(a)) of the edge (axis D171) on the downstream side (on the arrow L direction, on the left side in FIG. 130(a)) in the sixth passage DRt6.

In this embodiment, the downstream edge of opening D6148 is disposed at a position (upstream position) that does not overlap with opening D131d in a front view. That is, it is located upstream in the sixth passage DRt6 by a predetermined distance (approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment) from the upstream edge of opening D131d in the sixth passage DRt6 (the side in the direction of arrow R, the right side in Figure 130(a)).

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing (entering) into the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148 even if the ball has reached the end of the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, if the ball passes the downstream edge of the opening D6148, the player can feel secure that the ball will be sure to flow (enter) into the eighth passage DRt8. This allows the player to keep a close eye on the ball's trajectory, increasing the player's interest in the game.

However, the downstream edge of opening D6148 may be positioned so that it overlaps with opening D131d in a front view (a position overlapping with or downstream from the downstream edge of opening D131d). In this case, even after the ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, it is not clear whether the ball will enter (enter) the eighth passage DRt8 or the ninth passage DRt9. This allows the player to keep an eye on the direction of the ball, increasing the fun of the game.

Further, as described above, the protrusions D131f and D141g are arranged in a staggered manner, and the protrusion D131f is provided to protrude from the main body D131 on the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 than the upstream side edge of the opening D6148. . Therefore, when the ball that has fallen into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls on the rolling member D170, the action (contact) of the protrusion D131f moves the ball toward the opening D6148 side (the main body D141 side) (rolling direction). change). That is, the ball subjected to the action of the protrusion D131f is located upstream in the sixth passage DRt6 (on the arrow R direction side, on the right side in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b)) than the upstream side edge of the opening 6148. The player is asked whether the ball collides with (contacts) the main body D141 and is bounced away from the opening D6148, or whether the ball flows (enters) into the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148. It is possible to attract attention and increase the interest of the game.

Further, a plurality of protrusions D131f of the main body portion D131 are arranged between the upstream side edge and the downstream side edge of the opening D6148 at overlapping positions in a front view (see FIG. 130(a)). Thereby, the protrusion D131f acts on (contacts) the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, and a change can be imparted to the rolling direction of the ball (a component of the rolling direction toward the opening D6148). This creates a possibility that the ball will flow into the ninth passageway DRt9 through the opening D6148 due to the contact with the protrusion D131f, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is placed in a posture tilted by about 1 to 2 degrees with respect to the vertical direction (a so-called "lying" posture, that is, with the top surface facing the back side ( (in the direction of arrow B). In this case, in this embodiment, the opening D6148 is located in a wall portion (main body portion D141) located on the front side (front side of the pachinko machine 10, side in the direction of arrow F) among the wall portions that partition the sixth passageway DRt6. An opening is formed.

As a result, when a ball rolls along the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170, the "laying" of the pachinko machine 10 makes it easier for the ball to pass through the main body D131 side, and as a result, the protrusion D131f can be easily applied to the ball. On the other hand, the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is inclined upward from the main body D131 side toward the opening D6148 side due to the "laying" of the pachinko machine 10, so the ball moved toward the opening D6148 by the action of the protrusion D131f can be moved toward the main body D131 side by the downward inclination of the rolling surface (upper surface).

As a result, when the protrusion D131f acts on (contacts) the ball relatively strongly, the ball flows (enters) into the ninth passage DRt9 via the opening D6148, while the protrusion When D131f acts (contacts) relatively weakly, the ball heading toward the opening D6148 can be returned to the main body D131 side by the downward slope of the rolling surface (upper surface). Therefore, depending on the mode of action of the protrusion D131f on the ball (the speed of the ball when making contact, the angle of approach of the ball, etc.), the rolling mode of the ball can be changed, and the interest of the game can be increased. .

Moreover, by utilizing the "laying down" of the pachinko machine 10 in this way, each member of the lower frame D6086b can be configured in a mutually orthogonal relationship. That is, the main body portion D131 and the main body portion D141 are arranged in parallel, and the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is orthogonal to the main body portions D131, D141 (that is, the axis D171 is arranged in parallel with the main body portion D131, D141). It can be configured such that it is pivoted in a posture orthogonal to D141. Therefore, there is no need to place only some of these members in an inclined position with respect to other members, or to support the shaft D171 in an inclined position, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to improve the moldability and assemblability of each part. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

Next, the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

131(a) to 131(c) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D7086b in the fourteenth embodiment, in which the rolling member D170 is located between the initial position (first position) and the second position. A transition state is illustrated when the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position.

Note that FIGS. 131(a) to 131(c) illustrate a state in which the detour member D200 is removed. Further, FIG. 126(a) shows a state in which the rolling member D170 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position (see FIG. 119), and FIG. 131(c) shows This corresponds to a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (see FIG. 121). FIG. 131(b) shows that the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)), and the displacement member D180 is This corresponds to a state in the middle of displacement (see FIG. 120) when being displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position).

As shown in Figures 131(a) to 131(c), the transmission member D7190 in the 14th embodiment includes a display unit D7197 that is disposed on the outer edge of the main body D194 and extends from the outer edge of the main body D194 in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the axis D191. In detail, the display unit D7197 extends upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the longitudinal end of the main body D194, which is the end opposite the axis D191.

Here, the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the side wall D132 of the back member D130 and the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the side wall D142 of the intermediate member D140 are defined in the vertical direction (edge in the direction of arrow U). The positions (height positions) in the UD direction) are substantially the same.

As shown in FIG. 131(a), when the rolling member D170 is placed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 119), the longitudinal end (end opposite the axis D191) of the main body D194 is positioned at the uppermost position (arrow U direction side) as the transmission member D7190 is displaced (rotated). As a result, the extended tip side (part) of the display unit D7197 protrudes (is positioned) above the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130, and the protruding portion is visible to the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131(c), when the rolling member D170 is placed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position (see FIG. 121), the longitudinal end of the main body D194 (the end opposite the axis D191) is placed at the lowest position (arrow D direction side) due to the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D7190. As a result, the entire display unit D7197 is immersed (placed) below the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130 (the entire display unit D7197 is placed on the back side of the side wall portion D132). Therefore, the player cannot directly see the display unit D7197. However, it is possible to see the display unit D7197 through the intermediate member D140 and the back member D130.

In this way, the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension) by which the extension tip side (part) of display portion D7197 protrudes from the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of back member D130 (side wall portion D132) is as shown in FIG. As shown in (a), the displacement member D180 is at its maximum in the closed position (see FIG. 119). As shown in FIG. 131(b), as the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the amount of protrusion described above (visible to the player) The size of the portion is gradually reduced, and becomes the minimum (non-protruding and invisible to the player) when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (see FIG. 121).

Therefore, the player can visually check whether the extended tip side (part) of the display portion D7197 protrudes above the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the back member D130 (side wall portion D132). By doing so, the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (whether it is in the open position or the closed position) can be grasped. Furthermore, by visually checking the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension), it is possible to grasp the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (which position between the open position and the closed position).

Next, the lower frame D8086b in the 15th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 132 to 134.

In the 13th embodiment, the protrusion amount (protrusion dimension) of the protrusion D131f toward the rolling member D170 is constant regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. However, in the 15th embodiment, the protrusion amount (protrusion dimension) of the protrusion D131f toward the rolling member D8170 changes (increases or decreases) depending on the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Here, the lower frame D8086b in the fifteenth embodiment has other configurations (e.g. , shape and number of devices) are the configuration of D6086b of the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, description of the other components except for the second protrusion D131fa and the rolling member D6087 will be omitted.

Figures 132(a) and 132(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D8086b in the fifteenth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 115. Note that Figure 132(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (see Figure 119), while Figure 132(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (see Figure 121).

133(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame D8086b taken along the line CXXXIIIa-CXXXIIIa in FIG. 132(a), and FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of frame D8086b. FIG. 134 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119.

As shown in FIGS. 132 to 134, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) protrusions D131f provided on the back member D8130 have rolling contact from predetermined (two in this embodiment) protrusions D131f. A second protrusion D131fa is provided to protrude toward the member D8170. In the present embodiment, the (predetermined) protrusion D131f from which the second protrusion D131fa protrudes is located on the downstream side (arrow There are two protrusions D131f located on the L direction side).

The body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 has a recess formed on the side (edge) facing the back member D8130, which is recessed in the protruding direction of the protrusion D131f (the direction in which the protrusion D131f is received) when viewed from above (see FIG. 134). The recesses are arranged at multiple locations (four locations in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (approximately equal intervals in this embodiment) along the longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D8170. That is, the recesses are formed (recessed) at positions facing the protrusions D131f.

In this embodiment, the shape of the recess when viewed from above is curved like an arc. However, it may be rectangular. In other words, the shape is not limited as long as it is large enough not to interfere with the second protrusion D131fa when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated).

The second protrusion D131fa protrudes from the front surface (surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the protrusion D131f toward the recess of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) described above, and the protruding tip side (part) of the second protrusion D131fa is received in the recess of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) described above (positioned in the internal space of the recess) when viewed from above (see FIG. 134). That is, when viewed from above, part of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) is formed by the second protrusion D131fa.

Note that the protruding tip of the second protrusion D131fa is curved to have an arcuate cross section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the second protrusion D131fa may be approximately rectangular. Further, the direction in which the second protrusion D131fa protrudes is the same as the direction in which the second protrusion D131f protrudes. However, the protrusion direction of the second protrusion D131fa may be a different direction (inclination direction) from the protrusion direction of the protrusion D131f.

The height position (position in the direction of arrows U-D) of the second protrusion D131fa is set so that when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the initial position (first position), the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa is substantially the same as or slightly lower than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 133(a)), and when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position, the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa is higher than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 133(b)).

In other words, when the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the initial position (first position), the side of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6, the surface on the right side in Figures 132(a) and 132(b)) is disposed at a position (in the direction of arrow D) lower than the upper surface of the main body part D172 (the rolling surface of the ball), so that the side of the second protrusion D131fa does not come into contact with (does not act on) the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling on the upper surface of the main body part D172).

On the other hand, when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) a predetermined amount from the initial position (first position) toward the second position, at least a portion of the side of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6, the surface on the right side in Figures 132(a) and 132(b)) is positioned at a higher position (in the direction of arrow U) than the upper surface (the rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172, and the side of the second protrusion D131fa can be brought into contact (act on) the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling on the upper surface of the main body part D172).

Note that when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position, the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa that is placed at a higher position (on the arrow U direction side) than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body portion D172 The area of is assumed to be the maximum. Therefore, in this case, even if the ball rolls (moves in the sixth passage DRt6) while bouncing on the rolling surface, the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa is brought into contact with (acts on) the ball. It's easy to do.

The second protrusion D131fa is formed on the opposite side of the opening D6148 with the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) in between. That is, the second protrusion D131fa is provided to protrude toward the opening D6148. When the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 receives an action from the second protrusion D131fa (when it comes into contact with the second protrusion D131fa), the ball rolls due to the reaction of the action (contact). The ball is rolled into the opening D6148 (ninth passage DRt9) and easily flows into (enters into) the opening D6148 (ninth passage DRt9). That is, it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the end of the sixth path DRt6.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body portion D172), as described above, the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 as a whole is located (eccentric) toward the weight portion D8174 side of the axis D171, and the rolling member D8170 is maintained (or returned) to the initial position (first position). On the other hand, in a state in which a ball rolls on the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170 and the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 as a whole including the ball is located (eccentric) toward the main body portion D172 side (the opposite side of the axis D171 from the weight portion D8174), the main body portion D172 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of the arrow D) (disposed in the second position).

In this case, in the present embodiment, when one ball is located at position DP (see FIG. 132) of main body portion D172 (state where the weight of one ball acts on position DP), the rotation including that ball is The weight of the weight portion D8174 is set so that the center of gravity of the entire moving member D8170 is located on the axis D171.

In other words, assuming a static state in which the balls are not rolling, when one ball is located upstream of position DP of the main body D172 (opposite axis D171) (the weight of one ball acts on position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) toward the second position, when one ball is located at position DP of the main body D172 (the weight of the ball acts), the rolling member D8170 is balanced around axis D171 (i.e., the force that displaces (rotates) the rolling member D8170 is not formed), and when one ball is located downstream of position DP of the main body D172 (on the axis D171 side) (the weight of one ball acts on position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position.

According to the rolling member D8170 configured in this way, one ball from the third passage DRt3 is placed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) at the initial position (first position). When the ball is flown down, the weight of the ball (and the momentum of the fall) causes the main body portion D172 to be displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D), and the rolling member D8170 is disposed at the second position.

When the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172 toward the downstream side (position DP), the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball gradually approaches the axis D171, so that the main body D172 is gradually displaced (rotated) upward (in the direction of arrow U), and rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position.

When the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 reaches the position DP, the rolling member D8170 moves in the direction toward the first position due to the influence of the inertial force accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 up to that point. When the displacement (rotation) continues and the ball exceeds the position DP, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball is eccentrically moved toward the weight portion D8174, so that the rolling member D8170 moves toward the first position. Displacement (rotation) in the direction is accelerated.

In this embodiment, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes position DP, the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the second position before it reaches the second protrusion D131fa located upstream (in the direction of arrow R). In other words, when only one ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa does not act on (contact) the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172.

However, if the speed (rolling speed) of the ball heading downstream is faster than the average speed due to factors such as the position and direction of the ball's flow from the third passage DRt3, or a collision with the displacement member D180 while flowing, the ball rolling on the top surface of the main body D172 may reach the second protrusion D131fa on the upstream (or downstream) side before the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the second position, and the ball may be acted upon by the second protrusion D131fa. In other words, even when only one ball is rolling, it is possible to create a situation in which the action of the second protrusion D131fa can be applied to the ball, drawing the player's attention to the effects of the above-mentioned factors and increasing the fun of the game.

In this embodiment, the distance between the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (the side in the direction of arrow R) and position DP is set to approximately twice the diameter of the ball. However, this distance can be set arbitrarily. When only one ball is rolling, shortening the above-mentioned distance makes it easier to impart the effect of the second protrusion D131fa to the ball, while lengthening the above-mentioned distance makes it more difficult to impart the effect of the second protrusion D131fa to the ball.

In this embodiment, when two balls are positioned on the main body D172 (when the weights of the two balls are acting), the weight of the weight D8174 is set so that the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the balls is eccentric to the main body D172 side from the axis D171, regardless of the respective positions of the two balls (for example, even if both balls are positioned downstream of position DP (between the axis D171 and position DP)).

Therefore, for example, even if only one ball is rolling on the main body D172 and the rolling position of the ball has passed position DP, and the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the initial position (first position) (i.e., the second protrusion D131fa is not acting (contacting) the ball, and the ball is expected to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6), when another ball flows (enters) from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6 (two balls are positioned on the upper surface of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172)), the rolling member D8170 is positioned in the second position (or at least displaced (rotated) toward the second position), and a state in which the second protrusion D131fa can act (contact) on the ball (a state in which the ball is likely to flow (enter) the ninth passage DRt9) can be created.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if only one ball (ball rolling on the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172)) enters the sixth passage DRt6, the ball is given a second bump. By making it difficult for the part D131fa to act (contact), it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 (allowing it to enter the first prize opening 64), while the first ball is rolled. In this state, when the second ball further flows down (enters the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa acts on (contacts) the first ball, and the second ball is brought into contact with the end of the sixth passage DRt6. 1 ball can be made difficult to reach.

That is, since the ball that has reached the end of the sixth path DRt6 is entered into the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 110) via the eighth path DRt8, the player can see that the ball is on the rolling member D8170. If it does not exist, it is expected that the ball will flow from the third path DRt3 to the sixth path DRt6. On the other hand, after the first ball flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the next ball ( It is expected that the second ball) will not further flow (enter the ball) into the sixth path DRt6. In this way, instead of always expecting balls to enter the sixth passageway DRt6, the expected situation is changed according to the number of balls entering the sixth passageway DRt6, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

In particular, in this embodiment, as the first ball approaches the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, and the displacement member D180 is moved to the open position. is gradually displaced (rotated) from to the closed position. When the first ball passes the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is placed in the first position and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position.

That is, as the first ball approaches the second protrusion D131fa, the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and the second ball flows from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6 ( Entering the ball) can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the first ball will reach the end of the sixth path DRt6.

Next, the center frame E86 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 147.

Figure 135 is a front view of the game board E13 in the 16th embodiment. As shown in Figure 135, the center frame E86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 7) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame E86a and a lower frame E86b.

The upper frame E86a is disposed along the upper side (upper side in FIG. 135) and the left and right (left and right side in FIG. 135) inner edges of the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame E86b is arranged along the inner edges of the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60. 60 along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 135) of the window portion 60a. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame E86a and the lower frame E86b.

The upper frame E86a is configured by omitting a portion of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (the portion arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 135) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, i.e., the portion where the lower frame E86b is arranged), and the remaining portions excluding the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

Next, the lower frame E86b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137. FIG. 136 is a front perspective view of the lower frame E86b, and FIG. 137 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame E86b. Note that in FIGS. 136 and 137, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame E86b to the base plate 60 are omitted. The same applies to FIGS. 138 to 156.

As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the lower frame E86b includes a pair of receiving ports EOPin formed as openings capable of receiving balls, and a pair of first passages ERt1 communicating with the pair of receiving ports EOPin. a pair of second passages ERt2 through which the balls guided through the pair of first passages ERt1 flow down; a pair of third passages ERt3 through which the balls guided through the pair of second passages ERt2 flow down; The balls guided to the pair of third passages ERt3 are sorted and flowed down by a projection E151 formed in a distribution passage E150, which will be described later, into a fourth passage ERt4, a fifth passage ERt5, a sixth passage ERt6, A seventh passage ERt7 is formed through which the ball guided through the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 is guided to the fourth passage ERt4, and an opening through which the ball guided through the fourth passage ERt4 flows out to the game area. An outlet EOPout is formed.

The pair of reception ports EOPin, the first passage ERt1, the second passage ERt2, and the third passage ERt3 are line (plane) symmetrical (left-right symmetrical in FIG. 135) with respect to the center in the width direction of the game board E13 (left-right direction in FIG. ) are formed respectively.

Furthermore, a pair of upper frame passages ERt0 are provided in the upper frame E86a (see FIG. 135). The upper frame passage ERt0 is a passage for guiding balls flowing down the game area, and the receiving port EOPin of the lower frame E86b is communicated with the downstream end of the upper frame passage ERt0.

That is, the ball that has flown (entered) from the gaming area into the upper frame passage ERt0 flows (entered) from the upper frame passage ERt0 into the first passage ERt1 of the lower frame E86b via the receiving port EOPin.

A sorting passage E150 operated by a drive motor E191 is provided in the lower frame E86b, and the balls come into contact with a protrusion E151 formed on the sorting passage E150, changing (altering) their flow direction, and are sorted from the third passage ERt3 to either the fourth passage ERt4, the fifth passage ERt5, or the sixth passage ERt6.

Here, the outlet EOPout, which is the outlet of the fourth passage ERt4 (the opening that allows the balls to flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 135). Therefore, balls that are distributed to the fourth passage ERt4 are more likely to win at the first winning opening 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning opening 64).

In addition, balls that are diverted to the seventh passage ERt7 are guided to the fourth passage ERt4, making it easier for them to enter the first winning hole 64.

The sixth passage ERt6 also has a concave surface formed with a downward slope toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) in order to guide the ball guided through the sixth passage ERt6 to the seventh passage ERt7. A first outflow surface E141a is formed (arranged) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the seventh passage ERt7. Therefore, the ball guided to the first outflow surface E141a of the sixth passage ERt6 easily enters the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, the fifth passage ERt5 is formed to be inclined downward toward the sixth passage ERt6 side (arrow F direction side), and is formed on the back side of the boundary between the fifth passage ERt5 and the seventh passage ERt7 (arrow B direction side). A pair of standing wall portions E135c are respectively provided. Therefore, the balls distributed to the fifth passage ERt5 are more easily guided to the sixth passage ERt6 than to the seventh passage ERt7.

In the sixth passage ERt6, the second outflow surface E141b is formed (arranged) as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F, the playing area side) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board E13 (left and right direction in Figure 135) relative to the first outflow surface E141a.

Incidentally, undulations are formed in the sixth passage ERt6, a second outflow surface E141b is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a first outflow surface E141a is formed at the top of the undulation. Therefore, the balls distributed to the sixth passage ERt6 are more likely to flow out from the second outflow surface E141b to the gaming area than from the first outflow surface E141a to the seventh path ERt7.

That is, the balls distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 have a high probability of flowing out to the gaming area, and as a result, it is difficult to enter the first prize opening 64 (the balls distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 The probability of winning the first prize opening 64 is lower than that of the ball distributed from ERt3 to the fourth passage ERt4).

In this way, the lower frame E86b in this embodiment is configured such that when a ball is distributed from the fourth passage ERt4 to the sixth passage ERt6 by abutting the protrusion E151 formed in the distribution passage E150, , the balls distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fourth passage ERt4 can easily enter the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 135) (in this embodiment, the balls are almost certainly placed in the first prize opening 64) On the other hand, the balls distributed from the third passage ERt3 to the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6 move through the seventh passage ERt7 (and the fourth passage ERt4 formed downstream of the seventh passage ERt7). Therefore, it becomes difficult to enter the first winning slot 64. Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball will win in the first prize opening 64 (to ensure that the ball wins), the player is made to expect that the ball guided through the third passage ERt3 will be distributed to the fourth passage ERt4, and the game can increase interest.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame E86b will be described with reference to Figures 136 to 137 as well as Figures 138 to 143.

FIG. 138 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame E86b, and FIG. 139 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame E86b. FIG. 140 is a top view of the lower frame E86b, FIG. 141 is a front view of the lower frame E86b, and FIG. 142 is a rear view of the lower frame E86b. 143(a) is a side view of the lower frame E86b as seen in the direction of arrow CXLIIIa in FIG. 141, and FIG. 143(b) is a side view of the lower frame E86b as seen in the direction of arrow CXLIIIb in FIG. FIG. 143(c) is a sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along the line CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc in FIG. 141.

As shown in Figures 136 to 143, the lower frame E86b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E130 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 disposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E130, a distribution passage E150, a central passage E160, and a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 disposed on the base member E130, a cover member E180 disposed at a predetermined interval on the underside (arrow D direction side) of the base member E130, and a drive means E190 disposed inside the cover member E180.

The driving means E190 is reciprocatably arranged on the cover member E180. Further, by engaging the distribution passage E150 with the driving means E190, the distribution passage E150 is arranged to be reciprocally movable on the base member E130.

The central passage E160, the flow path adjustment block E170, and the cover member E180 are each fastened and fixed to the base member E130 by tapping screws, and the guide member E120 and the base member E130 are each fastened and fixed to the front member E110 by tapping screws.

The intermediate member E140 is sandwiched between the front member E110 and the base member E130. As a result, the lower frame E86b is configured as a single unit (see FIG. 136).

In addition, in the lower frame E86b, other members except the distribution passage E150 and the driving means E190 are made of a resin material that is light-transmissive (that is, transparent through which the members and spheres on the back side can be seen through), and the distribution passage E150 and driving means E190 are made of colored resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball moving from the first passage ERt1 to the seventh passage ERt7, and the reciprocating movement of the distribution passage E150 can be made visible to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The distribution passageway E150 and the driving means E190 may be made of a light-transmissive (transparent or colored) resin material, and may be painted on the front surface thereof, or may have a sticker attached thereto.

On the other hand, the lower frame E86b may be configured so that the components located on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the drive means E190 are made of a non-light-transmitting resin material (or are painted or have a sticker attached) so that the drive means E190 is not visible to the player from the front side.

The front member E110 includes a plate-shaped front plate E111 forming a front surface, and a plate-shaped bottom part E112 that stands up from the back surface of the front plate E111.

The front plate E111 includes a pair of vertical parts extending vertically at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and an inclined part connecting the vertical parts and tilting downward in the vertical direction from both ends in the longitudinal direction toward the center. It is formed.

A plurality of insertion holes E111a are formed in the front plate E111 in the thickness direction along the outer edge of the front plate E111. In the assembled state (unitized state), the lower frame E86b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and a tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole E111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (disposed) on the base plate 60.

An opening EOPin is formed in the front plate E111 (perforated in the thickness direction). As described above, the reception port EOPin is an opening that receives the ball that has flowed (entered the ball) into the upper frame passageway ERt0 (see FIG. 135).

In the front plate E111, an outlet EOPout is formed (perforated in the thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 135). The outlet EOPout has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of a sphere. As described above, the outflow port EOPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fourth passage ERt4 flows out to the game area.

As described above, the front plate E111 has a protruding portion E111b protruding from the front side (arrow F direction) of the first outflow surface E141a. In addition, a notch E111c having substantially the same shape as the second outflow surface E141b in a front view is formed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the second outflow surface E141b. By passing through the notch E111c, the ball guided through the sixth passage ERt6 flows out (flows down) into the play area.

A pair of restricting portions E111d protrude from the rear surface of the front plate E111 on the longitudinal outer side of the inclined portion. The interposed member E140 is sandwiched between the front member E110 and the base member E130, and the restricting portions E111d abut against the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140, thereby preventing the interposed member E140 from detaching upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the base member E130. This makes it unnecessary to fasten the interposed member E140 to the front member E110 or the base member E130 with tapping screws, thereby reducing product costs.

The bottom surface portion E112 is formed continuously over the entire length of the front plate E111 in the longitudinal direction, thereby suppressing the intrusion of foreign substances such as wires.

The guide member E120 is for forming the first passage ERt1 together with the front member E110, and includes a pair of side parts E121 and a back part E122 that connects the pair of side parts E121.

The pair of side portions E121 are formed into a plate-like body that is vertically elongated and approximately rectangular when viewed from the side. The pair of side portions E121 are arranged opposite each other in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) with a distance greater than the diameter of the sphere, with the surface at one end in the short side direction (surface on the side facing the arrow F) abutting the back surface (surface on the side facing the arrow B) of the front plate E111 (front member E110).

The back portion E122 connects the other short-side ends and the upper ends of the pair of side portions E121, and is curved in an arc that is convex from one short-side end to the other short-side end of the side portions E121.

A first passage ERt1 is formed by a space defined by the guiding member E120 and the front plate E111 (front member E110) so that the ball can move (flow down, fall). Further, the lower part (in the direction of arrow D) of the first passage ERt1 is opened. Thereby, the flowing direction of the ball that has passed through the receiving port EOPin and flowed into the first passage ERt1 can be changed (changed) downward and guided to the second passage ERt2.

The base member E130 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E133 formed between the pair of curved portions E131 facing each other, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of first inclined surfaces E133 facing each other, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E130, and a plate-shaped back plate E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 to each other. The detailed configuration of the base member E130 will be described with reference to Figures 136 to 143 as well as Figures 144 to 147.

The curved portion E131 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and also extends in the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and vertical direction (arrow U- The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the direction D) is curved into an arc convex downward in the vertical direction (direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 143(c)).

The curved portion E131 has an outflow surface E131a recessed at the lowest vertical position. The outflow surface E131a is a portion for allowing the balls guided through the curved portion E131 to flow out into the sorting passage E150, and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the sorting passage E150.

A notch E132a is formed in the wall plate E132 on the distribution path E150 side (the side where the pair of wall plates E132 face each other). By passing through this notch E132a, the ball can flow down from the curved portion E131 to the distribution passage E150. Moreover, the notch E132a is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere (in this embodiment, the size is about five times the diameter of the sphere). The larger the size of the notch E132a, the more the ball can flow down into the distribution passage E150 from any position in the front-rear direction.

The second passage ERt2 is formed by the space partitioned by the curved portion E131 and the wall panel E132. The curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) is disposed vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the guide member E120 (first passage ERt1), and a vertical step is formed between the curved portion E131 and the first passage ERt1. In other words, the ball falls freely from the first passage ERt1 to the second passage ERt2.

Further, the guide member E120 (first passage ERt1) is arranged vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the curved portion E131. Therefore, the ball can be thrown from the first passage ERt1 to the front end of the second passage ERt2.

As a result, the ball that flows down to the front end of the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can move back and forth in the front-to-back direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) along the arc-shaped curve of the curved portion E131. This allows the ball to be sent from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) with a velocity component in the front-to-back direction.

The first slope portion E133 is a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long and generally rectangular shape when viewed from above, and the end portion on the side of the curved portion E131 is located at a position vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) at a predetermined distance from the lower surface of the curved portion E131. will be placed. Further, the first slope portion E133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first slope portion E133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restriction portion E133b, and a groove portion E133c.

The insertion hole E133a is formed as an opening (perforated in the plate thickness direction) approximately at the center of the first sloped portion E133, and is formed so that an engaged portion E153 of a distribution passage E150, which will be described later, can be inserted therethrough (FIG. 138, 145(b)).

The regulating portion E133b is provided upright from the front edge of the insertion hole E133a on the lower surface of the first sloped portion E133, and its lower surface is formed parallel to the sloped surface of the first sloped portion E133 (FIG. 145(b) , see FIG. 146(b)).

The groove portion E133c is a groove formed along the inclined direction at approximately the center in the front-rear direction of the first slope portion E133, and is formed in pairs on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) with the insertion hole E133a in between. A guided portion E152 of a distribution path E150, which will be described later, is arranged in the groove portion E133c so as to be slidable in an inclined direction (see FIGS. 138, 145(a), and 147(a)). A guide wall is provided around the groove E133c to prevent damage to the groove E133c.

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the distribution passage E150 and a cover E202 are disposed on the first slope portion E133.

The cylindrical body E201 is intended to facilitate the displacement of the sorting passage E150 in the first inclined surface portion E133, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an axial hole formed around its axis. A rotating shaft is inserted into the axial hole and the cylindrical body E201 is disposed on the first inclined surface portion E133 with the rotating shaft aligned in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). This allows the cylindrical body E201 to be rotatably disposed on the first inclined surface portion E133. As the cylindrical body E201 rotates around its axis, the sorting passage E150 abutting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body E201 can be easily displaced.

The cover E202 is for holding the cylindrical body E201 on the first slope portion E133, and is formed into a plate shape that is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the first slope portion E133. In the cover E202, a hole larger than the insertion hole E133a is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E133a of the first slope portion E133, and a groove approximately the same as the outer shape of the groove portion E133c is formed at a position corresponding to the pair of groove portions E133c. be done. Further, a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E201 is bored at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201.

The cover E202 is disposed on the top surface of the first slope portion E133 with its top surface parallel to the slope surface of the first slope portion E133.

A rotating shaft longer than the hole drilled in the cover E202 at a position corresponding to the cylinder E201 is inserted into the cylinder E201, the cylinder E201 and the rotating shaft are disposed on the first inclined surface E133, and the first inclined surface E133 and the cover E202 are fastened and fixed with a tapping screw, so that the cover E202 can hold the rotating shaft and the cylinder E201 through which the rotating shaft is inserted on the first inclined surface E133.

The cylindrical body E201 is arranged so that a part of its side (outer peripheral surface) protrudes from the upper surface of the cover E202 through a hole formed in the cover E202, thereby allowing the cylindrical body E201 and the sorting passage E150 to come into contact with each other.

The mounting portion E134 is formed substantially horizontally vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the end of the first inclined surface portion E133 on the downward inclination direction. The front end of the mounting portion E134 is disposed closer to the back plate E137 (in the direction of arrow B) than the front end of the first inclined surface portion E133.

A curved portion E134a is provided by connecting the attachment portion E134, the first slope portion E133, and the second slope portion E135, and the curved portion E134a is formed by curving into an arc shape convex toward the back plate E137 side. be done.

The second inclined surface portion E135 is a portion for forming the fifth passage ERt5 (part of it), and is formed vertically below the mounting portion E134 (in the direction of arrow D), sloping downward from the back plate E137 toward the front member E110. The second inclined surface portion E135 is formed with an insertion hole E135a, a central passage E135b, a pair of vertical wall portions E135c, a partition portion E135d, and a ball-throwing wall E135e.

A fifth passage ERt5 is formed in the space partitioned by the second inclined surface portion E135, the mounting portion E134, the curved portion E134a, and the back plate E137.

The insertion hole E135a is formed (perforated in the plate thickness direction) substantially in the center of the second slope portion E135 to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere. A recessed portion for inserting a lower end of a cylindrical wall E163 of a central passage E160, which will be described later, is provided on the outer periphery of the insertion hole E135a along the outer edge of the insertion hole E135a.

The central passage E135b is a portion for forming the seventh passage ERt7, and is curved in a circular arc that is convex vertically downward, and the curved shape is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from being sent (flowing out) from the central passage E135b to the inclined surface of the second inclined surface portion E135 when the ball is sent to the central passage E135b.

The central passage E135b connects the front edge (arrow F direction side) of the second slope portion E135 and the insertion hole E135a, and slopes downward from the front edge of the second slope portion E135 toward the insertion hole E135a. It is formed by Thereby, the ball guided to the central passage E135b can be thrown toward the insertion hole E135a. That is, the seventh passage ERt7 is formed by the arcuately curved space of the central passage E135b.

Note that the central passage E135b is arranged at a position overlapping the first outflow surface E141a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Thereby, the ball thrown from the first outflow surface E141a can be guided to the central passage E135b.

The pair of vertical walls E135c are sections for separating the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), and protrude vertically upward (arrow U direction) on the rear panel E137 side (arrow B direction side) at both ends of the central passage E135b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). The length of the pair of vertical walls E135c in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is shorter than the length of the central passage E135b, and they are disposed on the insertion hole E135a side (arrow B direction side) of the central passage E135b.

As a result, the balls flowing down the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5) are connected to the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the center passage E135b on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the pair of vertical walls E135c. (7th passage ERt7), the ball is guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). On the other hand, the ball flowing down the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5) comes into contact with the pair of vertical walls E135c, thereby forming a boundary between the (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). The ball is prevented from crossing, and the ball flows down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and is guided to the sixth passage ERt6. In this way, by making it difficult for the ball to be thrown into the central passageway E135b (seventh passageway ERt7), it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The partition portion E135d projects vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) and is formed by connecting the outer edge of the insertion hole E135a and the back plate E137. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the balls flowing down from one distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) from being guided to the other distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) side of the second slope portion E135.

The ball throwing wall E135e is formed to stand up from the lower surface of the second slope portion E135 (see FIG. 145(a)). The ball throwing wall E135e includes a circular arc portion along the edge of the back side (arrow B direction side) of the insertion hole E135a, and a straight line portion extending from both ends of the circular arc portion toward the front side (arrow F direction side). It is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from below. Thereby, a ball can be thrown through a space surrounded by the ball throwing wall E135e, and the ball that has passed through the insertion hole E135a can be thrown into a back side passage E181b of a cover member E180, which will be described later.

The overhang portion E136 is formed to be inclined downward from the curved portion E131 side toward the second slope portion E135 side, and a guide portion E136a is formed in the overhang portion E136.

The guide portion E136a is a portion for facilitating the assembly of the interposed member E140 to the base member E130, and protrudes vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the end of the opposing side (inner side in the left-right direction) of the overhang portion E136. A lower passage E143 of the interposed member E140, which will be described later, is disposed between the opposing pair of guide portions E136a.

The rear plate E137 is formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. The rear plate E137 is disposed in contact with the rear side ends of the pair of first inclined surface portions E133, the pair of mounting portions E134, and the second inclined surface portion E135, and the upper end of the rear plate E137 is located above (in the direction of arrow U) the balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) and the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5). This allows the rear plate E137 to prevent the balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) or the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) from being guided to the rear side (in the direction of arrow B) of the rear plate E137.

The intermediate member E140 includes a rolling portion E141 that extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, a plate-shaped abutment portion E142 that protrudes vertically downward (arrow D direction) from the underside of the rolling portion E141, and a lower passage E143 that stands upright from the back surface of the abutment portion E142.

The rolling portion E141 is formed such that its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction (arrow LR direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is inclined downward toward the center in the extending direction. Ru.

The upper surface of the rolling portion E141 is formed with a downward incline from the front member E110 side (arrow F direction) to the base member E130 side (arrow B direction). As described above, the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 is formed with a first outflow surface E141a formed with a downward incline toward the back side (arrow B direction) and a second outflow surface E141b formed with a downward incline toward the front side (arrow F direction).

Further, the rolling portion E141 is formed with undulations, and the top portion thereof is arranged in front of the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). The second outflow surface E141b is arranged at the bottom of the undulations, while the first outflow surface E141a is arranged at the top of the undulations. Therefore, the first outflow surface E141a is arranged in front of the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

The first outlet surface E141a is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), so that the balls flowing down the first outlet surface E141a can be guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

A notch E141c is formed on both left and right ends (arrow L-R direction) of the upper surface of the rolling portion E141, and the protruding portion E111e of the front member E110 abuts against the notch E141c. The interposed member E140 is also arranged in abutment against the upper surface of the overhanging portion E136. This fixes the interposed member E140 to the base member E130 (front member E110). As a result, a sixth passage ERt6 is formed by the space partitioned between the interposed member E140 (upper surface of the rolling portion E141), the base member E130, and the front member E110 (rear surface of the front plate E111).

A passage port E142a is formed in the contact portion E142 at a position on the back side of the outlet EOPout (perforated in the thickness direction). The passageway opening E142a has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of a sphere.

The lower passage E143 protrudes from the outer edge of the passage opening E142a toward the cover member E180 (the direction of arrow B), and the space partitioned by the lower passage E143 forms (part of) the fourth passage ERt4.

The lower passage E143 is formed with a downward incline from the cover member E180 side toward the front member E110 side (the direction of arrow F), and the side and bottom surfaces of the lower passage E143 are formed to protrude toward the cover member E180 side from the top surface. In other words, the top surface of the lower passage E143 on the cover member E180 side is open.

The lower surface of the lower passage E143 has a groove E143a with a U-shaped cross section recessed in the center of its width direction (arrow L-R direction) (see FIG. 144(a)). The groove E143a extends in a substantially straight line along the protruding direction of the lower surface of the lower passage E143.

The width of the groove E143a (dimension in the direction of arrow LR) is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the depth of the groove E143a (dimension perpendicular to the lower surface of the lower passage E143) is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. The depth is set so that the ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the groove E143a.

This allows the ball on the underside of the lower passage E143 to be supported at two points (a pair of ridges where the underside of the lower passage E143 and the groove E143a intersect). Therefore, the ball can be guided in a stable state compared to when the groove E143a is not formed (i.e., when the ball is supported at only one point). To explain in more detail, the ball is sandwiched between the groove E143a, allowing it to flow down the center in the width direction while being prevented from displacing in the width direction.

As a result, if the center position of the outlet EOPout and the passageway E142a deviates due to dimensional tolerances or assembly tolerances, and a part of the front member E110 (front plate E111) is disposed in front of the passageway opening E142a, Even in a state in which a part of the outer edge of the road entrance E142a is blocked by the front member E110 (front plate E111), the ball flowing down the lower passage E143 (fourth passage ERt4) passes through the outlet EOPout and is not played in the game. Exfiltrated into the realm.

As described above, the lower passage E143 is arranged between the pair of guide parts E136a of the overhang part E136 facing each other. As a result, when assembling the lower frame E86b, by bringing the lower passage E143 into contact with the pair of guide parts E136a, it is possible to easily arrange the lower passage E143 (interposed member E140) to the base member E130. I can do it.

The sorting passage E150 is for the balls to move (flow down, roll) on its upper surface, and is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the first inclined surface E133 (cover E202). Thus, like the first inclined surface E133, the sorting passage E150 is disposed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 to the mounting portion E134. The sorting passage E150 has a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided portions E152 erected from the lower surface of the sorting passage E150, and an engaged portion E153 erected between the pair of guided portions E152. The detailed configuration of the sorting passage E150 will be described with reference to Figures 136 to 143 as well as Figures 144 to 147.

The protrusions E151 are parts for changing the movement (downward) direction of the ball, and the balls can move (flow down, roll) between the protrusions E151 regularly on the upper surface of the distribution path E150. A plurality of them are arranged at equal intervals.
The shape of the protrusion E151 is formed into a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passageway E150. The approximately hexagonal shape has two sides arranged parallel to the inclination direction of the distribution passageway E150 that are longer than the other four sides.In other words, the distribution passageway E150 It is formed long in the direction along the inclination direction. In addition, the other four sides excluding the two long sides are formed to have the same length. Further, the side surface of the protrusion E151 is formed to be inclined with respect to the distribution passage E150 (in the present embodiment, inclined at approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the distribution passage E150), and the protrusion E151 is formed at the top of the hexagonal pyramid. It is formed in such a manner that a part of the dot side is cut out. In other words, the cross-sectional area in a plane parallel to the distribution passage E150 becomes smaller as it moves away from the upper surface of the distribution passage E150.

The protrusions E151 are arranged at a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) with their long sides parallel to each other (in this embodiment, the distance between opposing faces on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150 is approximately 4/4 of the diameter of the sphere). 1). Furthermore, with respect to one set of protrusions E151 arranged in a row in the front-rear direction, one set of protrusions E151 arranged on the downward side in the inclination direction is arranged in the front-rear direction of the protrusions E151. They are disposed offset in the front-rear direction by half the distance between the installations. That is, in the front-rear direction, one set of protrusions E151 arranged on the downward side in the inclination direction is arranged between opposing sets of one set of protrusions E151. Thereby, the ball flowing down between the long sides of the pair of protrusions E151 in the front-rear direction can be brought into contact with the protrusion E151 disposed on the downward side in the inclination direction.

The distance between the short sides of the protrusions E151 is also the same as the distance between the long sides of the protrusions E151. As a result, one protrusion E151 is arranged in the sorting passage E150 at the same distance from the protrusions E151 arranged around it. A third passage ERt3 is formed by the space partitioned by the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 and the inclined side surface E151a of the protrusions E151.

In this embodiment, the protrusion height of the protrusion E151 is approximately half the radius of the sphere. The distance between the protrusions E151 at the protruding tips is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. This allows the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to move (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) while abutting against the inclined side surfaces E151a of adjacent protrusions E151. In other words, the protrusions E151 can prevent the balls from remaining in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3).

When a ball moves (flows down, rolls) in the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3), the flow direction of the ball is changed (changed) by contacting the protrusion E151, and the ball is guided between the opposing protrusions E151 formed on the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction side) or the back plate E137 side (arrow B direction side). In this way, the protrusions E151 can change (change) the flow direction of the ball that flows down along the inclined direction.

In addition, by moving (flowing down, rolling) between the long sides of the projections E151 that are adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the ball moves along the curved part along the inclination direction of the distribution path E150. It can move (flow down, roll) from the E131 side to the central passage E160.

Further, the ball flowing down the distribution path E150 comes into contact with the protrusion E151, so that the speed of the ball flowing down is reduced. Thereby, compared to the case where the distribution passage E150 does not include the protrusion E151, the time for the balls to flow down the distribution passage E150 can be lengthened.

In addition, since the protrusion E151 is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, it can be easily seen by the player. This makes it easier for the player to see the manner in which the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is changed. That is, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) moves at a relatively low speed, and it takes a relatively long time to move (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3). However, the time required for the ball to move (flowing down, rolling) can be further increased by contact with the protrusion E151. As a result, it is easier for the player to see the manner in which the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball is changed (changed), which can increase the interest of the game.

In this way, in this embodiment, the protrusion E151 can change (vary) the flow direction of the balls flowing down the distribution passage E150 and extend (vary) the flow time, which can increase the excitement of the game. In addition, by using a single part (the protrusion E151) to change (vary) the flow direction and extend (vary) the flow time, the number of parts can be reduced, which can reduce product costs.

In addition, because the distribution passage E150 is arranged at an angle, even if the flow speed of the ball decreases, the flow speed increases due to the ball's own weight, allowing it to flow down the third passage ERt3.

The protrusions E151, which are disposed adjacent to the front and rear edges of the sorting passage E150, are formed in only a portion of a substantially hexagonal shape; in other words, the shape of the protrusions E151 is formed in such a manner that it is cut off by the front and rear edges of the sorting passage E150. This allows more third passages ERt3 to be formed in the sorting passage E150, increasing the interest of the game.

The guided portions E152 are arranged in pairs in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) with the engaged portion E153 between them, approximately in the center of the sorting path E150 in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) (see Figures 145(a) and 147(a)). The front-to-rear dimension of the guided portion E152 is formed to be equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion E133c of the base member E130. By inserting the guided portion E152 into the groove portion E133c, the displacement of the sorting path E150 in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base member E130 is restricted.

As described above, since the guide wall is erected around the groove E133c, it is possible to prevent the groove E133c from being damaged due to the guided portion E152 coming into contact with the guide wall of the groove E133c.

The engaged portion E153 has an engaging recess E153a, the rear surface of which is recessed toward the front side (the direction of the arrow F), and a restricting piece E153b, which protrudes toward the front side from the lower end of the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 145(b)).

The engagement recess E153a is formed by extending in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). The restricting piece E153b is parallel to the inclined surface of the first inclined surface portion E133 (sorting passage E150) and is disposed below the restricting portion E133b of the first inclined surface portion E133 (arrow D direction). This makes it possible to prevent the restricting piece E153b and the restricting portion E133b from coming into contact when the sorting passage E150 is displaced in the inclined direction. On the other hand, the restricting piece E153b comes into contact with the restricting portion E133b, thereby preventing the sorting passage E150 from being displaced upward (arrow U direction).

The distribution passage E150 is disposed parallel to the slope of the first slope portion E133, in contact with the side surface of the cylindrical body E201 protruding from the top surface of the cover E202. By rotating the cylindrical body E201 about its axis as a rotation axis, the distribution passage E150 can be easily displaced.

In addition, at least a portion of the sorting path E150 is disposed below the curved portion E131, i.e., the sorting path E150 is disposed at a position where it does not pass completely from below the curved portion E131 to the attachment portion E134 side, and the distance between the sorting path E150 and the curved portion E131 is disposed to be smaller than the radius of the ball (see FIG. 145(a) and FIG. 147(a)). This makes it possible to prevent balls sent to the sorting path E150 from flowing out from below the curved portion E131 to both longitudinal ends of the base member E130. In addition, it is possible to prevent the balls from being pinched between the curved portion E131 and the sorting path E150.

The distribution passage E150 is formed as a generally rectangular plate that is long in the direction of the incline when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the incline. This makes it easier to send balls to the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) that is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) in the shorter direction than the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) that is arranged at one end side (downward inclination side) of the distribution passage E150 in the longitudinal direction.

Further, the length of the distribution passage E150 in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of the arrow FB), which is the short direction, is at least twice the diameter of the sphere, and in this embodiment, the length is approximately 4 times the diameter of the sphere. It is formed five times the size. As a result, a plurality of (in this embodiment, two locations) ball movement (flowing down, falling) regions can be formed on the downward slope side of the distribution path E150. As a result, among the paths (fourth path ERt4, fifth path ERt5, and sixth path ERt6) in which a plurality of balls that have flown down the distribution path E150 are formed, the one with a high probability of winning a ball in the first prize opening 64 is selected. It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player expect to be allocated to the 4-path ERt4.

In addition, even if fraud is committed with the lower frame E86b, it is difficult to commit the fraud. To explain in detail, even if a fraudulent attempt is made by causing the ball to flow down to the fourth passage ERt4, either the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6, which have a lower probability of causing the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 than the fourth passage ERt4, the ball will move (flow down, fall) down the other of the fifth passage ERt5 or the sixth passage ERt6, making the fraudulent attempt difficult.

A notch E150a is formed in a part of the front side of the descending side of the distribution passageway E150 in the inclination direction. By passing through the notch E150a, the ball that has flowed down (fallen) through the distribution path E150 can easily come into contact with the flow path adjustment block E170.

The central passage E160 includes a construction passage E161 extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and an opening formed (with a plate thickness) approximately in the center of the construction passage E161 in the left-right direction. an upper hole E162 (drilled in the direction), a cylindrical wall E163 erected along the upper hole E162 from the lower surface of the construction passage E161, and an installation part E164 arranged at both ends of the construction passage E161 in the left-right direction; Equipped with.

The width dimension of the erected passage E161 (the extension direction of the erected passage E161 and the direction perpendicular to the vertical direction, the direction of the arrows F-B) is made larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The construction passage E161 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (the direction of the arrow LR) and the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), which is convex downward in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow D). It is curved into an arc. Thereby, the ball that has flown down into the construction passage E161 can be guided to the upper hole E162 formed at approximately the center in the left-right direction of the construction passage E161 (the lowermost part of the construction passage E161 in the vertical direction).

A back wall E161a is formed in the construction passageway E161, and extends vertically upward (in the direction of arrow F) from the edge on the rear end side (in the direction of arrow B). Thereby, the ball that has flown down to the construction passage E161 can be suppressed from falling from the back side thereof.

The construction passage E161 is formed so that its cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to its extension direction is curved into an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction. Thereby, the ball that has flown down into the construction passageway E161 can be suppressed from flowing down (falling) from the front side thereof.

The upper hole E162 is circular when viewed from above and is formed to be approximately the same size as the insertion hole E135a formed in the second inclined surface portion E135, i.e., larger than the outer shape of a sphere. A protrusion E162a that protrudes upward is formed around the periphery of the upper hole E162. This makes it difficult for a sphere flowing down the erection passage E161 to be guided into the upper hole E162.

The cylindrical wall E163 is formed in a cylindrical shape with approximately the same inner diameter as the upper hole E162, and is disposed on the second sloped portion E135 with its lower end inserted into a recess formed on the outer periphery of the insertion hole E135a of the second sloped portion E135. This makes it possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the lower end of the cylindrical wall E163 and the upper surface of the second sloped portion E135. In addition, the central passage E160 can be positioned relative to the second sloped portion E135.

A notch E163a is formed in the cylindrical wall E163 at a position corresponding to the central passage E135b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and the notch is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The fourth passage ERt4 (part of it) is formed by the arc-shaped curved space of the erected passage E161 and the space surrounded by the cylindrical wall E163.

The installation part E164 has a generally elongated rectangular shape in top view, and when the central passage E160 is fixed (arranged) to the base member E130 (installation part E134), the upper surface of the installation part E164 is arranged on the first slope part E133. It is formed flush with the upper surface of the cover E202 provided. Thereby, even if the distribution passage E150 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the distribution passage E150 and the central passage E160 (installation portion E164) from coming into contact with each other.

The flow path adjustment block E170 is used to change (vary) the direction in which the balls flow down, and is formed in a roughly triangular pyramid shape. The flow path adjustment block E170 is formed with a front wall E171 parallel to the front surface of the base member E130, an outer wall E172 facing the curved portion E134a, and an inner wall E173 facing the central passage E135b. A pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 are disposed on either side of the central passage E135b in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

The flow path adjustment block E170 is formed in a triangular shape whose width increases as it goes toward the lower side of the inclination direction (arrow F direction side) of the second slope portion E135 when viewed from above, and is connected to the front wall E171 and the front surface of the base member E130. are disposed on the second slope portion E135 in a state where they are flush with each other. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball flowing down the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) from coming into contact with the flow path adjustment block E170.

The outer wall E172 is curved convexly toward the curved portion E134a, and the inner wall E173 is curved concavely from the central passage E135b toward the center of the flow path adjustment block E170. The space between the outer wall E172 and the curved portion E134a, and the space between the inner wall E173 and the central passage E135b are each larger than the outer shape of a sphere, allowing the sphere to flow down between the outer wall E172 and the curved portion E134a, and between the inner wall E173 and the central passage E135b.

The cover member E180 includes a front cover member E181 disposed below the base member E130 (in the direction of arrow D), and a back cover disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the front cover member E181. A member E182 is provided.

Note that the cover member E180 and the drive means E190, which will be described later, will be described with reference to FIG. 145 in addition to FIGS. 136 to 143 as appropriate.

The front side cover member E181 includes a main body part E181a formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a main body part E181a approximately at the longitudinal center of the main body part E181a from the front cover member E181 side (arrow F direction side) to the back side cover member E182 side. A back side passage E181b recessed toward (arrow B direction side), a motor mounting surface E181c arranged on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the main body E181a, and an upper part of the motor mounting surface E181c. the first top plate E181d disposed on the side (arrow U direction side), and the first top plate E181d vertically downward (arrow D direction) on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the motor mounting surface E181c. The first lower plate E181e is arranged in parallel with a predetermined interval, and the first lower plate E181e is arranged at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side). A second upper surface plate E181f and a second lower surface plate E181g are arranged in parallel to each other, and a plurality of slides (five in this embodiment) are arranged on the upper surfaces of the first lower surface plate E181e and second lower surface plate E181g. A protrusion E181h and a pivot support E181i disposed between the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) are formed.

The motor mounting surface E181c, the first upper surface plate E181d, the first lower surface plate E181e, the second upper surface plate E181f, and the second lower surface plate E181g are erected from the back surface of the main body portion E181a.

The rear passage E181b is formed with a throwing plate E181b1 erected from its underside, and a pair of support plates E181b2 erected on either side of the throwing plate E181b1 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

The ball throwing plate E181b1 in the longitudinal direction is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the insertion hole E135a of the second slope portion E135, and on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the upper surface of the ball throwing plate E181b1, there is a hole facing the back side. A ball throwing slope E181b3 that slopes upward is formed. As a result, the ball guided inside the cylindrical wall E163 of the central passage E160 comes into contact with the ball throwing slope E181b3, and the guidance direction changes from vertically downward (direction of arrow D) to the front member E110 side (direction of arrow F). be changed (changed);

The pair of support plates E181b2 are used to guide the ball as it flows down the throwing plate E181b1, and are each formed vertically below the straight portion of the throwing wall E135e.

The upper surface of the back side passage E181b is formed with an opening, through which the ball throwing wall E135e of the second slope part E135 is inserted into the back side passage E181b, and the lower surface of the second slope part E135, the ball throwing plate E181b1, the ball throwing wall E135e, and the pair The space defined by the support plate E181b2 forms (a part of) the fourth passage ERt4.

The motor mounting surface E181c is the portion where the mounting member E192 of the drive means E190 (described later) is disposed (fixed), and a central notch E181c1 is formed in the motor mounting surface E181c at approximately the center in the longitudinal direction, and the shape of the notch is approximately U-shaped when viewed from above, with the rear side (arrow B direction side) open.

The first top plate E181d and the second top plate E181f are arranged in parallel. Therefore, the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g are arranged in parallel. The space defined by the first upper surface plate E181d and the first lower surface plate E181e, the space defined by the second upper surface plate E181f and the second lower surface plate E181g, are connected to the first transmission member E194 of the drive means E190, which will be described later. This is a space for arranging two transmission members E195, respectively.

The upper surfaces of the first lower plate E181e and the second lower plate E181g each have a plurality of protrusions E181e1 (two on the first lower plate E181e and four on the second lower plate E181g in this embodiment) formed in the front-rear direction (direction of the arrows F-B). The protrusions E181e1 come into contact with the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195, thereby reducing the frictional force generated between the first lower plate E181e and the first transmission member E194 and between the second lower plate E181g and the second transmission member E195, and facilitating the displacement of the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195 (see FIG. 144(b)).

The slide protrusion E181h is for guiding the displacement of the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195, and is disposed parallel to the first upper plate E181d, the first lower plate E181e, the second upper plate E181f, and the second lower plate E181g.

The pivot support E181i is formed as a bearing on the back surface of the main body portion E181a (the surface in the direction of arrow B), and the pivot support E182d is formed on the front face of the back side cover member E182 at a position facing the pivot support E181i. . A pinion gear E196 of a drive means E190, which will be described later, has an end portion of a shaft E197 protruding from its side surface (a surface in the front-rear direction, a surface in the direction of arrow FB). The shaft E197 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and both ends of the shaft E197 are connected to the shaft support E181i of the front side cover member E181 and the shaft support E182d of the back side cover member E182, respectively. Pivotally supported. Thereby, the pinion gear E196 is rotatably disposed between the front side cover member E181 and the back side cover member E182 facing each other.

The rear cover member E182 includes a main body E182a formed in a horizontally elongated, generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a first top plate E182b erected from the front of the main body E182a on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the main body E182a, a second top plate E182c erected from the front of the main body E182a on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the main body E182a, and a pivot support E182d disposed on the front of the main body E182a in a position facing the pivot support E181i of the front cover member E181.

The first and second top plates E182b and E182c are respectively formed with a first notch E182b1 and a second notch E182c1 that are open on the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F). The engagement bases E194b of the first and second transmission members E194 and E195, which will be described later, are inserted into the first and second notches E182b1 and E182c1, respectively.

The pivot support portion E182d is for supporting the shaft E197 of the driving means E190, and is formed as a bearing on the front surface (the surface facing the direction of the arrow F) of the main body portion E182a, and is formed in a position facing the pivot support portion E181i of the front cover member E181, as described above.

That is, the shaft E197 of the drive means E190 is supported by the shaft support E181i of the front side cover member E181 and the shaft support E182d of the back side cover member E182, and its axial direction is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It is said to be in a tilted posture.

The driving means E190 includes a driving motor E191 that generates a driving force, an attachment member E192 disposed above the driving motor E191 (in the direction of the arrow U), a driving force transmission member E193 fixed to the shaft of the driving motor E191, a first transmission member E194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E195 engaged with the first transmission member E194, a pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195, and a shaft E197 passing through the shaft center of the pinion gear E196.

The drive motor E191 is for displacing the sorting passage E150 in the inclined direction, and is arranged with its axis pointing vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This allows the installation space in the front-to-rear direction to be smaller than when the axis is arranged to point in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B).

The mounting member E192 is for fixing (arranging) the drive motor E191 to the front cover member E181, and the mounting member E192 includes a base portion E192a formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape when viewed from above, A peripheral wall portion E192b is formed along the outer edge of the portion E192a to stand vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U).

An insertion hole for inserting the shaft of the drive motor E191 through the base portion E192a is bored in the thickness direction of the base portion approximately in the center thereof, and the drive motor E191 is installed with the shaft of the drive motor E191 inserted into the insertion hole. It is fixed (arranged) to the member E192. The upper end of the shaft of the drive motor E191 is arranged above the upper end of the peripheral wall portion E192b in the vertical direction.

The driving force transmitting member E193 is for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the first transmitting member E194, and is formed in a cylindrical shape smaller than the inner shape of the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c. A shaft of a drive motor E191 is fixed to the shaft center. The driving force transmitting member E193 is formed with an eccentric shaft E193a disposed at a position different from the axis, and a flange portion E193b protruding from the side wall of the driving force transmitting member E193.

The eccentric shaft E193a is a part that engages with the first transmission member E194, and is formed in a cylindrical shape smaller than the diameter of the driving force transmission member E193. When viewed from above, the outer edge of the eccentric shaft E193a is disposed inscribed in the outer edge of the driving force transmission member E193. Therefore, the axis of the eccentric shaft E193a is disposed at a position different from the axis of the driving force transmission member E193, that is, it is disposed eccentrically with respect to the axis of the drive motor E191. Therefore, when the drive motor E191 is driven, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape centered on the axis of the driving force transmission member E193 (the axis of the drive motor E191) when viewed from above.

The flange portion E193b is a portion for regulating displacement of the driving force transmission member E193 in the vertical direction upward (in the direction of arrow U), and is located on the drive motor E191 side (in the direction of arrow D) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). ) is placed at the end of the The outer shape of the flange portion E193b is formed into a larger circular shape than the inner shape of the center notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c, so that the flange portion E193b can abut against the motor mounting surface E181c. As a result, the driving force transmission member E193 inserted into the central notch E181c1 of the motor mounting surface E181c can be prevented from coming off upward (in the direction of arrow U) of the motor mounting surface E181c.

The first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the distribution passage E150.

The first transmission member E194 is formed with a main body E194a formed in a generally rectangular plate shape when viewed from above, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the main body E194a, an engagement portion E194c protruding from the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (arrow F direction side), a first rack portion E194d protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) of the main body E194a, and a transmission recess E194e recessed into the lower surface of the main body E194a.

The main body E194a is disposed above the driving force transmission member E193 (in the direction of the arrow U). The size of the main body E194a in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of the arrows F-B) is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the driving force transmission member E193, and the driving force transmission member E193 is disposed between the front and rear ends of the main body E194a, i.e., at a position overlapping with the main body E194a when viewed from above.

The engaging portion E194c has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and its outer shape is formed to be equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between opposing inner walls of the engaging recess E153a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Thereby, the engaging portion E194c can be inserted into the engaging recess E153a. The driving force of the drive motor E191 can be transmitted to the distribution passage E150 by the engagement portion E194c and the inner wall in the left-right direction of the engagement recess E153a coming into contact with each other.

In addition, since the engagement recess E153a extends in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), the engagement portion E194c can be displaced vertically within the engagement recess E153a. In other words, the driving force of the drive motor E191 in the vertical direction can be prevented from being transmitted to the sorting passage E150.

In this way, the engaging portion E194c transmits the displacement of the first transmission member E194 in the left-right direction to the distribution passage E150, while not transmitting the displacement of the first transmission member E194 in the left-right direction to the distribution passage E150. By doing so, the distribution passage E150 can be displaced along the slope of the first slope portion E133 of the base member E130.

A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with a pinion gear E196 is carved on the lower surface of the first rack portion E194d, and the pinion gear E196 is rotated by displacement of the first transmission member E194 in the left-right direction.

The transmission recess E194e extends in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and is formed from the front end to the rear end. The width of the groove of the transmission recess E194e (the distance between the inner walls in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction)) is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer shape of the eccentric shaft E193a. By inserting the eccentric shaft E193a into the transmission recess E194e, the driving force of the drive motor E191 is transmitted to the first transmission member E194 via the driving force transmission member E193.

In more detail, when the drive motor E191 is driven, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape around the axis of the drive force transmission member E193 (the axis of the drive motor E191) in a top view. When the left-right inner walls of the transmission recess E194e come into contact with the eccentric shaft E193a, the left-right displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a caused by the drive of the drive motor E191 is transmitted to the first transmission member E194, and the first transmission member E194 is displaced in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, since the transmission recess E194e is formed from the front end to the back end of the main body E194a, that is, it is formed longer than the outer shape of the driving force transmission member E193, the eccentric shaft E193a and the inner wall of the transmission recess E194e in the front and rear direction is considered to be non-contact. Therefore, displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a in the longitudinal direction due to the drive of the drive motor E191 is not transmitted to the first transmission member E194, and displacement of the first transmission member E194 in the longitudinal direction can be suppressed.

Moreover, since the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced circularly in a top view, the displacement of the first transmission member E194 in the left-right direction can be set to a predetermined amount. Displacement can be suppressed. Moreover, the displacement of the first transmission member E194 in the left-right direction can be made into a reciprocating motion.

The second transmission member E195 is formed with a main body E195a that is substantially rectangular and elongated when viewed from the rear, a second rack portion E195b that protrudes from a side surface on one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the main body E195a, a guide groove E195c that is disposed in the approximate center in the longitudinal direction of the main body E195a, an engagement base E194b that protrudes from the top surface on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the main body E195a, and an engagement portion E194c that protrudes from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 (the side in the direction of arrow F).

A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with a pinion gear E196 is carved on the upper surface of the second rack portion E195b, and the rotation of the pinion gear E196 displaces the second transmission member E195 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). .

The guide groove E195c extends in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction, arrow L-R direction) and is formed in the front cover member E181 on its inner side, through which a fastening portion is inserted for fastening the front cover member E181 and the rear cover member E182. By inserting the fastening portion of the front cover member E181 into the guide groove E195c, the left-right displacement of the second transmission member E195 can be guided. In addition, a tapping screw is screwed into the fastening portion of the front cover member E181, and the rigidity of the tapping screw can be utilized to prevent damage caused by contact between the fastening portion of the front cover member E181 and the guide groove E195c.

The pinion gear E196 is arranged with its axial direction along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The shaft E197 is inserted into the insertion hole drilled in the axial direction, and the shaft E197 is pivotally supported by the shaft supports E181i and E182d arranged on the front side cover member E181 and the back side cover member E182, so that the pinion gear E196 is rotatably arranged on cover member E180.

Next, the displacement (reciprocation) operation of the sorting passage E150 by the driving means E190 will be described with reference to Figures 144 to 147. Figures 144(a) and 146(a) are front views of the lower frame E86b with the front member E110 omitted, Figures 144(b) and 146(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame E86b with the rear cover member E182 omitted, and Figures 144(c) and 146(c) are top views of the lower frame E86b.

145(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along the CXLVa-CXLVa line in FIG. 144(c), and FIG. 145(b) is a sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along the CXLVb-CXLVb line in FIG. FIG. 145(c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame E86b. 147(a) is a sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along the CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa line in FIG. 146(c), and FIG. 147(b) is a sectional view of the lower frame E86b taken along the CXLVIIb-CXLVIIb line in FIG. 147(a). FIG. 147(c) is a partially enlarged bottom view of the lower frame E86b.

Note that FIGS. 144 and 145 show the distribution passage E150 in the first position, and FIGS. 146 and 147 show the distribution passage E150 in the second position. .

As shown in Figures 144 and 145, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E130. That is, the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are disposed close to each other, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed close to each other.

When placed in the first position, the distribution passage E150 is placed above the installation part E164 of the central passage E160. This makes it easier to send balls that flow down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4).

Moreover, the notch E150a of the distribution passage E150 is arranged at a position close to the outer wall E172 of the flow path adjustment block E170 when viewed from above. Therefore, the balls flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can be easily brought into contact with the outer wall E172. Thereby, the direction of the ball being thrown can be changed (changed) and the interest of the game can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, when the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the second position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are connected in the longitudinal direction of the base member E130 ( It is located on the curved portion E131 side in the arrow LR direction). That is, the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 are arranged at positions separated from each other compared to the state where they are arranged at the first position, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 are also arranged at positions separated from each other. will be established.

In the state in which the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the second position, the end portion on the downward side in the inclination direction when viewed from above is disposed approximately at the center of the installation portion E164 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the ball that has passed (flowed down, rolled) through the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can roll on the upper surface of the installation part E164. As a result, the time required for the ball to be thrown from the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) to the construction path E161 (fourth path ERt4) or the second slope portion E135 (fifth path ERt5) can be lengthened, increasing the interest of the game. can be increased.

The distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E194, and the second transmission member E195 are engaged with each other by inserting the engagement portion E194c into the engagement recess E153a of the engaged portion E153. As described above, the engagement recess E153a is formed to extend in the vertical direction (direction of the arrow U-D) when viewed from the rear. D direction). Thereby, even when the first transmission member E194 or the second transmission member E195 is displaced in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), the distribution passage E150 can be displaced in the left-right direction as well as in the vertical direction. Thereby, the distribution path E150 can be displaced along its inclination direction (the inclination direction of the first slope portion E133). That is, in a direction parallel to the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution path E150 (from the end of the distribution path E150 on the curved part E131 side to the center path E160 side). The distribution passage E150 and the protrusion E151 formed on its upper surface can be displaced (reciprocated) in the direction toward the end. As a result, it is possible to easily change the direction of movement (flowing, rolling) of the ball. Further, the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be varied (changed).

Further, as described above, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is in contact with the inclined side surfaces E151a of the protrusion E151. Since the ball is arranged to be movable (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3), the ball can move (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3). It can be suppressed from remaining in the Therefore, in order to suppress the balls from staying in the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3), it is necessary to displace the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) with a complicated trajectory, or to displace the ball with a large displacement amount or displacement speed. Displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the drive means E190 can be simplified.

The displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position is caused by the drive of the drive motor E191, which causes the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 to move from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the curved part E131 side ( This is done by displacing it in the direction of arrow L).

As described above, the eccentric shaft E193a is inserted into the transmission recess E194e of the first transmission member E194, and thus displaces from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side in the same manner as the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In addition, as the first transmission member E194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the pinion gear E196 that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 of the first rack portion E194d is rotated clockwise in rear view.

As a result, the second rack portion E195b that meshes with the pinion gear E196, i.e., the second transmission member E195, is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, and the distribution passage E150 that engages with the second transmission member E195 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In this way, the displacement of the first transmission member E194 is transmitted to the second transmission member E195 via the pinion gear E196. This makes it possible to suppress the number of drive motors E191 and reduce product costs. In addition, the second transmission member E195 can be displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first transmission member E194, that is, there is no need to synchronize the displacement of the first transmission member E194 and the displacement of the second transmission member E195, reducing product costs. can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the transmission is via the pinion gear E196, the first transmission member E194 and the second transmission member E195 can be displaced in opposite directions (in opposite phases). That is, on the base member E130 (first slope portion E133), vibrations in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) that occur when the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) can be canceled out. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for a vibration damping member and reduce product costs.

The displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the second position to the first position is performed by driving the drive motor E191, similarly to the displacement from the first position to the second position. Note that the displacement from the first position to the second position is the same except for the distribution passage E150, the direction of displacement of the first transmission member E194, the direction of displacement of the second transmission member E195, and the direction of rotation of the pinion gear E196. Therefore, its explanation will be omitted.

Here, by keeping the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a in the same direction, the distribution passage E150 can be reciprocated in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) between the first position and the second position. To explain in detail, among the circular displacements of the eccentric shaft E193a in top view, the displacement from the center passage E160 side to the curved part E131 side displaces the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position. Furthermore, among the circular displacements of the eccentric shaft E193a in top view, the displacement from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side displaces the distribution passage E150 from the second position to the first position.

In this way, by displacing the eccentric shaft E193a in a circular shape when viewed from above, the sorting passage E150 can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position while maintaining the displacement of the eccentric shaft E193a in the same direction. This makes it possible to suppress switching of the drive direction of the drive motor E191. As a result, a sensor for controlling the drive motor E191 is not required, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, because the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from above, it is possible to prevent the first transmission member E194 from displacing in the left-right direction beyond a predetermined amount. For example, in a configuration in which the drive motor E191 is engaged with the first transmission member E194 without going through the drive force transmission member E193, there is a risk that the first transmission member E194 will be displaced beyond a predetermined amount due to malfunction of the drive motor E191, poor control of the sensor, etc.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the eccentric shaft E193a is displaced in a circular shape when viewed from above, and the first transmission member E194 is displaced in the left-right direction within a predetermined range, so that the first transmission member E194 can be prevented from coming into contact with other members (e.g., the central passage E160). In addition, the generation of vibrations caused by switching the driving direction of the drive motor E191 (stopping driving or restarting driving) can be prevented, and the reciprocating movement of the sorting passage E150 can be made smooth.

Returning from FIG. 136 to FIG. 143, the sphere flowing down the lower frame E86b will be described.

By passing through the receiving port EOPin formed in the front plate E111, the ball is guided to the first passage ERt1, and then falls down the first passage ERt1 due to its own weight, and is then guided to the curved part E131 (second passage You will be guided to ERt2).

Due to its shape, the ball guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) reciprocates in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and passes through the notch E132a of the wall plate E132, causing vibration. They are guided to the branch passage E150 (third passage ERt3). Thereby, the ball guided to the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) can pass through the notch E132a with a velocity component in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, since the notch E132a is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball, the ball can be guided from any position of the notch E132a to the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3).

This allows the balls flowing from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) in an irregular manner, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

As described above, the ball flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) has its flow direction changed (changed) by abutting against the protrusion E151. Here, the flow direction of the ball is changed (changed) to the rear side (arrow B direction), and the ball abuts against the rear plate E137 of the base member E130 and abuts against the side E151a of the protrusion E151 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction) of the rear plate E137. In other words, the ball is sandwiched between the rear plate E137 and the protrusion E151, which may inhibit the flow of the ball.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the distribution passage E150 is reciprocated along the inclination direction of the distribution passage E150 (first slope portion E133) by the drive motor E191, the rear plate E137 and the protrusion E151 It is possible to suppress the ball from being pinched. In addition, by displacing (reciprocating) the distribution passage E150, the contact between the balls and the protrusion E151 can be made irregular, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution passage E150 can be made irregular. Changes in rolling direction can be varied. Thereby, it is possible to suppress monotonous changes (changes) in the movement direction (flowing down, rolling) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) in the distribution path E150. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

The balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) come into contact with the protrusion E151, and the speed of the flowing balls decreases, which allows the flow time of the balls flowing down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to be extended (changed). In addition, the flow direction is changed (varied), so the balls are guided to either the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4), the second sloped portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6).

When a ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is sent to the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) of the central passage E160, the ball goes to the upper hole E162 formed approximately at the center in the left-right direction of the construction passage E161. You will be guided towards. The ball flowing down the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) flows down the upper hole E162 without its guiding direction being changed (changed) by the projection E162a protruding around the upper hole E162. It passes through and flows (falls) vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) inside the cylindrical wall E163 (fourth passage ERt4).

The ball that flows down (falls) inside the cylindrical wall E163 passes through the insertion hole E135a of the second inclined surface portion E135, is guided to the rear passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) of the front cover member E181, and when it comes into contact with the throwing inclined portion E181b3 of the throwing plate E181b1, its guiding direction is changed (transformed) from vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) to the front member E110 side (in the direction of arrow F), and flows down the top surface of the throwing plate E181b1 (see FIG. 143(c)).

The ball that flows down the top surface of the throwing plate E181b1 flows down the lower passage E143 (fourth passage ERt4) of the intermediate member E140, passes through the passage opening E142a of the abutment portion E142, and is discharged into the playing area from the outlet EOPout of the front member E110.

When the ball flowing down the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) has its flowing direction changed (changed) by the protrusion E162a protruding around the upper hole E162, the ball flows down the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) from the front side of the construction passage E161 (arrow F direction side) to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) or the center passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

When a ball flowing down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) is sent to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), the ball is sent to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt5). You will be guided to ERt7).

When a ball flows down the second sloped surface E135 (fifth passage ERt5) toward the intermediate member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), the flow direction is changed (varied) when the ball comes into contact with the flow path adjustment block E170 disposed on the second sloped surface E135. A ball that comes into contact with the inner wall E173 of the flow path adjustment block E170 may be guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), which can increase the excitement of the game.

When a ball flows down the second sloped surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) toward the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), the ball comes into contact with a pair of vertical wall portions E135c arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the boundary between the second sloped surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), thereby preventing the ball from being guided into the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7).

The ball guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) flows down toward the insertion hole E135a (direction of arrow B) of the second slope portion E135 according to its inclination direction, passes through the insertion hole E135a, and enters the front cover. It is guided to the back side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) of the member E181.

Here, among the balls guided to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), the balls thrown toward the back plate E137 side (in the direction of arrow B) from the central passage E160 come into contact with the cylindrical wall E163. By this, passing through the insertion hole E135a is suppressed.

In addition, by abutting against the partition portion E135d formed on the second slope portion E135, the ball can be prevented from being sent from one side to the other in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the distribution passage E150, or from the other side to one side. As a result, a ball guided to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) can be prevented from being guided to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) by abutting against the side surface (surface formed in the left-right direction) of the attachment portion E134 and changing (changing) its flow direction.

Further, by coming into contact with the partition portion E135d, it is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down the back side (direction side of arrow B) of the cylindrical wall E163. This can prevent the player from losing sight of the ball flowing down the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

A ball sent from the front end (end on the arrow F direction side) of the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) or the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) rolls on the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) toward the center of its extension direction. Here, the cross-sectional shape of the rolling portion E141 in a plane including its extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed with a downward inclination toward the center of the extension direction, so that the ball flowing down the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) reciprocates in the extension direction (left and right direction) along the shape of the rolling portion E141, and is guided from the first outflow surface E141a to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), or flows out (flows down) from the second outflow surface E141b into the play area.

The flow path adjustment block E170 is disposed at a position overlapping with the second outflow surface E141b in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to prevent balls flowing down the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5) from flowing out (flowing down) from the second outflow surface E141b directly into the play area. This allows the rolling portion E141 to roll, increasing the interest of the game.

As described above, by forming the protrusion E151 in the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3), the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed (changed). In other words, randomness can be imparted to the direction of ball movement (flowing, rolling). That is, the protrusion E151 can function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the distribution path E150 (traversing in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the distribution path E150).

Similarly, by providing the driving means E190, the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed (changed), and the ball passes through the distribution path E150 (in the longitudinal direction of the distribution path E150 (arrow LR direction)). ) The driving means E190 can function as a means for inhibiting or assisting the crossing over).

A ball that moves (flows down, rolls) through the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) and passes the end on the central path E160 side (has crossed completely in the longitudinal direction of the distribution path E150 (arrow L-R direction)) is guided to either the erected path E161 (fourth path ERt4) or the second inclined portion E135 (fifth path ERt5). In other words, the player can expect that the ball that flows down the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) (passes the end on the downward flow direction side) will be distributed to the erected path E161 (fourth path ERt4), which can increase the excitement of the game.

Here, the ball that has passed through the end of the distribution path E150 on the interposed member E140 side (arrow F direction side) enters the interposed member E140 (sixth path ERt6), that is, the ball enters the first prize opening 64. The ball is thrown (guided) to a path where there is a low probability of it happening. In other words, the probability that a ball that does not cross the distribution path E150 in the longitudinal direction will win the first prize opening 64 is low.

As a result, the ball passes through the end of the central passage E160 side (downstream direction side) of the distribution passage E150 (crosses in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the distribution passage E150), and enters the first prize opening 64. The player can expect that the ball will be thrown (guided) to the constructed passageway E161 (central passageway E160, fourth passageway ERt4) where the probability of winning is high. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, by abutting against the protrusion E151, the speed at which the ball flows down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) can be slowed down, and the time that the player can expect the ball to be guided to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) can be lengthened, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, the protrusion E162a allows the ball guided to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) to be sent to the second inclined surface E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

On the other hand, due to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7) formed in the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5), the second slope part E135 (fifth passage ERt5) and the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) The ball guided by can be thrown to the back side passage E181b (fourth passage ERt4) where it is easy to win into the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning into the first winning opening 64 is high). As a result, the player can expect that the ball will be guided to the back side passageway E181b (fourth passageway ERt4) until the ball flows out (flows down) into the game area, and the interest in the game can be increased. can.

Next, the lower frame E2086b in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 148 and 149.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the protrusion E151 is provided protrudingly on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150, but the upper surface of the distribution passage E2150 in the seventeenth embodiment is curved in an arc shape. . Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 148 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E2086b in the seventeenth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line CXLVa-CXLVa in Figure 144. Note that Figure 148(a) shows a state in which the distribution path E2150 and the curved portion E131 are in contact, and Figure 148(b) shows a state in which the elastic spring E2190, which is configured as a coil spring, is compressed in comparison with Figure 148(a). FIG. 149(a) is a front perspective view of the sorting passage E2150, FIG. 149(b) is a front view of the sorting passage E2150 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLIXb in FIG. 149(a), FIG. 149(c) is a bottom view of the sorting passage E2150 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLIXc in FIG. 149(b), and FIG. 149(d) is a side view of the sorting passage E2150 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLIXd in FIG. 149(b).

As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the lower frame E2086b includes a front member E110, guiding members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and a front member E110. A base member E2130 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side), an intervening member E140 interposed between the opposing front member E110 and base member E2130, and a distribution passage disposed in the base member E2130. E2150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) elastic springs E2190 (see FIG. 136).

The base member E2130 includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall panel E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of flat portions E2133 formed between the pair of opposing curved portions E131, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed above the pair of flat portions E2133 (arrow U direction) on the central passage E160 side, a second inclined portion E135 formed between the pair of opposing mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 (see FIG. 138) erected from the front of the base member E2130, and a plate-shaped back panel E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 together.

The flat portion E2133 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and has a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support protrusions E2133a formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) support portions E2133b formed on the central passage E160 side of the plurality of support protrusions E2133a.

The support protrusion E2133a is formed in a cylindrical shape. The support portion E2133b is a plate-shaped body that is approximately rectangular in side view, and is provided protruding from the upper surface of the flat portion E2133, and has an insertion hole on the tip side in the protrusion direction (arrow U direction side) for inserting a support shaft E20j to be described later. A hole, that is, an insertion hole slightly larger than the outer diameter of the support shaft E20j is bored in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB). The plurality of support protrusions E2133a and the plurality of support parts E2133b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The distribution passageway E2150 slopes downward from the curved part E131 toward the attachment part E134, and is formed into a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sloped surface. On the lower surface of the distribution passageway E2150, a plurality of (in this embodiment, two) support protrusions E2150a are formed on both end sides in the longitudinal direction. In this case, two supporting portions E2150b are formed.

The support protrusions E2150a are disposed at positions corresponding to the support protrusions E2133a when viewed from above. The support portions E2150b are disposed at positions different from the support portions E2133b in the front-rear direction when viewed from above. In detail, the support portions E2150b are disposed between the opposing pairs of support portions E2133b.

Support portion E2150b has an insertion hole drilled in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) that is approximately the same as the insertion hole drilled in support portion E2133b.

A rolling surface E2151 on which the balls guided from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) flow down is formed on the upper surface of the distribution passage E2150, and has a cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the distribution passage E2150. is curved in a circular arc shape that is concave toward the vertically downward direction (in the direction of arrow D). A third passage ERt203 is formed by this arcuate space.

The end of the rolling surface E2151 on the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction side, see FIG. 136) is vertically lower (arrow D direction). Therefore, the ball flowing down the rolling surface E2151 passes through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the back plate E137 side and comes into contact with the back plate E137, rather than passing through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the intervening member E140 side. The ball is likely to be thrown to the intervening member E140 (sixth path ERt6) through the (see FIG. 136).

As described above, the elastic spring E2190 is configured as a coil spring, and its inner diameter is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a. By inserting the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a into the inside of the elastic spring E2190, the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a can support the elastic spring E2190.

With the elastic spring E2190 supported by the support protrusions E2133a and E2150a, the support shaft E20j can be inserted through the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b, allowing the sorting passage E2150 to engage with the flat portion E2133.

The support shaft E20j is for rotatably engaging the sorting passage E2150 with the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) as the rotation axis relative to the flat surface portion E2133, and is formed as a rod-shaped cylindrical body with an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b, and is inserted into the insertion holes of the support portions E2133b and E2150b in a position along the front-to-rear direction.

As a result, the pair of sorting paths E2150 are rotatably engaged on the central path E160 side, and both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E2150 are displaced (reciprocated) up and down (in the directions of the arrows U and D) by the elastic spring E2190. That is, the pair of sorting paths E2150 are each engaged with the base member E2130 (flat surface portion E2133) so as to be displaceable (rotatable, reciprocating). In addition, both longitudinal ends of the pair of sorting paths E2150 (in the directions of the arrows L and R) are each disposed in contact with the underside of the curved portion E131.

In this state, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged in a contracted state, and the state of contact between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passage E2150 is maintained using the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190. That is, in the present embodiment, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed on the vertically lower side (arrow D direction side) of the distribution passage E2150, and displaces the distribution passage E2150 vertically upward (arrow U direction side). Formed in a manner.

In addition, in this state, the lowest height position of the rolling surface E2151 in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U-D) is vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface of the installation part E164 of the central passageway E160. will be placed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the contact between the balls that have flown down the rolling surface E2151 and the installation part E164, and the balls that have flown down the rolling surface E2151 can be moved to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope part E135 (the fifth You can be guided to the passage ERt5).

Next, the balls flowing down the distribution path E2150 will be explained. By reciprocating the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB), the ball guided to the distribution passage E2150 with a velocity component in the front-rear direction passes through the rolling surface. While reciprocating in the front-rear direction through E2151 (third passage ERt203), it flows down toward the central passage E160 according to the inclination direction.

When the ball passes the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the back plate E137 (the side in the direction of arrow B) due to the reciprocating movement in the forward and backward directions, it comes into contact with the back plate E137 and is guided back to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203).

On the other hand, due to the reciprocating movement in the front-back direction, the ball that has passed the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the intervening member E140 (the side in the direction of arrow F) is guided to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) ( (See Figure 136).

It does not pass through the end of the rolling surface E2151 on the side of the intervening member E140 (arrow F direction side), that is, it is not guided to the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), and the lower side of the rolling surface E2151 in the inclination direction The ball that has passed through the end is guided to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

In this way, the rolling surface E2151 is curved into an arc shape whose cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to the extending direction of the distribution passageway E2150 is convex toward the vertically downward direction (arrow D direction). The direction of the ball's flow can be changed (changed) with The ball can be guided (see Figure 136). That is, the player can expect that the balls flowing down the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203) will be sorted to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, when the ball thrown from the curved portion E131 (second path ERt2) contacts (falls) the rolling surface E2151 (third path ERt203), the distribution path E2150 is moved due to the ball's own weight. The curved portion E131 side rotates vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) with E20j as the rotation center. That is, the slope of the distribution path E2150 becomes smaller. As a result, the speed of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E2151 (third path ERt203) can be slowed down, and the time required for players to expect the ball to be guided to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) can be increased. , it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the curved portion E131 in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is curved in an arc shape that is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 143(c)). Therefore, the ball guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can be reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the extension direction and then flow down to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203). Therefore, when two balls flow from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203) with a predetermined gap between them, the reciprocating motion in the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball and reduce the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball (connect the balls). As a result, while the leading ball is flowing down the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203), the trailing ball is guided to the rolling surface E2151 (third passage ERt203), and the weight of the leading ball and the weight of the trailing ball further reduce the inclination of the sorting passage E2150. As a result, the time that the player expects the ball to be guided to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) can be further extended, increasing the excitement of the game.

Next, the lower frame E3086b in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150.

In the above 17th embodiment, the upper surface of the sorting passage E2150 is curved in an arc shape, but in the 18th embodiment, the upper surface of the sorting passage E3150 is flat. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame E3086b in the eighteenth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CXLVa-CXLVa in FIG. 144. Note that FIG. 150(a) shows a state in which the distribution passage E3150 and the curved portion E131 are in contact, and FIG. 150(b) shows a state in which the elastic spring E2190 is compressed compared to FIG. 148(a). .

As shown in FIG. 150, the lower frame E3086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E3130 disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 disposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E3130, a distribution passage E3150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170, and a plurality of elastic springs E2190 (two in this embodiment) disposed on the base member E3130, and a ball joint E3200 (see FIG. 136).

The base member E3130 is formed in the same manner as the base member E2130 in the seventeenth embodiment, except that the socket E3220 of the ball joint E3200 is disposed on the flat portion E3133 instead of the support portion E2133b.

A socket E3220 of the ball joint E3200 is disposed approximately at the center of the flat portion E3133 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) on the side closer to the central passage E160 than the support protrusion E2133a of the flat portion E3133.

Here, the ball joint E3200 will be explained. Ball joint E3200 is formed from ball member E3210 and socket E3220.

The ball member E3210 is formed with a spherical portion E3211 and a fixed portion E3212 that is connected to the spherical portion E3211. The socket E3220 has a recessed receiving port E3221 formed with an outer diameter equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the spherical portion E3211 on its upper surface. When the spherical portion E3211 is inserted into the receiving port E3221, the ball member E3210 is displaceably engaged with the socket E3220.

The sorting passage E3150 is formed of a plate-like body that slopes downward from the curved portion E131 toward the mounting portion E134 and is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the slope. On the underside of the sorting passage E3150, multiple support protrusions E2150a (two in this embodiment) are formed on both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a ball member E3210 is formed on the central passage E160 side of the multiple support protrusions E2150a.

The support protrusion E2150a and the ball member E3210 are disposed at positions corresponding to the support protrusion E2133a and the socket E3220 formed on the planar portion E3133, respectively, when viewed from above.

A rolling surface E3151 is formed on the upper surface of the distribution passage E3150 formed in the plate-like body, along which the balls guided from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) flow. The rolling surface E3151 forms the third passage ERt303.

With the elastic spring E2190 supported by the support protrusions E2133a and E2150a, a ball member E3210 (spherical portion E3211) is provided on the lower surface of the distribution passage E3150 in a socket E3220 (receptacle E3221) provided on the upper surface of the flat portion E3133. ), the distribution passageway E3150 can be engaged with the flat portion E3133.

As a result, the pair of distribution passages E3150 have both longitudinal ends thereof displaced (reciprocated) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) by the elastic spring E2190 while the central passage E160 side is rotatably engaged. Ru. That is, the pair of distribution passages E3150 are disposed on the base member E3130 (plane portion E3133) so as to be movable (rotatable, reciprocating). Further, both ends of the pair of distribution passages E3150 in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of the arrow LR) are respectively disposed in contact with the lower surface of the curved portion E131.

In this state, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged in a compressed state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190 is utilized to maintain the abutment state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting path E3150. That is, in this embodiment, the elastic spring E2190 is arranged vertically downward (arrow D direction side) of the sorting path E2150, and is formed in a manner that displaces the sorting path E2150 vertically upward (arrow U direction side).

In addition, in this state, the end of the rolling surface E3151 on the downward inclination side (arrow D direction), i.e., the lowest position of the rolling surface E3151 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), is disposed vertically above (arrow U direction) the upper surface of the mounting portion E164 of the central passage E160. This makes it possible to prevent the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E3151 from coming into contact with the mounting portion E164, and makes it possible to guide the ball that has flowed down the rolling surface E3151 to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) or the second inclined portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

Next, we will explain the ball flowing down the distribution passage E3150. The ball is guided to the distribution passage E3150 with a velocity component in the forward and backward directions by reciprocating the curved portion E131 in the forward and backward directions (in the direction of the arrows F-B). The ball can displace the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) in the forward and backward directions, and flows down toward the central passage E160 according to the inclination direction.

Here, depending on the position in the front-to-rear direction where the ball abuts (falls) on the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution passage E3150 inclines toward the intermediate member E140 (arrow F direction) or toward the back plate E137 (arrow B direction) (see Figure 136).

In more detail, since the distribution path E3150 engages with the base member E3130 (flat portion E3133) via the ball joint E3200, when a ball abuts (falls) against the intermediate member E140 (see FIG. 136) side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution path E3150 not only declines from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side, but also declines from the back plate E137 side toward the intermediate member E140 side due to the weight of the ball. On the other hand, when a ball abuts (falls) against the back plate E137 side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the distribution path E3150 not only declines from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side, but also declines from the intermediate member E140 side toward the back plate E137 side due to the weight of the ball. That is, in the front-to-rear direction, the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) slopes downward toward the side where the ball abuts (falls).

As a result, the direction of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) can be changed (changed), and the direction of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) can be changed (changed). The ball can be guided to any path of the installation member E140 (sixth path ERt6) (see FIG. 136). That is, the player can expect that the balls flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third path ERt303) will be distributed to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4), and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, when the ball thrown from the curved portion E131 (second path ERt2) contacts (falls) the rolling surface E3151 (third path ERt303), the distribution path E3150 is moved by the ball's own weight to the ball joint. The curved portion E131 side rotates vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) with E3200 as the rotation center. That is, the inclination of the distribution passageway E3150 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) becomes smaller. As a result, the speed of the ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third path ERt303) can be slowed down, and the time required for players to expect the ball to be guided to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) can be lengthened. , it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Further, as described above, the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). Since it is curved in an arc shape convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 143(c)), the ball guided to the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) is After reciprocating between one end side and the other end side, the ball can be caused to flow down to the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303). Therefore, when the two balls flow from the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) to the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) with a predetermined distance apart, the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2) By using the reciprocating motion of the ball, it is possible to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (making the balls lined up). As a result, while the leading ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third path ERt303), the trailing ball is guided by the rolling surface E3151 (third path ERt303), thereby reducing the weight of the leading ball and the trailing ball. The inclination of the distribution path E3150 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) can be further reduced by the weight of the moving balls. As a result, it is possible to further lengthen the time during which the player expects the ball to be guided to the central passageway E160 (fourth passageway ERt4), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by making the balls flow down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), it may be possible to change (alter) the inclination direction of the sorting passage E3150 in the forward/backward direction (arrow F-B direction).

For example, while the leading ball is flowing down the intervening member E140 (see FIG. 136) side of the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), the trailing ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303). ERt303) on the rear plate E137 side, the downward direction of the slope of the rolling surface E3151 in the front-rear direction may be changed (changed) from the intervening member E140 side to the rear plate E137 side. In this way, while the ball is flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303), by changing (changing) the inclination direction of the rolling surface E3151 in the front-rear direction, the destination of the ball can be changed, which improves the game. It can increase interest.

In this embodiment, the same elastic spring E2190 is provided on each of the multiple (two in this embodiment) support protrusions E2133a, but different elastic springs, i.e., elastic springs having different elastic coefficients, may also be provided.

For example, by making the elastic coefficient of the elastic spring disposed on the intermediate member E140 side (arrow F direction side) smaller than the elastic coefficient of the elastic spring disposed on the back plate E137 side (arrow B direction side), it is possible to easily tilt the sorting passage E3150 downward toward the intermediate member E140 side (see FIG. 136). This makes it possible to prevent a ball flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) from flowing down the rolling surface E3151 (third passage ERt303) in a state of abutting (being clamped) between the rolling surface E3151 and the back plate E137, and then flowing (falling) between the central passage E160 and the back plate E137 and being guided to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

Next, the lower frame E4086b in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 151 and 152.

In the above 16th embodiment, a pair of sorting passages E150 is provided, but in the 19th embodiment, in addition to the pair of sorting passages E150, a pair of second sorting passages E4150 is provided. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figures 151(a) and 152(a) are front views of the lower frame E4086b in the 19th embodiment, and Figures 151(b) and 152(b) are rear views of the lower frame E4086b. Note that Figures 151 and 152 are schematic illustrations, and in Figures 151(a) and 152(a), the illustration of the front member E110 and the guide member E120 is omitted. Also, in Figures 151(b) and 152(b), in order to facilitate understanding, only the sorting path E150, the second sorting path E4150, and the driving means E4190 are shown. Also, in Figure 151, the state in which the sorting path E150 is arranged in the first position is illustrated, and in Figure 152, the state in which the sorting path E150 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the lower frame E4086b includes a front member E110, guiding members E120 disposed at both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and a front member E110. A base member E4130 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side), an intervening member E140 interposed between the opposing front member E110 and base member E4130, and a distribution passage disposed in the base member E4130. E150, a second distribution passage E4150, a central passage E160, a pair of flow passage adjustment blocks E170, and a cover member E4180 arranged at a predetermined interval on the lower surface side (arrow D direction side) of the base member E4130, and a driving means E4190 disposed inside the cover member E4180 (see FIG. 136).

The base member E4130 is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 136) formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and is erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131. A plate-shaped wall plate E132 formed between the two opposite sides, a pair of first slope parts E4133 formed between the pair of opposing curved parts E131, and a pair of third slope parts E4133 formed between the pair of opposite first slope parts E4133. A slope portion E4139, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the pair of opposing third slope portions E4139, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of opposing mounting portions E134, and a base member E4130. It includes a pair of plate-shaped projecting parts E136 (see FIG. 138) that stand upright from the front of the board, and a plate-shaped back plate E4137 that is formed by connecting the pair of curved parts E131.

Since the third inclined surface portion E4139 is formed, the first inclined surface portion E4133 is disposed vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and is shorter in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) than the first inclined surface portion E133 in the 16th embodiment.

The third slope portion E4139 is disposed between the first slope portion E4133 and the attachment portion E134 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and is formed parallel to the first slope portion E4133.

The back plate E4137, like the first slope portion E4133, is arranged to extend vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the back plate E137 in the sixteenth embodiment.

The second sorting passage E4150 is formed to have a shorter length in the inclination direction than the sorting passage E150, but is otherwise identical, so its description will be omitted. By forming a protrusion E151 on the second sorting passage E4150, a third passage ERt3 is formed in the second sorting passage E4150. The second sorting passage E4150 is disposed between the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) and the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). In other words, the second sorting passage E4150 is disposed vertically below the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) (arrow D direction) and vertically above the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) (arrow U direction).

The drive means E4190 includes a drive motor E191 that generates a drive force, a mounting member E192 disposed above the drive motor E191 (in the direction of arrow U), and a drive force transmission member E193 fixed to the shaft of the drive motor E191. , a first transmission member E4194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E4195 and a third transmission member E4198 engaged with the first transmission member E4194, and a first transmission member E4194 engaged with the second transmission member E4195. A fourth transmission member E4199 and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) pinion gears E196 are provided.

Note that the plurality of pinion gears E196 in this embodiment are all the same, but for ease of understanding, the pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 is referred to as the pinion gear E196a, the The pinion gear E196 interposed between the first transmission member E4194 and the third transmission member E4198 is referred to as a pinion gear E196b, and the pinion gear E196 interposed between the second transmission member E4195 and the fourth transmission member E4199 is referred to as a pinion gear E196c. to distinguish them.

The first transmission member E4194 is different from the first transmission member E194 in the sixteenth embodiment in that an engagement base E4194b extends vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U), and a pinion gear is attached to the upper surface of the first rack part E4194d. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with E196b is carved.

The second transmission member E4195 is different from the second transmission member E195 in the sixteenth embodiment in that an engagement base E4194b extends vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U), and is formed on the upper surface of the main body E4195a along the longitudinal direction. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196c is carved on one side (arrow L direction side) in the direction (arrow LR direction).

The third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the second distribution passage E4150.

The third transmission member E4198 includes a main body part E4198a, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the main body part E4198a, and an engagement base E194b extending from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 side (arrow F direction side). A protruding engaging portion E194c (see FIG. 138) is formed. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196b is carved on the lower surface of the main body portion E4198a, and the third transmission member E4198 is displaced in the left-right direction by rotation of the pinion gear E196b.

The fourth transmission member E4199 includes a main body part E4199a, an engagement base E194b protruding from the upper surface of the main body part E4199a, and an engagement base E194b extending from the upper end of the engagement base E194b toward the front member E110 side (arrow F direction side). A protruding engaging portion E194c (see FIG. 138) is formed. A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the pinion gear E196c is carved on the lower surface of the main body portion E4199a, and the rotation of the pinion gear E196c causes the fourth transmission member E4199 to be displaced in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 151, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E4194, and the second transmission member E4195 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 are disposed close to each other, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed close to each other.

On the other hand, the second distribution passage E4150, the third transmission member E4198, and the fourth transmission member E4199 are located on the wall plate E132 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are arranged at positions separated from each other, and therefore the pair of second distribution passages E4150 are also arranged at positions separated from each other.

In addition, in a state where the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position, the end of the second distribution passage E4150 on the downward slope side is closer to the wall plate E132 than the end of the distribution passage E150 on the downward side of the slope direction. The second distribution passage E4150 located on the side, that is, when viewed from above, is arranged at a position where the entire second distribution passage E4150 overlaps with the distribution passage E150. Therefore, the second distribution path E4150 is arranged at a position where no path for the ball is formed.

As a result, the balls that flow down the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) are sent (dropped) to the erected passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4) without moving (flowing down, rolling) on the second sorting passage E4150. That is, the balls can be made to flow (drop) from the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the erected passage E161 (central passage E160, fourth passage ERt4). As a result, the balls that flow (drop) from the sorting passage E150 (third passage ERt3) come into contact with the erected passage E161 and bounce off, making it easier to flow (drop) from the erected passage E161 to the second slope section E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

On the other hand, by letting the ball flow down (fall) from the distribution path E150 (third path ERt3) to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4), the ball can be directly sent to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the construction path E161. There are times when you can throw the ball. As a result, compared to the case where the ball rolls down the construction passage E161 and flows down toward the upper hole E162, the ball flows down ( (see FIG. 140).

In this way, in this embodiment, by making the balls flow down (fall) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the construction passage E161 (center passage E160, fourth passage ERt4), compared to the sixteenth embodiment, This makes it difficult for the balls distributed to the construction passage E161 (center passage E160, fourth passage ERt4) to enter the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 135) (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 can be lowered). .

On the other hand, by sending the ball from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161, i.e., without the ball coming into contact with the protrusion E162a, the ball can easily pass through the upper hole E162. This allows the player to expect that the ball that has flowed down the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) will pass directly through the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161, increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 152, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the second position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E4194, and the second transmission member E4195 are located on the wall panel E132 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the first transmission member E4194 and the second transmission member E4195 are disposed at positions spaced apart from each other compared to when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed at positions spaced apart from each other.

On the other hand, the second distribution passage E4150, the third transmission member E4198, and the fourth transmission member E4199 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E4130. That is, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199 are disposed closer to each other than when the distribution passage E150 is disposed in the first position, and therefore the pair of second distribution passages E4150 are also disposed closer to each other.

When the sorting passage E150 is placed in the second position, the end of the second sorting passage E4150 on the downward side in the inclination direction is located closer to the upper hole E162 than the end of the sorting passage E150 on the upward side in the inclination direction. That is, when viewed from above, a part of the second sorting passage E4150 is disposed in a visible position. This allows balls that have flowed down the sorting passage E150 to be guided to the second sorting passage E4150. As a result, it becomes easier to send balls that have flowed down the second sorting passage E4150 directly to the upper hole E162 without flowing down the erected passage E161.

Here, the second distribution passage E4150 is disposed vertically below the distribution passage E150 (in the direction of arrow D), so that when a ball flows (falls) from the second distribution passage E4150 to the erection passage E161, the amount of rebound of the ball due to contact with the erection passage E161 can be reduced compared to when the ball flows (falls) from the distribution passage E150 to the erection passage E161. This makes it possible to suppress the ball from flowing (falling) from the erection passage E161 to the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

As shown above, by being guided from the distribution path E150 to the second distribution path E4150, the balls distributed to the construction path E161 (center path E160, fourth path ERt4) are sent to the first prize opening 64 (FIG. 135). (see) can make it easier to win a prize (the probability of winning a prize in the first prize opening 64 can be increased). Therefore, the player is made to expect that the ball will be guided to the second distribution path E4150 (the ball will be thrown from the distribution path E150 in a state where the distribution path E150 is placed in the second position), and the game will be improved. It can increase interest.

In addition, when the sorting passage E150 is positioned in the second position, a third passage ERt3 is formed in the second sorting passage E4150, so the flow time of the balls flowing down the third passage ERt3 can be extended (changed) compared to the 16th embodiment.

Further, by causing the ball to flow down (fall) from the distribution path E150 to the second distribution path E4150, it can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the protrusion E151 formed in the second distribution path E4150. Therefore, in addition to flowing down (falling) from the curved portion E131 to the distribution passage E150, by causing the ball to flow down (falling) from the distribution passage E150 to the second distribution passage E4150, the upper surface of the protrusion E151 is moved (flowed down). The ball can be easily moved (flowing, rolling), and the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) can be varied. To explain in detail, by moving (flowing down, rolling) the upper surface of the projection E151 formed in a planar shape, it is possible to suppress the ball from moving (flowing down, rolling) in the third passage ERt3. It is possible to easily form both a mode in which the passage ERt3 is moved (flowing down, rolling) and a mode in which the third passage ERt3 is not moving (flowing down, rolling).

Next, the reciprocating movement of the distribution passage E150 and the second distribution passage E4150 by the driving means E4190 will be explained.

The first transmission member E4194, the second transmission member E4195 and the distribution passage E150, and the third transmission member E4198, the fourth transmission member E4199 and the second distribution passage E4150, the engaging part E194c is the engaged part E153. are respectively engaged by being inserted into the engagement recesses E153a (see FIG. 145).

The displacement of the distribution passageway E150 from the first position to the second position and the accompanying displacement of the second distribution passageway E4150 from the wall plate E132 side to the central passageway E160 side are caused by driving force by the drive motor E191. This is done by displacing the eccentric shaft E193a of the transmission member E193 from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the wall plate E132 side (arrow L direction side).

When the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the first transmission member E4194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side. Thereby, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E4194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In addition, as a result of the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the pinion gear E196a that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the lower surface of the first rack portion E4194d is rotated clockwise in rear view, and the pinion gear E196b that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the upper surface of the first rack portion E4194d is rotated counterclockwise in rear view.

As a result, the second transmission member E4195 (second rack portion E195b) meshing with the pinion gear E196a is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, and the distribution passage E150 engaged with the second transmission member E4195 is displaced from the first position to the second position. In addition, the third transmission member E4198 (main body portion E4198a) meshing with the pinion gear E196b is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side, and the second distribution passage E4150 engaged with the third transmission member E4198 is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side.

In addition, as the second transmission member E4195 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the wall plate E132 side, the pinion gear E196c that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the upper surface of the main body portion E4195a of the second transmission member E4195 is rotated clockwise in rear view.

As a result, the main body E4199a of the fourth transmission member E4199 that meshes with the pinion gear E196c is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side, and the second distribution passage E4150 that is engaged with the fourth transmission member E4199 is , is displaced from the wall plate E132 side to the central passage E160 side.

The displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the second position to the first position, and the associated displacement of the second sorting passage E4150 from the central passage E160 side to the wall panel E132 side, are performed by driving the drive motor E191, similar to the displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position, and the associated displacement of the second sorting passage E4150 from the wall panel E132 side to the central passage E160 side.

Here, except for the distribution passage E150, the second distribution passage E4150, the displacement direction of the first transmission member E4194 to the fourth transmission member E4199, and the rotation direction of the pinion gears E196a, E196b, and E196c, the distribution passage E150 is at the first position. Since this is the same as the displacement from the second distribution path E4150 to the second position and the accompanying displacement from the wall plate E132 side of the second distribution path E4150 to the center path E160 side, a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in this embodiment, a single drive motor E191 can reciprocate through a pair of sorting paths E150 and a pair of second sorting paths E4150, thereby reducing the number of drive motors E191 and reducing product costs.

Further, the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 can cause the displacement of the second transmission member E4195 to the fourth transmission member E4199, that is, the displacement of the first transmission member E4194 to the fourth transmission member E4199 can be linked. Thereby, the displacements of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150 can be linked. As a result, a sensor for controlling the reciprocating motion of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150 can be eliminated, and product costs can be reduced.

Next, the lower frame E5086b in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 156.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a pair of distribution passages E150 are provided, but in the twentieth embodiment, in addition to the distribution passage E150, a third distribution passage is provided between the pair of distribution passages E150. A branch path E5150 is provided. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

153(a) and 155(a) are front views of the lower frame E5086b in the 20th embodiment, and FIGS. 153(b) and 155(b) are rear views of the lower frame E5086b. . 154 and 156 are top views of the lower frame E5086b. Note that FIGS. 153 to 156 are schematically illustrated, and in FIGS. 153(a) and 155(a), illustrations of the front member E110 and the guiding member E120 are omitted, and FIGS. 154(a) and 156(a) ), illustration of the guiding member E120 is omitted. Further, for easy understanding, only the distribution path E150, the third distribution path E5150, and the driving means E5190 are displayed in FIGS. 153(b) and 155(b). Moreover, in FIG. 154(b) and FIG. 156(b), only the third distribution passage E5150 and the driving means E5190 are illustrated, and only the outer shape of the third distribution passage E5150 is illustrated. Further, FIGS. 153 and 154 show a state in which the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 155 and 156 show a state in which the distribution passage E150 is arranged in the second position. .

As shown in Figures 153 to 156, the lower frame E5086b includes a front member E110, guide members E120 (see Figure 136) arranged on both ends of the front member E110 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a base member E5130 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front member E110, an interposition member E140 interposed between the opposing front member E110 and the base member E5130, a distribution passage E150, a third distribution passage E5150, a central passage E160, and a pair of flow path adjustment blocks E170 arranged on the base member E5130, a cover member E5180 arranged at a predetermined interval on the underside (arrow D direction side) of the base member E5130, and a drive means E5190 arranged inside the cover member E5180.

The base member E5130 is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and a plate-shaped plate erected from the outer edge of the curved portion E131. A pair of first slope portions E5133 formed between the wall plate E132 and the pair of opposing curved portions E131, a pair of third mounting portions E5139 formed between the pair of opposing first slope portions E5133, A pair of attachment portions E134 formed between the pair of opposing third attachment portions E5139, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of opposing attachment portions E134, and a pair of attachment portions E135 that are erected from the front of the base member E5130. A pair of plate-shaped overhanging parts E136 (see FIG. 138) and a plate-shaped back plate E5137 formed by connecting the pair of curved parts E131.

Since the third mounting portion E5139 is formed, the first inclined surface portion E5133 is disposed vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and is shorter in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of the arrows L-R) than the first inclined surface portion E133 in the 16th embodiment.

The third attachment part E5139 is for displaceably engaging the third distribution passage E5150, and is disposed between the first slope part E5133 and the attachment part E134 in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD). The upper surface is horizontal.

A third guide portion E5139a is formed on the upper surface of the third attachment portion E5139 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side), into which a guided portion E5152 of a third distribution passage E5150, which will be described later, is slidably inserted. .

The third guide portion E5139a is formed of a plate-like body that is vertically elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and a pair of plate-like bodies that protrude from both ends of the plate-like body in the extension direction (the direction of arrows F-B) toward the third attachment portion E5139, and is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the side. The guided portion E5152 is slidably inserted into the space surrounded by this third guide portion E5139a and the third attachment portion E5139.

The rear plate E5137, like the first inclined surface E5133, is arranged to extend vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the rear plate E137 in the 16th embodiment.

The third distribution passage E5150 allows the balls to flow down its upper surface, and is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above. It has a protrusion E151 formed on its upper surface, a guided portion E5152 formed on the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side), and an engaged portion E5153 formed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side).

Since the protrusion E151 is formed in the third sorting passage E5150, a third passage ERt3 is formed in the third sorting passage E5150. In addition, the arrangement of the protrusion E151 on the upper surface of the third sorting passage E5150 is the same as the arrangement of the sorting passage E150.

The guided portion E5152 is formed from a plate-shaped body that is horizontally long and substantially rectangular in top view, and as described above, the guided portion E5152 is inserted into the space surrounded by the third guide portion E5139a and the third attachment portion E5139. As a result, the third distribution passage E5150 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engaged portion E5153 is for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor E191 to the third distribution path E5150, and protrudes downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the end face of one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the third distribution path E5150. A rack gear E194d1 is engraved on the side face of the lower end of the engaged portion E5153 on the other longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow R).

The dimension of the third distribution passage E5150 in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow LR) is formed to be larger than that between the opposing distribution passages E150 of the pair disposed at the second position. Therefore, the balls flowing down (falling) from the distribution path E150 can be prevented from coming into contact with the guided portion E5152 or the engaged portion E5153 provided at both ends of the third distribution path E5150 in the longitudinal direction. Thereby, damage to the guided portion E5152 or the engaged portion E5153 can be suppressed.

The third distribution passage E5150 is disposed in the third attachment portion E5139 (base member E5130) with the guided portion E5152 inserted into the third guide portion E5139a and the rack gear E194d1 engraved on the engaged portion E5153 meshing with the second pinion gear E5196 described below.

The drive means E5190 includes a drive motor E191 that generates a drive force, a mounting member E192 disposed above the drive motor E191 (in the direction of arrow U), and a drive force transmission member E193 fixed to the shaft of the drive motor E191. , a first transmission member E5194 engaged with the driving force transmission member E193, a second transmission member E5195 engaged with the first transmission member E4194, a pinion gear E196, and a second pinion gear E5196.

The first transmission member E5194 is different from the first transmission member E194 in the sixteenth embodiment in that the engagement base E5194b extends vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U), and the front side of the first rack part E5194d (arrow A rack gear E194d1 that meshes with the second pinion gear E5196 is carved on the F-direction side surface.

The second transmission member E4195 is formed by having an engagement base E5194b extending vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the second transmission member E195 in the sixteenth embodiment.

The second pinion gear E5196 is disposed with its axial direction aligned along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), and is different from the pinion gear E196 in that its axial dimension (thickness) is larger than that of the pinion gear E196, but otherwise has the same configuration. The axial dimension (thickness) of the second pinion gear E5196 is larger than the sum of the vertical dimension of the first rack portion E5194d of the first transmission member E5194 and the vertical dimension of the rack gear E194d1 formed at the lower end of the engaged portion E5153 of the third distribution passage E5150. As a result, the second pinion gear E5196 is formed so that it can mesh with the first rack portion E5194d and the engaged portion E5153 at different positions in the vertical direction.

As shown in Figures 153 and 154, when the sorting passage E150 is disposed in the first position, the sorting passage E150, the first transmission member E5194, and the second transmission member E5195 are located on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction of the base member E5130. That is, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195 are disposed close to each other, and therefore the pair of sorting passages E150 are also disposed close to each other.

The third distribution passage E5150 is disposed between the central passage E160 and the back plate E5137 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) (hereinafter referred to as the "third position"). Thereby, by being guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), it flows down (falls) from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) between the central passage E160 and the back plate E5137. It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown into the fifth path ERt5. As a result, the player can expect that the ball guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) will be sorted to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, since the third passage ERt3 is formed in the third distribution passage E5150, compared to the sixteenth embodiment, the flowing time of the ball flowing down the third passage ERt3 can be extended (changed).

Moreover, the distance between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137 facing each other in the front-rear direction is formed to be smaller than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from being pinched between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137, and the ball can flow down on the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3).

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, when the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the second position, the distribution passage E150, the first transmission member E5194, and the second transmission member E5195 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the base member E5130. It is located on the curved portion E131 side. That is, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195 are arranged at positions separated from each other compared to the state where they are arranged at the first position, and therefore the pair of distribution passages E150 are also arranged at positions separated from each other. will be placed.

The third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at a position where at least a portion thereof overlaps the central passage E160 when viewed from above, that is, above the central passage E160 (in the direction of arrow U) (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth position"). . Thereby, by guiding the ball from the distribution path E150 to the third distribution path E5150, it is possible to suppress the ball from being guided to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4). The ball guided to the third distribution path E5150 is thrown to the second slope portion E135 (fifth path ERt5) across the front end or rear end of the third distribution path E5150.

Further, the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at a position where the distance between the facing part and the back plate E5137 in the front-rear direction is larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the balls flowing down from the distribution passage E150 (third passage ERt3) between the third distribution passage E5150 and the back plate E5137 can be transferred to the second slope portion without coming into contact with the third distribution passage E5150. You can be guided to E135 (fifth passage ERt5).

As described above, in this embodiment, compared to the sixteenth embodiment, when the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the first position and the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed at the third position, the distribution The ball thrown from the branch path E150 can be easily guided to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4). On the other hand, in a state where the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position and the third distribution passage E5150 is arranged at the fourth position, the ball thrown from the distribution passage E150 is transferred to the center passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4). ) can be difficult to navigate. That is, depending on the arrangement position of the third distribution passage E5150 (distribution passage E150), the difficulty level of throwing a ball to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4) can be changed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, since the third distribution passage E5150 is disposed between the pair of distribution passages E150 facing each other, the balls flowing down the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) are transferred to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt3). We may be able to guide you to ERt7). That is, the ball flowing down the third passage ERt3 is added to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4), the second slope portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5), or the intervening member E140 (sixth passage ERt6), and the ball is added to the central passage E135b. By being able to throw the ball also to (the seventh passage ERt7), it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Next, the reciprocating movement of the distribution passage E150 and the third distribution passage E5150 by the driving means E5190 will be explained.

The distribution passage E150 and the first and second transmission members E5194 and E5195 are engaged with each other by inserting the engagement portion E194c into the engagement recess E153a of the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 145).

The displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position, and the associated displacement of the third sorting passage E5150 from the third position to the fourth position, are achieved by the drive motor E191 displacing the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 from the central passage E160 side (arrow R direction side) to the curved portion E131 side (arrow L direction side).

When the eccentric shaft E193a of the driving force transmission member E193 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side. As a result, the distribution passage E150 engaged with the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the first position to the second position.

Further, due to the displacement of the first transmission member E5194 from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the pinion gear E196 that meshes with the rack gear E194d1 of the first rack portion E5194d is rotated clockwise in rear view.

As a result, the second rack portion E195b of the second transmission member E5195 that meshes with the pinion gear E196 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, and the distribution passage E150 that is engaged with the second transmission member E5195 is , is displaced from the first position to the second position.

In addition, as the first transmission member E5194 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, the second pinion gear E5196, which meshes with the rack gear E194d1 formed on the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the first rack portion E5194d, is rotated counterclockwise in top view.

As a result, the engaged portion E5153 of the third distribution passage E5150 that meshes with the second pinion gear E5196 is displaced from the back plate E5137 side (arrow B direction side) to the interposed member E140 side (arrow F direction side). , As a result, the third distribution passage E5150 is displaced from the third position to the fourth position.

The displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the second position to the first position and the accompanying displacement of the third distribution passage E5150 from the fourth position to the third position are the displacement of the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position. Similarly to the displacement from the third position to the fourth position and the accompanying displacement from the third position to the fourth position of the third distribution passage E5150, this is performed by driving the drive motor E191.

Note that, other than the displacement directions of the sorting passage E150, the third sorting passage E5150, the first transmission member E5194 and the second transmission member E5195, and the rotation direction of the pinion gear E196 and the second pinion gear E5196, the displacement of the sorting passage E150 from the first position to the second position and the associated displacement of the third sorting passage E5150 from the third position to the fourth position are the same, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in this embodiment, a single drive motor E191 can reciprocate through a pair of sorting paths E150 and the third sorting path E5150, thereby reducing the number of drive motors E191 and reducing product costs.

In addition, the second transmission member E5195 and the third distribution passage E5150 can be displaced by the displacement of the first transmission member E5194, that is, the displacements of the first transmission member E5194, the second transmission member E5195, and the third distribution passage E5150 can be linked. This makes it possible to link the displacements of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the third distribution passage E5150. As a result, a sensor for controlling the reciprocating movement of the pair of distribution passages E150 and the third distribution passage E5150 can be eliminated, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, the second pinion gear E5196 is engaged with the engaged portion E5153 and the first rack portion E5194d at different positions in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, the engaged portion E5153 is engaged vertically upward (arrow U direction), and the first rack portion E5194d is engaged vertically downward (arrow D direction). This allows the displacement directions of the first transmission member E5194 and the third distribution path E5150 to be perpendicular to each other, that is, the first transmission member E5194 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E5130, and the third distribution path E5150 is displaced in the lateral direction (arrow F-B direction) of the base member E5130. This allows the number of pinion gears to be reduced, thereby reducing product costs.

Next, the lower frame E6086b in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 157(a).

In the sixteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) along (parallel to) the first slope portion E133 of the base member E130, but in the twenty-first embodiment, The arrangement angle of the distribution passage E6150 with respect to the first slope portion E6133 is changed (changed). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figure 157(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E6086b in the 21st embodiment. Note that Figure 157(a) corresponds to the cross section taken along line CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa in Figure 146. Also, since the lower frame E6086b is formed with linear (planar) symmetry (left-right symmetry in Figure 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 135) of the game board E13, only one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) is shown.

The lower frame E6086b in the 21st embodiment is formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 16th embodiment, except for the base member E130 and the distribution passage E150, so only the base member E6130 and the distribution passage E6150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), the base member E6130 is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction); A plate-shaped wall board E132 that stands upright from the outer edge of the wall plate E132, a pair of first slope portions E6133 formed between the opposing sides of the pair of curved portions E131, and a pair of first slope portions E6133 formed between the opposing first slope portions E6133. a pair of mounting portions E134, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, a pair of plate-shaped overhang portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E6130; A plate-shaped back plate E6137 formed by connecting the curved parts E131 is provided (see FIG. 138).

The first inclined surface portion E6133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E6133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E6133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 145(b) and 146(b)), a groove portion E133c, and a protrusion E6133d.

The protrusion E6133d is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the first inclined surface E6133 on the curved portion E131 side of the base member E6130 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction).

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E6201 and a cover E6202 are disposed on the first slope portion E6133 for displacing the distribution passageway E6150.

The cylindrical body E6201 is formed in the same shape as the cylindrical body E201 in the 16th embodiment, except that its outer shape is larger. As a result, the arrangement position of the sorting passage E6150 is arranged above (in the direction of the arrow U) the arrangement position of the sorting passage E150 in the 16th embodiment.

Since the outer shape of the cylindrical body E6201 is made larger, the cover E6202 has a hole drilled in the position corresponding to the cylindrical body E6201 that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E6201.

A pair of cylindrical bodies E6201 arranged on the central passage E160 side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) are arranged on the first slope part E6133, whereas in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) A pair of cylindrical bodies E6201 arranged on the side of the curved part E131 are arranged on the protruding part E6133d. Thereby, the inclination angle of the distribution passageway E6150 can be made different from the inclination angle of the first slope portion E6133, in particular, it can be made larger. As a result, the displacement (reciprocation) of the distribution passageway E6150 can be made non-parallel to the first slope portion E6133.

The rear panel E6137 is formed to extend upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the rear panel E137 in the 16th embodiment, since the arrangement position of the sorting passage E6150 is arranged upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the arrangement position of the sorting passage E150 in the 16th embodiment.

The distribution passageway E6150 is erected between a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided parts E6152 erected from the lower surface of the distribution passageway E6150, and the pair of guided parts E6152. and an engaged portion E6153.

As described above, since the arrangement position of the sorting path E6150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the arrangement position of the sorting path E150 in the 16th embodiment, the guided portion E6152 and the engaged portion E6153 are formed by extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) relative to the guided portion E152 and the engaged portion E153 in the 16th embodiment. Since the engaged portion E6153 is formed by extending downward, the engaging recess E6153a is also formed by extending downward, similar to the engaged portion E6153.

This suppresses the guided portion E6152 from coming out of the groove portion E133c of the first slope portion E7133, and restricts displacement of the distribution passage E6150 in the front-back direction with respect to the base member E6130. Further, it is possible to suppress the engagement recess E153a and the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 from coming into contact with each other.

Next, lower frames E7086b and E8086b in the twenty-second and twenty-third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 157(b) and 157(c).

In the sixteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of distribution passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) along (parallel to) the first slope portion E133 of the base member E130. In the embodiment, the arrangement angles of the distribution passages E7150, E8150 change (change) as the distribution passages E7150, E8150 are displaced. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 157(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E7086b in the 22nd embodiment, and Figure 157(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame E8086b in the 23rd embodiment. Figures 157(b) and 157(c) correspond to the cross section taken along line CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa in Figure 146. Also, since the lower frames E7086b, E8086b are formed with linear (planar) symmetry (left-right symmetry in Figure 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in Figure 135) of the game board E13, only one side (the side in the direction of arrow L) is shown.

The lower frames E7086b and E8086b in the 22nd and 23rd embodiments are formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 16th embodiment, except for the base member E130 and distribution passage E150. , only the base members E7130, E8130 and the distribution passages E7150, E8150 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the base member E7130 in the twenty-second embodiment is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and has a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction). , a plate-shaped wall plate E132 standing upright from the outer edge of the curved portion E131, a pair of first slope portions E7133 formed between the pair of opposing curved portions E131, and a pair of first slope portions E7133. A pair of mounting portions E134 formed between opposing mounting portions, a second slope portion E135 formed between the pair of mounting portions E134 facing each other, and a pair of plate-shaped overhang portions erected from the front of the base member E7130. E136, and a plate-shaped back plate E7137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 138).

The first inclined surface portion E7133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E7133 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E7133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 145(b) and 146(b)), and a groove portion E133c.

The first slope portion E7133 includes a plurality of (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E7201a and a plurality (two in this embodiment) of cylindrical bodies E7201b for displacing the distribution passage E150, and a cover E7202. will be placed.

The cylindrical bodies E7201a are arranged at the same position in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and are arranged on the central passage E160 side of the first slope portion E7133. Note that the cylindrical body E7201a is formed in the same shape as the cylindrical body E201 in the sixteenth embodiment except that the outer shape is larger. As a result, the distribution passage E6150 is arranged above (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the distribution passage E150 in the sixteenth embodiment.

The cylindrical bodies E7201b are arranged at the same position in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), and are arranged on the curved part E131 side of the first slope part E7133. Note that the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201b is formed larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a. As a result, the distribution passage E7150 is arranged above (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the distribution passage E150 in the sixteenth embodiment. Further, the inclination angle of the distribution passageway E7150 can be made different from the inclination angle of the first slope portion E7133, in particular, it can be made larger. As a result, the displacement (reciprocation) of the distribution passage E7150 can be made non-parallel to the first slope portion E7133.

The cover E7202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical bodies E7201a, 7201b at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E7201a, 7201b, since the outer shape of the cylindrical bodies E7201a, 7201b is large.

The rear panel E7137 is formed to extend upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the rear panel E137 in the 16th embodiment, since the arrangement position of the sorting passage E7150 is arranged upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the arrangement position of the sorting passage E150 in the 16th embodiment.

The distribution passageway E7150 includes a plurality of protrusions E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided parts E7152 erected from the lower surface of the distribution passageway E7150, and an erected structure between the pair of guided parts E7152. and a sloped portion E7154 formed on the lower surface of the distribution passage E7150 on the side of the curved portion E131.

As described above, since the arrangement position of the sorting path E7150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the arrangement position of the sorting path E150 in the 16th embodiment, the guided portion E7152 and the engaged portion E7153 are formed by extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) relative to the guided portion E152 and the engaged portion E153 in the 16th embodiment. Since the engaged portion E7153 is formed by extending downward, the engaging recess E7153a is also formed by extending downward, similar to the engaged portion E7153.

This suppresses the guided portion E7152 from coming out of the groove portion E133c of the first slope portion E7133, and restricts the displacement of the distribution passageway E7150 in the front-back direction with respect to the base member E7130. Further, it is possible to suppress the engagement recess E7153a and the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 from coming into contact with each other.

The sloped surface E7154 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 side toward the central passage E160 side, and the cylindrical body 7201b abuts against the sloped surface E7154. Therefore, the inclination angle of the distribution passage E7150 increases as it moves from the first position to the second position. In other words, the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E7150 can be changed (modified). This allows the change (modification) of the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls to be diversified, and prevents the movement (flowing down, rolling) direction of the balls from becoming monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 157(c), the base member E8130 in the 23rd embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E8133 formed between the opposing curved portions E131, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the opposing first inclined surfaces E8133, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the opposing mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E8130, and a plate-shaped back panel E8137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 138).

The first slope portion E8133 is a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long and generally rectangular shape when viewed from above, and the end portion on the curved portion E131 side is located at a predetermined distance from the lower surface of the curved portion E131 in the vertical direction downward (in the direction of arrow D). will be placed. Further, the first slope portion E8133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first slope portion E8133 is formed with an insertion hole E133a, a restriction portion E133b (see FIGS. 145(b) and 146(b)), a groove portion E133c, and a curved guide portion E8133d.

A plurality of (two in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies 7201a for displacing the distribution passageway E8150 and a cover E8202 are disposed on the first slope portion E8133.

Since the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a is large, the cover E8202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E7201a at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E7201a.

The curved guide part E8133d is a part for changing (changing) the inclination angle of the distribution passage E8150, and is formed to protrude from the upper surface of the curved guide part E8133d on the curved part E131 side of the first slope part E8133, and the upper surface thereof is curved in an arc shape concave downward (in the direction of arrow D).

The end of the distribution passage E8150 on the curved part E131 side is brought into contact with the arc-shaped curved surface of the curved guide portion E8133d, and supports (holds) the distribution passage E8150 together with the cylindrical body E7201a. As the distribution passage E8150 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the end on the curved part E131 side is displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U) along the curved surface of the curved guide part E8133d. . Thereby, the inclination angle of the distribution path E8150 can be increased. That is, the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution path E8150 can be changed (changed). Thereby, changes (changes) in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be diversified, and it is possible to prevent the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball from becoming monotonous. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The rear plate E8137 has a distribution passage E8150 located above (in the direction of arrow U) with respect to the distribution passage E150 in the sixteenth embodiment. It is formed to extend upward (in the direction of arrow U).

The distribution passageway E8150 is erected between a plurality of projections E151 protruding from the upper surface, a pair of guided parts E8152 erected from the lower surface of the distribution passageway E8150, and the pair of guided parts E8152. and an engaged portion E8153.

As described above, since the arrangement position of the sorting path E8150 is disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the arrangement position of the sorting path E150 in the 16th embodiment, the guided portion E8152 and the engaged portion E8153 are formed by extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) relative to the guided portion E152 and the engaged portion E153 in the 16th embodiment. Since the engaged portion E8153 is formed by extending downward, the engaging recess E8153a is also formed by extending downward, similar to the engaged portion E8153.

This prevents the guided portion E8152 from slipping out of the groove portion E133c of the first inclined surface portion E8133, and restricts the displacement of the distribution passage E8150 in the front-rear direction relative to the base member E8130. It also prevents the engagement recess E8153a from coming into contact with the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, lower frames E9086b and E10086b in the twenty-fourth embodiment and the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described.

In the above 16th embodiment, a case was described in which a pair of sorting passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) (parallel) along the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E130, but in the 24th and 25th embodiments, the sorting passages E150 are displaced (reciprocated) non-parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base members E9130, E10130. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 158(a) is a partial top view of the lower frame E9086b in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 158(b) is a partial top view of the lower frame E10086b in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that in FIG. 158, illustration of the distribution path E150 is omitted for easy understanding. In addition, since the lower frames E9086b and E10086b are formed line (plane) symmetrical (left-right symmetrical in FIG. 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 135) of the game board E13, ) are shown.

The lower frames E9086b and E10086b in the 24th and 25th embodiments are formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E86b in the 16th embodiment, except for the base member E130, so only the base members E9130 and E10130 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 158(a), the base member E9130 in the 24th embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E9133 formed between the opposing curved portions E131, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the opposing first inclined surfaces E9133, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the opposing mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E9130, and a plate-shaped back panel E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 138).

The first slope portion E9133 is a plate-shaped body having a horizontally long and generally rectangular shape when viewed from above, and the end portion on the curved portion E131 side is located at a predetermined distance from the lower surface of the curved portion E131 in the vertical direction downward (in the direction of arrow D). will be placed. Further, the first slope portion E9133 is formed to slope downward from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first slope portion E9133 is formed with an insertion hole E9133a, a restriction portion E133b (see FIGS. 145(b) and 146(b)), and a groove portion E9133c.

A plurality of (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the distribution passage E150 and a cover E9202 are disposed on the first slope portion E9133.

The cylinder E201 is disposed along (parallel to) the groove E9133c, and the cover E9202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylinder E201 drilled at a position corresponding to the cylinder E201, and a hole roughly the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion hole E9133a drilled at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E9133a.

A pair of groove portions E9133c are formed on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) with the insertion hole E9133a in between.

The insertion hole E9133a and the pair of grooves E9133c extend non-parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the base member E9130. Specifically, it extends obliquely forward (in the direction of arrow F) from the curved portion E131 side toward the central passage E160 side. Therefore, the distribution passage E150 (see FIG. 140) is displaced along (parallel to) the extending direction of the groove portion E9133c.

That is, when the distribution passage E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the distribution passage E150 is displaced from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side, and is also displaced to the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). . As a result, the protrusion E151 (see FIG. 140) of the distribution passage E150 can be easily brought into contact with the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E150, and the ball The direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) can be easily changed (changed) to the rear side (in the direction of arrow B). As a result, it becomes difficult for the ball to be thrown to the intervening member E140 (sixth path ERt6).

On the other hand, when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 and is also displaced forward (in the direction of arrow F). This makes it easier to abut the protrusion E151 of the sorting passage E150 against the rear side (in the direction of arrow B) of a ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, making it easier to change (alter) the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball to the forward side (in the direction of arrow F). As a result, it becomes easier to send the ball to the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6).

Note that since the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 is inserted into and engaged with the engagement recess E153a (see FIG. 145(a)), the first transmission member E194 is moved in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Even when the distribution passage E150 is displaced (reciprocating) in a non-parallel manner with respect to the displacement (reciprocating movement) of can be maintained.

In this way, the direction in which the balls tend to move (flow down, roll) can be changed (modified) when the sorting passage E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position and when it is displaced from the second position to the first position, making it possible to diversify the change (change) in the direction in which the balls move (flow down, roll).

As shown in FIG. 158(b), the base member E10130 in the 25th embodiment is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from above, and includes a pair of curved portions E131 formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), a plate-shaped wall plate E132 erected from the outer edge of the curved portions E131, a pair of first inclined surfaces E10133 formed between the opposing curved portions E131, a pair of mounting portions E134 formed between the opposing first inclined surfaces E10133, a second inclined surface E135 formed between the opposing mounting portions E134, a pair of plate-shaped protruding portions E136 erected from the front of the base member E10130, and a plate-shaped back panel E137 formed by connecting the pair of curved portions E131 (see FIG. 138).

The first inclined surface portion E10133 is a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated and generally rectangular when viewed from above, and its end portion on the curved portion E131 side is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the underside of the curved portion E131. The first inclined surface portion E10133 is formed with a downward incline from the curved portion E131 toward the attachment portion E134. The first inclined surface portion E10133 is formed with an insertion hole E10133a, a restricting portion E133b (see Figures 145(b) and 146(b)), and a groove portion E10133c.

The first inclined surface portion E10133 is provided with multiple (four in this embodiment) cylindrical bodies E201 for displacing the sorting passage E150, and a cover E10202.

The cover E10202 has a hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical body E201 at a position corresponding to the cylindrical body E201, and a hole approximately the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion hole E10133a at a position corresponding to the insertion hole E10133a.

The insertion hole E10133a is formed to have a larger width (opening) in the front-rear direction than the insertion hole E133a in the sixteenth embodiment. As a result, even when the distribution passage E150 (see FIG. 140) is displaced (reciprocated) in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) and displaced (reciprocated) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), It is possible to prevent the insertion hole E10133a and the engaged portion E153 (see FIG. 145(a)) from coming into contact with each other.

The groove portion E10133c is formed in a shape that is a combination of curved lines when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the first slope portion E10133. Further, a pair of groove portions E10133c are formed on both sides in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) with the insertion hole E10133a in between. As a result, when the distribution passage E150 is displaced from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position, the distribution passage E150 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) and in the front-rear direction ( It can be displaced in the direction of arrow FB). As a result, in the process of displacing the distribution passage E150 from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position, the distribution passage E150 is displaced forward (in the direction of arrow F) and rearward (in the direction of arrow F). B direction side)), and the number of changes (changes) in the direction in which the ball is likely to move (flow down, roll) can be increased.

Note that since the engagement portion E194c of the first transmission member E194 is inserted into and engaged with the engagement recess E153a (see FIG. 145(a)), the first transmission member E194 is moved in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Even when the distribution passage E150 is displaced (reciprocating) in a non-parallel manner with respect to the displacement (reciprocating movement) of can be maintained.

Next, the distribution passage E11150 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159(a) and 148.

In the above 17th embodiment, the sorting passage E2150 rotates around the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) relative to the flat surface E2133 as the rotation axis. In the 26th embodiment, however, the sorting passage E11150 rotates around the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) relative to the flat surface E2133 as the rotation axis. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 159(a) is a front perspective view of the distribution passageway E11150 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. The distribution passage E11150 is formed in the same manner as the distribution passage E2150 except for the number and arrangement position of the support parts E2150b of the distribution passage E2150 in the seventeenth embodiment. Descriptions of items other than E11150b will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the support portion E11150b of the distribution passage E11150 is formed to protrude from the lower surface of the distribution passage E11150 on the central passage E160 side toward the central passage E160 side. The support portion E11150b is disposed approximately at the center of the distribution passage E11150 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The support portion E11150b has an insertion hole substantially the same as the insertion hole drilled in the support portion E2150b, i.e., an insertion hole slightly larger than the outer shape of the support shaft E20j, drilled in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the support portion E11150b.

In this way, in the lower frame E11086b in the 26th embodiment, the sorting passage E11150 can be rotated with the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) relative to the flat portion E2133 as the rotation axis. In particular, the curved portion E131 side of the sorting passage E11150 can be displaced in the front-back direction (arrow F-B direction) with the axis of the insertion hole drilled in the support portion E11150b as the rotation axis. This allows a velocity component in the front-back direction to be imparted to the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the rolling surface E2151 of the sorting passage E11150, and the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls can be diversified. As a result, the change in the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the distribution passages E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 in the 27th to 30th embodiments will be described with reference to Figures 159(b) to 159(e). Note that the 27th to 30th embodiments will be described with reference to Figure 136 as appropriate.

In the above 16th embodiment, the protrusion E151 is formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E150. However, in the 27th to 30th embodiments, the protrusions E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 of the sorting passages E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 are formed in various shapes. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 159(b) is a view of the sorting passage E12150 in the 27th embodiment viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E12150, Figure 159(c) is a view of the sorting passage E13150 in the 28th embodiment viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E13150, Figure 159(d) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the sorting passage E12150 in the 29th embodiment, and Figure 159(e) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the sorting passage E13150 in the 30th embodiment. Note that Figures 159(d) and 159(e) correspond to the cross section taken along line CXLVIIa-CXLVIIa in Figure 146. In addition, since the protrusions E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are regularly arranged on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, only a portion of them are shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 159(b), the protrusion E12151 of the sorting passage E12150 in the 27th embodiment is formed to protrude spherically from the upper surface of the sorting passage E12150. This allows the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) along the upper surface of the sorting passage E12150 to move (flowing down, rolling) along the outer surface of the protrusion E12151, preventing the balls from displacing (reverse flow, rolling) upward in the inclined direction. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily visually see how the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) is being changed, improving the enjoyment of the game.

Note that the distance between the opposing protrusions E12151 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the ball can be prevented from remaining in the distribution passage E12150, and the ball can be moved along the inclination direction of the distribution passage E12150 from the end of the distribution passage E12150 on the curved part E131 side to the end on the central passage E160 side. Can move (flow down, roll) (in parallel). As a result, in order to prevent the ball from remaining in the distribution path E12150, it is possible to prevent the distribution path E12150 from displacing in a complicated trajectory, or at a large displacement amount or displacement speed, and to control the driving means E190. Can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 159(c), the projection E13151 of the distribution passage E13150 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is protruded from the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150, and has a substantially rhombic (quadrangular) shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the distribution passage E13150. formed into a shape. Further, the protrusion E13151 is formed in a manner in which a portion of the apex side of a quadrangular pyramid is cut off, similar to the protrusion E151 in the sixteenth embodiment. In other words, the cross-sectional area in a plane parallel to the distribution passageway E13150 becomes smaller as the distance from the upper surface of the distribution passageway E13150 increases.

As a result, the straight line portion formed along (parallel to) the inclination direction with respect to the protrusion E151 in the sixteenth embodiment can be omitted, so that movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball in the inclination direction on the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150 can be omitted. (motion) can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to increase the movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball in the direction perpendicular to the inclination direction on the upper surface of the distribution passage E13150. As a result, the movement of the ball (flowing down, The number of changes (changes) in the rolling direction can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 159(d), the projection E14151 of the distribution passage E14150 in the twenty-ninth embodiment is formed to protrude conically from the upper surface of the distribution passage E14150. As a result, the ball moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution path E14150 can be moved (flowing down, rolling) along the outer surface of the protrusion E14151, and the ball can also move over the protrusion E14151. Movement (flowing down, rolling) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily see how the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball is changed, and it is possible to prevent the change in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball due to the protrusion E14151 from becoming monotonous. It can be suppressed and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 159(e), the side surface of the projection E15151 of the distribution passage E15150 in the 30th embodiment is recessed toward the center of the projection E15151. As a result, the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) on the upper surface of the distribution passage E15150 can easily overcome the protrusion E15151, and the directions of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls can be varied. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the lower frame E16086b in the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160(a).

In the above 19th embodiment, a protrusion E151 is formed on the upper surface of the second sorting passage E4150, and the direction in which the balls flow (roll) is changed (altered). In the 31st embodiment, the balls flow (roll) toward a specific position. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description is omitted.

Figure 160(a) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame E16086b in the 31st embodiment. Note that Figure 160(a) illustrates the state in which the sorting passage E150 is placed in the second position.

The lower frame E16086b in the 31st embodiment is formed with the same configuration as the lower frame E4086b in the 19th embodiment, except for the second distribution passage E4150, so only the second distribution passage E16150 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 160(a), the second distribution passage E16150 is arranged parallel to the distribution passage E150 in a front view. It is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward E134 (see FIG. 152(a)). The second distribution passage E16150 is formed into a substantially rectangular plate-like body when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the second distribution passage E16150, and the length in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is the center of the distribution passage E150. It is formed to have approximately the same length in the front-rear direction on the passage E160 side. Thereby, in a state where the distribution passage E150 is arranged at the second position, a ball passing through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the central passage E160 side can be thrown (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. In other words, a ball flowing down from the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (arrow F direction side) or the notch E150a of the distribution passage E150 is thrown (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. This can be suppressed.

A guide portion E16154 is erected on the outer edge of the second distribution path E16150, and a guide cutout portion E16154a is cut into the guide portion E16154 on the central path E160 side. The guide cutout portion E16154a is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, and is formed at a position corresponding to the central path E160 (construction path E161) in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction). This allows a ball that has passed through the guide cutout portion E16154a of the second distribution path E16150 (having crossed the second distribution path E16150 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction)) to be sent (guided, dropped) to the central path E160 (construction path E161, fourth path ERt4).

In addition, the guide section E16154 can prevent balls sent (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150 from being sent (guided, falling) from anywhere other than the guide cutout section E16154a, so that the balls can be sent (guided, falling) more reliably to the central passage E160 (the erected passage E161, the fourth passage ERt4). This makes it easier for balls to enter the first winning opening 64 in the second distribution passage E16150 (increasing the probability of winning in the first winning opening 64) than in the distribution passage E150.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the distribution passage E150 is positioned in the second position, i.e., when balls can be sent (guided) from the distribution passage E150 to the second distribution passage E16150, balls passing through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the central passage E160 side can be made to more easily enter the first winning hole 64 (increasing the probability of winning the first winning hole 64), thereby increasing the interest of the game (see FIG. 135).

On the other hand, the ball flowing down from the end of the distribution passage E150 on the side of the intervening member E140 (arrow F direction side) or the notch E150a of the distribution passage E150 is thrown (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. can be suppressed. This allows the player to expect the ball to pass through the end of the distribution path E150 on the central path E160 side.

In addition, when the distribution passage E150 is arranged in the first position, it is possible to prevent balls flowing down from the end of the distribution passage E150 from being sent (guided) to the second distribution passage E16150. This allows the player to expect that the ball will pass through the end of the distribution passage E150 on the central passage E160 side when the distribution passage E150 is arranged in the second position. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest of the game.

Next, the lower frame E17086b in the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160(b).

In the 20th embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion E151 is formed on the upper surface of the third distribution passage E5150 and the direction of flow (rolling) of the ball is changed (changed), but in the 32nd embodiment, A ball is flown (rolled) toward a specific location. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160(b) is a partially enlarged top view of the lower frame E17086b in the 32nd embodiment. Note that FIG. 160(b) shows a state in which the distribution passageway E150 is arranged at the first position.

The lower frame E17086b in the 32nd embodiment has the same configuration as the lower frame E5086b in the 20th embodiment except for the third distribution passage E5150, so only the third distribution passage E17150 is formed. explain.

As shown in FIG. 160(b), the third distribution path E17150 extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) as a substantially linear path when viewed from above, and its cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is curved into an arc that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction). The third distribution path E17150 is also disposed with a downward incline from the rear panel E5137 side (arrow B direction) to the interposed member E140 side (arrow F direction).

A guide portion E17154 is provided upright on the outer edge of the third distribution passage E17150, and a guide notch portion E17154a is formed in the guide portion E17154 on the side of the intervening member E140 (in the direction of arrow F). The guide notch E17154a is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed at a position corresponding to the upper hole E162 of the central passage E160 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). As a result, the ball that has passed through the guide notch E17154a (crossed the second distribution passage E16150 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) is transferred to the upper hole E162 (fourth passage ERt4) or the central passage E135b. The ball can be thrown (guided, dropped) to (seventh passage ERt7).

In addition, the guide portion E17154 can prevent the ball sent (guided) to the third distribution passage E17150 from being sent (guided, falling) from anywhere other than the guide cutout portion E17154a, and can more reliably send (guided, falling) the ball to the upper hole E162 (fourth passage ERt4) or the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7). This makes it easier for the third distribution passage E17150 to allow the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 (increasing the probability of the ball entering the first winning hole 64) than the distribution passage E150.

In this way, in this embodiment, the ball passes through the end of the distribution path E150 on the center path E160 side and is thrown (guided) to the center path E160 (fourth path ERt4) or the third distribution path E17150. It is possible to easily win the ball into the first winning hole 64 (higher probability of winning into the first winning hole 64), and the interest in the game can be increased (see FIG. 135).

In addition, when the distribution passage E150 is placed in the first position, the ball can be thrown (guided) from the third distribution passage E17150 to the upper hole E162 (fourth passage ERt4), and the distribution passage E150 is placed in the first position. In the arranged state, the ball can be thrown (guided) from the third distribution path E17150 to the center path E135b (seventh path ERt7). That is, even when the distribution path E150 is placed in either the first position or the second position, it is possible to easily win the ball into the first winning hole 64 (higher the probability of winning into the first winning hole 64).

On the other hand, balls that passed through the end of the distribution path E150 on the center path E160 side but were not thrown (guided) to the center path E160 (fourth path ERt4) and the third distribution path E17150, that is, the second slope The ball thrown (guided) to the section E135 (fifth passage ERt5) is made difficult to enter the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning the first winning hole 64 is lowered). This allows the player to not only have the ball pass through the end of the distribution path E150 on the center path E160 side, but also to throw (guide) the ball to the center path E160 (fourth path ERt4) or the third distribution path E17150. I can make you look forward to it. As a result, the gameplay can be diversified and the interest of the game can be increased.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment. The same applies to the modified examples (separate embodiments) shown below, in which a part or all of the configuration in one modified example is combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another modified example, and a different embodiment is created. It is also possible to use a modified example. The embodiments to which the modifications shown below are applied are arbitrary, and any modification (combination or replacement of modifications) may be applied to any embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the balls are first caused to flow toward the front by the sorting device 300, and then flow backwards, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to ensure the time required for the balls to flow downward by forming multiple bends in the path or a deceleration protrusion that decelerates the balls, without forming a portion that causes the balls to flow toward the front.

In the above first embodiment, the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 is described as being curved, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any shape can be used as long as it can block the flow of balls by contact. For example, it may be configured as an inclined flat surface, or may be formed with many small protrusions protruding from a flat surface, so that an irregular load is applied to the colliding ball.

In the first embodiment described above, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down the distribution device 300, the case is explained in which the ball flows down exclusively through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left and right center portions of the specific prize opening 65a, and the ball may be formed to be able to directly flow into the third flow path forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one ball at a time, the ball does not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a as a group, the ball can pass through the opening. Also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning a prize opening 65a, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path forming section 335. Furthermore, in this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. That is, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left-right direction, or immediately after flowing down in the front-rear direction (flowing down towards the near side). Branching to the respective detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may also occur.

In the first embodiment described above, the channel directions and inclinations of the flow channel components 334 to 336 have been described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to these. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of "laying down" that is routinely performed.

"Laying down" refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 in a tilted position in the front-to-rear direction, rather than in a vertical position. Normally, pachinko machines are installed in a position (laying down) tilted backwards by about 1 degree (four-five rin). Compared to the explanation of the sorting device 300 alone (not laying down) above, when considering an installation angle of about 1 degree, the meaning of the inclination of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 336, which have a tilt in the front-to-rear direction, changes.

In other words, as described above, the sorting device 300 alone is designed so that the first flow path component 334 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front, and the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 5 degrees to the rear, but when the installation angle is considered, both the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 form flow paths that are inclined downward by 6 degrees. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, so it is less affected by the installation angle and can be considered to be inclined at about 5 degrees, as described above.

In this case, regarding the flow of the ball in the sorting device 300, the acceleration of the ball in the first flow path configuration section 334 and the third flow path configuration section 336 is the same, and the acceleration is slightly different in the second flow path configuration section 335. becomes smaller. Therefore, since the speed of the ball flowing down in the left and right direction can be reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. In addition, since the first flow path forming part 334 is still shorter than the third flow path forming part 336, the first flow path forming part 334 is shorter than passing through the third flow path forming part 336. It can be passed between.

In this way, the flow of balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the rest of the Pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path forming part 334, 336 is made smaller than the angle of bending (approximately 1 degree), the direction of flow of the ball in the flow path forming parts 334, 336 will change depending on the quality of bending (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the tilt angle to be larger than the tilt angle.

In addition, in a configuration in which the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front and back direction, and the flow path is visible, slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the flow path may cause There is a possibility that the degree of laziness of the pachinko machine 10 can be ascertained. If you really want to understand the degree of aging, the flow path of the sorting device 300 should be configured to be easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the degree of "rest" from being understood from slight differences in the speed at which the ball flows down, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are arranged to surround the front periphery of each flow path component 334-336, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion surface 340 is arranged to reduce visibility on the lower side.

In this way, the visibility of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336 is made poor except at the player's normal line of sight (a range of 0 degrees to approximately 30 degrees from the front). This makes it possible to avoid the degree of "rest" of the pachinko machine 10 being understood by comparing the flow speed of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the slope of the first flow path forming part 334 is larger than the slope of the third flow path forming part 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, this slope relationship may be reversed, or the slopes may be configured with the same slope.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape or may have a stepwise bent flow path shape.

In addition, the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of each flow path configuration section 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow paths may be bent at acute angles or obtuse angles at the connection points. Also, a crane may be used as each of the flow path configuration sections 334-336.

In the first embodiment, the third flow path component 336 is designed so that the time required for a ball to pass through it is 0.3 seconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the third flow path component 336 may be designed so that the time required for the ball to pass through it is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). This allows the balls flowing upstream down the third flow path component 336 to function as a screen for the balls flowing downstream down the third flow path component 336, even if the balls enter the sorting device 300 while maintaining the launch interval (0.6 seconds).

In the first embodiment, the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path components 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to provide long, alternating ridges that protrude from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction that intersects with the flow direction of the game ball, and to configure the ball to decelerate by colliding with these ridges. This makes it possible to ensure the flow time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be evenly arranged over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, by forming no ridges on the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335, and forming ridges only on the third flow path component 336, the balls can be made to quickly reach the third flow path component 336 while flowing slowly down the third flow path component 336.

Further, the direction in which the protrusions are provided may be such that they are protruded alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the ball's downward path, or they may be protruded from the bottom to the top at a predetermined interval. You can also go in that direction.

When protruding from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the placement so that this load does not erroneously guide the ball to the normal detection sensor SE12. For example, at the position closest to the sliding displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner portions, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 but toward the partition plate portion 338, making it easier to avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

When protruding from below to above, the protrusion itself may function as a screen for the sliding displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position taking into account the player's line of sight.

The protrusions may be formed so that they can move in and out. In this case, they may be able to block the flow of the ball when in the protruding state, and resume the flow of the ball when in the retracted state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the slide displacement member 370 is covered by the balls flowing down the front side is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be covered by this decorative member. This decorative member may be driven, or may be operated by the weight of the balls.

Furthermore, when the ball is used to blind the user, the ball is not limited to being placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is disposed on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the ball is disposed between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If this is done, a blinding function can be created.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the balls that reach the slide displacement member 370 are concealed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be positioned behind the play area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be concealed, or the other general winning openings 63 may be concealed.

In the above first embodiment, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are described as being formed from linear flow paths capable of guiding balls one by one, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed as meandering flow paths, or flow paths that branch into multiple paths, or they may be configured to have different flow path widths, with balls more likely to remain in the areas where the flow path width is large.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a blinding effect is produced by the ball heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging the balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, disposed so as to intersect on the near side), and The slide displacement member 370 may be hidden by the discharge path and a ball disposed in the discharge path.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which balls that enter the specific winning port 65a flow exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (the near side), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes balls may be disposed downstream of the specific winning port 65a, and the distribution mechanism may select balls that flow to the second flow path component 335 side, so that some of the balls flow to the second flow path component 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device so as to operate in a constant manner from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a constant pattern from the power on of the Pachinko machine. It may be controlled as follows.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of ball entering changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side. For example, when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball enters exceeding the count number (10 pieces/round) (excess winning), the ball is configured to flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side. It's okay. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second channel forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of paid out excess prize balls, and the player can quickly grasp the additional profit to be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if a ball enters when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is four (full), the ball may be configured to flow to the second flow path configuration section 335 side. In this case, by visually checking the ball flowing on the second flow path configuration section 335 side, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

If the displacement is caused by the weight of the ball, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or it may be configured to perform a different action depending on the number of arriving balls. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the balls may not flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning openings 65a together, the balls may flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335. The reverse may also be possible.

Furthermore, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged in a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

Here, if the time for the ball to flow down from the specific prize opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the game may be delayed due to the long ball ejection time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-mentioned distribution mechanism, a certain number of balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a are allowed to flow down to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and subsequent balls are The liquid may be discharged without passing through the flow path forming section 335. Thereby, there is no need to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 300 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is caused to flow toward the near side near the lower end of the gaming area. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the specific winning hole 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or when viewed from the front. It may be configured to be placed on the front side of the display area.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be made to be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player obtains from the falling ball on the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can check the display to determine whether the profit is large or small. You can easily check whether you have earned it or not.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 are seen in a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 may be configured in an arrangement relationship such that they are seen overlapping, without being shifted up or down in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300, but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In the above first embodiment, the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370 is described as switching the slide displacement member 370 to the front position at a time when the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to switch to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that reaches the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds have passed can be made to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the forward flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed will enter the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

If the trailing ball is positioned to blind the forward flow ball, the player will not be able to see when the forward flow ball's flow changes (downward) toward the special chance detection sensor SE11, because the trailing ball will hide it. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player is likely to believe that the ball has not entered the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the display effect of the time saving state and the probability variation state can be made similar to maintain the player's sense of expectation. In a gaming machine, the presentation effect of the display presentation can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 may be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, The degree of freedom in the downward direction of the ball is increased by arranging a It may be configured so that it can be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the slide displacement member 370 and each of the protrusions 317 to 319 are formed separately, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protrusions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the respective protrusions 317 to 319 may be configured to protrude from the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as the operation pattern Y in which the possibility of being hidden by a ball is taken into account, but the operation pattern is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be incorporated to cause the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at the timing when it is hidden by the ball.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed depending on the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width of the guide elongated hole 616 to form the outer phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed using magnetic force or the biasing force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the shape of the guide slot 616 is bent at an intermediate position, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, a plurality of positions can be formed where resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ while the rotating member 620 is rotating. For example, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed in a shape that allows the supported member 640 to be guided so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is fixed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 may be formed through which the axis O1 can move, and the guide slot 616 through which the axis O1 is guided may be switched by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620), or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be shape-changeable.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration has been described in which the second decorative rotating member 660 is placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 and the first presentation surface 661a is directed diagonally forward and to the left, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, it may be configured such that the performance surface is directed forward and diagonally to the right when it is placed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or when it is placed on the lower side (upper side) of the third symbol display device 81. The display surface may be configured to face diagonally upward (downward) in the front direction.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged at the base end of the displacement, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a linearly displaced member may be arranged at the base end of the displacement. On the other hand, using the rotating member 620 instead of a linearly displaced member functions favorably in ensuring the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a horizontally sliding member is fixed to the active side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.) limited to. On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (angle b1 etc.) can be used. Note that, regardless of this favorable effect, a linear sliding member may be connected to the active side of the supported member 640.

In the above first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and decorations are applied to three sides that intersect at right angles, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and each side may be configured to be controlled to stop in a position facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display that can be easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the rotation member 620 and the second decorative rotation member 660 can intersect at right angles, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with the front-rear component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above first embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is set to make it easier to maintain the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet may be configured to generate an adhesive force between itself and a magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710, so that this adhesive force is easily generated when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state.

In addition, for example, the inclined portions 751, 762 may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape, rather than being formed linearly. In addition, when using the coil spring CS2, the spring is not limited to a spring that generates a biasing force only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and may be configured to generate a biasing force in response to the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, instead of the elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be provided for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support tube that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the gaming area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode may be adopted in which it protrudes to the front side by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be crossed from below to the front, or the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be extended forward from above the gaming area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction so that the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized together, thereby reducing the discriminating ability. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, instead of a mode in which the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 rotate while facing the front side, it may be a mode in which they rotate while facing left and right outward. Further, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 commonly use the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850) to rotate the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member. 834, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 in the shape of a single stroke, and a protrusion protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, depending on the design of the groove, the rotating member The rotation timing of 834 can be defined.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation when the output of the detection sensor 813 changes from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is reversed in a state in which the detectable portion 844 is not arranged on the detection sensor 813, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detectable portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are different in some places, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870, 880, or both decorative members 870, 880 may be plated.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In addition, in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to occur regardless of the switching of the operation mode, so a torque limiter is better at reducing displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operation mode is switched to integral rotation operation. This makes it easy to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plating portion 871a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is placed on the base end side of the metal rod 832 (on the inner diameter side of the circle), so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833, but during the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 When the metal rod 833 is placed on the distal end side (the outer diameter side of the circle), the base end side of the metal rod 832 (the inner diameter side of the circle) is exposed, making it possible to reflect the light LD1. It is.

In the above second to seventh embodiments, the balls roll in series on the bottom surface C142, C2142 of the first intermediate member C140, C2140, and only one ball flows into the distribution member C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portion C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portion C173, C2173, C3173) at a time. However, the bottom surface C142, C2142 of the first intermediate member C140, C2140 may be configured so that two or more balls can roll in parallel on the bottom surface C142, C2142, and two or more balls can flow into the distribution member C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portion C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portion C173, C2173, C3173) at a time.

In the second to seventh embodiments described above, a case was described in which a ball flowing down the area of the play area on the left side as viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 72) (the area between center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and rail 61) flows into (enters) lower frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b. However, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may also be used in which a ball flowing down the area of the play area on the right side as viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 72) flows into (enters) lower frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b.

In the second to seventh embodiments described above, a case has been described in which one upper frame passage CRt0 is communicated with the intake ports COPin and COP2000in, but a plurality of upper frame passages CRt0 are formed in the upper frame C86b, and they are connected to each other. It may be configured to communicate with the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in.

In the second to seventh embodiments, the case where the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 return to the first position by their own weight has been described. However, a biasing means may be provided, and the biasing force of the biasing means may be applied as an auxiliary force when the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 return to the first position. Alternatively, the biasing force may be applied as an auxiliary force when the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 are displaced to the second position. Examples of the biasing means include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a leaf spring.

In the second and third embodiments described above, the distribution members C170 and C2170 are directly supported by the shafts C192 and C2174, but the distribution members C170 and C2170 may be displaceable by a link mechanism. In this case, the link mechanism may be a parallel link mechanism or an unequal length link mechanism.

In the above third embodiment, a passage (fourth passage CRt2004) through which the balls that roll on the rolling portion C2173 of the sorting member C2170 pass is formed by the magnetic portion C2400, but like other passages, the fourth passage CRt2004 may be formed as a passage through which the balls roll along the rolling surface and pass (flow down).

In the fourth embodiment, the guide groove C3131c is formed in a straight line, but it may be curved. It may also be a shape that combines a straight line and a curve.

In the above fifth embodiment, the arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is described as being formed with a uniform arc shape (same curvature) in top view, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and arc shapes with different radii may be combined. For example, the curvature of the arc at one end side and the other end side of the arc portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) may be made larger than the curvature of the arc in the region between the one end side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a), i.e., the curvature of the arc in the region including the outflow surface C122a may be made smaller. In this case, in the initial stage (the stage where the balls reciprocate to one and the other longitudinal ends of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or their vicinity), it is easier to reciprocate the balls and to make it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball, while in the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating balls is slowed down (the balls do not reach the one and the other longitudinal ends of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or their vicinity, and the balls reciprocate in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a), it is easier to maintain the leading ball and the trailing ball in a connected state. As a result, it is easier to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the two balls in a connected state.

In the fifth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom portion C4122 in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is approximately horizontal in the arcuate portion C4122b. In other words, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the circular arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction. It may be curved into a circular arc shape that is convex in the direction (direction). Alternatively, it may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane similar to the pair of linear portions C4122a, or may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane different from the pair of linear portions C4122a. As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof), it is easy to reciprocate the ball, and the ball that follows the preceding ball At the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball has become low (the ball does not reach one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a In the stage where the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the ball, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

In the fifth embodiment, the lower bottom portion C4122 (the straight portion C4122a and the arcuate portion C4122b) may be formed to be inclined downward in the direction away from the cutout portion C124a (in the direction of arrow L). As a result, while pressing the ball against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch portion C124a, the ball rolls (reciprocates) in the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). can be done.

In the second, third, and fifth embodiments described above, a protrusion may be provided around the outflow surface C122a to protrude vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from rolling from the outflow surface C122a to both ends in the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portions C122, C2122, and C4122, and it is possible to easily cause the ball to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). .

In the sixth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 is linear in the width direction (direction of arrow FB), but it is not necessarily limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the protrusion of C5400 may be curved into an arc. If the arc shape has approximately the same radius as the radius of the sphere and is convex vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U), the contact area between the sphere and the magnetic part C5400 can be increased, and the sphere It can be suppressed from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C5400. On the other hand, if the arc shape is convex in the vertical direction downward (in the direction of arrow D), it is possible to form an aspect in which the ball sways when flowing down, and there is also a possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (the fifth passage The possibility of not being able to reach CRt2005 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the behavior of the ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the seventh embodiment, the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (i.e., a surface that is closer to the back member C2130 as it moves vertically upward), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion may be formed as an inclined surface facing the opposite side to the back member C2130 (i.e., a surface that moves away from the back member C2130 as it moves vertically upward). This allows the ball attracted to the magnetic part C6400 to be disposed at a position where it is separated from the back member C2130, and prevents the ball flowing down along the magnetic part C6400 from coming into contact with the back member C2130.

In the third and seventh embodiments, as the main body C2131 of the back member C2130 goes vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D), the inclined surface approaches the magnetic parts C2400 and C6400 (in the direction of arrow F) (that is, in the vertical direction The surface may be formed as a surface that approaches the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400 as it goes downward. This allows the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 and the back member C2130 to sandwich the ball flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C6400, and prevents the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C6400. can be suppressed.

In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments, in addition to the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130, a magnet C2300 may be additionally disposed vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). . When the added magnet C2300 is placed vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the center of the ball attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, the magnetic force acting on the ball is reduced by the added magnet C2300. Since the orientation is upward in the vertical direction, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling before moving to the downstream ends of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400. On the other hand, when the added magnet C2300 is placed vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the center of the ball attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, the added magnet C2300 acts on the ball. Since the direction of the magnetic force is vertically downward, the possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased.

In the third, sixth and seventh embodiments, the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back surface member C2130 may be formed to extend vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). This allows the ball to be attracted by the effect of the magnetic force directly applied from the magnet C2300 in addition to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400, and prevents the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400.

In the third, sixth and seventh embodiments, the magnetic forces of the magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400 may be differentiated. For example, if the magnetic force of the magnet C2300 arranged upstream is stronger than that of the other magnets C2300, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling part C2173 can be easily attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400, that is, it can be easily guided to the fourth passage CRt2004. Also, for example, if the magnetic force of one magnet C2300 of the multiple magnets C2300 is weaker than that of the other magnets C2300, the possibility that the ball passing through that one magnet C2300 will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. This can increase the excitement of the game.

In the third, sixth and seventh embodiments, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400 may be changed. For example, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged downstream is inclined vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D) relative to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged upstream. In other words, when the magnets C2300 are arranged in a convex shape, it is possible to easily direct the balls flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400 toward the magnets C2300 arranged downstream, and to prevent the balls from falling from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400. On the other hand, when the magnets C2300 arranged downstream are arranged in such a way that they are inclined vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged upstream, in other words, when the magnets C2300 are arranged in a concave shape, the possibility that the balls will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 at the boundary between the upstream and downstream sides of the magnet C2300 (the possibility that they will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. The arrangement shape of the magnets C2300 may be formed in a straight line or in an arc. Instead of the magnets C2300, the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be arranged in the above shape (convex or concave, and linear or arc).

In the third, sixth and seventh embodiments, the adjacent magnets C2300 of the multiple magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400 may be spaced apart. In this case, a section in which no magnetic force acts on the ball can be created in the extension direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400, and the possibility of the ball falling from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400 in this section (the possibility of it not reaching the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the case where the weight of a ball acts on the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the displacement member D180 may be formed so that the weight of a ball acts on the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the closed position. That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are arranged in the initial position (first position), the displacement member D180 may be arranged in the open position, and when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are arranged in the second position, the displacement member D180 may be arranged in the closed position. In this case, when a ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the side where it is difficult for the ball to flow down (enter) the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, when a first ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, it is more difficult for a second ball to flow down (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 before the first ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 than when the first ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, which increases the interest of the game.

When the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are configured so that the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball is applied to them, the structure in which the displacement (rotation) of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 from their initial positions (first positions) to their second positions is transmitted to the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 can be reversed from the case described above (the cases of the 8th to 15th embodiments). That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the positional relationship between the transmitting parts D173 and D3173 and the receiving parts D193 and D3193 can be set so that the transmitting members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 rotate in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case.

Specifically, in the eighth embodiment, the transmitted part D193 is extended in a direction away from the rolling member D170 (to the right in FIG. 119(a), in the direction of arrow R), and the transmitting part D173 is extended up to above the transmitted part D193, so that when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting part D173 pushes the transmitted part D193 downward (in the direction of arrow D) (i.e., rotates the transmitting member D190 in the opposite direction to the eighth embodiment (clockwise in FIG. 119(a)).

In the tenth embodiment, the transmitted part D3193 is extended toward the rolling member D170 (left side of FIG. 124(a), in the direction of arrow L), and the transmitting part D3173 is extended below the transmitted part D3193. When the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting part D3173 pushes the transmitted part D3193 upward (in the direction of arrow U) (i.e., rotates the transmitting member D3190 in the opposite direction to the tenth embodiment (clockwise in FIG. 124(a)).

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a pair of displacement members D180 is displaced by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 (the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is transmitted to the pair of displacement members D180 by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190), but a configuration may be used in which two transmission members are provided and one of the pair of displacement members D180 is displaced by the first transmission member and the other by the second transmission member (the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170 or the second rolling member D4220 is transmitted to one and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 by the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively).

In this case, for example, in the eleventh embodiment, the displacement of the rolling member D170 may be transmitted by the first transmission member, and the displacement of the second rolling member D4220 may be transmitted by the second transmission member. Thereby, the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which the facing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between the front surface of the main body D131 of the rear member D130, D4130, D8130 and the rear surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140, D6140 in the sixth passage DRt6 is constant along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), and the facing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between an imaginary surface (plane) connecting the tips of multiple protrusions D131f and an imaginary surface (plane) connecting the tips of multiple protrusions D141g is constant along the vertical direction (direction of arrows U-D), but at least one of these facing distances may be changed along the vertical direction.

For example, the opposing distance may be narrowed upward (in the direction of arrow U, in the direction moving away from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body parts D172, D3172)). This allows balls that bounce up from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body parts D172, D3172) to quickly descend, making it easier for the weight of the ball to act. This technical concept also applies to the opposing distance in the eighth passage DRt8.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case will be described in which protrusions D131f and D141g are protruded from the front surface of the main body D131 of the back members D130, D4130, D8130 and the back surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140, respectively. However, a configuration may be adopted in which recesses are provided in the front surface of the main body D131 of the back members D130, D4130, D8130 and the back surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140, respectively. The passage (rolling) of the ball can also be delayed by the recess.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the protrusions D131f and D141g are exemplified as an example of a delay means for delaying the passage of the ball, but other means may be used. Examples of other means include means (such as a windmill, a metal elastic spring (leaf spring or coil spring), a resin elastic piece, a rubber sheet, etc.) that are arranged at a position where the ball passing (rolling) on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172, D3172, or D4222 of the rolling member D170, D3170, or the second rolling member D4220 can come into contact with the ball, and are displaced or deformed by the contact. In other words, examples of means that use energy (kinetic energy or viscous resistance) generated by contact with the ball to delay the passage of the ball are exemplified.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172, D3172, D4222 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is flat, but the upper surface (rolling surface) may be provided with irregularities or steps. This provides resistance to the ball, slowing its passage (rolling).

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the sixth passage DRt6 (the opposite side of the pair of displacement members D180) Although a case has been described in which the ball is made easier to enter (enter the ball) into the ball (between the ball and the ball), a configuration opposite to this may be used. That is, the initial position of the displacement member D180 is the open position, and when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position. The ball may be made less likely to flow into (enter into) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). In this case, the game state may be such that the ball flowing into the fourth path DRt4 or the fifth path DRt5 is more advantageous than the ball flowing into the sixth path DRt6.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the case where the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 are provided to transmit the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170, or the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180 has been described, but the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 may be omitted. In other words, the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170, or the second rolling member D4220 may be directly connected to the displacement member D180 (displacement member D180 unit), and the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170, or the second rolling member D4220 may be directly transmitted to the displacement member D180.

For example, grooves D194L, D194R of the transmission member D190 (main body D194) are provided in the rolling members D170, D3170, 8170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is connected (inserted) into the grooves D194L, D194R. This allows the number of parts to be reduced by the amount that the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190 are omitted, thereby reducing product costs.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, in the initial position (when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position), a gap is formed between the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting members D190 and D2190 and the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170 in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D), while no gap is formed between the transmitted part D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 and the transmitting part D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight part D195 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220 in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D). However, this may be reversed.

That is, in the initial position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position), there is a gap in the vertical direction (arrow U- A gap is not formed between the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 and the transmitting portion D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight portion D195 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting portion of the second rolling member D4220. A configuration may be adopted in which a gap is formed in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD) between D4223 and D4223.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the pair of displacement members D180 are rotatable, but at least one (or both) of the pair of displacement members D180 may be configured to be slidably displaced. Even in a configuration in which there is slidable displacement, the ease with which the ball can enter the sixth passage DRt6 can be changed, thereby improving the excitement of the game. Examples of the manner of slidable displacement include a manner in which there is displacement along a straight line, a manner in which there is displacement along a curved line, and a manner in which there is displacement along a shape that combines a straight line and a curved line.

This displacement mode is the same for rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, second rolling member D4220, and transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190, and at least one of these (or A configuration may also be used in which all of the components can be slid and displaced.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 are configured to be able to return to their initial positions by their own weight. Although a case has been described in which a case is described in which the holder is returned to the initial position, a biasing means may be provided that applies a biasing force in the direction of returning to the initial position. If these returns to the initial positions can be performed quickly, the displacement member D180 can be quickly placed in the closed position, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Note that examples of the biasing means include a coil spring, a leaf spring, a torsion spring, and a rubber-like elastic body.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which a pair of displacement members D180 are provided, but the number of displacement members D180 may be one or three or more. good. That is, it is sufficient that the ease with which the ball flows into the sixth passageway DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by changing the distance between the pair of displacement members D180. However, the distance between the pair of displacement members D180 may not be changed. For example, the displacement (rotation) directions of one and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 may be the same (the distance between the displacement members is constant, and the position of the open portion at the tip of the displacement member D180 is displaced left and right (in the direction of the arrows L-D)). In other words, it is sufficient that the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, one of the pair of displacement members D180 is always linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190, and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 is the transmission member D190, D2190. , D3190, D5190, and D7190 are not interlocked for a predetermined period of time, but a configuration in which both of the pair of displacement members D180 are always interlocked with the displacement of transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 has been described. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which both of the pair of displacement members D180 are not interlocked with the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 for a predetermined period.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusions D131f and D141g are formed continuously along the extending direction (vertical direction), but the protruding parts D131f and D141g are It may be formed discontinuously (formed intermittently) along the direction. This makes it easier to provide resistance to the upward bounce of the ball. In this case, the protrusions D131f and D141g may be arranged in a staggered manner along the extension direction (vertical direction). This makes it easier to provide resistance to the upward bounce of the ball.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, although the description is omitted, the ball flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other), and the main body parts of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170. A restricting means may be provided to restrict the ball that has fallen onto the upper surface of D172, D3172 from moving in the direction opposite to the rolling direction (direction of arrow R) in main body portions D172, D3172. The regulating means may be provided on any of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the back surface members D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate members D140, D6140. Further, as the regulating means, a shape that is erected from any one of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the back member D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate member D140, D6140 and is formed so as to be able to abut against the ball is used. The parts are exemplified.

In the eighth embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment, the ball that has flown (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is transferred to the main body portions D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170. Although the case where the ball is dropped onto the upper surface has been described, the ball that has flown (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is dropped onto the back member D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate member D140. , D6140, and the ball is dropped onto the upper surface of a portion (receiving portion) formed in the receiving portion, and the ball flows (rolls) into the main body portions D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170. When the impact of the fall has subsided (reduced), the main bodies D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 can receive the ball. vibration) can be suppressed.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) are arranged in parallel (side by side) when viewed from above (in the direction of arrow D) (i.e., arranged at different positions in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of arrow F-B)). In this case, the dimensions of the lower frames D86b to D8086b in the up-down direction (in the direction of arrows U-D) can be reduced. However, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) may also be arranged in parallel (side by side) when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow B) (i.e., arranged at different positions in the up-to-down direction (in the direction of arrows U-D)). In this case, it is preferable that the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) overlap when viewed from above (in the direction of arrow D). This allows the dimensions of the lower frames D86b-D8086b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are arranged (parallel) in parallel when viewed from above (viewed in the direction of arrow D). The two rolling members D4220 may be arranged in series (arranged linearly along the longitudinal direction) when viewed from above (viewed in the direction of arrow D).

In the above fourteenth embodiment, the case where the display unit D7197 is disposed on the main body unit D194 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited thereto, and the display unit D7197 may be disposed on the weight unit D195. That is, the display unit D7197 may be disposed on the outer edge of the weight unit D195 and extended from the outer edge of the weight unit D195 in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft D191.

In this case, the arrangement of the display part D9197 is opposite to that described above (the display part D7197 is made invisible to the player with the displacement member D180 placed in the closed position, and the display part D7197 is made invisible to the player when the displacement member D180 is in the open position). The amount of protrusion of the display portion D7197 can be maximized in the state in which the display portion D7197 is placed at this position. Furthermore, by utilizing the weight of the display section D7197, it is possible to reduce (or omit) the amount of metal weights buried in the weight section D195, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing material costs. can be achieved.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the second protrusion D131fa is formed on only some (two in this embodiment) of the plurality of (five in this embodiment) protrusions D131f. It is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of second protrusions D131fa formed is arbitrary, and may be one, three or more. The second protrusion D131fa may be formed in all of the plurality of protrusions D131f. Further, the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusion D131f that overlaps with the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 when viewed from the front, or the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusion D131f that does not overlap with the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 when viewed from the front. A portion D131fa may also be formed.

In the above fifteenth embodiment, when the rolling member D8170 is arranged in the first position, the dimension by which the upper surface of the second protrusion D131fa protrudes from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is larger for the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (farther from the axis D171), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and each second protrusion D131fa may have the same dimension. Alternatively, the dimension may be larger for the second protrusion D131fa located on the downstream side (closer to the axis D171).

In the 16th to 32nd embodiments, an inclined surface may be formed by sloping the upper surface of the rolling portion E141 downward toward the back side (arrow B direction) at a position corresponding to between the curved portion E134a and the flow path adjustment block E170 in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the rolling portion E141 of the interposed member E140. This creates the possibility of sending a ball reciprocating on the interposed member E140 (sixth passage ERt6) to the second inclined surface portion E135 (fifth passage ERt5). A ball sent to the fifth passage ERt5 may be guided to the seventh passage ERt7, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the 16th to 32nd embodiments, the case where the rear wall E161a is formed on the erected passage E161 of the central passage E160 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. In addition to the rear wall E161a, a front wall may be formed that stands vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow F) from the edge of the front end side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the erected passage E161. This makes it possible to prevent the ball guided to the erected passage E161 from passing through the edge of the front end side of the erected passage E161 and flowing down (falling) to the second inclined portion E135. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball guided to the erected passage E161 to pass through the upper hole E162, that is, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to flow down the fourth passage ERt4 and enter the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is increased).

In the sixteenth to thirty-second embodiments, a case has been described in which the projecting portion E111b is provided protrudingly from the front plate E111, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the projecting portion E111b may not be provided protrudingly. Thereby, the possibility that the ball rolling on the rolling part E141 of the interposed member E140 will be thrown to the first winning hole 64 can be created. That is, the probability that the ball rolling on the rolling portion E141 will win into the first prize opening 64 can be increased.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the drive motor E191 operates the distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, The two distribution passages E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 are displaced (reciprocating), and in the 17th, 18th, and 26th embodiments, the distribution passages E2150, E3150 are moved by the elastic spring E2190. , E11150 is displaced (rotated), but it is not necessarily limited to this. , the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 may be displaced. As a result, the distribution passages E150, E2150, E3150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E11150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passages E4150, E16150, and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 in the left and right direction (arrow In addition to being able to be displaced (reciprocating) in the LR direction), it can also be displaced (reciprocating) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the movement (flowing down It is possible to easily change (change) the direction of movement (flowing, rolling) of the ball. Moreover, in the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, there is a ball between the back plate E137 and the projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151. It can suppress being pinched.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, a pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, Although the case where the E13150, E14150, E15150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150 and E16150 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the pair of curved parts A pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, and a pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 are arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) between the opposing passages E131. It's okay.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the first rack part E194d of the first transmission member E194 and the second rack part E195b of the second transmission member E195. Although a case has been described in which one pinion gear E196 is disposed between them, the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a plurality of pinion gears may be disposed. In this case, by making the number of teeth of each pinion gear different, that is, by making it act as a speed reducer, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 that are engaged with the first transmission member E194 are and the displacement speed of the second distribution passage E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) and the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passage engaged with the second transmission member E195. The displacement speeds of the distribution passages E4150 and E16150 (third passage ERt3) can be made different. Further, by disposing an even number of pinion gears, the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passages E4150, E16150 are engaged with the first transmission member E194. (third passage ERt3), distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 engaged with the second transmission member E195, and second distribution passages E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) The direction of displacement can be made the same as that of the

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 27th to 32nd embodiments, the grooves E133c, E9133c, and E10133c formed on both sides of the insertion holes E133a, E9133a, and E10133a in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) have been described as having the same shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this and they may be formed in non-identical shapes. This allows the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 to reciprocate in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and to be displaced in a manner that rotates around the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) in a top view. In detail, the engaged portion E153 (engagement recess E153a) can be used as a rotation axis to displace the curved portion E131 side and the central passage E160 side of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150 in different directions in the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrows F-B).

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting paths E4150 and E16150, and the third sorting path E4150 and E16150. Although the above description concerns a case where the protrusions are provided from the upper surfaces of the paths E5150 and E17150, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions may be formed in recesses provided in the upper surfaces of the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting paths E4150 and E16150, and the third sorting paths E5150 and E17150. The recesses may also have discontinuous outer edges, and the spaces formed between the protruding protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be recesses.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 32nd embodiments, the protrusions E151 and E15151 are formed in an approximately hexagonal shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150. In the 27th embodiment, the protrusions E12151 are formed in a spherical shape. In the 28th embodiment, the protrusions E13151 are formed in an approximately rhombic (quadrilateral) shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E13150. In the 29th embodiment, the protrusions E14151 are formed in a circular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the sorting passage E14150. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions E151 may be formed in an approximately polygonal shape such as an approximately pentagonal or approximately heptagonal shape, or in a polygonal pyramid shape. They may also be formed in a cylindrical shape. Also, it may be formed into a shape combining straight lines and curved lines. Also, the inclination angles of the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 with respect to the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150, and the third sorting path E5150 have been described as being formed to be the same, but this is not necessarily limited thereto, and the inclination angles of the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be different for each side surface. For example, by making the inclination angle of the side formed on the downward side of the inclination direction with respect to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 approximately perpendicular, it is possible to suppress the balls from displacing (backflow, rolling) to the upward side of the inclination direction. Also, for example, by making the inclination angle of the side formed on the downward side of the inclination direction with respect to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 smaller than the inclination angle of the side formed on the upward side of the inclination direction, it is possible to easily displace (backflow, roll) the balls to the upward side of the inclination direction. As a result, it becomes easier for players to visually see how the direction of the ball's movement (flowing down, falling) changes (is altered), which increases the player's interest in the game.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage Although a case has been described in which a plurality of protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged in E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), it is not necessarily limited to this, and at least one It is sufficient that the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are provided, respectively.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged on the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 (third passage ERt3). Although the case where the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are provided on a portion of the upper surface of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) may each be provided with a protrusion E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage Although a case has been described in which the projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 on the upper surface of E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 are arranged at constant intervals, this is not necessarily the case, and each projection The arrangement intervals of E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be different from each other. For example, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 are arranged on the center side in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). By increasing the spacing between the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, the ball is thrown to the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, compared to when the ball is thrown to both ends in the front-rear direction. The number of times of contact can be reduced. As a result, the ball moves along the inclination direction on the front-rear center side of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150. It becomes easier to flow down. That is, the direction of the ball's flow can be made difficult to change. As a result, the ball thrown to the center side in the longitudinal direction of the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 is sent to the construction passage E16 ( It can be easily guided to the fourth passage ERt4). Further, the distance between the opposing protrusions E151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be larger than approximately 1/4 of the diameter of the sphere, or may be smaller than approximately 1/4 of the diameter of the sphere. good. By increasing the distance between opposing sides (arrangement interval), the upper surfaces of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, second distribution passage E4150, and third distribution passage E5150 are moved. A mode in which the ball can be brought into contact with the projections E151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 while increasing the speed of the ball moving (flowing down, rolling), and the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed. This makes it easier for players to visually recognize the information.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passage Although the case where the E4150, E16150 and the third distribution passage E5150, E17150 are continuously displaced has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and by intermittently driving the drive motor E191, the distribution passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, second distribution passages E4150, E16150, and third distribution passages E5150, E17150 may be intermittently displaced. As a result, inertia force can be applied to the balls flowing down the distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution paths E4150, E16150, and the third distribution paths E5150, E17150, The impact force when abutting against the projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 can be changed (changed), and the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the ball can be changed (changed) in various ways.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 27th to 32nd embodiments, the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting path E4150, E16150, and the third sorting path E5150, E17150 are driven by the drive motor E191, but this is not necessarily limited to this and they may be driven by a solenoid or an elastic spring.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the drive force transmission member E193 is fixed to the shaft of the drive motor E191, and the drive motor E191 is rotated in one direction. Although we have described a case in which the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution passages E4150, E16150, and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 are reciprocated due to However, by switching the drive direction of the drive motor E191, the distribution path E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second distribution path E4150, E16150, and the third distribution path The passages E5150 and E17150 may be moved back and forth.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 27th to 32nd embodiments, the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 are arranged in the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second distribution passage E4150, and the third distribution passage E5150 so that the balls can flow down. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the flow down of the balls may be suppressed by the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151. This allows the trailing ball to abut against the leading ball whose flow down is suppressed, and the flow down direction of the trailing ball can be changed (changed). That is, the leading ball whose flow is suppressed can have the same effect on the trailing ball as the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151, and can change (change) the movement (flow, roll) direction of the balls flowing down the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150, and the third sorting passage E5150. Also, the flow direction of the balls can be changed (changed) irregularly. In addition, when a trailing ball that flows down abuts on a leading ball whose flow is suppressed, the leading ball can resume flowing down.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th and 27th to 32nd embodiments, the side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151 and E15151 are formed at an inclination of approximately 45 degrees relative to the upper surfaces of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150, and the protruding height of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151 and E15151 is approximately half the radius of the sphere, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The side surfaces of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be inclined at an angle greater than 45 degrees relative to the upper surfaces of the sorting paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150, the second sorting path E4150, and the third sorting path E5150. The protrusion height of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be formed to be higher than approximately half the radius of the sphere, or may be formed to be lower than approximately half the radius of the sphere. By increasing the inclination angle of the side of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 relative to the upper surface of the sorting passage E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150, or by increasing the protrusion height, the movement (flowing down, rolling) time of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 can be lengthened. On the other hand, by reducing the inclination angle of the side of the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 relative to the upper surface of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150, or by lowering the protrusion height, the movement (flowing down, rolling) time of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 can be lengthened. In addition, the balls can easily move (flow down, roll) through the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, the second sorting passage E4150 and the third sorting passage E5150 by climbing over the protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151 and E15151, and the direction in which the balls move (flow down, roll) can be diversified.

In the 16th, 19th to 25th, and 27th to 32nd embodiments, the case where the restricting piece E153b is formed in the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, and the second sorting passage E4150 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the restricting piece E153b does not have to be formed. This allows the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150, and the second sorting passages E4150, E16150 to be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the inclined surface. In detail, the weight of the balls flowing down (falling) into the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150 acts on the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150, and the weight of the balls flowing down (falling) into the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150 can rotate around the engagement portion E194c, which engages with the first transmission member E194, E4194, E5194, the second transmission member E195, E4195, E5195, the third transmission member E4198 and the fourth transmission member E4199. As a result, the inclination angles of the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150, E16150 can be changed (changed), and the movement (flowing, rolling) time of the balls flowing down the sorting passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second sorting passage E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) can be extended (changed).

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, the notch E150a is provided in the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, and E15150. Although the case where the notch E150a is formed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the notch E150a may not be formed. Thereby, the number of projections E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 formed on the upper surface of the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 can be increased. In addition, it is possible to easily throw the ball from the distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 to the central passage E135b (seventh passage ERt7), that is, it is easy to win into the first prize opening 64 (first The probability of winning a prize in the winning hole 64 is high).

In the 16th, 19th to 25th and 27th to 32nd embodiments, a pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 are formed in the same manner as the other, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the number or spacing of the protrusions E151 arranged in the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 may be different. This allows the balls to flow for different times and in different directions through one of the pair of distribution paths E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution path E4150, E16150, increasing the interest of the game.

In the 16th embodiment, the 19th embodiment to the 25th embodiment, and the 27th embodiment to the 32nd embodiment, a pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and a pair of Although a case has been described in which the two distribution passages E4150 and E16150 are respectively displaced line (plane) symmetrically (left-right symmetry in FIG. 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 135) of the game board E13, this is not necessarily the case. Instead, one and the other of the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the pair of second distribution passages E4150, E16150 may be asymmetrically displaced. Thereby, the flow time of the ball flowing down in one and the other of the pair of distribution passages E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E13150, E14150, E15150 and the second distribution passage E4150, E16150 (third passage ERt3) It is possible to make the flow direction different and to increase the interest of the game.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the eighteenth embodiment, and the twenty-sixth embodiment, protrusions E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, and E15151 may be formed on the upper surfaces of the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150. Thereby, changes in the direction of movement (downward, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution paths E2150, E3150, E11150 (third path ERt3) can be varied.

In the 17th, 18th and 26th embodiments, the sorting passages E2150, E3150 and E11150 are displaced by the elastic spring E2190, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. In addition to the sorting passages E2150, E3150 and E11150, the curved portion E131 and the wall plate E132 may also be displaced by the elastic spring E2190. This makes it possible to change (alter) the displacement speed in the forward and backward directions (arrow F-B directions) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the curved portion E131 (second passage ERt2), and to diversify the change in the direction of movement (flowing down, rolling) of the balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the sorting passages E2150, E3150 and E11150 (third passage ERt3).

In the seventeenth embodiment, the eighteenth embodiment, and the twenty-sixth embodiment, the case where the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 come into contact has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, and E11150 do not have to come into contact with each other. In this case, by making the distance between the lower surface of the curved part E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150 smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the ball can be connected to the lower surface of the curved part E131 and the distribution passages E2150, E3150, E11150. It is possible to suppress leakage from between.

In the 17th, 18th and 26th embodiments, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed between the flat portion E2133 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, E11150. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic spring E2190 may be disposed between the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, E11150. In this case, the elastic spring E2190 is disposed in a stretched state, and the elastic recovery force of the elastic spring E2190 is utilized to maintain the contact state between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, E11150, or the distance between the lower surface of the curved portion E131 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150, E11150 is maintained in a state smaller than the diameter of a sphere.

In the 17th, 18th and 26th embodiments, the cases where the distribution passages E2150, E3150 and E11150 are displaced by the elastic spring E2190 are described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and they may be displaced by a drive motor or a solenoid.

In the seventeenth and eighteenth embodiments, the planar portion E2133 and the sorting passages E2150, E3150 are engaged by the support shaft E20j, the elastic spring E2190 is configured as a coil spring, and the sorting passages E2150, E3150 are displaced (rotated) vertically upward (toward the direction of the arrow U) by the elastic spring E2190. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic spring E2190 may be configured as a torsion spring. In this case, it is sufficient to engage the torsion spring with the support shaft E20j, which makes it possible to suppress the arrangement of the support protrusions E2133a, E2150a for engaging the elastic spring E2190. As a result, it is possible to reduce product costs.

In the 17th and 18th embodiments, the distribution paths E2150 and E3150 are rotated around the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) as a rotation axis, and in the 26th embodiment, the distribution path E11150 is rotated around the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) as a rotation axis. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the distribution paths E2150, E3150, and E11150 may be rotated around the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). This makes it easier for balls moving (flowing down, rolling) through the distribution paths E2150, E3150, and E11150 to move in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the change in the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) can be diversified. As a result, the change in the direction of the balls' movement (flowing down, rolling) can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the seventeenth and eighteenth embodiments, the support protrusions E2133a of the planar portion E2133 are formed on both longitudinal ends, and the support portion E2133b is formed closer to the central passage E160 than the support protrusions E2133a. However, this is not necessarily limited to the above, and the support portion E2133b may be formed on both longitudinal ends, and the support protrusion E2133a may be formed closer to the central passage E160 than the support portion E2133b. Also, the support protrusions E2133a may be formed on both longitudinal ends and closer to the longitudinal center than the support protrusions E2133a, and the support portion E2133b may be formed between the support protrusions E2133a in the longitudinal direction.

In the 19th embodiment and the 20th embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion E151 is provided in the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), but this is not necessarily the case. However, the projection E151 may not be provided. That is, the upper surfaces of the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) may be formed flat. This allows the player to easily predict the displacement of the ball flowing down (falling) from the distribution path E150. Further, the protrusion E151 is disposed in a part of the second distribution passage E4150 and the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3), and the protrusion E151 is not disposed in the remaining part. good.

In the 19th embodiment, the second distribution passage E4150 is formed to have a shorter length in the inclination direction than the distribution passage E150, but otherwise is the same. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the length of the second distribution passage E4150 in the front-to-back direction (arrow F-B direction) may be longer than the length of the distribution passage E150 in the front-to-back direction. This makes it easier to guide (send) balls that have moved (flowed down, rolled) to the second distribution passage E4150 to the interposed member E140.

In the nineteenth embodiment, when the distribution passage E150 is disposed at the first position, the end of the second distribution passage E4150, E16150 on the downward side in the slope direction is the end of the distribution passage E150 on the downward side in the slope direction. Although a case has been described in which the end portions of the second distribution passages E4150 and E16150 are located closer to the wall plate E132 than the wall plate E132, this is not necessarily the case. It may be located closer to the upper hole E162 (center passage E160) than the side end. This makes it easier to send the balls that have flown (fallen) down the distribution path E150 to the second distribution paths E4150 and E16150, and to send the balls that have been distributed to the central path E160 (fourth path ERt4) to the first prize opening 64 ( (See FIG. 135) (the probability of winning in the first prize opening 64 can be increased).

In the 20th embodiment, when the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 are disposed in the fourth position, at least a portion of the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 is disposed in a position that overlaps with the central passage E160 in a top view. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the third distribution passages E5150, E17150 may be disposed in a position where the entirety in the short direction (arrow F-B direction) overlaps with the central passage E160 in a top view. This makes it difficult to guide a ball sent from the distribution passage E150 to the central passage E160 (fourth passage ERt4).

In the 20th embodiment, when the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are arranged at the fourth position, at least a part of the third distribution passage E5150 is arranged at a position overlapping the central passage E160 when viewed from above. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the third distribution passages E5150 and E17150 are closer to the intervening member E140 than the central passage E160 (in the direction of arrow F) in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B). side). As a result, similarly to the case where the third distribution passage E5150 is arranged at the third position, the ball guided to the third distribution passage E5150 (third passage ERt3) is transferred to the construction passage E161 (fourth passage ERt4). It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the players expect to be sorted out.

In the 22nd embodiment, the inclined surface portion E7154 is formed in a straight line, and in the 23rd embodiment, the curved guide portion E8133d is formed in an arc-like curve. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the inclined surface portion E7154 may be formed in an arc-like curve, and the curved guide portion E8133d may be formed in a straight line. In addition, the inclined surface portion E7154 or the curved guide portion E8133d may be formed in a shape that combines a straight line and an arc.

In the 24th embodiment, the lower frame E9086b is formed in line (plane) symmetry (left-right symmetry in FIG. 135) with respect to the center in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 135) of the game board E13, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the lower frame E9086b may be formed asymmetrically. For example, the groove portion E9133c formed on one side of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E9130 may be formed to be inclined toward the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction) as it moves from the curved portion E131 side to the central passage E160 side, and the groove portion E9133c formed on the other side of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E9130 may be formed to be inclined toward the intervening member E140 side (arrow F direction) as it moves from the central passage E160 side to the curved portion E131 side. For example, the grooves E9133c may be formed identically on one side and the other side of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the base member E9130 when viewed from above, and the manner in which the sorting passage E150 is displaced may be the same.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the groove portion E10133c is formed in a shape that is a combination of curved lines when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the first slope portion E10133. Alternatively, it may be formed in a shape that is a combination of a straight line and a curved line.

In the 31st and 32nd embodiments, the guide portions E16154, E17154 are provided on the outer edges of the second distribution passage E16150 and the third distribution passage E17150, excluding the guide cutouts E16154a, E17154a, but this is not necessarily limited to this and it is sufficient that they are formed on at least a part of the outer edges. This makes it easier to win the first winning opening 64 (increases the probability of winning the first winning opening 64) compared to when the guide portions E16154, E17154 are not formed on the outer edges of the second distribution passage E16150 and the third distribution passage E17150, and increases the interest of the game.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected jackpot value until you hit the jackpot once and hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after a jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path forming means conceals the passed means>
A gaming machine A1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means comprises a displaceable means that can be positioned in a position overlapping at least a portion of a first gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first gaming ball, when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and are configured so that the area around the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the decorative plate 302 always makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is not possible to respond to a game mode in which the ball entering the ball detection hole 431 is confirmed to continue or stop the launch of the game ball, and there is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the parts related to the game ball launch operation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the route configuring means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, when the first game ball is easily visible, it is easier to check the flow of the first game ball and decide whether to continue or stop the game ball firing operation. Improvements can be made in related areas.

Note that the form of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is movable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

Note that the form of the passing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entry port related to the drawing of symbols (for example, a starting port), a prize ball port related to the payout of prize balls, or any other opening through which game balls can pass. It is also possible to use the means of

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that in gaming machine A1, the displacement means is a second gaming ball that flows downstream upstream of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 can change the visibility of the first gaming ball by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, which reduces material costs and design costs compared to when other decorative members are used as the displaceable means.

In gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the path configuring means includes a front-back direction path formed with a front-back width length that allows a second game ball to be placed in front of the first game ball. .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, since the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball, the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball. At least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the game ball.

In the gaming machine A3, the forward/rearward path is configured such that when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path configuration means at the launch interval set in the launch device, the second gaming ball hides at least a portion of the first gaming ball. Gaming machine A4.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, when a plurality of game balls flow down the path forming means at the same firing interval, it is difficult to recognize the first game ball by the second game ball. It is possible to achieve the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize from normal times.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3 or A4, in the front-rear direction path, the front-side component is arranged closer to the center of the gaming area than the back-side component.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A3 and A4, gaming machine A5 can configure a forward/backward path that is inclined along the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means, making it easier for the first gaming ball to be hidden by the second gaming ball. In other words, the blindfolding effect can be improved.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A5, the front side component is positioned in the line of sight of the player who is looking at the passing means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 can produce a similar blindfolding effect regardless of the length of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball placed on the forward/backward path.

In other words, it is usually believed that the closer the first and second game balls are to each other, the greater the concealment effect, but if the first and second game balls are positioned in the line of sight, the effect of the distance between them can be eliminated.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the route configuring means includes a front-rear direction route formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second game ball to be placed in front of the first game ball, and a front-rear direction path thereof. A game machine A7 comprising: a left-right path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A6, gaming machine A7 can also block the player's line of sight with gaming balls flowing down a left-right path, so a concealing effect can be created not only when the player views the passed-through means with a line of sight that does not shift left or right relative to the passed-through means, but also when the player shifts left or right and peers at the passed-through means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed-through means, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a concealing effect can be created in all directions).

This effect is more pronounced when one side of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction is sealed with a wall. In other words, when one side is sealed with a wall, the wall acts as a screen on the left or right side, making it easier to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the route configuring means has a first downstream route in which the game ball passes through the passed means in a first manner, and a second downstream route in which the game ball passes in a second manner. and a downstream path, wherein the first game ball can be visually recognized at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means, regardless of which downstream path of the path configuration means the first game ball flows down. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being configured as follows.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machine A8 can make it difficult to recognize the flow pattern of the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the passing means, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means.

The first and second aspects are not limited in any way. For example, the direction in which the ball flows down may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8 is provided with a branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passing means, and the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received gaming ball, The game machine A9 is characterized in that the route configuring means is constructed such that the game balls whose falling paths are separated by a branching means are configured so that the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route in a predetermined section.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines A1 to A8, the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route for a predetermined section, so the game balls that reach the switching means immediately It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the flow of the game ball compared to the case where the flow pattern corresponds to the flow path of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game ball.

In the gaming machine A9, the route forming means includes a protruding part that protrudes toward the flowing game balls, and the protruding part acts on the branching of the game balls in the branching means. Machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A9, the protruding portion can act on the branching of the game ball, so that the structure is simpler than, for example, when the branching is caused by the movement of the valve body. can improve the durability of

In the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion includes a first protruding portion that extends in a predetermined direction and a second protruding portion that extends in a direction different from the first protruding portion, and the protruding amount of the first protruding portion and the protruding amount of the second protruding portion are configured to be different. Gaming machine A11.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A10, gaming machine A11 can differentiate the effect of the first protrusion on the gaming ball from the effect of the second protrusion on the gaming ball depending on the way the gaming ball flows down. This makes it possible to use the fixed first and second protrusions to cause the gaming ball to branch according to a predetermined rule depending on the way the gaming ball flows down.

<Points to appeal for the introduction of a ball passing through a route forming means into a passed means>
A gaming machine B1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, the path forming means having a specified portion that constitutes the upstream side of the passed means, the specified portion being positioned on a more conspicuous side than the passed means, and configured to be able to guide gaming balls to the passed means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize with a decorative plate 302, and a large winning part 300 is provided. Depending on the state of the winning parts 300, there are gaming machines in which the game balls may fall away from the decorative board 302, or the game balls may flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative board 302 (for example, in special machines). (Refer to Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the highly visible game balls that come off the decorative board 302 and flow down are configured so that they deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and are hidden behind the decorative board 302. Since a part of the game ball flowing down is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player pays attention to the game ball. Since things tend to be wasted, there is a possibility that players may feel dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of making the way the game ball flows down after it has attracted attention so that it is meaningful to draw attention to.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined part placed on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, the degree of attention to the game ball can be improved; This can be associated with the game ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flown down the predetermined portion passes through the passing means, so that it is possible to improve the point that it is meaningful to pay attention to the game ball that has attracted attention.

In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and it is less likely that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means. be able to.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

The conspicuous side is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the display device side that easily attracts the player's attention, the winning hole side or the starting hole side, the front side (nearby side) that is easy for the player to see, the stage side (mainly the part where the game ball is temporarily held at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) where the gaze is likely to be focused as the probability of the ball entering a specific ball entry hole is remarkably high, the V-winning hole side that directly leads to winning a jackpot, the ball dispensing device side as an object of operation, the performance operation button side, the area where the game ball that has strayed from the ball entry hole flows down (the area where the player will inevitably follow it with his eyes out of frustration), the bright side as a light-emitting means switches between light and dark, or any other side. Also, it is possible to intentionally form a less conspicuous side to make it stand out in comparison.

In the gaming machine B1, the route configuring means includes a second predetermined part that makes the game ball that enters the route configuring means less noticeable than when the ball enters the route, and the predetermined part has a larger area than the second predetermined part. Game machine B2 is characterized in that it is placed on a conspicuous side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 reduces the attention of the gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means at the second specified section before it flows down the specified section, thereby making it possible to highlight the attention of the gaming ball as it flows down the specified section.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the predetermined portion of gaming machine B1 or B2 has sections where the flow speed of gaming balls differs.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can improve the effect of attracting the player's attention compared to when there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming balls.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the second flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is higher than the first flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Game machine B4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B3, gaming machine B4 can shorten the time it takes for a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means to reach a specified section.

Gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B4, characterized in that the specified section has a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction differs.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B4, gaming machine B5 can create sections in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction is different, regardless of the actual speed at which the gaming ball flows down. By reducing the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction at any specified location, the player's gaze can be easily focused on a specified location and distracted from other areas.

Note that the manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited at all. For example, the case of displacement on a straight line disposed on a plane orthogonal to the front-back direction when viewed from the front may be different from the case of displacement on a straight line having a front-back direction component, or the case of displacement on a straight line and the case of displacement on a straight line that has a front-back component, The difference may be in the case where the displacement is curved or meandering, or it may be different.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B5 is provided with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce a game ball into the path forming means, and the predetermined part is disposed outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction. Characteristic game machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, visibility of the introducing means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to both ensure the visibility of the introduction means and improve the attention of the game ball, which has a high possibility of passing through the passing means.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured to cause the game ball on the front side of the path forming means to flow downward so as to avoid the line of sight directed toward the passing means or the predetermined part. A gaming machine B7.

Gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B6, is configured so that gaming balls can flow down the front side of the path configuration means, and is equipped with an avoidance means for ensuring that the flow path of the gaming balls avoids line of sight toward the passing means, so that it is possible to ensure both the size of the gaming area and the visibility of the gaming balls toward the passing means.

The manner in which the game ball affected by the avoidance means flows down is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the passing means and the player's eye position, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the last position at which the player can see the game ball heading towards the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position, or it may be something else.

In the gaming machine B7, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which a falling game ball can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot be accepted; , a gaming machine B8 characterized in that, in changing the state from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, the game ball that has reached the accepting state changing means in the accepting state can be guided to the path configuring means side. .

In addition to the effects of game machine B7, game machine B8 can prevent game balls that reach the receiving state change means and then flow down like a bridge from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means.

The gaming machine B7 or B8 is provided with a dividing means that is disposed above the passing means when viewed from the front and that divides a gaming area, and that the dividing means is configured such that the game ball can flow down the left and right outer sides. Characteristic game machine B9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B7 and B8, gaming machine B9 uses a partitioning means to prevent gaming balls from flowing down in front of the passing means, making it easier to ensure visibility toward the passing means.

Note that the mode of the partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that constitutes a falling surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entry hole forming means into which a game ball can enter. Further, the partition means may be a means whose shape (appearance) is fixed or a means whose shape (appearance) is variable.

In the gaming machine B9, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state where the game balls flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state where the game balls cannot be accepted, and the part of the partition means on the acceptance state change means side is configured to easily guide the game balls to the acceptance state change means side. A gaming machine B10.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B9, it is possible to configure the game ball to be received by the partitioning means to push the game ball into the receiving state changing means while it is being received by the receiving state changing means. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball that skids while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passing means.

For example, a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on the left-right axis is assumed as the acceptance state changing means, and a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed as the partitioning means. . A game ball that reaches the special prize opening just before the opening/closing plate is about to close is often caught between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate, and is moved in the forming direction of the edge ( It skids in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate.

Since the game ball after sliding can reach any position within the range of the pivot tip of the opening and closing plate, if at least a part of the opening and closing plate is positioned above the passing means, the game ball after sliding may fall to the front side and then pass in front of the passing means, and the game ball after sliding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front after sliding sideways, it will be necessary to position the opening and closing plate so as to avoid the position of the passing means when viewed from the front, which reduces the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

In contrast, gaming machine B10 makes it easier to prevent the game ball from falling onto the front side of the opening and closing plate after sliding sideways, improving the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

Gaming machine B11 is any one of gaming machines B7 to B10, characterized in that gaming balls flowing down the path configuration means and gaming balls flowing down the front side of the path configuration means are configured to flow down in a similar manner.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the game balls that may flow down the route configuring means and pass through the passed means, and the game balls that may flow down the front side of the route configuring means By making it difficult to distinguish between game balls that do not pass through the passing means, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls flowing down the route configuring means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between cases where it is easy and difficult for game balls to enter the path forming means from game balls flowing down near the path forming means.

A gaming machine B12 is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, and is characterized by having a light-emitting means that irradiates light from behind the ball flowing down the specified portion.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the front side of the ball flowing down a predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the length of the route to the V entrance in a space-saving manner>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass; and a first state in which a game ball can flow down to the passing means. a state switching means configured to be switchable between the first state and a second state different from the first state; A game machine C1, characterized in that it is configured to allow a game ball to flow downward toward the passing means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution section 75 configured to be movable from side to side is disposed in the falling path of a game ball that enters the second grand prize opening 12, and the distribution section 75 is configured to be movable from side to side. There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to change the direction of flow (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, short-term operation of the allocating section 75 is essential to prevent incorrect winnings in the specific area 73 and the ball being bitten by the allocating section 75, and some players may There were cases where the player felt unsure of the behavior of the portion 75 and was unable to continue playing the game with peace of mind.

As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution part 75 from directly below the second grand prize opening 12 to a position near the left and right center of the gaming area (near the first grand prize opening 10), the second grand prize opening 12 can be A long flow path length up to the distribution section 75 can be ensured. It is thought that this makes it possible to reduce the possibility of winning a prize in the specific area 73 by mistake.

On the other hand, if this means is implemented, it will be necessary to ensure visibility of the falling path of the game ball over a wide range from the second big prize opening 12 to the first big prize opening 10, and within this range there will be no freedom in designing the gaming area. degree is limited. That is, in order to avoid erroneous winnings in the specific area 73, there is a problem in that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area is restricted over a wide range.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of preventing game balls from entering the game area by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

In contrast, according to gaming machine C1, the path configuration means is equipped with a predetermined delay means, so even if the vertical length of the path configuration means in a front view is shortened to save space, it is possible to ensure that a long time passes before a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means passes through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be made a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route configuring means. Wrong winnings can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device for a short period of time to switch whether or not a ball can enter the constituent means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating in a hurry. Thereby, it is possible to avoid entering the game ball by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, a mode may be adopted in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed on the downstream path, or a mode may be provided in which a predetermined downstream path is provided in which the game ball flows down a downstream path having a front-back component.

In the game machine C1, the delaying means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the downstream path toward the front side is more likely to cause the game ball to flow down than the downstream path toward the back side. A game machine C2 characterized in that it is configured such that the acceleration of the game machine C2 increases.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming ball flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the delaying means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the downstream path toward the front side is better than the downstream path that flows down while maintaining the front and back position. A game machine C3 is characterized in that it is configured such that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down is increased.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to ensure a long period of time during which the player can visually see the gaming balls flowing on the near side. Thereby, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined downstream path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inclination of the predetermined downstream path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined downstream path on the game ball side may be used.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means is provided with a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the predetermined downstream paths are such that the game ball is positioned in front of the passing means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is configured to pass through.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, gaming machine C4 can reduce the visibility of the area near the passed means when the gaming ball is placed in the front position. This can increase the attention to the area near the passed means.

A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a plurality of the front positions can be configured in the gaming machine C4.

According to gaming machine C5, by arranging game balls at multiple front positions, the game balls at the front can hide at least a portion of the game ball at the back. Since the passing means is arranged behind the game ball at the back, the field of view toward the passing means can be blocked by the multiple game balls, and the visibility of the passing means can be reduced.

In this case, if the interval between the game balls entering the predetermined downstream path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is always placed at one of the front positions, so it is possible to create a state in which the passing means cannot be seen. It becomes possible.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the route forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral manner when viewed from above.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for arranging the path forming means of the same length can be shortened.

In addition, compared to the case where a folded path is formed, there is no need to reduce the thickness of the channel wall, so the strength of the flow path can be improved. The possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the path configuring means includes a front-rear passage section extending in the front-rear direction.

Gaming machine C7 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C1 to C6, but also reduces the width of the path configuration means, so that a pair of path configuration means can be configured symmetrically with a reduced width.

Gaming machine C8 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C7, characterized in that the passing means is positioned diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path configuration means.

Gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C7, makes it easier for the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means to be within the field of view of a player looking from the front side.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the path configuration means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and a second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and is configured so that the profits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls of the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times, and furthermore, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive game balls at all times. Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the manner in which the second receiving means receives the game balls, attention to the game balls can be improved.

The manner in which the game balls are received is not limited in any way. For example, the game balls may be received only by the first receiving means, or only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the second receiving means. Also, the frequency with which balls enter each receiving means may differ, or the balls may enter at different positions.

In the gaming machine C9, the change in the profit obtained by the player depends on whether the game ball is accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether the first receiving means and the second receiving means A game machine C10 characterized in that the problem occurs depending on whether a game ball is received by both of the game balls.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, it is possible to make it easier for the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain. .

The benefits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the game balls flowing down, or it may be a benefit related to the game obtained by the game balls flowing down (payout of prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state changing to a special state after the jackpot ends, the game state changing to a normal state (falling down), etc.).

In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the gaming machine C11 is characterized in that the route configuring means is configured such that the path from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means is symmetrical.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C9 or C10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suffer a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly fired from the left or right side.

In any of gaming machines C9 to C11, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state change means or the state change state. Gaming machine C12 is characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change, so that the player's skill regarding shooting the game ball is improved. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profits obtained by the player.

A gaming machine C13 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C12, the state change mode of the receiving state change means is configured in a plurality of types.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C12, even when the game balls are ejected in a fixed ejection manner, the manner in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means is improved. can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted based on the state change mode of the acceptance state change means.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that moves parallel to the downward direction of the ball>
a route forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route forming means to pass; an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the route forming means; a state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the route configuring means, and the state switching means is configured such that the direction of the displacement that occurs in the state change is the direction in which the game ball flows down. A gaming machine XA1 characterized in that it is configured along a direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 that can configure a plurality of types of falling paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the downward direction of the game ball and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning part 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening/closing operation is completed without involving the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the role of the opening/closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine By causing a displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence the rolling manner of the game ball to change. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

For example, when a gaming ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid to the right with the gaming ball on top of it, applying a load to the gaming ball that rotates it in the forward direction of the rolling rotation, thereby accelerating the gaming ball.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid leftward with the game ball on top of it, applying a load to the game ball that rotates it in the opposite direction to the rolling rotation, thereby slowing down the rotation of the game ball.

In addition, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the bottom end of the rolling game ball, a load can be applied to the game ball that is not only in the rolling direction of the game ball, but also has a component in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction, so that the change in the flow pattern of the game ball can be made complex and irregular.

These effects on the way the game ball flows down can be varied in various ways when the state switching means is opened and closed, allowing players who are watching the game balls to concentrate on the game without getting bored.

Moreover, the arrangement relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game balls is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be such that it rubs against the side surface of the game ball, or it may be arranged such that it opposes the game ball in the downstream direction and collides with the game ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in such a manner as to collide with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that the closing operation is performed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball is flowing down, and the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation is performed in the forward direction of the direction in which the game ball is flowing, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. It may be configured to be regulated with less resistance.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that causes the ball to flow in the first direction when opened and in the second direction when closed>
a path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass; an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passing means; A state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduction state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means, and the state switching means is capable of guiding the game ball in the first direction in the introduction state. A game machine XB1 characterized in that the game ball is configured to be able to be guided in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended forward, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and it falls freely, so it does not guide it. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear, it is necessary to prepare a part (frame part, etc.) other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the game ball flowing down, and there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members) for guiding the game ball flowing down.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Since no members are required, the number of required components (members) can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the downward direction of the game ball in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set horizontally with respect to a game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only a slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in direction after guidance by the state switching means starts. can be achieved.

The arrangement of the guide section that produces the guiding effect of the state switching means is not limited in any way. For example, the guide section may be disposed on a movable member of the state switching means, or the guide section may be disposed on a non-movable section in the periphery of the state switching means, and may be configured so that the state is switched to one in which the game ball is likely to approach or come into contact with the guide section by the operation of the movable member.

When the guide part is disposed on a movable member, the design must take into consideration not only the guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also the effect on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. It is preferable to do so.

For example, when the state switching means includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of flow of the game ball, rather than providing a planar wall that is orthogonal to the direction of flow, it is preferable to )-shaped wall portion makes it easier to avoid a situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction of causing the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

<Separation, inversion, combination, and rotation are all part of the same movement>
A gaming machine D1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to change the visible surface, the displacement means comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and configured such that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced relative to each other in a predetermined manner of displacement.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable multiple times (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, although the rotating base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface visible to the player side is the same, so there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 is configured so that the visible surface of the displacement means can be changed in response to the displacement, allowing attention to be maintained on the displacement means.

In addition, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member relative to each other, thereby increasing the attention to the displacement means.

In the gaming machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined manner includes a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other with respect to a gathering part where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are arranged together, and a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move closer to each other. A game machine D2 characterized in that the second displacement member includes at least a second displacement member that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, with only the first displacement as the displacement based on the gathering part, the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced at the terminal end where the distance from the gathering part is the shortest or longest, and the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced. The first displacement member and the second displacement member may appear to be stationary, which may reduce the production effect, but by mixing the second displacement, displacement in the rotational direction can also be caused at the terminal end. Therefore, the performance effect can be improved.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the predetermined displacement in gaming machine D1 or D2 includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 inverts the surface that is visible due to the third displacement, making it possible to significantly change the decorations that are visible to the player before and after the third displacement.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by adsorption or adhesion, and the load related to the fixation is applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it operates in a direction that limits the displacement of members.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the load related to fixation acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to fixation is reduced. The displacements of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed by taking these into consideration.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission by gears, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement will occur. However, if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the component due to the load will become apparent, causing a delay in the timing of the displacement of the component.

Further, the degree of fixation may be configured to differ depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, the effect of fixation differs depending on the surface being viewed, so the degree of fixation can be varied on the side the player can see.

This allows, for example, inverted surfaces of the same displacement means to be easily viewed as one surface tightly joined together and integrated, while the other surface can be easily viewed as loosely joined together and easily displaced relative to one another.

Furthermore, for example, by configuring the degree of attraction of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be different depending on the fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is different. can.

The manner in which the magnet can be attached is not limited in any way. For example, the magnet can be attached with an adhesive tape, or the magnet can utilize the adhesive force between the magnet and the metal part. The first and second inverted members can also be designed to use, for example, fixing screws or bolts as the metal part that is attached to the magnet.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in a first displacement mode, and displaces in the reverse direction in a second displacement mode different from the first displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to displace in the first displacement mode after displacing in the predetermined mode.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is set before the first displacement mode. Since the displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which the predetermined mode is added, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. This makes it possible to reduce the attention paid to the displacement means at the time of retreat, thereby relatively increasing the attention paid to the displacement means displaced at the production position.

In conventional machines, the rotation pattern was the same in both forward and reverse directions, so after extending the display to the performance position (the position in front of the LCD display area), it was necessary to rotate again in the opposite direction multiple times before retreating to the retracted position (the position outside the LCD display area). In this case, there was a possibility that the viewer's gaze would be drawn to the part retreating from the performance position, which could be seen as a problem.

Note that the manner of displacement is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear displacement may be used. Moreover, the displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

A game machine D6 in the game machine D5, wherein the displacement means includes a release means configured to release load transmission when the operating resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacing means can be changed by varying the operational resistance of the internal structure of the displacing means.

Gaming machine D7 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D6, and is provided with a light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means, the displacement means including the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be able to change the visible state of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the visible surface is one side or the other side.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D6, gaming machine D7 can change the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means in accordance with the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, it is possible to change between a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light individually and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light together.

Gaming machine D8 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D7, and is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to detect whether the displacement of the displacement means is in an acceptable state or not.

According to gaming machine D8, in any of gaming machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structural parts during displacement.

In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be displaced by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement and contraction can be performed to some extent after being displaced from the production position to the retreat position. By controlling the displacement, it is possible to suppress the increase in attention to the displacement means when displacing from the presentation position to the retreat position, compared to the case where the displacement is performed in a displacement manner including enlargement/contraction from the start of displacement. .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is characterized in that it is provided with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means. Game machine D9.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detection means can be reduced. Note that various types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or it may be a numerical value related to a change in the operational manner when the operational manner changes at a predetermined timing.

Further, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement proximal end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement distal end side of the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the player. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished, if the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member A gaming machine D10 characterized in that it is configured such that the two are indistinguishable from each other.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, gaming machine D10 can maintain high expectations from the player that a reversal action will occur, regardless of the state of the first and second displacement members when one side is facing the player.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
A gaming machine E1 is provided with a displacement means having a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to see depending on the arrangement.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversing unit 71 configured to be reversible, and are configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visible surface (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, and therefore the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the visible surface. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

In contrast, with gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible depending on the position, so that the line of sight of a player who wishes to see the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner that follows the path of the change in position of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, an opening portion is provided that opens so that the displacement means can be viewed, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E1, a player who views the back side through the opening can easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

In gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when the displacement means is disposed at the edge of the opening, the displacement means is closer to the back side than when it is disposed at the center of the opening. .

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, when the displacing means is arranged at the center of the opening, the displacing means can be largely seen on the front side, and the displacing means can be placed on the edge of the opening. When the displacement means is arranged, the movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacement means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and one set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the first visible surface and the second visible surface of another group are configured to be difficult to see when the surface is visible.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machine E4 has different letters and figures for each set on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, allowing players viewing the displacement means to see different letters and figures, and by configuring the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set that are not intended to be visible to be difficult to see, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacement means being unsightly.

For example, if the first set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a low expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, and the second set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a high expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, the level of expectation of a jackpot can be confirmed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. In this case, the display of the expectation of a jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained even after the displacement means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, so that the display of the expectation of a jackpot can continue to be visible even to a player who has taken their eyes off the liquid crystal display device.

Note that there are no limitations to the manner in which it is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by shielding with a shielding means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being configured.

According to gaming machine E5, it is possible to easily avoid predicting the pair of first and second visible surfaces that will be displayed to the player during the action of switching (before confirmation) the pair of first and second visible surfaces that are visible in gaming machine E4. This makes it possible to improve attention to the displacement means.

The manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are configured to be difficult to recognize during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make them difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) may be configured to be separable from the other parts and operated in a separated state to make them difficult to recognize, or a light-emitting means may be used to set the brightness to create a relatively dark part to make it difficult to recognize.

In this case, the form of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the switching operation described above, only one part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is operated facing the back side so that it is not visible. Alternatively, it may be configured to operate in a state in which some of these parts and other parts are visible at the same time, but the arrangement is shifted.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it has an opening section in which the displacement means is open so as to be visible in gaming machine E5, and the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is positioned in the center of the opening section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E5, gaming machine E6 makes it easier for players to see the switching action, improving attention to the switching action.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E5 and E6, gaming machine E7 makes it difficult to recognize the first visible surface during operation by making a portion of the first visible surface visible and the entire surface invisible during operation.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7 includes a second displacement means configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be able to block at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to cover the second displacement means as well as the second displacement means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible surface visible.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E7, gaming machine E8 can improve the design freedom of the presentation position of the displacement means by making at least a portion of the second visible surface difficult to see using the second displacement means.

Gaming machine E9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a specified direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement occurs.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface that is visible when viewed in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so that the game The surface that is easy to visually recognize can be arbitrarily changed without depending on the amount of change in the person's line of sight.

A gaming machine E10, which is a gaming machine E9, characterized in that the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E9, gaming machine E10 can increase the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state by changing the posture of the displacement means.

The gaming machine E9 or E10 includes an auxiliary means configured to be disposed close to the displacement means, in the first state, the displacement means is disposed close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means. A gaming machine E11 is located apart from the auxiliary means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E9 and E10, gaming machine E11 can arrange the auxiliary means close to the displacement means so that they can be viewed as one unit, and can also arrange the auxiliary means and the displacement means so that they can be viewed separately, allowing the displacement means to give multiple different impressions to the player.

The type of the auxiliary means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a means whose arrangement is fixed, or it may be a movable means.

Gaming machine E12 is characterized in that in gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which it is viewed integrally with the displacement means and a state in which it is viewed separately from the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E11, gaming machine E12 can switch between viewing the displacement means and the auxiliary means as a single unit or separately, thereby increasing the variety of visible patterns relative to the number of components.

<Points at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the installation means at the same time differs between sections>
A gaming machine F1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, an arrangement means for arranging a first part on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second part of the arrangement means, wherein the support means is configured to be capable of controlling the arrangement of the second part relative to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. There is a game machine that is equipped with a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotary accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220. (see official bulletin). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is tilted, there is a possibility that a malfunction will occur in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotary accessory 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, resulting in a low degree of freedom in displacement.

That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arrangement means is supported at at least two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the support means can control the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part, the arrangement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced while stably supporting the arrangement means. Can be done. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the arrangement means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

The manner of the support means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be supported in a manner that restricts displacement in a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected to a displaceable second displacement means and supported. Furthermore, control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control, such as restricting (guiding) the displacement of the second part with a wall portion.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means is configured to displace the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. and a second range that supports the second section when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second section is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the direction and the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range are different from each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 allows the displacement speed of the arrangement means to be varied even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is configured to allow changes in the displacement direction of the second portion, so that the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

A gaming machine F3 in the gaming machine F1 or F2, wherein the support means includes a restriction section that limits displacement of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, gaming machine F3 can limit the displacement of the second part at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first and second ranges, so that when the second part is displaced from the side with larger displacement to the side with smaller displacement, it is easier to stop the second part at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first and second ranges.

Note that the aspect of the load required for displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled or pushed.

The type of the limiting section is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a type that sets an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second section, or a type that switches the displacement direction of the second section.

A gaming machine F4, in which the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the second section with respect to the displacement means as a reference is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the first section with respect to the displacement means as a reference.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to configure a section in which the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means is small at a mid-displacement position of the displacing means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily seen together, and as a result, the displacement means and the arrangement means can be seen together. You can increase the number of easy positions.

A gaming machine F5 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion with respect to the displacement speed of the first portion can be changed.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, gaming machine F5 can change the displacement speed of the second part of the arrangement means on the support means side even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, so that a motion presentation can be created in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is variable through simple drive control of the drive means (constant speed drive).

Gaming machine F6 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F5, characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the displacement end of the second portion.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from bouncing back, and it is possible to make it easier to stop the arrangement means at an early stage at the end of the displacement.

Note that the method for preventing the second portion from rebounding is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used in which the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) is reduced; A method may also be used in which the displacement of the second portion is restricted by a geometrical device such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

Furthermore, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, but may also include increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion. For example, the displacement resistance of the second portion may be improved by applying a load using magnetic force or the like at the end of the displacement of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved using a biasing force such as a coil spring. good.

Gaming machine F7, characterized in that the support means in the gaming machine F6 is configured so that the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part intersects with the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part when the first part stops at the displacement end.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F6, the support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part due to the displacement of the first part allows the second part to be moved even when the first part stops. The return displacement (bound) of the part 2 can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7 is provided with a supported means displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is adapted to a relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means. A game machine F8 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complex effect can be performed by the supported means that is displaced together with the arrangement means.

The manner in which the supported means is displaced is not limited in any way. For example, the supported means may be displaced so as to move parallel to the disposition means on a predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced, or the supported means may be displaced in a manner different from the manner in which the disposition means is displaced (for example, a sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) (for example, a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis) at a position away from the predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced.

The manner in which the displacing means is displaced with respect to the amount of displacement of the displacing means is not limited in any way. For example, the displacing means may be a change in posture, or may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

A gaming machine F9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion has a section in which it can move back and forth in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F8, while the first part is displaced, the relative displacement amount of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, after increasing Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

A gaming machine F8 or F9, characterized in that the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made the same as that of the displacing means with the arrangement means in between. This can give the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arrangement means includes a posture changing means that changes its posture so that the surface facing the player side is switched between a first surface and a second surface as the placement means is displaced; A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is in a posture facing the player when the second portion is placed at the end of displacement. Machine F11.

According to gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines F1 to F10, the first or second surface of the posture change means is directed toward the player, allowing the player to understand that the second part has reached the end of the displacement, so that the end of the presentation action by the displacement means can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner.
<Concept of the invention using sorting members C170 to C3170 as examples>
A gaming machine CA1 equipped with a displacement member, at least a portion of which is arranged in a ball passage path and formed so as to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, characterized in that when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, and the first ball is guided to a first passage, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball is guided to a second passage, and when the weight of the ball is not acting on the displacement member, the displacement member is positioned at the predetermined position.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a distribution member that operates based on the weight of the gaming balls and distributes the gaming balls to a first passage and a second passage is known (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148189). However, in the conventional technology described above, the gaming balls are simply distributed alternately to the first passage and the second passage in the order in which they arrive, regardless of the state of the game balls that arrive, so the player cannot focus on this distribution operation, resulting in a problem of insufficient interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine CA1, when the first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from the predetermined position, and the first ball The second ball, which follows the first ball, is guided to the second path, and the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the first ball. When the ball is not being acted on, the ball is placed at a predetermined position, so if the second ball is connected to the first ball with an interval of less than a predetermined distance, the first ball is guided to the first path. and the second ball can be guided to the second passage by the displacement member that is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, while the second ball is moved by a predetermined amount to the first ball. In the case of consecutive balls separated by a distance exceeding A ball can also be guided into the first path. In this way, the guided path can be changed depending on the state of the series of balls (the distance between the leading ball and the following ball), so the player can focus on the state of the balls and improve the interest of the game. can do.

The second ball following the first ball means a ball following the first ball at a distance smaller than a predetermined amount. Therefore, the second ball may roll or flow down while in contact with the first ball.

A gaming machine CA2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine CA1, the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA1, gaming machine CA2 has the advantage that the displacement member is displaced to the predetermined position by the weight of the displacement member, making it possible to simplify the structure compared to when a biasing spring is used. Also, compared to when a biasing spring is used, the displacement of the displacement member can be slowed down, making it possible to prevent the displacement member from being placed in the predetermined position before the second ball is guided to the second passage. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility of guiding the third ball, which follows the second ball, to the second passage.

In gaming machine CA2, the displacement member functions as a main body that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body and displaces the main body to the predetermined position. A gaming machine CA3 comprising a weight part, and at least a part of the weight part is visible to a player.

Gaming machine CA3 has the same effects as gaming machine CA2, but also includes a main body that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body and functions as a weight that displaces the main body to a predetermined position, and at least a portion of the weight is visible to the player, so that the player can recognize the direction in which the ball is guided based on the position (state) of the weight. Also, the weight can serve both as a weight for displacing the main body and as a part that allows the player to recognize the direction in which the ball is guided, which reduces production costs.

In gaming machines CA1 to CA3, gaming machine CA4 is characterized in that the displacement member includes a first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls.

According to gaming machine CA4, in any of gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member includes the first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, so that the first ball While rolling on one surface, the weight of the ball can be applied to the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball (that is, a state in which the second ball can be guided to the second passage).

The gaming machine CA4 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is arranged so that the second ball guided to the second passage rolls. A gaming machine CA5, characterized in that the second surface is arranged at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction.

According to gaming machine CA5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA4, the displacement member has a second surface along which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the second surface is disposed at a position that overlaps with the axis in the vertical direction, so that the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. This allows the second ball to roll stably. It also ensures the possibility of guiding the third ball following the second ball to the second passage.

In the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the gaming machine CA6 is characterized in that the first surface is longer than the second surface.

According to gaming machine CA6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is longer than the second surface, so that while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is easy to create a state in which the first ball rolls on the first surface at the same time. In other words, by having the weight of the first ball act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be rolled stably. It is also possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can be guided to the second passage.

A gaming machine CA7 is any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA6, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member and an axis that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface extends in a direction away from the axis.

According to gaming machine CA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines CA4 to CA6, the displacement member includes a second surface on which a second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and extends in the direction away from the axis, so as the first ball rolls toward the first path, the weight of the first ball can be effectively applied to the displacement member. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position due to the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be rolled stably. Further, it is possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can also be guided to the second path.

Any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA7 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passageway. A game machine CA8 comprising a second surface on which a ball rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially disposed with the shaft interposed therebetween.

Gaming machine CA8 has the same effects as any of gaming machines CA4 to CA7, but also includes a base member and an axis that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member has a second surface on which a second ball that is guided to a second passageway rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially positioned with the axis in between, which increases the degree of freedom in positioning the displacement member.

Any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA7 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passageway. A game machine CA9 comprising a second surface on which a ball rolls, and at least a portion of the first surface and the second surface are arranged on the same side with respect to the shaft.

According to the gaming machine CA9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the gaming machine CA9 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member has a second The second ball guided into the passage has a second surface on which it rolls, and the first and second surfaces are at least partially disposed on the same side with respect to the axis, so that the first ball rolls on the second surface. Even if the second ball is ejected from the first surface, the weight of the second ball can be used to change the position of the displacement member to a position for guiding the second ball to the second path. As a result, the length of the first surface can be shortened, and the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

Any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9 includes an upstream surface on which a ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface is arranged in a rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface. A gaming machine CA10 characterized by reversing the .

According to the gaming machine CA10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, the gaming machine CA10 is provided with an upstream surface on which the first ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, so that the time required for the first ball to stay on the first surface can be secured for the time required for the reversal. Therefore, by making the weight of the first ball act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the third ball following the second ball can also be guided to the second passage. Furthermore, the length of the first surface can be shortened, which increases the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement member.

A gaming machine CA11 is any one of gaming machines CA1 to CA10, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and an upstream surface disposed on the base member along which the ball rolls toward the first surface, and the shaft is disposed in a position perpendicular to the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface and the vertical direction.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the gaming machine CA11 has an axis that is arranged perpendicular to the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface and the vertical direction, making it possible to miniaturize the unit in which the displacement member is arranged on the base member. In particular, by arranging the base member so that the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface is aligned with the width direction of the gaming machine, the width direction of the gaming machine can be effectively utilized, making it easier to secure space for arranging the displacement member.

A gaming machine CA12 is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, characterized in that it has a base member and the displacement member is arranged on the base member so that it can be slidably displaced.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the gaming machine CA12 has a displacement member arranged on the base member so that it can slide and be displaced. This allows the displacement member to be made smaller than when, for example, the displacement member is rotatably supported on the base member, and therefore more space can be secured for arranging other members on the base member.

A gaming machine CA13, which is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA12, includes a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and an upstream surface disposed on the base member and along which a ball rolls toward the first surface, the displacement member includes a second surface along which the second ball rolls, the second ball being guided to the second passage in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is positioned vertically lower than the downstream end of the upstream surface.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the displacement member may jump up due to the impact caused by the displacement, and this jump-up of the displacement member causes the displacement member to move away from the downstream end of the upstream surface. If the upstream end of the second surface is located above, there is a possibility that the second ball may not be able to roll from the upstream surface to the second surface. In particular, when the second ball collides with the upstream end of the displaced member that has jumped up (the upstream end of the second surface), the impact causes the displacement member to further jump up (the second ball pushes up the displaced member), and the There is a possibility that the second ball may flow into the path (first surface) where the first ball should roll.

In contrast, with gaming machine CA13, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines CA1 to CA12, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is positioned vertically lower than the downstream end of the upstream surface. Therefore, when the displacement member rebounds due to the impact of being displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is prevented from being positioned higher than the downstream end of the upstream surface. Therefore, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

A gaming machine CA14 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface.

According to gaming machine CA14, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface, so that when the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, it bounces back (jumps up) due to the impact, and when the second ball collides with the upstream end of the jumped-up displacement member (the upstream end of the second surface), the force acting from the second ball on the displacement member can be made to act as a force in the direction of pushing down the displacement member. As a result, the second ball can be made to roll smoothly from the upstream surface to the second surface.

Any one of gaming machines CA1 to CA14 includes an upstream surface on which a ball rolls toward the first surface, and the displacement member rolls on the first ball guided to the first passage. a first surface, the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. when the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is farther away from the upstream surface than the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the first sphere at the position where the first surface is reversed. A gaming machine CA15 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine CA15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, it is in the position where the first surface is reversed. Since the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is set at a position farther away from the upstream surface than the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the first sphere, the second sphere may erroneously flow into the first surface ( acceptable) can be suppressed. That is, the second ball is brought into contact with the first ball to keep the second ball apart from the first surface, and the upstream surface side of the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. The second ball can be pushed away from the first surface at the end.

A gaming machine CA15, characterized in that the displacement member holds the first ball in a position that reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the weight of the first ball displaces the first ball from the predetermined position by a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine CA16.

According to the gaming machine CA16, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CA15, the displacement member reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the first ball is displaced by a predetermined amount or more from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. Since the first ball is held in position, it is possible to more reliably prevent the second ball from being erroneously introduced (accepted) into the first surface. That is, the second ball is brought into contact with the first ball to keep the second ball apart from the first surface, and the upstream surface side of the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. The operation of pushing the second ball away from the first surface at the end can be performed more reliably.

Any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16 includes an inflow section, a reciprocating surface on which a ball flowing from the inflow section rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and an outflow section that causes the ball to flow out from the reciprocating surface, and the outflow section The gaming machine CA17 is characterized in that a part is located upstream of the displacement member in the passage route.

According to the gaming machine CA17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, it is equipped with an inflow section, a reciprocating surface along which the balls flowing in from the inflow section roll so as to be displaced back and forth, and an outflow section through which the balls flow out from the reciprocating surface, and since the outflow section is located upstream of the displacement member in the passageway, the first ball and the second ball are connected with a distance of less than a predetermined amount, and it is easy for these first balls and second balls to reach the displacement member in a connected state with a distance of less than a predetermined amount. In other words, even if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when they flow in from the inflow section is greater than a predetermined amount, the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced (the distance is less than a predetermined amount) by displacing them back and forth on the reciprocating surface.

A gaming machine CA18 is characterized in that the width dimension of the reciprocating surface in the gaming machine CA17 is set to a width dimension that allows one ball to pass through.

According to the gaming machine CA18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA17, the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to a width dimension that allows one ball to pass through, so that the ball flows from the inflow portion to the reciprocating surface and reciprocates on the reciprocating surface. It is possible to suppress the first and second balls being displaced from passing each other. Therefore, when the first ball and the second ball are reciprocated on the reciprocating surface, the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be easily closed (the distance can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less). .

A gaming machine CA19 is characterized in that the reciprocating surface of the gaming machine CA18 is inclined upward as it approaches one side and the other side, and the outlet portion is located at the bottom of the reciprocating surface.

According to gaming machine CA19, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upward as it moves toward one side and the other, and the outflow section is located at the bottom of the reciprocating surface, so that the first ball and the second ball can be made to flow out from the outflow section in a state where the inertia of the reciprocating displacement on the reciprocating surface is weakened. In other words, the first ball and the second ball can be made to flow out easily while maintaining a state in which they are connected together with a gap of less than a predetermined amount.

In gaming machine CA19, gaming machine CA20 is characterized in that the reciprocating surface is formed in a linear shape when viewed from above.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA19, gaming machine CA20 has a reciprocating surface that is linear when viewed from above, making it easier to close the gap between the first ball and the second ball (to make the gap smaller than a predetermined amount) when the first ball and the second ball are displaced back and forth on the reciprocating surface.

A gaming machine CA21 is one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, characterized by having an attraction member that is formed so that the attraction force of a magnet can act on a ball and is arranged with at least its lower surface inclined downward.

According to the gaming machine CA21, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, the machine is provided with an attraction member that is formed so that the attraction force of a magnet can act on the ball and is arranged with at least its lower surface tilted downward, so that such an attraction member can form a passageway for the ball, improving the interest of the game. That is, when a ball is attracted to the downwardly tilted lower surface of the attraction member, the ball can slide by its own weight and be displaced along the lower surface of the attraction member. In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the relationship between the inertial force acting on the ball and the attraction force), an unstable state can be created in which there is a possibility that the ball will fall from the lower surface of the attraction member (i.e., the ball may not reach the end of the passageway (the lower surface of the attraction member)). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member is characterized by having a bottom surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material, and a magnet that applies a magnetic force to the bottom surface forming member.

According to the gaming machine CA22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member includes a lower surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material and a magnet that applies magnetic force to the lower surface forming member, so that the attraction member is spherical. By having a structure in which the surface on which the ball slides is formed by the lower surface of the lower surface forming member, it is easy to adjust the attraction force and optimize the frictional force, and the passage path of the ball can be reliably formed with a simple structure.

A gaming machine CA23 in the gaming machine CA21 or CA22, wherein the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage.

According to the gaming machine CA23, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the attraction member forms at least a part of the second passage, so that the interest in the game can be improved. That is, the second ball can be guided by the displacement member and reach the second passage if the second ball reaches the displacement member while being connected to the first ball with an interval of less than a predetermined distance. The probability of that happening is relatively low. By displacing the second ball that has arrived after such a low possibility in an unstable state where there is a possibility of it falling (possibility of not being able to reach the end of the bottom surface of the adsorption member), it can pass safely. It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player expect the same.

A gaming machine CA24 is characterized in that it comprises a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member in a gaming machine CA23, the displacement member comprises a first surface along which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, and a second surface along which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially disposed on either side of the shaft.

Gaming machine CA24 has the same effects as gaming machine CA23, but also includes a base member and an axis that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member. The displacement member has a first surface along which a first ball guided to the first passage rolls, and a second surface along which a second ball guided to the second passage rolls. The first and second surfaces are at least partially disposed with the axis in between, so that the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball (the position of the first surface is displaced downward), thereby displacing the position of the second surface upward. This makes it easier for the second ball rolling on the second surface to be attracted to the underside of the attraction member.

In gaming machine CA24, gaming machine CA25 is characterized in that the second surface is arranged at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine CA25, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA24, since the second surface is arranged at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction, the second surface is displaced by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. It is possible to suppress the member from being displaced toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward). Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the adsorption member.

Gaming machine CA26 is characterized in that the first surface is longer than the second surface in gaming machine CA24 or CA25.

According to the gaming machine CA26, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines CA24 and CA25, the first surface is longer than the second surface, so that while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the first ball can easily roll on the first surface at the same time. That is, while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the weight of the first ball is made to act on the displacement member, so that the displacement member is prevented from being displaced toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward) by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attraction member.
<Concept of the invention using plate members C120, C2120, and C4120 as examples>
A gaming machine CB1 is characterized in that the gaming machine has a ball passage, the passage comprising a first passage that allows the ball to move back and forth in the forward and backward directions, and a second passage that is connected to the first passage and allows the ball to pass along the left and right directions.

Here, a gaming machine including a passage member (stage) that allows a ball to reciprocate is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the game is not sufficiently interesting.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CB1, the passage includes a first passage that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction, and a second passage that communicates with the first passage and allows the ball to pass along the left-right direction. Since the game is equipped with a passageway, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CB1, when a first ball and a second ball following the first ball pass through the second path, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is The gaming machine CB2 is characterized in that a passage through which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed accordingly.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CB1, gaming machine CB2 has the advantage that when a first ball and a second ball following the first ball pass through a second passage, the passage to which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed according to the distance between the first ball and the second ball, so that the player can expect the ball to be guided to a specific passage (i.e., the distance between the first ball and the second ball will be a specific distance), which can increase the interest of the game.

In this case, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is determined by the reciprocating motion in the first passage, and the first ball and the second ball flow down from the first passage to the second passage that passes the balls in the left-right direction, making it easier for the player to visually confirm the distance between the first ball and the second ball. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine CB2, if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is less than or equal to a predetermined amount, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is less than the predetermined amount, and the distance between the first ball and the second ball is less than the predetermined amount. at least a second ball is guided to a path that is also advantageous;
The first passage is characterized by being formed so that the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced by the reciprocating movement of the first ball and the second ball. Game machine CB3.

According to gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CB2, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is equal to or less than a predetermined amount, at least the second ball is guided to a passage that is more advantageous than the passage that is guided when the distance exceeds the predetermined amount, and since the first passage is formed so that the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced by the reciprocating movement of the first ball and the second ball, it is easy to make the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage equal to or less than the predetermined amount. As a result, the player can expect to be guided to an advantageous passage, and the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine CB4 is any one of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, which is characterized in that it has a gaming board with an opening in the center, and the second passage is disposed in the opening of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine CB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines described in any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, the gaming machine CB4 includes a gaming board with an opening in the center, and the second passage is arranged in the opening of the gaming board. Therefore, the space in the front and rear directions can be used effectively. Therefore, it is possible to easily ensure the full length of the second passage.
<About the concept of the invention using magnetic parts C2400, c5400, c6400 (passage part CRt2004) as an example>
In a gaming machine equipped with a displacement member, at least a portion of which is disposed in a ball passage path and is formed to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the The displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball A gaming machine CC1 characterized in that the ball passes through an upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member and is guided to a path different from that of the first ball.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a distribution member that operates based on the weight of the gaming balls and distributes the gaming balls to a first passage and a second passage is known (JP Patent Publication 2017-148189). However, with the above-mentioned conventional technology, the balls only flow downward in the weight direction, which causes a problem in that the game is not very entertaining.

In contrast, with gaming machine CC1, when a first ball passing through the passageway reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball passes through the part of the displacement member that is lifted upward and is guided to a different path from the first ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CC1, the path through which the second ball is guided through the upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member is formed by a magnetic part that can attract the ball by magnetic force. CC2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CC1, gaming machine CC2 has the advantage that the passage through which the second ball is guided as it passes through the portion of the displacement member that is lifted upward is formed by a magnetic portion that can magnetically attract the ball, so that the ball can be caused to drop midway through the passage. This increases the interest of the game.

A gaming machine CC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CC2, the magnetic part is located above the part of the displacement member that is lifted upward.

According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CC2, since the magnetic part is located above the portion lifted upward of the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. If this is not the case, even if the second ball passes through a portion that should be lifted upward, it is possible to reliably create a mode in which the second ball is not attracted to the magnetic part.

In the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported, and a portion to which the weight of the first ball is applied and a portion to be lifted upward are located across the rotation axis. The gaming machine CC4 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine CC4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported, and has a portion on both sides of the rotating shaft where the weight of the first ball is applied, and an upper portion. Since the part to be lifted up is located at It can be easily maintained in a stable condition.
<About the concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is displaceably formed and changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is configured to allow a ball to enter the passage. A gaming machine DA1 characterized in that when a ball is hit, the ball is displaced to change the ease with which the ball enters the passageway.

A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and changes the ease with which a ball can enter the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). This prior document discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the conventional gaming machines described above have a problem in that the games are not sufficiently interesting.

In contrast, with the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced when a ball enters the passage, changing the ease with which the ball can enter the passage. Therefore, when a first ball enters the passage and it is expected that a second ball will also enter the passage, or conversely, when it is expected that the second ball will not enter the passage when the first ball has entered the passage, it is possible to focus on whether or not the second ball will enter the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

In gaming machine DA1, gaming machine DA2 is characterized in that, when a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage.

According to the game machine DA2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DA1, when a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. It is possible to make it easier for balls that follow the pitched ball (other balls that have not entered the path, subsequent balls) to enter the path. In other words, if one ball enters the passage, a situation can be created in which the following balls are likely to enter the passage in succession, and if the following ball enters the passage, the following balls Due to the ball entering the path, a state can be created in which the next following ball is likely to enter the path. Therefore, the player can expect that a chain of balls entering the aisle will occur due to the ball entering the aisle. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine DA1, gaming machine DA3 is characterized in that, when a ball enters the passageway, the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the passageway.

According to the game machine DA3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced to the side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passage when a ball enters the passage, so that the first effect is achieved. In a state where the ball has entered the passage, if it is expected that the second ball will not enter the passage, it is possible to make it difficult for the second ball to enter the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball entered into the passageway to move the ball to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway. Game machine DA4 is characterized in that it is displaced to the side where it becomes difficult.

According to the gaming machine DA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that enters the passage to move the ball to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator are not required, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

A gaming machine DA5, which is a gaming machine DA2 or DA3, is provided with a rolling member that allows a ball that has entered the passage to roll and is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and a transmission means that transmits the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member, and the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage by displacing the rolling member by the weight of the rolling ball and transmitting the displacement of the rolling member by the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine DA5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DA2 or DA3, the ball that enters the passage can roll, and a rolling member that is displaced by the weight of the rolled ball, and and a transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and the displacement of the rolling member is transmitted by the transmission means. As a result, the ball is displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passageway or to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passageway, so that while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, the ball is not allowed to enter the passageway. The displacement member can be displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage. That is, it is possible to easily maintain (for a longer period of time) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

A gaming machine DA6, which is a gaming machine DA5, includes a plurality of the rolling members.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DA5, gaming machine DA6 is equipped with multiple rolling members, which ensures a section in which the ball can roll (rolling distance), and lengthens the period during which the displacement member is displaced to the side that makes it easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage. In other words, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage.

In the gaming machine DA5 or DA6, the ball that enters the passage is rolled on the rolling member by a downward slope of the rolling member, and the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball is rotated. A gaming machine DA7 characterized in that a downward slope of the rolling member in a state in which the ball is moving is smaller than a downward slope of the rolling member in a state in which the ball is not rolling.

According to the gaming machine DA7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines DA5 and DA6, a ball that has entered the passage is caused to roll on the rolling member by the downward inclination of the rolling member, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is rolling is made smaller than the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is not rolling, so that it is possible to suppress the imparting of momentum to the ball rolling on the rolling member. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

A gaming machine DA8 is one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA7, characterized in that the rolling member returns by its own weight to the state before it was displaced by the weight of the ball.

According to the gaming machine DA8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA7, the rolling member is returned by its own weight to the state before being displaced by the weight of the ball, so that the rolling member is driven. This eliminates the need for an actuator for the actuator and a sensor for controlling the actuator, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

A gaming machine DA9 is any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA8, characterized in that it is provided with an action means that acts on the ball rolling on the rolling member.

According to the game machine DA9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DA5 to DA8, it is provided with an effect means that acts on the ball rolling on the rolling member, so that it can influence the rolling of the ball. That is, by the action of the action means, resistance can be applied to the rolling of the ball and the rolling speed can be lowered. This increases the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

In the gaming machine DA9, the action means is formed as a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface of the passage and extends in the vertical direction, and a plurality of such action means are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling surface. In the gaming machine DA10,

According to the game machine DA10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DA9, the operating means is formed as a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface of the passage and extends along the vertical direction, and rolls on the rolling surface. A plurality of balls are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball, so when the ball rolls on the rolling surface, the protrusions (acting means) come into contact with the ball, causing the ball to By adding resistance to rolling, the rolling speed can be lowered. This increases the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

On the other hand, since the protrusion (acting means) extends along the vertical direction, resistance is hardly applied to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when a ball jumps upward from the rolling surface of the rolling member, the ball can be quickly dropped downward (to the rolling surface). Therefore, even if the rolling member is displaced upward as the ball bounces upward, the rolling member can be quickly returned to the state in which it was displaced by the weight of the ball. As a result, the displacement member, which had been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the path, is moved back to its initial position (the position before the ball enters the path) by the ball bouncing up from the rolling surface. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects that result in reversion.

In the gaming machine DA10, the rolling member is characterized in that the rolling surface on which the ball rolls is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DA10, gaming machine DA11 has a rolling member in which the rolling surface on which the ball rolls is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball, so that the ball rolling on the rolling surface can be prevented from bouncing upward (vertically). This prevents the occurrence of a malfunction in which the displacement member that has been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway is returned to its initial position (the position before the ball entered the passageway) by the ball bouncing up from the rolling surface.

The rolling surface does not need to be flat, but may be undulating (a surface whose cross-sectional shape is formed by smoothly connecting arcs). In other words, the rolling surface does not need to have any steps with a height of at least 1/10 of the diameter of the ball.

A gaming machine DA12, which is a gaming machine DA10 or DA11, is characterized in that the protrusions are formed on the inner surface of the passage on both sides of the rolling surface, and the protrusions on one inner surface and the protrusions on the other inner surface are arranged in a staggered pattern along the rolling surface of the rolling member.

According to the gaming machine DA12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine DA10 or DA11, the protrusions are formed on both sides of the inner surface of the passage across the rolling surface, and the protrusions on one inner surface and the other protrusions are formed on the inner surface of the passage. Since the protrusions on the inner surface are arranged in a staggered manner along the rolling surface of the rolling member, when the balls roll on the rolling surface, the balls can easily come into contact with the protrusions. This increases the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

In any of gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that enters the passage rolls on the rolling member toward the pivotally supported part. The gaming machine DA13 is characterized by the following.

According to the game machine DA13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that enters the passage is directed toward the supported part. Since the ball rolls on the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member can be maximized in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the rolling member. That is, the displacement member can be quickly displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage when the ball enters the passage and reaches the rolling member. Therefore, if the distance between a ball that has entered the path and the ball that follows it (other balls that have not entered the path, subsequent balls) is relatively small (for example, if both balls are When the balls are flown down in succession), it is possible to make it easier or harder for the following balls to enter the passage.

In addition, as the ball continues to roll, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually reduced. In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member that was on the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage can be gradually displaced toward its initial position (the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage). This changes expectations that the ball will enter the passage, making the game more interesting.

Furthermore, when a ball that has entered the passageway falls onto the rolling member, the fallen ball can be received at a position where the displacement of the rolling member is large (a position away from the pivoted portion). Thus, the kinetic energy of the fallen ball is absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member, preventing the ball from bouncing upward. As a result, the weight of the ball can be stably applied to the rolling member, stabilizing the state of the displacement member (for example, preventing the displacement member from being temporarily displaced to a side that makes it more difficult for the ball to enter the passageway or to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passageway).

A gaming machine DA14 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DA13, a ball that enters the passage falls onto the rolling member.

According to the gaming machine DA14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DA13, the ball that enters the passage is dropped onto the rolling member, so the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is used to move the rolling member. It can be quickly displaced. As a result, the displacement member can be quickly displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passageway. Therefore, if the distance between a ball that has entered the path and the ball that follows it (other balls that have not entered the path, subsequent balls) is relatively small (for example, if both balls are Even when the balls are flown down in succession, it is possible to make it easier or harder for the trailing balls to enter the passage.

In addition, if a ball that enters a passageway member is dropped onto a member other than the rolling member (a fixed, non-displaceable member), this can easily cause damage to the other member. However, according to the present invention, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is absorbed (consumed) by displacing the rolling member, preventing damage. Therefore, the freedom of passageway design can be increased to the extent that the ball can be allowed to fall.

A gaming machine DA14 is characterized in that the ball rolling on the rolling member in the gaming machine DA13 is rolled at least to the pivoted portion of the rolling member.

According to the gaming machine DA14, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine DA13, the ball rolling on the rolling member is rolled at least to the pivotally supported part (rotating shaft) of the rolling member, so that the rolling member Compared to the case where the ball is ejected before reaching the pivoted part (rotation axis) of the ball, the effect of inertial force accompanying the ejection of the ball (the effect that the weight of the ball is no longer applied) is suppressed, It is possible to suppress the rolling member from flapping in the rotational direction. Therefore, the state of the displacement member can be stabilized (for example, the displacement member can be prevented from being temporarily displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passageway).

In any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that enters the passage is rolled in a direction away from the pivotally supported part. A gaming machine DA16 characterized by rolling members.

According to the gaming machine DA16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported on a shaft, and the ball that has entered the passage rolls on the rolling member in a direction away from the supported part. Therefore, when the ball rolls on the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member can be maximized at a later stage (when the ball has rolled beyond a predetermined amount). In other words, the timing at which the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is easier to enter the passage or the side where the ball is more difficult to enter the passage can be delayed. Therefore, when the distance between the ball that has entered the passage and the ball following it (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) is relatively large, the following ball can be made easier or more difficult to enter the passage.

In addition, as the ball continues to roll, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually increased. In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member can be gradually displaced toward the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passageway, or toward the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passageway. This changes expectations for the ball to enter the passageway, making the game more interesting.

A gaming machine DA17, which is one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA16, is characterized in that when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement member is restricted from displacing to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage.

According to the gaming machine DA17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines DA5 to DA16, the displacement member is moved to the side or passage where the ball is more likely to enter the passage when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball. Since displacement to the side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passageway is restricted, it is illegal to forcibly displace the displacement member to the side where it becomes easier for the ball to enter the passageway or to the side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passageway. can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is restricted by the rolling member, thereby restricting the displacement of the displacement member to the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage. A gaming machine DA18.

According to the game machine DA18, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is regulated by the rolling member, so that the ball does not flow into the path. Since the displacement of the displacement member to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passageway is regulated, there is no need to separately provide a component for regulating the forced displacement of the displacement member, and the transmission means can be appropriated. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure for suppressing fraud in which the displacement member is forcibly displaced.

In any of gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball fills the gap. A gaming machine DA19 that is brought into contact with the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine DA19, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball abuts against the transmission means after filling the gap, so that when the displacement of the rolling member is relatively small, the displacement of the rolling member cannot be transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means. In other words, in order to displace the displacement member to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage, it is necessary to form a displacement in the rolling member that exceeds the gap, and therefore it is difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts such as hitting the gaming machine to displace the rolling member or displacing the rolling member with a foreign object such as a wire.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine having a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that is displaceable and changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway,
The gaming machine DB1 is characterized in that the displacement speed of the displacement member is made variable.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

In contrast, with the DB1 gaming machine, the displacement speed of the displacement member is made variable, so the rate at which the ball's likelihood of entering the passage changes can be changed. As a result, the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

Gaming machine DB2 is characterized in that the displacement member in DB1 is displaced faster toward the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than toward the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage.

According to gaming machine DB2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DB1, the displacement member is faster in displacement to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than in displacement to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, so that a state where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage is quickly created, and a well-paced presentation can be provided for players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. Also, by relatively slowing down the displacement speed to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, a period of time where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage is secured, and players hoping for the ball to enter the passage can focus on whether or not the ball will enter the passage in time. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

Gaming machine DB3 is characterized in that the displacement member in DB1 is displaced at a slower speed toward the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than toward the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage.

According to gaming machine DB3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DB1, the displacement member is slower in displacement speed to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, so that it gradually increases the ease with which the ball can enter the passage, and it is possible to gradually raise the expectations of players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. Also, by quickly creating a state in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, it is possible to provide a well-paced presentation for players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member is displaced to a side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage. DB4 is characterized by this.

According to the game machine DB4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that enters the passage to move the ball to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator are not required, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
<About the concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is displaceably formed and changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage,
comprising a plurality of the displacement members,
The gaming machine DC1 is characterized in that one of the plurality of displacement members has a different displacement mode from the other displacement members.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DC1, there are a plurality of displacement members, and one of the plurality of displacement members has a different displacement manner from other displacement members in the passage, so the displacement manner of the plurality of displacement members is different from that of the other displacement members in the passage. By combining these, it is possible to greatly change the ease with which the ball enters the path. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that examples of the displacement mode include the timing of starting displacement, the displacement direction, the displacement speed, and a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine DC1, the gaming machine DC2 is characterized in that the displacement of the one displacement member is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the displacement of the other displacement member was started.

According to the game machine DC2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine DC1, the displacement of one displacement member starts after the displacement of the other displacement member starts and a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the ball does not move into the passage. It is possible to change the position at which the ease with which the ball enters the ball and the timing thereof. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine DC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DC1 or DC2, it has an upstream passage that allows the balls to flow down the passage, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is approximately parallel to the rolling direction of the balls in the upstream passage.

According to the game machine DC3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DC1 or DC2, it is provided with an upstream passageway through which the ball flows down into the passageway, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is approximately parallel to the rolling direction of the ball in the upstream passageway. Therefore, the rolling direction and rolling position of the ball rolling in the upstream passage and the displacement direction and displacement position of the displacement member can be related to the ease with which the ball enters the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball entered into the passageway to move the ball to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway. Gaming machine DC4 is characterized in that it is displaced to the side where it becomes difficult.

According to gaming machine DC4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the displacement member is displaced by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to either the side making it easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side making it harder for the ball to enter the passage, thereby eliminating the need for an actuator for driving the displacement member or a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine having a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that is displaceable and changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway,
A rolling member is provided so that the ball inserted in the passage can roll thereon,
the displacement member is displaced to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage or to a side where the ball is less likely to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member,
The gaming machine DD1 is characterized in that the rolling member is formed so that the ball can fall midway along its rolling path.

A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and changes the ease with which a ball can enter the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). This prior document discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the conventional gaming machines described above have a problem in that the games are not sufficiently interesting.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DD1, a rolling member is formed so that a ball that enters the passage can roll, and the displacement member uses the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member. , the ball is displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the path or the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the path, and the rolling member is formed so that the ball can fall in the middle of the rolling path of the ball, so the ball is Depending on the distance that the ball rolls along the rolling path, the period during which the weight of the ball is available can be varied. That is, the ease with which the ball enters the passage can be changed depending on the state of the ball rolling on the rolling member. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine DD1, the game machine DA2 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member.

According to gaming machine DD2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DD1, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, so while the ball that has entered the passage is rolling on the rolling member, it is easier for the ball following it (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) to enter the passage.

That is, when a ball enters the passage and rolls on the rolling member, a state is created in which the following balls can easily enter the passage, and when the following ball enters the passage and rolls on the rolling member, a state is created in which the next following ball can easily enter the passage. Therefore, when a ball enters the passage, the player can expect a chain reaction of balls entering the passage. On the other hand, if a ball that has entered the passage falls midway along the rolling path of the rolling member, the weight of the ball cannot be utilized, and a state in which the following ball can easily enter the passage cannot be created. This allows the player to pay attention to the rolling state of the ball (whether or not it can reach the end of the rolling path). As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DD3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DD1, it is provided with a dropping means that makes it easier for the rolling balls to drop from the rolling member when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DD1, gaming machine DD3 is equipped with a drop means that makes it easier for the rolling balls to drop from the rolling member when a predetermined number of balls or more are rolling on the rolling member, so that while a ball is rolling on the rolling member, the player can focus on whether another ball will flow down the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

Note that the displacement member in the gaming machine DD3 may be one that uses the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member to be displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway, and the displacement member may be displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway. It may be displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to be hit. In the former case, while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, there is a high possibility that another ball will further flow down into the passage, so it is difficult to determine whether such another ball will flow down into the passage or not. This makes it easier for players to pay attention to where the game is going. In the latter case, while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, it is possible to reduce the possibility that another ball will further flow down into the passage, giving the player a sense of security.

The game machine DD2 or DD3 is provided with a falling passage through which a ball that has fallen in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member passes, and the ball that has passed through the falling passage is given a more advantageous game than the ball that has passed through the passage. A gaming machine DD4 characterized in that conditions are provided.

According to the gaming machine DD4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine DD2 or DD3, a falling passage is provided through which a ball that falls in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member passes, and a passage is provided for the ball that has passed through the falling passage. Since a game condition more advantageous than that of a ball that has passed is provided, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not the ball will fall in the middle of the rolling path of the rolling member. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
<About the concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: A downwardly inclined thorn stage is reciprocally driven, and when the stage flows down along the downward slope, the thorns provide randomness to the destination. Reciprocating drive suppresses ball retention due to thorns>
A game machine equipped with a passage member in which a ball is formed to be movable, characterized by comprising a displacement means formed to be able to displace at least a portion of the passage member and impart a change to the moving direction of the ball. Machine EA1.

A gaming machine including a passage member in which a ball is movable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). This prior art document discloses a technique for reciprocating a ball along a stage (passage member). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the direction of movement of the ball changes monotonously, making the game less interesting.

On the other hand, according to the game machine EA1, since it is provided with a displacement means that is formed to be able to displace at least a part of the passage member and change the moving direction of the ball, the passage member is displaced by the displacement means. , it is possible to diversify changes in the moving direction of the ball moving through the passage member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the change in the moving direction of the ball from becoming monotonous. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine EA2, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine EA1, a means for imparting a change in the direction of movement of the ball is provided in the passage member, the passage member has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the means for imparting a change in the direction of movement of the ball is provided with a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion.

According to the game machine EA2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine EA1, the passage member is provided with a means for imparting a change in the moving direction of the ball, and the passage member is provided with a roller in which the ball is formed to be able to roll. The application means includes a plurality of protrusions projecting from the rolling part of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed in the rolling part, so that the applying means rolls the passage member (rolling part). By diversifying the changes in the direction of movement of the ball, it is possible to prevent the change in the direction of movement of the ball from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the moving direction of the ball is changed. In other words, the ball rolling on the rolling part has a relatively low moving speed, and it takes a relatively long time to move the rolling part, but the time required for the ball to move is further increased by the action received from the protrusion or recess. Can be done. As a result, the manner in which the moving direction of the ball is changed can be easily seen by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine EA3, in which the displacement means in the gaming machine EA2 displaces the passage member in a displacement direction that has at least a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling portion of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine EA3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine EA2, the displacement means displaces the passage member in a displacement direction that has at least a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling portion of the passage member. Therefore, a displacement component parallel to the rolling direction of the ball can be formed in the protrusion. As a result, it is possible to easily change the direction of movement of the ball. Furthermore, the direction of movement of the ball can be varied.

Gaming machine EA4 is characterized in that in gaming machine EA2 or EA3, the protrusions are arranged with at least an interval that allows a ball to move between the protrusions.

According to the game machine EA4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine EA2 or EA3, the protrusions are arranged with at least an interval that allows the ball to move between the protrusions, so that the ball can move through the passage member (rolling (part) can be suppressed. Therefore, in order to prevent the ball from remaining in the passage member (rolling part), it is possible to prevent the passage member (rolling part) from being displaced in a complicated trajectory or at a large displacement amount or displacement speed. . As a result, the displacement means can be simplified.
<About the concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: Adding a predetermined value after passing the stage>
A game machine equipped with a passage member in which a ball is movable, comprising a changing means for changing the ease with which a ball passes through the passage member, and giving a predetermined value to the ball that passes through the passage member. A gaming machine EB1 characterized in that it is formed so that it can be awarded.

A gaming machine including a passage member in which a ball is movable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). This prior art document discloses a technique for reciprocating a ball along a stage (passage member). However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is not possible to give the player the ability to enjoy the game of seeing whether or not the ball can pass through (whether or not it can cross the stage and reach the end), and the interest of the game is lost. The problem was that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine EB1, it is provided with a changing means for changing the ease with which the ball passes through the passage member, and is configured to be able to give a predetermined value to the ball that passes through the passage member. It is possible to provide a player with the ability to enjoy the game of seeing whether the ball can pass through the passage member (or not) (whether or not the ball can cross the passage member and have a possibility of being given a predetermined value). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine EB2 is characterized in that the change means in the gaming machine EB1 includes a displacement means for displacing at least a portion of the passage member.

According to the game machine EB2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine EB1, the changing means includes a displacement means for displacing at least a part of the passage member, so that when the ball moves through the passage member, the displacement means causes the passage member to By displacing the ball, randomness can be imparted to the direction of movement of the ball. That is, the displacement means (displacement of the passage member) functions as a means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member (crossing the passage member and obtaining the possibility of being assigned a predetermined value). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not it can cross the passage member and obtain the possibility of being given a predetermined value). . As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine EB3, in which the passage member in the gaming machine EB2 has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and the changing means has a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion of the passage member or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion.

According to the gaming machine EB3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine EB2, the passage member is provided with a rolling part in which a ball is formed to be able to roll, and the changing means is protruded from the rolling part of the passage member. Since the plurality of protrusions or the plurality of recesses provided in the rolling part are provided, randomness can be imparted to the rolling direction (moving direction) of the ball rolling on the rolling part. In other words, the protrusions and recesses can function as means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member (traversing the passage member and obtaining the possibility of being given a predetermined value). It is possible to enhance the gameplay of enjoying whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not the ball can cross the passage member and obtain the possibility of being given a predetermined value). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines EB1 to EB3, the passage member includes a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball passing through the first passage member can move, and the passage member has the predetermined value. is formed to be able to be applied to the ball passing through the second passage member, and the changing means changes the ease with which the ball passes through the first passage member, and the change means changes the ease with which the ball passes through the first passage member; A gaming machine EB4 characterized in that it is formed in such a way that the ease with which the ball passes can be varied.

According to the game machine EB4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines EB1 to EB3, the passage member includes a first passage member and a second passage formed such that a ball passing through the first passage member can move. a member, the predetermined value is configured to be impartable to the ball passing through the second passage member, and the changing means changes the ease with which the ball passes through the first passage member; Since the second passage member is formed in such a manner that the ease of passage of the ball can be varied, it is possible to determine whether the ball can pass through the passage member (crossing the passage member and reaching a predetermined value). The first passage member and the second passage member can provide the player with the ability to enjoy the game (whether or not the possibility of being granted the same can be obtained) in different ways between the first passage member and the second passage member. As a result, the gameplay can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

Examples of means for changing the ease of ball passage include the shape and attitude (tilt), the displacement mode of the passage member (type of displacement (rotation, linear displacement, curvilinear displacement, combinations of these), displacement direction, displacement speed, mode of reciprocating motion (period, amplitude), etc.), and the mode of the surface (rolling surface) of the passage member along which the ball moves (presence or absence of protrusions or recesses, mode of the protrusions and recesses (size, shape, arrangement, etc.)). In other words, when the mode for changing the ease of ball passage in the first passage member is different from the mode for changing the ease of ball passage in the second passage member, it means that at least some or all of the above-mentioned means are different between the first passage member and the second passage member.
<Concept of the invention using the lower frames E86b to E17086b as an example: Retention means for retaining balls>
Gaming machine EC1 is provided with a passage member formed to allow a ball to move, the machine comprising: a ball entry means formed to allow a predetermined value to be assigned to an entered ball; and a second passage member formed to allow the ball to move after passing through the passage member, the passage member and the second passage member being formed to allow the ball to fall midway along the ball's movement path, and the ball that has passed through the second passage member is more likely to be entered into the ball entry means than a ball that has passed through the passage member.

A gaming machine including a passage member in which a ball is movable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). This prior art document discloses a technique for reciprocating a ball along a stage (passage member). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the ball that is thrown down from a predetermined position on the stage enters the winning hole (ball entry hole) directly, so there is a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EC1, the ball entering means is formed to be able to impart a predetermined value to the ball that has entered the ball, and the second passage is formed such that the ball that has passed through the passage member can move. Since the ball passes through the passage member and moves through the second passage member, the time required for the ball to enter the ball entry means can be increased accordingly. In other words, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player can expect the ball to enter the ball entering means, thereby heightening the player's sense of anticipation. In particular, since the ball that has passed through the second passage member is more likely to enter the ball entry means than the ball that has passed through the passage member, the player feels a sense of exhilaration that the ball is about to enter the ball entry means. You can have the player hold the ball and follow the direction of the ball. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine EC1, the second passage member includes a rolling part formed so that a ball can roll, and a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling part or a plurality of protrusions recessed in the rolling part. A gaming machine EC2 characterized by having a recessed portion.

According to the gaming machine EC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine EC1, the second passage member includes a rolling part in which a ball can roll, and a plurality of protrusions or rolling parts protruding from the rolling part. Since the moving part is provided with a plurality of recesses, the moving direction of the ball when rolling on the second passage member (rolling part) is changed, and whether or not the ball can pass through the second passage member ( It is possible to provide the player with the ability to enjoy the game (whether or not he or she can cross the second passage member and obtain the possibility of the ball entering the ball entering means). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

It also makes it easier for players to see the movement of the ball. That is, while the ball rolling on the rolling part moves at a relatively slow speed and it takes a relatively long time for the rolling part to move, the action of the protrusions and recesses can further increase the time it takes for the ball to move. As a result, it is easier for players to follow the direction of the ball, and the period during which the ball can be expected to enter the ball entry means is extended, building up the player's sense of anticipation.

Amusement machine EC3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a displacement means that is configured to displace the passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball in the gaming machine EC1 or EC2.

According to the gaming machine EC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EC1 or EC2, since it is provided with a displacement means formed to be able to displace the passage member and impart a change to the moving direction of the ball, randomness can be created in the moving direction of the ball. can be granted. That is, the displacement means (displacement of the passage member) can function as means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member and reaching the second passage member. Therefore, it is possible to create a game where the player enjoys whether or not the ball can pass through the passage member (whether or not the ball can reach the second passage member, and by extension, whether or not the ball can enter the ball entry means). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Amusement machine EC4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second displacement means that is configured to displace the second passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball in the gaming machine EC3.

According to the gaming machine EC4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine EC3, it is provided with a second displacement means that can displace the second passage member and change the moving direction of the ball, so that the moving direction of the ball can be changed randomly. can be given gender. That is, as means for inhibiting or assisting the ball from passing through the passage member and reaching the second passage member, and from passing through the second passage member and entering the ball entry means, the second passage member is used. 2 displacement means (displacement of the second passage member) can function. Therefore, whether or not the ball that has passed through the passage member can reach the second passage member, and whether the reached ball can pass through the second passage member (whether the ball can enter the ball entry means or not) ) can create a fun gameplay experience. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine EC5 in the gaming machine EC4, characterized in that the manner in which the passage member is displaced by the displacement means is different from the manner in which the second passage member is displaced by the second displacement means.

According to the game machine EC5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine EC4, the manner in which the passage member is displaced by the displacement means and the manner in which the second passage member is displaced by the second displacement means are different, so that the manner in which the ball is displaced is improved. can be diversified. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the manner in which the passage member is displaced by the displacement means and the manner in which the second passage member is displaced by the second displacement means are different means, for example, the type of displacement (rotation, linear displacement, curved displacement, or a combination thereof). ), displacement direction, displacement speed, mode of reciprocating motion (period, amplitude), etc., at least in part or in whole, are different between the first passage member and the second passage member.

Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, DA1 to DA19, DB1 to DB4, A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of DC1 to DC4, DD1 to DD4, EA1 to EA4, EB1 to EB4, and EC1 to EC5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Any of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11 CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, DA1 to DD4, and EA1 to EC5 In the gaming machine Z2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Any of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11 CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, DA1 to DD4, and EA1 to EC5 In the gaming machine Z3, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
A gaming machine including a passage member in which a ball is movable is known (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-198607). This prior art document discloses a technique for reciprocating a ball along a stage (passage member).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the ball that is thrown down from a predetermined position on the stage enters the winning hole (ball entry hole) directly, so there is a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting. .
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.
<Means>
To achieve this objective, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 is equipped with a passage member formed to allow movement of the ball, and formed to be able to impart a predetermined value to the ball that enters the ball. a second passage member configured to allow the ball to move after passing through the passage member; A ball passing through the second passage member is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a ball passing through the passage member.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the second passage member includes a rolling part formed in which a ball can roll, and a plurality of balls protruding from the rolling part. A plurality of recesses are provided in the protrusion or the rolling portion.
A game machine according to technical concept 3 is the game machine according to technical concept 1 or 2, and includes a displacement means configured to displace the passage member and change the movement direction of the ball.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, and includes a second displacement means configured to be able to displace the second passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in which the manner in which the passage member is displaced by the displacement means is different from the manner in which the second passage member is displaced by the second displacement means. be.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is possible to improve the interest of gaming.
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
65b Opening/closing plate (introduction means, acceptance state changing means, part of avoidance means)
86 Center frame (open part)
141 Previous design member (part of partition means, avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 Opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Front-rear long protrusion (part of the first flow path, part of the protrusion, second protrusion, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner protrusions (part of branching means, part of protrusions, first protrusions, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right external protrusions (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of path configuration means)
330 Medium member (part of delay means, part of route construction means)
334 First flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front and rear flow path sections)
335 Second flow path configuration part (predetermined part, part of path configuration means, left/right direction path)
336 Third flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front-back direction path, front-back flow path section)
351 Light emitting means
370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of route configuration means)
600 First operation unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (support means)
616a Straight part (part of support means, first range, restriction part)
616b Curved part (part of support means, second range, restriction part)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of arrangement means)
642 Cylindrical part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Overhang decoration part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (attitude changing means)
661a 1st production surface (1st visible surface, 1st surface)
661b Second production surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decorative fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 Second operation unit (displacement means)
787a1 First main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787a2 First secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
787b1 Second main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787b2 Second secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
800 Third operation unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outside light emitting section (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of gathering part)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 First covered part (part of visible surface)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 Second covered part (part of visible surface)
C1 Color (part of arrangement means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid part (part of the arrangement means, second part)
P1 Ball (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Definite change detection sensor (part of passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)
C13 Game board
C60 base board (gaming board)
C60a opening
C122, C2122, C4122 Lower bottom part (reciprocating surface, first passage)
C122a Outflow surface (outflow part)
C123a, C4123a Notch part (inflow part)
C130, C2130 Back member (base member)
C140, C2140 First intermediate member (base member)
C142, C2142 Bottom part (upstream surface, second passage)
C144, C2144 Passage section (first passage)
C170, C2170, C3170 Distribution member (displacement member, main body)
C172, C2172 Receiving part (first side)
C172b, C2172b Bottom part (first side)
C173, C2173 Rolling part (second surface)
C2174 axis
C190 Decorative member (weight part)
C192 axis
C2300 magnet (adsorption member)
C2400, C5400 Magnetic part (adsorption member, bottom surface forming member)
COPin, COP2000in Inlet (inflow part)
CRt2 2nd passage (first passage)
CRt3 3rd passage (second passage)
CRt4 4th aisle (1st aisle)
CRt5 5th aisle (second aisle)
CRt2001 1st aisle (1st aisle)
CRt2002 2nd passage (2nd passage)
CRt2003 3rd aisle (1st aisle)
CRt2004 4th aisle (2nd aisle)
CRt2005 5th aisle (2nd aisle)
CB1 ball (first ball)
CB2 ball (second ball)
D13 Game board (gaming machine)
D131f Projection (acting means, projection)
D131fa 2nd protrusion (dropping means)
D141g Projection (acting means, projection)
D170, D3170, D8170 Rolling member
D180 Displacement member
D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 Transmission member (transmission means)
D4220 Second rolling member (rolling member)
DRt3 3rd passage (upstream passage)
DRt6 6th aisle (aisle)
DRt9 9th passage (fall passage)
E135b Central passage (ball entry means)
E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E133150, E14150, E15150 Distribution passage (passage member, first passage member)
E2150, E3150, E11150 Sorting passage (passage member)
E4150, E16150 Second distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E5150, E17150 Third distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 Projection (applying means, projection, changing means, displacement means)
E2151, E3151 Rolling surface (rolling part)
E160 Central passage (ball entry means)
E190, E4190, E5190 Drive means (change means, displacement means, second displacement means)
E2190 Elastic spring (displacement means)
E196, E196a Pinion gear (displacement means)
E196b, E196c pinion gear (second displacement means)
E5196 Second pinion gear (second displacement means)

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
65b Opening/closing plate (introduction means, acceptance state changing means, part of avoidance means)
86 Center frame (open part)
141 Previous design member (part of partition means, avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 Opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Front-rear long protrusion (part of the first flow path, part of the protrusion, second protrusion, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner protrusions (part of branching means, part of protrusions, first protrusions, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right external protrusions (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of path configuration means)
330 Medium member (part of delay means, part of route construction means)
334 First flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front and rear flow path sections)
335 Second flow path configuration part (predetermined part, part of path configuration means, left/right direction path)
336 Third flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front-back direction path, front-back flow path section)
351 Light emitting means 370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of route configuration means)
600 First operation unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (support means)
616a Straight part (part of support means, first range, restriction part)
616b Curved part (part of support means, second range, restriction part)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of arrangement means)
642 Cylindrical part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Overhang decoration part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (attitude changing means)
661a 1st production surface (1st visible surface, 1st surface)
661b Second production surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decorative fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 Second operation unit (displacement means)
787a1 First main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787a2 First secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
787b1 Second main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787b2 Second secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
800 Third operation unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outside light emitting section (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of gathering part)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 First covered part (part of visible surface)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 Second covered part (part of visible surface)
C1 Color (part of arrangement means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid part (part of the arrangement means, second part)
P1 Ball (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Definite change detection sensor (part of passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)
C13 Game board C60 Base board (game board)
C60a Opening C122, C2122, C4122 Lower bottom part (reciprocating surface, first passage)
C122a Outflow surface (outflow part)
C123a, C4123a Notch part (inflow part)
C130, C2130 Back member (base member)
C140, C2140 First intermediate member (base member)
C142, C2142 Bottom part (upstream surface, second passage)
C144, C2144 Passage section (first passage)
C170, C2170, C3170 Distribution member (displacement member, main body)
C172, C2172 Receiving part (first side)
C172b, C2172b Bottom part (first side)
C173, C2173 Rolling part (second surface)
C2174 Axis C190 Decorative member (weight part)
C192 Axis C2300 Magnet (adsorption member)
C2400, C5400 Magnetic part (adsorption member, bottom surface forming member)
COPin, COP2000in Inlet (inflow part)
CRt2 2nd passage (first passage)
CRt3 3rd passage (second passage)
CRt4 4th aisle (1st aisle)
CRt5 5th aisle (second aisle)
CRt2001 1st aisle (1st aisle)
CRt2002 2nd passage (2nd passage)
CRt2003 3rd aisle (1st aisle)
CRt2004 4th aisle (2nd aisle)
CRt2005 5th aisle (2nd aisle)
CB1 ball (first ball)
CB2 ball (second ball)
D13 Game board (gaming machine)
D131f Projection (acting means, projection)
D131fa 2nd protrusion (dropping means)
D141g Projection (acting means, projection)
D170, D3170, D8170 Rolling member D180 Displacement member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 Transmission member (transmission means)
D4220 Second rolling member (rolling member)
DRt3 3rd passage (upstream passage)
DRt6 6th aisle (aisle)
DRt9 9th passage (fall passage)
E135b Central passage (ball entry means)
E150, E6150, E7150, E8150, E12150, E133150, E14150, E15150 Distribution passage (passage member, first passage member)
E2150, E3150, E11150 Sorting passage (passage member)
E4150, E16150 Second distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E5150, E17150 Third distribution passage (passage member, second passage member)
E151, E12151, E13151, E14151, E15151 Projection (applying means, projection, changing means, displacement means)
E2151, E3151 Rolling surface (rolling part)
E160 Central passage (ball entry means)
E190, E4190, E5190 Drive means (change means, displacement means, second displacement means)
E2190 Elastic spring (displacement means)
E196, E196a Pinion gear (displacement means)
E196b, E196c pinion gear (second displacement means)
E5196 Second pinion gear (second displacement means)

Claims (5)

In a gaming machine having a passage member through which a ball can move,
A ball-striking means configured to be able to give a predetermined value to a ball that has been scored;
A second passage member in which the ball that has passed through the passage member is movable,
The passage member and the second passage member are formed so that the ball can fall in the middle of the ball's movement path,
A gaming machine characterized in that a ball passing through the second passage member is more likely to enter the ball entry means than a ball passing through the first passage member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that the second passage member has a rolling portion formed so that the ball can roll, and a plurality of protrusions protruding from the rolling portion or a plurality of recesses recessed into the rolling portion. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a displacement means configured to displace the passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising a second displacement means configured to be able to displace the second passage member and change the direction of movement of the ball. The gaming machine according to claim 4, characterized in that the displacement mode of the passage member by the displacement means is different from the displacement mode of the second passage member by the second displacement means.

Images